JP2023054021A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of increasing the interest of a game.

SOLUTION: A slot machine 10 may execute a specific performance including a rotation performance as a game performance using each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at a predetermined trigger. In an execution determination of executing the specific performance, the specific performance is executed in a first specific mode if a specific event as an abnormality of a game machine does not occur after determination to execute the specific performance is made, while the specific performance is executed in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode if a specific event as an abnormality of a game machine occurs after determination to execute the specific performance is made.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means for performing a start operation for starting orbiting each of the orbiting bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means for determining execution of a specific effect as a game effect using at least the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
a corresponding effect execution means capable of performing a corresponding effect by a predetermined effect means when the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect;
with
The corresponding effect execution means is
a first corresponding effect means for executing a first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position visible through the display unit is a specific pattern;
a second corresponding effect means for executing a second corresponding effect different from the first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is a pattern different from the specific pattern;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in Embodiment 1a. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing AT type determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start processing; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of the rotation production|presentation by each reel. It is a flow chart which shows external output setting 2nd processing. It is a flowchart which shows an external output setting 1st process. 9 is a flowchart showing timer update processing; It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. 10 is a flowchart showing preparation mode processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is a flowchart which shows an external output setting 1st process. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of AT mode start production, rotation production, and external output. 13 is a flowchart showing rotation effect processing in Modification 2. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing error notification processing, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a first process of setting an external output in modified example 3; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a second external output setting process in modification 4; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flowchart which shows rotation production|presentation processing in embodiment (beta) of 1a. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. It is a diagram for explaining the outline of the pseudo-game. It is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the AT mode start effect, the rotation effect and the external output from the relationship between the pseudo-game and the display during the pseudo-game. (a) is a diagram for explaining a modification of the execution timing of the pseudo-game in modification 1, (b) is a diagram for explaining a modification of the execution timing of the pseudo-game in modification 2 be. (a) is a flow chart showing a part of the rotation production process, (b) is a flow chart showing a part of the reel control process, and (c) to (h) execute a pseudo game during the normal game. It is a diagram for explaining the outline of the game in the case. It is a diagram for explaining a modified example of notification during pseudo-game in Modified Example 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining changes such as a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be provided in the embodiment γ of the 1ath embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for preparation modes. (a) is a flow chart showing preparation mode effect setting processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing avoidance effect setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in Embodiment δ of the 1ath embodiment. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows AT winning notification processing. 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 9 is a flowchart showing timer update processing; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main controller in the 2b embodiment α. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of battle production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the occurrence of a specific effect and the presence or absence of continuation of AT mode. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the continuation rate of AT mode and the occurrence timing of the specific effect. 10 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modification 1. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in modification 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. 14 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in Modified Example 3. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing suggestion effect setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a suggestion effect|presentation table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by the auxiliary display section in modification 5; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd specific production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows standby production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd specific production|presentation table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in embodiment (beta) of 2b. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd specific production setting processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a 3rd specific production|presentation table. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between AT mode sets and pseudo sets; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 1; It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd specific effect table at the time of an update. 13 is a flowchart showing a third specific effect setting process in modification 2; It is a figure which shows an example of an ending game number table. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a third specific effect table in modification 3; FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation in AT mode in 2b embodiment (gamma). 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows the 4th specific production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a jackpot effect game number setting process. 7 is a flowchart showing adjustment processing; It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot effect game number table and an adjustment game number table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the production|presentation of AT mode last set. Fig. 10 is a front view of the slot machine in the 3c embodiment; 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flow chart which shows AT mode lottery processing for normal. 10 is a flowchart showing AT mode lottery processing for CZ. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of precursor mode. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a figure which shows an example of the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. It is a figure which shows an example of an immediate notification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a CZ mode game number table and an omen effect game number table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first game number management process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second number-of-games management process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section transition game processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an overview of display mode transition relationships; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a game state display section and a bet display section; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing BET processing; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a replay setting process. It is a flow chart which shows medal insertion correspondence processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first operation corresponding processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second operation handling processing; It is a flowchart which shows the process for game state display parts. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a single bet effect setting process; 11 is a flow chart showing continuous bet effect setting processing. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing replay state bet effect setting processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal regame bet effect setting process; 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 4 is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state; 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the pseudo bet effect is restricted in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the starting effect and the pseudo-bet effect in Modification 2. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing of the pressing order notification effect; FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a specific replay bet effect setting process in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the pseudo-bet effect and the freeze effect; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows freeze lottery processing. 14 is a timing chart for explaining a pseudo-bet effect according to the type of bet operation in Modification 4. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific regame bet effect setting processing. 19 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing in Modification 5. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for waiting. 4 is a timing chart for explaining a temporary standby state and a standby state; 29 is a flowchart showing medal return processing in Modification 6. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows production processing at the time of return. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between credit settlement and pseudo-bet effects; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a specific regame bet effect setting process in Modification 7. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given in the 4d embodiment. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation mode when winning a special combination; 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; (a) is a flowchart showing a lottery result command setting process, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between a lottery result command and a pressing order notification command. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. It is a flow chart which shows the process for AT lottery at the time of a stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a ceiling subtraction value table and a stop transition lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timing of AT winning and CZ winning; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for the number of precursor games; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for the number of CZ games; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT game number processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a start time CZ effect setting process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing stop time CZ effect setting processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the presentation of each game during the CZ mode; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the execution timing of the stop time CZ effect setting process and the occurrence rate of the explosive effect; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a flow chart which shows a sign effect setting process at the time of start. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an indication effect setting process at the time of stop; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the difference between the displayed number of games and the actual ceiling reaching game; 13 is a flowchart showing a first stop ON effect setting process in Modification 1; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a start AT lottery process in Modification 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode that AT winning information is performed in a special role winning game. In Modified Example 3, (a) is a flowchart showing a first stop ON effect setting process, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining how a fixed effect is performed. 16 is a flowchart showing a part of AT lottery processing at the time of start in modification 4. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a prior determination process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a start time CZ effect setting process; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing navigation mode processing in Modified Example 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific alerting|reporting. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of specific information production|presentation. In Modified Example 6, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the AT game number processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop AT addition processing. It is a figure which shows an example of each addition lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a part of process for lottery for addition AT at the time of starting. It is a flowchart which shows an addition preliminary determination process. (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the effect setting process at the time of start, and (b) and (c) are diagrams for explaining an outline of the specific notification effect during AT. In the modification 7, (a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification minor combination lottery table. In Modified Example 8, (a) is a flowchart showing an advantageous zone transition lottery, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a notification minor combination lottery table. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a notification minor combination lottery in Modification 9. FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing second section display processing in Modification 10. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of transition to an advantageous section. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the operation mode and the advantage when winning a special role in the normal section. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each special role in modification 11; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the pressing order notification effect when the pressing order bell is won and the pressing order notification effect when the special role is won. It is a flow chart which shows a part of lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining processing relating to the instruction function of each special role in modification 12; It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a main controller in the 5e embodiment; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. (a) is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables, (b) is a figure which shows an example of a loop lottery table. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a flowchart which shows a continuation determination process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing processing for an add-on loop; 9 is a flowchart showing operation instruction effect setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pseudo operation instruction effect setting process; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor mode process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a selection rate of AT mode continuation rate; 4 is a flowchart showing processing for CZ mode; 4 is a flowchart showing AT mode processing; It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 9 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows specific production setting processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of confrontation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of battle production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of a specific effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 4 is a flowchart showing stepping motor control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing motor control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing rotation start processing; It is a figure which shows an example of a normal rotary table. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing first rotation control processing; It is a figure which shows an example of a special rotary table. 9 is a flowchart showing second rotation control processing; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production preparation processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 1st rotation production. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 2nd rotation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference between the rotation production|presentation by 1st rotation operation|movement, and the rotation production|presentation by limiting operation|movement. 10 is a flowchart showing rotation effect command setting processing in Modification 1. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing second rotation control processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the rotary table for a stop. It is a flow chart which shows processing for the 2nd rotation production. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for an additional loop in modified example 2. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing first rotation control processing; 9 is a flowchart showing second rotation control processing; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production command setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for rotation production. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; 14 is a flowchart showing a part of the first rotation effect processing in Modification 3. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a special effect table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit. 16 is a flowchart showing operation instruction effect setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows rotation production command setting processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a rotation effect preparation process, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of each rotation effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. 14 is a flowchart showing second rotation control processing in modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a 2nd special rotary table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. In Modified Example 6, (a) is a flowchart showing the rotation effect processing, (b) is a flowchart showing a part of the rotation effect processing, and (c) is a part of the second rotation effect processing. It is a flow chart. 14 is a flowchart showing first rotation control processing in modification 7; 9 is a flowchart showing second rotation control processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of rotation production|presentation. FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a rotation effect in Modification 8;

<Embodiment 1a>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the game result. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(e), the "white 7" symbols are stopped together on the medium line L2.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 13(f), the "WHITE 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 14(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win stop on the activated line ML, the "BAR" symbols stop on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). , "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 14(c), when the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). , ``white 7'' symbols, ``white 7'' symbols, and ``red 7'' symbols stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled, the stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled. are controlled to turn off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. In other words, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, there are reel units 31 (more specifically, reel index sensors that individually detect that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a for detecting the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The above-described CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

The external centralized terminal board 121 is connected to a hall management device (hall computer), a data display, etc. of the game hall, and is used to output information to these external devices of the game machine. As shown in FIG. 16, the external collective terminal board 121 has a game output terminal 121a for outputting information corresponding to the execution of one game, and a first BB and a second BB as a bonus state. For outputting information corresponding to the transition to the AT mode in which the operating order of the first BB output terminal 121b, the second BB output terminal 121c, and the stop switches 42 to 44 for outputting corresponding information is notified. An AT output terminal 121d is provided.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step Sa101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. At step Sa102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and when the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sa103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step Sa102, various processes after step Sa104 are performed.

That is, in step Sa104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. At step Sa105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step Sa106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step Sa107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step Sa108, a timer update process is performed to subtract/add the value of each counter or timer. In step Sa109, a counter process is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out. Note that the timer update processing in step Sa108 will be described later in detail.

In step Sa110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step Sa111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step Sa112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step Sa113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step Sa114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step Sa101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step Sa115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step Sa201, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. At step Sa202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps Sa203 to Sa212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step Sa203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step Sa204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings have been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step Sa107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 were operated during the period from the previous start waiting process to the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step Sa205 whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, the affirmative determination is made in step Sa205 on the condition that the bet number is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the bet number is "2" or "3". , affirmative determination is made in step Sa205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step Sa205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sa204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step Sa205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step Sa206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step Sa110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step Sa206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step Sa207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sa204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step Sa208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step Sa209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, the lottery process of step Sa210, the reel control process of step Sa211, and the medal payout process of step Sa212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step Sa203.

Next, the lottery process of step Sa210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa301, a random number is obtained which is used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step Sa302, a lottery table is selected for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly classified into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state includes the lottery table for the 3-bet game, A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step Sa302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step Sa302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step Sa302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step Sa303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step Sa304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step Sa301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to the random value to obtain a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step Sa305, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step Sa306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV positively determined in step Sa305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step Sa306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set at step Sa306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, at step Sa306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see Sa203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In addition, in step Sa306 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. Further, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=11 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step Sa305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step Sa307, and in the subsequent step Sa308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step Sa304 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step Sa304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step Sa305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse-pressing bell 1, and the reverse-pressing bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as the pushing order bell) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is the set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, a reduction of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. Even in the 2-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is 0. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the win flag is set in step Sa306, or when it is determined in step Sa308 that there is no judgment target to be judged, it means that the winning judgment has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step Sa309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent Step Sa310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps Sa301 to Sa308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step Sa310, a lottery result command is set in step Sa311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to allow the player to grasp the result of the win/loss determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step Sa110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step Sa312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the win flag set in step Sa306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sa312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3-bet game, in the stop information setting processing of step Sa312, stop symbol information for establishing the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step Sa313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step Sa312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step Sa313, after executing the section display first process in step Sa314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step Sa211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step Sa401, the external output setting first process is performed. The first external output setting process is a process for transmitting information such as that the game state has changed or that it will change to the hall management device or the like via the external centralized terminal board 121 . The external output setting first process will be described later in detail.

In the following step Sa402, rotation effect processing is performed. The rotation effect process is based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in the above step Sa309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step Sa310, etc., for performing the effect using the reel control during the invalid period. processing. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the following step Sa403, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step Sa106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step Sa404, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Sa405, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step Sa404 and waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set at step Sa406. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps Sa407 to Sa413 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step Sa407, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step Sa408, the number of slips of reels to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step Sa408, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step Sa409, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step Sa410, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal or not, and if they are equal, reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step Sa411. conduct. After that, in step Sa412, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step Sa413, and the process returns to step Sa404.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won on the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established in the case of winning. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, there are cases where the corresponding prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Therefore, in the case where the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor winning combination can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the upper stage cannot be stopped, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" pattern or the "ark clam" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step Sa412 that all reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step Sa414. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step Sa415. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, the second external output setting process is executed in step Sa416. The second external output setting process is a process for transmitting information such as that the game state has changed or that it will change to the hall management device or the like via the external centralized terminal board 121 . The second external output setting process will be described later in detail.

In the subsequent step Sa417, a winning result handling process is performed. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the section display second process is performed in step Sa418. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step Sa419, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step Sa212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , the medal payout process is terminated. In addition, in the start waiting process (step Sa204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step Sa415 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step Sa501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step Sa501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step Sa502.

In step Sa502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sa503.

At step Sa503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step Sa503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the subsequent step Sa504, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Sa505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step Sa506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step Sa506. At step Sa507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step Sa508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step Sa501. In subsequent step Sa509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step Sa509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sa510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step Sa505 that the 1st BB winning has not been established means that the 2nd BB winning has been established. In this case, the process advances to step Sa511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step Sa512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step Sa513, a process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step Sa514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command at step Sa514, after executing the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 at step Sa510, this bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step Sa515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, at step Sa515, it is determined whether or not any small combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and control of each reel. When winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If a winning has been established, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sa516. Then, in step Sa517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step Sa516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st to 6th small wins are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step Sa516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined at step Sa517 that it is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step Sa518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step Sa519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step Sa520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that receives the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

Thereafter, in step Sa521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step Sa519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45. - 特許庁

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a state called a non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a winning combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another winning combination when the winning combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. Also, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins can be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 23) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the second BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step Sa310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps Sa601 to Sa603, a process of grasping the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step Sa601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sa602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sa603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB and in the internal state after the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the specified number of bets. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of step Sa602 and step Sa603 is the processing of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific prescribed number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step Sa604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step Sa604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa602 or step Sa603, it is determined in step Sa604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like may occur and a normal section in which the push order notification may not occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Sa605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sa701. Then, in step Sa702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 29, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step Sa702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step Sa703. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and the latest updated value of the counters is obtained in step Sa703. Then, in step Sa704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step Sa705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step Sa701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps Sa702 to Sa705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step Sa705 that the transfer lottery is won, in step Sa706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. When a negative determination is made in step Sa705, or after the processing of step Sa706 is executed, the advantageous zone transition lottery processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step Sa604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sa606. At step Sa606, it is determined whether or not any one of the AT mode winning flag, the first AT mode flag, and the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different odds of winning additional prizes are set as the AT mode. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize, and is set when the shift to the AT mode becomes possible. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If none of the flags is set at step Sa606, AT lottery processing is executed at step Sa607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step Sa606, AT addition processing is executed in step Sa608.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step Sa607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step Sa801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter reaches 0 in step Sa802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps Sa803 to Sa808.

That is, in step Sa803, the process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step Sa804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step Sa804, at step Sa805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set at step Sa804, then at step Sa806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ have respective winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step Sa805 or step Sa806, the AT mode transition lottery process is performed in step Sa807 using the obtained transition lottery table and the lottery result of the game grasped in step Sa803. to run. Then, in step Sa808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step Sa808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step Sa802, then the AT mode winning process of steps Sa809 to Sa812 is executed. Further, when it is determined at step Sa808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, at steps Sa813 to Sa816, a process for AT mode non-win is executed.

In the process for winning the AT mode, in step Sa809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition win during the CZ mode. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps Sa810 and Sa811. That is, in step Sa810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step Sa811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sa809, or after the process of step Sa811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sa812. By such processing, affirmative determination is made in step Sa606 from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step Sa813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step Sa814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step Sa803. . As shown in FIG. 29, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, in the event that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in spite of the lottery result of a game in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is set so that the transition to the CZ mode is facilitated.

After executing the CZ mode shift lottery process in step Sa814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode shift lottery process was won in step Sa815, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. If it is CZ mode transition winning, in step Sa816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step Sa812 or step Sa816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps Sa817 to Sa820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step Sa817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step Sa817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that the AT mode transition lottery is won even though the player knows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step Sa818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step Sa817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step Sa819, a process of setting the portent flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step Sa820, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step Sa608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process executed when the AT mode winning flag or any AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games. be.

In the AT addition process, first, in step Sa901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Sa902, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialized zone flag has not been set, it is determined in step Sa903 whether or not the second AT mode flag has been set. If the 2nd AT mode flag is not set and the transition to the 1st AT mode is confirmed, or if it is in the 1st AT mode, or after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the type of AT mode is still determined ( If the AT type determination process) has not been performed, in step Sa904, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the first AT from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, in step Sa903, the second AT mode flag is set, and in a situation where the transition to the second AT mode is confirmed or in the second AT mode, an additional lottery table for the second AT is displayed in step Sa905. Execute the process to retrieve. Further, when the special zone flag is set in step Sa901, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for the special zone is executed in step Sa906.

As shown in FIG. 32, each additional lottery table has an additional winning percentage set according to the lottery result of the game. A lottery result in which it is more difficult to win in the lottery process of each game is set so that it is easier to win the extra lottery. In addition, when comparing the same lottery results, it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT than when using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the special zone than when using the special zone.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step Sa904, step Sa905 or step Sa906, an additional lottery is executed in step Sa907, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step Sa908. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, the number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed in step Sa909. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process at step Sa909, at step Sa910, a process of adding the number of additional games for this time to the AT game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step Sa910, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step Sa911, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes a process for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the add-on by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step Sa607 or step Sa608 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps Sa609-Sa613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the process for notifying the pressing order executed in steps Sa609 to Sa613, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 33(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is: In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the pressing order in steps Sa609 to Sa613 will be described.

That is, in step Sa609, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the order of pressing the bell. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step Sa610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step Sa611, according to the type of the current pressing order bell, an instruction is given to perform the pressing order notification corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor winning prizes. Control monitor 68; Then, in step Sa612, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81 , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step Sa610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sa609 that the bell is not won in the pressing order, the process proceeds to step Sa613. In step Sa613, after the AT start notification process is executed, the lottery result corresponding process is terminated.

<AT start notification processing>
In the present embodiment, when the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won is notified after passing through the portent mode, as described above. After notification of the winning of the transfer lottery is made, the AT mode is started when the lottery result of the game wins as a result predetermined as a result for starting the AT mode. . In the AT start notification process, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, based on the result of winning the AT mode start result, a notification is made to establish a winning result corresponding to the AT mode start result. This is the process to be performed.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35, at step Sa1001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any of the normal replies A to C. That is, in the present embodiment, normal replies A to C are set as results for starting the AT mode, and when it is determined that the normal reply A to C is not won in step Sa1001, the AT mode start notification is not the time to execute the AT start notification process, and the AT start notification process ends.

If one of the normal replies A to C is won, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is greater than 0 in step Sa1002. The AT preparation counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the situation after notification of winning the lottery for transition to the AT mode has already been executed, and notification of winning the lottery for the transition is performed. This is a counter that is input with a predetermined number (40) in a game played, and is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed. That is, the situation in which the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 indicates the situation in which the number of games played since the game in which the winning of the AT mode transition lottery was announced is less than 40 games. In the present embodiment, after the number of games played after the notification of the AT mode transition lottery has reached a predetermined number (40), the result for starting the AT mode is determined. The AT mode is started without waiting for , the details of which will be described later.

If the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 at step Sa1002, then at step Sa1003 a process of setting a start game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The starting game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery result of the current game is the result for starting the AT mode.

In subsequent step Sa1004, it is determined whether or not the AT mode to be started this time is the first AT mode by determining whether or not the first AT mode flag is set. If it is the first AT mode, in step Sa1005, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the push order notification corresponding to the second regame winning is performed according to the type of the normal reply this time. On the other hand, if the first AT mode flag is not set and the AT mode to be started this time is the second AT mode, in step Sa1006, according to the type of normal reply, the pressing order corresponding to the third replay winning prize is determined. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that notification is made.

As shown in FIG. 36, when the normal replay A is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right and middle→right→left, the second replay is performed. When a winning is established and the operation is performed in the order of right→left→middle and right→middle→left, a third replay winning is established. If the normal reply B is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left → middle → right, left → right → middle, the second replay winning is established, middle → When the operation is performed in the order of left→right, center→right→left, the third replay win is established. When the normal reply C is won, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of right → left → middle, right → middle → left, the second regame winning is established, left → When the operation is performed in the order of middle→right and left→right→middle, the third replay win is established.

In step Sa1005 and step Sa1006, the pressing order notification of the operation order in which the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize can be established is executed according to each of these normal replies A to C. After that, in step Sa1007, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT start notification process is terminated.

Here, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning, the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning may not be established. That is, as described above, the second replay win is achieved by stopping the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R on the activated line ML. When a prize is established (FIG. 10), the corresponding symbols on any reel are arranged so that there is a section in which the interval between symbols is 5 symbols or more. There are cases where the corresponding symbols cannot be stopped on the activated line ML. In addition, the winning of the third replay is established when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. By the way (FIG. 10), the corresponding symbols on any reel are arranged so that there is a section where the interval between the symbols is 5 symbols or more. It may not be possible to stop on the line ML. Therefore, the operation sequence for the second re-game winning and the operation sequence for the third re-game winning are associated with the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning, and both re-game winnings are established. It is set so that an event such as "No" will not occur. In other words, in the case where normal replays A to C are won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second regame winning and the third regame winning, and the second regame winning It is set so that other re-game winnings will be established even if the third re-game winning cannot be established.

The processing (step Sa1008, step Sa1009) when the AT preparation counter is 0 in step Sa1002 will be described later in detail.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed at step Sa417 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step Sa1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sa1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sa1103. That is, the processing of step Sa1101 to step Sa1103 is a processing corresponding to the processing of step Sa601 to step Sa603, it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step Sa1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa1102 or step Sa1103 and the number of bets is the specific specified number, the process proceeds to step Sa1104. In step Sa1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step Sa1105, after executing the precursor mode process, the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step Sa1104, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step Sa1106. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the CZ mode is executed in step Sa1107, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sa1106, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sa1108. If the portent flag is not set in step Sa1104 and the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sa1108, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won through the portent mode. It means the situation after and before the transition to the AT mode occurs (this situation is hereinafter referred to as "preparation mode"). If it is the preparation mode, the preparation mode processing is executed in step Sa1109, and then the winning result handling processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sa1108 that the mode is not the preparation mode, it is determined in step Sa1110 whether or not the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag are set. If any AT mode flag is set and the game is in the AT mode, the AT mode process is executed in step Sa1111, and then the winning result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sa1110, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, the preparation mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 38, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step Sa1201. Then, in step Sa1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, a process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step Sa1203.

In the following step Sa1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the mode is the portent mode based on winning the AT mode shift lottery, AT type determination processing is executed in step Sa1205. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode with different odds of winning are provided as AT modes. This is a process for determining whether to set the 2AT mode.

<AT type determination processing>
Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, AT type lottery processing is executed in step Sa1301. In the AT type lottery process, for example, depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased after the transition to the advantageous section, the number of games played after the transition to the advantageous section, etc. Alternatively, the AT mode type this time is randomly determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value for the payout rate is set, the easier it is for the second AT mode to be selected. This time, the second AT mode may be easily selected, and although the second AT mode is normally difficult to select, once the second AT mode is selected, the next AT mode is also likely to be selected. Alternatively, the second AT mode may be easily selected in a scene where the number of medals increased or the number of games played in the early stage of the advantageous section is small.

After executing the process of step Sa1301, it is determined in step Sa1302 whether the result of the process of step Sa1301 is the first AT mode. If it is the first AT mode, a process of setting the first AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sa1303, and a process of setting the first AT command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sa1304. After execution, the AT type determination process is terminated. In the display control device 81 that has received the first AT command, in the AT winning notification effect based on the AT winning notification command output set in subsequent step Sa1206, along with the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the winning AT mode is the first AT mode through the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

If it is the second AT mode in step Sa1302, the process of setting the second AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sa1305, and the second AT command is output to the display control device 81 in step Sa1306. After executing the setting process, the AT type determination process ends. In the display control device 81 that has received the second AT command, in the AT winning notification effect based on the AT winning notification command output set in subsequent step Sa1206, along with the notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery, the winning AT mode is the second AT mode through the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

In the portent mode process, after executing the AT type determination process in step Sa1205, in step Sa1206, a process of inputting 40 as a predetermined number to the AT preparation counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. As already explained, the AT preparation counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games after the announcement of the winning of the AT mode transition lottery. After that, in step Sa1207, after executing the process of setting the AT win notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this precursor mode process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the AT winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. At that time, as described above, the type of the winning AT mode is also notified.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step Sa1204 and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step Sa1208. In step Sa1208, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Sa1209, the CZ mode flag is set, and in step Sa1210, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step Sa1211, after executing a process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this precursor mode process is terminated. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

As described above, the precursor flag is cleared (step Sa1203) and the CZ mode flag is set (step Sa1209), so that the CZ mode process is executed in the next winning result handling process. On the other hand, when the precursor flag is cleared and the CZ mode flag is not set (step Sa1204: YES), the preparation mode process is executed in the next winning result handling process.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step Sa1401. In subsequent step Sa1402, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sa1401. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step Sa1403. After that, in step Sa1404, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step Sa1403, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, the AT game counter is decremented by 1 in step Sa1501. In subsequent step Sa1502, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sa1501. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, the process of clearing the AT mode flag (first AT mode flag or second AT mode flag) set in step Sa1503 is executed. After that, in step Sa1504, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. Then, in step Sa1505, the AT end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this AT mode processing ends. Upon receiving the AT end command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the AT mode has ended.

<Preparation mode processing>
In the preparation mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, it is determined at step Sa1601 whether or not the first AT mode flag is set. When the 1st AT mode flag is set, promotion lottery processing is performed in step Sa1602. In the promotion lottery process, a promotion lottery is performed to set the AT mode to be shifted this time to the second AT mode instead of the first AT mode. Specifically, a promotion lottery table (FIG. 43) is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the above-mentioned promotion lottery is executed according to the lottery result of this game and the value of the AT preparation counter. In the promotion lottery table, for example, the promotion lottery is more likely to be won in the promotion lottery if the lottery result is less likely to be won in each game, for example, the chance C is more likely to be won in the promotion lottery than the chance A is. there is Also, even in the promotion lottery based on the same chance A, it is easier to win the promotion lottery when the AT preparation counter value is 11-20 than when it is 21-40. It is set so that it becomes easier to win the promotion lottery as the number of games increases.

After executing the promotion lottery in step Sa1602, it is determined whether or not the promotion lottery is won in step Sa1603. If the promotion lottery is won, a process of setting a promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sa1604. Upon receiving the upgrade command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to notify that the AT mode to be shifted has been upgraded from the first AT mode to the second AT mode. Then, in step Sa1605, the first AT mode flag is cleared and the second AT mode flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1601 or step Sa1603, or after the processing of step Sa1605 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa1606. At step Sa1606, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT preparation counter is executed. Then, in step Sa1607, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sa1606.

If the AT preparation counter is not 0 in step Sa1607, the process proceeds to step Sa1608. At step Sa1608, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set. As already explained, the start game flag is a flag that is set in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35) when the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won in the preparation mode. If the start game flag is not set, the preparation mode processing is terminated.

If the start mode flag is set, it is determined in step Sa1609 whether or not the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning has been established as the game result of this time. As already explained, when normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the pushing order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is executed. However, in a game in which normal replies A to C are won, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize, depending on the operation timing. There is a case where the winning of the second replay or the winning of the third replay is not established, but the winning of other replays (fourth replay, fifth replay) is established. In step Sa1609, the start game flag is set, and in a game in which a second replay win or a third replay win can be established and the AT mode can be started, the second replay win or the third replay win is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not a prize has been established.

If it is determined in step Sa1609 that the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning has been established, the process advances to step Sa1610 to add 50 corresponding to the initial number of AT mode games to the AT game counter. Execute the process. As already explained, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, AT mode addition processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing. There is a case where the lottery for adding the number of games is won and the number of games to be added is input to the AT game counter.

Thereafter, in step Sa1612, the start game flag is cleared, and in step Sa1613, a process of setting an AT start command at stop as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this preparation mode process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the stop-time AT start command performs control so that the AT mode start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

When it is determined that the AT preparation counter has become 0 at step Sa1607, that is, when the AT mode transition lottery is informed that 40 games have been completed after entering the preparation mode, at step Sa1614. , determines whether or not the first AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, in step Sa1615, the process of setting the promotion command is executed. Then, in step Sa1616, a process of clearing the first AT mode flag and setting the second AT mode flag is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, if the result for starting the AT mode is not won for 40 games after shifting to the preparation mode, the AT mode to shift to is the second AT mode.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1614, or if the process of step Sa1616 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa1617. Also, when it is determined in step Sa1609 that the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step Sa1617. At step Sa1617, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Sa1618, a process of adding 50 as the number of initial games to the AT game counter is executed.

After executing the process of step Sa1618, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set in step Sa1619. If the starting game flag is set, normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode, and the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize cannot be established, the process proceeds to step Sa1620, Execute processing to clear the start game flag. Then, in step Sa1621, it is determined whether or not the second AT mode flag is set, and if the first AT mode flag is set instead of the second AT mode flag, in step Sa1622, various flag storage areas 106d are stored. After executing the processing for setting the first freezing flag at start, the preparation mode processing is terminated. The first freeze flag at start is a flag for performing the first rotation effect of stopping the symbol combination for the second replay winning prize on the activated line ML in the rotation effect processing (step Sa402) at the start of rotation of the next game. be. Although the rotation effect processing will be described in detail later, even if the second replay winning prize cannot be established as a result of starting the first AT mode by the first rotation effect, the first AT mode starting process is performed. As a result of the above, it is possible to notify the winning as a performance, and it is possible to give an impression that the first AT mode is started based on the winning as a result for starting the first AT mode.

If the start game flag is not set in step Sa1619 and 40 games in the preparation mode have been completed, or if the second AT mode flag is set in step Sa1621 and the preparation mode of the second AT mode is normal reply A ~ If C is won and the third re-game winning cannot be established, the process of setting the second start freeze flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sa1623, and then this preparation. Terminate mode processing. The freeze flag at the second start is a flag for performing the second rotation effect of stopping the symbol combination that results in the third replay winning prize on the activated line ML in the rotation effect processing (step Sa402) at the start of rotation of the next game. be. Although the rotation effect processing will be described in detail later, even if the third replay winning prize cannot be established as a result of starting the second AT mode by this second rotation effect, the second AT mode starting process is performed. As a result of (1), it is possible to notify the winning as a performance, and it is possible to give an impression that the second AT mode is started based on the winning as a result for starting the second AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step Sa314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step Sa1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step Sa1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step Sa1702.

At step Sa1702, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step Sa1703. Then, in step Sa1704, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step Sa1705, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step Sa1706, the advantageous section transition processing is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is suggested. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step Sa1706, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step Sa1707.

If it is determined in step Sa1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step Sa1708 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step Sa1708, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step Sa1702 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after executing the display start processing in step Sa1707 or after executing the display continuation processing in step Sa1708, either is set or not. If it is determined at step Sa1709 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then at step Sa1710 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined that any AT mode flag is set in step Sa1709, in step Sa1711, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step Sa1710 or step Sa1711, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step Sa1712. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step Sa1713, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step Sa1712 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step Sa1713, the result of the arithmetic processing in step Sa1712 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display unit 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step Sa1713, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step Sa1712. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step Sa418 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step Sa1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step Sa1802, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the following step Sa1803, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step Sa1803, on the condition that the game result of this game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step Sa1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step Sa1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in subsequent step Sa1805. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step Sa1806, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step Sa1807. In the following step Sa1808, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step Sa1809, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is executed.

Regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step Sa1809, specifically, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

After executing the processing of step Sa1809, the output state of the AT output terminal 121d on the external common terminal board 121 is checked in step Sa1810, and if the AT output terminal 121d is in the ON state, it is set to the OFF state. After executing the process for displaying the section, the second section display process ends. The AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when the AT mode is started, and is turned OFF when the AT mode ends, thereby being connected to the slot machine 10 via the external common terminal board 121. This is for outputting AT information corresponding to the AT mode (the number of AT mode transitions) to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer. By turning ON the AT output terminal 121d, the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d becomes a HI signal (high output state). The signal output from is a LOW signal (low output state). The data display device, hall computer, etc. connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal plate 121 can switch the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d from the LOW signal to the HI signal for AT. It grasps that the output terminal 121d has been turned on, and grasps that the shift to the AT mode has occurred. In addition, the signal output from the AT output terminal 121d is switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, thereby grasping that the AT output terminal 121d has been turned OFF, and grasping that the AT mode has ended. The processing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step Sa1806 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step Sa1811, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step Sa1807 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, at step Sa1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, the received command is stored in the RAM 183 at step Sa1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1901, or after the processing of step Sa1902 is executed, it is determined in step Sa1903 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set at step Sa206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step Sa1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1903, or if the process of step Sa1904 has been executed, it is determined in step Sa1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step Sa311 of the lottery process, the lottery result corresponding There are precursor commands, addition commands, push order notification commands, ceiling commands, etc., which are set in the process (FIG. 27) and the first section display process (FIG. 44). In the case of these start time commands, the start time effect setting process is executed in step Sa1906.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1905, or after the process of step Sa1906 is executed, it is determined in step Sa1907 whether or not the newly received command is a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step Sa1908, at step Sa1908, each stop operation time effect setting process for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa1907, or after the processing of step Sa1908 is executed, it is determined in step Sa1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a winning result set in step Sa419 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to commands, the first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, which are set in bonus state processing (Fig. 24), winning result handling processing (Fig. 37), and section display second processing (Fig. 45), There are a second BB end command, an AT win notification command, a CZ start command, a first AT command, a second AT command, a CZ end command, an AT end command, a promotion command, an AT start command at stop, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, the all-stop effect setting process is executed in step Sa1910.

When a negative determination is made in step Sa1909, or after the processing of step Sa1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step Sa1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step Sa1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step Sa1911, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step Sa1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa2001, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step Sa2002 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step Sa2003, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

In step Sa2001, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step Sa2004 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning the specific role. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game. Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIG. 29, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results, and as shown in FIG. In the AT mode additional lottery triggered by these lottery results, the additional lottery is set to be more likely to be won than by other lottery results. When the lottery result of the game this time is a winning of a specific combination, a process of setting a specific combination notification effect is executed in step Sa2005. In the setting processing of the special role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role information that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above special roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

When a negative determination is made in step Sa2002 or step Sa2004, or after executing the process of step Sa2003 or step Sa2005, the process proceeds to step Sa2006. At step Sa2006, it is determined whether or not an add command has been received. When the addition command is received, the setting processing of the addition effect is executed in step Sa2007. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may include a so-called additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2006, or after the processing of step Sa2007 is executed, it is determined in step Sa2008 whether or not a precursor command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won and the omen mode is set, the sub-side omen counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step Sa2009 indicates the number of omen games. Execute the process to enter the corresponding value. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main controller 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode. mode.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2008 or after the processing of step Sa2009 is executed, it is determined in step Sa2010 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step Sa2011. Then, in step Sa2012, a process of setting an effect for the portent mode according to the value of the sub-side portent counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

If the negative determination in step Sa2010, or after executing the process of step Sa2012, the process for AT start is executed in step Sa2013, the process for rotation effect is executed in step Sa2014, and the other in step Sa2015 After executing the effect setting process at the start, the present effect setting process at the start ends. In step Sa2015, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do. The AT start processing and rotation effect processing will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step Sa1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 46) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the AT winning notification command, the CZ start command, the first AT command, the second AT command, the CZ end command, the AT end command, and the promotion command. This is a process for setting effects in the case of a full-stop command such as a command or an AT start command at stop.

In step Sa2101, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, in step Sa2102, the process of setting the sub-side CZ flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in step Sa2103, the CZ start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2101, it is determined in step Sa2104 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed in step Sa2105, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sa2106 Execute the process. For example, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the CZ end effect is set to notify that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode has become 0 and the CZ mode has ended. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effects for the CZ mode are different from those in the normal mode, for example, in the background color, appearing characters, etc., so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2104, it is determined in step Sa2107 whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received. If the AT winning notification command is received, the process of setting the preparation mode flag to the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step Sa2108, and it is determined whether or not the first AT command is received in the subsequent step Sa2109. . If the first AT command is received, after executing the process of setting the sub-side first AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step Sa2110, the process of setting the AT winning notification effect is executed in step Sa2112. do. On the other hand, if the first AT command has not been received in step Sa2109 but the second AT command has been received, then in step Sa2111 processing is executed to set the sub-side second AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Then, in step Sa2112, the process of setting the AT winning notification effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 53(a), for example, the AT win notification effect is set with an effect of notifying that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery and the type of AT mode that has been won. As an effect for notifying the type of AT mode, for example, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 may be changed (red for the first AT mode, blue for the second AT mode). A character corresponding to the type may be displayed (a first AT character for the first AT mode, and a second AT character for the second AT mode). Further, the CPU 181 sets the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect for the preparation mode in each game in which the preparation mode flag is set. The performance for the preparation mode is made different so that the player can distinguish between when the sub-side first AT mode flag is set and when the sub-side second AT mode flag is set. If the sub-side first AT mode flag is set, for example, as shown in FIG. If so, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), a character display such as "Preparing for AT" is displayed. 53(b) and FIG. 54(b) show different background colors by different hatch settings.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2107, it is determined whether or not a promotion command has been received in step Sa2113. If the upgrade command has been received, the sub-side first AT mode flag is cleared and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set as described above in step Sa2114. Then, in step Sa2115, the process of setting the promotion effect is executed. As for the promotion effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), a effect in which a male character raises a roar is set. By clearing the sub-side first AT mode flag and setting the sub-side second AT mode flag as described above, the production during the preparation mode is changed from the production shown in FIG. The effect is switched to that shown in FIG. 54(b).

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2113, it is determined in step Sa2116 whether or not the stop AT start command has been received. When the stop AT start command is received, at step Sa2117, the preparation mode flag is cleared, and at step Sa2118, the effect setting process for performing the AT start effect at the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. do. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. Note that the AT start effect differs to the extent that the player can identify it according to the type of AT mode to be started. For example, the background and effect sound are set differently.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2116, it is determined in step Sa2119 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command has been received, the sub-side first AT mode flag and the sub-side second AT mode flag are cleared in step Sa2120, and the AT end effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sa2121. Executes the effect setting process for performing in . For example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the AT end effect is a display indicating that the AT mode is ending (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of games played in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

After executing the processing of step Sa2103, step Sa2106, step Sa2112, step Sa2115, step Sa2118 or step Sa2121, or after making a negative determination in step Sa2119, other effect setting processing at the time of all stop is executed in step Sa2122. After that, the effect setting process at the time of all stop ends. In step Sa2122, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

<AT start processing>
Next, the AT start process executed in step Sa2013 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT start process, if the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won during the preparation mode, an operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish the second regame win or the third regame win. This is a process for

That is, in step Sa2201, it is determined whether or not the preparation mode flag is set. If the preparation mode flag is not set, the AT start processing is terminated. If the preparation mode flag is set, the preparation mode effect is set in step Sa2202. As described above, the effects shown in FIGS. 53(b) and 54(b) are set as preparation mode effects. In the situation where the preparation mode effect of b) is set and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set, the preparation mode effect of FIG. 54(b) is set.

In the following step Sa2203, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply A to C winning. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the AT start processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, as already explained, when normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode, the main controller 101 outputs a push order notification command. Therefore, when the normal reply A to C is won at step Sa2203, it is determined at step Sa2204 whether or not the sub-side first AT mode flag is set, and the sub-side first AT mode flag is set. In this case, in step Sa2205, a process for setting the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second re-game winning to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the pressing order notification command is executed. After that, the AT start processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the sub-side first AT mode flag is not set and the sub-side second AT mode flag is set, then in step Sa2206, the third replay winning prize is determined based on the above-described pressing order notification command. After executing the processing for setting the corresponding pressing order notification effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, the AT start processing is ended.

As the pressing order notification effect set in step Sa2205 and step Sa2206, the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning is notified, and the symbol for the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning are displayed. An effect is set to notify the winning symbols. For example, in step Sa2205, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the second re-game winning is notified, and when the second re-game winning is established, the middle line L2 is displayed. The auxiliary display section 65 is set to perform an effect for notifying the symbols (“White 7” symbol-“White 7” symbol-“White 7” symbol) to be stopped at the time. Also, for example, in step Sa2206, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display section 65 is set to perform an effect for notifying the symbols ("White 7" symbol-"White 7" symbol-"Red 7" symbol) to be stopped on the line L2. It should be noted that instead of the symbol to stop on the middle line L2, it may be configured to notify the symbol to stop on the active line ML. ” symbol-“cherry” symbol, and in the case of the third replay win, “white 7” symbol-“white shell” symbol-“BAR” symbol. In these cases, the line (the medium line L2 or the effective line ML) on which the notified symbol should be stopped may be notified together.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the advantageous section or the number of ceiling games is reached and the right to transition to the AT mode is acquired, the AT winning notification effect (Fig. 53 ( a)) is executed, and notification is made to the effect that the right has been acquired. When normal replays A to C are won as a result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, an operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize (Fig. 56), and the second replay When a game win or a third replay win is established, the AT mode is started. By doing so, the transition to the AT mode requires the intervention of the player's operation, and compared to the configuration that is completed only on the gaming machine side, the interest in the game is preferably improved. In particular, the right to shift to the AT mode obtained by a lottery or the like is exercised by the player's own stop operation to start the AT mode, and the pattern corresponding to the lottery result is stopped on the activated line ML based on the player's operation. It is possible to make full use of the real pleasure of the slot machine, such as obtaining a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery, in the AT mode.

Here, in the preparation mode, when the pressing order bell is won, the pressing order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is executed, and an additional lottery according to the lottery result is performed. and the promotion lottery from the 1st AT mode to the 2nd AT mode is also performed. Although there is a feeling of wanting to play a game that is established, it is also considered that the player wants to continue the preparation mode as long as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of continuous games in the preparation mode, and when the upper limit number of games (40 games) is reached, AT It is configured to start the mode. Therefore, a configuration for starting the AT mode when the preparation mode reaches the upper limit number of games will be described below.

<Rotation effect processing>
First, the rotation effect processing (step Sa402) in the reel control processing (FIG. 22) on the main controller 101 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa2301, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first start freeze flag and the second start freeze flag are set in the game in which the AT preparation counter becomes 0 in the preparation mode processing (FIG. 42), and in the normal reply A to C winning games in the preparation mode. This flag is set when the 2nd re-game win or the 3rd re-game win is not established (step Sa1622, step Sa1623). If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is.

If any of the start freeze flags is set, it is determined in step Sa2302 whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is normal reply A to C winning. In other words, the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode when the AT preparation counter is 0, or the game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize was not established in the normal reply A to C winning games in the preparation mode It is determined whether or not the lottery result of the next game is normal reply A to C winning. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the process advances to step Sa2303 to execute a process of setting a rotation effect command as an output target to the display control device 81. The rotation effect command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to grasp that the start of the AT mode is notified by performing the rotation effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step Sa2304, a process of grasping the symbol positional relationship of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. As already explained, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided with a reel index sensor. Based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor, the number of excitation pulses output to rotate the reel, etc., It is possible to grasp the symbol position that is stopped (previous stop).

Then, in step Sa2305 it is determined whether or not the freeze at the first start is set, and if it is set, in step Sa2306, based on the symbol position grasped in step Sa2304, 2 seconds later ( The reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotated at a low speed (first rotation speed) in a state where the symbols for the second replay prize are aligned after the first period). Set the acceleration of More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the second replay symbol ("white 7" symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the second replay symbols ("white shell" symbol, "cherry" symbol) on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the positive direction, and the left reel 32L, which serves as the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the separated pattern number between the second re-game pattern of the middle reel 32M and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is a pattern, and the separation pattern between the second re-game pattern of the right reel 32R and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set to rotate by the number of symbols including the b symbol. After 2 sec later, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed after the symbol combination that results in the second replay winning prize is rotated.

When the freeze flag at the first start is not set at step Sa2305 and the freeze flag at the second start is set, at step Sa2307, based on the design position grasped at step Sa2304, 2 sec The reels 32L, 32M rotate at a low speed (first rotation speed) in such a state that the symbols for the third replay winning prize are aligned after (after the first period). , 32R. More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the third replay symbol ("white 7" symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the third replay symbols (“white shell” symbol, “BAR” symbol) on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the positive direction, and the left reel 32L, which serves as the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the separated pattern number between the second re-game pattern of the middle reel 32M and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is a pattern, and the separation pattern between the second re-game pattern of the right reel 32R and the second re-game pattern of the reference reel is Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set to rotate by the number of symbols including the b symbol. After 2 seconds, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed after the symbol combination that results in the third replay winning prize rotates.

After executing the process of setting the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in step Sa2306 or step Sa2307, all reels are started to rotate in step Sa2308, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is based on the set acceleration. , to drive and control the corresponding stepping motor. Then, in step Sa2309, a process of inputting 1879, which is a value corresponding to the second period (2.8 sec) longer than the first period (2 sec), to the rotation counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The rotation counter is a counter that is decremented by one each time the timer update process (step Sa108) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) is activated.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate according to the acceleration set for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and as shown in FIG. After 2 seconds, the symbol combinations for the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are completed, and in this state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a low speed.

In the following step Sa2310, the process waits until the rotation counter input in step Sa2309 becomes zero. It should be noted that the timer interrupt process and the normal process (FIG. 18) including the rotation effect process are processes that are activated independently of each other, and even while waiting in step Sa2310, the timer interrupt process can execute the subtraction process of the rotation counter. At step Sa2310, affirmative determination is made because the revolution counter becomes zero.

After the first period (2 sec) has passed since the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in step Sa2308, the symbol combination to become the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is aligned and rotates at a low speed. , and when the second period (2.8 sec) has passed after the process of step Sa2309 is executed and the determination in step Sa2310 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step Sa2311. In step Sa2311, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the symbol combination that results in the second regame winning or the third replay winning after 0.2 sec (third period) from the current time stops at the active line ML. A process for setting the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Then, in step Sa2312, the stepping motors corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and 32R are driven and controlled based on the acceleration set in step Sa2311 to stop the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Thereafter, in step Sa2313, a process of inputting 134, which is a value corresponding to the third period (0.2 sec), to the rotation counter is executed. Wait until it becomes 0.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 58(c), the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is stopped on the activated line ML. The stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the rotation effect is distinguished from the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in step Sa411 of the reel control process. Therefore, in the following description, the stopping of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the spinning effect is also referred to as a temporary stop.

When 0.2 sec (third period) has passed since the process of step Sa2313 was executed, that is, after a total of 3 sec (fourth period) has passed since all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating, the effective When the symbol combination that results in the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is temporarily stopped on the line ML, an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2314 and the process proceeds to step Sa2315. In step Sa2315, a process of setting an AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command at the time of starting controls such that the AT start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In step Sa2316, a process of inputting 3355, which is a value corresponding to the fifth period (5 sec), to the rotation counter is executed, and in subsequent step Sa2317, the rotation counter input in step Sa2316 becomes zero. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are also maintained in the temporarily stopped state (FIG. 58(d)).

When 5 seconds (fifth period) have passed since the process of step Sa2316 was executed, that is, 5 seconds have passed since the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize was temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. If so, an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2317 and the process proceeds to step Sa2318. In step Sa2318, a process of clearing the freeze flag at the first start and the freeze flag at the second start is executed, and then the rotation effect process is terminated. In this case, rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in the rotation start process (FIG. 58(e)) which is started following the rotation effect process in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In other words, if 40 games have been played without winning normal replays A to C in the preparation mode, or even if normal replays A to C have been won, the 2nd replay winning prize or the 3rd replay winning prize can be established. If it is not possible, when the next game is started, a rotating performance is generated in which the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is stopped on the effective line ML. In addition, in the following explanation, the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are established in the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode when the AT preparation counter is 0, and in the normal reply A to C winning game in the preparation mode. The game next to the game not played is referred to as the target game of the rotation effect.

In the rotation production process, in step Sa2302, if the lottery result of the target game of the rotation production is normal reply A to C winning, in step Sa2319 it is determined whether the AT preparation counter is greater than 0, Is the freeze flag set at the start set when the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is not established in the normal reply A to C winning game in the preparation mode, or When the AT preparation counter becomes 0, it is determined whether it has been set. If it is set when the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is not established in the normal reply A to C winning game in the preparation mode, the process proceeds to step Sa2303, and the rotation effect is executed. process. On the other hand, when the freeze flag at the start is set by the AT preparation counter becoming 0, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. In other words, when the lottery result of the game in which the preparation mode reaches the upper limit number of games and the rotation effect is executed is the normal reply A to C winning, the above rotation effect does not occur at the start of the current game.

In this case, in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35), an operation instruction notification for establishing the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize in the current game is performed. That is, in the process for AT start notification, the lottery result of this game is normal reply A ~ C winning (step Sa1001: YES), if the AT preparation counter is 0 (step Sa1002: NO), to step Sa1008 Then, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If any of the freeze flags at the start is set and the lottery result of the game that is the target of the rotation effect by reaching the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is normal reply A to C winning, affirmative in step Sa1008 Then, in step Sa1009, a process of clearing the corresponding start-time freeze flag is executed. Then, the process advances to step Sa1003 to execute processing for setting a start game flag, and executes processing for notifying an operation instruction from step Sa1004 onward.

In other words, when the AT preparation counter becomes 0 and the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode starts spinning, the symbol combination that results in the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML. When the lottery result of the next game is normal replay A to C winning, the rotating performance is not generated, and the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize are aimed as usual. It is configured to be operated by By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the AT mode has been started by the user's own operation.

On the other hand, if normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode and the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize cannot be established, the lottery result of the game next to the game in question will be normal. Even if a reply A to C is won, a rotating performance is generated to temporarily stop the pattern combination for the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize on the effective line ML, and the AT mode is started. I am trying to let This is because the player who is playing the slot machine 10 cannot achieve the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning in the previous game. This is because it is considered that the player is not good at performing operations aiming at winning the third replay. In other words, if the player were to aim for the second replay win or the third replay win in the game following the game in which the win was not established, such a player would be subjected to an unfamiliar operation again. It becomes a forced configuration, which may lead to a significant decrease in the desire to play. In that respect, as described above, if the 2nd replay winning prize or the 3rd replay winning prize cannot be established, even if the normal reply A to C is won in the next game, By adopting a structure for performing a rotation effect, it becomes a structure in which weak operations are compensated for by the rotation effect, and it is possible to provide a game that matches players with various skill levels.

By the way, as described above, even if the lottery result of the next game after completing 40 games in the preparation mode is a normal reply A to C winning, and the execution of the rotation effect is restricted, it is already for the preparation mode. Since the process for starting the AT mode is executed in steps Sa1607 to Sa1623 of the process, the second replay winning and the third replay winning are established in the game in which the execution of the rotation effect is restricted. AT mode is started even if it cannot be activated. By doing so, the upper limit of the preparation mode is set such that the AT mode is not easily started while giving the opportunity to establish the winning result for the AT mode start by one's own operation as described above. so as not to obliterate its significance.

<Rotation effect processing>
As the effect setting process for performing the rotating effect, the rotating effect process executed in step Sa2014 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 47) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sa2401, it is determined whether or not a rotation effect command has been received. The rotation effect command is a command output at the start of the rotation effect in the rotation effect process (FIG. 50) as described above. When the rotation effect command is received, the process of clearing the preparation mode flag is executed in step Sa2402. Then, in step Sa2403, a process of setting so that the rotation effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In the rotating effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), a female character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 so that the player can understand that the rotating effect will be executed by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The production is set to display the appearance of happily shouting "I'm going!"

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2401, or after the process of step Sa2403 is executed, it is determined in step Sa2404 whether or not an AT start command has been received. The AT start command at the time of starting is output when the pattern corresponding to the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize in the rotating effect temporarily stops on the activated line ML in the rotating effect processing (FIG. 50) as described above. command. When the AT start command is received at the time of starting, in step Sa2405, a process for setting the AT start effect at the time of starting to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. In step Sa2405, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the first rotation effect is executed based on the sub-side first AT mode flag and the sub-side second AT mode flag set in the various flag storage area 183a. If so, an effect for notifying that the first AT mode is started is set, and if the second rotation effect is being executed, an effect for notifying that the second AT mode is to be started is set. . If a negative determination is made in step Sa2404, or after the process of step Sa2405 is executed, the rotation effect process is terminated.

In this case, as described above, in the rotating effect process, after the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning are temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the state is set to be maintained for 5 seconds. are doing. In other words, in a state in which the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is temporarily stopped in the rotation effect, it is possible to perform the AT start effect at the time of starting, and to start the AT mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of giving the player an impression associated with the stop roll. Moreover, by setting a period for maintaining the state in which the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize are temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the rotating performance is started and then the rotating performance is set. is completed and the rotation start process (step Sa403) as a normal game is executed is longer than the wait period (4.1 sec) set in each game. That is, in step Sa2309 in the rotation effect, 3 sec is set from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the temporary stop of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R. , 32R are temporarily stopped for 5 seconds, the period from the start of rotation to the rotation start process (step Sa403) in the rotation effect becomes 8 seconds, which is longer than the wait period (4.1 seconds). By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the rotation effect similar to a normal game, and it is possible to suitably secure the effect time for performing the AT start effect at the time of starting.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT mode is started via the preparation mode. Since the AT mode is started when winning can be established as a result of starting the AT mode, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the intervention of the player is required when starting the AT mode. Moreover, since the AT mode is started as a result of the game, the AT mode is started by luck of the player, and the impression is that the AT mode is not a game in which the game machine side advances the AT mode unilaterally. strengthened. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game is favorably increased.

On top of that, in the preparation mode, the push order notification when the push order bell is won is performed, and the AT mode promotion lottery and additional lottery are performed, so the result for AT mode start is not won in the preparation mode It is advantageous for the player to continue the preparation mode for a long time. As a result, the player wants the preparation mode to continue for a long time, and the player feels that winning the result for starting the AT mode as described above is unfortunate, which hinders the increase in attention to the game. It can be considered that Therefore, in the present embodiment, a continuation upper limit is provided for the preparation mode, and when the upper limit is reached, the AT mode is started even if the result for starting the AT mode is not won. It is possible to prevent the range of change in the degree of advantage due to continuity from becoming too large, and to encourage the player not to unfortunately perceive winning the result for starting the AT mode before the upper limit of the preparation mode. .

Here, the probability of winning the result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode is the probability of winning one of the normal replies A to C, which is about 1/8.86. In other words, the denominator of the winning probability of the result for starting AT mode is set to be smaller than the number of games that can be continued in the preparation mode. It is set to be elected to Lips A to C. With such a balance, although it is desired to continue the preparation mode for a long time, basically it is rare to reach the continuation upper limit in the preparation mode, and it is possible to win the result for starting the AT mode on the way. It is possible to make a game based on the premise. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the game aiming at winning as a result for starting the AT mode, without making the player think that winning the result for starting the AT mode is not so unfortunate.

Moreover, when the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, not only the AT mode is simply started, but also the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning for the AT mode start by the rotating effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, even if the player's luck and participation elements are pseudo, the configuration is embodied by the rotation performance, and the AT mode is started by the player's own operation. It is possible to enjoy the effect of the game even when the preparation mode reaches the upper limit.

In addition, when the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, the second AT mode is started instead of the first AT mode even if the promotion lottery is not won, and the second AT mode is started in the second rotation performance. Because the configuration is embodied by the above, the regret of reaching the upper limit as described above is offset, and the impression that you have won the second AT mode by your own operation is strengthened, and you start AT mode with the best feeling. It is possible to

Here, among normal replies A to C as a result for starting AT mode, especially for normal reply A, the winning probability varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process, and the higher the setting, the harder it is to win. (See, for example, FIG. 20). That is, the probability of winning as a result of AT mode start in the preparation mode is set to be lower as the setting is higher, and the probability of reaching the upper limit of the preparation mode is also lower as the setting is higher, and as a result, the second AT mode The higher the setting, the higher the ratio set to . In this case, if you win normal reps A to C when the upper limit is reached, the execution of the rotation effect is restricted. It is possible to say In other words, the higher the setting, the easier the rotation performance is executed, and a game in which the set value is predicted using the rotation performance as an index can also be realized. Furthermore, the higher the setting, the easier it is to execute the spinning effect in which the game progress of the normal game is restricted. It is also possible to effectively suppress a rapid rise in the number of balls paid out by a spinning effect.

In the case where the result for starting the AT mode is won during the preparation mode, the winning result for starting the AT mode can be established by the player's operation as described above. Winning may not be established as a result of starting the AT mode. In that case, for example, there is a possibility that an act of trying to enjoy the benefit of reaching the upper limit is performed by not establishing a winning as a result of starting the AT mode. In this respect, in the present embodiment, if the result for starting the AT mode is won, and if the result for starting the AT mode does not result in winning, the AT mode is started in the next game in which the winning did not occur. Since it is configured, it is possible to preferably avoid the act of not starting the AT mode until the upper limit is reached, and even in such a case, the AT mode is started with a rotating effect. As a result, there is no event in which the AT mode is started without stopping (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode, and the AT mode is started by the player's intervention. You can try not to dilute the quotes that are given.

And, as described above, since the start of the AT mode and the stop (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for the start of the AT mode are set as a set, in order to start the AT mode , The contents of the performance when the AT mode is started are unified, and the AT mode is started in spite of the fact that the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode is not stopped (temporarily stopped). There is no By doing this, the start of the AT mode becomes easy to understand visually, and even though the AT mode has not started, the winning rate of the 1st minor role to the 6th minor role winning rate at the time of winning the bell in the pressing order Even if a fraudulent act such as intentional increase is performed, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall to identify it easily.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the AT mode is started from the slot machine 10 via the external common terminal board 121 in combination with the stop (temporary stop) of the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode. It is configured to output information. Such a configuration will be described below.

<External output setting second process>
First, the external output setting second process executed in step Sa416 of the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second external output setting process is a process that is executed when it is determined that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the reel control process (step Sa412: YES). is also a process performed first.

In step Sa2501, it is determined whether or not the output state of the first BB output terminal 121b or the second BB output terminal 121c in the external common terminal board 121 is ON. The output terminal 121b for the first BB is turned ON when shifting to the first BB state, and is for outputting information indicating that the state has shifted to the first BB state to an external device connected to the game machine. is. Further, the output terminal 121c for the second BB is turned ON when shifting to the second BB state, and is used to output information indicating that the state has shifted to the second BB state to an external device connected to the game machine. belongs to. The output signals from these BB output terminals 121b and 121c are switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal when turned ON, and switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal when turned OFF, similarly to the output terminal 121d for AT. is configured as Information from the first BB output terminal 121b and the second BB output terminal 121c is transmitted from the game hall management device (hall computer) and data display connected to the gaming machine via the external common terminal board 121. By grasping, it is possible to grasp that the game state has shifted to the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, and by totaling it, it is possible to grasp the number of transitions, and the state transitions and transitions can be grasped. Notification corresponding to the number of times can be executed.

If any of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c is ON in step Sa2501, it is determined in step Sa2502 whether or not the corresponding BB status flag is set. That is, if the first BB output terminal 121b is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag is set, and if the second BB output terminal 121c is in the ON state, the second BB state flag is set. Determine whether it is set. As already described, the first BB state flag and the second BB state flag are flags that are set when transitioning to the BB state in the bonus state process (FIG. 24) and cleared when the BB state ends. In other words, the situation in which the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are ON in step Sa2501 and the corresponding BB state flag is set in step Sa2502 means that the corresponding BB state has not yet been set in the previous bonus state processing. This is the case where it is determined to be continued. On the other hand, the situation in which the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are ON in step Sa2501 and the corresponding BB status flag is not set in step Sa2502 means that the corresponding BB This is the case when a process for terminating the state has been executed.

If it is determined in step Sa2502 that the corresponding BB status flag is not set, then in step Sa2503 a process of turning off the corresponding BB output terminals 121b and 121c is executed. As a result, the external device connected to the gaming machine can recognize that the BB state has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step Sa2501, when an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2502, or after executing the processing of step Sa2503, the process proceeds to step Sa2504. At step Sa2504, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the start game flag is a flag that is set in the AT start notification process (FIG. 35) when the AT mode start results (normal replies A to C) are won during the preparation mode. Yes (step Sa1003), this flag is cleared in the preparation mode process (FIG. 42) in the winning result handling process (step Sa1620). If the start game flag is set, it is determined in step Sa2505 whether or not the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning has been established. If a negative determination is made in step Sa2504 or step Sa2505, the second external output setting process is terminated.

In the preparation mode, if the result for starting the AT mode is won and the result for starting is established, in step Sa2506, after setting the output terminal 121d for AT of the external common terminal board 121 to the ON state, , the second external output setting process is terminated. As already explained, by setting the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state, the output signal from the AT output terminal 121d is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal, and the data display of the game hall and the hall computer are switched. By grasping, it becomes possible to grasp that the AT mode has started.

<External output setting first process>
Next, the external output setting first process executed in the reel control process (FIG. 22) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The external output signal first process is before the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the reel control process is started, and furthermore, from the rotation effect process (step Sa402) for executing the above rotation effect is also a process performed first.

At step Sa2601, it is determined whether or not any of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c is in the ON state. If both of the BB output terminals 121b and 121c are in the OFF state, it is determined in step Sa2602 whether or not any of the BB state flags has been set. That is, if the corresponding BB status flag was set in the bonus status processing of the previous game and the game to be started this time is the first game in the BB status, then in step Sa2603, the BB flag corresponding to the set BB status flag is displayed. A process for turning on the output terminals 121b and 121c is executed.

If the game to be started this time is not in the BB state at step Sa2602, the process advances to step Sa2603 to execute processing for turning on the game output terminal 121a of the external centralized terminal board 121. FIG. The game output terminal 121a is turned ON when one game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and is turned OFF before the game ends. This is for outputting information indicating that the game has been executed to an external device connected to the gaming machine. Similar to the AT output terminal 121d, the output signal from the game output terminal 121a is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal when turned ON, and switched from a HI signal to a LOW signal when turned OFF. It is A game hall management device (hall computer) and a data display connected to the game machine via an external centralized terminal board 121 grasp the information from the game output terminal 121a, thereby enabling one-time It is possible to grasp that the game has been executed, and by totalizing the numbers, it is possible to grasp the number of times the game has been executed, and it is possible to perform notification corresponding to the execution of the game and the number of times of execution.

In the subsequent step Sa2605, a process of inputting 10 corresponding to about 0.15 sec to the game counters provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the game output terminal 121a, which was turned ON at the start of the game, should be turned OFF. is a counter that

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa2601, or after the processing of step Sa2603 or step Sa2605 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa2606. In step Sa2606, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the first external output setting process is terminated. If any of the freeze flags at the start is set, the process proceeds to step Sa2607, executes processing to set the reservation output flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step Sa2608, is provided in the various counter area 106e After executing the process of inputting 2100 corresponding to about 3.1 sec (sixth period) to the reserved output counter, the external output setting first process is terminated. The reserved output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in a reserved state before the AT output terminal 121d of the external common terminal board 121 is turned on. The reserved output counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d should be turned ON in the reserved state, and is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is started. is a counter.

That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect by each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the AT output terminal is set before the rotating effect is executed. 121d is turned on.

<Timer update processing>
The timer update process executed in step Sa108 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) as the process when the AT output terminal 121d is set to the reserved state before the AT output terminal 121d is set to the ON state as described above is shown in the flowchart of FIG. will be described with reference to.

In the timer update process, first, in steps Sa2701 to Sa2704, the process for managing the game output terminal 121a is performed. That is, in step Sa2701, it is determined whether or not the game output terminal 121a is in the ON state, and if it is in the ON state, in step Sa2702, a process of subtracting 1 from the game counter is executed. Then, in step Sa2703, it is determined whether or not the game counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step Sa2704, processing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state is executed. Thus, the game output terminal 121a indicating that one game has been executed is turned ON at the start of the game, and then turned OFF after a predetermined period (0.15 sec) has passed. The switching between the ON state and the OFF state is executed in a relatively short period of time.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2701 or step Sa2703, or after the process of step Sa2704 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa2705. The process of steps Sa2705 to Sa2709 is a process for turning on the AT output terminal 121d in the reserved state.

That is, in step Sa2705, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag is set and the reserved state is set. If it is in the reserved state, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved output counter is executed in step Sa2706, and it is determined whether or not the reserved output counter has become 0 in step Sa2707. When the reserved output counter reaches 0, a process of clearing the reserved output flag is executed in step Sa2708, and a process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed in step Sa2709. By such processing, the data display and hall computer of the game hall connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121 can recognize that the AT mode has started.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa2705 or step Sa2707, or after the processing of step Sa2709 is executed, processing for updating other various counters and various timers is executed in step Sa2710, and then this timer update processing ends. do.

<State of external output>
The relationship between the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG.

First, the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when a win is established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62, rotation start processing (step Sa403) is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts at timing ta0. After reaching the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing ta1, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at the timing ta2. Then, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at timing ta3, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at timing ta4. Incidentally, ta3 and ta4 indicate the operation of the third operated stop switch 42 to 44 and the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R (third reel). Therefore, after the stop operation of the third reel is performed at the timing of ta3, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes invalid.

When winning is established as a result of AT mode start at timing ta4, an AT start command at stop is output (step Sa1613), and an AT start effect is executed (step Sa2118, FIG. 55). Then, at the timing of ta4, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer. is displayed, and the data of the number of times of shifting to the AT mode is updated.

After that, at the timing of ta5, the first game of the AT mode is started, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, and after reaching the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing of ta6, it is stopped at the timing of ta7. Operation of the switches 42 to 44 becomes effective.

When the AT mode is started with a spin effect, step Sa2308 of the spin effect process (FIG. 50) is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the timing of tb0. do. At the timing of tb1, the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, reaches the low speed rotation (VL) slower than the constant speed rotation (VN), and then the remaining reels (middle reel 32M, right reel 32R ) reaches low speed rotation (VL). In this case, the period from the start of rotation to the timing tb3 corresponds to the first period (2 sec), and at the timing tb3, low-speed rotation is performed in a state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is completed. It will be like that. The low-speed rotation is continued until timing tb4 when the second period (2.8 sec) elapses from the start of rotation.

At timing tb4, processing (step Sa2311) for decelerating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed, and at timing tb5 when the third period (0.2 sec) elapses from timing tb4, the second regame is performed. A symbol combination corresponding to winning or third replay winning is temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. In this case, an AT start command is output at the time of starting (step Sa2315), and an AT start effect at the time of starting is executed (step Sa2405, FIG. 57(b)). Then, at a timing tb6 slightly delayed from tb5, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer.

The temporary stop state of the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay win or the third replay win is maintained from tb6 to timing tb7 when the fifth period (5 sec) elapses. Then, at the timing of tb7, rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started by rotation start processing (step Sa403), reaching constant speed rotation (VN) at tb8, and operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed at tb9. valid. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at tb10, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at tb11, and the result of the game started at tb0 is derived.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a win is established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, the AT output terminal 121d of the external common terminal board 121 is turned ON, indicating that the AT mode has been entered. External output of information is performed. Furthermore, even when the pattern combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating performance during the preparation mode, the output terminal 121d for AT of the external collective terminal board 121 is turned ON, and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. This information is output externally. In other words, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or provisionally stopped in the preparation mode, the output terminal 121d for AT is turned ON to output the fact that the AT mode has been shifted to the outside. and By doing so, the manager of the game hall or the like can clearly indicate that the shift to the AT mode has occurred not only by the results of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R but also by the information output to the outside. This makes it possible to grasp the situation, and makes it easier to identify fraudulent acts or the like that illegally enjoy the benefits of the AT mode.

In this embodiment, by shifting to the preparation mode, the AT preparation counter is set to set the game in which the spinning effect is performed, and when the AT preparation counter becomes 0, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. It is configured to set the timing to be set before executing the rotation effect. In other words, the AT output terminal 121d is configured to be set to the ON state at the time of transition to the preparation mode and at the start of the target game of the rotation effect as the timing before the process of turning the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state. By doing so, the execution timing of the processing (step Sa2709) for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d and the execution timing of the pre-processing for turning ON the ON state do not overlap. It is possible to preferably solve an increase in processing load due to duplication of processing.

Moreover, when temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode in the rotating effect, the timing is before the timing of the temporary stop and before starting the rotating effect. Then, the AT output terminal 121d is set to ON state in advance, and the timer is set so that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when the symbol combination is temporarily stopped. That is, the process for temporarily stopping the symbol combination and the process for turning on the AT output terminal 121d are separately executed in parallel (timer interrupt process, normal process). By setting, it becomes possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of processing errors through the distribution of the processing load.

Furthermore, since the setting of the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d is performed in the external output setting first process prior to the spin effect process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the spin effect. The configuration is such that the above-described timing setting processing is completed in advance. By doing so, in a configuration that may require special control for driving control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, such as a rotating effect, the processing for setting the output timing overlaps with any of the special controls. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in the processing load.

In addition, in the process of actually turning on the AT output terminal 121d, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on after determining that the reserved output counter has reached 0, which is an extremely simple configuration. Even with the configuration in which the output terminal 121d is in the ON state, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load.

Incidentally, when the game is started, the game output terminal 121a is turned on, and after the on state is maintained for a predetermined period, the output terminal 121a for AT is turned on. The timing is set so as not to overlap with the timing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state, and is set as a timing after the timing for switching the game output terminal 121a to the OFF state. From this point of view as well, the processing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is set so as not to overlap with other processing, and it can be said that a device is taken to eliminate the increase in the processing load. .

In the present embodiment, the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d in the above reservation state is set to be slightly later than the timing for temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning as a result of canceling the AT mode. are doing. In other words, in the rotation effect, the timing at which the symbol combination is temporarily stopped is the timing after 3 seconds (fourth period) after the start of the rotation effect, and the timing at which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON It is the timing after 3.1 sec (sixth period) after the rotation effect is started. By doing so, if for some reason there is a delay in the drive control of the stepping motor, or depending on the symbol positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R before the rotation starts, the set value ( 3 seconds later), it is possible to prevent the AT output terminal 121d from turning ON before the temporary stop.

As described above, when shifting to the preparation mode, by setting the game in which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON during the spinning effect after 40 games, and by setting the freeze flag at the start when 40 games have been completed. , in the first external output setting process, the timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d during the game is set. In this case, it can be said that the game in which the AT output terminal 121d set in advance is set to the ON state can be brought forward when winning is made as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode. However, even in this case, if the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON during the rotation effect (if the result for AT start is not winning), the freeze flag is set at the start, so external output is performed. In the first setting process, regardless of whether or not the front-loading has occurred, simply confirming the presence or absence of the freezing flag at the start and setting the timing for turning ON the AT output terminal 121d may be performed. It is possible to set the output timing of the AT output terminal 121d by a simple process.

Then, as a premise of the configuration in which the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON by temporarily stopping the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning during the rotation effect, the preparation mode is performed. , the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON even when the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is established. With such a premise configuration, turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT during the spinning performance is expected to have the effect of making the output terminal 121d for AT seem to be turned ON in a normal game. Thus, it is possible to preferably expect the performance effect by performing the rotation performance.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the result for starting the AT mode stops or temporarily stops on the activated line ML, the timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is different from the above-described embodiment 1a. It is the time when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R after the stop or temporary stop start to rotate.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing preparation mode processing in this modification.

In this modification, when the result of the AT mode start during the preparation mode is elected, or when the continuation upper limit of the preparation mode is reached (step Sa2813, step Sa2822, step Sa2823) After processing, to step Sa2824 The next game output flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d in the above-described embodiment 1a, and the other processes (steps Sa2801 to Sa2823) correspond to those of the embodiment 1a. (Steps Sa1601 to Sa1623). The next game output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT output terminal 121d should be turned ON.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the fifth period (5 sec) has passed while the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning or the third replay winning is temporarily stopped (step Sa2917: YES), and the start freeze flag is set. After clearing (step Sa2918), the next game output flag is cleared in step Sa2919, and the start freeze flag is set by reaching the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode, and the lottery result of the game is AT Different from the embodiment α of the above 1a, in that a standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step Sa2921 when the mode start result is successful (step Sa2902: YES, step Sa2920: NO). ing. Other processing (steps Sa2901 to step Sa2918, step Sa2920) is the same as the corresponding processing (steps Sa2301 to step Sa2319) of the first embodiment α. The standby flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it should wait to turn on the AT output terminal 121d even if the next game output flag is set.

FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing in this modification.

In this modification, when the lottery result of the next game after reaching the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is the result for starting the AT mode (step Sa3001: YES, step Sa3002: NO, step Sa3008: YES), After clearing the freeze flag at the start in step Sa3009, clearing the standby flag in step Sa3010, and then proceeding to the process of setting the start game flag in step Sa3003 is different from the embodiment 1a above. different. Other processes (step Sa3001 to step Sa3009) are the same as the corresponding processes (step Sa1001 to step Sa1001) of the first embodiment α.

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the first external output setting process in this modified example.

In this modification, in the same manner as the processing of steps Sa2601 to Sa2605, after executing the processing of steps Sa3101 to Sa3105, it is determined whether or not any freeze flag is set at step Sa3106. . If none of the freezing flags at the start has been set, it is determined at step Sa3107 whether or not the next game output flag has been set. is set. When the next game output flag is set and the standby flag is not set, it means that the game is the next game after the game in which winning was established as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode. In this case, in step Sa3109, after setting the AT output terminal 121d to the ON state, the first external output setting process is terminated.

Also, if any of the freezing flags at the start is set in step Sa3106, the process advances to step Sa3110 to execute processing for setting the reserved output flag. Then, in step Sa3111, the reserved output counter is set for a period slightly longer than the sum of the second period (2.8 sec), the third period (0.2 sec), and the fourth period (5 sec) (8 sec). After executing the process of inputting 5500 corresponding to a certain seventh period (approximately 8.2 sec), the external output setting first process ends. As described above, when the reserved output counter reaches 0, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on.

<State of external output>
How the AT output terminal 121d is turned on in this modification will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG.

Assume that the game is started at the timing tc0 in the preparation mode, and the lottery result of the game is a winning result for starting the AT mode. In this case, constant speed rotation (VN) is reached at the timing of tc1, and after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at the timing of tc2, the third stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing of tc3. Then, the corresponding reel stops at the timing of tc4, and winning is established as a result for starting the AT mode. In this case, the AT start effect is executed at the timing of tc4 based on the result winning for the AT mode start.

When the game next to the game ended at timing tc4 is started at timing tc5, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating and the AT output terminal 121d is turned on to display the data of the game hall. Information that the AT mode is started is output to the equipment and the hall computer.

When the AT mode is started with a rotating effect, step Sa2908 of the rotating effect process (FIG. 65) is executed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the timing of td0. In this case, after the left reel 32L, which is the reference reel, reaches the low speed rotation (VL) slower than the constant speed rotation (VN) at the timing of td1, the remaining reels (middle reel 32M, The right reel 32R) reaches low-speed rotation (VL), and the low-speed rotation continues until timing td4 when the second period (2.8 sec) elapses from the start of rotation.

Then, at the timing of td5, the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, and the AT start effect at the start is executed.

The state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is temporarily stopped is maintained from td5 to timing td6 when the fifth period (5 sec) elapses, and rotation start processing ( Rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started by step Sa403). Then, at timing td7, which is slightly delayed from timing td6, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display in the game hall and the hall computer.

Thereafter, constant speed rotation (VN) is reached at timing td8, operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective at timing td9, and operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed at timing td10. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at the timing of , and the game result of the game started at the timing of td0 is derived.

As described above, the timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT is not the timing for stopping or temporarily stopping the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode, but after the symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped, each reel Since the rotation of 32L, 32M, and 32R is set to the timing of starting rotation, it is confirmed that the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. As a result, the work of confirming that the data display or the like will be updated will not be duplicated. In other words, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON, and the data display device and the like are trying to confirm that the data display is updated, and it is not possible to confirm that the symbol corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped. The event can be eliminated, and while the information output from these AT output terminals 121d and the outcomes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are associated with each other, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of each. becomes.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON after the CPU 102 confirms that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode has temporarily stopped. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the rotation counter becomes 0 in step Sa3214, and after 0.2 sec the stepping motors are controlled so that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R temporarily stop (step Sa3211). After it is determined that it has elapsed, at step Sa3215, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning has actually stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If it is stopped (temporarily stopped), after executing a process of setting an AT start command at the time of starting in step Sa3216, a process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed in step Sa3217. Through such processing, information indicating that the AT mode is started is output to the data display of the game hall and the hall computer.

After that, in steps Sa3218 and Sa3219, a process of maintaining the stopped (temporarily stopped) state is performed, and in step Sa3220, the freeze flag at the start is cleared, and then the rotation effect process ends. In FIG. 70, the processing of steps Sa3201 to Sa3214 is the same as the processing of steps Sa2301 to Sa2314.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3215, that is, even if 0.2 sec elapses from the control of step Sa3211, the symbol combination corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If not, it is determined in step Sa3221 whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped). When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, that is, in spite of the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped), the second re-game winning prize and the third re-game winning prize If the corresponding symbol combination is not stopped (temporarily stopped) on the effective line ML, then in step Sa3222 the first error command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the main rotation is performed. Terminate the production process.

If it is determined in step Sa3221 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped (temporarily stopped), a process of inputting 671 corresponding to the eighth period (1 sec) to the rotation counter is executed in step Sa3223. In the following step Sa3224, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter becomes 0 and the eighth period has elapsed. If the eighth period has elapsed, the second replay is actually performed again in step Sa3225. It is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the win or the third replay win has stopped (temporarily stopped) on the activated line ML. If it is stopped (temporarily stopped), it proceeds to the step Sa3216 side, executes the output setting of the AT start command at the time of starting, the process of turning ON the AT output terminal 121d (step Sa3217), etc., and then rotates. Terminate the production process.

On the other hand, in step Sa3225 negative determination, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is not stopped (temporarily stopped) on the effective line ML, to step Sa3226 to determine whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped (temporarily stopped), and if they are stopped (temporarily stopped), a second error command is sent to the display control device 81 in step Sa3227. After executing the process of setting as an output object, the rotation effect process is terminated. Further, when it is determined that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped (temporarily stopped) even though the eighth period has elapsed in step Sa3226, a third error command is issued in step Sa3228. is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the rotation effect processing is terminated.

FIG. 71(a) is a flow chart showing the error notification process in this modified example. The error notification process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process of another start effect setting process (step Sa2015) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 47).

In step Sa3301, it is determined whether or not the first error command has been received. A symbol combination corresponding to a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize although all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a situation where the first error command has been received and 3 seconds have passed since the start of the spinning performance. is not stopped, in step Sa3302, the process for performing the first error notification is executed, and then the error notification process is terminated. In the first error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b1), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a girl character with her arms crossed and a question mark on her face, as well as one character with a question mark. The production is set.

If it is determined in step Sa3301 that the first error command has not been received, it is determined in step Sa3303 whether or not the second error command has been received. When the second error command is received, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the spinning effect, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped when 1 second has passed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is not stopped, the process for performing the second error notification is executed in step Sa3304, and then the error notification End the process. In the second error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b2), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a girl character with her hands outstretched and a questioning face, and two characters with question marks. The production is set.

If it is determined in step Sa3303 that the second error command has not been received, it is determined in step Sa3305 whether or not the third error command has been received. All the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped when the third error command is received, and 3 seconds have passed since the start of the rotation performance, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped even when 1 second has passed. If not, in step Sa3306, the process for performing the third error notification is executed, and then this error notification process is terminated. In the third error notification, as shown in FIG. 71(b3), the auxiliary display section 65 is set to display the characters "Error Occurred, Please Call a Clerk".

That is, in the present modification, when performing the rotation production, on the condition that the symbol combination set to be temporarily stopped is actually temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, the production for starting the AT mode and the output terminal for AT 121d to output information indicating that the AT mode has started. By doing so, even though the pattern combination for starting the AT mode is not stopped due to some inconvenience in the rotation effect (for example, positional deviation of the reels, etc.), the AT mode start effect and the AT output It is possible to prevent a contradiction such that information is output via the terminal 121d.

Although the symbol combination set to be temporarily stopped is not stopped, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the AT mode start effect and the information output via the AT output terminal 121d are not performed. In addition, the freeze flag set at the start is not cleared. By doing so, for example, when the symbol combination for starting the AT mode does not stop due to, for example, the stop position of the reel being misaligned, a chance to stop it again in the next game is given. will be Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect for starting the AT mode using the effects of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R while not disturbing the smooth progress of the game.

Moreover, as described above, when the symbol combination for starting the AT mode does not stop by chance, the AT mode itself is started in the game, even though the spinning effect is executed again in the next game. (In the preparation mode process, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag and the process of inputting the initial number of games of 50 games are executed), and even if the re-rotation effect is carried over as described above, the AT mode starts. is not carried over. By doing so, it is possible to ensure that the AT mode start effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed more reliably, while preventing unfair advantage for the player. Become.

It should be noted that when setting the output of the error command in all or any of steps Sa3222, steps Sa3227, and step Sa3228 in the rotation effect process, the error output terminal provided on the external centralized terminal board 121 A process for turning ON may be executed. The configuration of the error output terminal is the same as that of the AT output terminal 121d, and when it is turned ON, the signal output from the error output terminal becomes a HI signal, and an error is sent to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer. Information about the status is output. The error output terminal is turned off when a predetermined operation (for example, an operation to open the front door 12) is performed by the manager of the game hall. By doing so, when performing the rotation effect, the manager of the game hall or the like can preferably identify the situation in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop rotating and the game cannot proceed. becomes. In this case, in steps Sa3222 and Sa3227, the error command output setting is performed, but the error output terminal is not turned on, and in step Sa3228, the error command output setting and the error output terminal are turned on. may be configured.

<Modification 3>
The timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT may be the timing before the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, and the symbol combination can be stopped or temporarily stopped. It is good also as the start timing of the game which becomes.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the external output setting first process in this modified example.

The processing of steps Sa3401 to Sa3405 is the same as the processing of steps Sa2601 to Sa2605. In step Sa3406, it is determined whether or not the first freeze flag at start or the second freeze flag at start is set. If any freeze flag at start is set, it is determined in step Sa3407 whether or not the start game flag is set. If the start game flag is not set, the first external output setting process is terminated. The start game flag is set in step Sa3407, and if it is won as a result of AT mode start during the preparation mode, or if any freeze flag at the start is set in step Sa3406, step Sa3408 After executing the process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d at , the first external output setting process is terminated.

As already explained, when the configuration is such that the AT winning notification effect is performed as notification of the winning of the AT mode transition lottery and the transition to the preparation mode is performed, at least after the execution of the AT winning notification effect, the above-mentioned operation is performed. Even if the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON before the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, the number of times the AT mode is actually changed and the number of times the AT mode is changed. There is no discrepancy with the number of times the information is output. Therefore, even with the above arrangement, it is possible to suitably manage the number of shifts to the AT mode using the data display or hall computer connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121. .

<Modification 4>
The timing for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT may be the timing after the timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped, or the timing after the timing of the temporary stop. It may be the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this modification, as the above-mentioned predetermined condition, it is set that the first to sixth minor wins have been established a predetermined number of times after the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode has been temporarily stopped. there is

FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing the second external output setting process in this modified example.

The processing of steps Sa3501 to Sa3503 is the same as the processing of steps Sa2501 to Sa2503. In step Sa3504, it is determined whether or not the start game flag is set, and if it is set and the game wins as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, the second game is executed in step Sa3505. It is determined whether or not a replay winning prize or a third replay winning prize has been established. When the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is established, in step Sa3506, after executing the processing of setting the reservation output flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the external output second processing is terminated. do. If a negative determination is made in step Sa3504 or step Sa3505, the second external output setting process is terminated. As described above, the reserved output flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT output terminal 121d is in a reserved state in which it is in the ON state.

In this modified example, the first external output setting process is not executed, and the reserved state managed by the reserved output counter is not set. Therefore, in the timer updating process in this modified example, the process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d when the reserved output counter becomes 0 is not executed.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In this modification, in the same manner as steps Sa2301 to Sa2318 in the above-described 1a embodiment α, steps Sa3601 to Sa3618 perform processing for executing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect, and then step At Sa3619, the process of setting the reservation output flag is executed, and then the rotation effect process is terminated.

That is, in the present modification, when the winning symbol combination for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, the AT output terminal 121d is set to the reserved state in which it is turned ON.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing AT mode processing in this modified example.

At step Sa3701, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag is set. When the reservation output flag is set, it is determined whether or not the pressing order of the bell winning, that is, the first to sixth minor winnings has been established in step Sa3702. When the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination have been established, a process of adding 1 to the winning counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sa3703. The win counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of times the first to sixth minor wins have been established after the symbol combination corresponding to the result win for starting the AT mode is stopped or provisionally stopped.

After executing the process of step Sa3703, it is determined whether or not the winning counter has reached 5 as a predetermined number in step Sa3704. If the winning counter is 5, a process of turning on the AT output terminal 121d is executed in step Sa3705, and a process of clearing the reservation output flag is executed in step Sa3706. If a negative determination is made in any one of steps Sa3701, Sa3702, and Sa3704, or if the process of step Sa3707 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa3708. The processing of steps Sa3708 to Sa3712 is the same as the processing of steps Sa1501 to Sa1505.

That is, in the present modification, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped or temporarily stopped, the AT output terminal 121d is set to a reserved state in which the ON state is set. When the winning combination to the sixth minor winning combination are established five times, the AT output terminal 121d is set to the ON state assuming that a predetermined condition is met. Even in this way, the number of times of shifting to the AT mode can be preferably grasped by the data display or the hall computer. In addition, by outputting information indicating that the game has shifted to the AT mode after the game has started in the AT mode, the slot machine 10 notifies that the AT mode will start. After that, the data display is updated, and in the configuration where the effect of the transition to the AT mode is performed at multiple places, the effect timing at each place does not overlap. It is possible to preferably avoid an overlooked event by performing the effects at different locations.

In addition, not only when the winning result for starting the AT mode is established as a result of the game, but also when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect as described above, the reservation state is changed. , it is possible to give a strong impression that the rotation effect is an effect necessary for the progress of the game, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the rotation effect.

<1a Embodiment β>
In this embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped based on the stop switches 42-44 in the rotation effect. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this embodiment.

At step Sa3801, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the first start or the freeze flag at the second start is set, and if it is set, at step Sa3802, the lottery result of this game is AT mode. It is determined whether or not the result for the start is winning. If none of the freeze flags at the start is set in step Sa3801, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. In step Sa3802, if the lottery result of the current game is not winning as a result for starting the AT mode, the process proceeds to step Sa3803. Also, if the lottery result of this game is the result of winning the AT mode start, it is determined whether or not it is a rotation effect in the preparation mode in step Sa3829, and if it is in the preparation mode (the AT preparation counter is greater than 0), the process proceeds to step Sa3803. When the AT preparation counter is 0 at step Sa3829, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. The processing of these steps Sa3801, Sa3802 and Sa3829 is the same as the corresponding processing in the first embodiment α.

In step Sa3803, a process of setting a rotation effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As already explained, the display control device 81 that has received the rotation effect command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the rotation effect (FIG. 57(a)) is performed (step Sa2403). In subsequent step Sa3804, a process of setting a pseudo-game command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The pseudo-game command is temporary stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42-44 during rotation production, and stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the normal stop switches 42-44. (Step Sa404 to Step Sa413) are notified through the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. so that the player can clearly distinguish the operation during the rotation effect and the temporary stop. is a command for It should be noted that, in the following description, the operation and temporary stop during the rotation production is also referred to as "pseudo game", and the operation and temporary stop during the rotation production are also referred to as "pseudo game information". In addition, in order to distinguish the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R (step Sa404 to step Sa413) based on the normal operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the pseudo game, the normal operation and stop are also called "normal game". called.

By the way, there are the following differences between "regular game" and "pseudo game". That is, in the normal game, a privilege (game value) corresponding to the lottery result is given by stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the game lottery result on the activated line ML, while in the pseudo game, the game lottery is provided. Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the result is stopped or temporarily stopped on the activated line ML, the privilege (game value) corresponding to the lottery result is not given. That is, the normal game is a game to be determined in the payout determination process (step Sa414), while the pseudo-game is a game not to be determined in the payout determination process.

In subsequent step Sa3805, a process of inputting 2013 corresponding to the ninth period (3 sec) to the rotation counter is executed. Then, in step Sa3805, the stepping motor is controlled so that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. In this case, the stepping motor is controlled so as to reach constant speed rotation (VN) at the same acceleration as in the normal rotation start process (step Sa403). Then, in step Sa3807, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter has reached 0, and the process waits in step Sa3807 until it reaches 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3807 and the ninth period has elapsed since all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating, pseudo-activation processing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in step Sa3808. In such a pseudo-validation process, the operation of the stop switches 42-44 is changed from the state of not accepting the operation of the stop switches 42-44 to the state of accepting the operation of the stop switches 42-44. Processing is performed to change from a non-detection state to a detection state, or to change from a state in which even if the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the operation is not valid to a state in which the operation is valid.

In subsequent step Sa3809, a process of setting the operation instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The operation instruction command is for notifying the player that the above-described pseudo activation process has been performed and that it is time to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the pseudo game using the rotation effect. This is a command for performing an effect (operation instruction effect) on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Then, in step Sa3810, a process of inputting 3365 corresponding to the tenth period (5 sec) to the rotation counter is executed.

In subsequent step Sa3811, based on the detection results of the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, it is determined whether or not the stop switches 42-44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which are already temporarily stopped even if they are operated, At step Sa3812, it is determined whether or not the rotation counter has reached 0. If it has not reached 0 and the tenth period has not elapsed, the process returns to step Sa3811.

If any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated in step Sa3811, the process advances to step Sa3813 to execute pseudo invalidation processing for the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Specifically, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time is changed from the state in which the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect to the state in which they are not detected, or the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a detect the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the operation is performed, the state of valid operation is changed to the state of not valid operation. Then, in step Sa3814, a process of setting the pseudo operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The display control device 81 that has received the pseudo-operation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 on the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, and the like.

After executing the processing of step Sa3814, it is determined in step Sa3815 whether or not the first freeze flag at start is set. When the freeze flag at the first start is set, at step Sa3816, the symbol for the second replay winning prize is stopped on the effective line ML of the reel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. A process for driving and controlling the stepping motor is performed. On the other hand, if the first start freeze flag is not set in step Sa3815 and the second start freeze flag is set, in step Sa3817, the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been operated this time correspond to A stepping motor is driven and controlled so as to stop the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third regame on the activated line ML of the reel to be played.

Here, in the drive control processing of step Sa3816 and step Sa3817, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the symbol for the second re-game winning or the symbol for the third re-game winning is stopped on the activated line ML. Let That is, in the normal game, it was possible to stop the symbols separated by a maximum of 4 symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated on the effective line ML, but in the pseudo game, the stop switches 42 to 44. Regardless of the operation timing of , the target pattern is stopped on the effective line ML, and the patterns separated by a maximum of 19 patterns are set to be stopped on the effective line ML.

After executing the process of step Sa3816 or step Sa3817, the process proceeds to step Sa3818 to determine whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are temporarily stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not temporarily stopped, the rotation counter becomes 0 in step Sa3819, and the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is validated in the pseudo game (step Sa3808), the tenth It is determined whether or not 5 sec has elapsed as the period, and if 5 sec has not elapsed, the process advances to step Sa3820.

In step Sa3820, it is determined whether or not the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated. If not, the process returns to step Sa3811 and waits until the stop switches 42-44 are operated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa3820 that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, the rotation counter is cleared to 0 in step Sa3821.

When it is determined that the rotation counter has become 0 in steps Sa3812 and Sa3819, or after setting the rotation counter to 0 based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 in step Sa3821, the process proceeds to step Sa3822. In step Sa3822, a process of temporarily stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are not stopped is executed. That is, the stepping motor is driven and controlled so as to temporarily stop the symbol corresponding to the second re-game winning or the symbol corresponding to the third re-game winning on the activated line ML. Thereafter, in step Sa3823, confirmation processing is repeatedly executed to confirm that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have temporarily stopped.

Since all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are temporarily stopped, an affirmative determination is made in step Sa3823, and the process proceeds to step Sa3824. If it is determined in step Sa3818 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped, the process proceeds to step Sa3824. In step Sa3824, a process of setting an AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in step Sa3825, the process of turning ON the AT output terminal 121d is executed, and in steps Sa3826 and Sa3827, the process of maintaining the temporarily stopped state over the fifth period (5 sec) is executed. Then, after executing the process of clearing the freeze flag at the start set in step Sa3828, the rotation effect process is terminated. The processing of steps Sa3824 to Sa3828 is the same as the processing of steps Sa3216 to Sa3220.

FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the rotation effect processing in this modified example.

At step Sa3901, it is determined whether or not a rotation effect command is received, and if it is received, the preparation mode flag is cleared at step Sa3902, and a process of setting a rotation effect is executed at step Sa3903. The processing of steps Sa3901 to Sa3903 is the same as the processing of steps Sa2401 to Sa2403.

When the negative determination is made in step Sa3901, or after executing the process of step Sa3903, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-game command is received in step Sa3904. When the pseudo-game command is received, at step Sa3905 the pseudo-game effect is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like.

As a pseudo-game effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(a), an effect of displaying a pseudo-game image GP with characters such as "Pseudo-game in progress" in a predetermined area (upper right in the figure) in the auxiliary display section 65. is set. The pseudo-game image GP is set to a size that allows the player to grasp that the image is displayed and the characters (for example, the size of the characters during the pseudo-game is 20pt or more). It is

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3904, or if the processing of step Sa3905 has been executed, it is determined in step Sa3906 whether or not the above operation instruction command has been received. When the operation instruction command is received, a process of setting to perform a pseudo effective effect is executed in step Sa3907. The pseudo-validation effect is an effect for letting the player know that the pseudo-validation process of step Sa3808 has been performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. The stop lamps 42b to 44b built in 44 are switched from the off state to the on state.

In the following step Sa3908, according to the type of the rotation effect of this time, the operation instruction effect corresponding to the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is set to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64 or the like. Execute. That is, when performing the first rotating effect, an operation instruction effect for notifying the pressing order corresponding to the second replay winning prize is performed, and when performing the second rotating effect, the third replay effect is performed. To perform an operation instruction performance for notifying the pressing order corresponding to game winning.

As the operation instruction effect set in step Sa3908, as shown in FIG. An effect is set to notify the operation sequence corresponding to the replay winning, and to notify the symbols for the second replay winning and the symbols for the third replay winning. In this case, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 notified in the operation instruction effect is the operation order for the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning when the normal replies A to C are won. Whether or not to report the operation sequence corresponding to C is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.

In this way, the same effect as the effect that is executed when winning is achieved as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode is also executed in the pseudo game in the rotation effect. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pseudo-game image GP is displayed in the pseudo-game, the situation where the symbol corresponding to the result winning for starting the AT mode in the normal game should be stopped, and the pattern for starting the AT mode in the pseudo-game The player can clearly distinguish both situations by confirming the pseudo-game image GP while performing an effect that is visually indistinguishable or difficult to distinguish from the situation in which the symbols corresponding to the winning result should be stopped. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3906, or if the process of step Sa3908 has been executed, the process advances to step Sa3909. In step Sa3909, it is determined whether or not a pseudo operation command has been received. If the pseudo operation command is received and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, in step Sa3910, the stop lamps 42b to 44b corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time are turned off from the on state. By doing so, the process of ending the above-mentioned pseudo effective effect is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the corresponding symbol on the activated line ML is temporarily stopped. Therefore, in step Sa3910, for example, a sound effect corresponding to the temporary stop is emitted from the speaker 64, or the operation instruction presentation of the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated so as to correspond to the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. You may execute a process such as

If a negative determination is made in step Sa3909, or if the process of step Sa3910 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sa3911. In step Sa3911, it is determined whether or not the AT start command is received at the time of starting, and if it is received, at step Sa3912, the AT start production is performed at the time of starting at the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Execute the processing to be set. The AT start effect at the time of starting is, for example, the effect shown in FIG. 57(b) as described above.

In the following step Sa3913, a process for ending the pseudo-game effect is executed. Specifically, processing for ending the display of the pseudo game image GP is performed. In subsequent step Sa3914, if the pseudo effective effect is continued, a process for ending it is executed. Specifically, when the AT start command is received while any or all of the stop lamps 42b to 44b built in the stop switches 42 to 44 remain lit, When the rotation counter is set to 0 by operating the credit input switch 56 or the like and the machine is temporarily stopped, processing is performed to switch the stop lamps 42b to 44b in the lit state to the extinguished state. When a negative determination is made in step Sa3911, or after executing the process of step Sa3914, the process for rotation effect is terminated.

The flow of rotation effects in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the game in which the rotation effect is executed at the timing of te1 is started, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate, the pseudo game effect is started, and the pseudo game image GP is displayed. After the rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have reached constant speed rotation (VN) at timing te2, when 3 sec as the ninth period has elapsed from the start of rotation at timing te3, the pseudo-activation process is executed. , the stop lamps 42b to 44b of the stop switches 42 to 44 are turned on to notify that the pseudo activation process has been performed. Further, at the timing te3, an operation instruction effect is executed, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged to stop the second re-game winning or third re-game winning symbols.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at timing te4, timing te6, and timing te8, respectively, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at timing te5, timing te7, and timing te9, respectively. The symbol combination corresponding to the 2nd re-game win or the 3rd re-game win is temporarily stopped on the activated line ML. Incidentally, the pseudo effective effect ends when each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, and finally the pseudo effective effect ends at the timing te8 which is the operation timing of the third stop switch 42 to 44. It will be.

Then, at the timing te9, the AT start effect at the time of starting is executed, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON to output information indicating that the shift to the AT mode has occurred. The state in which the symbol combination is temporarily stopped is maintained for 5 seconds, and at the timing of te10, the rotation start processing (step Sa403) in the game started at the timing of te1 is executed, and the reels 32L and 32M are executed. , 32R start to rotate (normal game starts). After that, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled at the timing of te12, and when the final stop operation is performed at the timing of te13, the final reel is stopped at the timing of te14, and the game started at the timing of te1. ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the case of temporarily stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode in the rotating effect, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is used as a trigger to temporarily stop the symbol combination. As a result, it is possible to give a stronger impression that the player has won the start of the AT mode by his/her own operation.

And, in this way, based on the provisional stop of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R by their own operation in the pseudo-game, information output from the AT output terminal 121d is performed, so that their own It is possible to give the impression that the player has won the start of the AT mode by the operation, and strongly give the impression that the pseudo-game is a game indispensable for the progress of the game (start of the AT mode).

<Modification 1>
In the above-described 1a embodiment β, the pseudo-game is set at the start of the game, and the normal game is performed after the pseudo-game, but in this modification, a modification of the execution timing of the pseudo-game will be described. FIG. 80(a) shows an example in which a pseudo-game is performed between normal games in one game.

Specifically, with tf1 to tf7 as one game, when the start lever 41 is operated at tf1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate to start the normal game, followed by tf2. to validate the operation of the stop switches 42-44. Then, for example, among the plurality of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the first reel and the second reel are stopped, and at the timing of tf3 when the first reel and the second reel are stopped, Temporarily suspend the normal game. In this case, for example, on the first reel and the second reel, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode may be stopped.

Then, at the subsequent timing tf4, the pseudo-game in-progress display and the pseudo-valid in-progress display are started, and the pseudo-validation process is executed to perform the pseudo-game. In this case, the first reel and the second reel are already stopped as described above, and the target of the pseudo-game is the unstopped third reel.

In the pseudo game, the stop operation is performed for the third reel, and the third reel is temporarily stopped at the timing of tf5, and the temporarily stopped symbols and the stopped symbols of the first reel and the second reel. Thus, for example, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is formed, the AT mode start effect is executed at timing tf5, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. set to Also, at tf5, the pseudo-invalidation process is executed, and the display during pseudo-game and the display during pseudo-validation are terminated. After that, at tf6 when the series of AT mode start effects ends, the third reel is started to rotate again, and the operation of the stop switch 43 is validated, and at tf7, based on the operation of the stop switch 43 The middle reel 32M is stopped and the game started at tf1 is ended.

In this way, by performing the pseudo-game between the normal game and the normal game, the symbols temporarily stopped in the pseudo-game and the symbols stopped in the normal game executed before that are displayed. is used to display the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning results for starting the AT mode, etc., to associate the start effect of the AT mode, the information output from the output terminal 121d for AT, and the stop result. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In this case, as follows, while the symbols that will win the lottery result of the target game for which the rotation effect is to be executed are stopped on the activated line ML, the symbols that will win as a result of the AT mode start will be placed at positions different from the activated line ML. It is also possible to temporarily stop the combination.

That is, as shown in FIG. 81(a), in the rotating effect process, if it is determined that any of the freeze flags at the start is set in step Sa3951, the lottery result of the current game is determined in step Sa3952. It is determined whether or not it is a normal reply A to C, and if it is a normal reply A to C, the process proceeds to step Sa3829. If it is not the normal reply A to C, it is determined in step Sa3953 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the push order bell winning. If the pressing order bell is not won, the process proceeds to the above step Sa3803, and the process for performing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect as a pseudo game is executed at the start of the game.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the target game of the rotation effect is the push order bell winning, the affirmative determination is made in step Sa3953, and the process of setting the pseudo game flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step Sa3954 is executed. Then, after executing the process of setting the midway pseudo-game command as an output target to the display control device 81 in the following step Sa3955, the rotation effect process is terminated.

In this case, the spin effect as a pseudo-game is not executed at the start of the game, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate in the spin start process (step Sa403) in the reel control process. In the display control device 81 that has received the midway pseudo-game command, based on the pressing order notification command based on the pressing order bell winning, which is the lottery result of this game, and the midway pseudo-game command, for example, FIG. As shown in , the operation instruction notification aiming at the second re-game winning prize or the third re-game winning prize is executed, and the operation order in the operation instruction notification is changed from the first minor winning prize to the sixth in the pressing order bell this time. To notify the operation sequence corresponding to the winning of a small winning combination. In other words, the characters with patterns corresponding to the second replay winning prize and the third replay winning prize (in the figure, the symbols corresponding to the third replay winning of the “white 7”, “white 7”, and “red 7” patterns character) is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65, and the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor winning combination of the middle reverse push bells 1 and 2 is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 as the operation order.

In this case, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated based on the operation instruction notification, the right reel 32R is used as the first reel and operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, and the left reel 32L is used as the second reel and operated as "white". 7" symbol is operated, as shown in FIG. 81(d), the "bell" symbol is tense up on the right rising line L5, and a state is created in which the fourth minor win can be established, and the right falling line L4. Then, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the third replay can be temporarily stopped.

In the reel control process, as shown in FIG. 81(b), the reel stop process is executed in step Sa411, it is determined in step Sa412 that all the reels are not stopped, and in step Sa413 stop information second After executing the setting process, in step Sa3961, it is determined whether or not the second reel has stopped. That is, it is determined whether or not the current reel stop processing in step Sa411 is the second reel stop processing. If it is the stop process of the second reel, in step Sa3962, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned pseudo-game flag is set, and if it is set, in step Sa3963 the pseudo-game on the way After clearing the flag, a process of setting the pseudo-game command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sa3964. After that, the process for performing the pseudo-game of steps Sa3808 to step Sa3828 is executed, and after executing the process of starting the rotation of the third reel in step Sa3965, the process returns to step Sa404. Moreover, when negative determination is made in step Sa3961 or step Sa3962, the process returns to step Sa404 without executing the processing for the pseudo-game.

In the display control device 81, based on the pseudo-game command set at step Sa3964, as shown in FIG. 81(e), the pseudo-game image GP is displayed to start the pseudo-game display. In this case, as described above, since the first reel and the second reel have already stopped in the normal game, the notification that the "white 7" symbol should be aimed at the middle reel 32M is displayed in the above pseudo-game image. Displayed with GP. Then, based on the notification, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, in the rotation effect processing, the stop control for temporarily stopping the middle reel 32M is executed (step Sa3816, step Sa3817), and all the reels are temporarily stopped (step Sa3818 : YES), an AT start command is set at the time of start-up, and processing is performed to turn ON the AT output terminal 121d.

Then, after the symbol combination corresponding to the third replay winning prize is stopped or temporarily stopped on the downward right line L4 and is maintained for 5 seconds, the rotation of the third reel is started in step Sa3965 (Fig. 81(g)). In this case, when the normal game is resumed and the third reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. is done.

As described above, by using the symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols temporarily stopped in the pseudo game to display the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode, It is possible to reduce the number of stop operations in one game than the configuration in which all stop operations are performed in a pseudo game, and the AT while giving a privilege corresponding to the lottery result of the game in the normal game. The smooth progress of the game is realized in a configuration in which the pattern combination for starting the mode is displayed to start the AT mode, the effect of the start of the AT mode is performed, and the information is output to the outside.

In this case, for the reel that has performed the pseudo-game, after performing the effect etc. based on the pseudo-game, it is rotated again and the stop operation is performed in the normal game, and after the stop based on the stop operation of the normal game , a payout determination process, a winning result response process, and the like are executed. In other words, even if the stop result of the normal game is used in the pseudo game, the opportunity to execute the normal game is secured for all the reels, and the playability of the normal game is not compromised. Therefore, the production effect of the pseudo-game can be favorably expected without requiring special control, operation, etc. in the normal game.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the pseudo-game is usually executed after the game. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(b), one game is from tg1 to tg8, and when the start lever 41 is operated at tg1, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate and normal A game is started, and the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are validated at tg2. Then, when the final stop operation in the normal game is performed at tg3, all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. For example, the lottery result of the game started at tg1 is a winning result for starting the AT mode in the preparation mode, and the result of stopping by the final stop operation at tg3 is not a winning result for starting the AT mode. In this case, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at tg3, the game is not ended as it is, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate at tg4, and a pseudo-game and pseudo-game-in-progress display are displayed. let it start. Then, at tg5, the pseudo-validation process is executed and the display during pseudo-validation is started, and at tg6, based on the final stop operation in the pseudo-game, the pseudo-invalidation process is executed and the display during pseudo-validation is ended. . In this case, it is preferable to temporarily stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode. Then, at the temporary stop timing tg7, the AT start effect is executed, and the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON. After that, at tg8, the display during pseudo-game is ended, and the game started at tg1 is ended.

After the execution of the pseudo-game, for example, after tg7 and before tg8, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started to rotate, and then the symbol combination stopped in the normal game The symbol stopped after the operation) may be stopped again on the effective line ML, and then one game may be finished. In this case, after the re-stop, the payout determination process and the winning result handling process may be executed.

After execution of the pseudo-game, it may be configured to execute the payout determination process and the winning result corresponding process with the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game without being stopped again as described above. In this case, it is preferable that the CPU 102 temporarily stores symbols and the like that are stopped in the normal game, and executes payout determination processing and winning result handling processing. By doing so, a benefit that does not correspond to the finally stopped stop roll (stop roll stopped in a pseudo-game) is given by the payout determination process, etc., and novel game characteristics are provided. Realization is possible.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, a modified example of the configuration for notifying that it is a pseudo-game will be described.

FIG. 82(a) shows an example of notifying that it is a pseudo-game by means of an instruction monitor 68 as a section indicator. Specifically, in the instruction monitor 68, a ninth display segment N9 is provided in addition to the first display segment N1 to the eighth display segment N8. The ninth display segment N9 can be individually turned on/off by the main controller 101, similarly to the first display segment N1 to the eighth display segment N8. In addition, on the surface of the instruction monitor 68, printing such as "Pseudo-game in progress" is applied so as to point to the ninth display segment N9. It will be in a state in which a notification to that effect is performed, and a notification to the effect that it is not a pseudo-game will be performed (a notification that it is a pseudo-game will not be performed) by turning off the ninth display segment N9.

In this way, the fact that it is a pseudo-game is notified by the instruction monitor 68 directly controlled by the main control device 101, so that the reliability of the notification that it is a pseudo-game is improved. Therefore, the player can proceed with the game while clearly grasping the difference between the normal game and the pseudo-game, and in one game, the benefits obtained in the normal game and the profits obtained in the pseudo-game It is possible to suppress the loss of understanding.

In other words, even the notification that it is a pseudo-game executed on the display control device 81 side can be used for the effect. For example, it may be configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game in the normal game, or may be configured to notify that it is a pseudo-game under predetermined conditions during the normal game, for example, the possibility that a pseudo-game will be performed After announcing that it is a pseudo-game during normal play of a certain game, after that, the pseudo-game may or may not be performed in the game.

FIG. 82(b) shows an example in which a pseudo-game is notified by a movable accessory as displacement means capable of being displaced between a first position and a second position different from the first position. Specifically, a movable accessory 78 having the word "pseudo" printed on the surface is provided, and the accessory 78 is positioned at the back of the upper lamp 63 as the first position (FIG. 82(b1)), The display control device 81 controls a drive unit (not shown) in front of the auxiliary display unit 65 as the second position (FIG. 82(b2)) so that it can be displaced. When the accessory 78 is placed at the first position, the accessory 78 becomes invisible or difficult to be seen by the player, and when the accessory 78 is placed at the second position, it is placed at the first position. Also, the accessory 78 becomes easier to visually recognize, and more specifically, it becomes visible. Then, the display control device 81 displaces the accessory 78 to the second position to notify that it is a pseudo-game, and displaces the accessory 78 to the first position to indicate that it is not a pseudo-game. It will be in a state where notification is performed (notification that it is a pseudo game is not performed).

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which notification of a pseudo-game is performed by the action of the accessory 78, it becomes difficult for the player to miss the notification, and while clearly grasping the difference between the normal game and the pseudo-game, It is possible to enhance the effect of playing a game.

<First Embodiment γ>
In the embodiment .alpha. and the first embodiment .beta. of the above 1a, in the case of winning as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, if winning is established as a result of starting the AT mode, the AT A mode is started, and when winning is not established as a result of starting the AT mode, the pattern combination corresponding to the winning as a result of starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in a rotating performance to start the AT mode. bottom. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if a prize is won as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, and even if winning is established as a result of starting the AT mode, the predetermined condition is not satisfied. If not, the pattern combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped in the rotating effect, and the AT mode is started. For example, the configuration is such that the AT mode is not started without executing the rotating effect.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), in this embodiment, in addition to the first to twelfth re-games, a thirteenth re-game is set as a prize mode. In the thirteenth replay, winning is established when the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. When the thirteenth replay win is established, as shown in FIG. 83(c), all "red 7" symbols stop on the middle line L2.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in this embodiment, when winning is achieved with index values IV=1 to 3, the 13th replay is also won in addition to the winning combination of the embodiment α of the 1a. do. That is, if the normal replay A is won with the index value IV=1, the 13th regame will be won in addition to the first to fourth regame wins. Also, when normal reply B is won with index value IV=2, the 13th regame is won in addition to the 1st to 4th regame wins and the 6th regame win. Then, when normal reply C is won with index value IV=3, the 13th regame is won in addition to the 1st to 3rd regame wins, the 5th regame win, and the 6th regame win. .

In this embodiment, as a result for starting the AT mode, the above-described various re-games are set in which a prize can be won when a win is made with index values IV=1 to 3. FIG. In other words, in this embodiment, the AT mode can be started when the normal reply A is won in the preparation mode and the 1st re-game winning to the 4th re-game winning or the 13th re-game winning is established. Yes, AT mode can be started when normal replay B is won in preparation mode and 1st to 4th regame wins, 6th regame wins, or 13th regame wins are established. , and in the preparation mode, when the normal reply C is won and the 1st re-game winning to the 3rd re-game winning, the 5th re-game winning, the 6th re-game winning, or the 13th re-game winning is established It is set as AT mode can be started.

However, in this embodiment, even if various re-game winnings are established in the case where the normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the 13th re-game is set as the first condition among the predetermined conditions. When a prize is established and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of the 13th re-game winning is a specific operation mode as the second condition among the predetermined conditions, rotation effect is not performed. , and the AT mode is not started. Then, in the case where the normal replay A to C is won, if the replay winning other than the 13th replay is established and the first condition among the predetermined conditions is not satisfied, or if the 13th replay winning is not satisfied Even if it is satisfied, the AT mode is started when the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not the specific operation mode at the time of winning and the second condition among the predetermined conditions is not satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the specific operation mode as the above-mentioned second condition is set to the stop switches 42 to 44 such that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R at the time of winning the 13th regame is equal to or less than a predetermined number (1). It is set as an operation mode. In other words, when normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode, the AT mode starts when the 13th replay winning is established so that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes 1 or 0 However, when the 13th re-game winning is established so that the number of sliding frames of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes 2 to 4, the AT mode is started after the spinning effect.

More specifically, when the 13th replay winning prize is established, as shown in FIG. 83(d), the 12th "watermelon" symbol to the 14th "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L are displayed in the middle row. , and the stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the 13th "red clam" symbol to the 15th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reach the upper row, and the 12th symbol on the right reel 32R. It is necessary to operate the stop switch 44 at the timing when the 15th "BAR" pattern reaches the upper stage from the 1st "ark shell" pattern. On the other hand, in order to establish the 13th replay winning so as to satisfy the above predetermined condition, the 13th "young man" symbol to the 14th "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L reach the middle row. The stop switch 42 is operated at the timing, and the stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the 14th "red 7" symbol to the 15th "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reaches the upper row, and the 14th symbol on the right reel 32R. It is necessary to operate the stop switch 44 at the timing when the fifteenth "BAR" symbol from the "red 7" symbol of 1 reaches the upper stage. The drawing range is defined as the range of symbols that enables the 13th re-game winning regardless of the second condition, and the range of symbols that enables the 13th re-game winning to satisfy the second condition. Assuming that the range is the success determination range, it is set so that the success determination range is narrower than the pull-in range (the range of the number of symbols is small).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the start of the AT mode is avoided by the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when establishing the 13th regame winning prize when the normal replays A to C are won in the preparation mode. It has a configuration that allows In this way, a player who wants to continue the preparation mode as long as possible can use the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44 to make full use of the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44 when winning the normal reply A to C in the preparation mode. 13 replay wins are established, and it is possible to greatly improve the game performance during the preparation mode.

However, even in this embodiment, there is an upper limit to the number of continuous games in the preparation mode. The configuration is such that the AT mode is started after the rotating performance.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration and the like for realizing the above-described game characteristics will be described.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing AT start notification processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT start notification process is one process in the lottery result correspondence process executed by the main controller 101 .

At step Sa4001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is one of the normal replies A to C. If one of the normal replies A to C is won, it is determined in step Sa4002 whether or not the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 and the number of games in the preparation mode has not reached the upper limit. If normal replies A to C are won in a situation where the number of games in the preparation mode has not reached the upper limit, a process of setting a start game flag is executed in step Sa4003. Then, in step Sa4004, after executing a process of setting the avoidance instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT start notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the avoidance instruction command outputs an avoidance instruction effect to the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. to avoid the start of the AT mode by establishing the 13th regame winning prize while establishing a predetermined condition. control to do so. If a negative determination is made in step Sa4001 or step Sa4002, the AT start notification process is terminated.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing preparation mode processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the preparation mode process is one process in the winning result handling process executed by the main controller 101 .

Steps Sa4101 to Sa4105 execute processing for upgrading from the first AT mode to the second AT mode, similar to the processing of steps Sa1601 to Sa1605. In the following step Sa4106, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT preparation counter is executed in response to completion of the game. Then, in step Sa4107, it is determined whether or not the AT preparation counter has become 0.

If the AT preparation counter is not 0, it is determined in step Sa4108 whether or not the start game flag is set. If the start game flag is set and the game is a game in which normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode, in step Sa4109, various replays that can be won when normal replies A to C are won Among them, it is determined whether or not the 13th replay win has been established. When the thirteenth replay winning prize is established and the first condition among the predetermined conditions is established, the process of setting the start avoidance first command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sa4110. do. The display control device 81 that has received the start avoidance first command performs a first avoidance effect to the effect that the first condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode has been satisfied by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. to control.

In the subsequent step Sa4111, a process of grasping the number of sliding frames of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the process of calculating the number of sliding frames is performed in step Sa408 in the reel control process, the calculated number of sliding frames can be individually stored in association with each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. More specifically, the various counter areas 106e are provided with a left slide number counter, a middle slide number counter, and a right slide number counter corresponding to the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. input. At step Sa4111, it is possible to grasp the number of slips of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when stopped in the current game by grasping the values of each slip number counter. Each of these sliding number counters is cleared to 0 at the end of the game.

At step Sa4112, it is determined whether or not the number of sliding frames of any of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is 0 or 1 or not. That is, if any of the sliding number counters is 2 or more, a negative determination is made in step Sa4112.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Sa4112, a process of clearing the starting game flag is executed in step Sa4113. Then, in step Sa4114, after executing the process of setting the start avoidance second command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this preparation mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the start avoidance second command performs the avoidance second effect to the effect that the second condition out of the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode is satisfied by the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, or the like. to control. In this case, the processing for starting the AT mode is not executed, and the AT mode is not started.

On the other hand, in spite of the start game flag being set in step Sa4109, the 13th re-game winning prize is not established, and normal replies A to C are won during the preparation mode. If a replay win other than the 13th replay is established, that is, if the first condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode is not established, the process proceeds to step Sa4115. Also, in step Sa4112 any of the sliding number counter is 2 or more, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the case of establishing the 13th re-game winning is not a specific operation mode, that is, in the AT mode If the second condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step Sa4115.

In step Sa4115, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Sa4116, a process of adding 50 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step Sa4117, a process of clearing the start game flag is executed. In the following step Sa4118, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, in step Sa4119 the process of setting the freeze flag at the first start is executed, and then the preparation mode end the processing. If the second AT mode flag is set instead of the first AT mode flag, the second start freeze flag is set in step Sa4120, and then the preparation mode process is terminated. In other words, in the game in which the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode, if either the first condition or the second condition is not satisfied and the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the rotating effect is performed. AT mode is started.

If it is determined that the AT preparation counter is 0 at step Sa4107, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode flag is set at step Sa4121, and if set, a promotion command is issued at step Sa4122. Then, in step Sa4123, the first AT mode flag is cleared and the second AT mode flag is set. And when the negative determination in step Sa4121, after executing the process of step Sa4123, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step Sa4124, and the process of adding 50 to the AT game counter in step Sa4125 is executed. After the execution, in step Sa4120, the processing for setting the second start freeze flag is executed. These processes when the upper limit number of games has been reached in the preparation mode are the same as those in the first embodiment α.

Next, preparation mode effect setting processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(a). The preparation mode effect setting process is a process executed at step Sa2202 in the AT start process (FIG. 49).

In step Sa4201, processing for updating the display of the number of remaining games is executed. The display of the number of remaining games is a display for notifying the number of games until the preparation mode reaches the upper limit number of games. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. A message such as "remaining 35" is displayed in a predetermined area. The display of the number of remaining games can be updated by 1 from "40 remaining" to "0 remaining". process.

In subsequent Step Sa4202, it is determined whether or not an avoidance instruction command has been received. If the avoidance instruction command has been received and the lottery result of the current game is normal reply A to C winning as a result for starting AT mode, the avoidance instruction effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. in step Sa4203. Executes the processing set to be performed in . As the avoidance instruction presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. The 13th re-game win should be established to establish the first condition, and the 13th re-game should be won in a specific operation mode (an operation mode in which a prize is won with 0 tops or 1 tops) and the second condition should be satisfied. Inform what should be established. When negative determination is made in step Sa4202, or after executing the process of step Sa4203, it is determined whether or not the avoidance second effect flag is set in step Sa4204, and when it is not set, the preparation mode End the effect setting process.

Next, the avoidance effect setting process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 86(b). The avoidance effect setting process is a process executed as one process of step Sa2222 in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 48).

In step Sa4211, it is determined whether or not the preparation mode flag is set. If the preparation mode flag is set, the process advances to step Sa4212 to determine whether or not the start avoidance first command has been received. When the start avoidance first command is received, the 13th replay winning prize is established, and the first condition is established, the avoidance first effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. in step Sa4213. Executes the processing that is set to be performed by As the first avoidance effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 87(b), when the 13th regame winning is established, three "Red 7" symbols are displayed side by side and stopped together on the middle line L2. , and notifies that the 13th replay winning prize has been established, and displays characters such as "JUDGE!!", after this, whether or not the second condition is established is notified by an effect. make an announcement.

After executing the processing of step Sa4213, it is determined whether or not the start avoidance second command has been received in step Sa4214. When the start avoidance second command is received, the thirteenth replay wins in the specific operation mode of 0 piece bedding or 1 piece bedding, and the second condition is satisfied, the avoidance second effect is performed in step Sa4215. After executing the flag setting process, the avoidance effect setting process is terminated. When a negative determination is made in step Sa4211, step Sa4212 or step Sa4114, the avoidance effect setting process is terminated as it is.

By setting the avoidance second effect flag at step Sa4215, the determination at step Sa4204 is affirmative in the preparation mode effect setting process for the next game. When affirmative determination is made in step Sa4204, the avoidance second production flag is cleared in step Sa4205, and processing for setting the avoidance second production to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64 or the like is executed in step Sa4206. do. As the avoidance second effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(a), characters such as "Safe!!" are displayed. We will inform you that we have succeeded in making it possible. After executing the processing of step Sa4206, the preparation mode effect setting processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the game in which normal replays A to C were won during the preparation mode, the start avoidance first command was not received in step Sa4212, and a replay win other than the 13th replay was established. In this case, the start avoidance second command is not received in step Sa4214, and the 13th re-game is won in the operation mode of 2-frame bedding to 4-frame bedding, as described above, main controller 101 side In the preparation mode processing, the freeze flag at the first start and the freeze flag at the second start are set (step Sa4119, step Sa4120), and at the start of the next game of the game won in the normal reply A to C, rotation An effect is executed (Fig. 88(b), Fig. 88(c)).

In other words, in the present embodiment, when winning as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, if a predetermined condition such as winning the 13th replay in a specific operation mode is successful, , it is possible to avoid starting the AT mode. By continuing to succeed in satisfying the predetermined condition and continuing the preparation mode to the maximum number of games, promotion from the 1st AT mode to the 2nd AT mode is performed, and benefits such as an additional lottery during that time are enjoyed. It becomes possible to On the other hand, when winning as a result for starting the AT mode during the preparation mode, if a predetermined condition cannot be established, a rotating performance in which the symbol combination corresponding to the winning as a result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped. AT mode starts with .

In this case, whether or not the specific operation mode that satisfies a predetermined condition in the game won as a result of starting the AT mode is successful determines the next game after the game won as a result of starting the AT mode. It is reported at the start, it is reported that the specific operation mode is successful by not executing the rotating performance, and it is reported that the specific operation mode is not successful by executing the rotating performance. Therefore, a player who wants to delay the start of the AT mode as much as possible operates the start lever 41 while expecting that the spinning effect will not be executed. On the other hand, even when the rotating effect is executed, the AT mode is not simply started, but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped. It is possible to give the impression that at least the start of the AT mode has been won as a result of the game.

By doing so, it is possible to add a game in which the start of the won AT mode is delayed by one's own operation while giving the impression of winning the start of the AT mode by one's own operation, and the rotation effect is used. It is possible to preferably improve the game playability of starting the AT mode.

In addition, as described above, both the start timing of the rotating effect at which the notification of the start of the AT mode is performed and the execution timing of the avoidance second effect at which the start of the AT mode has been avoided are both normal replies. Since it is the start of the next game after the A to C winning games, in the game feature of delaying the start of the AT mode as described above, the answer as to whether or not the delay could be made is performed at the start of the next game. Thus, it is possible to realize an interesting game property in which the player puts effort into the operation, such as performing the start operation of the next game while wishing that the delay could be made.

In addition, the success or failure of the second condition among the predetermined conditions for avoiding the start of the AT mode cannot be determined from the stop result. The interest of people will be improved.

In the situation where the success or failure of the second condition cannot be determined, the game is terminated as it is. It is possible to do it at the free timing of the person.

<First Embodiment δ>
In the 1ath embodiment α to the 1ath embodiment γ, in the preparation mode after the AT mode winning notification effect is performed and before the AT mode is started, the result for starting the AT mode The AT mode is started when the game is won, and when the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode is reached, the AT mode is started by generating a rotation performance corresponding to the results for starting the AT mode. However, in this embodiment, it is applied to the CZ mode. That is, in the present embodiment, in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode and the predetermined result is won, the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is notified. , In the CZ mode, when the upper limit number of games in the CZ mode is reached without winning a predetermined result even if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a rotation performance corresponding to the predetermined result is generated to enter the AT mode transition lottery. Notify that you have been selected.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the number of ceiling games has been reached in step Sa4302, or when it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery is won in step Sa4308, the process proceeds to step Sa4309, and the AT mode winning flag is set. Execute the processing to be performed. Then, at step Sa4310, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. The processing of steps Sa4314 to Sa4318 is the same as the processing of steps Sa817 to Sa820. Also, when it is determined that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in step Sa4308, the CZ mode transition lottery etc. are performed in steps Sa4311 to Sa4314 in the same manner as the processing of steps Sa813 to Sa816. Then, in steps Sa4314 to Sa4318, the process for setting the portent mode is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa4310 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode, the processing for setting the portent mode is not performed, and the processing for terminating the CZ mode (step Without executing Sa810 and step Sa811), the AT lottery process is ended.

That is, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode does not end, and the CZ mode continues until the upper limit number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode is consumed. It is configured. However, since the information (AT mode winning flag) indicating that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is set as described above, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the remaining games in the CZ mode, and AT addition processing is performed. will be executed.

FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the precursor mode processing in this embodiment. As already described, the portent mode process is a process executed as one process in the winning result handling process by main controller 101 .

In step Sa4401, a precursor counter subtraction process is executed. Then, in step Sa4402, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the precursor mode processing is terminated. When the portent counter becomes 0, the portent flag is cleared in step Sa4403, and it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sa4404, and if it is set, step Sa4405. , the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, AT type determination processing is executed in step Sa4406, processing of inputting 40 to the AT preparation counter is executed in step Sa4407, and processing of setting an AT winning notification command is executed in step Sa4408. The processing of steps Sa4405 to Sa4408 is the same as the processing of steps Sa1205 to Sa1207 except that the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step Sa4405.

After executing the process of step Sa4408, in step Sa4409, after executing the process of setting the freezing flag at the start of notification in the various flag storage area 106d, the precursor mode process ends. The freezing flag at the start of notification is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is to be executed in a rotating effect. A configuration for informing that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery with a rotating effect will be described later in detail.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step Sa4404 and the current portent mode is triggered by winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the CZ mode is started in steps Sa4410 to Sa4413. After executing the process for the portent mode, the process for the precursor mode ends. The processing of steps Sa4410 to Sa4413 is the same as the processing of steps Sa1208 to Sa1211.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing AT win notification processing in this embodiment. The AT win notification process is a process for notifying that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode. Performed after processing.

In step Sa4501, it is determined whether or not the informing reply of the current game is won.

Here, in the present embodiment, the notification that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode is configured to be executed when the normal replies A to C in the embodiment γ of the above 1a are won, and step Sa4501. The report for notification determined in , corresponds to the normal reply A to C. If the lottery result of the game this time is that the normal replies A to C have not been won, the AT winning notification processing is terminated as it is.

If the result of the lottery for the current game is Normal Lips A to C, it is determined in step Sa4502 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step Sa4503 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step Sa4502 or step Sa4503, the AT win notification process is terminated as it is. If both the CZ mode flag and the AT mode winning flag are set, the process proceeds to step Sa4504.

At step Sa4504, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. In subsequent step Sa4505, AT type determination processing is executed. The AT type determination process is the same as the process of step Sa4406. Note that the AT type determination process (step Sa4505) when winning the AT mode shift lottery during the CZ mode and the other AT type determination process (step Sa4406), the ratio of setting to the first AT mode and the second AT mode may be different, and it may be easier to set the second AT mode during the CZ mode. This point is the same for the above-described 1a embodiment α to 1a embodiment γ.

In the subsequent step Sa4506, a process of setting a winning notification game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The winning notification game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the game is a game for notifying that the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode and that the AT mode transition lottery is won. Then, in step Sa4507, after executing a process of setting the operation instruction command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT win notification process is terminated. The operation instruction command corresponds to the avoidance instruction command in the embodiment γ of the above-described 1a, and the display control device 81 that has received such an operation instruction command displays the above avoidance instruction effect (FIG. 87(a)). In addition, three characters imitating the "Red 7" pattern are displayed side by side, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are used to notify that it is a situation that should be operated aiming at winning the 13th replay. Execute the process.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the CZ mode processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the CZ mode process is a process executed as one process in the winning result handling process by the main controller 101 .

At step Sa4601, the CZ game counter is subtracted, and at next step Sa4602, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become zero. If it becomes 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared at step Sa4603, and the process of setting the CZ end command is executed at step Sa4604.

In subsequent step Sa4605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is not set in a situation where the CZ game counter has reached 0, or if the CZ game counter has not reached 0 at step Sa4602, the process proceeds to step Sa4606.

At step Sa4606, it is determined whether or not the winning notification game flag is set. In a game in which the winning notification game flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, and the winning of the AT mode transition lottery is to be notified in the normal reply A to C. If so, the process advances to step Sa4607 to execute processing for clearing the winning notification game flag. Then, in step Sa4608, it is determined whether or not the 13th replay winning prize has been established, and if it has been established, the process of clearing the CZ game counter to 0 is executed in step Sa4609, and step At Sa4610, the process for turning on the AT winning output terminal provided on the external centralized terminal board 121 is executed, and then the CZ mode process is terminated. The output terminal for AT winning is for outputting the information that the AT mode transition lottery has been won to the data display of the game hall or the hall computer connected to the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 121. terminal. The configuration of the AT winning output terminal is the same as that of the AT output terminal 121d. When the AT winning output terminal is turned ON, the signal output from the AT winning output terminal becomes a HI signal. Information that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery is output to the computer. It should be noted that the output terminal for winning AT is turned OFF after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5) have been played after being turned ON.

In step Sa4605, the AT mode winning flag is set at the end of the CZ mode, and although the AT mode transition lottery was won during the CZ mode, it should be notified that the AT mode transition lottery was won. If the normal reply A to C is not won, the process proceeds to step Sa4611. At step Sa4611, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed. Then, AT type determination processing is executed in step Sa4612. Note that the AT type determination process at the end of the CZ mode, the AT type determination process during the CZ mode (step Sa4505), and the other AT type determination process (step Sa4406), the first AT mode and the second AT mode The ratios to be set may be different, and the AT type determination process at the end of the CZ mode may facilitate setting to the second AT mode.

After executing the process of step Sa4612, after executing the process of setting the freeze flag at the start of notification in step Sa4613, the process for CZ mode ends. In addition, in step Sa4608, the 13th re-game winning has not been established, and although the winning of the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode should be reported, the corresponding result winning has been won. can not be established, the freeze flag at the start of notification is set in step Sa4613, and then the CZ mode processing is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the normal mode (non-CZ mode) and the number of precursor games is consumed, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode And if you reach the upper limit of the number of games in CZ mode without winning the normal reply A to C, or if you win the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode and you win the normal reply A to C In spite of this, when the thirteenth replay winning prize cannot be established, the start freeze flag for notification is set. Hereinafter, the rotation effect processing when the freeze flag at the start of notification is set will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the rotation effect processing in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the first start freeze flag, the second start freeze flag, or the notification start freeze flag is set in step Sa4701. If none of the start-time freeze flags are set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is. If any freeze flag is set at the start, in step Sa4702, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply A to C winning. If not, the process proceeds to step Sa4703. In step Sa4703, a process of setting a rotation effect command is executed, and in step Sa4704, a process of grasping the positional relationship of the corresponding symbols is executed.

Then, in step Sa4705, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the first start is set, and if it is set, in step Sa4706, the state in which the symbols to become the second replay winning prize after 2 seconds are complete. , the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a low speed. If the freeze flag at the first start is not set, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the second start is set in step Sa4707. The accelerations of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are set so that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R rotate at a low speed in a state where the symbols that will later win the third replay are aligned. These steps Sa4706 and Sa4708 are the same as the steps Sa2306 and Sa2307.

A negative determination in step Sa4707 means that the freeze flag at start of notification is set. In this case, in step Sa4709, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a low speed in a state where the symbols that will win the 13th replay after 2 seconds are aligned. set. More specifically, for example, the left reel 32L is used as a reference reel, and based on the grasped symbol position, the thirteenth replay symbol (“red 7” symbol) arranged on the reference reel before the start of rotation. , and the number of separated symbols from the middle reel 32M and the second replay symbols ("bell" symbol, "BAR" symbol) on the right reel 32R. For example, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously started to rotate in the positive direction, and the left reel 32L, which serves as the reference reel, rotates three times after 2 seconds, the left reel 32L has 20 symbols. In 3 turns, 60 patterns are rotated in 2 seconds. In this case, the separation pattern number between the second re-game pattern of the middle reel 32M and the 13th re-game pattern of the reference reel is a pattern, and the separation pattern between the second re-game pattern of the right reel 32R and the 13th re-game pattern of the reference reel. Assuming that the number is b symbols, the acceleration of the middle reel 32M is set to rotate by the number of symbols obtained by adding a symbol to 60 symbols after 2 seconds, and the acceleration of the right reel 32R is set to 60 symbols after 2 seconds. It is set to rotate by the number of symbols including the b symbol. After 2 seconds, after all the symbol combinations that result in the 13th replay winning prize are rotated, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are set to rotate at a constant low speed.

After executing the processing of step Sa4706, step Sa4708 or step Sa4709, in step Sa4710 to step Sa4722, after executing processing for various rotation effects, the rotation effect processing ends. The processing of step Sa4710 to step Sa4722 is generally the same as the processing of step Sa2308 to step Sa2318. different.

That is, when it is determined at step Sa4716 that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has temporarily stopped timing, at step Sa4717 it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the start of notification is set. If not, a process of setting the AT start command at startup as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed to perform an AT start performance at startup. On the other hand, when the freeze flag at the start of notification is set in step Sa4717, the process of setting the AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sa4719, An AT winning notification performance is performed. After executing the process of step Sa4718 or step Sa4719, after executing the process for maintaining the temporarily stopped state (step Sa4720 to step Sa4722), etc., the rotation effect process ends.

Also, if it is determined in step Sa4702 that the lottery result of this game is normal reply A to C winning, it is determined in step Sa4723 whether or not the AT preparation counter is greater than 0. In the next game when the AT preparation counter is greater than 0 and normal replays A to C are won during the preparation mode and the second regame winning prize or the third regame winning prize cannot be established. If there is, the process advances to step Sa4703 to perform processing for executing a rotation effect.

When the AT preparation counter is 0, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter is greater than 0 in step Sa4724. The case where the CZ game counter is greater than 0 means that the AT mode transition lottery was won during the CZ mode, and although the normal replays A to C were won, the 13th replay winning prize could not be established. It progresses to step Sa4703 and performs the process for performing rotation production|presentation.

On the other hand, if the next game that has reached the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode or CZ mode is a normal reply A to C winning, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is without performing the rotation effect in the game. do. In this case, if the game following the game that has reached the upper limit game of the preparation mode is a normal reply A to C winning, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize is performed. We (Fig. 56), when the game next to the game that has reached the upper limit game of the CZ mode is a normal reply A to C winning, an operation instruction effect to establish the 13th replay winning prize is performed (Fig. 87(a)).

That is, in the AT winning notification process (FIG. 91), if the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sa4502, the process advances to step Sa4508 to determine whether or not the freezing flag for notification is set. If the informing freeze flag is set in the game after the CZ mode flag has been cleared, it means that the game is the game following the game that has reached the upper limit number of games in the CZ mode as described above. , Because the lottery result of the game is normal reply A to C (step Sa4501: YES), in this case, after clearing the freeze flag at the start of the notification at step Sa4509, the process proceeds to step Sa4507, the thirteenth repeat After executing a process of setting an operation instruction command for establishing a game winning, the AT win notification process is terminated.

Also in the present embodiment, the reservation state is set so that the AT output terminal 121d is turned on during the rotation effect. In addition, when the spinning performance is performed when the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, the reservation state is set so that the output terminal for AT winning is in the ON state during the spinning performance. . Specifically, in the above external output setting first process (FIG. 60), if any of the first freeze flag at start, the second freeze flag at start, and the freeze flag at start for notification is set ( Step Sa2601: YES), the reserved output flag is set (step Sa2602), and 2100 is input to the reserved output counter (step Sa2603).

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing timer update processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the timer update process is a process executed as one process in the timer interrupt process by the main controller 101 .

The processing of steps Sa4801 to Sa4804 is the same as the processing of steps Sa2701 to Sa2704. At step Sa4805, it is determined whether or not the reserved output flag is set. If the reserved output flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the reserved output counter is executed in step Sa4806. Then, in step Sa4807, it is determined whether or not the reserved output counter has reached 0. If the reserved output counter has become 0, processing for clearing the reserved output flag is executed in step Sa4808. In the following step Sa4809, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, and if it is not set and the reservation state is based on the first freeze flag at the start or the second freeze flag at the start In step Sa4810, the AT output terminal 121d is turned on. On the other hand, in step Sa4809, the freeze flag at the start of the notification is set, and in the case of the reservation state in the rotation effect for informing that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, AT winning in step Sa4811. A process for turning on the output terminal for

If a negative determination is made in step Sa4805 or step Sa4807, or after the processing of step Sa4810 or step Sa4811 is executed, other various counter updating processing is executed in step Sa4812, and then the timer updating processing is terminated. .

As described above, the configuration for notification of starting the AT mode in the preparation mode such as Embodiment 1a may be applied to notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode, In view of the game characteristics of the slot machine 10 aiming to win the AT mode shift lottery and shift to the AT mode, after the AT mode shift lottery is won, the AT mode start result notification is performed including spinning performance. Compared to the configuration of Embodiment 1a, etc., the configuration of this embodiment, in which the result of winning the AT mode transition lottery is announced including the rotation effect, has the effect of making the notification of the result look forward to. It can be said that it is expensive. In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the result of being notified (AT mode transition winning) has been won by one's own operation, and the effect of performing the rotation effect and the game during the rotation effect It is possible to obtain the effect of outputting information to a device external to the machine more favorably.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) As the result for starting the AT mode and the result for notifying the success of the AT mode transition, the configuration using the normal replies A to C has been described, but the configuration may be such that results different from the normal replies A to C are used. In addition, the winning probability of normal replies A to C is not limited to the above, and it may be easier to win (higher winning probability) or harder to win (lower winning probability). There may be. For example, when normal replies A to C are used as results for starting AT mode, the denominator of the winning probability of normal replies A to C may be a winning probability that is a number equal to or more than the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode. In this case, it is possible to realize game characteristics on the premise that the upper limit number of games (40) is easily reached in the preparation mode. For example, if the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode before the upper limit of the preparation mode is reached, a privilege is given to the player, so that winning as a result of starting the AT mode during the preparation mode is prevented. It is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the player look forward to the game, and the effect of giving the impression that the player has won the AT mode start by his/her own operation by displaying the winning result for starting the AT mode. Note that the privilege to be given when winning as a result of starting the AT mode before the upper limit is reached is, for example, an addition to the initial number of games in the AT mode. In addition, we will change the configuration where promotion to 2nd AT mode is confirmed by reaching the upper limit of preparation mode, and make it a privilege that promotion to 2nd AT mode will be confirmed by winning the result for starting AT mode before reaching the upper limit. is also possible.

(2) The result for starting AT mode and the result for notification of winning AT mode transition have a different probability of winning as a result depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process (especially normal reply A) configuration However, regardless of the set value, the probability of winning the result for starting the AT mode and the result for notifying that the AT mode transition has been won may be the same probability. Further, even in the configuration in which the probability of winning differs depending on the set value, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the higher the set value, the more difficult it is to win. may be configured differently.

(3) The AT type determination process is executed when the number of precursor games becomes 0 and the mode is shifted to the preparation mode, but it may be executed when the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, the promotion lottery may be performed even in the game during the omen mode.

(4) Notification of the pressing order at the time of winning the result for starting the AT mode is performed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side. Either one of them may be used. For example, the main control device 101 may not execute the function, but the display control device 81 may execute the function.

(5) The instruction monitor 68 is configured to be able to notify each of the six operation sequences. A configuration may be adopted in which only the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated first are notified of the pressing order for the pressing order to which only the 42 to 44 are associated.

(6) Although the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends. For example, the advantageous interval may not end according to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode. If the number multiplied by the expected increase per game is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section, or if it is less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section may not be terminated. If the number obtained by multiplying the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY with the above multiplied number is less than the upper limit increase number (2400) or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section will not end. can be

(7) The lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is controlled during transition to an advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which lighting control is performed when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the interval. The predetermined lighting condition may be established, for example, when a shift to the AT mode is confirmed, or when a situation arises in which notification of the pressing order may occur.

(8) A configuration may be adopted in which the press order notification is executed at least once during the CZ mode. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed at least once in the AT mode. , the AT mode or the CZ mode may not be terminated.

(9) At the start of the AT mode, the number of initial games in the AT mode may be determined according to the value of the AT preparation counter. For example, as the value of the AT preparation counter increases, the number of initial games in the AT mode (the value added to the AT game counter in step Sa1611, step Sa1618, etc.) tends to increase or increases. When the AT mode is started in a situation where the number of games played is small, it is possible to compensate for not being able to sufficiently complete the preparation mode (for example, not being able to receive many promotion lotteries).

(10) In the rotation effect process, the rotation is performed at a low speed and then temporarily stopped.

(11) In the rotating effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped, but the symbol combination different from the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning result for AT mode start is temporarily stopped. may be

(12) In the rotating effect, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is temporarily stopped on the effective line ML, but the winning result for starting the AT mode is supported on a line different from the effective line ML. It is also possible to temporarily stop the symbol combination to be played.

(13) When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped in a rotating performance including a pseudo-game, the reels may be vibrated in small increments without being stopped, swayed, or held at a fixed position while being operated. good. In this sense, stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while they are operating may be regarded as a temporary stop, and not being operated may be regarded as a stop.

(14) Including a pseudo game, it may be configured to rotate at a low speed without stopping or temporarily stopping in the rotation effect, and at least the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode can be visually recognized by the player. Any configuration may be employed as long as it is controlled so as to cause such a situation.

(15) In the preparation mode, when the maximum number of games is reached, the second AT mode is set. The first AT mode may be set even when the upper limit number of games is reached.

(16) When the result for starting the AT mode is won, if the winning result for starting the AT mode cannot be established, the AT mode is started by executing the rotation effect in the next game. The game in which the AT mode is started in the rotating effect is not limited to the next game, and may be the game after the next time. For example, a predetermined number ( For example, after the game in 3), the AT mode may be started with a rotating effect. In this case, in the game from the game in which winning was not established as a result for starting the AT mode to the predetermined number of games, if the result for starting the AT mode is won again, a spinning effect is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the operation instruction notification is performed so as to establish a winning as a result of the AT mode start without performing the operation instruction notification. It is good also as composition which advances execution of rotation production so that it may not be performed.

(17) In one preparation mode, if winning as a result for starting the AT mode cannot be achieved when the result for starting the AT mode is won, that information is stored as information that can be handed over to the next and subsequent preparation modes. may be configured. In this case, for example, if there is information that could not establish a prize as a result for starting the AT mode, even if the first result for starting the AT mode in the preparation mode is won, the rotation effect is performed in the game. may be performed and the operation instruction notification may not be performed. In addition, when the number of times that a prize-winning result for starting the AT mode could not be established reaches a predetermined number of times, as described above, even if the first result for starting the AT mode is won, the rotation effect is performed. It may be configured to give priority, or may be configured to decide to give priority to rotating performance when the result of AT mode start is won by lottery or the like according to the number of times the winning has not been established. It should be noted that, when winning the result for starting the AT mode, the information that the result of the AT mode start could not be established may be stored as information that is not subject to the initialization process of the advantageous section information.

(18) In the pseudo-game, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, all the unstopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, but when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. Alternatively, some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are not stopped may be stopped. In this case, which reel is to be stopped may be determined by a lottery or the like, or if the operation instruction notification is performed along with the pressing order notification, the reels are stopped according to the operation order. may be configured.

(19) In the pseudo-game, when the first credit input switch 56 is operated, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have not been stopped are stopped simultaneously, but they may be stopped sequentially. In this case, the order of stopping may be determined by a lottery or the like, or in the case where the operation instruction notification is performed along with the pressing order notification, the reels may be stopped according to the operation order. .

(20) Not limited to the pseudo-game, the timing of performing the rotation effect is not limited to before the normal game, it may be after the normal game, or between the normal game and the normal game. good too.

(21) In the pseudo-game, the number of slides of 5 symbols or more is allowed, but it may be configured to perform stop control so that the number of slides is within 4 symbols as in the normal game. In this case, even if the stop operation is performed in the pseudo-game, the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning may not be stopped. If it does not stop, after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped or before all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the second re-game winning, the third re-game winning, etc. are dealt with again. The symbol combination may be stopped. Re-fluctuation may be performed only on reels whose corresponding symbols have not stopped, or may be performed on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Alternatively, the rotation effect may be ended in a state in which the symbol combinations corresponding to the second re-game winning prize, the third re-game winning prize, etc. are not stopped without re-fluctuation. It is good also as composition which performs production. In the second rotation performance, the rotation performance is performed in a mode (a mode of the embodiment α of the first a) in which the symbol combination corresponding to the second re-game winning prize, the third re-game winning prize, etc. is automatically stopped without a stop operation. may be configured to perform

(22) If the lottery result of the target game for the rotation effect is a win for starting the AT mode, if the target game is triggered by the completion of the upper limit game of the preparation mode, the execution of the rotation effect is restricted, while the previous game If it is a target game triggered by the failure to establish a winning result for the AT mode start, the execution of the rotation effect is allowed, but it may be configured to limit both. may also be allowed. In addition, if the target game is triggered by the completion of the upper limit game of the preparation mode, a spinning effect (aspect of the embodiment β of the first a) is executed in a pseudo game, while the previous game establishes a winning result for starting the AT mode. If it is a target game triggered by the fact that it could not be made, it may be configured to execute a rotation effect (aspect of the embodiment α of the first a) without a pseudo game.

(23) In the external output setting first process in the reel control process, the game output terminal 121a is turned on. It may be at the end of the game (for example, when the payout determination process or the winning result handling process is executed), or the game output terminal 121a is turned ON in the rotation start process in the reel control process. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In the configuration in which the game output terminal 121a is turned on in the rotation start process, for example, it may be turned on when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate after the wait period has elapsed. In this case, if the rotation start process is the start timing of the normal operation, the timing of turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT during the rotation effect can be said to be such a configuration that it is turned on before the normal operation in one game. .

(24) The timing for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is not limited to the above timing. For example, if the ON state is set during the rotating effect, the timing may be before the symbol combination corresponding to the result winning for AT mode start is temporarily stopped, and it corresponds to the result winning for AT mode start. It may be the timing of rotating at a low speed in a state in which the desired symbol combination is aligned, or may be the timing before the symbol combination is aligned. Also, the timing may be the same as the timing at which the symbol combination is stopped.

(25) The execution timing of the reservation processing (processing for setting a preparation counter, processing for setting a reservation output counter, etc.) for turning on the AT output terminal 121d is not limited to the above. For example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON after the total number of precursor games and the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode (the total number of games is set to a predetermined counter). ), and after the total number of games of the number of ceiling games, the number of precursor games (upper limit number of precursor games), and the upper limit number of games in the preparation mode, the AT output terminal 121d may be configured to perform processing for turning on the . In addition, regarding the processing of setting the timing (reservation output counter) for turning ON the output terminal 121d for AT, in the game before the target game in which the rotation effect is executed A configuration may be adopted in which the processing for setting the timing is executed at the time of the transition to the advantageous section).

(26) The configuration is such that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON by the AT preparation counter or the like to manage the game when shifting to the preparation mode or the like. 121d may be set to an ON state to indicate a reserved state. In this case, in the preparation mode or the like, if the player wins as a result of starting the AT mode, the above flag may be cleared. is cleared, the flag may be set again if the winning result cannot be established when the result is won.

(27) On the premise that the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON when a prize is established as a result of starting the AT mode, the AT output terminal 121d is turned ON even during the spinning effect. In the rotating effect, information indicating that the shift to the AT mode will occur may be output from another output terminal, and in the rotating effect, other information may be output.

(28) The symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game are used to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode. The ratio between the number of symbols stopped and the number of symbols stopped in the pseudo-game is not limited to the above. A configuration may be adopted in which two symbols are used to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode. In addition, the symbol combination is made up of two symbols that are less than the total number of reels, and one symbol that is stopped in the normal game is used and one symbol that is stopped in the pseudo game is used. may be configured to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode.

(29) Assuming the game of 1, using the symbols stopped in the normal game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode is stopped. However, the configuration may be such that the symbol combination is stopped across games. Specifically, the symbol combination may be stopped using the symbols stopped in the normal game of the previous game and the symbols stopped in the pseudo-game of the next game. In this case, in the rotation effect process, the reels for the symbols stopped in the normal game of the previous game are kept stopped, the reels for performing the pseudo game are rotated, and the reels are stopped to achieve the above symbol combination. should be stopped. Then, after the symbol combination is stopped, the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may be started by the rotation start processing.

(30) The aspect of the rotation production is an example. For example, the period until the low-speed rotation is reached with all the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning result for starting the AT mode may be longer or shorter than the above period, or the symbol combination may be completed. The symbol combination may be stopped at the time of stopping by making the stop timing different without rotating in the state of holding. Also, the period during which the symbol combination remains stopped may be longer or shorter than the above. ), the process may be shifted to the rotation start process.

(31) In the preparation mode, it is possible to prevent the execution of push order notification, prevent the execution of the promotion lottery and the additional lottery, and make it advantageous to win the AT mode start result early in the preparation mode. good. In addition, even in the CZ mode, even after winning the AT mode shift lottery, the additional lottery is not executed until the AT mode shift lottery is won as a result of notifying the AT mode shift lottery, and after winning the AT mode shift lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it is advantageous to be elected as a result of notifying AT mode shift election early.

(32) In order to notify that the AT mode is to be started, etc., a configuration in which the symbol combinations such as the 2nd re-game winning prize, the 3rd re-game winning prize, the 13th re-game winning prize, etc. are stopped using normal replies A to C. However, the second re-game winning, the third re-game winning, the thirteenth re-game winning, and the like may not be established if the start of the AT mode is not notified. For example, an operation sequence different from the second re-game winning, the third re-game winning, the 13th re-game winning, etc. may be executed in the pressing order notification or the pressing order notification effect.

(33) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(34) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(35) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(36) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(37) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict the execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, such that the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is restricted while the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is permitted in the game in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(38) The 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB to win, and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB to win. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(39) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(40) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(41) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(42) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about +0.00, and the medals in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state neither increase nor decrease. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(43) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or by establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(44) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(45) A slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(46) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(47) In the above embodiment, the game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Second b Embodiment α>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 in the 2b embodiment α will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 95 and 96. FIG. In the following description, configurations different from the above embodiments will be described, and descriptions of configurations common to the above embodiments will be omitted. Further, in the following description, components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment are described using the same reference numerals, and components having the same reference characters but different functions are denoted by specific reference numerals in this embodiment. shall be treated as

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a for detecting the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power failure based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when power is cut off by power failure processing (see FIG. 97), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 96, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step Sb101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. At step Sb102, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step Sb102, various processes after step Sb104 are performed.

That is, in step Sb104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step Sb105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt termination declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step Sb106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step Sb107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 95) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step Sb108, a timer update process is performed to subtract/add the value of each counter or timer. In step Sb109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out.

In step Sb110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step Sb111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step Sb112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step Sb113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step Sb114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step Sb101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step Sb115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step Sb201, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step Sb202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps Sb203 to Sb212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step Sb203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step Sb204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings have been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing (step Sb107) of the timer interrupt processing. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step Sb205 whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step Sb205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step Sb205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the bet number is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step Sb205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sb204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step Sb205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step Sb206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step Sb110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step Sb206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step Sb207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sb204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step Sb208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step Sb209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step Sb210, the reel control process of step Sb211, and the medal payout process of step Sb212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step Sb203.

Next, the lottery process of step Sb210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb301, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step Sb302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly classified into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state includes the lottery table for the 3-bet game, A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step Sb302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . If the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game status lottery table (FIG. 100) for the 3-bet game is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 101). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step Sb302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step Sb302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 100 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 101 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step Sb303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step Sb304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step Sb301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to obtain a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step Sb305, it is determined whether the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step Sb306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step Sb305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step Sb306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set at step Sb306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, at step Sb306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating that the first BB has been won or a winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating that the second BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see Sb203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step Sb306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and a combination other than 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. Further, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=11 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step Sb305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step Sb307, and in the subsequent step Sb308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step Sb304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step Sb304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step Sb305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 respectively, and the probability of winning the pushing order bell is about 1/1.53. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, a reduction of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, when the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step Sb306, or when it is determined in step Sb308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process proceeds to step Sb309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step Sb310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process of determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results of steps Sb301 to Sb308, a process of notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step Sb310, a lottery result command is set in step Sb311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step Sb110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step Sb312, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step Sb306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be achieved only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB win flag is set, if the game is started as a two-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sb312, the stop symbol information that establishes the first BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sb312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step Sb313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step Sb312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the combination of winning symbols is set so that, when a re-game is won, one of the re-games among the re-games that are won wins a prize. In other words, if the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step Sb313, after executing the section display first process in step Sb314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing of step Sb211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step Sb401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in the above step Sb309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step Sb310, etc., for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period. processing. In the following step Sb402, rotation start processing is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step Sb106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step Sb403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Sb404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step Sb403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step Sb405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps Sb406 to Sb412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step Sb406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step Sb407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the engine is stopped. Therefore, in step Sb407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step Sb408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reaching symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. At step Sb409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed at step Sb410. conduct. After that, in step Sb411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step Sb412, and the process returns to step Sb403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is made when IV=11 to 22, that is, when winning is made at the push order bell (see FIGS. 100 and 101), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established in the case of winning. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor winning combination can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the upper stage cannot be stopped, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step Sb411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step Sb413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step Sb414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, in step Sb415, a winning result handling process is carried out. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the section display second process is performed in step Sb416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step Sb417, a winning result command is set so as to cause the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step Sb212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step Sb204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step Sb414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sb501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on whether there is a first BB state flag or a second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step Sb501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step Sb502.

In step Sb502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb503.

In step Sb503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step Sb503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In subsequent step Sb504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Sb505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step Sb506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step Sb506. In step Sb507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step Sb508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step Sb501. In subsequent step Sb509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to is performed. Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the 1st BB start command in step Sb509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sb510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the 1BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the 1BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step Sb505 that the 1st BB winning has not been established means that the 2nd BB winning has been established. In this case, the process advances to step Sb511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step Sb512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step Sb513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step Sb514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step Sb514, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step Sb510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed as a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step Sb515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 105 shows an example of the lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step Sb515, it is determined whether or not any small win has been established in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step Sb516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step Sb517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step Sb516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st to 6th small wins are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step Sb516 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step Sb517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, in step Sb518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step Sb519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step Sb520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step Sb521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, this bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step Sb519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, winning of the 2nd BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB win is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. Also, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 103) of winning the 1st to 6th small wins when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step Sb310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps Sb601 to Sb603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step Sb601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sb602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sb603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of step Sb602 and step Sb603 is the processing of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step Sb604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the prescribed bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step Sb604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb602 or step Sb603, it is determined in step Sb604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Sb605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sb701. Then, in step Sb702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 109, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 109, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step Sb702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step Sb703. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery. The dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and the latest updated value of the counters is obtained in step Sb703. Then, in step Sb704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step Sb705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step Sb701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps Sb702 to Sb705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step Sb705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step Sb706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. When a negative determination is made in step Sb705, or after the process of step Sb706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step Sb604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sb606. In step Sb606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If neither flag is set in step Sb606, AT lottery processing is executed in step Sb607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step Sb606, continuation determination processing is executed in step Sb608, and AT addition processing is executed in step Sb609.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step Sb607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step Sb801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step Sb802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps Sb803 to Sb808.

That is, in step Sb803, the process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step Sb804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step Sb804, at step Sb805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set at step Sb804, then at step Sb806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 109, the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ have respective winning probabilities for the AT mode transition lottery set according to the game lottery results. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step Sb805 or step Sb806, AT mode transition lottery processing is performed in step Sb807 using the obtained transition lottery table and the lottery result of the game grasped in step Sb803. to run. Then, in step Sb808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step Sb808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step Sb802, the processing for AT mode winning at steps Sb809 to Sb812 is executed. If it is determined in step Sb808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, the AT mode non-win process is executed in steps Sb813 to Sb816.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step Sb809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition win during the CZ mode. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps Sb810 and Sb811. That is, in step Sb810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step Sb811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sb809, or after the process of step Sb811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sb812. By such processing, the affirmative determination is made in step Sb606 from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step Sb813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step Sb814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step Sb803. . As shown in FIG. 109, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, in the event that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in spite of the lottery result of a game in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is set so that the transition to the CZ mode is facilitated.

After executing the CZ mode shift lottery process in step Sb814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode shift lottery process was won in step Sb815, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. If it is a CZ mode transition win, in step Sb816, a process of setting a CZ mode win flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step Sb812 or step Sb816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps Sb817 to Sb820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step Sb817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step Sb817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode, so you won the AT mode transition lottery through the end of the CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that even though it is known that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition lottery is won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step Sb818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step Sb817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step Sb819, the process of setting the portent flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step Sb820, the process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step Sb608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games are set as one set (number of unit continuations, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (set is When starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set will be held, and if you win the continuation lottery, after the end of the set, you will move to the next set and will not win the continuation lottery. , the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. The continuation determination process in step Sb608 is a process for performing the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In step Sb901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step Sb901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is one set of AT mode start games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step Sb902.

In step Sb902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set without performing the continuation lottery even if the continuation lottery is not won, and the continuation condition is This is a counter which is incremented by 1 when winning an additional lottery in the established situation, and is subtracted by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or when the next set is continued without performing the continuation lottery. If the AT set counter is 0, in step Sb903, the winning probability of the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. A high rate of 90% and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step Sb1211 described later). In step Sb903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step Sb903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step Sb904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the winning will continue with a probability of 90% in the process of step Sb904, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10% will be won in the process of step Sb904. Percentage chance of winning continuously.

In step Sb905, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step Sb904 is continuous winning, and if continuous winning is determined, in step Sb906, a process of setting a continuous flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step Sb907, after executing the processing of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination processing ends.

Also, if it is determined in step Sb902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step Sb908, and then the process advances to step Sb906 to set the continuation flag and issue the continuation command. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be met if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when one set of the AT mode is started (when the start lever 41 is operated), whether or not the continuation condition of whether or not the AT mode continues to the next set of the set to be started this time is satisfied or not. A determination is made, and when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, a continuation flag is set, and the information is output to the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb905 that it is not the continuation winning, the continuation determination processing is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not established by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs the production on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the production of the current set. Take action to ensure that

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step Sb609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, separate from the above continuation lottery, an add-on lottery to add the number of sets in AT mode is performed. Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step Sb1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Sb1002, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 109, the additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, specific roles such as Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, Common Bell, and Watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, are set to allow additional wins. It is In the lottery process of each game, among the specific roles, for example, chance C is more likely to be won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be won than cherry A. It is set such that the harder the lottery results are, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. It should be noted that, if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be won, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which an additional win can be won even when the lottery result of each game is a normal role, and the probability of the extra win in the normal role is lower than the probability of the extra win in the case of a specific role. .

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step Sb1002, an additional lottery is executed in step Sb1003, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step Sb1004. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step Sb1005 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step Sb1005, a process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step Sb1006. Then, in step Sb1007, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step Sb1005, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step Sb1008. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step Sb1008, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when winning the additional lottery, but it may be configured to add a number of 2 or more. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game in which the number is 0.

In the following step Sb1009, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition ends. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added for one additional win, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 107), after the process of step Sb607 or step Sb609 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps Sb610-Sb613.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps Sb610 to Sb613, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 113(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 113(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 113(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is: In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 114(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the order of pressing in steps Sb610 to Sb613 will be described.

That is, in step Sb610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is the winning of the order of pressing the bell. If the pressing order bell is not won, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step Sb611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, at step Sb612, the instruction monitor 68 is turned on so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes will be performed according to the type of the pressing order bell this time. Control. Then, in step Sb613, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If the AT mode flag is not set in step Sb611, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step Sb415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step Sb1101, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sb1102. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sb1103. That is, the process of step Sb1101 to step Sb1103 is a process corresponding to the process of step Sb601 to step Sb603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step Sb1104.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sb1102 or step Sb1103 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Sb1104. In step Sb1104, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step Sb1105, after executing the precursor mode process, the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step Sb1104, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step Sb1106. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the CZ mode is executed in step Sb1107, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sb1106, it is determined in step Sb1108 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress, the AT mode process is executed in step Sb1109, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sb1108, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 116, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step Sb1201. Then, in step Sb1202, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has reached 0. If not, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step Sb1203.

In the subsequent step Sb1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on winning the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step Sb1205. In step Sb1205, a process of clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Sb1206, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step Sb1207, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step Sb1208, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this precursor mode process is terminated. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sb1204 and the current portent mode is a portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in step Sb1209 the AT mode winning flag is cleared. Execute. Then, in step Sb1210, the process of setting the AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step Sb1211, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of a predetermined number of games is set, and in a situation where there are no remaining sets (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0), a set is played. The AT mode continues until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step Sb1211 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the selection rate of the plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set differently according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. , and in step Sb1211, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate is to be selected based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the higher the continuation rate is set to be more likely to be selected. is selected with a probability of 30% at setting 6, it is selected with a probability of 70% at setting 6. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When a continuation rate of 90% is selected, a 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when a continuation rate of 60% is selected, a 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. However, if the continuation rate of 10% is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step Sb1211, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step Sb1212. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0, the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, the AT mode will end.

Thereafter, in step Sb1212, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 118, processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step Sb1301. In subsequent step Sb1302, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sb1301. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step Sb1303. After that, in step Sb1304, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step Sb1303, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 119, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed in step Sb1401. In subsequent step Sb1402, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sb1401. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step Sb1403 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps Sb1404 to Sb1406) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step Sb1403, the processing for ending the AT mode (steps Sb1407 to Sb1410) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step Sb1403, a process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step Sb1404. Then, in step Sb1404, a process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step Sb1406, a process of setting a set update command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step Sb1403, the AT mode flag is cleared in step Sb1407, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step Sb1408. Execute the process. Then, in step Sb1409, the process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step Sb1410, after executing a process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT mode process ends. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode termination command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the termination of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step Sb314 in the lottery process (FIG. 99). This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step Sb1501, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step Sb1501 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step Sb1502.

In step Sb1502, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step Sb1503. Then, in step Sb1504, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step Sb1505, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step Sb1506, the advantageous section transition processing is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is suggested. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step Sb1506, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step Sb1507.

If it is determined in step Sb1501 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step Sb1508 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step Sb1508, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step Sb1502 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after executing the display start processing in step Sb1507 or after executing the display continuation processing in step Sb1508, the AT mode is executed in step Sb1509. Determine whether the flag is set. If it is determined in step Sb1509 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step Sb1510 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined that any AT mode flag is set in step Sb1509, in step Sb1511, the processing of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step Sb1510 or step Sb1511, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step Sb1512. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step Sb1513, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step Sb1512 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step Sb1513, the result of the arithmetic processing in step Sb1512 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step Sb1513, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step Sb1512. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step Sb416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step Sb1601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step Sb1602, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the following step Sb1603, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step Sb1603, on the condition that the game result of this game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is used as the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step Sb1603, the remaining game number management process is executed in step Sb1604, and the remaining number management process is executed in subsequent step Sb1605. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step Sb1606, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step Sb1607. In the subsequent step Sb1608, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step Sb1609, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated.

Specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step Sb1609, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step Sb1606 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step Sb1610, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step Sb1607 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the advantageous section end processing is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step Sb1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, the received command is stored in RAM 183 in step Sb1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1701, or after the processing of step Sb1702 is executed, it is determined in step Sb1703 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step Sb206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step Sb1704, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1703, or if the process of step Sb1704 has been executed, it is determined in step Sb1705 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step Sb311 of the lottery process, the lottery result correspondence There are a precursor command, a continuation command, a set additional command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in the processing (FIG. 107). In the case of these start time commands, in step Sb1706 start time effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1705, or after the processing of step Sb1706 is executed, it is determined in step Sb1707 whether or not the newly received command is a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop command command as each stop operation command, in step Sb1708, each stop operation time effect setting process for performing effect setting based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1707 or after the processing of step Sb1708 is executed, it is determined in step Sb1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a winning result set in step Sb419 of the reel control process (FIG. 102). In addition to commands, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the CZ start command, which are set in the bonus state processing (Fig. 104), the winning result corresponding processing (Fig. 115), etc. There are an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, in step Sb1710, all-stop effect setting processing is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step Sb1709, or after executing the process of step Sb1710, in step Sb1711 other processes are executed and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step Sb1711, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step Sb1711, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step Sb1706 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb1801, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step Sb1802 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step Sb1803, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step Sb1801 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step Sb1804 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning the specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 109, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when the special role is won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. When the lottery result of the game this time is that the special combination is won, in step Sb1805, the process of setting the special combination notification effect is executed. In the setting processing of the special role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role information that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above special roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1802 or step Sb1804, or after executing the process of step Sb1803 or step Sb1805, the process proceeds to step Sb1806. In step Sb1806, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the current start command. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won and the omen mode is set, the sub-side omen counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step Sb1807 indicates the number of omen games. Execute the process to enter the corresponding value. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main controller 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode. mode.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1806 or after the processing of step Sb1807 is executed, it is determined in step Sb1808 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step Sb1809. Then, in step Sb1810, a process of setting an effect for the portent mode according to the value of the sub-side portent counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1808, or after executing the process of step Sb1810, AT effect setting processing is executed in step Sb1811, and other start time effect setting processing is executed in step Sb1812, and this Terminate the effect setting process at the start. In step Sb1812, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do. The AT effect setting process will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step Sb1710 in the effect setting process (FIG. 122) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the CZ start command, and the AT start command. This is a process for setting effects in the case of all-stop commands such as commands, CZ end commands, set update commands, AT end commands, and the like.

In step Sb1901, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, in step Sb1902, the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step Sb1903, the CZ start effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. For example, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1901, it is determined in step Sb1904 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed in step Sb1905, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sb1906 Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 125(b), for example, the CZ end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 perform effects for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effect for the CZ mode is such that the background color, appearing characters, etc. are made different from those of the normal mode so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1904, it is determined in step Sb1907 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step Sb1908 the sub-side AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. A process of inputting 18 is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side. After executing the process of step Sb1909, the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step Sb1910. The sub-side set counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of AT mode sets.

In subsequent step Sb1911, an effect setting process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 126(a), an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. In the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1907, it is determined in step Sb1912 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step Sb1913, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step Sb1914. Execute. For example, as shown in FIG. 126(b), the AT end effect displays a message indicating that the AT mode will end (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb1912, it is determined in step Sb1915 whether or not a set update command has been received. If a set update command has been received, one set in AT mode is completed, and the next set is to be performed, processing for clearing the sub-side continuation flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step Sb1916. do. The sub-side continuation flag corresponds to the continuation flag on the main controller 101 side. In the subsequent step Sb1917, it is checked whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and if it is set, a process of clearing the occurrence completion flag is executed. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a predetermined specific effect has occurred in the set to end this time. The specific effect will be described in detail later, but in step Sb1917, when updating the set, a process of deleting information indicating that the specific effect has occurred in the set before updating is performed.

After executing the process of step Sb1917, the process of inputting 18 to the sub-side AT counter is executed in step Sb1918, and the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter is executed in step Sb1919.

After executing the processing of step Sb1903, step Sb1906, step Sb1911, step Sb1914 or step Sb1919, or after making a negative determination in step Sb1915, after executing other all-stop effect setting processing in step Sb1920, This all-stop time effect setting process is terminated. In step Sb1920, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is executed. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, the AT effect setting process executed in step Sb1811 in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 123) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT effect setting process is a process for performing an effect during the AT mode. Therefore, prior to the description of the AT effect setting process, the outline of the effect during the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. FIG.

<Overview of AT production>
As already explained, the AT mode in this embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, and if the continuation condition is satisfied when one set of games is completed, While moving to the next set, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT mode ends in the set. In this embodiment, as a production in one set, an allied character and an enemy character face each other, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the allied character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the allied character is defeated. and the enemy character wins. In this embodiment, the first 10 games and the last 8 games of one set of games have different productions, and the above-mentioned battle production in which friendly characters and enemy characters confront each other is shown in the latter 8 games. In the latter part, which is the first half of the 10 games, a confrontation effect is set in which the ally character performing the battle effect confronts the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the first game, a VS display effect (FIG. 132(a1)) is set as the confrontation effect in the first half, in which a friendly character and an enemy character facing each other are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. It is In the 2nd to 4th games of the confrontation effect, the ally character up effect (FIG. 132(b1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the ally character in a state of being enthusiastic with an aura behind them. It is In the 5th to 7th games of the confrontation effect, an enemy character up effect (FIG. 132(c1)) is set in which the enemy character illuminated by the moonlit night is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 . In the 8th to 10th games of the confrontation effect, a staring effect (FIG. 132 (d1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays a scene in which the friend character and the enemy character are glaring at each other while sparks are scattered. ing.

As shown in FIG. 130, in the 11th to 16th games, the battle effects in the second half are a friendly attack effect (FIG. 133(a)) in which a friendly character attacks, and an enemy attack effect in which an enemy character attacks. One of the attack effects (FIG. 133(b)) is repeated three times in total, and a double-sided attack effect in which both players attack each other is performed in the 17th game. Then, when the continuation condition is satisfied, a teammate victory effect (FIG. 133(c)) is performed in which the teammate character wins in the 18th game, which is the final game of the set, and the next set is started. If the continuation condition is not met, an ally defeat effect (FIG. 133(d)) is performed in which the ally character is defeated in the 18th game, and the AT mode ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a set of effects is set such that the battle effect is performed after the confrontation effect, and the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified in the battle effect. and results are favorably enhanced.

As already explained, in the set management type AT mode of the present embodiment, a continuation lottery is performed at the start of one set to determine whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied. In the middle of , if you win the extra lottery based on the winning of a specific role, the continuation condition is established and it is configured to move to the next set.

Here, by adopting a configuration in which the continuation condition can be established based on the winning of a specific role as described above, although the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased, the probability of winning the specific role and the set game Depending on the number, it becomes difficult for the event in which the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery as described above to occur, and the player may not expect such an event. In that case, even if an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of the game by using the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the effect cannot be expected.

In particular, when trying to optimize the game playability and game progress of the AT mode by increasing the number of medals to be added (net increase) per game in the AT mode, the number of games per set in the AT mode should be small. As described above, it becomes difficult for the continuation condition to be satisfied with the special role as a trigger. Moreover, since the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, you can expect to increase the number of games in normal mode and CZ mode other than AT mode, and increase the number of medals by the upper limit increase number (2400) in AT mode. By doing so, the number of games in the AT mode is naturally reduced and the above-mentioned net increase in the number of games is likely to be increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the continuation lottery of the set is won, in the game before the notification of the continuation lottery winning (the above-mentioned teammate victory effect), the lottery result of the game is Even if it is not a specific role, it is configured to notify as if you have won the extra lottery.

By adopting a configuration in which the result of the continuation lottery is notified based on the lottery result of each game as described above, the success or failure of the continuation condition is not determined by the continuation lottery at the time of renewal of each set. It is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition of each set is determined based on the lottery result of each game.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for effecting each set during the AT mode as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 127, in the AT effect setting process, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed in step Sb2001. Then, in step Sb2002, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the continuation command is output at the start of one set (at the start of the first game of the set) if the continuation lottery has been won (Fig. 111), and if the continuation lottery has not been won. This is a command that is output (FIG. 112) when the additional lottery is won in the set.

If a continuation command has been received in step Sb2002, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step Sb2003. Through such processing, the CPU 181 can grasp that the continuation condition of the current set is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2002, or if the process of step Sb2003 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sb2004. In step Sb2004, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 7, thereby determining whether or not it is the 1st to 10th games of the set. If it is the 1st game to the 10th game of the set, in steps Sb2005 to Sb2008, the processing for performing the confrontation effect which is the first half part is executed, and if it is the 11th game to the 18th game, In steps Sb2009 to Sb2013, the process for performing the battle effect, which is the second half part, is executed.

As the processing for performing the confrontation effect, the process of acquiring the confrontation effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed in step Sb2005. As shown in FIG. 129, the confrontation effect table contains detailed effect contents of the confrontation effect to be executed in each game (VS display effect, ally character up effect, enemy character up effect) according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. production, staring production) are memorized.

Here, as the confrontation performance, normal performance and specific performance are set, and when the continuation condition of the current set is established, the confrontation performance as the specific performance can occur. The specific effect is set as a effect in which a part of the effect content in the auxiliary display section 65 is different from the normal effect.

For example, in the VS display effect, the character "VS" displayed between the friendly character and the enemy character is displayed in white characters in the normal effect, whereas the character "VS" is displayed in the specific effect. Text is set to be displayed in red. In the ally character-up effect, the aura worn by the ally character is white in the normal effect, but is set to be displayed in rainbow color in the specific effect. In the enemy character-up effect, a crescent moon is displayed in the normal effect, while a full moon is displayed in the specific effect. In the face-to-face production, a girl character cheering for an ally character is displayed in the specific production, while the girl character does not appear in the normal production.

After acquiring the confrontation effect table in step Sb2005, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Sb2006, and if it is set, specific effect setting processing is executed in step Sb2007. do. The specific effect setting process is a process for setting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the confrontation effect in which the normal effect and the specific effect are set as described above.

<Specific effect setting process>
In the specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 128, it is determined in step Sb2101 whether or not the generated flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the specific effect has already been generated in this set, and is a flag that is set when the specific effect is generated. If the generated flag is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is set to occur only once in one set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set, a process of ascertaining the lottery result of the current game is executed in step Sb2102, and a process of ascertaining the continuation rate of the current AT mode is executed in step Sb2103. Then, in step Sb2104, the process of acquiring the specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Sb2105, the specific effect lottery process is executed.

In the specific effect table, as shown in FIG. 131, the occurrence rate of the specific effect is set according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of 3.1% in the game that is the chance A, while the game that is the chance B is specified with a probability of 20.0%. An effect is generated, and it is set so that the specific effect is more likely to occur as the result of the lottery result of the game is less likely to be won. Moreover, in the present embodiment, not only specific roles as so-called rare roles such as Chance A and Chance B, but also normal roles such as normal role A, normal role B, normal role C, and pushing order bell. It is set so that a specific effect can occur even if In addition, it is set so that the specific effect can occur even if the result is a losing result in which none of the results are won.

In this case, for example, as a lottery result of each game, the winning order bell is won with a probability of about 65%. Since the effect is generated, the probability of the specific effect being generated triggered by the pressing order bell in each game is about 2.5%. On the other hand, for example, Cherry C, which always causes a specific effect when it appears, has a probability of about 0.008% as a lottery result of each game. is also about 0.008%, which is lower than the occurrence rate triggered by the pushing order bell.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the probability that the specific effect will occur triggered by the normal role including the normal role A to the normal role C, the pushing order bell and the result of being out of order is higher than the probability of the chance A to the chance C and the cherry A. ∼ It is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of specific effects triggered by specific roles such as Cherry C, Common Bell and Watermelon. In the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of about 5.5% (about 1/18.2) triggered by the normal role, whereas the specific effect is triggered by the specific role. In AT mode with a probability of 0.8% (about 1/122) that a specific effect occurs, and the continuation rate is 90%, about 13.3% (about 1/7.52) with the normal role as a trigger While the specific effect occurs with probability, the specific effect occurs with a probability of approximately 1.0% (approximately 1/105) triggered by the specific role.

In other words, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the specific role is set higher than the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the normal role, but the normal role is about 96.0% in each game. There is a probability of 4% (about 1/1.04) to appear (win), and the special role has a probability of about 3.56% (about 1/28.1) to appear (win) in each game. ), the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a normal role is higher than the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role, and the lottery result of the game is a normal role. Even if there is, it is set so that the occurrence of a specific effect can be expected.

In relation to the number of continuous games (10) in which the specific effect can occur, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 18.2) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is Although it is larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (about 7.52) of the occurrence probability of the specific role triggered by the normal role is smaller than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. is set to be On the other hand, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator of the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role (about 122) is greater than the number of continuous games of confrontation effects, and in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% Also, the denominator (approximately 105) of the occurrence probability of the specific effect triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. Therefore, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, if the continuation rate is 90% AT mode (even if it is 60%, if it is not 10%), the specific effect triggered by the normal role, The probability is such that it can occur at least once on average, and on the other hand, the specific effect triggered by the specific role is higher if it does not occur even once regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode.

By doing so, it is possible to expect an additional winning even if it is a normal role, while hoping for an additional winning triggered by a specific role, and even in the AT mode with a small number of games, in each game It is possible to realize the playability expected from the additional winning.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the occurrence probability of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. Basically, even if the lottery result of the game is the same, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific effect will occur. is set to be For example, a specific effect triggered by the push order bell occurs with a probability of about 3.8% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, but with a probability of about 12.5% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. It is set to occur with a probability, and the specific effect triggered by the failure result occurs with a probability of about 13.8% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas the continuation rate is 90%. AT mode is set to occur with a probability of about 23.5%. Therefore, the occurrence rate of the specific effect per game is about 6.3% if the continuation rate is 10%, and about 14.2% if the continuation rate is 90%, which is a high continuation rate. In the AT mode, it is easier for the specific effect to occur earlier. Then, in the confrontational effects between 10 games, the probability of occurrence of the specific effects is about 48.0% in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, and about 78.5 in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90%. %, and it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode through the occurrence probability of a specific effect.

After executing the specific effect lottery process in step Sb2105, it is determined whether or not the lottery process wins in step Sb2106, and when it is determined that the lottery process has not been won, the specific effect setting process ends as it is. . In this case, the normal effect is executed in the current confrontation effect (step Sb2008 described later). If it is determined in step Sb2106 that the specific effect lottery has been won, then in step Sb2107 the process of grasping the specific effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side AT counter is executed. Specifically, for example, if the sub-side AT counter is 1, as the current specific effect, the character display of "VS" is displayed in red characters, and the sub-side AT counter is 2 to 4. If there is, the specific effect of displaying the color of the aura of the ally character in rainbow colors is grasped as the specific effect of this time. Then, in step Sb2108, after executing the process of setting the generated flag, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step Sb2006, or after executing the specific effect setting process in step Sb2007, in step Sb2008, the confrontation performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in this game After executing the process for setting the effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In this case, when the specific effect is grasped in the step Sb2107, it is set so that the confrontation effect in which the specific effect occurs is performed, and if the processing of step Sb2107 is not performed (step Sb2006 or step If a negative determination is made in Sb2106), setting is made so that a confrontation effect in which a normal effect occurs is performed.

By doing so, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied and the continuation flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a specific effect occurs in the confrontation effect in the first half of each set in the AT mode. You will get Then, the occurrence of the specific effect is higher in the ratio triggered by the normal role than in the case of the specific role, and moreover, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the earlier the specific effect is likely to occur. As a result, the player proceeds with the game while hoping that the specific effect will occur in the first half of the set, and it is possible to significantly improve the game playability of the first half.

In the AT effect setting process, if the sub-side AT counter is 7 or less in step Sb2004 and it is the second half part, the process for performing the battle effect is executed. That is, in step Sb2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7, and it is the 11th game of one set and the first game of the battle effect. If the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Sb2010. A performance table is acquired, and a process of selecting a battle performance to be performed in this set from the acquired performance table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 130, the continuation battle effect table notifies that the ally victory effect occurs in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is satisfied. A plurality of effect tables (PA1 to PA8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set in the 16th game. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, for the effect table (PA1) in which the friendly attack effect occurs three times in a row, the 10% continuous AT mode is the most. It is set so that it is easy to select and the 90% continuous AT mode is the least likely to be selected. It is set so that the continuous AT mode is most likely to be selected and the 10% continuous AT mode is least likely to be selected. For example, the effect table (PA7) performed in the order of ally attack effect→enemy attack effect→enemy attack effect can be selected in the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode, while the 60% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PA8), which is not selected in the AT mode and causes the enemy attack effect to occur three times in a row, is not selected in the AT mode with 10% continuation and the AT mode with 60% continuation, but is selected in the AT mode with 90% continuation. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode by the selected effect table (combination and order of each attack effect). In step Sb2011, one effect table is selected from the continuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

If it is determined in step Sb2010 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, then in step Sb2012 a non-continuing battle effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the current set is performed from the acquired effect table. A process of selecting a battle presentation by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 130, the non-continuing battle effect table notifies that the ally defeat effect has occurred in the final game of the set and the continuation condition has not been met. A plurality of effect tables (PB1 to PB8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set for the 1st to 16th games. Which production table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. The % continuation AT mode is set to be easier to select than the 10% continuation AT mode, and the production table (PB4 ) is set so that the 10% continuous AT mode is more likely to be selected than the 60% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode. For example, the effect table (PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 90% continuation, while the AT mode of 10% continuation and the AT mode of 60% continuation can be selected. The effect table (PB7), which is not selected in the AT mode and is performed in the order of enemy attack effect → ally attack effect → ally attack effect, can be selected in the 60% continuous AT mode, while the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PB8), which is not selected in the AT mode with continuation of %, and the production of friendly attacks occurs three times in a row, can be selected in the AT mode with 10% continuation, while the AT mode with 60% continuation and the AT mode with 90% continuation can be selected. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of AT mode by the effect table (combination and order of each attack effect) to be selected, such as not being selected in AT mode. In step Sb2012, one effect table is selected from the discontinuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

Comparing the continuous battle effect table and the non-continuous battle effect table, for example, in the effect tables (PA3, PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect, the battle effect is performed with the ally victory effect. When it ends, it is suggested that it is a 90% continuation AT mode, while when the battle production ends with a ally defeat production, it is confirmed that it was a 90% continuation AT mode, and an ally attack In the production table (PA1, PB8) where the production occurs three times in a row, when the battle production occurs with the victory production of the ally, the AT mode of 10% continuation is suggested, while when the battle production ends with the production of the ally defeat. The continuation rate is predicted and grasped not only by the combination and order of each attack production, but also by the combination of the subsequent ally victory production and ally defeat production. It is possible.

In the eleventh game of the set, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected in the processing of steps Sb2011 and Sb2012, and after the address information of the selected effect table is stored, the current After executing the processing for setting the battle effect of the game to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, this AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7 in step Sb2009, but the 12th game or later of the set, the process proceeds to step Sb2014. In step Sb2014, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set and the set address information of the battle effect is the address field information (PB1 to PB8) corresponding to the ally defeat effect. Affirmative determination in step Sb2014 means that although the continuation condition was not satisfied until the battle effect was set in the 11th game, the continuation condition was satisfied thereafter. In this case, in step Sb2015, the battle effect to be performed in the current set is reselected from the continuation battle effect table, and the address information of the reselected effect table is stored (overwritten) in the address information storage area 183c. Execute.

In this case, a battle presentation table for overwriting is selected from the battle presentation table for continuation according to the continuation rate of the AT mode regardless of the ally attack presentation or the enemy attack presentation executed in the previous game. By doing so, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle, the relationship between the combination of the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect in the battle effect and the continuation rate is different from the case where the continuation condition is satisfied from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game by improving the difficulty of the game in which the continuation rate is predicted. In the present embodiment, the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect are set as a set of two games. Therefore, in the overwrite battle effect table, in this game (second game), if it is set to perform an enemy attack effect (ally attack effect) that is different from the attack effect before overwriting, in this game, before overwriting Alternatively, in this game, the performance is performed according to the overwritten production table, and even though the ally (enemy) has launched an attack, the enemy attack production You may set so that the counter production switched to (ally attack production) may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb2014, or after the processing of step Sb2015 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sb2013, and the battle effect of the current game is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. After executing the processing for setting to be performed, this AT effect setting processing is ended.

<Flow of production in AT mode>
Next, the flow of effects in each set during the AT mode will be described with reference to the timing charts of FIGS. 134 and 135. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 134, when the AT mode is started with a game of ta1, in the first set continuing to ta5, from ta1 to ta3 (exactly, the game immediately before the game started at ta3) This is the first half part in which the confrontation effect is executed, and the second half part in which the battle effect is executed from ta3 to ta5 (more precisely, the game immediately before the game started at ta5).

At the start of the ta1 game, the continuation lottery process (step Sb904) in the continuation determination process (FIG. 111) is performed. For example, if the ta1 continuation lottery results in a continuation winning, a continuation flag is set. This continuation flag is cleared in the AT mode processing of the winning result handling processing in the game just before the next set continuation determination of the current set, that is, in the game just before the game started at ta5 (in the figure, at ta5 (shown as cleared by

When the continuation flag is set, in the first half part from ta1 to ta3, a specific effect can occur in the confrontation effect. For example, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game is that the specific effect lottery is won at ta2, which is the normal combination, and the specific effect occurs. In this case, the generated flag is set with the occurrence of the specific effect of ta2, and the specific effect does not occur in the set.

In the second half part from ta3 to ta5, a battle effect is executed, and in the final game of the battle effect, a teammate victory effect is executed to inform that the continuation condition is satisfied (continuation notification) is executed (ta4). ). In this case, the continuation notification allows the player to grasp that the next set will be started. However, as a player who understands that the continuation condition is satisfied by the specific effect of ta3, the battle effect that starts from ta3 is the result (whether it is a victory effect or a defeat effect) It is possible to enjoy while immersed in a sense of superiority while knowing the Therefore, in order to enjoy the sense of superiority and to be relieved to know that the continuation condition is satisfied early, people do not miss the fact that the specific production is performed, and the degree of attention to the confrontation production. is preferably enhanced.

When the next set starts at ta5, the continuous lottery process is executed at ta5, and the continuous non-winning is assumed at ta5. In this case the continuation flag is not set. For example, in the game ta6 which is in the first half part, if an additional win is made with a special combination as a trigger, the continuation flag will be set in the game ta6.

Here, the specific effect lottery in the present embodiment is set to be executed according to the lottery result of the game regardless of whether or not the game wins the additional lottery. Performance may not occur. Therefore, for example, even if the continuation flag (and the sub-side continuation flag) is set at ta6 where the above winning is added, and the specific effect does not occur when the continuation condition is satisfied, the normal role of ta7 after that A specific production may occur as a trigger. In addition, in the figure, an example is shown in which the specific effect occurs in the ta7 game different from the ta6 game in which the additional winning was made, but naturally the specific effect occurs in the ta6 game in which the additional winning was made sometimes.

In the battle effect from ta8 to ta10, since the continuation flag is set as described above, the battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the continuation notification as the ally victory effect is executed at ta9 immediately before ta10. will be

When the next set starts at ta10, the continuation lottery process is similarly executed at ta10, and the continuation flag is not set if the continuation non-winning at ta10. Then, if the set started at ta10 is not won until ta13 when the set ends, the specific effect does not occur in the first half part from ta10 to ta11, and even in the battle effect from ta11 to ta13, the ta13 The battle effect is performed in the effect pattern in which the ally defeat effect is executed at immediately preceding ta12. Then, the AT mode ends at ta13.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the second half of each set, no specific effect occurs, and when looking only at the battle effect of the second half, it continues until the ally victory effect or the ally defeat effect is executed in the final game. It is set so that it cannot be determined whether the conditions are met. In other words, in a configuration in which a specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can occur before the ally victory effect as the continuation notification of the establishment of the continuation condition is performed. A situation (second half part) in which the specific effect cannot occur is interposed between the situation (first half part) in which the specific effect can occur and the final game in which the continuation notification can occur. By doing so, the situation in which the specific production can occur is limited, thereby increasing the rarity of the specific production, and making it possible to draw a strong interest in the specific production. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the degree of attention to the battle production itself in the latter part is lowered due to the excessive desire for the occurrence of .

As already explained, the probability of occurrence of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. FIG. 135(a) shows the AT mode with 10% continuation, and FIG. 135(b) shows the AT mode with 90% continuation.

For example, in the 10% continuous AT mode starting at tb1, the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tb6, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the second set from tb6 to tb10, and the second set When the AT mode ends at , an ally victory effect is executed as a continuous notification at tb5 immediately before tb6, and an ally defeat effect is executed at tb9 immediately before tb10.

Further, for example, in the 90% continuous AT mode starting at tc1, assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set up to tc6 and in the second set from tc6 to tc10, At tc9 immediately before tc5 and tc10, a teammate victory effect is executed as continuous notification.

As already explained, the specific effect can occur in the first half of the set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the 10% continuation AT mode, a specific effect can occur in the first half of the game from tb1 to tb4 in the first set, while in the second set of the first half of the game from tb6 to tb8 does not occur. On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the specific effects are performed in the games from tc1 to tc4, which are the first half of the first set, and from tc6 to tc8, which are the first half of the second set. become possible to occur.

However, after the specific effect occurs, even in the first half part of the set where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific effect will not occur. When the specific effect occurs in the game of tb3, the specific effect does not occur in the games from tb3 to tb4. Also, for example, in the 90% continuous AT mode, if a specific effect occurs in the game of tc2 from tc1 to tc4, or if a specific effect occurs in the game of tc7 from tc6 to tc8, from the tc2 In the games from tc4 and tc7 to tc8, the specific effect will not occur.

As mentioned above, the higher the continuation rate in AT mode, the more likely it is that a specific effect will occur. It is likely to be a game later than the game of tc2 that occurs. By doing this, a game that predicts the continuation rate of the AT mode from the number of games until the specific effect occurs is added, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the way to enjoy the AT mode. Become.

Here, as described above, in each set of the AT mode, it is considered that the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific effect at an earlier stage. , it is considered that the longer the player can enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific effect will occur, the more the player can fully enjoy the game. In that respect, the period during which it is possible to enjoy whether or not the specific effect occurs is the period from tb1 to tb3 in the AT mode with 10% continuation, and the period from tc1 to tc2 in the AT mode with 90% continuation, The length of the period per set is longer in the AT mode with 10% duration. By doing so, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate, it is possible to keep the player entertained for a longer period of time as to whether or not the specific effect will occur, and thus the amusement of the game can be favorably improved.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a situation where the condition for continuing the AT mode set is satisfied, a specific effect corresponding to the fact that the condition for continuing the AT mode set is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game before continuing the AT mode set. A specific performance lottery for executing By doing this, while attention is focused on whether or not the set will continue in each set of AT mode, through expecting that a specific effect corresponding to the continuation will be performed, the lottery of each game Increased attention to results.

In this case, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode, and the higher the continuation rate, the easier it is to win the specific effect lottery. In addition to indicating that the AT mode continues at a high rate, depending on the timing of its occurrence. Therefore, by performing the specific effect, it is possible to draw attention to the game, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Although it is set so that it is easier to win the specific effect lottery when the game lottery result is a specific role than when it is a normal role including a loss, the probability that the game lottery result will be a specific role Also, considering the probability of becoming a normal role, the ratio of specific effects triggered by a specific role (the product of the probability of winning a specific role and the probability of winning a specific effect lottery at the time of a specific role) Since the ratio of the specific production to be performed (the product of the winning probability of the normal role and the winning probability of the specific production during the normal role) is set to be larger, the lottery result of each game is the normal role. Even in such a case, it is possible to make the player look forward to the occurrence of the specific effect.

In this case, each set of the AT mode has 18 games, and among them, the number of games in which the specific effect can occur is 10 games in which the confrontation effect is performed. The denominator of the probability of winning the normal role is set to be smaller than 10, and the denominator of the probability of winning the special role is set to be larger than 10. Because of this probability, there are not many opportunities to win a special role in each set, and on the other hand, there are frequent opportunities to win a regular role. In addition, the effect of increasing the attention of each game before continuing the set using the specific effect can be more favorably achieved.

After the specific effect is executed, the generated flag is set, and the specific effect can occur only once per set, so the rarity of the specific effect is increased and the specific effect is not overlooked. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific performance by utilizing the player's psychology to try.

Since the performance mode of the specific performance is different in each game in which the confrontation performance is performed, there is a high possibility that the specific performance will be overlooked as compared with a configuration in which the specific performance is performed in the same performance mode. By doing so, the degree of attention to the specific performance can be increased, and furthermore, in the configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the battle performance after that, the degree of attention to the battle performance can also be increased.

In a set in which the continuation condition is not established, the continuation condition can be established by winning the additional lottery in the AT addition processing according to the lottery result of each game. In this case, if the additional lottery is won, the specific effect can occur during the confrontation effect, so it is possible to closely associate the lottery result of each game with the occurrence of the specific effect. It is also possible to give the impression that the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game without going through the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In the add-on lottery, it is set so that the add-on winning is won in the specific role but not in the normal role. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the set is not continued even though the special role as a so-called rare role is won, and the relationship between the special role and the success or failure of the continuation condition can be made difficult. can be secured.

However, in this embodiment, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by the additional winning, the specific production will not be performed unless the specific production lottery is won, and the execution of the specific production may be limited when the additional winning is won. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the specific effect is performed in the normal combination, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game in which the normal combination is won.

The winning probability of the additional lottery is common regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode. On the premise of such a configuration, by making a configuration that gives the impression that the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game by the specific effect, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate In fact, there are cases where the AT mode is continued depending on the player's decision, and the effect of giving the impression that the continuation condition is satisfied according to the lottery result of each game can be enhanced.

Also, during the battle production, even if the continuation condition is satisfied by winning additional prizes, the specific production is not performed, so the result of the battle production that is performed over multiple games can be understood in the middle. It becomes possible to ensure that the attention to the battle production is favorably secured.

In the AT mode set, a specific performance corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the set can be executed during the confrontation performance, and after that, the set is updated through a battle performance in which the specific performance cannot be executed. . By doing so, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention due to overlap of a specific effect as an advance notification that the continuation condition is satisfied and a battle effect that notifies the success or failure of the continuation condition, and each effect It is possible to preferably expect the production effect of.

In this case, in the AT effect setting process, regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed during the confrontation effect, the effect pattern of the current battle effect is determined from each battle effect table based on the success or failure of the continuation condition. . By doing so, for example, there is no need to store in advance the effect pattern when the specific effect is performed, and for example, even if the specific effect is performed, the specific effect may be overlooked. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of noticing the overlooked thing afterward through the performance of the battle performance of the performance pattern when the specific performance is performed. In this case, in order to solve such an inconvenience, it is conceivable to take measures to make the specific effect more flashy so that the specific effect is not overlooked. If the performance pattern of the performance is determined, it is possible to perform the mode of performance on the premise that the specific performance can be overlooked, and the improvement of the degree of attention to the specific performance can be boosted.

In the continuation determination process on the main controller 101 side, only the continuation rate is referred to when updating the AT mode set, and the lottery result of the game at the time of updating is not referred to. By doing this, it is possible to make it difficult for people to notice that the continuous lottery is being held when the set is renewed, and it gives the impression that the continuous lottery is being held according to the lottery results of each subsequent game. It is possible to help give.

<Modification 1>
In the above-described 2b embodiment α, regardless of whether or not the game is an additional winning game (regardless of whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set), the specific effect is performed through the specific effect lottery. In this modified example, a description will be given of a configuration in which a specific effect is positively performed in a game in which an extra win is made. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, after executing the process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step Sb2201, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step Sb2202. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step Sb2203. The processes of steps Sb2201 to Sb2203 are the same as the processes of steps Sb2001 to Sb2003. In this modification, after setting the sub-side continuation flag in step Sb2203, by determining whether the sub-side AT counter is 8 to 16 in step Sb2204, the second game of one set of AT mode It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. If it is the 2nd game to the 10th game, in step Sb2205, a process of setting a specific effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. The specific effect flag is a flag for generating a specific effect in a game in which an extra win is made.

If a negative determination is made at step Sb2202 or step Sb2204, or after the process at step Sb2205 is executed, at steps Sb2206 to Sb2215, a process for setting the effects in the current game is executed. The processing of steps Sb2206 to Sb2215 is the same as the processing of steps Sb2004 to Sb2013 except for the specific effect setting processing of step Sb2209.

In the specific effect setting process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. exit. If the generated flag is not set and the specific effect is not generated in this set, it is determined whether or not the specific effect flag is set in step Sb2302. If not set, in steps Sb2303 to Sb2309, a process for generating a specific effect is executed. The processing of steps Sb2303 to Sb2309 is the same as the processing of steps Sb2102 to Sb2108.

When the specific effect flag is set in step Sb2302, the process of clearing the specific effect flag is executed in step Sb2310. Then, the process advances to step Sb2308 to execute processing for grasping the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter, and after executing the processing to set the generated flag in step Sb2309, this specific effect setting process is terminated. do. In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step Sb2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, in the case of a set that has not been won in the continuation lottery, if the game is the first half part, the specific performance will be generated in the game if the game is the first half part when the special role is the trigger. Therefore, the lottery result of each game and the occurrence rate of the specific effect are more closely related, and the continuous lottery is performed based on the lottery result of each game, not the result of the continuous lottery performed when each set is updated. It is also possible to strengthen the impression that the result of the continuation lottery is notified by the specific effect.

In a game in which a continuation lottery is performed, even if an additional lottery is won, a specific performance flag is not set and a specific performance is prevented from occurring without going through the specific performance lottery. In other words, the continuation command is output even if the continuation lottery is won, but in a game where the continuation lottery is performed, even if the continuation command is received, the sub-side continuation flag is only set, and the specific effect flag is not set. made it In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the display control device 81 does not dare to distinguish between winning the set continuation lottery and winning the additional lottery, an increase in the number of types of commands is avoided. However, it is possible to perform the specific effect without contradiction with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, when the additional lottery is not won in a situation where the continuation condition is established, a specific effect is generated. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in this modification.

In the AT add-on process in this modified example, the process when it is determined that the add-on win has not been made in step Sb2404 is different. That is, if a negative determination is made in step Sb2404, it is determined whether or not the continuation flag is set in step Sb2410. If the continuation flag is set, it is determined in step Sb2411 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any special combination. If the continuation flag is not set in step Sb2410, or if the continuation flag is set in step Sb2411 but is a normal combination, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the continuation flag is set and the additional lottery triggered by the specific role is not won, then in step Sb2412, the non-win command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , the AT addition processing ends.

The processing of steps Sb2401 to Sb2409 is the same as the processing of steps Sb1001 to Sb1009.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing specific effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, if the generated flag is not set in step Sb2501, it is determined in step Sb2502 whether or not the non-winning command has been received as the command at the start of the current game. When the non-winning command is not received, a process for generating a specific effect is executed in steps Sb2503 to Sb2509. The processes of step Sb2501 and steps Sb2503 to Sb2509 are the same as the processes of steps 2201 to Sb2108.

On the other hand, in step Sb2502, the above-mentioned non-winning command is received, and although the continuation condition has already been satisfied in the first half of the set, the additional lottery triggered by the specific role in this game is not won. and the specific effect has not yet been generated, an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2502, and the process proceeds to step Sb2508. Then, in step Sb2508, a process for ascertaining the specific effect corresponding to the sub-side AT counter is executed, and in step Sb2509, a process for setting a generated flag is executed, and then this specific effect setting process is terminated. . In this case, in the confrontation effect setting process of step Sb2210, the confrontation effect corresponding to the specific effect is set.

By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won without excessively increasing the winning probability of the additional lottery. Therefore, by performing a specific effect in the game in which the specific role is won, the set continuation lottery can be boosted to give the impression that it is being done in each game instead of when the set is renewed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game in the set.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the effect table of the battle effect selected in the second half part can be changed depending on whether or not the specific effect occurs in the first half part of the set. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In this modification, the sub-side AT counter is 7, and the processing of the start game of the second half part (the 11th game of the set) is different. That is, the processing for the first half part in steps Sb2601 to Sb2608 is the same as the processing in steps Sb2001 to Sb2008. If a negative determination is made in step Sb2604, it is determined in step Sb2609 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7 and it is the start game of the second half part.

If the determination in step Sb2609 is affirmative, it is determined in step Sb2610 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag has been set. judge. As already explained, the generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that a specific effect has occurred in the first half of the set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set and the specific effect does not occur even if the continuation condition is met, in step Sb2612 the effect table for the current battle effect is selected from the battle effect tables for continuation and selected. A process for storing the address information of the effect table is executed. This process is the same as the process of step Sb2011, and the effect table is selected by lottery according to the current AT mode continuation rate.

On the other hand, in step Sb2611, if the generated flag is set, the continuation condition is satisfied, and the specific effect is generated, then in step Sb2613 a predetermined specific effect is obtained from the continuation battle effect table. is selected as the effect table for the current battle effect, and processing for storing the address information of the selected effect table is executed. In this modification, the effect table of the address information PA1 is set as the specific effect table. A battle effect of the effect pattern in which the effect is performed is executed.

If the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step Sb2610, then in step Sb2614, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected from the non-continuing battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored. to run. Also, in step Sb2609, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7, it is determined whether or not the continuation condition has been established after the shift to the battle effect in step Sb2616, and the continuation condition can be established after the fact. If there is, in step Sb2617 processing for rewriting the effect table is executed. Then, after executing any of the processes of steps Sb2612 to Sb2614 and step Sb2617, or when a negative determination is made in step Sb2616, the process of setting the battle effect of the current game is executed in step Sb2615, and then this End the AT effect setting process. The processing of steps Sb2614 to Sb2617 is the same as the processing of steps Sb2012 to Sb2015.

By doing so, even though the occurrence of the specific effect is known, the battle effect in which there is a high possibility that the ally character will be defeated is not performed, and the contradiction of the effect is prevented. In addition, since it is not necessary to select an effect pattern for the battle effect even when the specific effect is generated, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the battle effect.

Moreover, with the above configuration, when the specific effect occurs, it becomes impossible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode from the effect pattern of the battle effect. By doing so, it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode purely from the occurrence timing and occurrence rate of the specific effect without relying on other information such as the effect pattern of the battle effect. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the performance.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, after the specific effect occurs, the suggested effect of the set value occurs according to the lottery result of the game. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing suggestive effect setting processing in this modified example. Although detailed explanation with drawings is omitted, in this modified example, as the effect setting for the first half part in the AT effect setting process, after performing the confrontation effect setting process in step Sb2008, the suggestive effect setting process of FIG. 141 is executed. do. That is, the suggestive effect setting process is a process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 as one process in the effect setting process for the first half of the AT mode.

In the suggestive effect setting process, it is determined in step Sb2701 whether or not the generated flag is set. If it is not set, the suggestive effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in this modified example, the suggestive effect is not generated in a situation where the specific effect is not generated. If the occurrence completion flag is set, the process advances to step Sb2702.

At step Sb2702, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and at step Sb2703, the process of grasping the setting value is executed. Then, in step Sb2704, the rate of continuation of the current AT mode is grasped, in step Sb2705 a process of acquiring a suggestive effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Sb2706 a suggestive effect lottery process is executed.

As shown in FIG. 142, the suggestive effect table in this modified example is set such that the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect differs according to the set value, the continuation rate, and the lottery result of the game. Specifically, it is set so that the suggestive effect can occur when the lottery result of the game is a losing result, and is set so that the suggestive effect does not occur for other results. In addition, the higher the set value of the payout rate (the higher the setting), the more likely the suggestive effect will occur, and the higher the AT mode with a higher continuation rate, the more likely the suggestive effect will occur. It is

It should be noted that the suggestion production in this modification is a production that suggests a high setting, and is set as a production that suggests a high continuation rate. An effect may be provided to suggest that the set value is reached, or an effect may be provided to confirm that the set value is a predetermined value (for example, setting 6) when it occurs.

After executing the suggestive effect lottery process in step Sb2706, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect lottery is won in step Sb2707. or the speaker 64, and then the suggestive effect setting process is terminated. Although detailed description with reference to drawings is omitted, the suggestive effect may be, for example, a mode in which the content of the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is different from that during non-occurrence (for example, a predetermined character appears), or a speaker. A mode in which the sound effect from 64 is different from that when not generated (for example, a special sound effect is generated), or a mode in which these modes are combined may be used. If it is determined in step Sb2707 that the game has not been won, the suggestion effect setting process is terminated.

In this way, by performing a specific effect, it is possible to perform a suggestive effect of the set value after that, so that the performance of the specific effect makes it possible to grasp the level of the continuation rate and the success or failure of the continuation condition. In addition, by using the player's psychology to grasp the set value as an opportunity to start the suggestive performance of the set value, it is possible to improve the expectation for the performance of the specific performance.

In this case, after the specific effect is performed, a suggestive effect can occur according to the lottery result of the game, so the specific effect aiming at the effect of increasing the attention to the lottery result of each game is performed. It is also possible to maintain the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game even after the game has been completed.

Furthermore, since the suggestive effect is performed based on the result of the failure, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the number of medals held, and it is possible to eliminate the negative image of the result of failure. Since the probability of the outcome can be made relatively high, it is also possible to suppress an excessively high ball payout rate by, for example, making it difficult for the outcome to be a failure.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the effect content of each set in the AT mode is changed. In this modification, in a set management type AT mode in which one set is a set of 18 games as a predetermined number, if the conditions for continuing to the next set are met, a predetermined specific effect is given until the 18 games are completed. occurs and the conditions for continuation to the next set are not met, the AT mode ends without the specific effect occurring before 18 games are completed. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this modified example from the specific effect in the above-described 2b embodiment α, the specific effect in this modified example is also referred to as a second specific effect in the following description. In the following description, when a specific effect (a specific effect lottery, a specific effect lottery process, etc.) is referred to, it includes not only the specific effect in the second embodiment α of the above 2b, but also the second specific effect. This also applies to specific effects (third specific effect, fourth specific effect) in other embodiments.

Specifically, in the present modification, a plurality of variable regions for numerical characters are provided in the auxiliary display portion 65, and the second specific effect is produced by forming a predetermined combination of numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable regions. Occur. For example, as shown in FIG. 143(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, as the variation areas of the numeric characters, a left variation area SP1, a middle variation area SP2, and a right variation area SP3 are set in order from the left, and these variation areas SP1 Set the numeric characters from 1 to 9 as the numeric characters to be displayed in ~SP3. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are displayed, for example, vertically variably, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are displayed in order from the left. to stop Then, when all the characters with the same number stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3, the second specific effect is performed (Fig. 144(a)), and the characters with the number to stop must be aligned in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3. 143(a), 143(b)).

When the AT mode set is started, a pattern variation effect such as variation of the variation areas SP1 to SP3→stop is performed for each game. For example, as shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), when the non-second specific effect is provided and the numbered characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3, in the next game as well, Design variation production is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 144(a), when the number characters stop in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 as the second specific effect, in the remaining games of the set, as shown in FIG. 144(b) As shown, a jackpot effect is performed. In this modified example, as the jackpot effect, a close-up effect is set on the auxiliary display section 65 in which a friendly character screams. etc. may be set, and the contents of the presentation may be changed as appropriate.

In this modification, in a specific game in which the number of remaining games in one set is small (for example, from 5 remaining games to 2 remaining games) in a situation where the second specific effect has not occurred, instead of the symbol variation effect , a standby effect is performed (FIG. 145(a)). In this modified example, an effect is set as the standby effect in which the ally character is enthusiastically wearing an aura. That is, during the period in which the standby effect is performed, the symbol variation effect is not performed, and the second specific effect and the non-second specific effect do not occur. Then, in the final game, the symbol variation effect is executed again, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the second specific effect is generated in the final game, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied. , as shown in FIG. 145(b), the non-second specific effect is generated in the final game, and the AT mode ends.

The standby effect described above can occur not only in a specific game with a small number of remaining games, but also in the middle of a set, when a predetermined lottery for occurrence is won. In this case, a standby effect is generated over a predetermined number of games (for example, 4 games) from the game in which the generation lottery is won, and then the symbol variation effect is executed. In this case, in the symbol variation effect after the predetermined number of games, the second specific effect does not occur unless the lottery for generating the second specific effect is won even if the continuation condition is satisfied.

A processing configuration for generating such a second specific effect will be described below.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing AT effect setting processing in this modified example.

In step Sb2801, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. In step Sb2802, the display of the number of remaining games of the set displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is updated in accordance with the update of the sub-side AT counter. Specifically, in this modification, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, a remaining game number image GP corresponding to the remaining game number of each set is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, upper right) of the auxiliary display section 65. In step Sb2802, the remaining game number image GP is updated according to the value of the sub-side AT counter.

In subsequent step Sb2803, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current game start command, and if it has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step Sb2804. . If a negative determination is made in step Sb2803, or if the process of step Sb2804 has been executed, the process advances to step Sb2805.

In step Sb2805, it is determined whether or not the occurrence completion flag is set. If the occurrence completion flag is not set, the process advances to step Sb2805 to determine whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, so that the 14th game to 17th game (remaining 5 games to remaining 2 games) of the set game), and it is determined whether or not it is a specific period in which the number of remaining games in the set is small and the standby effect should be executed. If the sub-side AT counter is 5 or more (before the 13th game) or if the sub-side AT counter is 0 (last game), whether or not the standby effect flag is set in the flag storage area 183a in step Sb2806. determine whether The standby effect flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the game should execute the standby effect outside the specific period, and is set when the lottery for generating the standby effect is won. If the standby effect flag is not set, the second specific effect setting process is executed in step Sb2807, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Further, when the sub-side AT counter is 1 to 4, or when the standby effect flag is set, the standby effect setting process is executed in step Sb2808, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. Then, if it is determined in step Sb2804 that the generated flag has been set, in step Sb2809 the process of setting the jackpot effect (FIG. 144(b)) to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. After that, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Second specific effect setting process>
In the second specific effect setting process, as shown in FIG. 147, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sb2901. In the following step Sb2902, a process for grasping the current AT mode continuation rate is executed. Then, at step Sb2903, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. Determine whether or not it is the final game.

If it is not the final game of the set, the process advances to step Sb2904 to determine whether or not an occurrence standby flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generation standby flag is a flag that is set when the generation lottery for the second specific performance is won during execution of the standby performance. When the occurrence waiting flag is not set, in step Sb2906, the process of acquiring the second specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Sb2907, the second specific effect lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 149, the second specific effect table, like the specific effect table of FIG. 131, determines the winning probability of the second specific effect lottery based on the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. It is set so that not only the specific combination but also the normal combination including the result of losing can be won in the second specific effect lottery.

After executing the second specific effect lottery process in step Sb2907, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step Sb2908. In step Sb2904, if it is determined that it is the final game of the set, if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery is won in step Sb2908, or if the occurrence standby flag is set in step Sb2904 After making the determination and then clearing the occurrence standby flag in step Sb2909, processing for setting the second specific effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed in step Sb2910. In this case, as shown in FIG. 144(a), in the symbol variation effect of the current game, a second specific effect is generated in which the characters with the same number are stopped in the respective variable areas SP1 to SP3. The type of number character to be stopped in the second specific effect is randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected are changed according to the value of the AT set counter (the number of remaining continuous sets). may be stopped together, and if the AT set counter is less than a predetermined number, even-numbered characters may be stopped together. Further, for example, the number characters that are likely to be selected are made different according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. If the AT set counter is less than a predetermined rate, the even-numbered characters may be stopped together. Furthermore, characters with numbers that are likely to be selected are made different according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. The characters may stop together, and if the set value is less than a predetermined number, the even-numbered characters may stop together. Moreover, you may combine these.

After that, after setting the generated flag in step Sb2911, the second specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the occurrence completion flag, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, affirmative determination is made in step Sb2804, and the process for setting the jackpot effect of step Sb2808 is performed. When the second specific effect set as described above is the final game of the set, the next game is the first game of the updated set, and the symbol variation effect is started again.

If it is determined that the sub-side continuation flag is not set at step Sb2903 or if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery is not won at step Sb2908, the process proceeds to step Sb2912. In step Sb2912, processing for setting so that the non-second specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 143(a) and 143(b), in the symbol variation effect of this game, there is a non-second specific effect in which characters with the same number do not align in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and stop. Occur. Note that the number characters that stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. However, in order to maintain the anticipation of the occurrence of the second specific effect until the end of the game, the numbered characters that stop in the left variation area SP1 and the middle variation area SP2 are set to be the same, and the right variation area SP3 is used. The out-of-reach mode (Fig. 143 (a)) in which the number characters that stop at each point are different is the difference mode (Fig. 143 ( It is preferable to make it easier to be selected than b)).

In the subsequent step Sb2913, it is determined whether or not the sub side AT counter is greater than 10 and it is the 1st to 7th games of the set. If it is up to the 7th game, in step Sb2914 a waiting effect occurrence lottery process is executed. In the standby effect generating lottery process, a standby effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and whether or not to generate the standby effect is decided by lottery according to the lottery result of the current game. As shown in FIG. 149, the standby effect table is set so that the harder the game lottery results are, the easier it is to win the standby effect lottery. However, it can be said that it is set not to win in the normal role.

At step Sb2915, it is determined whether or not the standby effect lottery is won. When it is elected, in step Sb2916, the process of inputting 4 to the waiting effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed, and in step Sb2917 the process of setting the waiting effect flag is executed. , ends the second specific effect setting process. It should be noted that the value input in step Sb2916 corresponds to the number of games in which the standby effect is performed. is determined.

Then, by setting the standby effect flag in step Sb2917, in the AT effect setting process of the next game, an affirmative determination is made in step Sb2806, and the standby effect setting process of step Sb2808 is performed. If it is the 8th game or later in step Sb2913, or if the standby effect lottery is not won in step Sb2915, the second specific effect setting process is terminated as it is.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process of step Sb2808 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb3001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and in step Sb3002, the process of grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode of this time is executed. Then, in step Sb3003, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter is greater than 0, and if it is greater than 0, that is, the standby effect set in the current game is triggered by winning the standby effect lottery. If the standby effect is to be, in step Sb3004, a process of subtracting 1 from the standby effect counter is executed. Then, in step Sb3005, it is determined whether or not the standby effect counter has become 0, and when it becomes 0, a process of clearing the standby effect flag is executed in step Sb3006.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3005 or after the processing of step Sb3006 is executed, it is determined in step Sb3007 whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if set, step Sb3008. , it is determined whether or not the occurrence waiting flag is set. If the occurrence standby flag is not set, in step Sb3009, a process of acquiring a second specific effect table is executed, and in step Sb3010, a second specific effect lottery process is executed. The processing of steps Sb3009 and Sb3010 is the same as the processing of steps Sb2906 and Sb2907 described above.

After executing the process of step Sb3010, it is determined whether or not the second specific effect lottery is won in step Sb3011, and if the lottery is won, the process of setting the occurrence standby flag is performed in step Sb3012. Execute. As a result of this processing, affirmative determination is made in step Sb2905, and the second specific effect is generated in the first game after execution of the standby effect based on the final game of the AT mode set or the standby effect lottery. become.

If the standby effect counter is 0 in step Sb3003, and the standby effect set in the current game is a standby effect triggered by the fact that the number of remaining games in the set has become small, the sub-side in step Sb3007 If the continuation flag is not set, if the occurrence standby flag is set at step Sb3008, if it is determined that the second specific effect lottery is not won at step Sb3011, and the processing of step Sb3012 is executed. After either of the cases, after executing the process of setting so that the standby effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sb3013, the standby effect setting process is terminated.

That is, during the 4 games from the remaining 5 games to the remaining 2 games of the set, or between the 4 games after winning the standby effect generation lottery, regardless of the result of the second specific effect lottery process, the pattern variation effect is not the standby. A performance is held. In this case, the pattern variation effect performed in the final game of the set (one remaining game) will be the second specific effect if the continuation condition of this set is satisfied, and will not be the second specific effect if the continuation condition is not satisfied. It becomes a performance. On the other hand, the pattern variation effect performed in the first game after the standby effect triggered by winning the standby effect generation lottery is the total game including the 4 games in which the standby effect was executed. The second specific effect can occur depending on the result of the second specific effect lottery, and the probability is overwhelmingly higher than the occurrence rate of the second specific effect in other games (see FIG. 149).

As described above, by performing the specific effect (second specific effect) in each game with the symbol variation effect, it is possible to more clearly notify whether or not the second specific effect has occurred in the current game. This makes it easier for the player to have the impression that it is determined whether the continuation condition is established according to the lottery result of each game. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game.

In this case, a standby performance in which no pattern variation performance is performed can be generated, and a second specific performance lottery is performed even in a game in which the standby performance is performed, and when the second specific performance lottery is won. Since the second specific effect is performed in the first game after the standby effect, the degree of attention to the symbol variation effect in the first game after the standby effect is dramatically increased. In addition, even when the number of remaining games in each set becomes small, the standby effect is executed, and the final game of the set is the first game after the standby effect. In relation to the waiting effect obtained, it has succeeded in increasing the attention to the final game of the set.

That is, the game in which the standby effect is performed is a game in which the execution of the second specific effect is restricted, and even in the game in which the execution of such a second specific effect is restricted, the second specific effect lottery itself is performed. By doing so, it is possible to make the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the second specific effect different depending on each game in which the symbol variation effect is performed, not limited to the final game of the set.

<Second b Embodiment β>
In the present embodiment, in a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, 10 games, which is a smaller number than the 18 games, is set as one set of effects, and one set of effects is set. When a specific performance occurs at the time, it is configured to shift to a new performance set at that time. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effect (second specific effect) in the above-described 2b embodiment α, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a third specific effect. In addition, in order to distinguish the performance set set for the 10th game from the AT mode set set for the 18th game, the AT mode set is also called an AT set, and the performance set is also called a pseudo set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150(a), in this embodiment, when the AT mode is started, an opening effect is performed over eight games in the first AT set. For the opening effect, for example, as shown in FIG. Display (OP game number image OG).

When the 8 games for the opening effect are finished, the pseudo set is started. In the pseudo-set, as shown in FIG. 150(a), using the pattern variation effect in the second b embodiment α, a third specific effect in which characters of the same number stop together in each of the variation areas SP1 to SP3. and a non-third specific effect in which characters of the same number do not align in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 and stop.

As shown in FIG. 150(b1), when performing a pseudo-set effect, the number-of-remaining-games image GP in the 2b embodiment α is displayed in association with the number of remaining games of the pseudo-set. For example, the number-of-remaining-games image GP in FIG. 150(b1) shows the first game (10 remaining games) in the pseudo-set, and the display of the number-of-remaining-games image GP is updated at the start of the game.

In the effects in the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 150(b2), the third specific effect occurs before the final game in which the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the third specific effect is not generated until the final game in which the number-of-games image GP is 1, and the non-third specific effect is repeatedly executed.

When the third specific effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 150(b3), an update effect is generated to indicate that the next pseudo set is to be entered. In this case, as shown in FIG. 150(b4), after the update effect occurs, the number of remaining games in the next pseudo set is reset to 10, and 10 is displayed as the number of remaining games image GP. Also, the number-of-sets image CP indicating the number of pseudo sets is displayed after being updated to a value corresponding to the number of sets of the next pseudo set (updated from 2 to 3 in the figure). In this way, when the third specific effect occurs before the final game in the pseudo set, the number of remaining games in the pseudo set is newly set regardless of the number of remaining games in the pseudo set, which is the third specified effect. It will be repeated as long as the production occurs.

In this case, the update effect indicating the transition to the next pseudo set can be said to be a continuation notification for notifying that the condition for continuing the pseudo set is satisfied. However, the continuation notification in the above-described 2b embodiment α is for informing that the continuation condition of the set managed by the main controller 101 side is satisfied, while the continuation notification in the present embodiment is based on the display This is for notifying that the condition for continuation of the pseudo set managed by the control device 81 is satisfied, and in that respect the continuation notification in the present embodiment can also be referred to as pseudo continuation notification.

When the third specific effect does not occur until the final game of the pseudo set, as shown in FIG. 150(b6), a non-update effect indicating that the pseudo set is not updated occurs. After the non-updated effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 150(a), the ending effect is executed over 7 games, and after the ending effect ends, the AT mode ends.

As the ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 151(b), a effect is set in which the face of the ally character with eyes closed is displayed close-up on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. Also in the ending effect, the ED game number image EG is displayed corresponding to the number of remaining games of the ending effect, and the display of the ED game number image EG is updated as the game is completed.

Before the number of remaining games of the ending effect becomes 0, if the continuation condition is met by winning an extra lottery or the like, the ally character will be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as shown in FIG. 151(c). After the resurrection effect in which the spread view is displayed, the effect by the pseudo set is resumed.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing each effect in this embodiment will be described.

<Processing for precursor mode>
First, changes in processing on the main controller 101 side in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the portent mode processing in the winning result handling processing is different from that of the above-described 2b embodiment α.

As shown in FIG. 152, in this embodiment, the precursor counter becomes 0 in step Sb3102, and it is determined in step Sb3104 that the current precursor mode was the precursor mode triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery. A part of the processing for starting the AT mode is different. That is, in step Sb3109 the AT mode winning flag is cleared, in step Sb3110 the AT mode flag is set, in step Sb3111 the continuation rate of the current AT mode is set, then in step Sb3112 one set of AT mode Set the number of games in the eye as 18. Then, in this embodiment, in step Sb3113, after executing the process of adding 1 to the AT set counter, in step Sb3114, the process of setting the AT start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. . The processing of steps Sb3101 to Sb3112 and step Sb3114 is the same as the processing of steps Sb1201 to Sb1213.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the set management type AT mode in which one set of 18 games is set, the continuation condition is always established in the first set.

On the other hand, also in the present embodiment, the main controller 101 side executes the processing for updating the AT set (continuation determination processing) every 18 games, and if the condition for continuing the AT set is satisfied, the AT Perform processing to switch to a new AT set after completing 18 games of the set, and end AT mode after completing 18 games of the AT set if the conditions for continuing the AT set are not met. process (AT mode process).

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, changes in the AT effect setting process on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb3201, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main controller 101 side, as in the second b embodiment α, and corresponds to the number of remaining games in each set on the main controller 101 side. ing. In subsequent step Sb3202, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as a command at the start of the current game, and if it has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step Sb3203.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3202, or after the process of step Sb3203 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sb3204. In step Sb3204, it is determined whether the sub-side set counter is 1 or not. The sub-side set counter corresponds to the number of AT mode sets set on the main controller 101 side, as in the second b embodiment α. It is determined whether or not

If it is the first set, the process advances to step Sb3205 to determine whether the sub-side AT counter is 10 to 17 and it is the 1st to 8th games of the first set in the AT mode. If it is the 1st to 8th games of the 1st set of the AT mode, a process for performing an opening effect is executed in steps Sb3206 to Sb3208, and if it is the 9th game of the 1st set of the AT mode or later. After executing the process for performing the third specific effect in step Sb3209, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

That is, if it is the 1st game to the 8th game of the 1st set, it is determined in step Sb3206 whether the sub-side AT counter is 10 and it is the 8th game. If it is the eighth game, in step Sb3207, a process of setting 10 to the pseudo AT counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The pseudo AT counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the pseudo set. In step Sb3206, if the game to be started this time is the eighth game of the first set in the AT mode, it means that the pseudo set will be started from the next game, and the processing of step Sb3207 is performed in the next game. This is a process for setting in advance the number of games of the pseudo set to be started from .

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3206, or after the processing of step Sb3207 is executed, the processing of setting the opening effect (FIG. 151(a)) to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sb3208. is performed, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In the process for performing the opening effect, the process for updating the display of the number of games (OP game number image OG) until the start of the pseudo set is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

If the sub-side set counter is not 1 in step Sb3204 and the set is not the first set in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step Sb3210. In step Sb3210, it is determined whether or not an ending flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The ending flag is a flag that is set when the number of games in the pseudo set is completed without the third specific effect occurring as described above, and the ending effect (FIG. 151(b)) should be performed. If the ending flag is not set, the third specific effect setting process is executed in step Sb3209.

On the other hand, if the ending flag is set, the process advances to step Sb3211 to determine whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set. When the ending flag is set and the sub-side continuation flag is set, the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery on the side of the main control unit 101 after the end of the pseudo-set effect. means that If the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step Sb3212 the ending effect is set so that it is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in the processing for performing the ending effect, processing for updating the display of the number of games until the end of the ending effect (ED game number image EG) is also performed based on the sub-side AT counter.

Also, in step Sb3211, when it is determined that the continuation condition is established by, for example, winning the additional lottery on the main control unit 101 side after the end of the effect by the pseudo set, the process of clearing the ending flag is performed in step Sb3213. After that, in step Sb3214, the process of setting the resurrection effect (FIG. 151(c)) to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Third specific effect setting process>
In the third specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 154, first, in step Sb3301, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo effect counter is executed. Execute the process to update the . In subsequent step Sb3303, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set.

If the sub-side continuation flag is set, it is determined in step Sb3304 whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the 10th game of the pseudo set). do. If it is not the final game, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sb3305, the continuation rate of AT mode is grasped in step Sb3306, and the third specific effect table is acquired from the table storage area 182a in step Sb3307. Then, in step Sb3308, the third specific effect lottery process is executed. The processing of steps Sb3305 to Sb3308 corresponds to the processing of steps Sb2102 to Sb2105.

As shown in FIG. 155, the third specific effect table in this embodiment is set so that the rate of occurrence of the third specific effect differs depending on the result of the game lottery and the continuation rate of the AT mode. As a result, it is set so that the third specific effect is more likely to occur as the result is less likely to be won, and the third specific effect is more likely to occur as the continuation rate of the AT mode is higher. In addition, the lottery result of the game is set so that the third specific effect can occur not only for a specific role as a so-called rare role, but also for a normal role including the result of losing, and the lottery result of the game. The occurrence rate of the third specific effect according to each lottery result calculated from the product of the winning probability and the winning probability of the third specific effect lottery is set so that the normal role is higher than the specific role. ing.

In addition, in relation to the AT mode continuation rate, the higher the continuation rate in each lottery result, the more likely the third specific effect will occur. The occurrence rate of the effect is also high, and the continuation rate is set so that the higher the probability of the third specific effect occurring before the final game (by the 9th game) as a pseudo set, the higher the continuation rate. That is, as the AT mode with a higher continuation rate, the third specific effect occurs in a smaller number of games in the pseudo set, and it becomes easier to move to the next pseudo set. The number of pseudo sets tends to increase in the AT mode of the continuation rate. By doing so, the difference in the number of pseudo sets tends to be larger than the difference between the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is high and the actual number of AT sets when the continuation rate is low. . Therefore, the difference in the number of pseudo-sets in appearance is larger than the difference in the actual number of balls released (the difference in the number of AT mode games and sets actually played) due to the high and low continuation rate of AT mode, and the continuation rate is high. It is possible to prevent the payout rate from rising while appropriately performing the performance when is selected.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step Sb3308, it is determined whether or not the third specific effect lottery is won in step Sb3309. If the third specific effect lottery is won, a process of setting the third specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step Sb3310. Further, even when it is determined in step Sb3304 that the sub-side continuation flag is set and it is the final game of the pseudo set, the process for performing the third specific effect is executed in step Sb3310.

In subsequent step Sb3311, after the third specific effect set in step Sb3310, a process for setting update effect ((b3) in FIG. 150) to be performed by auxiliary display section 65 or speaker 64 is executed. Then, in step Sb3312, after executing the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sb3303 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb3313. In step Sb3313, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is a game updated to a new set on the main controller 101 side (first game of AT set). If it is not a new set update game, in step Sb3314, a process of setting so that the non-third specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. Then, in step Sb3315, it is determined whether or not the pseudo AT counter is 0 and the game to be started this time is the final game of the pseudo set (the tenth game of the pseudo set). If it is the final game, in step Sb3316, after the non-third specific effect set in step Sb3314, the non-updated effect (FIG. 150(b6)) is set to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the processing to be performed. Then, after executing the process of setting the ending flag in step Sb3317, the third specific effect setting process is terminated. By setting the ending flag, an affirmative determination is made in step Sb3210 from the next game, and the ending effect is performed. If it is not the final game of the pseudo set in step Sb3315, the third specific effect setting process is terminated.

Here, a case will be described in which it is determined that it is the first game of the relevant AT set in a situation where an affirmative determination is made in step Sb3313 and the sub-side continuation flag is not set. In this case, the process advances to step Sb3310 to execute setting processing for generating the third specific effect. In other words, when the main controller 101 side does not win the continuation lottery performed when the AT mode set is updated, the third specific effect is generated in the game. Then, the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the final set of the AT mode (the set not won in the continuation lottery), and the pseudo set is started from the second game of the final set. Then, the non-third specified effect is executed over 10 games in the pseudo set, and the non-updated effect is performed after the non-third specified effect in the 11th game of the AT set which is the final game of the pseudo set. After that, the ending effect is executed over seven games from the 12th game of the AT set, and the AT mode ends. By doing so, regardless of the number of games in each set of the AT mode on the main control device 101 side, even though the pseudo set is updated and the like is performed in the effect, the third specific set is performed in the final set of the AT mode. It is possible to perform a pseudo set in which no production occurs.

<Update of AT mode set and update of pseudo set>
How the AT mode set is updated on the main controller 101 side and how the pseudo set is updated on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When the AT mode is started at td1, in the first set of the AT mode from td1, the opening effect is performed until td2, which is the seventh game (remaining 12 games). From td3, which is the 8th game (11 remaining games) in the 1st set, the pseudo set effect is performed.

As already explained, in the situation where the continuation flag (sub-side continuation flag) is set, in the pseudo set effect, regardless of the number of remaining games in one set managed by the main controller 101 side, the lottery result of the game or the continuation rate of the AT mode. And regardless of the continuation rate of AT mode, the third specific effect occurs.

For example, in the first set of the AT mode started from td1, when the third specific effect occurs in the game of td4 before the number of remaining games in the pseudo set becomes 0, the pseudo set is passed through the update effect. is updated. Then, from the next game td5, the next pseudo set is started with 10 remaining games. Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT mode started from td1 becomes 0 at td6, since the continuation flag is set, processing for updating the set (steps Sb1404 to Sb1406) is executed, and the following The second set starts from the game of td7. Then, at td7, a continuation lottery is executed when the set is updated. For example, if the continuation lottery executed at td7 is won, the continuation flag is set again.

Also, for example, in the second set of the AT mode started from td7, if the third specific effect does not occur until the number of remaining games in the second set of the pseudo set becomes 0, the number of remaining games becomes 0. At td8, the third specific effect occurs. Then, the third pseudo-set is started from the next game td9.

Similarly, when the number of remaining games in the second set of the AT mode started from td7 becomes 0, since the continuation flag is set, the process for updating the set is performed as described above, and td10. 3rd set will start. Then, if the continuation lottery held at td10 is also won, the continuation flag is set again.

In the pseudo-set effect on the display control device 81 side, the pseudo-set effect (third specific effect) for updating the pseudo-set at any time is generated as described above until the continuation lottery on the main control device 101 side is not won. continue.

At td11 when the number of remaining games in the third set of the AT mode started at td10 becomes 0, the process for updating the set is performed again. However, if the continuation lottery is not won at td12 when the next 4th set is started, the continuation flag is not set.

In this case, the display control device 81 generates the third specific effect in the pseudo set effect in td12, which is the starting game of the fourth set in the AT mode. Then, a new pseudo set (seventh set) is started from td13, which is the game following the game at td12 in which the third specific effect is generated. In the 7th pseudo set, the non-third specific effect occurs over 10 games, and the 7th pseudo set continues until td14 of the 11th game in the 4th set of the AT mode. In this case, the non-update effect is generated at td14, and the ending effect is performed from td15, which is the next game of the current game. The ending effect continues over seven games, and ends together with the AT mode at td16 when the number of remaining AT mode games becomes zero.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In the set management type AT mode, a pseudo set effect is performed over 10 games, which is shorter than the number of games in the AT set, 18 games, and when a third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect, the pseudo set effect is performed. Made it transition to a new pseudo-set regardless of the number of games remaining in the set. By doing so, the pseudo-set effect is performed with the number of repetitions greater than the number of repetitions of the AT set, and while the effect of giving the impression that the AT mode continues for a long time is expected, the final performance of the AT mode is also expected. It is possible to well match the game with the end of the pseudo-set presentation.

More specifically, the number of remaining games in AT mode is 18 games, which is more than 10 games, which is the number of games to be continued in pseudo set production (the first game of AT set in which the continuation conditions are not satisfied, the remaining games are pseudo set The number of games is less than twice the 10 games of ), the third specific effect is generated to update the pseudo set. By doing so, if the third specific effect is not generated in the updated pseudo set, the pseudo set effect can be terminated when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches 8 games. Become. In this case, in the present embodiment, the ending effect is performed for the remaining seven games, and it is possible to adjust the end game of the AT mode and the end game of the pseudo set effect without discomfort.

In the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the number of games for performing a new pseudo set is ensured even if the pseudo set is updated in any game. Therefore, in the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect is generated through the third specific effect lottery process, so the timing at which the third specific effect occurs during the pseudo set effect It is possible to generate randomness in the game in which the update is performed, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the pseudo-set effect.

In this case, the main control device 101 determines whether the conditions for continuing the AT mode are met, and the display control device 81 performs the simulated set effects. The configuration is such that whether the success or failure of the continuation condition is grasped and whether the third specific performance is generated at random in the pseudo set performance or when the AT set is updated is differentiated. By doing so, it is possible to manage whether or not to continue the AT mode, and to perform the effects during the AT mode by separate control devices, thereby decentralizing the functions, while effectively ending the AT mode game. It is possible to adjust the ending game of the pseudo-set presentation.

In particular, on the display control device 81 side, the determination of whether or not to generate the third specific effect without going through the third specific effect lottery process is the first game of the AT set, so the determination is made once every 18 games. It is a configuration that only needs to be performed once. Therefore, it is possible to expect an overwhelming effect of reducing the processing load compared to a configuration in which the determination is made every game.

Also in this embodiment, the third specific effect lottery is configured to be performed according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. Therefore, since the lottery result of each game and the occurrence of the third specific effect are linked, it is possible for the player to obtain a sense of satisfaction that the third specific effect has been generated by his/her own trick, and the third specific effect can be obtained. It is possible to play a game of predicting the continuation rate of the AT mode from the occurrence rate of the specific effect, and it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, in the AT mode set update game (the first game in the AT set), the third specific effect is more likely to occur than in other games. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In the third specific effect setting process in this modified example, the sub-side continuation flag is set (step Sb3403: YES), and the content of the third specific effect lottery is different when it is not the final game of the pseudo set. Specifically, after grasping the lottery result of the current game and the continuation rate of the AT mode (step Sb3405, step Sb3406), the sub side AT counter is 17 in step Sb3407, and the game to be started this time is the AT mode. It is determined whether or not it is the first game of the mode set. If it is not the first game, the third specific effect table is acquired in step Sb3408, and the third specific effect lottery process is executed in step Sb3410. The third specific effect table is the same as that of the second b embodiment β (FIG. 155). On the other hand, if it is the first game of the AT mode set, after acquiring the third specific effect table at the time of update from the various table storage area 182a in step Sb3409, the third specific effect lottery process is performed in step Sb3410. to run.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the update-time third specific effect table, the rate of occurrence of the third specific effect is set according to the game lottery result and the continuation rate of the AT mode, similarly to the third specific effect table. However, when comparing the same game lottery result and the same AT mode continuation rate, the third specific effect table at the time of update is more likely to cause the third specific effect than the third specific effect table. is set. For example, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, in the case of normal reply A, the third specific effect table has a probability of 2.0%, while the third specific effect table at the time of update has a probability of 6 The third specific effect occurs with a probability of .0%.

After executing the third specific effect lottery process in step Sb3410, it is determined whether or not the generation lottery is won in step Sb3411. Perform processing when generating In addition, if the game is not won, the process advances to step Sb3416 to perform processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processes of steps Sb3401 to Sb3406 and steps Sb3410 to Sb3419 are the same as the processes of steps Sb3301 to Sb3317.

As described above, on the premise that the third specific effect is generated in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the pseudo set is updated, the AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied To make it difficult to perceive the occurrence of the third specific performance in the first game of an AT set as a sign that a continuation condition is not satisfied by adopting a configuration in which the third specific performance is likely to occur even in the first game. is possible, and the third specific effect in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied can be successfully camouflaged. Therefore, it becomes difficult to guess the success or failure of the continuation condition on the AT set side, and it becomes possible to enjoy the pseudo-set presentation more purely.

<Modification 2>
In Embodiment β of 2b above, the number of games in which the ending effect is performed is uniformly set to a predetermined number (7), but in this modified example, it is changed. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing the third specific effect setting process in this modified example.

In this modification, the processing is different when it is determined in step Sb3503 that the sub-side continuation flag has not been set. That is, if a negative determination is made in step Sb3503, it is determined in step Sb3513 whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and it is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game, it is determined in step Sb3514 whether the pseudo AT counter is smaller than 7 and it is the fourth game or later of the pseudo set. If it is the fourth game or later, the process proceeds to step Sb3510, and the process for performing the third specific effect is executed. If the game to be started this time is up to the third game of the pseudo set, the continuation rate of the AT mode is grasped in step Sb3515, and the setting value set in the winning probability setting process is grasped in step Sb3516. Then, in step Sb3517, a process of acquiring the ending game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Sb3518, a process of determining the number of games for the current ending effect in the AT mode by lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 160, the number-of-ending-games table is set so that the number of ending games to be selected varies depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode and the setting value. In general, the continuation rate of the AT mode is high. It is set so that the smaller the number of ending games, the easier it is to select, and the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ending games is likely to be selected. For example, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the set value is 3 or 4 than when the set value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. easy to be Also, even in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the average number of ending games is smaller when the setting value is 3 or 4 than when the setting value is 1 or 2, and a shorter number of games is selected. easy to be In both cases where the set value is 1 or 2 and where the set value is 3 or 4, the number of ending games is greater in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% than in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%. The average value becomes smaller, and a shorter number of games is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the set value is 5 or 6, for example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the number of ending games of one game is most likely to be selected, while in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, 7 games are selected. is most likely to be selected, and the higher the continuation rate is, the more likely the number of ending games is to be selected. In other words, even if the number of ending games is short, the setting value does not tend to be high, and the setting value is set so that the setting value can be narrowed down in relation to the continuation rate of the AT mode. By doing so, it becomes more meaningful to predict the continuation rate before reaching the ending, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

Here, the situation in which the ending effect is performed is, as described above, basically the case where the AT mode ends without the set continuation condition being satisfied, so the continuation rate can be grasped by the ending effect. is also difficult to become useful information for the player. However, as described above, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate, and the continuation rate is configured to be predictable from the occurrence probability of the third specific effect before the ending effect occurs. Therefore, in order to predict the setting value, information on the continuation rate is required after the fact, such as predicting the setting value from the continuation rate predicted before the ending effect and the number of games in the ending effect. By making the information on the continuation rate necessary after the fact, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the third specific effect.

After lottery processing for the number of ending games is performed in step Sb3518, the process advances to step Sb3719 to subtract the number of ending games determined in step Sb3518 from 7, which is the maximum number of ending games, and the calculated value is obtained. is input to the ending wait counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. The ending standby counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the game in which the third specific effect is generated in accordance with the start of the ending effect.

After executing the process of step Sb3519, it is determined whether or not the ending wait counter is 0 in step Sb3520. For example, if the number of ending games is selected as 3, the value to be input to the ending wait counter in step Sb3519 is 4, and a negative determination is made in step Sb3520. If a negative determination is made in step Sb3520, the process advances to step Sb3521 to execute processing for generating a non-third specific effect. The processing of steps Sb3521 to Sb3524 is the same as the processing of steps Sb3314 to Sb3317.

If a negative determination is made in step Sb3513, and it is determined that it is not the first game of the set in which the continuation condition is not established, it is determined in step Sb3525 whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. do. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the third specific effect has already been generated in the set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step Sb3526, a process of subtracting 1 from the ending wait counter is executed.

After executing the processing of step Sb3526, the process advances to step Sb3520 to determine whether or not the ending wait counter has become zero. If not 0, as described above, the process advances to step Sb3521 to perform processing for generating the non-third specific effect. When the ending waiting counter becomes 0, after executing the process of clearing the generated flag in step Sb3527, the process proceeds to step Sb3510 and executes the process for generating the third specific effect. The processing of steps Sb3501 to Sb3512 is the same as the processing of steps Sb3301 to Sb3312.

Further, when the generated flag is set in step Sb3525 and the third specific effect has been generated, the process proceeds to step Sb3521 to execute the process for generating the non-third specific effect.

As described above, by making the number of ending games variable instead of the fixed number of 7 games, the game in which the third specific effect is generated in the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is the first game in the AT set. It is not limited to , but is random. By doing so, it becomes more difficult to grasp whether or not the AT set is continued from the update timing of the pseudo set, and it is possible to enhance the effect of entertaining the pseudo set presentation.

Moreover, in the above configuration, since the setting value can be estimated based on the number of ending games, when the ending effect is performed, not only does the AT mode end, but also the setting value can be predicted. It is also possible to provide the fun of playing, and it is possible to suitably compensate for the decline in the player's desire to play.

In this case, the set values can be estimated and narrowed down based not only on the number of ending games, but also on the continuation rate of the AT mode. The importance of predicting and grasping the rate is increased, and it becomes possible to make the player pay more attention to the occurrence of the third specific effect.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the occurrence probability of the third specific effect is changed. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing a third specific effect table in this modified example.

The third specific effect table in this modified example is set so that the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the less likely the third specific effect will occur, and the lower the continuation rate, the more likely the third specific effect will occur. Specifically, considering the lottery results of each game, in the situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, there is a probability of about 71.5% per game, and 90% In AT mode with a continuation rate of 1.5% per game. Under conditions where the continuation conditions are met, the pseudo-set lasts for a maximum of 10 games, while the AT mode with 10% continuation lasts about 1.4 games, and the AT mode with 90% continuation lasts about 9.3 games. The lower the AT mode continuation rate, the fewer the number of games per pseudo set.

In addition, as already described, in the present embodiment, a pseudo-set effect is performed with 10 games as one set. is updated to That is, the probability of updating the pseudo set increases as the third specific effect is more likely to occur.

The average number of continuous sets in AT mode is about 2.1 sets in 10% continuous AT mode, about 7.9 sets in 90% continuous AT mode, and 90% continuous AT mode. The mode lasts 3.7 times as many sets as the 10% duration AT mode. On the other hand, in the pseudo set, the update probability of the pseudo set is higher in the 10% continuous AT mode as described above, and the average number of pseudo sets in the 10% continuous AT mode is lasts about 4.4 sets, and about 6.8 sets in the 90% duration AT mode. Therefore, in the AT mode with 90% continuation, 1.5 times as many pseudo sets as in the AT mode with 10% continuation will continue, and the continuation rate in the number of pseudo sets is greater than the difference in the continuation rate in the actual number of AT mode sets. difference is smaller.

Also, in the 60% continuous AT mode, about 3.5 sets are continued, so the 60% continuous AT mode has a smaller average continuous number of sets than the 90% continuous AT mode. However, the average value of the pseudo set is about 9.0 sets in the 60% continuous AT mode, and about 6.8 sets in the 90% continuous AT mode. The number of pseudo-sets is larger than in AT mode with 90% continuation. That is, the average number of AT sets and the average number of pseudo sets are reversed according to the continuation rate, and the lower the continuation rate, the larger the average number of pseudo sets.

The relationship between the AT mode continuation rate and the pseudo set update probability will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162(a) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in the 10% continuous AT mode, and FIG. 162(b) shows an example of a pseudo-set effect in the 90% continuous AT mode. there is

For example, in the 10% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at te1, and the pseudo set effect starts from te2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, although the continuation condition is satisfied in the first set of the AT mode started at te1 and the second set of the AT mode started at te5, the 3rd set of the AT mode started at te11 is satisfied. It is assumed that the continuation condition is not established in the set, and the AT mode ends at te13 through the ending effect that starts at te12.

As described above, in the 10% continuation AT mode, if the continuation condition is satisfied, the third specific effect will occur with a probability of about 71.5% in each game. After the first set of pseudo-set effects is started, the third specific effect occurs at te3 to te11, and after 10 sets of pseudo-sets are performed, the ending effect is generated.

On the other hand, in the 90% continuation AT mode, the first set starts at tf1, and the pseudo set effect starts at tf2 when the opening effect ends. In this case, the first set of AT mode started at tf1, the second set of AT mode started at tf4, the third set of AT mode started at tf7, and the third set started at tf11. Although the continuation condition is satisfied in the 4th set of AT mode, the continuation condition is not satisfied in the 5th set of AT mode started at tf14. , the AT mode ends.

As mentioned above, in the 90% continuation AT mode, if the continuation conditions are satisfied, the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is lower than the 10% continuation AT mode, with a probability of about 1.5% in each game. In the figure, after the first set of pseudo set effects is started from tf2, the third specific effects are generated at tf3, tf5, tf6, tf8 to tf10, and tf12 to tf14, resulting in 10 sets. It shows that the ending effect occurred after the pseudo-set of.

That is, in this case, the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 10% continuation is 3 sets, and the actual number of sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is 5 sets. The number of pseudo-sets is 10 sets, and the number of pseudo-sets in the AT mode with 90% continuation is also 10 sets. can be given to people.

<Second b Embodiment γ>
In this embodiment, when a specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect in the second b embodiment β, the jackpot effect is executed over a predetermined number of games (4 games to 14 games), and then again. , Pseudo set production is performed. Then, when the specific effect does not occur in the pseudo set effect, the AT mode ends when the prescribed number of games (10 games) of the pseudo set effect is completed. In addition, in order to distinguish the specific effect in this embodiment from the specific effects in the other embodiments, the specific effect in this embodiment is also referred to as a fourth specific effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163(a), in the embodiment, when the AT mode is started, without going through the opening effect as in the second b embodiment β, from the start of the AT mode Pseudo set production is started.

The pseudo set effect continues for a maximum of 10 games, as in the second b embodiment β. As shown in FIG. 163(b1), in the same manner as in the second b embodiment β, a fourth specific effect in which characters with the same number stop in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 using a symbol variation effect and each variation An effect is produced in which any one of the non-fourth specific effects is generated in which the characters of the same number do not align in the areas SP1 to SP3 and stop.

As shown in FIG. 163(b2), the fourth specific effect occurs before the final game when the number-of-remaining-games image GP becomes 1, and as shown in FIG. 163(b3), a big win effect is performed. As the jackpot effect, for example, a effect is set in which a state in which a friend character's eyes are closed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the effect continues over a minimum of 4 games and a maximum of 14 games. Then, as shown in FIG. 163(b4), when a transition effect is performed in the final game of the jackpot effect, in which the appearance of the ally characters opening their eyes is displayed, the pseudo-set effect is started again from the next game. be done.

In the pseudo set effect, when the non-fourth specific effect is performed over ten games, as shown in FIG. As shown in b6), the non-renewal effect is performed and the AT mode ends.

<AT effect setting processing>
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing AT effect setting processing in this embodiment.

After subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter in step Sb3601, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received in step Sb3602. If a continuation command has been received, processing for setting a sub-side continuation flag is executed in step Sb3603. If a negative determination is made in step Sb3602, or if the process of step Sb3603 is executed, the process advances to step Sb3604.

In step Sb3604, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 17 and the game to be started this time is the first game in the AT mode set. If it is the first game of the AT set, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Sb3605. This AT effect setting process is ended. The adjustment process is a process for adjusting the number of games of the pseudo-set effect and the jackpot effect being executed at the start of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not established, and the details thereof will be described later.

If it is not the first game of the set in step Sb3604, or if the sub-side continuation flag is set even if it is the first game of the AT set in step Sb3605, the process proceeds to step Sb3607. In step Sb3607, it is determined whether or not an adjusted flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The adjusted flag is a flag that is set when the adjustment processing in step Sb3606 is performed.

If the adjusted flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb3608, and it is determined whether or not the big hit effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The big win effect flag is a flag that is set when starting the big win effect, and is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the big win effect is in progress. When the jackpot effect flag is not set and the virtual set effect is performed instead of the jackpot effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated after executing the fourth specific effect setting process in step Sb3609.

<Fourth specific effect setting process>
In the fourth specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 165, a process of subtracting 1 from the pseudo AT counter is executed in step Sb3701, and a process of updating the remaining number of games image GP is executed in step Sb3702. Then, in step Sb3703, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set, and if it is set, in step Sb3704, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and the game to be started this time is a pseudo set. It is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, in steps Sb3705 to Sb3708, a process for determining whether or not to generate the fourth specific effect is executed according to the lottery result of the current game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. do. The processes of steps Sb3701 to Sb3708 are the same as the processes of steps Sb3301 to Sb3308, and the third specific effect table of FIG. 155 can be used as the fourth specific effect table.

At step Sb3709, it is determined whether or not the fourth specific effect lottery performed at step Sb3708 is won. If the fourth specific effect lottery is won, or if it is determined that it is the final game of the pseudo set in step Sb3604, the fourth specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step Sb3710. 163 (b2)). Then, in step Sb3711, the number-of-big-hit-effect game setting process is executed, and then the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for setting the number of jackpot production games>
In the jackpot effect game number setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 166, in step Sb3801, a process of acquiring a jackpot game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed. As shown in FIG. 168, the jackpot game number table is set so that one of 4 games to 14 games is selected according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. It is set such that the higher the set value of the payout rate, the easier it is to select the short game number jackpot effect.

After acquiring the number-of-big-hit-games table in step Sb3801, the number of games for performing the big-hit effect is determined by lottery in step Sb3802. Then, in step Sb3803, the lottery result is input to the jackpot effect counter 1 provided in the various counter areas 183b, and then in step Sb3804, after executing the process of setting the jackpot effect flag. , the process for setting the number of jackpot effect games ends. By setting the jackpot effect flag, the affirmative determination is made in step Sb3608 from the next game.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, when it is determined that the fourth specific effect lottery is not won in step Sb3709, the process proceeds to step Sb3712 so that the non-fourth specific effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. is set (FIG. 163(b1)). Then, in step Sb3713, the pseudo AT counter is 0, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the tenth game of the pseudo set, and if it is the tenth game, the AT ends in step Sb3714. A process for setting the effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 163(b6)). If it is not the 10th game of the pseudo set, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, when it is determined that the big hit effect flag is set in step Sb3608, the process proceeds to step Sb3610. In step Sb3610, a process of subtracting 1 from the jackpot effect counter is executed. Then, in step Sb3611, a process of adding 1 to the jackpot effect counter 2 provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The jackpot effect counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in which the jackpot effect is executed. In the following step Sb3612, it is determined whether or not the big hit effect counter 1 has become zero. If it is not 0, in step Sb3613, after performing the process of setting so that the jackpot effect is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 (FIG. 163 (b3)), the main AT effect setting process exit.

On the other hand, in step Sb3612, the jackpot effect counter 1 becomes 0, and if it is the final game of the jackpot effect, the process proceeds to step Sb3614, the process of clearing the jackpot effect flag is executed, and in step Sb3615, the jackpot effect counter 2 is executed. is cleared to 0. Then, in step Sb3616, the process of inputting 10 to the pseudo AT counter is executed, and in step Sb3617, after performing the process of setting the transition effect to be performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 (Fig. 163 ( b4)), this AT effect setting process is terminated.

<Processing for adjustment>
Next, the adjustment processing of step Sb3606, which is performed in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sb3901, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect. If the jackpot effect counter 1 is 0 and the pseudo set effect is to be performed, in step Sb3902, a process for setting the fourth specific effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (Fig. 163(b2)). Then, in step Sb3903, the big hit effect flag is set, and in step Sb3904, the process of setting 7 to the big win effect counter 1 is executed, and then this adjustment process is finished. The processing of steps Sb3902 to Sb3904 corresponds to the processing of steps Sb3710, Sb3803 and Sb3804. That is, by performing the processing of steps Sb3902 to Sb3904, the fourth specific effect is generated in the game to be started this time, and the jackpot effect is performed for 7 games from the next game. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the jackpot effect ends is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. (See FIG. 169(a)).

More specifically, from the 2nd game of the final set, which is the next game, to the 8th game of the final set, by determining that the jackpot effect flag is set in step Sb3608 in the AT effect setting process, the jackpot effect or A process for setting the transition effect is performed. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step Sb3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step Sb3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step Sb3715. Then, in step Sb3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set, and since it is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb3712, and processing for performing the non-fourth specific effect is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 1 is greater than 0 in step Sb3901 and the game is scheduled to perform a jackpot effect, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more in step Sb3905. If the jackpot effect counter 2 is less than 7 and the number of games of the jackpot effect that has already been executed is 6 games or less, 1 is input to the jackpot effect counter 2 in step Sb3906, and the jackpot effect counter is entered in step Sb3907. Execute the process of inputting 8 to 1. Then, in step Sb3908, after the process of setting the big win effect to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 (FIG. 163(b3)), the adjustment process is terminated. That is, by executing the processing of steps Sb3906 to Sb3908, the big win effect is executed over 8 games from the game started this time. As described above, the case where the processing of these steps Sb3906 to Sb3908 is executed is the case where the big win effect is scheduled to be performed in the current game, and it is six games or less after the start of the big win effect. Yes, by performing the processing of steps Sb3906 to Sb3908, the jackpot effects are executed over a total of 8 games to 14 games. In this case, the game in which the transition effect is performed after the jackpot effect ends is the 8th game in the final set of the AT mode, and the pseudo set effect by the non-fourth specific effect is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. (See FIG. 169(b)).

More specifically, as in the case where the process of step Sb3904 is performed, from the 2nd game of the final set which is the next game to the 8th game of the final set, the jackpot effect flag is set in step Sb3608 in the AT effect setting process. A process for setting a big hit effect or a transition effect is performed by determining that it has been performed. In the ninth and subsequent games of the final set, since the jackpot effect flag is cleared, a negative determination is made in step Sb3608, and the fourth specific effect setting process is performed. In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined that the sub-side continuation flag is not set in step Sb3703, and since the adjusted flag is not set in step Sb3715, the process proceeds to step Sb3712, and the non-fourth specific effect is performed. The process to do is executed.

If the jackpot effect counter 2 is 7 or more in step Sb3005, the process proceeds to step Sb3909, and the jackpot effect currently being executed is performed so that the final set of the pseudo set effect is performed from the ninth game of the final set of the AT mode. After once ending, the game (the number of games in which the pseudo-set presentation is continued) in which the fourth specific presentation is generated in the pseudo-set presentation after the relevant jackpot presentation, and the number of games in which the jackpot presentation is continued after the pseudo-set presentation are decided. Execute the processing to be performed.

That is, in step Sb3909, first, a process of clearing the big hit effect counter 1 and the big hit effect counter 2 to 0 is executed. Then, in step Sb3910, a process for setting the transition effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed (FIG. 163(b4)), and a process for clearing the jackpot effect flag is performed in step Sb3911. .

In the subsequent step Sb3912, a process of acquiring the adjustment game number table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Sb3913, an adjustment game number lottery process is executed.

The adjustment game number table is a table for determining the number of games to be continued for the next big win effect after the currently executed big win effect, and as shown in FIG. ing. In step Sb3913, the number of games from 4 games to 7 games is randomly determined by lottery or the like.

After executing the processing of step Sb3913, the processing of inputting the processing result of step Sb3913 to the adjusted counter 2 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step Sb3914. The adjusted counter 2 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games of the big win effect next to the currently executed big win effect.

In subsequent step Sb3915, a calculation process for the number of games for which the fourth specific effect is generated for adjustment is executed. This process is a process of calculating the game (the number of games in which the pseudo set effect is continued) in which the fourth specific effect is generated in the currently executed pseudo set effect after the big win effect. Specifically, a process of subtracting the adjusted counter 2 from 7 is executed.

Then, in step Sb3916, the process of inputting the processing result of step Sb3915 to the adjusted counter 1 provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The adjusted counter 1 is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of continuation games of the pseudo set effect next to the jackpot effect currently being executed. After executing the process of step Sb3916, the process for setting the adjusted flag is executed in step Sb3917, and then the adjustment process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step Sb3607 and the adjustment process has been executed before the previous game, the process proceeds to step Sb3618. In step Sb3618, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 is greater than zero. As described above, the adjusted counter 1 corresponds to the number of remaining games in the adjusted pseudo-set effect, and when the adjusted counter 1 is greater than 0, the game to be started this time is the above adjusted It means that it is a game that should perform a pseudo-set effect of. In this case, the process advances to step Sb3609 to execute the fourth specific effect setting process.

In the fourth specific effect setting process, it is determined in step Sb3703 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, and the process proceeds to step Sb3715. Then, in step Sb3715, it is determined whether or not the adjusted flag is set. In this case, since the adjusted flag is set, the process advances to step Sb3716 to execute the process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 1 . Then, in step Sb3717, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the process proceeds to step Sb3712 to perform processing for generating the non-fourth specific effect. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3717 that the adjusted counter 1 has become 0, the process of setting the fourth specific effect to be performed in the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is performed in step Sb3718. After that, the fourth specific effect setting process is terminated. In this case, since the number of continuous games for the next big win effect has already been set (adjusted counter 2, step Sb3914), the process of setting the number of continuous games for the next big win effect (step Sb3711) is not executed.

In the AT effect setting process, if the adjusted flag is set in step Sb3607 and the adjusted counter 1 is 0 in step Sb3618, the adjusted pseudo set effect has already been executed as described above. In this case, the process proceeds to step Sb3619 to perform a process of subtracting 1 from the adjusted counter 2 in order to perform the adjusted jackpot effect. Then, in step Sb3620, it is determined whether or not the adjusted counter 2 has reached 0, and if it has not reached 0, the process proceeds to step Sb3613, and a jackpot effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. After performing the setting process, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb3620 that the adjusted counter 2 has become 0, the process of clearing the adjusted flag is executed in step Sb3621, and then the process advances to step Sb3616 to set the pseudo AT counter to 11. After performing the process of inputting and the process of setting so that the transition effect of step Sb3617 is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, the AT effect setting process is terminated.

In this case, in the first game in the final set of the AT mode, the jackpot effect ends and the transition effect occurs, and from the second game onwards, the simulated set is adjusted over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 1. A performance is held. Then, after the fourth specific effect is generated in the adjusted pseudo-set effect, the adjusted jackpot effect is performed over the number of games corresponding to the value of the adjusted counter 2. - 特許庁Since the adjusted jackpot effect is adjusted to end in the 8th game of the final set, a pseudo-set effect in which the non-fourth specific effect is repeatedly generated is performed from the 9th game to the 18th game. AT mode ends (see FIG. 169(c)).

Thus, in this embodiment, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo-set effect, the next pseudo-set is not started immediately, but the next pseudo-set is started via the jackpot effect. Therefore, even if the fourth specific effect occurs early in the pseudo set and the number of corresponding games is small, the number of games can be compensated for by the game in which the big win effect is performed. , and it is possible to genuinely increase the expectation that the pseudo set will be updated.

Since the jackpot performance can be performed over 4 to 14 games, after the fourth specific performance occurs during the pseudo set, the jackpot performance ends in a short number of games and the next pseudo set starts. In some cases, after the jackpot effect is performed for a long period of time (with a long number of games), the next pseudo-set may be started, and only at the timing of the occurrence of the fourth specific effect during the pseudo-set effect Instead, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the generation timing of the transition effect (end timing of the big win effect) in the big win effect, so that the player can enjoy the thrilling game.

Here, the pseudo-set effect (maximum 10 games) performed during the AT mode and the continuous jackpot effect (4 games to 14 games) are the number of games of 18 games or more in the AT set when the number of games of both effects is combined. It is set so that there are cases where the number of games is less than 18 games. By doing so, even if the number of games of the AT set is not lengthened or shortened on the side of the main control device 101, the impression as if the number of games of the AT set changes depending on the length of both effects. can be given. By doing so, it is possible to improve the playability of the AT set with a relatively simple configuration.

In this case, the pseudo set effect and the jackpot effect are set so that the number of games is less than the number of games of the AT set even if they are continued to the maximum, so both effects are associated with the AT set as a set. It is possible to strongly give the impression that the game is being played, and both effects can help give the impression that the number of games in the AT set changes.

Further, as in the above configuration, when the fourth specific effect occurs in the pseudo set effect, the transition to the jackpot effect occurs, and when the pseudo set effect ends without the fourth specific effect occurring, the AT mode is switched. By adopting a configuration in which the game ends as it is, the non-occurrence of the fourth specific effect in the pseudo-set effect and the end of the AT mode are more closely related, and the generation of the fourth specific effect can be more eagerly awaited. It becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The AT mode is a set management type AT mode, and the number of continuous AT mode games is different according to the continuation rate, but there are multiple AT modes with different ease of continuing the AT mode (number of continuous games) may be provided. In this case, for example, a plurality of AT modes with different initial numbers of games may be set, or a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities of the final lottery may be set, with the AT mode continuing until the final lottery is won. may be set, and the AT mode is terminated when a predetermined end result (for example, a predetermined bonus result, etc.) is won, and a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities for the predetermined end result may be set, a plurality of AT modes with different winning probabilities for adding the number of games may be set, and a plurality of AT modes may be set for different numbers of games to be added at the time of winning with the addition of the number of games. , may be combined. Then, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery, the probability of winning the suggesting effect lottery, the number of ending games, the number of games of the jackpot effect, etc. may be changed depending on which AT mode is selected.

(2) The set management type AT mode has 18 games as one set, but the number of games in one set is not limited to this, and may be more or less than 18 games. Alternatively, the number of games in one set may change (there may be more than 18 games), such as by adding more games in one set. In addition, for example, in a configuration in which the continuation condition is always satisfied in the first set as in the second embodiment β, the number of continuous games in the first set is doubled instead of the configuration in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The number of games (36 games) may be set, and not only the first set but also the number of games of the set may be doubled when updating the AT set for which the continuation condition is satisfied. Alternatively, the number of games corresponding to the value of the AT set counter (if the AT set counter is 3, the number of games is tripled, etc.) may be set as the number of games of the set.

(3) The lottery table used in the lottery process of each game is common in AT modes with different continuation rates, but the lottery table may be different in each AT mode. Therefore, the winning probabilities of part or all of the predetermined combination or the specific combination or other results may be different, and the occurrence probability of the specific effect may be different in each AT mode due to the different winning probabilities. In this case, the odds of winning a part or all of a predetermined combination or a specific combination or other results may be different in each AT mode to such an extent that the player cannot identify them (composition where the probabilities are substantially the same).

(4) In the AT add-on process, while it is possible to win an add-on win in a specific role, it is configured not to win an add-on win in a normal role. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of winning additional winnings in the normal combination lower than the probability of winning additional winnings in the specific combination. In addition, it is excluded that the probability of winning additional winnings in some roles of normal roles (for example, normal reply C) is higher than the probability of winning in some roles of specific roles (e.g., Chance A). However, as a whole, it is sufficient if it is easier to win the special combination than the normal combination.

(5) The probability of winning the specific effect lottery is set to be higher for the specific role than for the normal role, but the probability of winning the specific effect lottery for the specific role and the normal role is the same or almost the same. May be set. Even in this case, since it is easier to win a normal role than a specific role in the lottery process of each game, the specific effect is generated with the normal role as a trigger rather than the ratio of the specific performance with the specific role as a trigger. the ratio will be greater. In addition, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery may be higher for the normal role than for the specific role. It is preferable to adjust the winning probability in the lottery processing of each game for the normal combination and the specific combination and the winning probability in the specific effect lottery so that the rate of occurrence of is greater.

(6) The continuation of the AT set in the AT mode is regarded as an advantageous event to generate an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and the continuation lottery is an example of the advantageous determination, and the conditions for continuing the AT set are established. Although a specific performance is performed as a performance corresponding to a good thing, it may be a performance associated with an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player, for example, winning a lottery for transition to the AT mode. , may be a production associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestion production that suggests the set value, or it may be a production associated with winning the AT mode extra lottery It is good also as the production|presentation associated.

In this case, if a specific effect is to be performed as an effect associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is won via the omen mode. In a constitution in which a winning performance is performed, a specific performance can occur during the sign mode and before the winning performance is performed or before the AT mode is started. After providing a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the shift lottery, the probability of occurrence of the specific performance is changed according to each mode, or the execution lottery of the specific performance is performed using the lottery result of each game. It is good to

In addition, if a specific performance is performed as a performance associated with winning the execution lottery of the suggestion performance that suggests the set value, after winning the execution lottery of the suggestion performance, until the suggestion performance is performed After having a configuration that requires multiple games for the execution of the suggested effect, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the lottery for the suggested effect until the suggested effect is performed, and the suggested effect of the set value A plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the execution lottery are provided, and the probability of occurrence of the specific performance is changed according to each mode, or the execution lottery of the specific performance is performed using the lottery result of each game. It is good to

Then, if a specific effect is performed as an effect associated with winning the additional lottery in the AT mode, it is configured such that a plurality of games are required from winning the additional lottery to performing the additional lottery. After that, a specific effect can occur in the game from winning the additional lottery until the additional lottery is performed, and after providing a plurality of modes with different winning probabilities of the additional lottery, each mode is set. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence of the specific effect is made different, or a configuration in which the execution lottery for the specific effect is performed using the lottery result of each game.

In these cases, the trigger for the advantageous judgment to cause the advantageous event may be set according to each advantageous event, and if the AT mode transition is to be the advantageous event, the AT mode transition lottery is executed. As a trigger, for example, winning of a specific combination or completion of a predetermined number of games may be used as a predetermined determination trigger.

(7) Although the specific effect is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, it may be configured to be performed by another display section, lamp, etc., or may be performed by using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. good too. When using the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, in a game in which the specific effect is not performed, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are normally started to rotate, while in a game in which the specific effect is performed, the reels 32L are rotated. , 32M, and 32R are rotated in a manner different from the normal rotation start manner (for example, the period until the start of rotation is made longer or shorter than usual, the rotation is started sequentially from the left reel 32L, or the reel is rotated at a constant speed. The rotation may be started in such a manner that it rotates at a low speed or temporarily stops in a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is formed until reaching the point. It should be noted that it is not limited to the start of rotation, and in the game, the rotation mode from the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to the end of rotation is set to a specific mode different from the normal mode, thereby creating a specific effect. It should be configured to perform.

(8) When the specific effect lottery is won, the specific effect is performed in the game in which the game is won. may be configured to perform In this case, it may be determined by lottery or the like in which game the specific effect is to be performed, or the specific effect may be performed after a predetermined number of games. However, the game in which the specific effect is performed must be a game in which the specific effect can be executed (during the confrontation effect or the pseudo set of the set). It is preferable to set a configuration in which a game for executing a specific effect is determined from.

(9) Although it is configured to perform a specific effect lottery to perform a specific effect according to the lottery result of each game, for example, at the start of the confrontation effect or the start of the pseudo set effect, the execution lottery of the specific effect and the number of games to be executed A lottery may be performed. In this case, the lottery may be performed regardless of the lottery result of the game in which these lotteries are performed. (the winning probability of the execution lottery and the number of games to be executed differ according to the lottery result).

(10) When the specific effect lottery during the confrontation effect is won, only the game in which the specific effect lottery is won is given the specific effect, but the specific effect may be performed after the winning game. may be configured to be performed over a plurality of games.

(11) In the set management type AT mode, the continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode, and the continuation rate does not change during the AT mode, but the continuation rate may change even during the AT mode. may be configured. For example, a lottery to change the continuation rate is performed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity such as when each game or set is updated, and if the change lottery is won, the continuation rate will change (for example, the continuation rate from 10% to 60%). % continuation rate). When the continuation rate changes, the continuation rate may be changed not only in a mode in which the continuation rate increases but also in a mode in which the continuation rate decreases. Alternatively, the lottery may be drawn at separate lottery opportunities.

Furthermore, the pattern of continuing at 90% in the first set, continuing at 10% in the second set, and continuing at 60% from the third set onwards, or continuing at 10% in the first set and continuing at 60% in the second set. Scenario management to determine which pattern to use when shifting to AT mode by setting multiple patterns with a predetermined continuation rate for each set, such as a pattern that continues at 100% and continues at 90% for the third and subsequent sets. It may be set to the AT mode of the type.

In these configurations, it is preferable that the continuation rate of the current set affects the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets. , a configuration that determines the next continuation rate by referring to the current continuation rate (for example, if this time is 10%, 90% is more likely to be selected next time than 10%, and if this time is 60%, the next time 60% is more likely to be selected than other continuation rates), and with the above scenario management type configuration, it is possible to narrow down the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets from the continuation rate of this set. By doing so, the significance of predicting and grasping the continuation rate (of this set) based on the specific effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is ensured.

(12) In a configuration where the continuation rate can change in each set, instead of generating a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the current set according to the continuation rate of the current set, or In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect corresponding to the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the current set is generated according to the continuation rate of the next and subsequent sets.

(13) Even during the opening effect, battle effect, jackpot effect, and ending effect, various specific effects may occur on condition that the AT set continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, for example, it may be configured such that the confrontation effect is more likely to cause the specific effect than the battle effect, or the pseudo-set effect is more likely to cause the specific effect than the opening effect, the jackpot effect, or the ending effect. .

(14) Although the rate of occurrence of the specific effect is varied according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, the aspect of the specific effect (color and shape of the character to be displayed, display timing, etc.) may be different. can be performed over a plurality of games, the number of games in which the specific effect is executed may differ according to the continuation rate of the AT mode.

(15) Depending on the rate of continuation of the AT mode, the lottery table used for the lottery process of each game may be changed so that the winning probability of the predetermined result differs. In this case, by setting the predetermined result as a trigger for generating the specific effect, it is possible to change the occurrence rate of the specific effect according to the continuation rate of the AT mode. In addition, the number of expected medal increases (net increase) that can be expected per game may differ according to the continuation rate of the AT mode, such as by setting the pressing order bell as a predetermined result. For example, the continuation rate is high. The expected medal increase number may increase as the continuation rate increases, or the expected medal increase number may decrease as the continuation rate increases. It should be noted that the configuration of varying the expected medal increase number according to the continuation rate of the AT mode is not limited to the configuration of varying the lottery table. It may be implemented in a different manner, or a configuration in which the mode of notification of the pressing order at the time of winning such as a pressing order bell is different (the mode of notifying the pressing order of two options, the mode of notifying the pressing order of one option, etc.) (The winning probabilities of the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination differ depending on the mode of notification of the pressing order), or other configurations may be employed.

(16) In a configuration in which a specific effect is generated when a set addition lottery is not won in an AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the set addition lottery triggered by a specific role is not won. It is not limited to the mode in which a specific effect is generated in the case of a normal role, and it may be configured to generate a specific effect in the event that a set addition lottery triggered by a normal role is not won. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated in a part of cases where the set addition lottery is not won. In these, it is preferable that the specific effect triggered by the specific role is more likely to occur than the specific effect triggered by the normal role.

(17) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is performed when winning a set addition in an AT set in which the continuation condition is satisfied. In this case, it may be configured to perform a specific effect in part when winning the set addition, or the probability of performing the specific effect may differ depending on the lottery result that triggered the set addition, more specifically, A lottery result with a lower winning probability may be configured to make it easier to perform a specific performance when adding a set, or a configuration may be configured to make it harder to perform a specific performance when adding a set to a lottery result with a lower winning probability.

(18) If an additional lottery is won during an AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied and the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific effect lottery may not be performed in the game. Further, in the game, the specific effect lottery may not be performed, and the specific effect may be generated after the predetermined game through the specific effect lottery or without the specific effect lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated.

(19) In the suggestive effect table, the suggestive effect is set so that the suggestive effect can be performed when the result is a failure, but the suggestive effect may be generated even in other normal roles or special roles.

(20) When a specific effect occurs, it may be configured to be in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed with a predetermined probability, and the probability of being in a state in which a suggestive effect can be performed may differ depending on the set value. Alternatively, it may be configured differently depending on the continuation rate. In addition, in a configuration in which a specific effect can occur multiple times during a confrontation effect, the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect and the transition rate of the state in which the suggestive effect can be performed may differ according to the number of times the specific effect occurs. Alternatively, the higher the number of occurrences of the specific effect, the higher the probability of occurrence of the suggestive effect, or the higher the transition rate to the state in which the suggestive effect can be performed.

(21) In a configuration that performs a pseudo-set effect, if the corresponding specific effect does not occur during the pseudo-set, the pseudo-set effect is terminated and the ending effect is performed until the AT mode ends. However, the effect may not be performed until the game in which the AT mode ends, or the number of remaining games of the pseudo set effect may be extended until the AT mode ends.

(22) On the premise that the ending effect is performed after the pseudo set effect, for example, a specific effect is generated in the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and the pseudo set effect is updated. , If the ending effect is not performed, the number of remaining games of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied is the number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect (10 games) + 1 (11 games remaining). It is preferable to generate an effect and update the pseudo-set effect.

(23) Although the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set production is set to 10 games, the number may be less than the number of continuous games in the AT set (18), and may be 11 games or more, or 9 games or less. There may be. Conversely, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set effect may be equal to or greater than the number of continuous games (18) of the AT set, 18 games, or 19 games or more. Each pseudo-set may have a different maximum number of continuous games, and in a configuration where each pseudo-set has a different maximum number of continuous games, the maximum number of continuous games may be determined by lottery or the like when the pseudo-set is updated. In this case, when the pseudo set is updated with an AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the remaining number of games of the AT set should be set to the maximum number of continuous games of the updated pseudo set.

In addition, the number of continuous AT set games is set to be an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production, and the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production is set to be an integer multiple of the maximum number of continuous games of the AT set. The number of both continuous games may be set. For example, if the number of continuous games of the AT set is 18 games, the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 9 games or 6 games, or the maximum number of continuous games of the pseudo set production may be 36 games or 54 games. good.

(24) In the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, and in the game in which the number of remaining AT mode games is 18, a specific effect is forcibly performed in the pseudo set effect. The game in which the specific effect is forcibly performed (without passing through the specific effect lottery) is not limited to the first game of the AT set in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. For example, in a configuration in which success or failure of the continuation condition of the next AT set is determined at the end of the AT set (final game), if the continuation condition of the next AT set is not satisfied in the final game of the AT set, A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is generated in the game to update the pseudo set. At least, the number of remaining AT mode games is a predetermined number that is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set (20 games) and equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games plus 1 (11 games). By forcibly causing a specific effect to occur in the game that is played, it is possible to execute the pseudo-set next to the pseudo-set that ended with the specific effect over the maximum number of continuous games, After the next pseudo set has been played for the maximum number of continuous games, the next pseudo set cannot be played for the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, in the case where a specific effect is forcibly performed according to the number of remaining games in AT mode as described above, a game in which the specific effect can be forcibly performed (for example, the final game of the pseudo set as described above) Then, it is possible to successfully camouflage the specific effect by making the specific effect more likely to occur than in other games.

(25) A configuration may be adopted in which a specific effect is forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect in relation to the conditions for forced termination of the advantageous section. For example, when the number of games to reach the upper limit number of games of 1500 games reaches a predetermined number, a specific effect is forcibly generated during the pseudo set effect, so that the AT mode is an advantageous section. Even if the game is terminated under forced termination conditions, it is possible to match the termination game with the termination game of the pseudo-set presentation. It should be noted that the predetermined number is preferably the number of games equal to or greater than the maximum number of continuous games in the pseudo set effect plus 1, and more preferably the number of games is equal to or less than twice the maximum number of continuous games. In addition, in a configuration in which the ending effect is performed before reaching the upper limit number of games of 1500 games, the number of games up to the number of games (1450 games) excluding the number of games in which the ending effect is performed (for example, 50 games) is the above number. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a compulsory specific effect is generated when a predetermined number is reached.

(26) After the specific effect is performed during the confrontation effect, an effect suggesting the value of the AT set counter on the main controller 101 side (the number of remaining AT sets) is performed, or before the execution of the specific effect It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the suggested effect is easily performed.

(27) When the continuation condition is met during the battle presentation, the battle presentation table is rewritten. is provided, and if the continuation condition is satisfied during the battle production, the production is performed with the battle production table as the ally defeat production, and the revival victory production is performed after the ally defeat production. good too.

(28) The confrontation effect is 10 games and the battle effect is 8 games, and the number of games in which the confrontation effect is performed is larger than the number of games in which the battle effect is performed in one AT set. The confrontation effect may be 9 games and the battle effect may be 9 games, or the confrontation effect may be 8 games or less and the battle effect may be 10 games or more.

(29) Even if a specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect is performed, but if the specific effect occurs during the confrontation effect, the battle effect is not performed and the jackpot effect is performed (Fig. 144(b)). may be played until the end game of the AT set.

(30) Although the confrontation effect and the battle effect are continuously performed, the confrontation effect and the battle effect may be interposed by a game in which a predetermined effect such as the above-described jackpot effect is interposed.

(31) The expected increase in number of medals per game during the AT mode is not limited to the above, and may be larger or smaller. In addition, the configuration may be such that the expected number of increased medals can be changed during the AT mode. If the JAC win can be established, the expected increase in the number of medals per game will increase over a predetermined number of games thereafter, and if the JAC win cannot be established at the time of winning the JAC, the expected increase in the number of medals will be increased. may be configured so as not to change. For example, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order at the time of winning the JAC, the JAC prize is not established, and when the operation order is different from the predetermined order, the JAC prize is established. It is possible to change the expected increase in number of medals during the AT mode depending on whether or not to execute the pressing order notification.

(32) Although the continuation rate of the AT set is suggested by the occurrence rate of the specific effect, etc., it may be separately configured to perform an effect that suggests the continuation rate. For example, a plurality of background colors are provided in the auxiliary display section 65 during the AT mode, and blue, for example, is likely to be selected as the background color in the AT mode of 10% continuation, while the background color is the background color in the AT mode of 90% continuation. For example, it may be configured such that red is likely to be selected.

(33) In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, the lottery for the advantageous zone transition is set to be won regardless of the lottery result, but the winning probability is not limited to the above.

(34) Various productions in AT mode (confrontation production, normal production, specific production, battle production, pattern variation production, second specific production, non-second specific production, standby production, opening production, pseudo-set production, third specific production Production, non-third specified production, ending production, renewal production, non-renewal production, resurrection production, jackpot production, transition production, etc.) are examples, and needless to say, the production mode is not limited to the above.

(35) The push order notification is configured to be performed by both the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side and the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side. Well, for example, depending on the result of the lottery or the state, the display control device 81 side may be configured to execute without executing on the main control device 101 side.

(36) The instruction monitor 68 is configured to be capable of informing six different operation sequences. A configuration may be adopted in which only the stop switches 42 to 44 to be operated first are notified of the pressing order for the pressing order to which only the 42 to 44 are associated.

(37) Although the advantageous section ends when the AT mode ends, the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends. For example, the advantageous interval may not end according to the number of remaining games in the advantageous interval at the end of the AT mode. If the number multiplied by the expected increase per game is less than or equal to the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section, or if it is less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section may not be terminated. If the number obtained by multiplying the current advantageous section increase/decrease number MY with the above multiplied number is less than the upper limit increase number (2400) or less than the upper limit increase number, the advantageous section will not end. can be

(38) The lighting of the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is controlled when transitioning to an advantageous section. A configuration may be adopted in which lighting control is performed when a predetermined lighting condition is satisfied during the interval. The predetermined lighting condition may be established, for example, when a shift to the AT mode is confirmed, or when a situation arises in which notification of the pressing order may occur.

(39) A configuration may be adopted in which the press order notification is executed at least once during the CZ mode. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed at least once in the AT mode. , the AT mode or the CZ mode may not be terminated.

(40) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(41) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(42) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(43) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(44) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict the execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, such that the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is restricted while the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is permitted in the game in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(45) Although the 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB win and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB win, the 3-bet game is more difficult to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(46) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(47) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(48) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(49) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals neither increase nor decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(50) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(51) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(52) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(53) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(54) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Third c embodiment>
The 3c embodiment will now be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 170 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 171 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 173 is the front. 174 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG. In the following description, configurations different from the above embodiments will be described, and descriptions of configurations common to the above embodiments will be omitted. Further, in the following description, components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment are described using the same reference numerals, and components having the same reference characters but different functions are denoted by specific reference numerals in this embodiment. shall be treated as

As shown in FIGS. 170 to 174, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 172, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower halves by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 175 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 175, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

FIGS. 177 to 179 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(d), when the symbols corresponding to the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 5th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the symbols of "Bell" all stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 180(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 6th minor winning prize is stopped on the activated line ML, the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R are displayed with "bell" symbols. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 181(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the combinations of symbols corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor winning prizes are all aligned and stopped on a straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 179, winning symbol combinations are set for the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 181(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols stop on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 183(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 183(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second re-game winning is established, the game state does not shift, but a shift to an information mode advantageous to the player occurs, and the first AT state as a so-called pseudo-bonus is started.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the “Bell” symbol, the “Ark shell” symbol or the “Senior” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when it stops at the top. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 183(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 183(d). As shown in the figure, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. When the third replay win is established, the game state does not shift, but the game shifts to an information mode advantageous to the player, and the second AT state as a so-called pseudo bonus is started.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 181(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 181(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 182(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 182(b), when the symbol corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 182(c) and 182(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th regame win or the 12th regame win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 182(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the middle line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB win is won. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 182(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 184) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual medals as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. 56 is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if there is no specified number of credits, virtual medals are inserted as many as the credits. For example, when the specific number is set to three and the credit is two, two virtual medals are inserted.

A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

The first credit insertion switch 56 is provided with a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for detecting that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated. A second credit insertion detection sensor 57a is provided to detect that the two-credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, and the credit insertion detection sensors 56a and 57a detect the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57. (See Figure 184). The first credit input switch 56 also incorporates a first credit lamp 56b. The first credit lamp 56b is configured to be switchable between a lit state and an extinguished state, and the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted by turning on the first credit lamp 56b. Instead of or in addition to the lighting state in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operable, a flashing state may be employed.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition in which the virtual medals are stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the payment switch 59 constitutes a payment operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. An instruction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval display for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the winning rate of minor wins is changed and the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the left of the credit display section 60, there are instructions for operating the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 and inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45. A BET display section 75 as a first display section for displaying the number of bets for the game set by inserting, and a game state display section 76 for showing the current state of progress of the game are provided.

A bet display section 34 is provided as a second display section for displaying the number of bets in the above game on the left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 . Furthermore, on the right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25, it is displayed that there is a waiting state (wait state) until the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the game. A weight display section 35 is provided for notification.

The BET display portion 75, the gaming state display portion 76, the bet display portion 34, and the weight display portion 35 will be described later in detail.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. A settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and is turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit Information is displayed on the display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the BET display unit 75, the gaming state display unit 76, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, the hall management device (not shown), and the like. are connected via the input/output port 104 to an external centralized terminal board 121 or the like capable of transmitting .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , a standby storage area 106c for storing the state before shifting to the demonstration state, and a backup area.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 186), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 185, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), is connected to the main control device 101 on the input side, and is connected to the bet display section 34, the weight display section 35, the first credit lamp 56b, the first credit lamp 56b and the output side. An upper lamp 63, a speaker 64, and an auxiliary display section 65 are connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the bet display section 34, the weight display section 35, the first credit lamp 56b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by main controller 101. CPU 102 of main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step Sc101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step Sc102, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step Sc102, various processes after step Sc104 are performed.

That is, in step Sc104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step Sc105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step Sc106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in order to rotate the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step Sc107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 184) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step Sc108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step Sc109, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121. FIG.

In step Sc110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step Sc111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step Sc112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step Sc113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step Sc114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step Sc101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step Sc115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is completed.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 187 .

First, in step Sc201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step Sc202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps Sc203 to Sc215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step Sc203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. Thereafter, in step Sc204, BET processing is performed.

In the BET processing, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing is performed to automatically insert the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

In the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay wins have been established, processing for setting the number of bets is performed based on the operation of betting numbers such as operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 and insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 . The BET processing will be described later in detail.

In the following step Sc205, it is checked whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step Sc107 of the timer interrupt processing. At the same time, abnormal processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After executing the abnormality processing, in step Sc206, medal return processing for paying out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals based on the operation of the settlement switch 59 is performed.

After executing the medal return process, in step Sc207, as a result of the BET process in step Sc204, the number of bet medals has reached the specified number, and the start operation for starting the game can be accepted. Determine whether or not there is In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, affirmative determination is made in step Sc207 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and on the condition that the number of bets is "2" or "3" in other than the bonus state. , an affirmative determination is made in step Sc207. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted, or if the bet number is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step Sc207. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number and the game is not ready to start, the process returns to step Sc204 for BET processing.

If it is in a startable state, it is determined in step Sc208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated to perform a start operation. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the BET processing of step Sc204.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step Sc209, processing for the game state display section is executed. This processing is processing for performing display control of the game state display section 76 based on the game start operation, and the details thereof will be described later together with the description of the game state display section 76 .

In subsequent step Sc210, an effective line setting process is performed for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step Sc211, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, the lottery process of step Sc212, the reel control process of step Sc213, the medal payout process of step Sc214, and the standby state setting process of step Sc215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step Sc203.

Next, the lottery process of step Sc212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sc301, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step Sc302, a lottery table is selected for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step Sc302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the current game state is the normal game state, the normal game state lottery table is selected. If the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game status lottery table (FIG. 189) for the 3-bet game is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 190). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step Sc302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step Sc302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 189 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 190 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step Sc303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step Sc304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step Sc301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to obtain a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step Sc305, it is determined whether the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step Sc306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step Sc305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step Sc306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step Sc306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, step Sc306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see Sc203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step Sc306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and a combination other than 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step Sc305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step Sc307, and in subsequent step Sc308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step Sc304 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step Sc304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step Sc305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse-pressing bell 1, and the reverse-pressing bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as the pushing order bell) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is the set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is approximately 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step Sc306, or when it is determined in step Sc308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step Sc309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step Sc310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process of determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery result of steps Sc301 to step Sc308, a process of notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step Sc310, a lottery result command is set in step Sc311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step Sc110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step Sc312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step Sc306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In addition, when the watermelon is won (winning when IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning winning combination are displayed. Stop symbol information is set so that each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sc312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3-bet game, in the stop information setting processing of step Sc312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step Sc313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step Sc312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, and the 1BB prize, the 7th minor combination and the 1st When the stop symbol information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established preferentially over the 1st BB winning. In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step Sc313, after executing the section display first process in step Sc314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing of step Sc213 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step Sc401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step Sc309. In the subsequent step Sc402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined specific period of wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. Wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step Sc106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step Sc403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Sc404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step Sc403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step Sc405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps Sc406 to Sc412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step Sc406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step Sc407, the number of slips of reels to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step Sc407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step Sc408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to be actually stopped at the base position. In step Sc409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step Sc410. conduct. After that, in step Sc411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step Sc412, and the process returns to step Sc403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won on the push order bell (see FIGS. 189 and 190), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 192 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, a minor winning combination may be established, or none of the minor winning combinations may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor win is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step Sc411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step Sc413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step Sc414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, the winning result corresponding process is executed in step Sc415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the section display second process is performed in step Sc416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step Sc417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step Sc214 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor winning combination has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, processing for storing information on the winning re-game results is performed, End the medal payout process. In addition, in the BET process (step Sc204), a process of automatically inserting a bet based on the replay win is performed.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step Sc414 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step Sc501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step Sc501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step Sc502.

In step Sc502, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc503.

In step Sc503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games, in a situation where two or three are set as the prescribed number of games, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, A two-bet game is permitted by inserting two medals from the medal slot 45 . If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step Sc503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the following step Sc504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Sc505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step Sc506, a process of inputting "46" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "46" to the BB counter in step Sc506, the first BB state is set to end when 46 or more medals are paid out. In step Sc507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step Sc508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc501. In subsequent step Sc509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step Sc509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sc510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins of the above game. That is, by shifting to the 1BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the 1BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step Sc505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step Sc511 to execute the process of inputting "2" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when two or more medals are paid out. Then, in step Sc512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step Sc513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. Thereafter, in step Sc514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step Sc514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sc510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. In other words, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed as a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step Sc515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 194 shows an example of the lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/9.02, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.78. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/3.13. In this case, a reduction of about 0.96 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 0.96 medals).

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/9.03, and even in the 2-bet game, the second BB state is more likely to win than the normal game state. is set.

However, as mentioned above, in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state, since a lottery table is used in which the number of medals can be decreased in each game, even if the 1BB state or the 2BB state is completed, the number of medals held will not increase. Conversely, it is assumed that the number of medals held will be reduced by completing the first BB state and the second BB state.

In the bonus state process, in step Sc515, it is determined whether or not any small combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process using the lottery table for the BB state and control of each reel. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sc516. Then, in step Sc517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step Sc516. For example, in the second BB state, the common bell is won, and 13 coins are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are realized. It is as follows.

If it is determined in step Sc517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step Sc518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step Sc519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step Sc520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that receives the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

Thereafter, in step Sc521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step Sc519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. By the way, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are over, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, 3 bets cannot be made by operating the 1st credit insertion switch 56. It is necessary to insert three medals from the medal slot 45 .

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

In the initial state in which the RAM 106 is initialized (cleared), the 1st BB winning flag and the 2nd BB winning flag are not set, and the game is in a normal game state (non-internal state) in which neither BB is won. be. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

If the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the carryover state (internal state) in which the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over is entered. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 194) of the first to sixth minor winning prizes when the bell is won in the pressing order. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game in which the 1st credit input switch 56 is operated is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds in a state in which the 2nd BB prize won cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB win is carried over, neither the 1st BB win nor the 2nd BB win occurs. The game is continued in this state.

In the slot machine 10, the 1st BB winning flag is stored in the normal area of the various flags storage area 106d, while the 2nd BB winning flag is stored in the storage area of the various flags storage area 106d. It is configured to be The normal area is an area in which various general flags such as winning flags for other winning combinations are stored. Each flag stored in the normal area is stored and held by backup power or the like even if the power supply to the slot machine 10 is stopped (even if the power is turned off). Therefore, for example, even if the power is turned off when the game hall is closed, if the power is turned on the next day, the slot machine 10 is started while various flags stored in the normal area are stored, and the first BB is won. Even if the power is turned ON/OFF with the flag set, the slot machine 10 is started with the first BB winning flag set. However, when the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up (when the setting is changed), the initialization process (clearing process) of the normal area is performed. Therefore, when the winning probability setting process is performed, the first BB winning flag is cleared together with other flags stored in the normal area.

On the other hand, the storage area is an area in which only the second BB winning flag is stored. Similar to the normal area described above, the flags stored in the storage area are not cleared when the power is turned on/off. Furthermore, in the storage area, even if the winning probability setting process is started when the slot machine 10 is started up, the initialization process of the storage area is not performed (it is excluded from the initialization process). ). Therefore, even if the winning probability setting process is performed, the second BB winning flag stored in the storage area is held (stored) without being cleared. In other words, when the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the first BB winning flag in which the first BB winning flag is stored, the first BB winning flag is cleared and started as a non-internal state. When the winning probability setting process is performed in the internal state of the second BB winning in which the second BB winning flag is stored, the second BB winning flag is not cleared and the game is started in the internal state of the second BB winning. be. By doing so, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over can be continued not only when the slot machine 10 is turned ON/OFF, but also when the setting is changed.

Then, in order to play the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over, basically, when the slot machine 10 is shipped from the factory, the game should be played until the winning of the second BB is won in the 2-bet game. , the second BB winning is stored and held until the reset switch 72 is operated and the RAM clearing process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to favorably carry out the game while the second BB winning is carried over.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) when the push order bell is won. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step Sc310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in step Sc601, a process of grasping the current game state is performed. More specifically, either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, or the non-internal state (normal game state) before the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, or the internal state after the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won. (carried over state) or not. In the 1BB state and the 2BB state, 3 is set as the prescribed number (regular bet number), and in the non-internal state before winning the 1BB or 2BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1BB or 2BB 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed number (regular bet number). Then, in step Sc602, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state grasped in step Sc601. In this embodiment, the specific prescribed number of the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. In this case, the prescribed number of bets in the first BB state and the second BB state is 3. Therefore, in step Sc601, the first BB If it is determined to be the state or the second BB state, affirmative determination is always made in step Sc602. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in states other than the first BB state and the second BB state, 3 out of the prescribed number of 2 and 3 is set as the specific prescribed number, and other than the first BB state and the second BB state. If the number of bets is 3 in the state of , an affirmative determination is made in step Sc602. In this case, processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step Sc603 is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 2 in a state other than the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is made in step Sc602, and the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step Sc603 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated. In addition, the specific specified number of the first BB state and the second BB state is set to 2, and in the first BB state and the second BB state, a negative determination is always made in step Sc602 so that the processing for the display mode is not performed. may

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc602, it is determined in step Sc603 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Sc604, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 197, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sc701. Then, in step Sc702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 202, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 202, the triggers for the lottery to move to the advantageous section are normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After obtaining the lottery table in step Sc702, a process of obtaining random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step Sc703. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and step Sc703 acquires the latest updated value of the counters. Then, in step Sc704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step Sc705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger role. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step Sc701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps Sc702 to Sc705 can be omitted.

When it is determined in step Sc705 that the transfer lottery is won, in step Sc706, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step Sc705, or after the process of step Sc706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step Sc603 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc605. In step Sc605, it is determined whether or not an AT mode winning flag or an AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning a lottery for shifting to the AT mode, and the AT mode flag is a flag that is set when shifting to the AT mode. That is, in step Sc605, it is determined whether or not the transition to the AT mode has already been confirmed or has been completed. If none of the flags have been set in step Sc605 and the transition to the AT mode has not yet been determined, the AT lottery process is executed in step Sc606. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step Sc605, AT addition processing is executed in step Sc607.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step Sc606 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sc801, subtraction processing of the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the maximum number of games (ceiling number of games) that can be played without causing a transition to the AT mode in the advantageous section. A predetermined lottery value is input to the ceiling counter at the time of transition to the advantageous section. Note that the maximum value of the ceiling counter is set to 999 in this embodiment. That is, by playing a maximum of 999 games after shifting to the advantageous section, the shift to the AT mode occurs even if the AT mode shift lottery is not won. In step Sc801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counter is executed. Then, in step Sc802, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached zero. If not 0, an AT mode shift lottery is executed in steps Sc803 to Sc805.

That is, in step Sc803, it is determined whether or not any one of the first CZ mode flag, the second CZ mode flag, and the third CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the normal mode and the CZ mode are provided as states before winning the lottery for the transition to the AT mode, which is an advantageous section, and the CZ mode wins the lottery for the transition to the AT mode rather than the normal mode. It is set as an easy mode. As the CZ mode, a first CZ mode, a second CZ mode, and a third CZ mode with different transition triggers are set. This is a flag for distinction. Then, if it is determined in step Sc803 that any CZ mode flag is not set, normal AT mode lottery processing is executed in step Sc804, and any CZ mode flag is set in step Sc803. If yes, AT mode lottery processing for CZ is executed in step Sc805.

In the ordinary AT mode lottery process in step Sc804, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 199, first, in step Sc901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Sc902, the normal AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 202, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table, the AT mode transition rate (AT mode transition lottery winning probability) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 202, normal AT mode transition lottery triggers include normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game with the 2nd BB carried over, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the normal AT mode transition lottery.

After acquiring the lottery table in step Sc902, a process of acquiring random numbers for AT mode transition lottery is executed in step Sc903. Then, in step Sc904, after the AT mode shift lottery is executed, the AT mode lottery process ends. That is, in the ordinary AT mode lottery process, an AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery results of each game.

On the other hand, in the AT mode transition lottery during the CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the lottery results of a plurality of games during the CZ mode.

That is, in the AT mode lottery process for CZ in step Sc805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 200, first, in step Sc1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Sc1002, a process of acquiring the point table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 202, the point table is set so that the point value obtained in the current game may vary depending on the lottery result of each game. If there is, 20 points are obtained, and if the lottery result of this game is Cherry B, which is harder to win than Cherry A, 50 points are obtained. Lower results are set to get more points.

Then, in step Sc1003, a process of adding the point value acquired in the current game to the cumulative counter RC provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. In this embodiment, the lottery result command of each game is set to include the information of the cumulative counter RC. It is possible.

In the subsequent step Sc1004, a process of grasping the CZ counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed in the CZ mode. Then, in step Sc1005, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table for CZ from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step Sc1006, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and then an AT mode lottery process for CZ is executed. finish.

As shown in FIG. 203, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the product of a predetermined number set according to the value of the CZ counter and the value of the cumulative counter RC and the cumulative counter RC is set as the winning probability (%) of the AT mode transition lottery. When the CZ counter is 16 or more, the predetermined number is set to 0.1 if the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 59, and is set to 0.6 if the cumulative counter RC is 80 to 100. be. In this case, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 30, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 3% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.1) by the cumulative counter RC (30). Become. Also, if the CZ counter is 16 or more and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 54% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.6) by the cumulative counter RC (90). . When the CZ counter is 3 to 1, the predetermined number is set to 0.5 when the cumulative counter RC is 0 to 9, and 1.0 when the cumulative counter RC is 50 to 100. is set as In this case, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 5, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 3% by multiplying the predetermined number (0.6) by the cumulative counter RC (5). becomes. Further, if the CZ counter is 3 to 1 and the cumulative counter RC is 90, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is 90% by multiplying the predetermined number (1.0) by the cumulative counter RC (90). Become.

That is, in the CZ mode of the present embodiment, the larger the point value acquired in each game in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the fewer the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the more likely the AT mode transition lottery will be won. It is designed to make it easier to win. Even if the point value obtained in each game in the CZ mode is large, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is large. In this way, winning the AT mode transition lottery early after shifting to CZ mode is suppressed, and while increasing the attention to the lottery results of each game in CZ mode, the game (effect) in CZ mode ) is devised to keep you entertained until the end.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after executing the AT mode lottery process in step Sc804 or step Sc805, in step Sc806, the AT mode transition lottery in the AT mode lottery process of step Sc804 or step Sc805 is won. Determine whether or not If the game has been won, the AT mode winning process of steps Sc807 to Sc810 is executed, and if the game has not been won, the AT mode non-winning process of steps Sc811 to Sc819 is executed.

That is, when the AT mode shift lottery is won, first, in step Sc807, the precursor mode setting process is executed. Note that even when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in step Sc802, the process proceeds to step Sc807 to perform the precursor mode setting process. The portent mode is a situation in which a shift to the AT mode can occur in the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 when a shift to the AT mode can occur, such as by winning an AT mode shift lottery. This is a mode that performs a sign production that suggests that something has happened. In step Sc807, a process of setting the number of games in the portent mode, etc., is performed according to the trigger of a situation in which the transition to the AT mode may occur.

That is, in the precursor mode setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 201, first, in step Sc1101, the process of grasping the cumulative counter RC is executed. to run. Then, in step Sc1103, a process of acquiring an immediate notification lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed, and in step Sc1104, an immediate notification lottery process is executed. In the immediate notice lottery process, a lottery is made as to whether or not to execute the notification of the situation in which the shift to the AT mode may occur without going through the aforementioned premonition effect.

As shown in FIG. 204, the immediate notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the immediate notification lottery differs according to the CZ counter and the cumulative counter RC. More specifically, the smaller the value of the CZ counter, that is, the smaller the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the easier it is to win the instant announcement lottery, and the larger the value of the cumulative counter RC, that is, the value of points acquired during the CZ mode. It is set so that the larger the number, the easier it is to win the immediate notification lottery. In the case where the CZ counter is 0 and the player wins the AT mode transition in the normal mode, the instant notification lottery is won with a probability of 100% in the present embodiment.

At step Sc1105, it is determined whether or not the immediate notification lottery at step Sc1104 is won. If the immediate notification lottery is not won, the process for the precursor mode is performed in steps Sc1106 to step Sc1113, and if the immediate notification lottery is won, the AT mode notification process is performed in steps Sc1114 to Sc1119. conduct.

If the instant notification lottery is not won, it is determined in step Sc1106 whether or not the situation in which the AT mode shift lottery was won was in the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode among the CZ modes. If the mode is the second CZ mode instead of the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode, a lottery process for the number of portent effect games is executed in step Sc1107. Then, in step Sc1108, a process of inputting a value obtained by adding the lottery result of step Sc1107 and the current CZ counter (remaining number of games in CZ mode) to an omen counter provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. do. The premonition counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games from when a situation in which a shift to the AT mode can occur until notification of the situation (AT win notification effect) is performed.

In the lottery process for the number of omen effect games in step Sc1107, the number of omen effect games table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of omen effect games is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 205, the portent effect game number table is set so that one of 13 games to 15 games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games. For example, if 14 games are selected in the portent effect game count lottery process and the remaining number of games in the CZ mode is 3 games, 17 is input to the portent counter, and a transition to the AT mode can occur. After 17 games have passed (after the AT mode win flag is set), the notification to that effect will be made.

After executing the precursor counter input process in step Sc1108, in step Sc1109, the process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step Sc1110, the process of setting the portent command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the port mode setting process ends. The portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the portent mode has been set, and the portent command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the portent mode has been set. be. In addition, the portent command includes the value of the portent counter, and the display control device 81 grasps the game for which notification of the situation in which the transition to the AT mode is possible has occurred, from the value of the portent counter. becomes possible. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the portent command is received will be described later in detail.

If it is the first CZ mode or the third CZ mode in step Sc1106, it is determined whether it is the first CZ mode in step Sc1111, and if it is the first CZ mode, in step Sc1112, the CZ counter is set in advance A process of inputting the value obtained by adding the predetermined number (5) to the precursor counter is executed. If it is determined in step Sc1111 that the current mode is not the first CZ mode but the third CZ mode, then in step Sc1113 a process of inputting the value of the CZ counter to the precursor counter is executed. After executing the precursor flag setting process in step Sc1109 and the precursor command setting process in step Sc1110, the precursor mode setting process ends. In this case, in the first CZ mode, a predetermined number of games are executed after the number of remaining games in the first CZ mode becomes 0, and in the third CZ mode, the number of remaining games in the third CZ mode becomes 0, notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is made.

In other words, the number of games until notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the type of CZ mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the first CZ mode is less than the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode. A notification is made to the effect that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won based on the number of games played. The reason for such a configuration will be explained in detail when explaining the contents of the presentation during the CZ mode.

If it is determined in step Sc1105 that the immediate notification lottery is won, the process proceeds to step Sc1114. At step Sc1114, a process of clearing the CZ counter to 0 is executed. After that, in step Sc1105, AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. In the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode are set as the AT mode, and the second AT mode and the first AT mode have different additional performances in the AT mode (probability of winning the additional lottery), and the second AT mode has better performance than the first AT mode. is excellent (it is set so that it is easy to win the additional lottery). In the AT type determination process of step Sc1115, for example, according to the setting value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous interval, the number of games in the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly, the current AT mode type is selected by lottery Determined by

In step Sc1116, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode has been determined based on the processing result of step Sc1115. In the case of the first AT mode, in step Sc1117, the process of setting the first AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step Sc1118, the first AT winning immediate notification command is output to the display control device 81. After executing the setting process, the setting process of the precursor mode ends. The 1st AT notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the first AT start number will appear on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the 1st AT mode is started, and is a 1st AT winning immediate notification command. is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a transition to the first AT mode is possible. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the 1st AT winning immediate notification command will be described later in detail.

If it is determined that it is the second AT instead of the first AT in step Sc1116, the process of setting the notification flag for the second AT in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sc1119, and the second AT winning immediate notification command is executed in step Sc1120. is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the setting process of the portent mode ends. The notification flag for the second AT is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the numbers for the start of the second AT appear on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the second AT mode is started, and is a second AT winning immediate notification command. is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a transition to the second AT mode is possible. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that receives the second AT winning immediate notification command will also be described in detail later.

Returning to the description of the AT lottery process, after the precursor mode setting process is executed in step Sc807, it is determined in step Sc808 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If any of the CZ mode flags is set, in step Sc809, the set CZ mode flags are cleared. If a negative determination is made in step Sc808, or after the process of step Sc809 is executed, the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sc810, and then this AT lottery process ends. By performing such processing, in the lottery result handling processing of the next game and thereafter, affirmative determination is made in step Sc605.

If it is determined in step Sc806 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is determined in step Sc811 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If none of the CZ mode flags are set and the mode is the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the CZ mode is performed in steps Sc812 to Sc819. On the other hand, if any CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated without performing the processes of steps Sc812 to Sc819.

That is, in step Sc812, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in the various counter areas 106e is equal to or greater than a predetermined first predetermined value (31) and equal to or less than a predetermined second predetermined value (700). Determine whether or not The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games in the advantageous interval. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is less than the first predetermined number or greater than the second predetermined number, the process for AT lottery ends without performing the lottery for transition to the CZ mode.

In this embodiment, the CZ mode may be set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the first predetermined number is set until the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode set at the time of the transition to the advantageous section is completed. It is set as a number larger than the number of games required for Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section becomes 0, thereby permitting the transition to the AT mode without going through the AT mode transition lottery. The second predetermined value is a value close to the upper limit value (999) of the ceiling counter set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and more specifically, it is set to 700, which is 70% of the upper limit value.

In other words, when the advantageous section is consumed up to a value close to the upper limit of the ceiling counter, the lottery for transition to the CZ mode is not performed. The setting process of the ceiling counter will be described in detail later, but there are cases where a value smaller than the second predetermined value is set in the ceiling counter when transitioning to the advantageous section. In this case, a CZ mode transition lottery etc. It is allowed to reach the ceiling and shift to AT mode before reaching the upper limit number of games (700). In other words, even if a value smaller than the second predetermined value is input to the ceiling counter, the CZ mode transition lottery may be won just before reaching the ceiling.

In step Sc812, if the number of advantageous section games AG is within the range where the CZ mode transition lottery or the like is performed, in step Sc813, a process of acquiring a CZ mode transition lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and the process proceeds to step Sc814. CZ mode transition lottery processing is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 202, a transition rate to the CZ mode (winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. For example, if the lottery result of this game is Chance A, you win the CZ mode transition lottery with a probability of 7%, and if the lottery result of this game is Chance B, which is harder to win than Chance A. , 15% higher probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery than in the case of chance A. The lower the appearance rate as a game lottery result, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. It is

After executing the CZ mode transition lottery in step Sc814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won in step Sc815. In the case of non-winning, the process for AT lottery ends as it is. If the CZ mode shift lottery is won, in step Sc816, the second CZ mode game number lottery process is executed, and in step Sc817, the number of games according to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter, and step At Sc818, processing for setting the second CZ mode flag is executed. That is, when the CZ mode transition lottery in the normal mode is won in the advantageous section, the second CZ mode is set, and the number of games is determined by the lottery process in step Sc816. In the second CZ mode game number lottery process, the second CZ mode game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of games in the second CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 205, the second CZ mode number-of-games table is set so that one of 8 games to 15 games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as games and 15 games are less likely to be selected. For example, when 10 games are selected in the second CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step Sc817.

After setting the second CZ mode flag in step Sc818, the process for setting the second CZ mode start command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc819, and then the AT lottery process ends. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the second CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step Sc607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT add-on process is a process executed when the AT mode win flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games.

In the AT addition process, first, in step Sc1201, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in steps Sc1202 to Sc1208, a process of obtaining an additional lottery table corresponding to the current situation is executed. That is, in step Sc1202, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set, and the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred since the transition to the AT mode is possible. If the situation is before the AT mode shift, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc1202, and it is determined in step Sc1203 whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The situation in which the first AT notification flag and the second AT notification flag are set is after the notification that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred (AT winning notification effect) has been executed. , and that the transition to the AT mode has not occurred. In other words, the situation in which neither the first AT notification flag nor the second AT notification flag is set in step Sc1203 means that although a shift to the AT mode may occur, there is still no notification to that effect. It means that it is in a situation where it is not done (precursor mode).

Therefore, if it is determined in step Sc1203 that neither the notification flag for the first AT nor the notification flag for the second AT is set, in step Sc1204, an additional lottery table before winning notification after winning is selected from various table storage areas 105a. If it is determined in step Sc1203 that any of the flags is set after executing the acquisition process, the process of acquiring the additional lottery table before transition after notification of winning is executed in step Sc12056.

As shown in FIG. 207, when comparing the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning and the table for adding lottery before transition after notification of winning, the additional lottery using the table before transition after notification of winning is more likely to be won after winning. It is set so that it is easier to win the addition lottery than the addition lottery using the pre-notification addition lottery table. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by the second chance B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table before notification of winning after winning has a probability of 5%, whereas the additional lottery before transition after notification of winning is won. In the additional lottery using the table, the winning probability is 7%, and in the situation before shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery after the notification of winning than before the notification of winning the AT mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step Sc1202, it means that the AT mode flag is set, and that the transition to the AT mode has already occurred. In this case, the first AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d in step Sc1206, and it is determined whether or not the current AT mode is the first AT mode. In the case of the 1st AT mode, in step Sc1207, a process of acquiring the 1st AT additional lottery table from various table storage areas 105a is executed, and in the case of the 2nd AT mode, in step Sc1208, from the various table storage areas 105a A process of acquiring the second AT additional lottery table is executed.

As shown in FIG. 207, comparing the 1st AT additional lottery table and the 2nd AT additional lottery table, the additional lottery using the 2nd AT additional lottery table uses the 1st AT additional lottery table. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery than the additional lottery. More specifically, for example, in the additional lottery triggered by Cherry B, the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT wins with a probability of 10%, whereas the additional lottery using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT. In the lottery, the probability of winning is 20%, and in the situation after shifting to the AT mode, it is easier to win the additional lottery during the second AT mode than during the first AT mode.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in any of steps Sc1204, Sc1205, Sc1207 and Sc1208, an additional lottery is executed in step Sc1209. Then, in step Sc1210, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, an addition game count lottery process is executed in step Sc1211. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 207, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step Sc1211, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sc1212. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step Sc1212, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step Sc1213, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 196).

After the processing of step Sc606 or step Sc607 is executed, it is determined in step Sc608 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the first prize. The push order is the result including the push order bell as well as the normal reply A, the normal reply B, and the normal reply C. Normal reply A, normal reply B, and normal reply C are all the results of winning multiple replays. is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208, the normal replay A basically sets the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M; 32R stop control is performed. On the other hand, the normal Lip B and the normal Lip C are arranged so that when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M from each reel 32L, 32M, 32M 32R is controlled to stop, and when the left stop switch 42 or middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop so that the first regame win is established. . However, in these normal replays A, normal replays B, and normal replays C, even if any of the replay winning replays that are duplicately won are established, the benefits granted are replays, and replays that are established Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal replay A, normal replay B, and normal replay C are game results in which replay winnings are established regardless of the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop numbers differ depending on the operating order. In particular, the normal reply B and the normal reply C are the triggers for the start of the AT mode, and after the AT mode winning flag is set, the notification to the effect that the transition to the AT mode may occur was performed. After that, after the first AT mode is started in a game in which the second replay winning prize can be established, and after the AT mode win flag is set, a notification is made to the effect that a transition to the AT mode may occur. , the second AT mode is started in a game in which the third replay winning can be established. That is, even if the AT mode winning flag is set, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the above notification (AT winning notification effect) is executed, and even after the above notification is executed. However, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are not started until the game becomes a game in which the second replay winning prize or the third replay winning prize can be established.

If it is determined in step Sc608 that the first hand is won, it is determined in step Sc609 whether or not any of the CZ mode flag, AT mode winning flag, or AT mode flag is set. If any one of these flags is set, the pressing order notification process is executed in step Sc610, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sc608 or step Sc609, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification process executed in step Sc610, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 209(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 209(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display content.

As shown in FIG. 209(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 209(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Processing for notification of pressing order>
Next, the pressing order notification process executed in step Sc610 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sc1301, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to third CZ mode flags is set. If none of the first to third CZ mode flags are set, it is determined in step Sc1302 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. When the first to third CZ mode flags are not set and the AT mode winning flag is set, it means that the AT mode has not yet been switched to after winning the AT mode. In this case, in step Sc1303, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT mode winning flag is set but the AT notification flag is not set, it means that although the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the prediction mode is still on. In this case, in the current game, no push order notification is generated, and the push order notification process is terminated. If the first AT notification flag or the second AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1304.

In step Sc1304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B or normal reply C. In the case of the normal reply A or the push order bell instead of the normal reply B and the normal reply C, the main push order informing process is terminated as it is. If it is either normal reply B or normal reply C, it is determined whether or not it is normal reply B in step Sc1305. If it is normal reply B, in step Sc1306, it is determined whether or not the first AT notification flag is set. If the second AT notification flag is set instead of the first AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply B is won and the first AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1307, and the process for starting the first AT mode is executed.

That is, in step Sc1307, the first AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step Sc1308, the first AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step Sc1309, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the second regame winning is performed. Then, in step Sc1310, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning as an output object to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order command displays, as the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second replay winning, a pressing order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the second re-game winning are notified.

If it is determined in step Sc1305 that the normal reply is not the normal reply B but the normal reply C, the process proceeds to step Sc1311. In step Sc1311, it is determined whether or not the second AT notification flag is set. If the first AT notification flag is set instead of the second AT notification flag, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the normal reply C is won and the 2nd AT notification flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1312, and the process for starting the 2nd AT mode is executed.

That is, in step Sc1312, the second AT notification flag is cleared. Then, in step Sc1313, a second AT start flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second AT start flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second AT mode will start from the current game. After that, in step Sc1314, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the third regame winning is performed. Then, in step Sc1315, after executing the process of setting the push order command including the information of the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning as an output object to the display control device 81, the main push order notification process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order command displays, as the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay winning, a pressing order notification effect in the order in which the right stop switch 44 should be operated first, or "Aim from the right! !”, voice navigation, etc. are performed, and the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 are controlled so that the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third re-game are announced.

If it is determined in step Sc1301 that any CZ mode flag is set, or if the AT mode winning flag is not set in step Sc1301 and the AT mode is already in progress, the process proceeds to step Sc1316. In step Sc1316, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the pushing order bell. If it is not the push order bell, the push order informing process is terminated. If it is the push order bell, it is determined in step Sc1317 whether or not any CZ mode flag is set. If any CZ mode flag is set, it is determined in step Sc1318 whether or not a notified flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The notification completion flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the notification of the pressing order when winning the pressing order bell has already been performed in the CZ mode. ) are cleared. If the notification completion flag is set, the pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the notified flag is not set, a process of setting the notified flag is executed in step Sc1319.

If the AT mode flag is set instead of the CZ mode flag at step Sc1317, or after executing the processing at step Sc1319, at step Sc1320, according to the type of the current pressing order bell, the first minor role winning prize to control the instruction monitor 68 so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the winning of the 6th minor combination. Then, in step Sc1321, after executing the process of setting the push order command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81, The actual pressing order notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed at step Sc415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step Sc1401, a process of grasping the current gaming state is performed, and in step Sc1402, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number defined in the state grasped in step Sc1401. make a judgment as to whether This processing corresponds to Steps Sc601 and Sc602, and if it is determined in Step Sc1402 that the specified number is not reached, the winning result handling processing is terminated without performing the processing after Step Sc1403. If the number of bets is the specific prescribed number corresponding to the state, the process proceeds to step Sc1403.

A first number-of-games management process is executed in step Sc1403, and a second number-of-games management process is executed in step Sc1404. The first number-of-games management process is mainly for managing the number of games played in the CZ mode, the omen mode, etc. before shifting to the AT mode. The second number-of-games management process is for managing the number of games played during the AT mode. be.

In the first game count management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If there is, the first number-of-games management process is terminated. That is, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a 2-bet game, the number of games in the portent mode and the CZ mode is not managed. If it is neither BB state, the process advances to step Sc1502 to determine whether or not the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the number of games set at the time of transition to the CZ mode has not been completed. As already explained, when the AT mode transition lottery in the CZ mode is won, the CZ mode flag is cleared in the AT lottery process. Therefore, even if the CZ mode flag is not set, it may be determined that the CZ counter is greater than 0 in step Sc1502.

By the way, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, a value equal to or greater than the CZ counter is input to the omen counter unless the immediate notification lottery is won. In other words, when the CZ counter is greater than 0 and the CZ mode flag is not set, it means that it is the precursor mode after winning the AT mode transition.

If the CZ counter is greater than 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the CZ counter is executed in step Sc1503. Then, in step Sc1504, it is determined whether or not the CZ counter has reached 0, and if it has become 0, in step Sc1505, it is determined whether or not any CZ mode flag has been set. As described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode flag is cleared. This means that the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery. If any CZ mode flag is set in step Sc1505, a process of setting a CZ end game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sc1506. The CZ end game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize the game for which the CZ mode has ended, and is cleared after the game for which the CZ mode has ended (see step Sc203).

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sc1505, or after the process of step Sc1506 is executed, the process of setting the CZ end command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc1507. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the CZ end command will be described in detail later.

If the CZ counter is 0 in step Sc1502, if the CZ counter is not 0 in step Sc1504, or after the process of step Sc1507 is executed, the precursor counter is greater than 0 in step Sc1508 and the precursor mode It is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the precursor counter set in the setting process has not yet been completed. If the portent counter is greater than 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step Sc1509. Then, in step Sc1510, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become zero.

When the portent counter reaches 0, the process advances to step Sc1511 to perform processing to clear the portent flag. Then, in step Sc1512, AT type determination processing is performed to determine whether the current AT mode type is the first AT mode or the second AT mode. This process is a process corresponding to the process of step Sc1115. That is, in the AT type determination process of step Sc1512, for example, according to the setting value and the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous interval, the number of games in the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly the current AT mode type will be determined by lottery. Note that the AT type determination process of step Sc1115 and the AT type determination process of step Sc1512 may have different selection rates between the first AT mode and the second AT mode. 2 may have a higher selection rate for the second AT mode.

In step Sc1513, it is determined whether or not the first AT mode has been determined as a result of the processing in step Sc1512. When the 1st AT mode is determined, in step Sc1514, the process of setting the notification flag for the 1st AT is executed, and in step Sc1515, the process of setting the 1st AT winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. After that, the number-of-games management process is terminated. By setting the notification flag for the first AT, the process for generating the pressing order notification for the second re-game winning in the above-described pressing order notification process is performed. The processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the 1st AT winning notification command will be described later in detail.

When it is determined in step Sc1513 that the AT mode to be shifted this time is not the first AT mode but the second AT mode, in step Sc1516, a process of setting the notification flag for the second AT is executed, and in step Sc1517, the second AT mode is set. After executing the process of setting the winning notification command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the number-of-games management process is terminated. By setting the notification flag for the second AT, the process for generating the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning in the above-described pressing order notification process is performed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the second AT winning notification command will be described later in detail.

In the second game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If there is, the second number-of-games management process is terminated. That is, if a transition to the second BB state occurs in a 2-bet game, the number of AT mode games is not managed. If neither BB state exists, the process advances to step Sc1602 to determine whether or not the AT counter is greater than zero and the number of AT mode remaining games is greater than zero.

If the AT counter is greater than 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed in step Sc1603. Then, in step Sc1604, it is determined whether or not the AT counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the AT mode flag is executed in step Sc1605. Then, in step Sc1606, a process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT end command will be described later in detail. If the AT counter is 0 in step Sc1602 or if the AT counter is not 0 in step Sc1604, the second number-of-games management process ends.

After executing the process of step Sc1606, the third CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step Sc1607. 3 Perform processing to set the CZ mode flag. That is, in this embodiment, when the AT mode ends, it is configured to shift to the CZ mode. determined by the lottery process. In the 3rd CZ mode game count lottery process, the 3rd CZ mode game count table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current 3CZ mode game count is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 205, the third CZ mode number-of-games table is set so that one of the 25th to 30th games is selected. The selection rate differs depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to be played. For example, if 30 games are selected in the third CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 30 is input to the CZ counter in step Sc1608.

After setting the third CZ mode flag in step Sc1609, a process of setting the third CZ mode start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc1610. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the third CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process, after executing the game number management process of steps Sc1403 and Sc1404, it is determined in step Sc1405 whether or not the first AT start flag is set. As described above, the 1st AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the second replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 1st AT mode. More specifically, the 1st AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which Rep B is normally won in the situation where it is set. That is, the first AT start flag is not set based on the winning result. If the first AT start flag is set, the first AT start flag is cleared in step Sc1406, and the first AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step Sc1407. As already explained, by setting the 1st AT flag, an additional lottery using the 1st AT additional lottery table is performed.

If it is determined in step Sc1405 that the first AT start flag is not set, it is determined in step Sc1408 whether or not the second AT start flag is set. As described above, the 2nd AT start flag is a flag that is set in a game in which the third replay winning is possible when causing the transition to the 2nd AT mode. More specifically, the 2nd AT notification flag is This is a flag that is set at the start of the game in which the normal reply C is won in the situation where it is set. That is, the second AT start flag is also not set based on the winning result. If the second AT start flag is set, the second AT start flag is cleared in step Sc1409, and the second AT flag is set in the flag storage area 106d in step Sc1410. If it is determined in step Sc1408 that the second AT start flag has not been set, the winning result corresponding processing is terminated. As already explained, when the second AT flag is set, an additional lottery using the second AT additional lottery table is performed.

After executing the process of step Sc1407 or step Sc1410, the process of inputting 50 to the AT counter is executed in step Sc1411. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode, and in this embodiment, 50 games are set as the initial number of games in either the first AT mode or the second AT mode. The number of initial games may differ between the first AT mode and the second AT mode, or the number of initial games may be determined by lottery. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of initial games tends to be larger in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In step Sc1412, a process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed, and in step Sc1413, a process of setting the AT mode flag is executed. Then, in step Sc1414, after executing the process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is terminated. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT start command will be described later in detail.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process carried out in step Sc314 in the lottery process (FIG. 188). This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step Sc1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step Sc1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step Sc1702.

In step Sc1702, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag is not set, in step Sc1703, a process of adding 1 to the normal counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The normal counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of games started in the normal period, not in the advantageous period.

After executing the process of step Sc1703, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in step Sc1704. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step Sc1705. Then, in step Sc1706, a process of setting an advantageous section flag is executed.

In step Sc1707, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. Then, in step Sc1708, an advantageous section transition game process is executed.

In the advantageous zone transition game process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 216, the first CZ mode game number lottery process is executed in step Sc1801, and the number of games corresponding to the lottery result is input to the CZ counter in step Sc1802. Then, in step Sc1803, processing for setting the first CZ mode flag is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, it is configured to be set to the CZ mode when transitioning to the advantageous section, and when triggered by the advantageous section transition, the first CZ mode is set, and the number of games is the lottery process of step Sc1801. determined by In the first CZ mode game number lottery process, the first CZ mode game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current number of games in the first CZ mode is randomly set. As shown in FIG. 205, the first CZ mode game number table is set so that any one of 8 games to 10 games is selected. The selection rate varies depending on the number of games, such as being difficult to select. For example, if 10 games are selected in the first CZ mode number-of-games lottery process, 10 is input to the CZ counter in step Sc1802.

After setting the first CZ mode flag in step Sc1803, a process of setting the first CZ mode start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc1804. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the first CZ mode start command will be described later in detail.

In subsequent step Sc1805, ceiling game number lottery processing is executed. In the ceiling game number lottery process, the ceiling game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current ceiling game number is randomly determined. In the number-of-top-games table, the number of games that are likely to be selected (for example, 341, 682) and the number of games that are difficult or not to be selected are set within a range not exceeding the maximum number of top-level games (999 games in this embodiment). . In addition, in the ceiling game number table, the minimum number of games is 100 games, and during the first CZ mode set at the time of transition to the advantageous section (more specifically, during the omen mode when winning the AT mode transition during the first CZ mode ) is set so that the ceiling game is not reached.

At step Sc1806, based on the result of the processing at step Sc1805, a process of inputting the number of ceiling games to the ceiling counter is executed. After that, the advantageous section transition game processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the section display first process, after executing the advantageous section transition game process in step Sc1708, or when it is determined in step Sc1702 that the advantageous section flag is set, in step Sc1709 any Determine whether the CZ mode flag or AT mode flag is set. As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the AT mode or the CZ mode, it is possible to notify the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won. It can be said that the display start condition of the section indicator is satisfied. If any flag is set, at step Sc1710, the display of the section display is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8.

If it is determined in step Sc1701 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step Sc1711 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step Sc1711, a process for continuing the lighting state of the eighth display segment N8 is performed. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

Even if it is determined in step Sc1704 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, or if the advantageous section flag or the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the CZ mode flag If the AT mode flag is not set and the normal mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sc1712. In step Sc1712, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step Sc1710 and after executing the display continuation processing in step Sc1711, the process proceeds to step Sc1713. In step Sc1713, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step Sc1712 or step Sc1713, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step Sc1714. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step Sc1715, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step Sc1714 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 174, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step Sc1715, the result of the arithmetic processing in step Sc1714 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display unit 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step Sc1715, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step Sc1714. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step Sc416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step Sc1901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step Sc1902, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step Sc1902, in step Sc1903, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step Sc1903, on the condition that the game result of this game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is used as the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step Sc1903, the remaining game number management process is executed in step Sc1904, and the remaining number management process is executed in subsequent step Sc1905. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, the number of advantageous zone games AG (number of games completed in the advantageous zone), an AT counter (number of remaining games in AT mode), a CZ counter (number of remaining games in CZ mode), and an omen counter It is determined whether or not the total number of remaining games in the mode is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is greater than the advantageous zone increase/decrease number. Determine whether there are many situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the subsequent step Sc1906, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous interval has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous interval games MY has reached 2400 or more as the upper limit number of increases. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step Sc1907. In the subsequent step Sc1908, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is performed. Then, in step Sc1909, a process of initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed. In step Sc1910, a process of clearing the normal counter is performed. exit.

More specifically, regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step Sc1909, more specifically, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section is returned to the initial value. For example, if the advantageous section flag, the AT mode winning flag, the AT mode flag, various CZ mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous interval MY, the omen counter for the omen mode, the counter for the number of continuous games such as the CZ mode, etc., are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step Sc1906 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step Sc1911, and the CZ end game flag is set. Determine whether or not

Here, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in various CZ modes, the CZ mode flag is cleared when the AT mode winning flag is set (steps Sc808 to step Sc810). The CZ end game flag is a flag that is set when the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (CZ counter) becomes 0 while the CZ mode flag remains set. Therefore, when the CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode has ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery.

When the CZ mode end game flag is set in step Sc1911, it is determined whether or not the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set in step Sc1912.

The second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag is set in step Sc1912, and the second CZ mode is set with the opportunity of winning the CZ mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, and the end of the AT mode is set with the opportunity. If the third CZ mode, which is the first mode, ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process advances to step Sc1907, and the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed. On the other hand, in step Sc1912, the first CZ mode flag is set instead of the second CZ mode flag or the third CZ mode flag, and the first CZ mode set with the transition to the advantageous section as a trigger wins the AT mode transition lottery. If it ends without doing, the process advances to step Sc1913 to clear the first CZ mode flag and then ends the second section display process.

That is, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, the advantageous section ends, while the first CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery , the advantageous section continues without ending. Note that the second CZ mode flag and the third CZ mode flag are cleared at the time of processing for ending the advantageous section (step Sc1909).

<advantageous section and display mode>
The relationship between advantageous sections and display modes will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, in the slot machine 10, an advantageous section in which the pushing order notification can occur and a normal section in which the pushing order notification does not occur are set, and the situation in which the advantageous section flag is set is the advantageous section. , the situation in which the advantageous section flag is not set is the normal section. The advantageous zone flag is a flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. For example, the RAM 106 is initialized when the setting value of the slot machine 10 is changed (the winning probability is changed). Then, the advantageous section flag is also cleared. In other words, when the setting value is changed and the power is turned on, the game is started from the normal section. In the normal section, the display mode is set to the normal mode in which the pressing order notification does not occur.

In the normal section, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition to the advantageous section occurs. More specifically, the advantageous zone winning game flag is set by winning the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and the advantageous zone flag is set on the condition that the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in the first zone display process. be. Then, when the advantageous interval flag is set, an advantageous interval transition game process is executed, and in the advantageous interval transition game process, a process for setting the display mode to the first CZ mode is performed. In addition, the ceiling number of games (up to 999 games) is set when shifting to the advantageous section.

In the first CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 10 games, and during the first CZ mode, it is set so that the lottery for transition to the AT mode can be won with a high probability. In the first CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly via the portent mode. On the other hand, when the first CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode. However, in this case, the advantageous section does not end.

If it is an advantageous section and the display mode is the normal mode, the CZ mode transition lottery is executed together with the AT mode transition lottery. If the CZ mode shift lottery is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the second CZ mode.

In the second CZ mode, the number of continuous games is set to 8 to 15 games, and even during the second CZ mode, as in the first CZ mode, it is set to be able to win the lottery for transition to AT mode with a high probability. ing. In the second CZ mode, if the lottery for the transition to the AT mode is won, the transition to the AT mode occurs mainly through the portent mode. On the other hand, when the second CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

The AT mode is a mode in which, when a bell is won in the pressing order, notification of the pressing order corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor wins is generated, and it is a mode in which many medals can be expected to increase. When the AT mode is shifted to the push order notification, it becomes possible to achieve the 1st to 6th small win prizes when each push order bell is won, and the number of players per game in the AT mode is increased. The net increase is about 8.04 sheets. In the AT mode, the number of initial games is set to 50, and by winning an additional lottery, the number of remaining games is added. Also, the winning probability of the additional lottery is set higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode. When the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0, the AT mode ends and the third CZ mode is set.

In the 3rd CZ mode, the number of games to be continued is set to 25 to 30 games, and even during the 3rd CZ mode, like the 1st CZ mode and the 2nd CZ mode, it is possible to win the lottery for transition to AT mode with a high probability. is set to In the third CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a transition to the AT mode occurs. On the other hand, when the third CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, the display mode shifts to the normal mode, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section.

As already explained, in the CZ mode, an AT mode transition lottery using the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed in each game, and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is more AT than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. It is set so that it is easy to win the mode transition. Further, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ uses the point value obtained in each game of the CZ mode to determine the propriety of the AT mode transition lottery. Then, in terms of the fact that an AT mode transition lottery is executed every game in CZ mode, and the fact that point values can be obtained in each game in CZ mode, the longer the number of games set to CZ mode, the more AT mode transition. It can be said that it is easy to win the lottery. That is, winning the AT mode transition lottery is easier in the second CZ mode than in the first CZ mode, and winning the AT mode transition lottery in the third CZ mode is easier than in the second CZ mode.

Then, although the 1st CZ mode is less likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the 2nd CZ mode or the 3rd CZ mode, the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won during the first CZ mode, the advantageous section does not end, so from the viewpoint of the continuity of the advantageous section, the first CZ mode is better than the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode. It is more advantageous for the player than

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 219, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to an advantageous section that has an instruction function such as the pressing order notification.

In the normal section, for example, if you win the lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning the 7th small winning combination (watermelon), etc., the game will shift to the advantageous section in the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established, and the game will start. Then, measurement of the number of games executed in the advantageous interval (counting of the number of games AG in the advantageous interval) is started. As described above, the first CZ mode is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, and the push order notification may occur in the first CZ mode, so the display of the section indicator in the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) , the eighth display segment N8 lights up. More specifically, when the advantageous section transition game (first CZ mode transition game) starts (when the start lever 41 is operated), the eighth display segment N8 lights up.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is lit, the pressing order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game (timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the last reel are pressed) ), the display ends. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied, the advantageous section ends and the normal section is entered. As conditions for ending the advantageous section, in addition to the number of continuous games and the number of increased medals reaching the upper limit, in this embodiment, the second CZ mode and the third CZ mode are ended without winning the AT mode transition lottery. is When the advantageous section ends, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals ends (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). In addition, when medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished at the time of the third reel stop OFF operation (the timing at which the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 corresponding to the final reel is completed). do.

As described above, by shifting to the advantageous section, the push order notification can occur, and the transition to the advantageous section (transition to the specific section) and the end of the advantageous section are indicated by the eighth display segment N8. clearly informed. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to clearly grasp the situation (specific section, substantial increase section) in which at least the benefit of the pushing sequence notification can be enjoyed. It is possible. By doing so, for example, whether the medal increase is generated by enjoying the benefits of the push order notification in the advantageous section, or the benefit of the push order notification is illegally received even though it is not in the advantageous section. Therefore, it becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to clearly confirm whether or not a fraudulent act that causes an increase in medals is being carried out.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, if the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode among the CZ modes ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery, not only the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode but also the advantageous section ends. At the end of the advantageous interval, the eighth display segment N8 as the interval indicator is turned off, so that the player can clearly understand that the advantageous interval has ended. In other words, by turning off the eighth display segment N8, it becomes possible to clearly grasp that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the second CZ mode or the third CZ mode.

As a result, there is a high possibility that the game will end in many cases when the eighth display segment N8 is turned off. In addition, the gaming machine on which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off is also a mark that the AT mode transition lottery was not won in the previous second CZ mode or third CZ mode, so for example, the transition of the predecessor The action of picking up the winning lottery becomes difficult, and in any case, turning off the light of the eighth display segment N8 can be one of the causes of the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, the present slot machine 10 is provided with a characteristic configuration that eliminates the decrease in operating rate caused by the turning off of the eighth display segment N8. The configuration will be described below.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step Sc2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, the received command is stored in RAM 183 in step Sc2002. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2001, or after executing the process of step Sc2002, it is determined in step Sc2003 whether or not it is time before the game starts. The timing before the start of the game is a state in which a bet number operation such as operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or operation of the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, or a replay state setting process can be performed. At the timing before the start of the game, a process of setting an effect corresponding to a betting time command from the main control device 101 is mainly performed. The command at the time of betting is a command output from main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a command set in the BET processing of step Sc204 of the normal processing. In step Sc2004, a bet-time effect setting process for setting an effect based on the current bet operation is executed based on the bet-time command.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2003 or after the processing of step Sc2004 is executed, it is determined in step Sc2005 whether or not it is time to start the game after betting. The game start timing is a state in which the operation of the start lever 41 is valid. The start time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step Sc311 of the lottery process, the lottery result corresponding Precursor command set in the process (Fig. 199) or the section display first process (Fig. 215), 1st AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd AT winning immediate notification command, 2nd CZ mode start command, add-on command and push order notification command , first CZ mode start command, and the like. In step Sc2006, a start-time effect setting process is executed based on these start-time commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2005 or after the processing of step Sc2006 is executed, it is determined in step Sc2007 whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. When each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating, processing for setting an effect corresponding to each stop operation command from the main control device 101 is performed. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In step Sc2008, each stop operation effect setting process for performing effect setting based on the current stop operation is executed based on each stop operation command.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2007 or after the processing of step Sc2008 is executed, it is determined in step Sc2009 whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have stopped. When all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, processing for setting an effect corresponding to the all-stop command from the main control device 101 is performed. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a winning result set in step Sc417 of the reel control process (FIG. 191). In addition to commands, there are an AT start command, a CZ end command, a 1st AT winning notification command, a 2nd AT winning notification command, an AT end command, a 3rd CZ mode start command, etc., which are set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 212). In step Sc2010, an all-stop effect setting process is executed based on these all-stop commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2009, or after the process of step Sc2010 is executed, other processes are executed in step Sc2011, and then the effect setting process is terminated. In step Sc2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step Sc2011, effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) can be set without going through the main control unit 101. Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at the time of start and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described below, and then the effect setting process at the time of betting will be described.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step Sc2006 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sc2101, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a win in the first place. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step Sc2102 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. If the push order notification command has been received, it is determined in step Sc2103 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply B. If the push order notification command is set in the game that is normal reply B, it means that it is the start game of the first AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

If the determination in step Sc2103 is negative, it is determined in step Sc2105 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is normal reply C. When the push order notification command is set in the game which is usually reply C, it means that it is the start game of the 2nd AT mode. Setting processing for performing notification effect is executed.

A negative determination in step Sc2105 means that the lottery result of this game is the winning of the bell in order of pressing, and in this case, it corresponds to the first to sixth minor winning prizes in step Sc2107. A setting is executed so that the pressing order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. - 特許庁

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2101 or step Sc2102, or after executing any one of steps Sc2104, Sc2106 and Sc2107, the process proceeds to step Sc2108. In step Sc2108, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a wait period as a specific period before the wait time has elapsed. As described above, the wait time must elapse from when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the game to when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating at the start of the next game. For example, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are configured to wait for the start of rotation. can be determined by If it is determined in step Sc2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, the process of turning on the wait display section 78 is executed in step Sc2109, and then the process returns to step Sc2108. If the weight display unit 78 is already lit in step Sc2109, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step Sc2108 that the wait period has elapsed, the process advances to step Sc2110 to execute processing for turning off the wait display section 78. FIG. If the weight display section 78 is already in the off state, that state is maintained. After that, a process of setting an effect at the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in steps Sc2111 to Sc2122 is executed. That is, the pressing order notification effect executed in steps Sc2101 to Sc2107 is executed even before the wait period has elapsed based on the operation of the start lever 41. The effect at the start is not executed unless the wait period has elapsed even if the start lever 41 is operated, and is executed when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

To simplify the explanation, if it is determined in step Sc2108 that the wait period has not elapsed, the loop processing that waits until the wait period elapses after executing the processing of step Sc2109 will be used. However, the start-time effect setting process may be ended. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the effect setting process at the start does not end until the wait period has elapsed. This point is the same for other loop processes.

As the effect setting process executed when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating, first, in step Sc2111, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning of a specific combination. The specific role is a lottery result called a so-called rare role that is difficult to appear (hard to win) as a lottery result of each game. Watermelon is set as a specific role. As shown in FIGS. 202 and 203, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be more likely to be won than the lottery result other than the specific role. If the lottery result of the current game is that the special combination is won, the process for informing the special combination is executed in step Sc2112. In the specific winning notification processing, settings are made so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the lottery result of the current game is one of the specific winning combinations. For example, as shown in FIG. 224(b), three characters of exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided as the special combination notification. A production is set.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2111, or after executing the process of step Sc2112, the process proceeds to step Sc2113. In step Sc2113, it is determined whether or not an add command has been received. When the addition command is received, the setting processing of the addition effect is executed in step Sc2114. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. A mode may be included, or, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode is included in a so-called add-on effect in which an add-on effect is executed in a situation where the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2113, or after executing the process of step Sc2114, it is determined in step Sc2115 whether or not the 1st AT winning immediate notification command or the 2nd AT winning immediate notification command has been received. The 1st AT winning prompt notification command and the 2nd AT winning immediate notification command are commands output from the main controller 101 when the AT mode transition lottery is won and the immediate notification lottery is won. When these commands are received, setting is executed so that the corresponding AT winning immediate notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in step Sc2116. For example, as shown in FIG. 223(a), the AT winning immediate notification effect displays characters such as "AT confirmed!" In addition, in the AT winning immediate notification effect, which of the first AT and the second AT has been won is specified based on the received immediate notification command. For example, when the first AT mode is won and when the second AT mode is won, the background color of the auxiliary display section 65 in the AT winning immediate notification effect is made different so that the player can select which AT mode. It is preferable to make it possible to clearly grasp whether the mode has been won. It should be noted that it does not indicate which of the 1st AT or 2nd AT has been won, but suggests that the 1st AT or 2nd AT has been won using the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, etc. may be configured. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the loss of the game feeling of looking forward to which AT has been won until the AT start game after the AT winning immediate notification effect.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2115, or after the process of step Sc2116 is executed, it is determined in step Sc2117 whether or not a precursor command has been received. As already explained, the portent command is a case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process (FIG. 198) on the main controller 101 side, and the immediate notification lottery is not won (step Sc1105: NO). ), in addition to the information that the AT mode winning flag is set, the number of games from the game in question (the game in which the AT mode winning flag is set) to the game for which the AT winning notification effect is to be performed. information (precursor counter value). When the portent command is received, the portent effect setting process is executed in step Sc2118.

In the portent effect setting process, a process of setting a continuous effect that can be continuously executed over a plurality of games as a portent effect is performed. In the continuous effect in the present embodiment, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in the final game, and the continuous effect set in the precursor effect setting process is the AT mode in the final game of the continuous effect. is set so that the notification of winning is executed.

In the portent effect setting process, if the display mode that wins the AT mode transition lottery is not the first CZ mode, but the second CZ mode, the third CZ mode, or the normal mode, the number of portent games included in the portent command A continuous effect is set so that the success/failure result of the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode win notification) is performed after the corresponding number of games. As already explained, the second CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, and 13 games to 15 games are set as the number of precursor games when winning the AT mode transition, so after shifting to the second CZ mode AT The number of games to be played until the success/failure result of the mode transition lottery is announced (AT mode winning announcement) is any one of 13 games to 30 games. In the present embodiment, it is set so that continuous production is started when shifting to the second CZ mode, and when winning the AT mode shift lottery in the second CZ mode, when shifting to the second CZ mode In the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous effect that has been started, the success/failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode win notification). The 3rd CZ mode continues from 25 games to 30 games, and the number of games remaining in the 3rd CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games when the AT mode transition wins. In other words, the number of games from the transition to the third CZ mode to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is any one of 25 games to 30 games. In this embodiment, it is set so that the continuous effect is started even when shifting to the 3rd CZ mode, and when winning the AT mode shift lottery in the 3rd CZ mode, when shifting to the 3rd CZ mode In the 25th to 30th games of the started continuous effect, the success/failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode win notification).

On the other hand, if the display mode won in the AT mode transition lottery is the first CZ mode, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance has already started, and if the continuous performance has not started. , Continuous performance is set so that the success/failure result of the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode win notification) is performed after the number of games corresponding to the number of precursor games included in the precursor command. The 1st CZ mode is performed over 8 games to 10 games, and if you win the AT mode transition lottery in the 1st CZ mode, the number of precursor games of 5 games is set, so in the 1st CZ mode The number of games from the transition to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode winning notification) is any one of 5 to 15 games. Further, when the display mode for which the AT mode transition lottery is won is the first CZ mode and the continuous effect has already started, the remaining number of games of the continuous effect is set to the present predictive game number. process. As described above, when the transition to the second CZ mode is set so that the continuous effect is started, furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode does not win the AT mode transition lottery, the continuous It is set so that the production will be taken over. Therefore, when the AT mode shift lottery is won in the first CZ mode, the continuous performance has already started means that the continuous performance started at the start of the second CZ mode has been taken over. As mentioned above, the 2nd CZ mode continues from 8 games to 15 games, so if you win the AT mode transition lottery in the 1st CZ mode via the 2nd CZ mode, continuous production when transitioning to the 2nd CZ mode The number of games from the start of the AT mode transition lottery to the notification of the success or failure of the AT mode selection lottery (AT mode winning notification) will be anywhere from 13 games to 30 games, excluding the number of games in the normal section. . In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, assuming that the normal section is one game, the 31st game from the 14th game of the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode. The success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is announced (AT mode winning announcement) with the eyes.

In this case, in particular, in the case where the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification) in the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode, if not via the first CZ mode, the In the 13th game to the 30th game of the continuous effect, the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification), and in the case of via the first CZ mode, the 14th game to the 31st game of the continuous effect The result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (notification of success in AT mode) with the eyes. Therefore, in the continuous effect started at the time of transition to the second CZ mode, in the 13th game to the 30th game, the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified (AT mode winning notification), whether via the first CZ mode That is, it becomes difficult to determine whether or not the advantageous section has once ended from the number of games of the continuous effect. Although the detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, in accordance with the number of games in which such notification of winning the AT mode is performed, a game of continuous production of non-winning as a result of the AT mode transition lottery is performed. number is set. Therefore, for example, when the continuous production is started in the second CZ mode, it becomes difficult to determine whether the advantageous section has ended during the continuous production from the contents of the continuous production and the number of games, and the game is played at the end of the advantageous section. is getting harder to terminate.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if a negative determination is made in step Sc2117 or after the process of step Sc2118 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sc2119. In step Sc2119, it is determined whether or not the first CZ mode start command or the second CZ mode start command has been received. If any CZ mode start command has been received, in step Sc2120, a CZ mode start setting process is executed. When the first CZ mode start command is received, when the continuous performance is not continued, a new performance for the first CZ mode is started, and when the continuous performance is continued, the concerned Continue the continuous production. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the second CZ mode is started, the continuous effect is started, and when the second CZ mode start command is received, the setting process for the CZ mode start , setting is made so that the continuous effect of the number of games longer than the total number of the number of continuous games in the second CZ mode and the number of continuous games in the first CZ mode that can be executed thereafter is started. As a result, even when the CZ mode ends without winning the lottery for shifting to the AT mode, when the first CZ mode is subsequently started (when shifting to the advantageous section), a situation is created in which the continuous performance continues. becomes possible.

When a negative determination is made in step Sc2119, or after executing the processing of step Sc2120, continuous effect setting processing is executed in step Sc2121. As described above, the continuous effect setting process sets the effect for each game of the continuous effect that can be continued over a plurality of games in informing the success or failure result of the AT mode transition lottery, and sets the AT mode transition lottery. It is a process for setting a continuous effect in the case of non-winning.

After that, in step Sc2122, other start time effect setting processing is executed, and then this start time effect setting processing is terminated. In step Sc2122, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, extinguishing the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is performed.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process in step Sc2010 will be described with reference to FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the AT start command, the CZ end command, the 1st AT winning notification command, the 2nd AT winning notification command, the AT end command, the 3rd CZ This is a process for setting effects in the case of a full stop command such as a mode start command.

In step Sc2201, it is determined whether or not the first AT winning notification command or the second AT winning notification command has been received. The first AT winning command and the second AT winning notification command are commands output from the main controller 101 side when the precursor counter becomes 0 after the AT mode winning flag is set. When these AT winning notification commands are received, the process advances to step Sc2202 to set the corresponding AT winning notification effect to be performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as a betting effect for the next game. to run. The AT winning notification effect is a effect after the winning of the AT mode transition lottery is announced in the final game of the continuous effect set as described above. is set as a battle effect in which the ally character wins in the battle effect in the final game of the continuous effect, and then the effect that makes the ally character happy when betting in the next game is set as the AT win notification effect. You may The AT winning notification effect set here is a bet number operation such as operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 45 as an effect when betting on the next game. is executed when

If it is determined in step Sc2201 that the AT winning notification command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sc2203. In step Sc2203, it is determined whether or not an AT start command has been received. In addition, the case where the AT start command is received means the case where the second re-game or third re-game pressing order notification effect is performed at the start of the game. In this case, in step Sc2204, settings are made so that the AT start effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 223(b), the AT start effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 with a start re-game symbol corresponding to the type of AT mode to be started this time (in the case of the first AT mode, the second re-game is displayed). Along with the diagonal alignment of the corresponding "BAR" symbols (Fig. 183(a)), etc., and the bottom alignment of the "White 7" symbols corresponding to the third replay in the second AT mode (Fig. 183(c)), etc., Characters such as "AT start!"

If the AT start command has not been received in step Sc2203, it is determined whether or not the AT end command has been received in step Sc2205. If the AT end command has been received, setting is executed in step Sc2206 so that the AT end effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If the AT end command has not been received in step Sc2205, it is determined in step Sc2207 whether or not the third CZ mode start command has been received. When the 3rd CZ mode start command is received, in step Sc2208, the production start processing for the 3rd CZ mode is executed. In the 3rd CZ mode effect start process, the continuous effect is set to start over the current number of continuous games in the 3rd CZ mode (25th game to 30th game).

If it is determined in step Sc2207 that the third CZ mode start command has not been received, it is determined in step Sc2209 whether or not the CZ mode end command has been received. If the CZ end command has been received, at step Sc2210 an effect setting process for CZ end is executed. In the effect setting process for ending CZ, when the CZ mode to end this time is the second CZ mode, setting is made so that the continuous effect being executed is continued. Also, if the CZ mode that ends this time is the first CZ mode, if the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode via the second CZ mode, that is, the continuous production of the second CZ mode is taken over and the first CZ mode When the performance is performed, the continuous performance is terminated as it is, and when the first CZ mode is the first CZ mode not via the second CZ mode, the continuous performance set in the first CZ mode is continued. set as Then, when the CZ mode to end this time is the third CZ mode, the continuous effect set in the third CZ mode is set to end as it is.

If the CZ mode end command has not been received in step Sc2209, or after executing any of steps Sc2202, step Sc2204, step Sc2206, step Sc2208 and step Sc2210, in step Sc2211, the current game The game result information (lottery result and information on whether or not a prize has been won) and information on the number of bets for the current game are temporarily stored. Then, in step Sc2212, after executing other all-stop effect setting processing, the present all-stop effect setting processing is terminated. In step Sc2212, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 lights up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

In this way, in the present embodiment, by shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section through the advantageous section transition lottery, and winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, a transition to the AT mode occurs and many medals can be obtained. In expected game properties, the transition to the AT mode is made to occur mainly through the CZ mode, and the subsequent content of the continuous performance set in the CZ mode is resolved by predicting the end of the advantageous section. I am trying to In this case, not only the CZ mode, but the AT mode transition lottery is executed according to the lottery result of each game. It is set so that it is easy to win, and other results make it difficult to win AT mode transition.

As already explained, the specific wins in this embodiment are Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, and Watermelon. On the other hand, Chance A to Chance C and Cherry A to Cherry C are results in which winning is established as a result of replay. By setting the specific combination using the replay result in this way, it is possible to diversify the specific combination simply by increasing the types of replay results, and the replay result that does not cause an increase or decrease in medals. If so, it is possible to set a special combination while suppressing the impact on the payout rate. Furthermore, as in the normal replies A to C, while basically establishing the first replay result winning prize, at a predetermined timing (at the start of the AT mode), the second replay result winning prize and the third replay result winning prize It is also possible to change the result of winning and the number of stops without changing the privilege to be given according to the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, such as establishment of winning as a result of replay, and use it in the game. . In addition, for example, it is possible to improve the appearance rate of the specific combination by using the RT state, etc., which improves the winning probability of the replay result, and configure the specific combination, etc. using the replay result. This is a great advantage in improving the interest in the game.

However, if the specific win is composed of the result of the minor win and the result of the replay as described above, the player is required to make a bet in the next game if the result is a minor win. In the case of the result, betting is not necessary due to the process of automatically inserting virtual medals, and the progress of the game is greatly different. Therefore, when a special win is established as a result of the replay, the player may feel a strong sense of discomfort due to the difference from the result of a small win, etc., which may hinder the smooth progress of the game. It is possible that it may be lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a notification mode is devised in the case where a prize is established as a result of the replay result of such a specific combination. In the following, a description will be given of the mode of notification in the case of a replay result. In the following description, the first re-game result is also called a normal re-game result, and the re-game result other than the first re-game result is also called a specific re-game result.

<BET display section and BET display section>
As shown in FIG. 170, the gaming panel 25 is provided with a BET display section 34 to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and a BET display section 75 to the lower left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 225, the BET display section 75 has a first BET display section 75a, a second BET display section 75b, and a third BET display section 75c. All of the display portions 75a to 75c are configured to be switchable between a lighting state (or blinking state) and a non-lighting state, and the number of bets is notified by the BET display portions 75a to 75c in the lighting state. For example, when the first BET display portion 75a and the second BET display portion 75b of the BET display portions 75 are in a lighting state and the third BET display portion 75c is in a non-lighting state, it means that two bets have been made. Also, when all the bet display portions 75a to 75c are lit, it means that three bets have been made.

The bet display section 34 also has a first bet display section 34a, a second bet display section 34b, and a third bet display section 34c, as shown in FIG. (or flashing state) and a non-lighting state. The number of bets is notified by the bet display portions 34a to 34c that are lit, as is the case with the BET display portion 75 described above.

However, as shown in FIG. 185, the BET display section 75 is connected to the main control device 101, the BET display section 34 is connected to the display control device 81, and the BET display section 75 is connected to the main control device 101 side. The difference is that the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side, while the bet display unit 34 is controlled by the CPU 102 . Further, as shown in FIG. 170, the bet display portion 34 has a larger area of the light transmitting region than the bet display portion 75 in the game panel 25 when the respective display portions 34 and 75 are turned on. The bet display portion 34 is set to be larger than the bet display portion 75 so as to attract the player's attention (easier to comprehend). It should be noted that the bet display section 34 may have a configuration that is easier for the player to see (easier for the player to understand) than the bet display section 75, and the luminance and light amount when the bet display section 75 is turned on are increased. Alternatively, the bet display unit 34 may be configured by an operable accessory or the like, or the number of bets by the bet display unit 34 may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. .

170, the gaming state display portion 76 is a display portion smaller than the bet display portion 34 and the first credit insertion switch 56, similarly to the BET display portion 75. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 185 and 225, it has a replay state display portion 76a, a start possible state display portion 76b, and an acceptable state display portion 76c. It is configured to be switchable between the off state and the off state. The replay state display section 76a is for notifying that the replay state is set so that the next game can be executed with the same number of bets as the bet count of the current game. , and is turned off when the game set to the replay state ends. The ready-to-start display unit 76b is for notifying that the ready-to-start state in which the operation for starting the game can be accepted has been reached. When the start operation is accepted, the light is turned off. The acceptable state display portion 76c is for notifying that the medal insertion port 45 is in an acceptable state in which medals can be inserted. is not accepted, the light is turned off. More specifically, when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a that guides the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 to the storage passage 47 side is energized, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is turned on, and the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. When the path switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the light is turned off.

<BET processing>
Next, the BET processing performed in step Sc204 in the normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sc2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game was a win as a replay result. Such processing can be determined based on the information of the previous game stored in the medal payout processing of step Sc214. If it is the next game in which any winning replay result has been established, it is determined in step Sc2302 whether or not the winning replay result is the first replay result as the normal replay result. Winning as a result of the normal replay can be won when the normal replay A to normal replay C are won, and when the normal replay A to normal replay C are won, the stop operation of the right reel 32R is performed first. As long as it is not performed, basically winning a prize is established as a result of the normal replay (FIG. 208). If the game is the next game after the game in which the normal replay winning has been established, the process of setting the normal replay flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sc2303. On the other hand, if it is the next game of the game in which the replay result other than the first replay result as the specific replay result has been established, the process of setting the specific replay flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sc2304. do.

Note that the processes of steps Sc2301 to Sc2304 may be performed in the medal payout process or the payout determination process.

After executing the processing of step Sc2303 or step Sc2304, the process proceeds to step Sc2305, the number of bets in the previous game is grasped from the bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e, and the value of the bet counter is temporarily stored in a register or the like. Execute the memorizing process. The BET counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of bets placed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2301 or after the processing of step Sc2305 is executed, the BET counter is cleared in step Sc2506. Then, in step Sc2307, a process of grasping the prescribed number of coins for the current game is executed. As already explained, the prescribed number of bets is the number of bets that allows the game to be executed. 3 is set as the prescribed number.

In the subsequent step Sc2308, processing is executed to turn on the acceptable state display section. Then, in step Sc2309, it is determined whether or not it is the next game in which the normal replay flag or the specific replay flag is set, and any of the replay result wins are established, and the replay result wins are established. If it is the next game, the replay setting process is executed in step Sc2310.

<Replay setting processing>
In the replay setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 227, first, in step Sc2401, a process for turning on the replay status display section is executed. In subsequent step Sc2402, a process for turning off all the BET display sections is executed. Then, in step Sc2403, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game flag is set, and if it is not set and the game is the next game in which the normal re-game result winning has been established, then in step Sc2404 the normal BET command is executed. is set as an output target to the display control device 81 . The normal BET command is a command for controlling the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side.

After setting the normal BET command, the process proceeds to step Sc2405. Steps Sc2405 to Sc2410 are processes for automatically inserting virtual medals based on winnings as a normal regame result. That is, in step Sc2405, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step Sc2406, a process of lighting (or blinking) the BET display section corresponding to the BET counter incremented this time is executed. Specifically, if the BET counter is 1 as a result of the processing of step Sc2405, the first BET display section 75a is lit, and if the BET counter is 2, the second BET display section 75b is lit, and the BET counter is 3. If so, the third BET display portion 75c is turned on. Then, in step Sc2407, a process of setting a replay BET command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The replay BET command is a command for turning on the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side in conjunction with the lighting processing of the BET display section 75 in step Sc2406.

In subsequent step Sc2408, a process of inputting 134 to a BET timer provided in various counter areas 106e is executed. The BET timer is a counter for defining the interval for automatically inserting virtual medals, and the BET timer is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, and the value input in step Sc2408 is approximately 0. 0 after 2 seconds.

In step Sc2409, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not approximately 0.2 sec has passed since the processing of step Sc2408 was executed. When about 0.2 sec has passed and an affirmative determination is made in step Sc2409, it is determined in step Sc2410 whether or not the value of the BET counter has become equal to the bet number of the previous game temporarily stored in step Sc2305. If the number of bets in the previous game has not been reached, the process returns to step Sc2405, and the process of automatically inserting virtual medals is executed again. When the value of the BET counter reaches the number of bets of the previous game, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc2410, and the process proceeds to step Sc2411.

In step Sc2411, a process of setting a bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The bet end command is a command for letting the display control device 81 know that a series of bets has ended, and includes information on the current number of bets. In subsequent step Sc2412, a process of setting a start enable flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The start enable flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the start operation of the start lever 41 can be accepted. In other words, if the startable flag is not set, even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is performed, it will not be accepted. Further, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is set with a wait period, and the start possible flag is set so that it can be set before the wait period elapses. In other words, even if the start operation of the start lever 41 is accepted because the start enable flag is set and the start operation of the start lever 41 is accepted, the start operation is accepted while the reels 32L and 32M are activated. , 32R can wait until the wait period elapses.

After executing the process of step Sc2412, in step Sc2413, after executing the process of turning on the start possible state display section 76b, the replay setting process is ended. By turning on the startable state display portion 76b, the player can understand that the start operation of the start lever 41 can be accepted.

On the other hand, if the specific replay flag is set in step Sc2403 and the game is the next game in which the specific replay result winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Sc2414. In step Sc2414, a process of setting a specific BET command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The specific BET command is a command for controlling the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side.

In subsequent step Sc2415, a process of inputting the number of bets of the previous game to the BET counter is executed. Then, in step Sc2416, processing is executed to turn on the BET display portions 75a to 75c corresponding to the value input to the BET counter. That is, when 1 is input to the BET counter in step Sc2415, only the first BET display section 75a is turned on, and when 2 is input to the BET counter, the first BET display section 75a and the second BET display section 75b are turned on. , the third BET display portion 75c is kept in the off state, and when 3 is input to the BET counter, all the BET display portions 75a to 75c are turned on.

After the process of step Sc2416 is executed, the process proceeds to step Sc2411, the betting end command and the start possible flag are set, and the start possible state display section 76b is turned on. End the game setting process.

That is, the process of automatically inserting virtual tokens based on the winning replay result is completed in a shorter time when the automatic insertion based on the winning result of the specific replay is performed than when automatically inserting the medals based on the winning result of the normal replay. is set to

Returning to the description of the BET process, if none of the replay flags is set in step Sc2309 or after the replay setting process is executed in step Sc2310, the process proceeds to step Sc2311. The processing from step Sc2311 to step Sc2319 is processing for setting bets and credits by inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 45 and operating credit inserting switches 56 and 57. FIG.

That is, in step Sc2311, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is the upper limit value (50). The credit counter corresponds to credits displayed on the credit display unit 60 and corresponds to virtual game medium storage means possessed by the CPU 102 . If the credit counter has not reached the upper limit, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized in step Sc2312 so that the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are led to the storage passage 47 side. On the other hand, when the credit counter reaches the upper limit, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized in step Sc2313 so that the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are led to the discharge passage 48 side.

After executing the process of step Sc2312 or step Sc2313, the process proceeds to step Sc2314. The processing of step Sc2314 to step Sc2319 is processing when a bet number operation such as insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45, operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 is performed.

That is, in step Sc2314, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted from the medal slot 45. In the present embodiment, when a medal is inserted, the path through which the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 passes is upstream of the selector 46 provided with the medal passage switching solenoid 46a (the medal insertion slot 45 side). , an inserted medal detection sensor 45a is provided, and the CPU 102 can determine that medals have been inserted based on the detection result of the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. If medals have been inserted, a medal insertion handling process is executed in step Sc2315.

If no medals have been inserted, the process advances to step Sc2316 to determine whether or not the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated based on the detection result of the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a. If the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated, a first operation handling process is executed in step Sc2317.

If the first credit insertion switch 56 has not been operated, it is determined in step Sc2318 whether or not the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated based on the detection result of the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a. If the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated, a second operation handling process is executed in step Sc2319.

After executing any of steps Sc2315, Sc2317, and Sc2319, or after making a negative determination in step Sc2318, it is determined in step Sc2320 whether or not the start enable flag has been set, and if it has been set. If not, the process returns to step Sc2311, and if the start possible flag is set, the BET process is terminated.

The medal insertion corresponding process, the first operation corresponding process, and the second operation corresponding process will be described below.

<Processing for inserting medals>
In the medal insertion handling process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 228, first, it is determined whether or not the specific replay flag is set. If the specific re-game flag is not set and the specific re-game result winning has not been established in the previous game, it is determined in step Sc2502 whether or not the normal re-game flag is set. If the normal replay flag is not set and the normal replay result has not been won in the previous game, that is, if the current state is not set to the replay state, the process advances to step Sc2503, and the BET counter is set. Determine whether or not the number of sheets has been reached. As described above, the specified number of coins for the current game is grasped in step Sc2307. In any of the BB states, the specified number is set to 3, and in states other than the BB state, the specified numbers are set to 2 and 3. At Step Sc2503, in the BB state, the BET counter is set. is 3, affirmative determination is made, and in states other than the BB state, it is determined whether or not the larger specified number of the specified number of 2 and 3 has been reached. That is, in a state other than the BB state, if the BET counter is 3, the determination is affirmative.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2503, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed in step Sc2504. In other words, in a state in which the specified number of coins is set to 2 and 3, a game with the specified number of 2 coins (2-bet game) can be started. It is possible to make a state in which a specified number of games (3-bet game) can be started.

In the subsequent step Sc2505, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the specified number by the medal insertion this time. If the specified number of sheets has been reached, it is determined in step Sc2506 whether or not the start possible flag has been set. If the start-enable flag is not set, the process of setting the start-enable flag is executed in step Sc2507, and the process of turning on the start-enable state display section 76b is executed in step Sc2508.

If it is determined in step Sc2505 that the BET counter has not reached the specified number, or if the start possible flag is set in step Sc2506, or if the start possible state display unit 76b is turned on in step Sc2508 After that, in step Sc2509, the process of setting the insertion BET command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this medal insertion handling process is terminated. The inserted BET command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that a bet has been set by inserting medals this time.

When it is determined in step Sc2502 that the specific re-game flag is not set but the normal re-game flag is set, or in step Sc2503 it is determined that the BET counter has reached the specified number and during the BB state When the BET counter is 3, or when the BET counter is 3 in a state other than the BB state, the process proceeds to step Sc2510. At step Sc2510, it is determined whether the credit counter is 50 or not. If the credit counter is not 50, a process of adding 1 to the credit counter is executed in step Sc2511, and a process of setting an input increase command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc2512. Then, at step Sc2513, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50 based on the result of the processing at step Sc2511. state, and in step Sc2515, the processing for turning off the acceptable state display section 76c is executed, and then the present medal insertion handling processing ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc2510, or if a negative determination is made in step Sc2513, the medal insertion handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the specific re-game flag is set in step Sc2501 and the specific re-game result win has been established in the previous game, the process advances to step Sc2516 to send the specific input command to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as the output target of . The specific insertion command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that medals have been inserted in the replay state set based on the specific replay result win. After executing the process of step Sc2516, the process proceeds to step Sc2510, and on the condition that the credit counter has not reached 50, the process for credit increase is executed.

That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the credit counter by inserting medals even in a situation where the replay state is set. In the game state, a specific insertion command is output by inserting medals. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the specific input command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for first operation>
In the first operation corresponding process which is the process when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. At step Sc2602, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific replay flag is not set, the normal replay flag is set, and a normal replay win has been established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. Therefore, the first operation handling process is terminated. If neither the specific replay flag nor the normal replay flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc2603.

In step Sc2603, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and virtual medals are not stored, no bet will be placed even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so the first operation handling process is terminated. When the credit counter is 1 or more, the process advances to step Sc2604 to determine whether or not the current BET counter is the specific number. As already explained, the specific number is the number to be bet when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, and the specific number is set to 3 in the BB state. In the non-internal state before winning the BB, the specific number is set to 2, and in the internal state other than the BB state and after winning the BB, the specific number is set to 3 ( See Figure 193). If the current BET counter corresponds to the specific number, no new bet is placed even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, so the first operation handling process is terminated.

If the BET counter does not reach the specific number, in step Sc2605, a process of setting the normal first operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The normal first operation command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the first credit insertion switch 56 has been operated in a situation other than the replay state and the credit counter being 1 or more.

In the following step Sc2606, processing for subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 this time. Then, in step Sc2607, a process of adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step Sc2608, a process of lighting the corresponding BET display portions 75a to 75c is executed.

In subsequent step Sc2609, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached a specific number by the processing in step Sc2606. If not, the process advances to step Sc2610 to determine whether the credit counter is 1 or more. If the credit counter is 1 or more and the current operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 allows a further bet, a process of inputting 67 to the BET timer is executed in step Sc2611. As described above, the BET timer is a counter for defining the interval for automatically inserting virtual medals, and the value input in step Sc2611 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, when inserting virtual medals by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the virtual medals are inserted at an interval shorter than the interval (about 0.2 sec) when virtual medals are automatically inserted in the replay setting process. is done.

In step Sc2612, the BET timer becomes 0, and it is determined whether or not approximately 0.1 sec has passed since the process of step Sc2611 was executed. When about 0.1 sec has passed and the determination in step Sc2612 is affirmative, in step Sc2613 a process of setting the continuous bet command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the process returns to step Sc2606. The consecutive bet command is a command for allowing the display control device 81 to recognize that a plurality of bets are made by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 and the timing of the bets. In this case, the processing of steps Sc2606 to Sc2613 is repeated until the BET counter reaches the specific number (step Sc2609: YES) or the credit counter reaches 0 (step Sc2610: NO).

When the BET counter reaches the specific number in step Sc2609, the process proceeds to step Sc2614. In step Sc2614, a process of setting a bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. As described above, the bet end command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that a series of bets has ended. Then, in step Sc2615, the process of setting the start enable flag is executed, and in step Sc2616, the process of turning on the start enable state display section 76b is executed, and then the first operation corresponding process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sc2610 that the credit counter has reached 0, the process advances to step Sc2617 to execute the process of setting the bet end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the first operation corresponding process. exit.

If it is determined in step Sc2601 that the specific replay flag is set, then in step Sc2618 the process of setting the specific first operation command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the first operation Terminate the corresponding process. That is, in the re-game state set based on the establishment of the specific re-game result win, no bet is made when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, but the output setting of the specific first operation command is performed. will be Processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific first operation command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for second operation>
In the second operation corresponding process, which is the process when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. At step Sc2702, it is determined whether or not the normal replay flag is set. If the specific replay flag is not set, the normal replay flag is set, and a normal replay win has been established in the previous game, the bet is placed by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, the process for handling the second operation is terminated as it is. If neither the specific replay flag nor the normal replay flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc2703.

In step Sc2703, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is 1 or more and one or more virtual medals are stored. If the credit counter is less than 1 and virtual medals are not stored, no bet will be placed even if the second credit input switch 57 is operated.

If the credit counter is 1 or more, it is determined in step Sc2704 whether or not the BET counter is the specified number. If the number is not the specified number, the process advances to step Sc2705 to execute processing for setting the normal second operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The normal second operation command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the second credit insertion switch 57 has been operated in a situation where the game is not in the replay state.

In the following step Sc2706, processing for adding 1 to the BET counter is executed, and in step Sc2707, processing for subtracting 1 from the credit counter is executed. Then, in step Sc2708, the corresponding BET display portions 75a to 75c are turned on.

In the following step Sc2709, it is determined whether or not the BET counter has reached the prescribed number by the processing of step Sc2706, and if the prescribed number has been reached, a process of setting a start possible flag is executed in step Sc2710. In Sc2711, the processing for turning on the start possible state display portion 76b is executed, and then the second operation corresponding processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc2709 that the BET counter has not reached the specified number, the second operation handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sc2704 that the BET counter is at the specified number, that is, if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated even though the BET counter is at the specified number, the process proceeds to step Sc2712. At step Sc2712, it is determined whether the BET counter is 3 or not. That is, in the gaming state in which the specified number of cards is set to 2 and 3, if the BET counter is 3 and the determination in step Sc2704 is affirmative, the determination in step Sc2712 is also affirmative, and the BET counter is 2 If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc2704, a negative determination is made in step Sc2712. If a negative determination is made in step Sc2712 and the BET counter is 2, the process advances to step Sc2705 to make a further bet, and each process corresponding to setting the BET counter to 3 is executed. In this case, a negative determination is made in step Sc2709, and the start enable flag is not set, but the start enable flag was set before that (when the BET counter reached 2).

In step Sc2712, when the second credit input switch 57 is operated while 3 is input to the BET counter, the BET counter is set to 1 according to the value of the credit counter (1 from 3 bets). bet state) or not. That is, in step Sc2713, it is determined whether or not the credit counter is less than 49 and the credit counter can allow an increase of two virtual medals when switching from the state of betting three coins to the state of betting one coin. If the credit counter is less than 49 in step Sc2713, the process advances to step Sc2714 to execute the process of setting the normal second operation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After that, in step Sc2715, 1 is input to the BET counter, and in step Sc2716, processing for increasing the credit counter by 2 is executed.

In subsequent step Sc2717, a process of turning off the second BET display portion 75b and the third BET display portion 75c (putting the BET display portion 75 into a state indicating 1 bet) is executed. Then, in step Sc2719, a process for turning off the start possible state display section 76b is executed.

In the subsequent step Sc2720, it is determined whether or not the credit counter has reached 50. If it has reached 50, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized in step Sc2721, and in step Sc2722. After executing the process of turning off the acceptable state display section 76c, the second operation corresponding process is terminated. If the credit counter is not 50 in step Sc2720, the second operation handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sc2701 that the specific replay flag is set, then in step Sc2723 the specific second operation command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then the second operation is performed. Terminate the corresponding process. That is, in the replay state set based on the establishment of the specific replay result win, bets are not made when not only the first credit insertion switch 56 but also the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated. Output setting of the specific second operation command is performed. Processing on the display control device 81 side when the specific second operation command is received will be described later in detail.

<Processing for game status display section>
Next, the processing for the game state display section of step Sc209 in the normal processing (FIG. 187) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the processing for the gaming state display section is a processing that is executed after the BET processing or the like is performed and after the start lever 41 is operated. 76, the start possible state display portion 76b and the acceptable state display portion 76c are lit. Further, when any of the replay wins have been established in the previous game, the replay state is set, and the replay state display section 76a is also lit.

In the processing for the game state display section, first, in step Sc2801, a process for turning off the start possible state display section 76b is executed. Then, in step Sc2802, the processing for turning off the acceptable state display section 76c is executed, and the processing for the game state display section is ended.

That is, after the acceptable state display unit 76c is turned on (step Sc2308), the specified number of bets is placed and the startable state display unit 76b is turned on (step Sc2413, step Sc2508, step Sc2616, step Sc2711), after that, when the start lever 41 is operated, the acceptable state display section 76c and the startable state display section 76b are turned off. However, as already explained, the slot machine 10 has a wait period, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not start rotating immediately after the start lever 41 is operated. In this case, the timing at which the acceptable state display portion 76c and the startable state display portion 76b are turned off is not when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, but when the start lever 41 is operated. The player should clearly understand that the start operation has already been accepted and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a state of waiting for the start of rotation (wait period), and there is no need to perform the betting number operation or the start operation again. becomes possible.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of betting in step Sc2004 in the effect setting process (FIG. 220) on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process at the time of betting switches the bet display portions 34a to 34c from the off state to the on state or outputs a sound effect at the time of betting when the replay state is set or the number of bets is operated. By doing so, the current bet number is finally displayed in the bet display section 34. FIG. In the following description, the effect in which the current number of bets is finally notified by the bet display unit 34 is referred to as a bet corresponding effect. The effect of switching the state of 34c or outputting a sound effect is also referred to as a betting process effect (specific notification).

In step Sc2901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the previous game was any replay result win. If any of the re-game results are winning, a bet effect setting process for re-game state is executed in step Sc2902. The information of the game result of the previous game is stored in step Sc2211 in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 191), and it is determined whether or not the replay result wins based on the stored information of the game result. It is possible. By the way, if the game result of the previous game is not a win as a replay result, or if the information of the game result of the previous game is not stored (if it has been deleted) such as the first game after resetting such as clearing the RAM ), the process proceeds to step Sc2903.

In step Sc2903, it is determined whether or not the credit value provided in the various counter areas 183b is 1 or more. The credit corresponds to a credit counter on the main controller 101 side. If the number of credits is 1 or more, a process for turning on the first credit lamp 56b is executed. By turning on the first credit lamp 56b, the player can clearly understand that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is accepted. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc2903, or after the processing of step Sc2904 is executed, it is determined in step Sc2905 whether or not an input BET command or a normal second operation command has been received as a current betting command. do. A case where an insertion BET command or a normal second operation command has been received means that one coin is inserted or one virtual medal is inserted in a replay state based on a normal replay result or in a state that is not in a replay state. means that a bet number operation has been performed, and in this case, a single bet effect setting process is executed in step Sc2906.

If neither the inserted BET command nor the normal second operation command has been received, it is determined in step Sc2907 whether or not the normal first operation command has been received. The case where the normal first operation command is received means that the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a replay state based on the normal replay result or in a state that is not in the replay state. In this case, a continuous bet effect setting process is executed in step Sc2908.

If the normal second operation command has not been received, or if any of steps Sc2902, Sc2906, and Sc2908 have been executed, it is determined in step Sc2909 whether or not an input increase command has been received. . If the input increase command has been received, it means that the credit counter has increased with the insertion of medals. In this case, in step Sc2910 control is performed so that the effect sound for credit increase is output from the speaker 64. .

After a negative determination is made in step Sc2909 or after the processing of step Sc2910 is executed, other bet-time effect setting processing is executed in step Sc2911, and then this bet-time effect setting processing is terminated. In step Sc2911, for example, the AT winning notification effect set in step Sc2202 is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 based on the current bet operation, or the bet operation is performed in a continuous effect. When the production develops based on the above, processing and the like for executing the production for such development are performed.

The single bet effect setting process and the consecutive bet effect setting process will be described below, and then the bet effect setting process for the replay state will be described.

<Single bet effect setting process>
The single bet effect setting process is a process executed when medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 or the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the single bet effect setting process, the bet display unit 34 side also executes a process of performing a bet effect in response to the bet being placed in the second operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. . Note that the bet effect matched to the bet of the second operation corresponding process on the main controller 101 side is also called a single bet effect.

In the single bet effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 233, first, in step Sc3001, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The turned-off flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that some kind of bet has already been made in the current game (including automatic insertion when setting the replay state). If the lights-out flag is not set, the process of setting the lights-out flag is executed in step Sc3002.

In the subsequent step Sc3003, a process of turning off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c is executed. Then, in step Sc3004, the first bet display section 34a is turned on. In this case, although the first bet display section 34a is turned off once, it is turned on immediately after that, and the player cannot or does not know that the first bet display section 34a has turned off. It is set to continue to the extent that it is difficult. It should be noted that the first bet display section 34a may be configured not to be turned off during the light-off processing of all the bet display sections 34a to 34c in step Sc3003.

After that, in step Sc3005, control is performed so that the bet effect sound is output from the speaker 64, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated. It should be noted that the sound effect for betting and the sound effect for increasing credits are preferably different sound effects to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. It is preferable to grasp the

If the light-off flag is set in step Sc3001, the process proceeds to step Sc3006. At step Sc3006, it is determined whether or not the third bet display section 34c has been in the lighting state before the current bet operation is performed. If the third bet display section 34c is in the lighting state, the process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step Sc3007. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink. After that, the process proceeds to step Sc3003, once all the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned off, and then the first bet display portion 34a is turned on (step Sc3004). As a result, the state in which three medals have been betted has changed to the state in which one medal has been betted, and further betting is required by operating the first credit insertion switch 56. can be grasped by the player. If the first credit lamp 56b is already lit in step Sc3007, that state is maintained.

If it is determined in step Sc3006 that the third bet display section 34c is not in the lighted state, in step Sc3008 a process is executed to turn on the bet display sections 34a to 34c corresponding to the current bet. After that, in step Sc3009, it is determined whether or not the third bet display unit 34c is lit, and if it is lit, the prescribed number of bets for the current game is set to 3 in step Sc3010. determine whether or not there is If the specific number is 3 and the bet is 3, no further bet is required. In step Sc3005, a bet effect sound output process is executed, and then the single bet effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the third bet display unit 34c does not turn on by the process of step Sc3008 (step Sc3009: NO), or when it turns on but the specific number of bets is 2 instead of 3, , the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit, and the bet effect sound output process is executed in step Sc3005, after which the single bet effect setting process is terminated.

<Consecutive bet effect setting process>
Next, the continuous bet effect setting process in step Sc2908 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The consecutive bet effect setting process is a process executed when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a state other than the replay state. In the consecutive bet effect setting process, the bet display unit 34 side also executes a process of performing a bet effect in response to the bet being placed in the first operation corresponding process on the main control device 101 side. . Note that the bet effect matched to the bet of the first operation corresponding process on the main controller 101 side is also called a continuous bet effect.

In step Sc3101, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set. If the lights-out flag is not set, the process of setting the lights-out flag is executed in step Sc3102. Then, in step Sc3103, a process of turning off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c is executed.

In the following step Sc3104, the processing for turning on the first bet display section 34a is executed, and in step Sc3105, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting effect sound.

In subsequent step Sc3106, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If the bet end command has not been received, the process advances to step Sc3107 and waits until the consecutive bet command is received. As already explained, the consecutive bet command is a command output when a next bet is made after making one bet when a plurality of bets are made based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. It is output about 0.1 sec after one bet is made. By receiving the consecutive bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3107, and the process proceeds to step Sc3108.

In step Sc3108, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in the following step Sc3109, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

Then, in step Sc3110, it is checked again whether or not a bet end command has been received, and if not received, in step Sc3111, it waits until a continuous bet command is received. By receiving the consecutive bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3111, and the process proceeds to step Sc3112. In step Sc3112, a process for turning on the third bet display section 34c is executed, and in step Sc3113, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

When the bet end command is received in step Sc3106 or step Sc3110, or after the process of step Sc3113 is executed, the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step Sc3114, and then the main bet is executed. End the effect setting process.

If it is determined in step Sc3101 that the light-out flag has been set, and if the number of bets operated by the first credit insertion switch 56 is performed after some bet has already been made, the process proceeds to step Sc3115, and each bet display section It is determined whether or not only the first bet display portion 34a among 34a to 34c is lit. The first bet display portion 34a is lit, the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are not lit, and one medal is betted. If a number operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step Sc3108, and processing is performed to turn on the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc3115 that other than the first bet display section 34a are in the lighting state, the process proceeds to step Sc3116, in which the first bet display section 34a and the second bet display section 34b are in the lighting state and the third bet display section 34b is in the lighting state. It is determined whether or not the bet display section 34c is in the off state. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3116, and a betting number operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56 with two medals bet, the process proceeds to step Sc3112, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on. process. If a negative determination is made in step Sc3116 and the betting operation is performed by the first credit input switch 56 with three medals bet, three medals are bet even though the specific number is two. In this case, the process advances to step Sc3103 to perform processing for turning on the first bet display section 34a and the second bet display section 34b.

<Bet effect setting processing for replay state>
Next, the replay state bet effect setting process in step Sc2902 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The re-game state bet effect setting process is a process executed when the game result of the previous game is a winning re-game result, and the effect differs depending on the type of the winning re-game result.

That is, in step Sc3201, it is determined whether or not a specific BET command has been received. If the specific BET command has not been received and the game result of the previous game was a win as a result of the normal replay, the normal replay bet effect setting process is executed in step Sc3202, and then the bet effect for the replay state is executed. End the setting process. On the other hand, if a specific BET command has been received and a specific replay result win has been established in the previous game, in step Sc3203 whether or not an AT win notification effect is set as the current betting effect. determine whether As already explained, the AT winning notification effect as the betting effect is the effect set in step Sc2202 in the last game stop effect setting process. When the AT winning notification effect is not set, in step Sc3204, after executing the specific re-game bet effect setting process, the re-game state bet effect setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the AT win notification effect is set as the current betting effect, then in step Sc3205, the bet corresponding effect setting process is executed, and then the replay state bet effect setting process is terminated.

<Normal replay bet effect setting process>
First, the normal regame bet effect setting process in step Sc3202 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the normal regame bet effect setting process, the same number of bets as the number of bets for all games are placed in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side, so that the bet display section 34 side also makes bets. Executes processing to render what has been done. Note that the bet effect matched to the bet in the replay setting process on the main control device 101 side is also referred to as a regame bet effect in the following description.

In step Sc3301, processing is executed to turn off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c. In the subsequent step Sc3302, a process of setting the lights-out flag is executed. Then, in step Sc3303, the first bet display section 34a is turned on, and in step Sc3304, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In subsequent step Sc3305, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received. Note that in this embodiment, a 1-bet game is not set, and the number of bets in the previous game is 2 or 3, so a negative determination is always made in step Sc3305.

In step Sc3306, it is determined whether or not a replay bet command has been received. As already explained, the regame bet command is a command that is output when making the next bet after making one bet in the regame setting process (FIG. 227). , is output after about 0.2 sec. By receiving the regame bet command, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3306, and the process proceeds to step Sc3307. In step Sc3307, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step Sc3308, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In subsequent step Sc3309, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received, and if not received, in step Sc3310 the process waits until a replay bet command is received. When the replay bet command is received, the third bet display section 34c is turned on in step Sc3311, and the speaker 64 is controlled to output a bet effect sound in step Sc3312. After that, the normal regame bet effect setting process is terminated. When it is determined in step Sc3305 or step Sc3309 that the bet end command has been received, the normal regame bet effect setting processing is terminated as it is.

<Specific replay bet effect setting process>
Next, the specific re-game bet effect setting process in step Sc3203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where no bets are actually placed (re-game state), a process is executed to produce an effect as if a bet had been placed. do. Note that the effect as if the bet has been placed is also referred to as a pseudo-bet effect in the following description.

First, in step Sc3401, it is determined whether or not a bet end command has been received. As described above, in the replay setting processing (FIG. 227) based on the winning of a specific replay result, even when a plurality of virtual medals are automatically inserted, the virtual medals are automatically inserted at once. Basically, a bet end command is output immediately after the winning of a specific re-game result is established. At step Sc3401, it waits until a bet end command is received. By receiving the bet end command, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3401 and the process proceeds to step Sc3402.

In step Sc3402, it is determined whether or not the lights-out flag is set. If the turned-off flag is set and the pseudo bet effect has already been performed, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is. In this case, the pseudo-bet effect after step Sc3403 is not performed. If it is determined in step Sc3402 that the lights-out flag has not been set, then in step Sc3403 processing is executed to turn on the first credit lamp 56b. That is, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted. Note that the first credit lamp 56b may be configured to blink.

In subsequent step Sc3404, it is determined whether or not any one of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received. Receiving any command, in a replay state based on winning of a specific replay result, operation of the number of bets such as inserting medals from the medal inserting slot 45 or operating the first credit inserting switch 56 or the second credit inserting switch 57 is performed, the process advances to step Sc3405 to execute processing for turning off the first credit lamp 56b.

At subsequent step Sc3406, processing for turning off all the bet display portions 34a to 34c is executed, and at step Sc3406, processing for setting a turned-off flag is executed. Then, in step Sc3408, the first bet display unit 34a is turned on, and in step Sc3409, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect.

In the following step Sc3410, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game, that is, the number of bets when winning a prize as a result of the replay was 1 or not. Note that the number of bets in the previous game is stored in step Sc2211 in the effect setting process at all stop (FIG. 222). It should be noted that the number of bets set in the replay setting process may be grasped based on the bet end command received in step Sc3401 as described above. Incidentally, since the 1-bet game is not executed in this embodiment, a negative determination is always made in step Sc3410.

If the number of bets in the previous game is not 1, the process advances to step Sc3411 to execute processing of inputting 67 to the bet timer provided in the various counter areas 183b. The bet timer is for prescribing the interval between one bet and the next bet when performing a pseudo-bet effect. The bet timer is decremented by 1 at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle), and the bet timer input in step Sc3411 becomes 0 after about 0.1 sec. That is, the interval between one bet and the next bet in the pseudo bet effect is longer than the interval between one bet and the next bet in the replay bet effect, and the interval between one bet and the next bet in the continuous bet effect. It is set to be the same length as the interval.

At step Sc3412, it is determined whether or not the bet timer input at step Sc3411 has become 0, that is, whether or not approximately 0.1 sec has elapsed since the first bet display section 34a was turned on. , the process advances to step Sc3413. In step Sc3413, the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step Sc3414, the speaker 64 is controlled to output a betting sound effect. Then, in step Sc3415, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2.

If the number of bets in the previous game was 3 instead of 2, a process of inputting 67 (approximately 0.1 sec) to the bet timer is executed in step Sc3416 until the bet timer reaches 0 in step Sc3417. stand by. When about 0.1 sec has passed since the second bet display portion 34b was turned on, the process proceeds to step Sc3418, and the process of turning on the third bet display portion 34c is executed, and in step Sc3419 bet sound effects are executed. After controlling to output from the speaker 64, this specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. If the determination in step Sc3410 or step Sc3415 is affirmative, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated without performing the subsequent processes.

In other words, the pseudo-bet effect based on the specific replay result win is basically the effect mode of the betting process effect up to the bet corresponding effect, and the effect mode of the betting process effect up to the bet corresponding effect in the continuous bet effect. are set to have the same effect mode. Specifically, in any case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the bet process effect is such that the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit at intervals of about 0.1 sec, and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit. The sound effect at the time of betting is also common. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results and missing results, and it is possible to give a sense of incongruity by configuring the specific combination with the replay result. It becomes possible to make it difficult.

In addition, the replay betting effect based on the normal replay result win is different from the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect based on the specific replay result winning effect and the continuous bet effect in the betting process effect up to the betting corresponding effect. It is set so as to have an effect mode different from the effect mode of the betting process effect. Specifically, in the betting process effect when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit at intervals of about 0.2 sec in the normal replay betting effect. On the other hand, in the pseudo bet effect and the continuous bet effect, the interval is about 0.1 sec as described above. From this point of view as well, it is easy to give the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results or losing results, rather than the normal replay result.

Furthermore, as already explained, when the AT mode is started, the second re-game result win or the third re-game win is established among the specific re-game results. In this case, when the second re-game result win or the third re-game result win is established and the AT mode is to be started, the bet operation is performed rather than performing the start operation without performing the bet operation. , it is possible to play the AT mode to be started with a new feeling. In other words, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet operation, it gives a strong impression that the result of the previous game has been inherited, so it is likely to be a mismatch with the intention to play the game with a new feeling. From this point of view, prompting the player to operate the number of bets at the start of the AT mode can help improve the interest of the AT mode. Further, for example, when an advantage (number of games, additional performance, etc.) in the AT mode to be started is notified at the start of the AT mode, it is better to notify along with the bet number operation rather than along with the start operation. It is possible to perform a start operation (a trigger operation for the lottery process) after knowing the degree of advantage. In this case, if a specific replay result win is established at the start of the AT mode and then the operation of the bet amount is prompted, the advantage of the AT mode is based on the operation of the bet amount at the start of the AT mode as described above. It is possible to easily add a configuration for notifying such as, etc., and this point also helps to improve interest. In this case, for example, the type of AT mode (first AT mode or second AT mode) may be notified based on the bet amount operation of the start game (the game after winning a specific replay result), or the initial number of games in AT mode. may be determined by lottery, and the initial number of games may be notified by the betting operation of the starting game.

If it is determined in step Sc3404 that none of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command have been received, the process proceeds to step Sc3420. In step Sc3420, it is determined whether or not the start operation command has been received and the start lever 41 has been operated. If the operation has not been performed, the process returns to step Sc3404.

That is, after the winning of the replay is established, the bet is set by the replay setting processing on the main control unit 101 side without the operation of the bet number operation of the first credit input switch 56 or the like. It is possible to start the game by operating the start lever 41 without operating the credit insertion switch 56 or the like. In the specific regame bet effect setting process, a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation. Instead of performing a special bet effect, a bet corresponding effect in which the number of bets for the game to be started this time is notified is performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step Sc3420 that the start operation command has been received, a process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step Sc3421. Then, in step Sc3422, it is determined whether or not it is in the wait period. At Sc3423, a process of switching all the bet display portions 34a to 34c to the extinguished state is executed. Then, in step Sc3424, a process of setting a light-off flag is executed, and in step Sc3425, a process of turning on the first bet display section 34a is executed. In subsequent step Sc3426, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 1, and if not 1, in step Sc3427, a process of turning on the second bet display section 34b is executed. Then, in step Sc3428, it is determined whether or not the number of bets in the previous game was 2, and if not 2, in step Sc3429, a process of turning on the third bet display section 34c is executed. , the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3426 or step Sc2428, this specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the re-gaming state is set based on the winning of the specific re-gaming result as described above, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, and a pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the bet amount operation. It is configured to give the impression that it is treated in the same way as other small combination results and outlier results. However, the fact that the replay state has been set based on the winning of a specific replay result can also be grasped from the stop result, the replay state display section 76a, etc., and the replay state has been set. It is conceivable that there may be requests such as not wanting to go out of the way to manipulate the number of bets in spite of having grasped the In this case, it is thought that forcing a bet operation will lead to a significant decrease in the player's willingness to play. By doing so, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of players.

Moreover, if a pseudo bet effect is performed in spite of the fact that the start operation is performed without going through the bet amount operation as described above, the player may feel uncomfortable. Performing an unnecessary pseudo-bet effect in spite of the fact that the player has chosen not to perform the number operation is highly likely to lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, it is considered that the number of bets on this game should be reported in order to ensure the transparency of the game.

Therefore, as described above, in the re-gaming state set based on the winning of the specific re-gaming result, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the betting process presentation is performed in the pseudo-bet presentation. Since the bet correspondence effect is performed without the bet, it is possible to clearly notify the number of bets for the current game while not giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, as described above, even when the start operation is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start to rotate unless the wait period has elapsed, and the wait period is reached. The start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is awaited until the period elapses. Also in the start effect setting process as described above, in the present embodiment, the start effect based on the start operation is put on standby until the wait period elapses. Then, when the start operation is performed during the wait period, the period until the wait period elapses becomes a waiting time, and there is a possibility that the waiting time reduces the attention to the game.

Therefore, in the specific re-game bet effect setting process, when it is determined in step Sc3422 that it is in the wait period, in step Sc3430 a pseudo bet permission flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the process proceeds to step Sc3406. A process for performing a betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed. In other words, during the wait period, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is performed, so that the above waiting time is compensated for by the effect. becomes possible.

Furthermore, in performing the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect during the wait period, after the first bet display section 34a is turned on, until the bet timer becomes 0 and affirmative determination is made in step Sc3412. (Step Sc3412: NO) At step Sc3431, it is determined whether the above pseudo-bet permission flag is set or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either is the case, the process proceeds to step Sc3432. In step Sc3432, it is determined whether or not the wait period has passed, and if it has not passed, the process returns to step Sc3412. It should be noted that even when the pseudo bet permission flag is not set in step Sc3431 and a new start operation command is not received, the process returns to step Sc3412.

On the other hand, if the pseudo bet permission flag is set or the start operation command is newly received, and if the wait period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step Sc3427, and the second bet display section 34b or the third bet display section 34c is executed. is turned on.

Further, after the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, the pseudo bet permission flag is set in step Sc3433 until the bet timer becomes 0 and the affirmative determination is made in step Sc3417 (step Sc3417: NO). or whether a new start operation command has been received, and if either, the flow advances to step Sc3434 to determine whether or not the wait period has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step Sc3433 or if the wait period has not elapsed in step Sc3434, the process returns to step Sc3412. Then, in step Sc3434, when the pseudo bet permission flag is set or when the start operation command is newly received, and the wait period has passed, the process proceeds to step Sc3429, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on. Execute the process to set the state.

In other words, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, or if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect will be interrupted with the lapse of the wait period, and the bet corresponding effect will be performed as it is. was made to take place. By doing so, even if the start operation without bet operation is performed or the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect can be performed while expecting the effect of the pseudo-bet effect. It is possible to eliminate the discomfort caused by doing.

<Setting processing for bet-compatible effects>
In step Sc3205, the processing for setting bet-corresponding effects is performed in the same manner as the processing in steps Sc3423 to Sc3429. That is, after all the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned off, the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to the bet number set in the replay state are turned on. In this case, even if the replay state is based on the winning of the specific replay result, the replay state is set without the bet amount operation, instead of performing the bet corresponding effect after the betting process effect is performed based on the bet amount operation. At this time, a bet corresponding production is executed. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid a phenomenon in which the AT winning notification effect executed based on the bet number operation overlaps with the betting process effect or the bet corresponding effect.

<BET display section and BET display section>
Next, the relationship between the bet display section 75 on the main control device 101 side, the bet display section 34 on the display control device 81 side, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the presence or absence of lighting is shown in FIGS. Description will be made with reference to a timing chart. In FIGS. 238 and 239, the explanation is based on the assumption that both games are progressing as 3-bet games and the credit counter is basically 3 or more.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating at t1 in a game with a small combination result, medals corresponding to the small combination result are paid out. When the payout of medals ends at t2, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is ready to be accepted. At this timing, the acceptable state display section 76c is also switched from the off state to the on state (not shown). When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t3, the BET display section 75 and the BET display section 34 are temporarily switched from the lit state to the extinguished state. Then, at t4, t5, and t6, the first BET display portion 75a and the first BET display portion 34a, the second BET display portion 75b and the second BET display portion 34b, the third BET display portion 75c and the third BET display portion 34c, respectively. are switched from the off state to the lit state, and a bet sound effect is output at the timing of switching to each lit state. The series of effects from t3 to t6 corresponds to the betting process effect in the normal bet effect. Equivalent to corresponding production. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal bet effect is approximately 0.1 sec as described above.

When the betting is completed at t6, the start possible state display portion 76b switches from the off state to the on state, and becomes ready to accept the start operation. After the wait period has elapsed at t7, when the start lever 41 is operated at t8 to perform a start operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. Note that the lottery process is being executed based on the start operation at t8, and the result of this lottery is a loss result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at t9, as described above, the result is a loss, and medals are not paid out. In this case, at t9, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the off state to the on state, and it is notified that the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 can be accepted. Incidentally, even if the winning of the small combination is not established when the small combination is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. Incidentally, when a freeze period for effect is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lighting state after the payout of medals is executed after the freeze period has elapsed. . Further, when no medals are paid out, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the lighting state after the freeze period has elapsed.

When the first credit input switch 56 is operated at t10, the BET display sections 75a to 75c and the BET display sections 34a to 34c are turned off, and then at t11 to t13, the BET display sections 75a to 75c and each A bet process effect is executed in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lighting state.

When the betting is completed at t13, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state, and when the start lever 41 is operated at t14, the lottery processing based on the start operation is executed, but the wait is still performed at t14. Since it is during the period, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating at t14. In this case, at t15 when the wait period elapses, rotation processing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the start operation at t14 is executed. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t14 is the normal replay result.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t15, and after the wait period has passed at t16, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop rotating at t17. In this case, the result of the lottery process performed at t14 as described above is the normal re-game result, and when the normal re-game win is established at t17, the re-game state display section 76a is displayed by the re-game setting process. The light-off state is switched to the light-on state, and the virtual tokens are automatically inserted. That is, at t17, the replay state display section 76a is turned on, and at t17, the BET display section 75 and the bet display section 34 are temporarily switched from the lighting state to the off state, and then at t18, t19, and t20. , the first bet display portion 75a and the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 75b and the second bet display portion 34b, the third bet display portion 75c and the third bet display portion 34c are switched from the off state to the on state in sequence. , a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each lighting state. Note that the series of effects from t17 to t20 correspond to the betting process effects in the replay betting effect, and the state in which the BET display portions 75a to 75c and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit at t20. This corresponds to a bet-compatible production. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the replay betting effect is about 0.2 sec as described above, which is longer than the interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal betting effect. Incidentally, when a freeze period for effect is provided after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops, the replay state display section 76a is turned on after the freeze period has elapsed, and virtual medals are automatically inserted. processing takes place.

When the betting by the replay setting process is completed at t20, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state. At this timing, the acceptable state display section 76c is also switched from the off state to the on state (not shown). When the start operation is performed at t21, the lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t21 is the normal replay result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t22, the lottery result of the current game is the normal replay result as described above, and the replay state display section 76a is displayed from t22 to t25 as in the case of t17. and a betting process effect in a replay bet effect in which the BET display portions 75a to 75c and the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially switched to the lighting state. In this case, although the wait period has not passed at t22, the normal bet effect is executed regardless of whether the wait period has passed or not, and the normal bet effect is performed in the same manner before and after the wait period has passed. Due to the configuration, the betting process effect from t17 to t20 and the betting process effect from t22 to t25 are executed in the same mode.

Then, when the betting is completed at t25, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state, and then the wait period elapses at t26. When the start operation is performed at t27, the lottery process is executed and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate. The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t27 is also the normal replay result.

At t28, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and at t28 to t31, lighting processing of the replay state display section 76a and betting process effects by the BET display sections 75a to 75c and the bet display sections 34a to 34c are performed. executed. Further, at t31, the start possible state display portion 76b is switched to the lighting state. Unlike the start operation at t27, the start operation at t32 is the start operation before the wait period elapses. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R do not start rotating at t32 when the start operation is performed, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t33 when the wait period elapses.

Next, the relationship between the operation of the BET display section 75, the BET display section 34, the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. and the presence/absence of lighting in the case of a specific re-game result will be described.

As shown in FIG. 239, in a game in which a specific replay result is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t42 after t41 when the wait period elapses. In this case, at t42, the replaying state display section 76a is turned on, and the BET display sections 75a to 75c are turned off. Lighting processing of each of the BET display portions 75a to 75c is performed so that the number of bets is obtained. That is, in the specific re-game result, an effect corresponding to the betting process effect by the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side is not executed, and a bet corresponding effect is performed. However, in the case of a specific regame result, the lighting processing of the BET display units 75a to 75c on the main control device 101 side and the pseudo bet effect by the bet display units 34a to 34c on the display control device 81 side are not interlocked, and at t43. Even if the BET display portions 75a to 75c are displayed corresponding to the bet number of the current game, the bet display portions 34a to 34c continue the bet corresponding effects corresponding to the previous bet number.

Further, at t43, the BET display portions 75a to 75c are turned on, and the first credit lamp 56b is also turned on, so that the operation of the first credit input switch 56 is prompted. Further, since the betting is completed at t43, the start possible state display portion 76b is also turned on. In this case, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t44, a pseudo-bet effect is performed by the bet display units 34a-34c at t44-t47. That is, at t44, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t45, t46, and t47, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. The display portions 34c are switched from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states. The series of effects from t44 to t47 corresponds to the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the state in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are lit at t47 corresponds to the bet correspondence effect. The interval between bets in the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is approximately 0.1 sec as described above, which is the same length as the interval between bets in the betting process effect in the normal bet effect. The length is set to be shorter than the interval between each bet in the betting process presentation.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t48, the lottery process is executed at t48 because the wait period has already passed, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. . The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t48 is also the specific re-game result.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t49, the lottery result of the current game is the specific replay result as described above, and the replay state display section 76a is displayed from t49 to t50 as in the case of t42. , a process of turning on the start possible state display section 76b and the first credit lamp 56b, and a process of temporarily turning off the respective BET display sections 75a to 75c and then switching them to a lighting state. Incidentally, the replay state display section 76a continues to be lit up at t50 because the previous game result was also a win as a result of the replay. Note that at t50, the light may be turned off once, and then immediately thereafter turned on again.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t52, which is after the wait period has passed at t51, a pseudo A betting performance is performed. That is, at t52, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t53, t54, and t55, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. The display portions 34c are switched from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states.

After that, when the start operation is performed at t56, since the wait period has already passed, the lottery process is executed at t56, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. . The result of the lottery process based on the start operation at t56 is also the specific re-game result.

As described above, in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 is a bet for effect, and the bet has already been made in the replay setting process. Completed. Therefore, it is also possible to perform the start operation without operating the first credit insertion switch 56 to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

That is, at t57, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and at t57 to t58, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on. A process of switching the display portions 75a to 75c to the lighted state after temporarily turning the light off state is performed. After the wait period has passed at t59, if the start operation is performed at t60 without operating the first credit input switch 56, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at t60. . In this case, after the bet display portions 34a to 34c are once turned off at t60, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on at t61. At t61, no bet effect sound is output. That is, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, if the start operation is performed without the bet number operation, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted and the bet corresponding effect is immediately executed. . By doing so, the player feels uncomfortable because the betting process effect is not completed (executed) even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate. can be prevented.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t60, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. After the wait period has passed at t62, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t63, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on at t63 to t64. A process for turning on the BET display portions 75a to 75c and a process for turning off the BET display portions 75a to 75c once and then switching to the lighted state are performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t65, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above. That is, at t65, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and thereafter, at t66, the first bet display portion 34a is switched to the lit state, and a bet effect sound is output.

At t67, before the period (approximately 0.1 sec) elapses from when the first bet display portion 34a is turned on to when the next second bet display portion 34b is turned on, the game starts. When the start operation is performed with the lever 41, the wait period has already passed and the bet on the main controller 101 side has been completed. rotation is started. In this case, the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect started at t66 is limited in the middle by the start operation at t67, and is switched to the bet corresponding effect at t67. By doing so, the player feels uncomfortable because the betting process effect is not completed (executed) even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate. can be prevented.

It is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t67, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t68, at t68 to t69, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on, and each BET display is performed. A process of switching the portions 75a to 75c to the lighting state after temporarily turning them off is performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t70, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because the wait period has not yet passed. That is, at t70, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the extinguished state, and then at t71, t72, and t74, the first bet display unit 34a, the second bet display unit 34b, and the third bet are sequentially displayed. The display portions 34c are switched from the off state to the on state, and a bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each of the on states.

Furthermore, even if the start operation is performed by the start lever 41 at t73 during the betting process rendering in the pseudo bet rendering, the betting process rendering is still in the waiting period at t73. is continued. Then, at t75 when the wait period elapses, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. Thus, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering of the pseudo-bet rendering, the betting process rendering is continued if it is during the waiting period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a period during which the performance is not performed even though there is a waiting period such as a wait period.

However, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect before the wait period elapses, even if the betting process effect is continued, the wait period elapses before the end of the betting process effect. In some cases. In this case, when the wait period has passed, the bet process effect is terminated and switched to the bet corresponding effect.

That is, it is assumed that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation at t75, and the lottery result based on the start operation is also the specific re-game result. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at t76, at t76 to t77, the replay state display section 76a, the start possible state display section 76b, and the first credit lamp 56b are turned on, and each BET display is performed. A process of switching the portions 75a to 75c to the lighting state after temporarily turning them off is performed.

After that, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at t78, the pseudo bet effect is started as described above because the wait period has not yet passed. That is, at t78, the bet display units 34a to 34c are switched from the lit state to the off state, and then at t79 and t81, the first bet display unit 34a and the second bet display unit 34b are turned on from the off state. A bet effect sound is output at the timing of switching to each lighting state. Further, even if the start operation is performed by the start lever 41 at t80 during the betting process rendering in the pseudo bet rendering, the betting process rendering is still in the waiting period at t80. is continued.

Then, after the second bet display section 34b is switched to the lighting state at t81, before the period (about 0.1 sec) elapses until the next third bet display section 34c is turned on. When the wait period elapses at t82, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating at t82. In this case, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect started at t78 is limited midway by the start operation at t81 and the elapse of the wait period at t82, and is switched to the bet corresponding effect at t82.

<Waiting state setting process>
Next, the standby state setting process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The standby state setting process is a process for setting the slot machine 10 to a standby state (demonstration state) when a game has not been played for a predetermined period of time. The process to be performed.

In step Sc3501, it is determined whether or not any game operation provided in the slot machine 10 has been performed based on the detection results of various sensors. Specifically, it corresponds to the operation of the operation units such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit input switch 56, the second credit input switch 57, the settlement switch 59, etc., which are connected to the main controller 101. In addition to detection by the detection sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 (detection of medals by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a), opening of the front door 12, etc. If so, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3501.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc3501 and no game operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step Sc3502 to determine whether or not any reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating. If any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, it is determined in step Sc3503 whether medals are being paid out. If no medals have been paid out, it is determined in step Sc3503 whether or not the replay state is set. As described above, the replay state is a state set by the replay setting processing based on any replay result win. If it is not in the replay state, the process advances to step Sc3504 to execute processing for setting a permission flag for permitting the counting of the waiting counter provided in the various counter areas 106e to the various flag storage area 106d. The standby counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the timing at which the standby state should be set.

If it is determined in step Sc3501 that any game operation has been performed, the process advances to step Sc3505 to execute processing for clearing the standby counter to the initial value (120800). After executing the process of step Sc3505, or when affirmative determination is made in any of steps Sc3502 to Sc3503, in step Sc3506, the process of clearing the permission flag is executed. In this case, in the timer subtraction process (step Sc108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 186), the wait counter is decremented by one on the condition that the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the standby counter is not performed. Since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 1.49 msec, it takes about 3 minutes for the standby counter to become 0 from the initial value.

After executing the process of step Sc3504 or step Sc3506, it is determined whether any game operation was performed in step Sc3507. Such processing is the same as the processing of step Sc3501. Then, if the determination is negative in step Sc3507 and it is determined that none of the game operations are performed, the standby counter becomes 0 in step Sc3508, and a predetermined period of time (about 3 minutes) until the standby state is established. determines whether or not has elapsed. If it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed, the standby state setting process is terminated.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has passed, the process of setting the present slot machine 10 to the standby state is executed in steps Sc3509 to Sc3514. That is, in step Sc3509, a process of setting the standby transition command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby shift command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the standby state is to be set.

In the subsequent step Sc3510, the front lights for illuminating the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from the outside, the backlight for illuminating the reels 32L, 32M and 32R from the inside, and the game panel 25 provided inside the game panel 25 The lighting/extinguishing state of the backlight is stored in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106, and the process of extinguishing these lights to put them in a standby state is executed. If the front light or backlight has already been turned off, that state is maintained.

In the following step Sc3511, the information displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is stored in the standby storage area 106c, and each segment of these display sections 60 to 62 is stored. is turned off and a process of waiting is executed. In step Sc3512, the information displayed on the instruction monitor 68 is stored in the standby storage area 106c of the RAM 106, and each segment of the instruction monitor 68 is turned off to put it in a standby state.

In the following step Sc3513, a process of storing the information displayed on the BET display unit 75 in the standby storage area 106c is executed, and each BET display unit 75a to 75c of the BET display unit 75 is turned off to enter the standby state. Execute the processing to be performed.

Then, in step Sc3514, when the start possible state display portion 76b of the game state display portion 76 is in a lighting state, the processing for storing the lighting information in the standby storage area 106c is executed, and then the start possible state display portion 76b is executed. After executing the processing for turning off the state display section 76b, the standby state setting processing is terminated.

In this way, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, no payout is performed, and the game is not replayed, the period during which no game operation is performed is longer than or equal to the predetermined period. Thus, the slot machine 10 is set to the standby state. In the standby state, the power consumption of the slot machine 10 can be reduced because various display units and the like are turned off. In this case, since the standby counter is not counted in the replay state as described above, the standby state is not entered even if the game operation or the like is not performed. In addition, even in the standby state, if the standby state is set in a state in which at least the bet operation is possible, the acceptable state display section 76c is maintained in the lighting state, so that the power supply is turned on even in the standby state. The player can clearly distinguish the state from the state in which the is not inserted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc3507 that any game operation has been performed, the process advances to step Sc3515 to determine whether or not the current state is set to the standby state. If the standby state is not set, the standby state setting process is terminated. If it is set to the standby state, in steps Sc3516 to Sc3521, return processing for returning from the standby state to the normal state is executed.

That is, in step Sc3516, a process of setting the return-to-standby command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The standby return command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the standby state is to return to the normal state.

In subsequent step Sc3517, various front light and backlight recovery processes are executed. In the return processing, the state of various front lights and backlights before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and processing is performed to return to that state (lighted state or extinguished state).

In the subsequent step Sc3518, the states of the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 before transition to the standby state are grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighting state or light-out state) is restored. process to cause Further, in step Sc3519, the state of the instruction monitor 68 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and processing is performed to return to that state (lighting state or extinguishing state).

In the following step Sc3520, the state of the BET display section 75 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and a process of returning to that state (lighting state or light-out state) is performed.

Then, in step Sc3521, the state before transition to the standby state of the start possible state display section 76b of the game state display section 76 is grasped from the standby storage area 106c, and the state (lighting state or light-out state) is restored. After performing the processing, the standby state setting processing ends.

<Standby processing>
Next, standby processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The standby process corresponds to the above-described standby state setting process on the main controller 101 side, and is a process executed as one of the other processes (step Sc2011) in the effect setting process (FIG. 220). It performs processing for shifting to the standby state, returning to the normal state, and processing for shifting to the temporary standby state before shifting to the standby state.

In step Sc3601, it is determined whether or not the above standby shift command has been received. If the standby transition command has been received, at step Sc3602 standby processing is executed to set the auxiliary display section 65 to the standby mode. Specifically, the content currently displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the brightness of the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65 is set to be lower than the normal brightness for the standby mode. is set to the brightness of , and characters such as "demonstration state" are displayed. In subsequent step Sc3603, processing is executed to set the output volume from the speaker 64 to a standby mode volume that is smaller than the normal volume (or is not output).

In subsequent step Sc3604, standby processing of the bet display unit 34 is executed. Specifically, the process of storing the contents currently displayed on the bet display section 34 in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183 and turning off the bet display sections 34a to 34c of the bet display section 34 is performed. Execute. In the following step Sc3605, standby processing for the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, the lighting/extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, this content is stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. When the first credit lamp 56b is already in the off state, the extinguished state is maintained only by storing the information.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc3601, it is determined in step Sc3606 whether or not the standby return command has been received. If the standby return command has been received, in step Sc3607 a return process is executed to return the auxiliary display section 65 in the standby mode to the normal state. Specifically, the contents displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 before transition to the standby state are grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and the contents are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. Execute processing to return the brightness of the screen to normal brightness. Also, in step Sc3608, a process of setting the output volume from the speaker 64 to the normal output volume is executed.

In the subsequent step Sc3609, a recovery process for the bet display section 34 is executed. Specifically, the display content of the bet display section 34 before transition to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and processing is executed so that the content is displayed on the bet display section 34 . Further, in step Sc3610, a process for resetting the first credit lamp 56b is executed. Specifically, whether or not the first credit lamp 56b was in the lighting state before shifting to the standby state is grasped from the standby storage area 183c, and if it was in the lighting state, the first credit lamp 56b is in the lighting state, If the light has been turned off before transitioning to the standby state, a process for maintaining that state is executed.

After executing the process of step Sc3605 or step Sc3610, or when a negative determination is made in step Sc3606, the process proceeds to step Sc3611. The processing of steps Sc3611 to Sc3622 is processing for a temporary standby state prior to the standby state.

Specifically, it is determined in step Sc3611 whether or not one game has ended. If medals are to be paid out at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the payout has been completed. If the game ends with an affirmative determination in step Sc3611, the process advances to step Sc3612 to set a permission flag for permitting the display continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 183b to count in the various flag storage areas 183a. to run. The display continuation counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing at which the temporary standby state should be set. Note that the display continuation counter has an initial value (15000), and it takes 30 seconds for the display continuation counter to become 0 after the processing of step Sc3612.

When it is determined in step Sc3611 that the game has not ended, or after executing the process of step Sc3612, the process proceeds to step Sc3613, and it is determined whether or not any game operation has been performed. In this case, a detection sensor corresponding to the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 41, the stop switches 42 to 44, the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion switch 57, the settlement switch 59, etc. connected to the main control unit 101 Commands output when detected by 41a, 42a to 44a, 56a, 57a, 59a, etc., insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 (detection of medals by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a), opening of the front door 12, etc. In addition to the case where the command output when is performed is received, also when the operation of the effect switch 66 connected to the display control device 81 is performed, affirmative determination is made in step Sc3613.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc3613 and no game operation has been performed, the process advances to step Sc3614 to determine whether or not the display continuation counter has reached zero. If the display continuation counter has not reached 0, the standby process is terminated. In this case, in other processing (step Sc2011) in the effect setting processing (FIG. 220), the display continuation counter is decremented by one on the condition that the permission flag is set, and the permission flag is set. If not, the process of subtracting the display continuation counter is not performed. Since the effect setting process is started at a cycle of 2 msec, it takes about 30 sec for the display continuation counter to become 0 from the initial value.

When the display continuation counter becomes 0 in step Sc3614 and the period until the temporary standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step Sc3615 whether or not the game is in the replay state. In the replay state, if no game operation is performed for 30 sec as the first transition period until transition to the temporary standby state after any replay result wins, in step Sc3616, the first After executing the temporary standby process for the credit lamp 56b, the main standby process is terminated. Regarding step Sc3616, specifically, the lighting/extinguishing state of the first credit lamp 56b is grasped, the content is stored in the standby storage area 183c, and the process of turning off the first credit lamp 56b is executed. . When the first credit lamp 56b is already in the off state, the extinguished state is maintained only by storing the information.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sc3515 that the game is not in the replay state, in step Sc3517, the bet display section 34 performs temporary standby processing, and then this standby processing ends. Regarding step Sc3517, specifically, the contents currently displayed on the bet display section 34 are stored in the standby storage area 183c of the RAM 183, and the bet display sections 34a to 34c of the bet display section 34 are turned off. Execute the process to be.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3614 and it is determined that any game operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step Sc3618. At step Sc3618, a process of clearing the display continuation counter to the initial value (15000) is executed. Then, in step Sc3619, the process of clearing the permission flag is executed, and the measurement of the display continuation counter ends.

In the following step Sc3620, it is determined whether or not the current temporary standby state is set, and if the temporary standby state is not set, the standby processing is terminated as it is. If it is in the temporary standby state, in steps Sc3621 and Sc3622, the bet display unit 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are restored, and then the standby processing is terminated. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps Sc3609 and Sc3610 described above.

That is, in the display control device 81, in addition to the normal state and the standby state, the temporary standby state is set as the state for effect. The standby state corresponds to the standby state managed by the main controller 101 side, and is shifted when about 3 minutes have elapsed since the game operation was stopped. The temporary standby state is a state managed by the display control device 81, and is entered when about 30 seconds have passed without any game operation after the game ends.

In this case, if no game operation is performed after the game ends, the game is shifted to a temporary standby state after about 30 seconds, and then shifted to a standby state after about 3 minutes. When shifting to the temporary standby state, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off if the game is in the replay state, and the bet display section 34 is turned off if the game is not in the replay state. When shifting to the standby state, not only the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b, but also the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are set to the standby mode. If some game operation is performed after the game is over, the standby state is entered about 3 minutes after the game operation is performed without going through the temporary standby state. That is, after about 3 minutes, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are also set to the standby mode. However, the standby state is not set in the replay state.

<Temporary standby state and standby state>
How the temporary standby state and the standby state are set after the game will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 242(a) shows the state after the result of the normal replay, FIG. 242(b) shows the state after the result of the small winning combination, and FIG. 242(c) shows the state after the result of the specific replay. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 242(a), when the lottery result of the game started at ta1 is the normal replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta2, the normal replay result wins. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 and the BET display unit 34 are once turned off at ta2, and then turned on again corresponding to the same bet number as the bet number at ta1. It should be noted that the betting process rendering is omitted in this figure. Also, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start (betting number operation) at ta1, and is maintained in the turned-off state in the replay state.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is not performed. Also, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

In the replay state based on the normal replay result, the bet display section 34 is turned on with the bet correspondence effect, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. Therefore, at ta3 when the first transition period (TA) from ta2 to the transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the bet display section 34 is kept lit and the first credit lamp 56b is kept turned off. be.

Even at ta4 when the second transition period (TB) from ta2 to the transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is not set because it is a replay state. Therefore, at ta4, the bet display section 34 is kept lit, and the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit. Further, the lighting state of the BET display portion 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display portion 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

As shown in FIG. 242(b), if the lottery result of the game started at ta11 is one of the small winning combination results, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at tb2, the small winning combination result wins. can be established. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta12.

As described above, when the temporary standby state is set in a state other than the replay state, the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is performed while the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is not performed. Also, except for the replay state, the game is set to the standby state.

If no game operation is performed until ta13, in which the first transition period (TA) from ta12 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the temporary standby state is set at ta13. In this case, although the first credit lamp 56b remains lit, the bet display section 34 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state.

If no game operation is performed from ta12 to ta14, at which the second transition period (TB) from ta12 to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at ta14. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off, the BET display section 75 is also turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode.

When the lottery result of the game started at ta15 is also one of the small combination results, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at ta16, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta16.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta17, which is the period from ta16 to ta18 where the first transition period (TA) from ta16 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the corresponding bet is is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In addition, although it is in the replay state, setting of the temporary standby state is not performed by the bet number operation of ta17, and even if it becomes ta18, the bet display unit 34 maintains the lighting state corresponding to the bet number operation of ta17. be. If no game operation is performed until ta19 when the second transition period (TB) from ta17 bet operation to transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is set at ta19. In this case, not only the first credit lamp 56b, which has already been turned off, but also the bet display section 34 and the bet display section 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), when the lottery result of the game started at ta21 is the specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at ta22, the specific replay result wins. It is set to the replay state based on. In this case, the BET display unit 75 is once turned off at ta22, and then turned on again corresponding to the same bet number as the bet number at ta21. As described above, at ta22, the pseudo bet effect of the bet display section 34 is not performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on.

As described above, in the replay state, when the temporary standby state is set, the temporary standby processing of the first credit lamp 56b is performed, but the temporary standby processing of the bet display section 34 is not performed. Also, in the replay state, the standby state is not set.

Therefore, at ta23 when the first transition period (TA) from ta22 to the transition to the temporary standby state elapses, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state, while the bet display section 34 remains lit. be. At ta24 when the second transition period (TB) from ta22 to the transition to the standby state elapses, the standby state is not set. Therefore, the lighting state of the bet display section 34 is maintained. Further, the lighting state of the BET display portion 75 is maintained, and the auxiliary display portion 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

When the lottery result of the game started at ta25 is also a specific replay result, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at ta22, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on at ta26.

When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at ta27, which is a period from ta26 to ta28 in which the first transition period (TA) from ta26 to transition to the temporary standby state elapses, a pseudo-bet effect is performed. is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even if ta28 is reached, the provisional standby state is not set by the bet operation of ta27, and the bet display section 34 maintains the bet correspondence effect of the pseudo bet effect corresponding to the bet amount operation of ta27.

Since the replay state does not shift to the standby state, no game operation is performed until ta29 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from ta27 bet operation to transition to the standby state. Even so, the lighting state of the BET display portion 34 is maintained at ta29, the lighting state of the BET display portion 75 is also maintained, and the auxiliary display portion 65 does not shift to the standby mode.

That is, in the specific replay result, the small combination result, and the loss result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. Although the bet effects (regular bet effect and pseudo bet effect) by the bet display unit 34 are the same in the case of the bet display unit 34, whether or not it is set to the temporary standby state or the standby state is different. If no game operation is performed over the first transition period, the temporary standby state is set, and the bet display section 34 is turned off although the first credit lamp 56b is kept lit. After the result of the specific replay, if no game operation is performed for the first transition period, the bet display unit 34 is set to the temporary standby state and the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. is maintained. In other words, by not performing the game operation over the first transition period, it is possible to determine whether the specific re-game result or the small win result or the like is obtained based on whether or not the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off. It is possible.

In this case, if the game operation is performed before the first transition period elapses, the first transition period elapses after the game operation, regardless of whether the specific re-game result or the small win result is reached. is not set to the temporary standby state, and it is possible to determine whether it was a specific replay result or a small combination result by whether or not the standby state is set when the second transition period has passed from the game operation. . In other words, in order to determine which result was obtained from whether or not the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off, it is necessary to suspend the game for at least the first transition period. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as determining the result by not performing the game operation immediately.

The embodiment described in detail above has the following excellent effects.

In the replay state set based on the winning of a specific replay result, when a bet amount operation such as operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 or insertion of medals from the medal insertion slot 45 is performed, A pseudo-bet effect is performed in which a bet-corresponding effect is performed after the bet process effect. By doing so, even in the replay state, the flow of the series of game operations of the slot machine 10, such as performing the start operation after the bet number operation and performing the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, is not changed. , can be played. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the results are treated in the same way as the results of small wins and the results of losing, and normal replays are performed through the betting process effect without going through the bet number operation, and then the bet corresponding effect is performed. From the difference from the result, it is possible to impart an expectation that some kind of privilege can be obtained even if the result is a replay. Therefore, it can be used to improve the interest of the game.

In the replay betting effect based on the win of the normal replay result, a betting process effect in which bets are placed at intervals of 0.2 sec is executed, and then switched to the bet corresponding effect. A betting process effect in which a bet is placed at intervals of 0.1 sec is executed, and then switched to a bet-corresponding effect. By doing so, the player is given an impression that the specific replay result and the normal replay result are clearly different from not only the mode of operation for progressing the game but also the mode of notification of the bet effect. becomes possible.

In the re-game state based on the specific re-game result win, the bet itself has already been completed in the re-game setting process, and the start possible state display section 76b is lit. Therefore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect based on the bet operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating even during the betting process effect. Therefore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo-betting effect after the betting operation is performed, the betting process effect is interrupted as a limiting process of the betting process effect, and the bet is handled at that point. I switched to directing. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to the fact that the bet correspondence effect is not performed although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate based on the start operation. It is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load and player confusion due to overlapping of the effect and processing at the start of rotation and the betting process effect and processing therefor.

However, even if the start operation is during the betting process presentation, if the start operation is during the waiting period, the betting process presentation is not interrupted and is executed as it is. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the betting process effect is interrupted even when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating.

If the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering and the betting process rendering is continued without interruption because the waiting period has not yet elapsed, and the waiting period has elapsed after the fact, the waiting period will continue. When , the betting process presentation is interrupted and switched to a betting corresponding presentation. By doing so, the betting process effect is not completed even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate. It becomes possible to

Furthermore, even in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet operation. performs a bet correspondence presentation based on the bet number operation without executing the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation. As a result, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load due to unnecessary effects, and even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate based on the start operation, the bet correspondence notification can be made. is not performed.

Here, the specific re-game result is defined as a re-game result other than the first re-game result. A game result that is duplicated with the second re-game result and the third re-game result as the specific re-game result is also set. In this case, in the above-described embodiment, which of the first re-game result and the second and third re-game results is established is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 (FIG. 208). In the normal mode, basically, the setting is made so that the first re-game result win as the normal re-game result is easily established, and when the AT mode is started, the second re-game result win or the second re-game result win as the specific re-game result is set. 3 It is set so that the replay result wins easily. In other words, it is set so that there are cases where the replay bet effect is performed and cases where the pseudo bet effect is performed depending on the situation when the normal replies A to C are won. In this way, even in the replay state, by clearly distinguishing between the scene where the bet operation is unnecessary and the scene where the bet operation is desired, the effect of intentionally making the bet operation in the replay state. can be suitably expected.

In particular, when the normal replays A to C are won, the second re-game result or the third re-game result as the specific re-game result is won and the pseudo-bet effect is performed, the AT mode is started. Therefore, when a new AT mode is started, by performing a series of game operations such as a bet number operation and then a start operation, a new feeling can be created without being influenced by the previous game. It is also possible to assist in switching to the AT mode, and to improve the interest of the AT mode.

Further, in the replay state based on the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on, and is turned off after the first transition period elapses. On the other hand, after the result of the small winning combination, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, but the lighting state is maintained even after the first transition period elapses. In this manner, the first credit lamp 56 is turned on, or a pseudo bet effect is performed based on the bet number operation, thereby giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as the result of the minor winning combination. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that if it is attempted to determine both results while giving, it is sufficient to wait until the first transition period elapses. In addition, the player who ends the game even though the specific re-game result win has been established can be notified by turning off the first credit lamp 56b. After the lapse of the first transition period, it becomes difficult for subsequent players to perceive that the specific re-game result win has been established, and it is possible to contribute to the fairness of the game.

Moreover, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state regardless of whether the result is a specific regame result or a small win result. Then, if both results are to be discriminated by the passage of the first transition period, it becomes necessary not to operate the first credit insertion switch 56, and in terms of game characteristics in which the result can be discerned by waiting, especially the first It is possible to provide a game that requires stricter waiting such that the one-credit input switch 56 must not be operated, and thus the interest in such a game can be favorably improved. In other words, even if any game operation is performed, the setting of the temporary standby state is not performed, but if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, not only the determination in the temporary standby state but also the determination in the standby state will be performed. be unable to do so. It should be noted that operating the first credit insertion switch 56 can be interpreted as an indication of intention to continue the game. It is considered unlikely to occur.

With respect to the bet display section 34, when the first transition period has passed, the lighted state is switched to the lighted state in the case of a specific re-game result, while the lighted state is maintained in the case of a small win result. After the result of the small winning combination, when the second transition period elapses, the standby state is set and the bet display part 34 is turned off, while in the replay state, the standby state is not set even after the second transition period elapses. . Therefore, although the bet display section 34 is turned off after the result of the small winning combination, the bet display section 34 is kept turned on when the game is ended while the specific re-game winning is established. . In this way, by confirming the bet display section 34, it is possible to clearly determine that the replay result has been won, so that the manager of the gaming hall closes the hall in that state. can be preferably avoided.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, regarding another aspect when the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the relationship between the lighting rendering in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit in the betting process rendering and the betting sound effect. 243 to 246, a modification of .

FIG. 243(a) shows the betting process rendering of the above embodiment.

When the number of bets is operated at tb1, a lighting effect is executed in which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are sequentially lit, and a betting process effect is executed in which a betting sound effect is output. When the betting process effect is completed at tb2, a bet corresponding effect is provided. After that, when a start operation is performed at tb3, a lottery process is performed and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. When the result of the lottery process is the specific re-game result, when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped at tb4 and the specific re-game result win is established, the bet is set by the re-game setting process. will be

At tb6, which is after tb5 when the wait period elapses, when the number of bets is operated by the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are accompanied by bet sound effects as in the case of tb1. is started. However, this betting process effect is a betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect.

When the start operation is performed at tb7, which is before tb8 when the betting process effect started at tb6 is completed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, and in this case, the betting process effect is started. , at tb7, it switches to a bet correspondence effect (the corresponding bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on). That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the start operation is performed in the middle of the betting process presentation in the pseudo betting presentation, both the lighting presentation and the sound effect presentation in the betting process presentation are interrupted in the middle and switched to the betting corresponding presentation. It is configured to be restricted by

FIG. 244 shows a modification of the specific regame bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, part of the bet process effect is performed. execution is restricted.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the process when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect is different from the process shown in FIG. In this modified example, the processes of steps Sc3714, Sc3720, Sc3735 and Sc3738 are added, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in FIG.

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3733 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step Sc3734. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step Sc3735, the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step Sc3712 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3712, and the second bet display section 34b is turned on in step Sc3713. Then, in step Sc3714, it is determined whether or not the above limit flag is set, and if it is not set, in step Sc3715, after executing the processing of outputting a betting sound effect, the first in step Sc3716 The process proceeds to the process of lighting the 3-bet display section 34c. On the other hand, if the restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sc3716 without outputting the bet sound effect.

Also, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3736 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step Sc3737. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step Sc3738, the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step Sc3718 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3718, and the third bet display section 34c is turned on in step Sc3719. Then, in step Sc3720, it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set, and if it is not set, in step Sc3721, a process of outputting a bet effect sound is executed, and then a specific regame bet is executed. End the effect setting process. On the other hand, when the restriction flag is set, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated without outputting the bet sound effect.

FIG. 243(b) shows how execution of a part of the betting process effects is restricted when a start operation is performed in the middle of the betting process effects in the above-described pseudo betting effects.

tb11 to tb16 are the same as the above tb1 to tb6, and bets are made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result, and after the wait period has passed, the bet operation is performed at tb16. do. In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb16. When the start operation is performed at tb17, which is before tb18 when the betting process effect is completed, the lighting effect of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is continuously performed, but the sound effect at the time of betting is output accordingly. is restricted. As a result, in the betting process effect started at tb16, the lighting effect is executed from tb16 to tb18, but the betting sound effect is executed from tb16 to tb17 and is not executed from tb17 to tb18. Then, at tb18, the effect is switched to bet correspondence. By doing so, it is possible to avoid overlapping with the processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at least for the processing for outputting the sound effect at the time of betting. It is also possible to eliminate duplication of the sound effect and the sound effect for starting when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

For example, in place of or in addition to the configuration in which the lighting control of each of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is individually performed like the bet display portion 34, a bet response effect on the display control device 81 side is provided in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display portion 65. A configuration is also conceivable. In such a configuration, it is conceivable to set a display effect pattern until the betting process effect is completed when the betting number operation is performed, when the betting process effect is started. Then, even if the number of bets is operated in the middle of the betting process effect, rather than switching the display effect pattern to the display effect pattern corresponding to the bet effect in the middle, it is better to continue as it is, which leads to a reduction in the processing load. it is conceivable that. Therefore, by restricting at least the betting sound effect production side in the middle, while avoiding an increase in the processing load, inconvenience due to duplication of sound effects when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate is eliminated. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

FIG. 245 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect of the pseudo bet effect, the betting sound effect of the betting process effect continues, but the continuation of the lighting effect is restricted.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, compared with the process of FIG. This is similar to the corresponding process in H.237.

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display portion 34b is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3834 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command is received, and the wait period elapses in step Sc3835. If it is determined that there is, in step Sc3836, after executing the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a, the process advances to the process of switching to the bet support effect in step Sc3829.

Further, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3837 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step Sc3838. If it is determined that there is, in step Sc3839, the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process proceeds to the process of switching to the bet correspondence effect in step Sc3831.

In the process of switching to the bet corresponding effect, after executing the process of turning on the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to the number of bets, in step Sc3832 it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set, and is set. If not, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. When the limit flag is set, after switching to the bet correspondence effect, the process returns to step Sc3812.

When the bet timer becomes 0 in step Sc3812, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3812, and it is determined whether or not the above limit flag is set in step Sc3813. If not set, in step Sc3814 the second bet display unit 34b is turned on, and in step Sc3815 the process of outputting a betting sound effect is executed, and then in step Sc3816 the third bet display unit 34c is turned on. Proceed to processing for turning on. When the limit flag is set in step Sc3813, the process of outputting the effect sound at the time of betting is executed without executing the process of turning on the second bet display section 34b, and then the third bet is executed. The process proceeds to the process of turning on the display section 34c.

Then, when the bet timer becomes 0 in step Sc3818, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3818, and it is determined whether or not the above limit flag is set in step Sc3819. If not set, in step Sc3820, the third bet display section 34c is turned on, and in step Sc3821, a process of outputting a betting effect sound is executed, and then the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. . When the limit flag is set in step Sc3819, the process of outputting the betting effect sound is executed without executing the process of turning on the third bet display section 34c, and then the specific re-game is executed. The bet effect setting process is ended.

FIG. 243(c) shows a state in which the betting sound effect in the betting process effect continues, but the continuation of the lighting effect is restricted.

Similarly to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result in tb21 to tb25, and after the wait period has elapsed, the bet operation is performed in tb26. . In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb26. When the start operation is performed at time tb27, which is before time tb28 when the betting process effect is completed, the betting sound effect is continuously output, but the lighting effect of the bet display portions 34a to 34c is interrupted. Then, at time tb27, the bet display portions 34a to 34c corresponding to bets are turned on. As a result, in the betting process presentation started at tb26, sound effects at the time of betting are output until tb28. It seems to be switching. In this way, even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate, the bet number of the game in which the reels have started to rotate cannot be grasped from the bet display unit 34. It is possible to

FIG. 246 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In this modification, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, execution of the betting process effect is restricted. However, the bet response presentation is started at the timing scheduled when the betting process presentation is started.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of steps Sc3913, Sc3919, Sc3935 and Sc3938 are added as compared with the process of FIG. 237, and the other processes correspond to those of FIG. This is the same as the process for

That is, in the state of waiting until the second bet display section 34b is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3933 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step Sc3934. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step Sc3935, the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step Sc3912 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3712, and it is determined whether or not the limit flag is set in step Sc3913. If it is not set, in step Sc3914, the second bet display section 34b is turned on, and in step Sc3915, the process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed. 2 is determined. On the other hand, if the restriction flag is set in step Sc3913, the process advances to step Sc3916 without performing steps Sc3914 and Sc3915.

If the number of previous bets is 3 instead of 2 in step Sc3916, processing for waiting until the third bet display section 34c is turned on is performed in step Sc3917.

Also, in the state of waiting until the third bet display portion 34c is turned on, it is determined in step Sc3936 that the pseudo bet permission flag or the start operation command has been received, and the wait period has passed in step Sc3937. If it is determined that the bet timer is set to 0, in step Sc3938, the process of setting the limit flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and then the process returns to step Sc3918 and waits until the bet timer reaches zero. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc3918, and it is determined whether or not the above limit flag is set in step Sc3919. If not set, in step Sc3920, the third bet display section 34c is turned on, and in step Sc3921, a process of outputting a betting sound effect is executed, and then a specific regame bet effect setting process is executed. finish.

In the case of affirmative determination in the process of determining whether or not the previous number of bets in step Sc3916 was 2, or when the limit flag is set in step Sc3919, the process proceeds to step Sc3929, and the process of switching to the bet corresponding effect is performed. Execute.

FIG. 243(d) shows a state in which the execution of the betting process effect is restricted, but the bet corresponding effect is started at the timing scheduled when the betting process effect is started.

Similarly to tb1 to tb6, it is assumed that a bet is made in the regame setting process associated with winning a specific regame result in tb31 to tb35, and after the wait period has passed, the bet operation is performed in tb36. . In this case, a bet process effect as a pseudo bet effect is started from tb36. For example, when the betting process effect is started, it is assumed that the betting process effect is set to be completed at tb38, and the bet corresponding effect is set to be started at tb38. Then, when the start operation is performed at tb37, which is before tb38, the output of the lighting effect and the betting sound effect is interrupted. However, at tb37, the lighting effect is maintained in the state of tb37 without switching to the bet corresponding effect. Then, at tb38, the effect is switched to bet correspondence. Specifically, for example, when the first bet display portion 34a is in a lighting state at tb37, but the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are in a non-lit state, tb37 to tb38 are the first bet display portions. The state in which only the display portion 34a is lit is maintained, and at tb38, the bet display portions 34a to 34c are switched to the lit state. By doing so, when restricting the betting process effect in the middle, there is no need to change the planned execution (start) timing up to the betting corresponding effect, and the process can be simplified. .

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the relationship between the pressing order notification effect, the specific combination notification effect, and the betting process effect set in the effect setting process at the start of the modified example when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect is described. , with reference to FIGS. As already explained, in the start effect setting process, when the start operation is performed, the pressing order notification effect is executed before the wait period elapses, whereas the special combination notification effect is executed after the wait period elapses. and is executed when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate.

FIG. 247(a) shows the betting process rendering of the above embodiment.

When the start operation is performed at tc1, a lottery process is performed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. When the result of the lottery process is the specific re-game result, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at tc2 and the specific re-game result winning is established, the bet is set by the re-game setting process. will be When the wait period after the start of rotation at tc1 elapses at tc6, the bet process presentation is started when the number of bets is operated at tc3 before the elapse of the wait period. Then, when the start operation is performed at tc4, which is before the wait period elapses and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc4 is displayed as the pressing order notification effect. If the result is neither a winning result nor a special combination result, the betting process effect is not interrupted at tc4 and continues as it is. Then, at tc5, the betting process presentation ends, and the presentation is switched to the betting corresponding presentation. After that, at tc6 when the wait period elapses, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate.

FIG. 248 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in this modification, presence/absence of restriction on the betting process effect is changed in relation to the pressing order notification effect.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the process of step Sc4022 is added as compared with the process of FIG. 237, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG.

That is, when the start operation command is received in step Sc4020, after turning off the first credit lamp 56b in step Sc4021, in step Sc4022, based on the received start operation command, the result of the current lottery process is a winning push order and a push order notification command has been received, and it is determined whether or not this corresponds to execution of any of the push order notification effects (see steps Sc2101 to Sc2107). If none of the pressing order notification effect is executed, it is determined whether or not the wait period is in progress in step Sc4023, and if it is in the wait period, processing of setting a pseudo bet permission flag in step Sc4031. is executed, the process proceeds to the process of executing the betting process effect on the side of step Sc4006. If it is determined in step Sc4023 that it is not during the wait period, the process proceeds to step Sc4024 to execute the bet correspondence effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc4022 to execute any of the pressing order notification effects, the bet corresponding effect in step Sc4024 is executed without determining whether or not it is in the wait period of step Sc4023. Proceed to processing.

FIG. 247(b) shows a case where the pressing order notification effect is performed in the modified example.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc11 to tc13, and bet operation is performed at tc13 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, if the start operation is performed at tc14, which is before the wait period has elapsed and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc14 is the result of the pressing order notification effect. If so, the pressing order notification effect is started from tc14. In this case, in this modification, even before the wait period has elapsed, the betting process effect scheduled to be executed until tc15 is restricted at tc14. By doing so, the betting process effect does not overlap with the pressing order notification effect, and inconvenience due to duplication of effects and processes can be prevented. In addition, in the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at tc14, the effect is switched to bet corresponding effect at tc14. The rotation start processing of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R based on the start operation at tc14 is performed at tc16 after the wait period has elapsed.

FIG. 247(c) shows a case where the special combination notification effect is performed in the modified example.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc21 to tc23, and bet operation is performed at tc23 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, if the start operation is performed at tc24, which is before the wait period has passed and the betting process effect is being executed, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc24 is the result of the special combination notification effect. In this case, the special combination notification effect is performed not at tc24, but at tc26 when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating after the wait period has passed. In this case, in this modified example, the betting process effect that was scheduled to be executed until tc25 is continued until tc25 without being restricted at tc24. In this way, even if the effect associated with the start operation, such as the specific win notification effect, does not overlap with the betting process effect, the betting process effect is not restricted, so that the non-execution period of the effect can be reduced unnecessarily. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

FIG. 249 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in this modification, the pressing order notification effect is restricted in relation to the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect.

In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modified example, the processes of step Sc4122 and step Sc4123 are added compared to the process of FIG. 237, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes of FIG. .

That is, when the start operation command is received at step Sc4120, after the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at step Sc4121, at step Sc4122, based on the received start operation command, as the effect at the start of this time It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the case of executing the pressing order notification effect for the third re-game (see step Sc2101 to step Sc2107). Even if none of the pressing order notification performances are executed or the pressing order reporting performance is executed, the pressing order reporting performances for the first to sixth small winnings and the pressing order reporting for the second replay. If it is an effect, it is determined in step Sc4124 whether or not it is in the wait period, and if it is in the wait period, the process of setting a pseudo bet permission flag is executed in step Sc4132, The process proceeds to the process of executing the betting process effect on the side of step Sc4106. If it is determined in step Sc4124 that it is not during the wait period, the process proceeds to step Sc4125 for executing the bet correspondence effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc4122 that the third replay pressing order notification effect is to be executed, then in step Sc4123 the process of setting a pressing order delay flag in the flag storage area 183a is executed. , the process advances to step Sc4123 to determine whether or not it is in the wait period.

In step Sc2104, step Sc2106, and step Sc2107 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 221), the push order delay flag is set in step Sc4201 as shown in the flowchart of FIG. determine whether or not there is When the push order delay flag is not set, in step Sc4202, the corresponding push order notification effect is executed. On the other hand, if the push order delay flag is set, it is determined whether or not the betting process effect has ended in step Sc4203. When the betting process effect ends, the push order delay flag is cleared in step Sc4204, and then the push order notification effect is executed in step Sc4202.

FIG. 247(d) shows how the press order notification effect is restricted.

Similarly to tc1 to tc3, bets are made in the replay setting process associated with winning of a specific regame result at tc31 to tc33, and a bet operation is performed at tc33 before the wait period elapses. A betting process presentation is started. Similarly, when the start operation is performed at tc34 during execution of the betting process effect before the wait period elapses, the result of the lottery process based on the start operation at tc34 is the push order for the third regame. If the notification effect is to be performed, in this modified example, the execution of the press order notification effect is restricted. That is, when the execution of the betting process effect and the predetermined pressing order notification effect overlap before the wait period elapses, the execution of the pressing order notification effect is restricted, and the betting process effect started from tc34 ends. From tc35, the pressing order notification effect is started. Note that tc35 is also before the wait period elapses. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate duplication between the betting process presentation and the predetermined pressing order notification presentation while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable that the betting process presentation is switched to the betting correspondence presentation in the middle. . In the figure, the rotation start processing of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the start operation at tc34 is performed at tc36 after the wait period has passed.

On the other hand, when the pressing order notification effect based on the start operation at tc34 is not the pressing order notification effect for the third replay, the pressing order notification effect is executed as it is at tc13. The betting process production side is restricted.

Here, the pressing order notification effect is to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. Then, the winning combination is set so that the winning result differs depending on the order of operation. Therefore, in order to encourage more careful operation, it is set to start the pressing order notification effect based on the start operation even before the wait period has elapsed. In particular, when winning by pressing the bell, the winning result differs depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the result. Therefore, among the pushing order notification effects, by restricting the betting process effect side for the pushing order notification effect when the pressing order bell wins, it is possible to suitably secure the profit of the player.

On the other hand, with respect to the normal replays A to C, although the winning re-game result differs depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44, the player's profit does not change regardless of which re-game result wins. Therefore, when the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect at the time of winning the normal reply A to C overlap, the pressing order notification effect side is limited, so that the player does not suffer a disadvantage. It is possible to eliminate the duplication of both productions.

In addition, when the pressing order notification effect for the second replay overlaps with the betting process effect among the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning the normal reply A to C, the betting process effect side is restricted, while the third When the pressing order notification effect for replaying overlaps with the betting process effect, the pressing order notification effect is restricted. The second re-game push order notification effect is executed at the start of the first AT mode, and the third re-game push order notification effect is executed at the start of the second AT mode. By restricting the notification effect, the player can perceive the start of the second AT mode before notification of the pressing order for the third re-game. By doing so, it is possible to create novel game characteristics such as knowing in advance the type of AT mode through restriction of the pressing order notification effect due to overlap with the betting process effect.

Although not shown in the drawings, even when the pressing order notification effect side is limited, the pressing order notification on the main control unit 101 side is started at the operation timing of the start lever 41 . By doing so, it is possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to perceive the order of operations more quickly.

It should be noted that when the pressing order notification effect for the third re-game overlaps with the betting process effect, the pressing order notification effect side is always restricted, but the pressing order notification effect is determined with a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. may be configured to limit the In addition, when the pressing order notification effect for the second re-game overlaps with the betting process effect, the betting process effect is always limited, but the pressing order reporting effect is selected at a predetermined probability through a lottery or the like. It is good also as a structure which restrict|limits. In these cases, any AT mode is started through the fact that the rate of limiting the second re-game pushing order notification effect side and the rate of limiting the pressing order reporting effect side for the third re-game are different. It is possible to predict whether or not, and by making the rate at which the pressing order notification effect side for the third re-game that starts the advantageous AT mode is restricted higher, the relationship with the betting process effect It is possible to create a new game property such as making the user desire that the pressing order notification effect side is restricted. Also, the above ratio may be determined by the selection rate determined by the AT type determination process, and by limiting the pressing order notification effect to the AT mode, which is easier to select, the betting process effect can be improved. The restricted scenes are reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to the restriction of the betting process presentation.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, FIG. 253 will be described. The reel effect is executed in the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 188), and is an effect executed in the rotation effect process (step Sc401) in the reel control process (FIG. 191). Here, as a reel effect, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the "red 7" pattern is displayed. A first freeze effect, such as aligning the reels in the middle row, and a second freeze effect, in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait for the start of rotation for a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec), will be described. That is, the first freeze effect is a reel effect using an operation mode that rotates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the second freeze effect is a reel effect that uses an operation mode that does not rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. be.

FIG. 251 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process, and in the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modification, steps Sc4322, Sc4333 and Sc4336 are different from the process of FIG. is added, and other processes are the same as the corresponding processes in FIG.

That is, in step Sc4320 it is determined that the start operation command has been received, and in step Sc4321 the first credit lamp 56b is extinguished. Execution of lottery processing It is determined whether or not a first freeze command indicating that the result of the lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze performance has been received. If the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sc4323 to determine whether or not it is in the wait period. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sc4324 to perform a bet corresponding effect without determining whether or not it is in the wait period of step Sc4323.

In addition, when the start operation command is received in the waiting state until the second bet display section 34b and the third bet display section 34c are turned on in the betting process rendering (when affirmative determination is made in step Sc4332 or step Sc4335). In step Sc4333 and step Sc4336, it is determined whether or not the first freeze command has been received as the received start operation command. When the first freeze effect is to be executed, the processing for switching to the bet corresponding effect is performed as it is without performing the determination processing (step Sc4334 and step Sc4337) as to whether it is during the wait period. On the other hand, if the first freeze command has not been received, the process proceeds to the process of determining whether or not it is during the wait period.

In FIG. 252(a), the bet number operation is performed at td1, the betting process effect is performed until td2, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the start operation performed at td3, This shows the case where the result of the lottery process based on the start operation is the specific replay result. At td4, a win as a result of a specific re-game is established, the re-game state is set, and after the wait period has passed at td5, the number of bets is operated at td6, and the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation is started. be. Then, it is assumed that a start operation is performed at td7, which is before td8 when the betting process effect is completed, and that the first freeze effect is performed in the lottery process based on the start operation.

In this case, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate from td7, the rotation based on the rotation start processing (step Sc402) in the reel control processing (FIG. 191) starts from td9 when the first freeze effect ends. be started. That is, normally, based on the start operation, the start drive control is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and reach a constant speed rotation, and then the stop switches 42 to 44 can be operated. Assuming such a configuration, when performing the reel effect, the specific drive control for the reel effect is performed before the start drive control. From td7 to td9, the first specific drive control is performed as the specific drive control for the first freeze effect involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the start drive control is performed from td9.

Then, the betting process presentation started from td6 does not overlap with the start driving control based on the start operation at td7. However, in this case, the first specific drive control in the first freeze effect is performed from td7, and the first specific drive control and the betting process effect overlap, so the betting process effect is interrupted at td7. and By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to duplication of the driving control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the betting process presentation. In the figure, when the betting process effect is interrupted at td7, the effect is switched to bet corresponding effect at td7.

FIG. 252(b) shows the case of the second freeze effect.

td11 to td16 are the same as td1 to td6, and based on the bet number operation of td16, the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is started. It is assumed that a start operation is performed at td17, which is before td18 when the betting process effect is completed, and that the second freeze effect is performed in the lottery process based on the start operation.

As described above, when the reel effect at the start of rotation is performed, the specific drive control for the reel effect is performed before the start drive control, but td17 to td19 are the specific drive control for the second freeze effect. The second specific drive control is performed, and the start drive control is performed from td19. Therefore, in this modification, the betting process effect started at td16 is not interrupted at td17, but is executed until td18 to switch to the bet corresponding effect. That is, from td17 to td18, the betting process effect overlaps with the second specific drive control for the second freeze effect. Since the second specific drive control is a drive control that does not involve the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, it is unlikely that the processing load will increase significantly even if it overlaps in this way. . Moreover, since the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have not actually started to rotate, the betting process presentation is interrupted in the middle even though the reels 32L, 32M and 32R have not started to rotate. It is also possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A modification of the freeze effect lottery will be described. FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing a modification of the freeze lottery process in the lottery process (FIG. 188).

In step Sc4401, a freeze execution lottery is performed. In the freeze lottery, for example, if the lottery result of this game is a result (specific role) that is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, the result that is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery (for example, normal replies A to C ), it is set to make it easier to win the freeze lottery. Also, the winning probability may differ depending on the type of freeze effect to be executed. Then, in step Sc4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to the execution of the first freeze effect. When executing the first freeze effect, the first freeze flag is set in step Sc4403, and the first freeze command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step Sc4404. Then, freeze lottery End the process. When the first freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control processing is controlled to perform the first freeze effect.

If a negative determination is made in step Sc4402, it is determined whether or not the result of the freeze execution lottery corresponds to execution of the second freeze effect in step Sc4405. When executing the second freeze effect, the second freeze flag is set in step Sc4406, and the second freeze command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step Sc4407. Then, freeze lottery End the process. When the second freeze flag is set, the rotation effect processing of the reel control processing is controlled to perform the second freeze effect.

When a negative determination is made in step Sc4405, in step Sc4408, the specific replay flag is set, and the current start operation is within a predetermined period (within 0.4 sec) after any bet number operation is performed. It is determined whether or not it was the operation of When the affirmative determination is made in step Sc4408, the process proceeds to step Sc4406 to perform processing for executing the second freeze effect. That is, when the specific re-gaming flag is set and the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the second freeze even if the result of the freeze execution lottery does not correspond to the execution of the second freeze effect A performance is performed.

FIG. 252(c) shows the case where the result of the freeze lottery is the result corresponding to the execution of the second freeze effect, and td21 to td26 are the same as the above td1 to td6, and the bet number operation of td26 , the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is started. When the start operation is performed at td28 after td27 when the betting process effect is completed and the second freeze effect is won, the second specific drive control of the second freeze effect is performed from td28 to td29, and then , the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate (start drive control is performed).

FIG. 252(d) is the case where the result of the freeze lottery is not the result corresponding to the execution of the second freeze effect, and at td37 before td38 when the betting process effect started at td36 is completed This indicates that a start operation was performed with Note that td31 to td36 are the same as the above td1 to td6. In this case, in this modification, even if the second freeze effect is not won, the second freeze effect is executed, and the betting process effect is not interrupted in the middle and is executed until td38. make it In this way, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the second freeze effect is deliberately executed, thereby reducing the event that the betting process effect is interrupted in the middle. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to being interrupted in the middle. The second freeze effect started at td37 is executed until td39, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating from td39 (start drive control is performed).

<Modification 4>
In this modification, in the replay state set based on the winning of a specific replay result, the mode of the pseudo-bet effect is varied according to the type of bet operation performed.

FIG. 254(a) shows a pseudo-bet effect according to the type of bet operation in the above embodiment.

In a game in which the specific number of coins is set to three, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated at te1, the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 34b, and the third bet display portion 34c are displayed in sequence. A bet process effect in the lit normal bet effect is executed, and at te2, the effect is switched to a bet corresponding effect. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b switches from the ON state to the OFF state at te1. When a start operation is performed at te3 and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, and the result of the lottery process based on the start operation is a specific replay result, each reel 32L at te4. , 32M and 32R are stopped and a win as a result of a specific re-game is established, a bet corresponding to the specific number of 3 is made in the re-game setting process.

At te5 in this replay state, when a betting operation is performed in which medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56, a specific insertion command is output from the main controller 101 as described above. A pseudo-bet effect is executed based on the specific input command. That is, a bet process effect is executed in which the first bet display portion 34a, the second bet display portion 34b, and the third bet display portion 34c are sequentially lit, and at te6, the bet corresponding effect is performed. At te5, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In other words, in the above-described embodiment, in the replay state based on the specific replay result win, not only when the bet operation is performed by the first credit insertion switch 56, but also when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45. Even when the bet number operation is performed, the betting process presentation corresponding to the same number of bets as the number of bets in the lottery resulting in the specific replay result is executed.

Note that te5 shows a case where a bet number operation is performed as medal insertion from the medal insertion slot 45, but similarly, the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated as a bet number operation corresponding to one bet. Even so, in the pseudo-bet effect based on the output of the specific second operation command, the bet is made so that the bet effect corresponding to 3 bets, which is the same number of bets as the number of bets in the lottery that resulted in the specific replay result. A process performance is performed.

By the way, even if medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 after the betting process effect is performed, the betting process effect is not executed, and the betting sound effect is not output, and only the credit counter is incremented. It is done, and the output of the credit increase sound effect is done. On the other hand, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated after the betting process effect is performed, no betting effect sound is output and the credit counter is not incremented.

FIG. 255 shows a modification of the specific re-game bet effect setting process. In the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this modification, steps Sc4505 and Sc4506 are performed in comparison with the process of FIG. Added.

That is, if it is determined in step Sc4504 that any one of the specific input command, the specific first operation command, and the specific second operation command has been received, the process advances to step Sc4505. In step Sc4505, it is determined whether or not the received command is a specific input command or a specific second operation command. If it is a specific first command, the process advances to step Sc4507 to execute a process for performing a betting process effect. On the other hand, if it is the specific throwing command or the specific second operation command, in step Sc4506, the single bet effect setting process is executed, and then the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. The single bet effect setting process in step Sc4506 is as shown in FIG. However, in the single bet effect setting process in this case, the process of setting the extinguished flag in step Sc3002 is not performed.

In FIG. 254(b), in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, a bet number operation corresponding to one bet operation such as inserting a medal from the second credit insertion switch 57 or the medal insertion slot 45 is performed. shows the case.

Similarly to te1 to te4, in the situation where the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result is set at te11 to te14, when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te15, the betting effect After a betting process effect in which the first bet display section 34a is turned on along with sound, a bet corresponding effect showing a state in which one bet is placed at te16 is performed. In addition, when the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te17, a bet process effect is performed in which the second bet display portion 34b is turned on along with a betting sound effect, and two bets are placed at te18. It will be a bet corresponding production that shows the state. Then, when one medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te19, a betting process effect is performed in which the third bet display section 34c is turned on with a betting sound effect, and three bets are betted at te20. It will be a bet corresponding production that shows the state that has been performed. In this case, the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b is maintained until te19. That is, in the pseudo-bet effect, an effect equivalent to the single-bet effect is performed, and by doing so, the pseudo-bet effect can be made to have the same mode as the effect at the time of the actual bet (single-bet effect). This can help give the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results and losing results.

FIG. 254(c) shows a case where the start operation is performed in the middle of the configuration in which the single bet effect is performed in the pseudo bet effect as shown in FIG. 254(b).

At te21 to te28, similarly to te11 to te18, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, a pseudo bet effect corresponding to one bet is executed at te25 to te28, and the first bet display section 34a and The second bet display portion 34b is in a lighting state, and a bet ready state corresponding to two bets being made is established. In this situation, when the start operation is performed at te29 and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted at te29, and the third bet display section 34c is lit. However, no bet sound effect is output. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in a state where a bet-corresponding effect corresponding to three bets is being performed. Also, in this case, the first credit lamp 56b is switched to the extinguished state at te29 where the start operation is performed.

FIG. 254(d) shows a bet corresponding effect corresponding to a single bet operation such as inserting a medal from the second credit inserting switch 57 or the medal inserting slot 45, even in the pseudo bet effect. It shows a limiting example. In addition, although a detailed description of the specific re-game bet effect setting process in this case will be omitted, in the above FIG. After turning off the first credit lamp 56b, outputting sound effects at the time of betting in step Sc3005 in the single bet effect setting process (FIG. 238) is executed, and then this specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated. make sure to

te31 to te34 are the same as te1 to te4, and are set to a replay state based on winning a specific replay result. When one medal is inserted from the medal slot 45 at te35, the execution of the betting process effect is restricted and switched to the bet corresponding effect. At te35, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off. In this case, even if the second credit insertion switch 57 is operated at te36 or medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 at te37, the betting process effect is not executed. However, sound effects are output at the time of betting in association with betting operations for each of te35, te36, and te37. In other words, the execution mode is limited so that only the sound effect at the time of betting in the betting process presentation is executed in each of the betting operations of te35, te36, and te37. In this way, by outputting the effect sound at the time of betting, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration, and the player can clearly understand that each betting operation has been accepted. . In this case as well, even if medals are inserted from the medal slot 45 at te38 after outputting the betting sound effect for three medals, the betting process production is not executed, and the betting sound effect is output. It is preferable that only incrementing of the credit counter is performed without Also in this case, the credit increase sound effect may be output when the credit counter is incremented.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the provisional standby state and the standby state are set even in the replay state. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing standby state setting processing in this modification.

The waiting state setting process in this modification differs from the process in FIG. 240 in that the waiting counter is allowed to count even in the replay state, and other processes are different from the corresponding processes in FIG. It is the same.

That is, if it is determined in step Sc4601 that no game operation has been performed, it is determined in step Sc4602 whether or not the reels are rotating, and in step Sc4603 it is determined whether or not medals are being paid out. do. If the reels are not rotating and the medals are not being paid out, a process of permitting the waiting counter to count is executed in step Sc4603. If the reels are rotating or the medals are being paid out, a process of disabling the counting of the standby counter is executed in step Sc4605.

FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing standby processing in this modification. In the standby process in this modification, compared with the process of FIG. is similar to the corresponding process in

That is, when the game ends in step Sc4713, it is determined in step Sc4714 whether or not a specific replay result win has been established. If the game result is other than the specific re-game result win, the process of starting measurement of the display continuation counter is executed in step Sc4715. In the case of the specific re-game result win, after executing the process of setting the specific re-game state flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step Sc4716, the process proceeds to the measurement start process of the display continuation counter in step Sc4715.

Further, when the display continuation counter reaches 30 seconds corresponding to the first transition period without performing any game operation at step Sc4717 (step Sc4718: YES), at step Sc4719, the specific re-gaming state flag is Determine whether it is set. If it is not set, the temporary standby state processing of steps Sc4720 and Sc4721 is executed. The processes of steps Sc4720 and Sc4721 are the same as the processes of steps Sc3616 and Sc3617, and are processes for turning off the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b.

On the other hand, if the first transition period has passed after the winning of the specific regame result (step Sc4719: YES), the process of turning off the bet display section 34 is executed in step Sc4722, and the first credit lamp 56b is executed in step Sc4723. blinks, and then the standby process is terminated. In other words, the provisional standby state after winning a specific re-game result differs from the provisional standby state after other results in the reporting mode of the first credit lamp 56b.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step Sc4701 that the second transition period to the standby state has elapsed, it is determined in step Sc4702 whether or not the specific replay state flag has been set. If not set, in steps Sc4703 to Sc4707, a process of setting the auxiliary display section 65, the speaker 64, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b to the standby mode is executed. The processing of steps Sc4703 to Sc4707 is the same as the processing of steps Sc3602 to Sc3605.

On the other hand, if the second transition period has passed after the specific re-game result win (step Sc4702: YES), in step Sc4704 the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to notify that the specific re-game result win has been established. Control is performed so as to display characters such as "A great chance is occurring!". After that, in steps Sc4705 to Sc4707, processing is executed to put the speaker 64, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b into the standby mode.

FIG. 258 is a timing chart showing the temporary standby state and the standby state in this modified example.

As shown in FIG. 258(a1), if the game started at tf1 is won as a normal replay result, and if the normal replay result wins at tf2, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf2. When it reaches tf3, it is set to the temporary standby state. In this case, the bet display section 34 is turned off. By the way, the first credit lamp 56b remains in the off state because it has already been won as a result of the normal replay. After that, at tf4 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf2, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display section 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 258(a2)).

As shown in FIG. 258(b1), if the game started at tf11 is a win as a result of a minor combination, and the game ends at tf12, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf12 to tf13. , is set to the temporary standby state. In this case, the bet display section 34 and the first credit lamp 56b are turned off. After that, at tf14 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf12, the standby state is set. In this case, the BET display section 75 is turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode (FIG. 258(b2)).

As shown in FIG. 258(c1), when the game started at tf21 is a win as a specific replay result, and a win as a specific replay result is established at tf22, the first transition period (TA) elapses from tf22. When tf23 is reached, the temporary standby state is set. In this case, the bet display section 34 is turned off, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on and off. After that, at tf24 when the second transition period (TB) elapses from tf22, the standby state is set. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b and the BET display section 75 are turned off, and the auxiliary display section 65 is also set to the standby mode. However, the display mode of the auxiliary display portion 65 is different from those in FIGS. 258(a2) and 258(b2) (FIG. 258(c2)).

As described above, the first credit lamps 56b are all turned on after the game in which the specific replay result wins or the game results in a minor winning combination is finished. However, in this modified example, when the first transition period has elapsed and the temporary standby state is entered, the light is turned off after the result of a small winning combination, but is flashed after the specific replay result is won. Therefore, before transitioning to the temporary standby state, it is not possible to distinguish between the specific re-game result and the minor combination result from the notification mode of the first credit lamp 56b, but after transitioning to the temporary standby state, it is possible to distinguish. It becomes possible.

On the other hand, regardless of the result, the bet display section 34 is turned off in the temporary standby state. Here, the bet display section 34 is provided on the game panel 25 facing forward of the slot machine 10 . On the other hand, the first credit lamp 56b is located below the game panel 25 and is built in the first credit insertion switch 56 projecting upward from the operation surface intersecting the game panel 25 (see FIG. 170). , see FIG. 171). In this case, when the slot machine 10 is viewed from a place away from the slot machine 10, such as from the edge of an island on which a plurality of game tables are arranged, it is possible to confirm whether or not the bet display section 34 is lit. However, the presence or absence of lighting of the first credit lamp 56b cannot be confirmed or is more difficult to confirm than the bet display section 34.例文帳に追加Therefore, in order to confirm whether or not the first credit lamp 56b is lit (blinking) as described above, it may be necessary to come near the slot machine 10 to confirm. Thus, by making it difficult to check the state of the slot machine 10 at a glance, even if it is not in the desired state, it is possible to motivate the player to try playing a game because the player has come close. It is possible to improve the operating rate of the slot machine 10.

Further, when shifting to the standby state, the first credit lamp 56b and the bet display section 34 are turned off after any result, but the display mode of the auxiliary display section 65 is different only after winning a specific re-game result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the slot machine 10 from being left unattended in a situation where there is a high possibility that the specific replay result win has been established and that the player has won a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or the like. becomes possible.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, notification when the credit is settled by operating the settlement switch 59 will be described. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing medal return processing in this modified example. The medal return process is a process executed at step Sc206 in the normal process (FIG. 187).

At step Sc4801, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Sc4802. At step Sc4802, it is determined whether or not the specific re-game flag has been set in the immediately preceding BET processing, and whether or not the re-game state is based on the specific re-game result win. If the specific replay flag is not set, a process of setting a settlement command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc4803.

In the following step Sc4804, it is determined whether or not any of the replay flags are set, and if none of the replay flags are set and the replay state is not set, then in step Sc4805 the BET counter and the credit counter The hopper device 51 is controlled so that the number of medals corresponding to the total number of . After that, in step Sc4806, the processing of clearing the BET counter and the credit counter to 0 is executed, and then the medal return processing ends.

If any replay flag is set in step Sc4804 and the game is in the replay state, the hopper device 51 is controlled in step Sc4807 so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter is paid out. After that, the process of clearing the credit counter to 0 is executed in step Sc4808, and then the medal return process is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, it is possible to settle credits even in the replay state. Medals are paid out except for the virtual medals that have been bet. Therefore, in the replay state, credits can be settled by operating the settlement switch 59, but even after the settlement, at least one game can be played without requiring new medals. be done. Such a configuration solves the problem that the game cannot be ended in succession when the game is closed, such as when the game hall is closed. By doing so, it is possible to end the game even if the right to play one game is abandoned, and the player's diversified Needs can be met.

However, of the replay states, in the replay state based on winning a specific replay result, there is a high possibility of not only being able to play one game, but also AT mode winning, etc. based on winning a specific role as described above. , there is a high possibility that the game will be terminated as it is, leading to a large loss for the player. Therefore, when it is determined that the specific re-game flag is set in step Sc4802, in step Sc4809, it is determined whether or not the third transition period has passed since the specific re-game flag is set, for example, by specifying A timer counter or the like that starts counting after setting a replay flag is used for determination. In this modification, 20 sec is set as the third transition period, and the 20 sec is shorter than the second transition period set to the standby state and shorter than the first transition period set to the temporary standby state. have set. If the third transition period has not passed, the medal return processing is terminated as it is.

That is, in this modification, the credits cannot be settled even if the settlement switch 59 is operated until the third transition period elapses after entering the re-game state based on the winning of the specific re-game result.

When the third transition period has elapsed in step Sc4809, the process of adding 1 to the settlement operation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sc4810, and the settlement operation counter reaches a specific number in step Sc4811. 2 is determined. If it has not reached 2, that is, if it is the first settlement operation even after the third transition period has elapsed, the medal return processing is terminated as it is.

In other words, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, credit settlement may be restricted even if the settlement switch 59 is operated. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress the abandonment of the AT mode winning or the like based on the specific replay result winning.

When the settlement operation counter reaches a specific number in step Sc4811, after clearing the settlement operation counter in step Sc4812, a process of setting a specific settlement command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sc4813. . After that, in steps Sc4804 to Sc4808, credit settlement processing is performed. In other words, in the replay state based on the winning of a specific replay result, credits can be settled by performing a specific number of settlement operations.

The effect processing at the time of return on the display control device 81 side will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect processing at the time of return is processing executed as one processing of other processing (step Sc2011) in the effect setting processing (FIG. 220).

In step Sc4901, it is determined whether or not any one of the settlement command and the specific settlement command has been received. If any command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sc4902.

At step Sc4902, subtraction of the return period counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is started. The return period counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the duration of the sound effect at the time of payment (sound effect at the time of return), and the initial value is set to 5000. FIG. The return period counter is decremented by 1 every 2 sec, and becomes 0 after 10 sec.

In subsequent step Sc4903, it is determined whether or not a specific settlement command has been received, and if it is not a specific settlement command but a settlement command, in step Sc4904 the speaker 64 is controlled to output a return sound effect. Then, in step Sc4905, it is determined whether or not the return period counter has become 0, and the process waits until it becomes 0. When it becomes 0, in step Sc4906, the output of the sound effect at the time of return is stopped, and then the effect processing at the time of return is ended. As the return sound effect, for example, an announcement such as "Ping-pong payment has been made" is set to be repeated over a predetermined period. It is preferable that the sound effect at the time of return is played at a high volume (maximum volume). It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to distinguish them.

If a specific settlement command is received in step Sc4903, the process proceeds to step Sc4907. The processing of step Sc49047 step Sc4921 is the same as the processing of step Sc3405 to step Sc3419 in the specific re-game bet effect setting process (FIG. 237). That is, by the processing of steps Sc4907 to Sc4921, the bet process effect in the pseudo bet effect is executed.

Then, after the betting process effect is completed in step Sc4921 and switched to the bet corresponding effect in the replay state based on the winning of the specific regame result, in step Sc4904, the effect sound at the time of return is output. After the process is executed, the return effect process is terminated.

The manner in which credit settlement is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart in FIG.

FIG. 261(a) shows how settlement is carried out after the result of a small winning combination or the like.

That is, after the betting operation is performed at tg1 and the betting process effect is completed at tg2, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at tg3 and stop at tg4, and the lottery process at tg2. result is a small winning combination. In this case, when the settlement switch 59 is operated at tg5, medals are paid out until tg6. Here, since the credit counter becomes 0 due to settlement as described above, the first credit lamp 56 is also turned off at tg5. In addition, the predetermined period during which the return sound effect is executed is set as a period longer than the total number (53) of the maximum number of credit counters and the maximum number of bet counters is paid out, The returning sound effect continues until tg7, which is later than tg6 when the return of the medals is completed. Incidentally, in this modified example, the length of the return sound effect is set as a uniform predetermined period (TC, 10 sec) regardless of the number of medals returned. It is possible to plan

FIG. 261(b) shows how settlement is carried out after winning a specific re-game result.

In other words, the game is completed at tg11 to tg14 in the same manner as at tg1 to tg4, and at tg14, the replay setting processing based on the winning of the specific replay result is performed. Even if the settlement switch 59 is operated at t15 after the third transition period has passed, the settlement operation counter is 1, so the settlement is not performed. At tg16, the settlement switch 59 is operated again, so that the settlement operation counter becomes 2 and settlement is started. However, at tg16, the return sound effect does not start to be output. Instead, from tg16 to tg17, a betting process effect is performed, and at tg17, the effect is switched to a bet correspondence effect. When the betting process presentation is completed at tg17, the output of the settlement sound effect is started from tg17, and the output of the settlement sound effect continues until tg19. The return of medals is completed at tg18.

Here, in this modified example, the length of the settlement sound effect when the specific settlement command is received is the length obtained by subtracting the length of the betting process presentation from the predetermined period. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience and discomfort of the payment sound effect based on the specific payment command from continuing for an unnecessarily long time after the completion of returning the medals.

After tg19 when the output of the effect sound at the time of settlement is completed, if the start operation is performed at tg20 without going through the betting operation, the bet is made in the replay state as described above. It is possible to start a game corresponding to

As described above, in the re-game state based on the specific re-game result win, the settlement may be restricted even if the settlement switch 59 is operated, so that the player does not notice the specific re-game win. It is possible to suitably suppress the game from being ended prematurely.

In addition, even in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the settlement can be made by operating the settlement switch 59 for a specific number, and the needs of the player who wants to end the game even though he or she is aware of it are made possible. be able to respond.

However, it is conceivable that some players, in their haste to finish the game, try to make a payment by pressing the payment switch 59 repeatedly without noticing the winning of the specific re-game result. Therefore, as described above, even though settlement can be made by operating the settlement switch 59, in such a case, a pseudo-bet effect is performed, so that it is possible to notice the specific re-game result winning as described above. It can be expected that even the player who has made the payment without paying will notice, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

Moreover, the pseudo bet effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59 is set so as not to overlap with the effect sound at the time of settlement. As a result, it becomes easier to notice that the pseudo-bet effect is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the effect of making it difficult to give up the benefit of winning the specific re-game result.

The configuration for preventing the overlapping of the sound effect at the time of settlement and the pseudo-bet presentation as described above may be changed as follows.

FIG. 261(c) shows how, in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, when the settlement is performed, the effect sound at the time of settlement is output first, and the pseudo-bet effect is executed later. .

That is, in the same manner as tg11 to tg14, the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result is set in tg21 to tg24, and the settlement switch 59 is operated in tg25 and tg26, thereby credit settlement is performed. . In this case, the return of the medal is executed from tg26, and the return sound effect starts to be output from tg26. Then, when the return of medals is completed at tg27, the pseudo-bet effect is started from tg27. The pseudo bet effect is executed until tg29. In other words, the period from tg26 to tg28 is the output period of the return sound effect, and from tg27 to tg28, the betting process presentation side is given priority, and the output of the return sound effect is restricted.

In this case, when the settlement is started, the output of the return sound effect is started, but the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at tg27 when the pseudo-bet effect is started, so the settlement is started. In spite of this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the winning of the specific regame result through the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b.

As described above, even if settlement is made in the replay state based on the winning of the specific replay result, the game can be played without requiring a new bet because it is in the replay state. In FIG. 261(d), the timing at which the game is started after settlement is made is different from that in FIG. 261(b).

That is, tg31 to tg38 are the same as tg11 to tg18 above, and indicate that the return of medals started from tg36 is completed at tg38. In addition, a pseudo-bet effect is performed from tg36, and an effect sound at the time of return is output from tg37. Under such circumstances, if the start operation is performed at time tg39, which is before time tg40 when the return sound effect is scheduled to end, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at time tg39. . Therefore, in such a scene, it is preferable to end the return sound effect at tg39. By doing so, it is possible to avoid duplication of the presentation and processing at the time of rotation start and the effect sound at the time of return and processing therefor.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the aspect of the pseudo-bet effect is changed. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the specific replay bet effect setting process in this modified example.

In the specific replay betting effect setting process in this modified example, compared with the process of FIG. 237 is the same as the corresponding processing in FIG.

That is, in this modification, in the process of setting the betting interval of the betting process effect based on the betting operation (steps Sc5011 and Sc5016), the interval of approximately 0.1 sec, which is longer than the interval of the above embodiment (approximately 0.1 sec), is set. Set 2 sec. That is, the interval between bets in the betting process effect of the pseudo-bet effect in this modified example is the same as the interval between bets in the betting process effect of the replay betting effect that is normally executed based on the winning result of the replay. There is, and the betting process effect of the pseudo bet effect is in common with the betting process effect of the replay betting effect.

Further, in this modification, when it is determined that the start operation command has been received in step Sc5020, the first credit lamp 56b and all bet display units 34a to 34c are extinguished (steps Sc5021, step Sc5023). After executing the process of turning on the first bet display section 34a in step Sc5025, in this modification, the process of outputting a bet sound effect is executed in step Sc5026.

Then, in step Sc5027, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 1, and if it is not 1, the process proceeds to step Sc5028, and 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec is input to the bet timer. , waits until the bet timer becomes 0 in step Sc5029. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc5029, a process for turning on the second bet display section 34b is executed in step Sc5030, and a bet sound effect is output in step Sc5031. Execute the process.

In the following step Sc5032, it is determined whether or not the previous bet number was 2, and if not 2, the process proceeds to step Sc5033, and 67 corresponding to about 0.1 sec is input to the bet timer, It waits until the bet timer reaches 0 in step Sc5034. When the bet timer reaches 0, an affirmative determination is made in step Sc5034, a process for turning on the third bet display section 34c is executed in step Sc5035, and a bet sound effect is output in step Sc5036. After executing the process, the specific regame bet effect setting process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sc5027 or step Sc5032, the specific re-game bet effect setting process is terminated.

That is, in this modification, when any bet number operation is performed in the re-gaming state based on the winning of the specific re-game result, a betting process effect in which the notification mode is the same as the betting process effect in the re-game betting effect After executing , switch to bet support production. On the other hand, in the replay state, if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, after executing the betting process effect that has the same notification mode as the betting process effect in the continuous bet effect, the effect is switched to the bet corresponding effect. . As described above, the betting process effect in the repeated bet effect is set to take a shorter period of time than the betting process effect in the regame betting effect. Therefore, by doing as described above, in the re-gaming state based on the win of the specific re-game result, when the start operation is performed without going through the bet operation, the pseudo-bet effect based on the bet operation is reduced. It is possible to end the betting process presentation early and switch to the betting-corresponding presentation, and reduce overlap between the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the betting process presentation.

Further, as already explained, in the specific re-game bet effect setting process, even if the start operation is performed without going through the bet number operation, if the wait period has not elapsed (step Sc5022: YES), An effect similar to the pseudo-bet effect based on the bet operation is performed. In other words, in this modified example, when the start operation is performed without the operation of the number of bets, the notification mode of the betting process effect is different before and after the wait period has elapsed. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the bet effect well according to the progress of the game, such as whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating.

In this case, as in the above modified example, any of the notification modes can be switched to the bet response presentation via the betting process presentation, thereby making it possible to minimize the difference between the two notification modes, thereby improving the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity while matching the bet effect to the game.

Moreover, all of the notification modes are notification modes used for other bet effects, and the notification mode before the wait period has passed is common to the notification mode in the replay betting effect, and the notification mode after the wait period has passed. The mode is common to the notification mode in the continuous bet effect. By doing so, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated notification mode in order to change the notification mode of the bet effect according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In particular, since the two notification modes differ only in the intervals at which the bet display portions 34a to 34c are turned on, it is possible to change the notification modes of the bet effects simply by adjusting the intervals. Therefore, it is possible to match the bet effect with the progress of the game with an extremely simple configuration.

In addition, since it only adjusts the interval between bets, if the wait period has passed during the betting process effect, switching to the bet effect on the side where the wait period has passed will only cause a shift in the interval. While completing the betting process presentation early, it is possible to expect the effect of reducing the sense of discomfort given to the player.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The description has been made on the premise that the replay setting process is executed as one of the BET processes at the start of the game. It may be configured to perform processing. More specifically, in the payout determination process (step Sc413) in the reel control process (FIG. 191), when winning is established as a result of the replay, the replay setting process may be executed. Further, the replay setting process may be executed in the medal payout process (step Sc214) in the normal process (FIG. 187).

(2) When a win is established as a result of a normal re-game, the BET display portions 75 are sequentially lit up, and when a win is established as a result of a specific re-game, the BET display portions 75 are simultaneously lit. Although it is configured to be in the state, such a configuration may be changed. In other words, even when a specific re-game result win is established, the BET display section 75 may be sequentially turned on. In this case, the intervals at which the BET display portions 75a to 75c are lit may be the same or substantially the same intervals for the normal re-game result and the specific re-game result, or may be different intervals. However, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect based on the winning of the specific re-game result, in order not to cause a scene in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not start rotating, the specific The interval at which the BET display units 75a to 75c are turned on based on the winning result of the replay is preferably shorter than in the case of the normal replay result. The length may be the same as or substantially the same as the interval of lighting, or the interval may be shorter than the interval of lighting the BET display portions 75a to 75c in the first operation corresponding process.

(3) A re-game other than the first re-game is regarded as a specific re-game result, and when the specific re-game result wins, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on, and a pseudo bet effect is produced based on the operation of the first credit input switch 56 or the like. However, the first credit lamp 56b may similarly be turned on or a pseudo-bet effect may be performed even after other results. For example, even after winning a prize as a result of the normal replay as the first replay, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on (blinks), and the first credit insertion switch 56, etc. A pseudo bet effect may be performed based on the operation of . In addition, even if the result is a predetermined small winning combination or a missing result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on if a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a pseudo-bet effect is performed based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 or the like. may be The predetermined condition may be, for example, a case where some kind of game state transition occurs, or a case where a predetermined effect is set as a bet time effect or a start time effect. When the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or a pseudo-bet effect is performed as a result of the normal replay, it is preferable to complete the automatic insertion of virtual tokens early as in the case of the specific replay result. Specifically, even if the normal replay result is obtained, the automatic input processing may be performed in the processing of steps Sc2414 to Sc2416.

(4) In the pseudo bet effect, if the wait period has not passed, even if the start operation is performed during the bet process effect, the change to the bet corresponding effect is not performed. That is, regardless of whether or not the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on the start operation, the bet correspondence effect may be switched to based on the start operation during the bet process effect.

(5) In the pseudo-betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the aspect of limiting the betting process effect is not limited to the above. For example, the betting process effect may be interrupted based on the start operation, and the betting process effect may be resumed after the start effect or the like based on the start operation is completed. In this case, the betting process effect may be restarted from the interrupted point, or the betting process effect may be restarted from the beginning. Furthermore, when the start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the output volume of the betting sound effect may be lowered, or the brightness of the lighting rendering may be lowered.

(6) In the pseudo betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, whether or not to limit the betting process effect is determined based on the already executed betting process effect and the remaining betting process effects. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, if the amount of data or the execution time of the remaining betting process rendering is less than a predetermined amount, even if a start operation is performed during the betting process rendering, the betting process rendering is continued without interruption, and the rest of the betting process is continued. The betting process effect may be interrupted if the amount of data or the execution time of the effect is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. More specifically, for example, when performing a betting process effect corresponding to 3 bets, if the start operation is performed at the timing when the betting process effect of up to 2 bets is completed, the betting process effect is not interrupted. If the start operation is performed at the timing when the betting process effect up to 1 bet is completed, the betting process effect may be interrupted and switched to the betting corresponding effect for 3 bets. . Further, when the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets, it may be configured to determine whether to interrupt or continue the betting process effect according to the progress of the waiting time. is less than a predetermined time, but may be interrupted if the waiting time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

(7) In the pseudo-bet effect, the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect is interrupted, and the bet corresponding effect is switched to, and the start operation is performed during the waiting time between bets. In this case, it is configured to switch to the bet-compatible effect without waiting for the waiting time to pass, but it may be configured to switch to the bet-compatible effect to wait for the waiting time to pass. Specifically, for example, in the case of performing the betting process effect of 3 bets, during the waiting time from when the first bet display section 34a is turned on until when the second bet display section 34b is turned on. When the start operation is performed, the second bet display portion 34b and the third bet display portion 34c are turned on when the waiting time for turning on the second bet display portion 34b has elapsed. good too.

(8) In the pseudo-bet effect, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the process of limiting the betting process effect, the process of limiting the start effect, and other processes may be executed. good. For example, it may be configured to execute a process of counting the number of times the start operation is performed during the betting process effect. It is good also as composition which performs predetermined production. The predetermined effect may be, for example, a effect that congratulates the player on the speed of the operation, or conversely, a content that calls attention to the fact that an erroneous operation is likely to occur. There may be.

(9) In the pseudo betting effect, if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the mode of limiting the betting process effect may be changed according to the progress of the betting process effect. Specifically, when the start operation is performed at the first timing after the betting process effect is started and before the completion, the betting is handled at the first timing as the first restriction mode, for example. When switching to the effect and the start operation is performed at a second timing which is later than the first timing after the start of the betting process effect, and which is later than the first timing, the lighting effect, for example, is performed as the second restriction mode. may be continued, but the output of bet sound effects may be limited.

(10) In the replay setting process on the main controller 101 side, all the BET display sections 75 are turned off temporarily, but it is also possible to omit the turning off state. In this case, especially in the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game result win, the BET display section 75 is kept lit.

(11) In the re-game setting process based on the specific re-game win, as in the case of the normal re-game win, waiting time between bets is provided to display the first BET display section 75a, the second BET display section 75b, and the third BET display. A configuration may be adopted in which the portions 75c are sequentially turned on. In this case, the waiting time between bets in the case of winning the normal re-game result and the waiting time between bets in the case of winning the specific re-game result may be the same time or may be different. The wait time may be longer or shorter in the case of the normal replay result than in the case of the specific replay result. However, when the first credit input switch 56 is simulated to be operated based on the winning of the specific re-game result, it is preferable that the betting is completed. Configurations with shorter waiting times between bets are preferred for outcomes. In addition, in the normal re-game bet effect setting process, the waiting time between bets is not provided, and the waiting time between bets is set to be the same as the waiting time between bets in the case of a specific re-game winning prize. good too.

(12) In the specific re-game bet effect setting process, the process proceeds after the bet on the main controller 101 side is completed, but the process proceeds without waiting for the bet on the main controller 101 side to be completed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. In this case, even if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated immediately after winning the specific regame result, the bet on the main control device 101 side is earlier than the pseudo bet effect on the display control device 81 side. It should be completed.

(13) Although the bet display section 34 and the speaker 64 on the display control device 81 side are configured to perform the pseudo bet effect, the bet display section 75 on the main control device 101 side may be configured to perform the pseudo bet effect.

(14) Although the first credit lamp 56b is configured to be controlled by the display control device 81, it may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101. FIG. Also, the bet display unit 34 and the speaker 64 may be configured to be controlled by the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 may be configured to execute processing for performing pseudo bet effects and the like.

(15) If the replay state is triggered by a specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned on or a pseudo bet effect is performed. You can let

For example, as the AT mode start game, if a second replay result win or a third replay result win is established, a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed, but even if it is an AT mode start game, the first replay result win is performed. The configuration may be changed so that the pseudo-bet effect or the like is not performed when is established, and the pseudo-bet effect or the like is performed regardless of which replay result wins in the AT mode start game.

In addition, if the end game of the AT mode wins any of the replay results, a pseudo-bet effect may be performed, or a so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved is provided, and transition to the RT state is performed. A pseudo-bet effect or the like may be performed after a replay result of winning a prize in a game or an end game.

Furthermore, even after winning a specific replay result, a pseudo-bet effect will be made according to the number of remaining AT mode games, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of increased numbers up to the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section. If the number of remaining games in AT mode is a predetermined number or more, or if the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is less than or equal to the predetermined number of games, or if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section In a case where the number of remaining increased coins up to the upper limit increased number is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the pseudo bet effect or the like may not be performed even after winning the specific re-game result.

(16) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, whether or not to limit the betting process effect may be changed depending on the trigger or situation of the pseudo bet effect.

For example, as the AT mode start game, when the second replay result win or the third replay result win is established, when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, the betting process effect is restricted. However, even if it is an AT mode start game, if a pseudo bet effect or the like is performed based on the winning of the first replay result, even if the start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the bet will be made. A configuration in which the process performance is not limited may be adopted.

Further, when the start operation is performed during the betting process presentation of the pseudo-betting presentation of the end game of the AT mode, the betting process presentation is limited, but if the AT mode is in progress, the betting process presentation of the pseudo-betting presentation is being performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the betting process effect is not limited when the start operation is performed at the beginning of the game.

Furthermore, even after winning a specific replay result, a pseudo-bet effect will be made according to the number of remaining AT mode games, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and the remaining number of increased numbers up to the upper limit increase number in the advantageous section. When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in , whether or not to limit the betting process effect may be changed. If the number of games remaining until the number of games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, or if the number of remaining increased numbers up to the upper limit increase in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the predetermined number, etc., the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the betting process effect is not restricted when performed, and vice versa.

(17) Although the first credit lamp 56 is built into the first credit insertion switch 56 and the first credit insertion switch 56 itself lights up, the first credit lamp 56 is provided around the first credit insertion switch 56. Alternatively, the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 may be prompted by turning on the surroundings of the first credit insertion switch 56, or the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 may be displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. By performing the prompting first state (for example, display of "PUSH") and operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the display of the first state is ended and the second state (the above "PUSU" is displayed). It is good also as a structure which switches to the state which does not perform. By turning these into the lighting state or the first state, a configuration may be adopted in which the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like is prompted.

(18) Although the first credit lamp 56b is provided so as to prompt the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, notification means corresponding to the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion slot 45 may be provided, and the notification may be performed. When the means is in the first state, it is possible to operate the number of bets by the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion port 45, and when it is in the second state, the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 and the medal insertion port 45 is disabled. It may be configured to notify that it is not possible. By setting these notification means to the first state, the start of a pseudo-bet effect or the like may be prompted.

(19) Although the waiting time (interval) between bets is different between the replay bet effect and the continuous bet effect, the waiting time between bets may be the same length in the replay bet effect and the continuous bet effect. The waiting time in the betting effect may be longer than the waiting time in the replay betting effect. The waiting time between bets in the pseudo bet effect is the same as the waiting time in the continuous bet effect, or the same time as the waiting time in the replay bet effect before the wait period has elapsed. It may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the effect, and may be shorter or longer than the waiting time in the replay bet effect.

(20) Even in a replay betting effect based on a normal replay result or a betting process effect in a continuous betting effect after a small win result or a losing result, if a start operation is performed during the betting process effect, the betting process effect may be configured to limit the In particular, when a predetermined start effect (for example, pressing order notification effect) is performed based on the start operation, it is considered highly significant to limit the betting process effect (for example, switch to bet corresponding effect).

(21) When the pressing order notification effect and the betting process effect overlap as the starting effect based on the start operation, the configuration is such that the pressing order notification effect side or the betting process effect side is restricted, but the main control A configuration may also be adopted in which notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 on the device 101 side is also restricted.

(22) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed. The pressing order notification effect may not be executed. For example, when the AT mode is a navigation count management type AT mode defined by the number of executions of the push order notification effect instead of the number of games, if the game does not execute the push order notification effect, the game It is preferable that the pressing order notification effect that was scheduled to be executed in .

(23) When the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect, and the push order notification effect is performed based on the start operation, the start of the push order notification effect is delayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of execution of the production is made different. For example, normally, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is indicated by yellow numbers as the first execution mode, but when the start operation is performed during the betting process presentation in the pseudo-bet presentation, the second execution mode is performed. Alternatively, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be indicated by purple numerals. In this case, the pushing order notification effect according to the second execution mode may be configured to be executed only when the start operation is performed during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect, or during the betting process effect in the pseudo betting effect. It may be configured such that it is executed not only when the start operation is performed at 10:00 a.m., but also in other cases. As another case, for example, when the number of remaining AT mode sets is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the second execution mode may be configured so that the pressing order notification effect can be executed.

(24) Although the betting process effect in the pseudo bet effect is different before and after the wait period has passed, the betting process effect in the replay bet effect and the repeated bet effect can be changed according to the wait period. It is good also as a structure which makes it different before progress and after progress.

(25) In the configuration in which the betting process effects are different before and after the wait period has elapsed, not only the waiting time between bets but also other effects may be different. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the type of sound effect at the time of betting in the betting process production is different before and after the wait period has elapsed, or the function of the bet display section 34 is performed by the auxiliary display section 65, and the auxiliary display section 65 performs the function of the bet display section 34. The display mode of the number of bets displayed in the section 65 may be configured to be different before and after the wait period has elapsed.

(26) In a configuration in which the standby state is not set in the replay state, the first credit lamp 56 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state when the second transition period during which the standby state can be set even in the replay state has passed. It is good also as a structure switched to. In this case, if the replay state is based on the specific replay result, the first credit lamp 56b is turned off after the second transition period elapses.

(27) When the standby state is set, the BET display unit 75 and the gaming state display unit 76 managed by the main controller 101 side are not set to the standby state, while the BET display unit 34 and the first bet display unit managed by the display control device 81 side are not set to the standby state. The credit lamp 56b, the auxiliary display section 65, and the speaker 64 may be configured to be in a standby state, or vice versa.

(28) A lottery result of each game during a so-called RT state in which the winning probability of the replay result is improved may be defined as the replay result. In this case, the lottery result of each game in the RT state may be expressed as the specified result, and the specified result may include the first replay, the second replay, and the like. Furthermore, the RT state may be defined as a replay state.

(29) The BET display section 75 and the gaming state display section 75 may be provided at positions different from the gaming panel 25 . For example, the BET display section 75 and the game state display section 75 may be provided on the surface provided with the first credit insertion switch 56 and the effect switch 66 below the game panel 25 and intersecting with the game panel 25 . Moreover, it is good also as a structure displayed on the auxiliary|assistant display part 65. FIG. In this case, the display control device 81 may control the BET display portion 75 and the gaming state display portion 75 , and the main control device 101 may control the auxiliary display portion 65 .

(30) The first transition period until transition to the temporary standby state is set to be shorter than the second transition period until transition to the standby state, but the first transition period is longer than the second transition period. The period may be set to be long, or the first transition period and the second transition period may be set to be the same period.

(31) The replay state display section 76a is configured to remain lit even in the standby state, but may be configured to switch to the off state when the standby state or temporary standby state is entered. The ready-to-start display unit 76b and the ready-to-receive state display unit 76c are configured to switch to the off state when entering the standby state, but may be configured to switch to the off state when entering the temporary standby state, or enter the standby state A configuration may be adopted in which the light is not switched to the off state when the light is turned on.

(32) In the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the credits may be settled and the lighting state of the first credit lamp 56b may be maintained. In other words, the credit settlement and the execution of the pseudo-bet effect may be based on different settlement operations.

(33) In the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the settlement switch 59 is operated, the credits are settled, a pseudo-bet effect is performed, and the first credit lamp 56b is turned on. It is good also as composition which assumes. In this case, the first credit lamp 56b may be maintained in the lighting state without turning off the first credit lamp 56b at the start of the pseudo-bet effect, or after the first credit lamp 56b is turned off at the start of the pseudo-bet effect, The first credit lamp 56b may be switched to the lighting state after that (for example, after switching to the bet correspondence effect in the pseudo bet effect).

(34) In the continuous bet effect, the effect sound may not be output at the time of betting. In this case, the re-game betting effect may be configured such that a betting sound effect is output, and the re-game betting effect may be configured not to output a betting sound effect. Before the wait period elapses, an effect equivalent to a replay bet effect is performed, while after the wait period elapses, an effect equivalent to a repeated bet effect is performed. An effect equivalent to the game bet effect may be performed, and after the wait period has elapsed, an effect equivalent to the continuous bet effect without sound effect at the time of betting may be performed.

(35) The pseudo-bet effect based on the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57 and the pseudo-bet effect when medals are inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 may be different.

(36) When the betting process effect overlaps with the start effect or freeze effect, one of them is restricted. It is sufficient if the performance is performed at the time of betting based on the number operation.

(37) In the normal regame bet effect setting process, the betting process effect is advanced each time a regame bet command is received from the main control device 101. A configuration may be adopted in which the interval between bets is specified by using a timer counter or the like on the 81 side, and then the betting process effect is advanced. Further, in the replay bet effect, only the bet corresponding effect may be performed without performing the betting process effect. In this case, after the betting in the replay setting processing on the main control device 101 side is completed, the display control device 81 side bet correspondence effect is performed, so that even though the betting is not completed, Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of performing the start operation.

(38) When a start operation is performed during a betting process effect, a freeze effect is generated to delay the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. A configuration may be adopted in which the start of rotation of 32M and 32R is delayed. In the freeze effect, the description has been made on the premise that the display effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65, but the display effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 is not performed, and the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is simply delayed. It may be configured to be Furthermore, the period for delaying the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be varied according to the remaining period of the betting process effect. For example, the start of rotation is delayed for a first period or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the first period. It may be configured to delay for two periods or a period obtained by adding a predetermined period to the second period. It should be noted that the delay period may be changed according to the remaining amount of effects (remaining number of bets, remaining number of lights) instead of the remaining period of the betting process effects.

(38) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(39) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(40) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

A pachinko machine has, for example, variable ball entry means capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball can be entered and a closed state in which it is more difficult or impossible to enter a game ball than in the open state. A game ball entered into the variable ball entry means passes through a specific passing part in a configuration in which when the lottery is won, the variable ball entry means is opened and the round game is shifted to a win state in which the round game can be executed a plurality of times. (Occurrence of V winning), the game state after the winning state shifts to an advantageous state such as a higher probability of winning in the above-mentioned predetermined win-or-fail judgment, and the game ball entering the variable ball entering means passes through the specific If the part is not passed (V winning does not occur), the game state after the winning state shifts to a non-advantageous state such that the winning probability of the above-mentioned predetermined win-or-fail judgment becomes lower than the above-mentioned advantageous state. It is also possible to apply each of the above inventions to nature. In this case, when the result of the passage determination whether or not the specific passage section is passed is executed during the round game in which the passage determination is performed, and in the round after the round game in which the passage determination is performed By providing a case where it is executed in the game, it is possible to increase the attention not only to the round game in which the pass judgment is performed but also to the subsequent round games by utilizing the psychology of the player who wants to know the result of the pass judgment. It becomes possible. Furthermore, when the result notification of the passage determination is performed during the round game in which the passage determination is performed, and when it is performed in the round game after the round game in which the passage determination is performed, production By standardizing the mode or standardizing the period from the passage judgment to the execution of the result notification, whether the notification is performed across the round games depending on the effect mode and the period until the result notification. It becomes difficult to specify whether or not the vehicle has passed, and it becomes possible to make it more difficult to predict the result of the passage determination.

(41) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<4d embodiment>
The 4d embodiment will be described below. FIGS. 263 to 265 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning. In the following description, configurations different from the above embodiments will be described, and descriptions of configurations common to the above embodiments will be omitted. Further, in the following description, components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment are described using the same reference numerals, and components having the same reference characters but different functions are denoted by specific reference numerals in this embodiment. shall be treated as

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(a), when the symbols corresponding to the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(b), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop together on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for the role. When the third minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbols stop together on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 4th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 8 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 266(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 6th minor winning prize is stopped on the activated line ML, the symbol "bell" is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 267(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 267(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 263 and 264, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor winning prizes is that the “Bell” symbols are aligned and stopped on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

When the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the 33rd minor winning combination is won. When the 33rd minor win is established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 267(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 33rd minor winning combination stop on the active line ML, the middle line L2 may stop together with the "BAR" symbols. .

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 33rd minor wins won, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege (game value) given according to the result of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings that give a replay benefit (game value) that allows the next game to be played without inserting medals include first to twelfth replay winnings. As shown in FIG. 265, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 267(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols stop on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 268(e), the middle line L2 is stopped together with the "white 7" symbols.

In the third replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. To establish. When the symbol corresponding to the third replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 268(f), the "WHITE 7" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel. The "Red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of 32R.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 267(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 267(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called upper stage watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "Watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 268(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 268(b), when the symbol corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the active line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 268(c) and 268(d), when the symbol corresponding to the 10th re-game win or the 12th re-game win stops on the activated line ML, a "cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and the 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB wins. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the first BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 269(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 269(b). , "Red 7" symbols, "Red 7" symbols, and "BAR" symbols stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5.

When the "red clam" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. When the symbols corresponding to the 2nd BB winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. , ``white 7'' symbols, ``white 7'' symbols, and ``red 7'' symbols stop in order from the left on the lower line L3.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 270) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Stop lamps 42b to 44b are built in the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively. The light from the stop lamps 42b-44b is partially transmitted through the operating surfaces of the stop switches 42-44, and the light from the stop lamps 42b-44b becomes visible through the stop switches 42-44. When the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is enabled, the stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled to turn on, and when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disabled, the corresponding stop lamps 42b to 44b are controlled. are controlled to turn off.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 270 and 271. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The above-described CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when power is cut off by power failure processing (see FIG. 272), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 271, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 272 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by main controller 101. CPU 102 of main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step Sd101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. At step Sd102, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set, and if the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sd103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step Sd102, various processes after step Sd104 are performed.

That is, in step Sd104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. At step Sd105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step Sd106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. At step Sd107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 270) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. At step Sd108, a timer update process is performed to subtract/add the value of each counter or timer. In step Sd109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out.

In step Sd110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step Sd111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step Sd112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step Sd113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step Sd114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step Sd101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step Sd115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Sd201, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step Sd202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps Sd203 to Sd212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step Sd203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. Thereafter, in step Sd204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings have been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing (step Sd107) of the timer interrupt processing. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 were operated during the period from the previous start waiting process to the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step Sd205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step Sd205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step Sd205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sd204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step Sd205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step Sd206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step Sd110 in the timer interrupt processing. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step Sd206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step Sd207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Sd204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step Sd208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step Sd209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step Sd210, the reel control process of step Sd211, and the medal payout process of step Sd212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step Sd203.

Next, the lottery processing in step Sd210 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

In step Sd301, a random number is obtained which is used when judging whether a winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step Sd302, a lottery table is selected for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step Sd302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags is set, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . If the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal game state for the 3-bet game (Fig. 275) is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 276). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step Sd302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is executed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process ends. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step Sd302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 275 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 276 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step Sd303, and the determination value DV used for determining the winning combination is set in the following step Sd304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step Sd301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step Sd305, it is determined whether the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step Sd306, the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step Sd305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step Sd306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step Sd306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, step Sd306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see Sd203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step Sd306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and a combination other than 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=11, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step Sd305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step Sd307, and in the subsequent step Sd308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a judgment target to be judged, the process returns to step Sd304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step Sd304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge whether the previous combination is correct (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step Sd305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 respectively, and the probability of winning the pushing order bell is about 1/1.56. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/6.22 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays and small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0).

In addition, when playing a 3-bet game in the normal game state, a special combination (IV=27) is set that allows any one of the 1st to 6th small combinations and the 33rd small combination to be won. there is The probability of winning the special role (probability of winning when IV=27) is about 1/20 regardless of the set value. The special role will be explained in detail later.

In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. When the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/6.22 (1st BB) regardless of the set value.

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value.

After the winning flag is set in step Sd306, or when it is determined in step Sd308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step Sd309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step Sd310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps Sd301 to Sd308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step Sd310, a lottery result command setting process for setting a lottery result command is executed in step Sd311. Details of the lottery result command setting process will be described later, but the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the player to grasp the result of the win/loss determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step Sd110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step Sd312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step Sd306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Furthermore, in the stop information setting process, when a special winning combination is won (winning when IV=27), and the 1st minor winning combination winning flag to the 6th minor winning winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning winning flag are set, the 3rd minor winning combination winning flag is set. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations and the 33rd minor winning combination can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a two-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sd312, the stop symbol information that establishes the first BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Sd312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step Sd313, when a plurality of pieces of stoppable pattern information are set in step Sd312, a priority setting process for setting the order of priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply is won, and the 2nd BB is won and the first replay is made. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the combination of winning symbols is set so that, when a re-game is won, one of the re-games among the re-games that are won wins a prize. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Furthermore, in the priority setting process of step Sd313, if the special winning combination is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination and the 33rd minor winning combination is set, When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning prize is preferentially established, and when operated in the second operating mode, the first to sixth minor winning prizes are established. The order of priority is set so that the winning of a small winning combination is preferentially established.

After executing the process of step Sd313, the first section display process is executed in step Sd314, and then the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step Sd211 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step Sd401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step Sd309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step Sd310, and the like. processing. In the subsequent step Sd402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step Sd106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, in step Sd403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Sd404 to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step Sd403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step Sd405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps Sd406 to Sd412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step Sd406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower row in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step Sd407, the number of slips of reels to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode in which the engine is stopped. Therefore, in step Sd407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step Sd408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. At step Sd409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. conduct. After that, in step Sd411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step Sd412, and the process returns to step Sd403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won at the push-order bell (see FIGS. 275 and 276), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 278 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established in the case of winning. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, there are cases where the corresponding prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, when the winning symbol becomes a winning symbol regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the winning symbol is selected. can be stopped on the effective line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. The stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle stage, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor winning combination can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle-order push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. 2 minor winning prize, 3rd minor winning prize, 4th minor winning winning prize, 5th minor winning winning prize, or 6th minor winning winning prize are established, and if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins may be established, or none of the minor wins may be established and may be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor win is established.

Next, a case where a special combination is won and the left stop switch 42 among the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first will be described as an example. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 279, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 1st minor winning combination, the 2nd minor winning combination or the 33rd minor winning combination.

The first minor winning symbol and the second minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L are "replay" symbols. Also, the 33rd minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is a "BAR" symbol. In this case, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol reach the middle row, the first minor winning symbol or the second minor winning symbol is selected. Drive control is performed so as to stop the "BAR" symbol, which is the 33rd minor combination symbol, instead of the "Replay" symbol, in the middle row. Then, the 33rd minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "bell" symbol, which is the 33rd minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43 and 44, and the 33rd minor winning symbol. 33 minor wins are established.

On the other hand, even if the special combination is won and the left stop switch 42 among the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, the 0th "replay" symbol to the 4th "red clam" symbol. Or, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 10th "replay" symbol to the 19th "white shell" symbol reach the middle row, the first minor symbol or the second minor symbol. Driving control is performed so that the "replay" pattern is stopped in the middle stage. Then, the "replay" symbol, which is the first minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M and the first minor winning symbol of the right reel 32R, stops at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44. The second minor winning symbol on the reel 32M and the "bell" symbol, which is the second minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R, stop at the position of the effective line ML regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43-44. Winning a winning combination or winning a second minor winning combination is established.

Also, if a special role is won and any of the stop switches 42 to 44 other than the left stop switch 42 is operated first, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 3rd minor role to the 6th Winning a small role is established.

That is, when winning the special combination, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol to the 9th "BAR" symbol of the left reel 32L reach the middle stage as the first operation mode. In this case, the 33rd minor winning combination is established and one medal is paid out. 8 medals will be paid out after the minor win to the 6th minor win.

As described above, the 1st to 6th small wins can be won even if one of the bells in the order of pressing is won and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the corresponding order of operation. To establish. Then, when the special role is won, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, it is possible to clearly grasp that the special role was won in the game. , When the special role is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, whether the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning has been established with the special role as a trigger, or The player cannot judge from the stop result or the number of payouts whether the prize is established because the operation order at the time of winning the pressing order bell corresponds to the 1st to 6th minor wins.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step Sd411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, in step Sd413, a payout determination process is performed. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning symbol combination is arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106 . On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an error occurrence processing is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step Sd414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After the bonus state process is executed, the winning result handling process is executed in step Sd415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the section display second process is performed in step Sd416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step Sd417, a winning result command is set so as to cause the display control device 81 to recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step Sd212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step Sd204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step Sd414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Sd501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step Sd501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step Sd502.

In step Sd502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sd503.

At step Sd503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step Sd503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the subsequent step Sd504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Sd505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step Sd506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step Sd506. In step Sd507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step Sd508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd501. In subsequent step Sd509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step Sd509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sd510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins of the above game. That is, by shifting to the 1BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the 1BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step Sd505 that the 1st BB winning has not been established means that the 2nd BB winning has been established. In this case, the process advances to step Sd511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step Sd512, a process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step Sd513, a process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step Sd514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. It should be noted that the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different in appearance and content to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step Sd514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Sd510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed as a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sd501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step Sd515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 280 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 281, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.36. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step Sd515, it is determined whether or not any small combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process using the lottery table for the BB state and control of each reel. When winning is not established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Sd516. Then, in step Sd517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step Sd516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step Sd516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined not to be 0 or less in step Sd517, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, in step Sd518, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step Sd519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step Sd520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

Thereafter, in step Sd521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step Sd519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so as to facilitate the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a winning combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another winning combination when the winning combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the winning small combination differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 278) that becomes the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize when the winning order of the bell is won. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the second BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step Sd310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps Sd601 to Sd603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step Sd601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sd602. If the player is in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sd603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of step Sd602 and step Sd603 is the processing of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step Sd604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, but the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the prescribed bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step Sd604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sd602 or step Sd603, it is determined in step Sd604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Sd605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 284, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Sd701. Then, in step Sd702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 285, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 285, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, pressing order bell, watermelon, and special role are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step Sd702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step Sd703. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and step Sd703 acquires the latest updated value of the counters. Then, in step Sd704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step Sd705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step Sd701 is the trigger for the shift lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps Sd702 to Sd705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step Sd705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step Sd706 a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step Sd705, or after the process of step Sd706 is executed, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step Sd604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step Sd606. In step Sd606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If none of the flags is set in step Sd606, then in step Sd607 an AT lottery process at the start is executed. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step Sd606, continuation determination processing is executed in step Sd608, and AT addition processing is executed in step Sd609.

<Start AT lottery process>
First, the starting AT lottery process in step Sd607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sd801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e are zero. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, subtraction of the ceiling counter is executed at the end of the game. In other words, when it is determined in step Sd801 that the ceiling counter is 0, it means that the number of ceiling games has reached 0 in the previous game.

If the ceiling counter is not 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps Sd802 to Sd807.

That is, in step Sd802, a process of acquiring a random number for AT mode transition lottery is executed. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and step Sd802 acquires the latest updated value of the counters. In the subsequent step Sd803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step Sd804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step Sd804, then at step Sd805, a process of acquiring a start-time normal AT mode transition lottery table from various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step Sd804, then in step Sd806, a process of acquiring an AT mode transition lottery table for starting CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 285, the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start have respective winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery result of the game. For example, if it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance A, the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 1% for normal use, and the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 3% for CZ. Thus, the AT mode transition lottery table for start CZ is set to make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal AT mode transition lottery table at start. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

By the way, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start used in the AT lottery process at the start, if the lottery result of the game is a special role, it is considered that the AT mode transition is won. It is set so that it will not In addition, in the start AT lottery process, the AT mode shift lottery may not be performed with the special role as a trigger.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step Sd805 or step Sd806, the acquired transition lottery table, the game lottery result grasped in step Sd803, and the AT lottery random number acquired in step Sd802. , is used to execute AT mode transition lottery processing in step Sd807. Specifically, whether or not the AT lottery random number obtained in step Sd802 is within the numerical range for winning set according to the lottery result of each game in the table obtained in step Sd805 or step Sd806 If the random number for the AT lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the AT mode transition is won, and if the random number for the AT lottery is outside the numerical range for winning, the AT mode transition is made. Determined as non-election. Then, in step Sd808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step Sd808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step Sd802, the AT mode winning process of steps Sd809 to Sd812 is executed. If it is determined in step Sd808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, the process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps Sd813 to Sd816.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step Sd809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition in the CZ mode has been won. If the prize is won during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps Sd810 and Sd811. That is, in step Sd810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step Sd811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. This is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Sd809, or after the process of step Sd811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Sd812. With this processing, the determination in step Sd606 is affirmative from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step Sd813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step Sd814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step Sd803. . As shown in FIG. 285, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, if the lottery results for a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is likely to be won, but the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the game is set to easily shift to the CZ mode.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step Sd814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won in step Sd815, and if not, the AT lottery process is terminated as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step Sd816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step Sd812 or step Sd816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps Sd817 to Sd820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

In step Sd817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step Sd817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode, so you won the AT mode transition lottery through the end of the CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that even though it is known that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition lottery is won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent step Sd818, a process of inputting the lottery result of step Sd817 to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step Sd819, a process of setting an omen flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step Sd820, a process of setting an omen command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery is executed. end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for making the control device 81 grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing the effect in the portent mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step Sd608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games are set as one set (number of unit continuations, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (set is When starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set will be held, and if you win the continuation lottery, after the end of the set, you will move to the next set and will not win the continuation lottery. , the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. The continuation determination process in step Sd608 is a process for performing the continuation lottery when updating the set.

In step Sd901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step Sd901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is one set of AT mode start games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step Sd902.

At step Sd902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set without performing the continuation lottery even if the continuation lottery is not won, and the continuation condition is This is a counter which is incremented by 1 when the player wins an additional lottery in the established situation and is subtracted by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or the next set is continued without performing the continuation lottery. If the AT set counter is 0, the winning probability of the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped in step Sd903.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. A high rate of 90% and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step Sd1211 to be described later). In step Sd903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read out to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step Sd903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step Sd904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the winning will continue with a probability of 90% in the process of step Sd904, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10 will be won in the process of step Sd904. Percentage chance of winning continuously.

In step Sd905, it is determined whether or not the result of the processing in step Sd904 is continuous winning, and if continuous winning is determined, in step Sd906, a process of setting a continuous flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step Sd907, after executing the processing of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination processing ends.

Also, if it is determined in step Sd902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step Sd908, and then the process advances to step Sd906 to set the continuation flag and issue the continuation command. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be met if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when one set of the AT mode is started (when the start lever 41 is operated), whether or not the continuation condition of whether or not the AT mode continues to the next set of the set to be started this time is satisfied or not. A determination is made, and when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, a continuation flag is set, and the information is output to the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd905 that there is no continued winning, the continuation determination process is terminated. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not established by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs the production on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the production of the current set. Take action to ensure that

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step Sd609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, separate from the above continuation lottery, an add-on lottery to add the number of sets in AT mode is performed. Try to continue until the next set.

First, in step Sd1001, a process of acquiring a random number for an additional lottery is executed. The random numbers for the additional lottery use dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. At step Sd1001, the latest updated value of the counters is obtained. In the subsequent step Sd1002, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Sd1003, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 285, the additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. While normal roles such as bells do not win additional prizes, specific roles such as Chance A to Chance C, Cherry A to Cherry C, Common Bell, and Watermelon, which are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, are set to allow additional wins. It is In the lottery process of each game, among the specific roles, for example, chance C is more likely to be won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be won than cherry A. It is set such that the harder the lottery result is, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. It should be noted that, if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be won, and if the lottery result of each game is a normal combination, the additional lottery may not be performed. In addition, it is possible to have a configuration in which an additional win can be won even when the lottery result of each game is a normal role, and the probability of an extra win in the normal role is lower than the probability of an extra win in the case of a specific role. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special role, as described above, in the AT lottery process at the start, it is set so as not to win the AT mode transition, but the additional lottery in this AT addition process In , it is set so that even if it is a special role, it can be added and won.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step Sd1003, an additional lottery is executed in step Sd1004. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the random number for the additional lottery obtained in step Sd1001 is within the numerical range for winning set according to the lottery result of each game in the table obtained in step Sd1003. When the random number for the addition lottery is within the numerical range for winning, it is determined that the lottery is won, and when the random number for the addition lottery is out of the numerical range for winning, it is determined as non-winning. After performing the additional lottery in step Sd1004, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step Sd1005. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step Sd1006 whether or not the continuation flag is set.

If the continuation flag is not set in step Sd1006, processing for setting the continuation flag is executed in step Sd1007. Then, in step Sd1008, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step Sd1006, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step Sd1009. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step Sd1009, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when winning the additional lottery, but it may be configured to add a number of 2 or more. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game in which the number is 0.

In the subsequent step Sd1010, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition ends. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added for one additional win, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 283), after the process of step Sd607 or step Sd609 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps Sd610-Sd619.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps Sd610 to Sd619, an overview of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be provided. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 289(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 289(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the digits "0" to "6" and "9" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can display at least '0' to '6' and '9', '0.' to '6.' and '9.', and '.'.

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are pressed in which the winning results differ depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, among the operation mode combinations in which the winning results differ depending on the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44. This display segment is used when notifying the operation order of the winning hand and when notifying the type of the operation mode hand.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 289(b), the display of "1" to "6" corresponds to the notification of the operation order of the pushing order. When a winning mode advantageous to the player is achieved by performing stop operations in the order of left → middle → right, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed to indicate "1". ” is displayed. In addition, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), the player can win in an advantageous manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 289(c), "0" and "9" correspond to the notification of the type of the operation mode combination, and if the push order bell is the push order combination in the operation mode combination, , the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2 and the fourth display segment N4 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed as "0". In this case, from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68, the player can understand that the winning order bell is won. Since the advantageous operation mode is not clearly indicated, the advantageous operation mode cannot be grasped from the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 .

Further, in the case of a special combination in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed, and "9" is displayed. Is displayed. As already explained, in the case of a special role, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. , the first to sixth minor winning prizes are established, and these first and second operating modes are predetermined operating modes. In other words, when the command monitor 68 notifies that a special combination is being played as described above, the user can operate in the second operation mode to win the 1st minor combination to the 6th minor combination with a large number of payouts. It is possible to establish a winning role.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which it is easy for the player to win a prize in an advantageous manner by making it easier to notify the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefit of the pushing order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display units (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display units. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 290(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop button in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

A description will be given of the pressing order notification processing in steps Sd610 to Sd619.

That is, in step Sd610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is that the pressing order of the bell has been won. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step Sd611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, at step Sd612, the instruction monitor 68 is turned on so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Control. Then, in step Sd613, the push order notification commands each set so as to include information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are set as output targets to the display control device 81. After executing the processing, the processing for notifying the pressing order is terminated. That is, in step Sd613, a process of setting any one of the pressing order notification command for the first minor combination to the pressing order notification command for the sixth minor combination is executed. The display control device 81 that has received these pressing order notification commands controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

If the AT mode flag is not set in step Sd611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled in step Sd614 so that group notification of the pressing order bell (FIG. 289(c)) is performed. In other words, in step Sd614, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is the push order bell among the operation mode combinations. After that, the lottery result handling process is ended.

If it is determined in step Sd610 that the bell is not won in the pressing order, it is determined in step Sd615 whether or not the special combination is won. In the case of not winning the special combination, the lottery result corresponding processing is terminated as it is. If the special role is won, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in step Sd616.

If the AT mode flag is not set at step Sd616, then at step Sd617 the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that a special combination notification (FIG. 289(c)) is performed. That is, in step Sd617, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is a special combination among the operation mode combinations. After that, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step Sd616, the process proceeds to step Sd618. At step Sd618, the instruction monitor 68 instructs the instruction monitor 68 to notify the pressing order corresponding to the sixth minor winning combination as a predetermined operating order among the operating orders corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning winning combinations. to control. Then, in step Sd619, the process of setting the pressing order notification command for the 6th minor combination, which is set so as to include information on the operation order corresponding to the 6th minor combination winning, as an output target to the display control device 81. is executed, the actual pressing order notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if the game in which the bell is won in the pressing order among the operation mode hands is in the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 can establish the first to sixth minor role wins. is notified of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enable the operation, and a push order notification command including information on the operation order is output to the display control device 81, and the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 is performed. done. On the other hand, if the game in which the pressing order bell is won is not in the AT mode, although the command monitor 68 notifies that the pressing order bell is being played, the first to sixth minor winning combinations are established. Since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that enables the operation is not notified, and the push order notification command including information on the operation order is not output to the display control device 81, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the push order notification effect. is not performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the lottery result command setting process of step Sd311 in the lottery process (FIG. 274), in a game in which the push order bell is won, any of the push order bell results (IV11 to IV22) Information as to whether or not the prize has been won is prevented from being output to the display control device 81. - 特許庁

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 291(a), in step Sd1101, the current game is won with index values IV=11 to 22, and it is determined whether any of the bells in the order of pressing have been won. determine whether If the pressing order bell is not won, in step Sd1102, the process of setting the lottery result command corresponding to each winning result as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result command setting process is terminated. . That is, in step Sd1102, for example, when the index value IV=1 is won, a lottery result command indicating normal reply A is set, and when the index value I=8 is won, cherry A is indicated. A lottery result command is set, and in the case of winning with index value IV=27, a lottery result command indicating a special combination is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1101 that one of the bells in the order of pressing is won, a lottery result command indicating the bell group in the order of pressing is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step Sd1103. After executing the process, the lottery result command setting process is terminated. The lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group includes information indicating that one of the pressing order bells has been won. Information about winning 1 (information about winning with IV = 11) and information about winning middle reverse bell 2 (information about winning with IV = 18) information) is set so as not to include information such as

In other words, as shown in FIG. 291(b), in the present embodiment, the information indicating that the pressing order bell has been won is a lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group regardless of whether the AT mode is in progress. is output to the display control device 81 as. In the AT mode, the pressing order notification commands for the first to sixth minor winning combinations are output together, so that the display control device 81 can execute the pressing order notification effect. On the other hand, when not in the AT mode, the display control device 81 does not output the pressing order notification command for the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination, and as described above, the lottery result indicating the pressing order bell group. Since only commands are output, on the side of the display control device 81, the stop switch 42 capable of establishing the first to sixth minor winning prizes when the bell is pressed in order of winning despite not being in the AT mode. 44 operation order cannot be comprehended. By doing so, the command output from the main controller 101 to the display control device 81 and the display control device 81 may be illegally analyzed, etc. It is possible to prevent cheating and the like of trying to enjoy the benefit of making it possible to establish the first to sixth minor winning prizes when winning the order bell.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, when a special role is won in the AT mode, of the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning and the 33rd minor role winning, the pressing order for the 6th minor role winning is notified. It is executed by the instruction monitor 68 and outputs a push order notification command for winning the sixth minor combination. By doing so, in the AT mode, the 33rd minor winning combination, which is the side with the smaller number of payouts, is not the 33rd minor winning combination, which is the side with the smaller number of payouts. 6 minor wins can be established, and the advantage of the AT mode can be improved.

Not only that, it instructs the notification of the pressing order for the 6th minor winning combination, which is one predetermined minor winning combination (push order) among the 1st minor winning winning to the 6th minor winning winning on the side with the larger number of payouts. It is executed on the monitor 68, and outputs a push order notification command for winning the sixth minor combination. By doing so, there is no need for the process of selecting which one of the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination is to be established when the special role is won, and the processing can be greatly simplified. It is possible to plan

Furthermore, as described above, if the special role winning is in the AT mode, it will be subject to an extra lottery in the AT addition process in the lottery result correspondence process, and the winning probability of the extra lottery at the time of winning the special role is pushed. It is set to be higher than the winning probability of the extra lottery when the order bell is won, and when the special role is won, the probability of winning is 10%, but when the pushing order bell is won, it is set so that the additional lottery is not won. In this case, when a special role is won in the AT mode, the pressing order for the 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to 6th minor role winning pushing order information notified when the pressing order bell is won In addition to outputting the pushing order notification command for the 6th minor winning combination among the pushing order reporting commands for the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations output when the pressing order bell is won. Therefore, it is possible to skillfully mix the winning of a special role in the AT mode with the winning of the winning order of the bell, and it is possible to give the impression that an additional lottery is being conducted based on the winning of the winning order of the bell. Become. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention when winning the bell for pushing order while not excessively increasing the benefits (probability of winning an additional lottery, etc.) when winning the bell for pushing order.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed at step Sd415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step Sd1201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Sd1202. If the player is in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Sd1203. That is, the processing of steps Sd1201 to Sd1203 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps Sd601 to Sd603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step Sd1204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Sd1202 or step Sd1203 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Sd1204. In step Sd1204, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag has not been set, it is determined in step Sd1205 whether or not the AT mode winning flag has been set. If neither the AT mode flag nor the AT mode winning flag is set, and the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the process advances to step Sd1206 to execute stop AT lottery processing.

<Processing for AT lottery at the time of stop>
The stop AT lottery process in step Sd1206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sd1301, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. In the following step Sd1302, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special combination. If it is a special combination, it is determined in step Sd1303 whether or not the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the current game is the first operation mode.

As already explained, in a game in which a special role is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established, and if operated in the second operation mode, the 1st minor role winning ~ Winning the 6th minor role is established. In this case, the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be temporarily stored in a register or the like, and it may be determined whether or not it is the first operation mode in step Sd1303, or the winning result may be grasped. Therefore, it is determined that the operation is performed in the first operation mode from the fact that the 33rd minor winning combination has been established (all of the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination have not been established). good too.

In addition, in particular, in the special role, even if it is the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning cannot be established, and a configuration that causes a dropout, or the 1st minor role winning even if it is the second operation mode ~ 6th minor winning prize can not be established and in the case of a configuration that causes a dropout, as in the former, the operation timing and operation order of each stop switch 42 to 44 are stored, and the It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which which operation mode is determined from the information. Conversely, as in the present embodiment, if there is a configuration in which the 33rd minor winning combination is not missed in at least the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination is established, so the first operation is performed. It is good to judge that it is operated in the mode, and when the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize are established and the special winning prize is won, the second operating mode is used instead of the first operating mode. It is good also as composition which judges that there was.

In step Sd1303, when it is determined that the operation was performed in the first operation mode when the special role was won, and when it is determined in step Sd1302 that it was a lottery result other than the special role, the ceiling in steps Sd1304 to Sd1306 A process for subtracting the counter is executed, and thereafter, processes such as an AT mode transition lottery are executed in steps Sd1307 to Sd1323. On the other hand, in step Sd1303, when it is determined that the operation is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode when the special combination is won, the subtraction process of the ceiling counter, the AT mode transition lottery, etc. are not performed, and the operation is performed as it is. At the time of stop, the AT lottery process is ended.

That is, as described above, when the special role is won, the 33rd minor role winning is established by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode. By doing so, in the configuration in which the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination, in which the number of medals paid out is larger than the 33rd minor winning combination, is established, the ceiling counter subtraction process and the AT mode transition lottery are performed in the first operation mode. , etc. are executed, in the case of the second operation mode, the subtraction processing of the ceiling counter, the AT mode transition lottery, etc. are not executed. In addition, in the AT lottery process at the start, AT mode shift lottery, CZ mode shift lottery, etc., based on winning a special role are not performed. Therefore, when the special combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out increases when the operation is performed in the second operation mode rather than in the first operation mode. is performed in a more restricted manner than in the case of In this way, the game is diversified as a game feature that allows the player to select which benefit to enjoy.

In the ceiling counter subtraction process, a subtraction value lottery process is executed in step Sd1304. In the subtraction value lottery process, the ceiling subtraction value table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and the value to be subtracted from the ceiling counter in the current game is determined by lottery based on the lottery result grasped in step Sd1301. As shown in FIG. 294, in the present embodiment, 1 to 100 are set as the subtraction value, and basically 1 is likely to be selected in the lottery results other than the special role, including the losing result, as a so-called rare role. is set so that a subtraction value larger than 1 may be subtracted from the ceiling counter when a special combination is won. On the other hand, when a special role is won, the probability of selecting a subtraction value larger than 1 is higher than when a special role is won.

After executing the subtraction value lottery process in step Sd1304, the process of setting the subtraction value command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sd1305. The subtraction value command contains information on the subtraction value of the current game. Thereafter, in step Sd1306, a process of subtracting the subtraction value drawn in step Sd1304 from the ceiling counter is executed. Incidentally, when the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT mode win flag is set in the AT lottery process at the start of the next game, as described above. In step Sd1306, when the current subtraction value is larger than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter is set to 0 so as not to become a negative value. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors caused by negative values. However, if the current subtraction value is larger than the remaining number of the ceiling counter, it may be configured to cause an advantageous event for the player, and an advantageous event may be determined according to the difference between the remaining number and the subtraction value. may occur, or the types of favorable events may differ. Advantageous events include, for example, adding an AT mode to the set, making it easier to select the second AT mode, which is advantageous as a type of AT mode, generating an effect suggesting setting values, and displaying a rare image. can be considered.

After the ceiling counter is decremented in step Sd1306, AT mode lottery processing is executed in steps Sd1307 to Sd1311. That is, in step Sd1307, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag and the CZ mode winning flag are set. If none of the flags have been set, in step Sd1308, a process of acquiring a lottery table for normal AT mode transition at stop from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag or the CZ mode winning flag is set, and if the CZ mode or the transition to the CZ mode is confirmed, at step Sd1309, from the various table storage areas 105a, AT for CZ when stopped Execute the process of acquiring the mode transition lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 294, the normal AT mode transition lottery table for stopping and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ when stopping are set so that the AT mode transition lottery table can win the AT mode transition lottery in the case of a special combination, as shown in FIG. , other lottery results are set so as not to win the AT mode transition. This is because, in the lottery results other than the special role, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the AT lottery process at the start, and by doing so, the transition lottery is duplicated at the start and stop. We are trying to prevent the ball output rate from soaring due to the fact that it is being used. Also, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for normal use at stop and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at stop time, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ than for normal use, as with the start time. is set to

The relationship between the appearance rate (winning probability) of each lottery result in the 3-bet game and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result will be described with reference to FIG.

As already explained, in the AT lottery process at the start, the lottery result with the lower appearance rate in each game is set so that the AT mode shift is more likely to be won. Chance A wins the AT mode shift with a probability of 3% in the CZ mode, and chance B, which appears with a probability of about 1/262, wins the AT mode shift with a probability of 5% in the CZ mode. In this case, in the CZ mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the second chance A as a trigger is about 1/5460, and the probability of winning the AT mode transition with the second chance B as the trigger is about 1/5240. . On the other hand, in the stop AT lottery process, when a special role is won, which appears with a probability of about 1/20, by operating in the first operation mode, the AT mode shifts with a probability of about 1/40. The probability of winning and winning the AT mode transition with the special role as a trigger in the CZ mode is about 1/200.

In other words, the ratio of the special role that triggers the AT mode transition win is set to be overwhelmingly higher than the other results. Specifically, in the CZ mode, about 200 AT mode transition wins with a 1/1 probability, AT mode transition wins with a probability of about 1/178 with a non-special role as a trigger, and about half of the CZ mode wins AT mode transition with a special role as a trigger become.

However, as described above, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode in the game in which the special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery itself is not performed, so the AT mode transition In terms of game characteristics aiming at winning, it is more advantageous for the player to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode when winning a special role, even if the number of medals to be paid out is small.

After acquiring each transition lottery table, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step Sd1310. Then, in step Sd1311, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition is won.

If the AT mode transition is won, the AT mode winning process is executed in steps Sd1312 to Sd1315. Execute the process. After that, in steps Sd1320 to Sd1323, the process for the portent mode is executed, and then the process for the AT lottery at the time of stop is finished. The processing of steps Sd1312 to Sd1323 is the same as the processing of steps Sd809 to Sd820 in the AT lottery process at the start.

Also in the stop AT lottery process, when the AT mode shift win or the CZ mode shift win is won, the number of predictive games is set and a predictive command is output. Then, when the AT mode transition wins during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to zero. In this case, in the predictive game number process (step Sd1208) executed subsequent to the stop AT lottery process, a process for starting the AT mode from the next game is performed. In other words, even if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the start of the CZ mode, and if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, the AT will be the same in this game. The fact that the player has won the mode transition is notified, and the AT mode is started from the next game.

Returning to the description of the winning result handling process (FIG. 292).

If it is determined in step Sd1205 that the AT mode transition lottery has already been won, and if the stop AT lottery process is executed in step Sd1206, the process proceeds to step Sd1207. In step Sd1207, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the portent flag is set, in step Sd1208, the portent game number processing is executed, and then the winning result handling processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step Sd1207, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step Sd1209. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the process for the number of CZ games is executed in step Sd1210, and then the winning result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sd1209, the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the AT mode flag is set in step Sd1204 and the AT mode is in progress, then the process for the number of AT games is executed in step Sd1211, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

The number of precursor games, the number of CZ games, and the number of AT games will be described below.

<Processing for Number of Precursor Games>
In the portent game number processing, as shown in FIG. 296, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step Sd1401. In addition, when the number of precursor games is set to 0 in the process for setting the number of precursor games in the AT lottery process at the start and the AT lottery process at stop (when 0 is input to the precursor counter) , the precursor counter is not decremented in step Sd1401. Then, in step Sd1402, it is determined whether the precursor counter is 0 or not. If the portent counter is 0, a process of clearing the portent flag is executed in step Sd1403.

In the following step Sd1404, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the present portent mode has been shifted based on winning the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag has not been set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step Sd1405. In step Sd1405, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Sd1406, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step Sd1407, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step Sd1408, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this precursor mode process ends. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step Sd1404 and the current portent mode is a portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, the process of clearing the AT mode winning flag is executed in step Sd1409. Execute. Then, in step Sd1410, a process of setting an AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step Sd1411, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of a predetermined number of games is set, and in a situation where there are no remaining sets (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0), a set is played. The AT mode continues until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step Sd1411 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 297, the selection rate of a plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is set differently according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. , and in step Sd1411, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate is to be selected based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the higher the continuation rate is set to be more likely to be selected. is selected with a probability of 30% at setting 6, it is selected with a probability of 70% at setting 6. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When the continuation rate of 90% is selected, the 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when the continuation rate of 60% is selected, the 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. However, if the continuation rate of 10% is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step Sd1411, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step Sd1412. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0, the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, the AT mode will end.

Thereafter, in step Sd1412, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode. In this case, the AT mode will be started from the game next to the game that ends this time.

<CZ game number processing>
In the CZ game count process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 298, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step Sd1501. In subsequent step Sd1502, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sd1501. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

If the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step Sd1503. After that, in step Sd1504, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 notify that the CZ mode has ended.

As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step Sd1503, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<Processing for the number of AT games>
In the AT game count process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 299, the AT game counter is decremented by 1 in step Sd1601. In subsequent step Sd1602, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Sd1601. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step Sd1603 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps Sd1604 to Sd1606) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set in step Sd1603, the processing for terminating the AT mode (steps Sd1607 to Sd1610) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step Sd1603, a process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step Sd1604. Then, in step Sd1604, a process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step Sd1606, a process of setting a set update command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step Sd1603, the AT mode flag is cleared in step Sd1607, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step Sd1608. Execute the process. Then, in step Sd1609, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step Sd1610, after executing a process of setting an AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT mode process ends. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode termination command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the termination of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first processing will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step Sd314 in the lottery process (FIG. 274). This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step Sd1701, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step Sd1701 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step Sd1702.

At step Sd1702, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step Sd1703. Then, in step Sd1704, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step Sd1705, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step Sd1706, the advantageous section transition processing is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter is preferably performed using, for example, the set value or the lottery result of the game. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. A value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is indicated. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the maximum number of ceiling games is set to 700. That is, after shifting to the advantageous section, the ceiling counter is set to 0 and the AT mode win flag is set by playing at least 700 games.

However, as described above, if each game is not played with a specific prescribed number of bets, the ceiling counter is not subtracted, and when a special combination is won, the game is stopped in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. The ceiling counter is not decremented even when the switches 42 to 44 are operated. Therefore, even if the number of games actually played reaches 700 or more, the ceiling counter may not reach 0 and the AT mode winning flag may not be set. In addition, the subtraction value of the ceiling counter may be a value larger than 1 in each game, and the ceiling counter is set before the number of games corresponding to the ceiling counter value set at the time of transition to the advantageous section is completed. may be 0.

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step Sd1706, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step Sd1707.

If it is determined in step Sd1701 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step Sd1708 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step Sd1708, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step Sd1702 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after executing the display start processing in step Sd1707 or after executing the display continuation processing in step Sd1708, the AT mode is executed in step Sd1709. Determine whether the flag is set. If it is determined in step Sd1709 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step Sd1710 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1709 that any AT mode flag is set, in step Sd1711, the process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step Sd1710 or step Sd1711, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step Sd1712. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step Sd1713, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step Sd1712 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step Sd1713, the result of the arithmetic processing in step Sd1712 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display portions 77a to 77e of the role ratio monitor 77 are displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step Sd1713, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step Sd1712. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the second interval display process is a process executed in step Sd416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step Sd1801, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step Sd1802, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the subsequent step Sd1803, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step Sd1803, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of insertions (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step Sd1803, the remaining game number management process is executed in step Sd1804, and the remaining number management process is executed in subsequent step Sd1805. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation, and a first excess flag containing information indicating that the first excess flag has been set is set. An excess command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, as a flag for specifying the situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and a second excess flag containing information indicating that the second excess flag is set is set. An excess command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 .

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step Sd1806, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step Sd1807. In the following step Sd1808, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step Sd1809, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing ends.

Regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step Sd1809, specifically, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section, and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step Sd1806 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step Sd1810, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step Sd1807 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the advantageous section end processing is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step Sd1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, the received command is stored in RAM 183 in step Sd1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd1901, or after the processing of step Sd1902 is executed, it is determined in step Sd1903 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. A betting command is a command output from the main controller 101 when a betting operation is performed, and is a betting command or the like set at step Sd206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step Sd1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd1903, or if the processing of step Sd1904 has been executed, it is determined in step Sd1905 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step Sd311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are an omen command, a continuation command, a set additional command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in the processing (FIG. 282). If it is one of these starting commands, a starting effect setting process is executed in step Sd1906.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd1905, or after the processing of step Sd1906 is executed, it is determined in step Sd1907 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step Sd1908, at step Sd1908, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd1907, or after the processing of step Sd1908 is executed, it is determined in step Sd1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a winning result set in step Sd419 of the reel control process (FIG. 277). In addition to commands, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the precursor command, and CZ are set in bonus state processing (Fig. 279), winning result handling processing (Fig. 291), etc. There are a start command, an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these command at the time of all stop, at step Sd1910, effect setting processing at the time of all stop is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step Sd1909, or after the processing of step Sd1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step Sd1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step Sd1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step Sd1911, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without going through the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step Sd1906 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

In step Sd2001, it is determined whether or not the received lottery result command is a lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group. As already explained, in the lottery result command setting process (FIG. 291(a)) in this embodiment, if any of the pressing order bells is selected, the pressing order bell group is set instead of the lottery result command indicating the individual result. It is configured to output the lottery result command shown. In step Sd2001, a lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group has been received, and if the game wins any of the pressing order bells, the process proceeds to step Sd2002.

In step Sd2002, it is determined whether or not any pressing order notification command has been received. As already explained, when one of the bells in the order of pressing is won during the AT mode, the operation of establishing the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination according to the type of the winning bell in the order of pressing. The configuration is such that a pressing order notification command corresponding to the order is output (see FIG. 291(b)). If any of the push order notification commands have been received, settings are made in step Sd2003 so that the corresponding push order notification effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG.

If it is determined in step Sd2001 that the lottery result command indicating the pressing order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step Sd2004 whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sd2004 and the lottery result of this game is a special role, it is determined in step Sd2005 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. As already explained, in a game in which a special role is won during the AT mode, the push order notification command corresponding to the operation order for establishing the 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is issued. It is configured to be output (see FIG. 291(b)). If the push order notification command has been received, the process advances to step Sd2003 to perform setting for performing the push order notification effect for the sixth minor winning combination on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG.

If it is determined in step Sd2004 that a lottery result command indicating a special combination has not been received, it is determined in step Sd2006 whether or not a lottery result command indicating any particular combination has been received. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 285, in the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when the special role is won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. If the lottery result of the current game is that the special combination is won, a process for setting the special combination notification effect is executed in step Sd2007. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd2002, step Sd2005, or step Sd2006, or after executing step Sd2003 or step Sd2007, the process proceeds to step Sd2008. In step Sd2008, an indication effect setting process at the start is executed. In the start-time portent effect setting process, based on the portent command set to be output in the start-time AT lottery processing in the main control device 101, the process of setting the portent mode is executed, and the portent effect of each game in the portent mode is executed. Execute the processing to set the effect. Such start-time portent effect setting processing will be described later in detail.

In subsequent step Sd2009, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The sub-side CZ flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. If the sub-side CZ flag is set, in step Sd2010, start CZ effect setting processing is executed. In the starting CZ effect setting process, a process of setting the effect of the game to be started this time is executed according to the lottery result of each game in the CZ mode. The start CZ effect setting process will also be described later in detail.

When a negative determination is made in step Sd2009, or after the processing of step Sd2010 is executed, AT effect setting processing is executed in step Sd2010. In the AT effect setting process, in a set management type AT mode in which a predetermined number of 18 games is set as one set, for example, a friendly character and an enemy character face each other, and if the set continuation condition is satisfied, the friendly character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, a process of setting a battle performance in which the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins is executed as a performance in one set. In this case, for example, in each of the 10 games in the first half of one set of games, a confrontation effect in which a friendly character and an enemy character face each other is set to be performed, and in each of the 8 games in the latter half, a confrontation effect is performed. A process for setting a battle production in which a character and an enemy character confront each other is executed.

After the AT effect setting process is executed in step Sd2011, another effect setting process is executed in step Sd2012, and then the present effect setting process is terminated. In step Sd2012, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step Sd1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 302) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the portent command, and the CZ start command. , AT start command, CZ end command, set update command, AT end command, etc., this is a process for setting effects.

In step Sd2101, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. When the CZ start command is received, in step Sd2102, the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step Sd2103, the CZ start effect is displayed as an effect when betting the next game, and an auxiliary display is performed. Effect setting processing to be performed by the unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 305(a), the CZ start effect displays on the auxiliary display section 65 that the CZ mode will start from the current game and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10). That is, when the CZ start command is received as the stop time command, after the game ends, the CZ start effect is executed based on the betting operation of the next game. By setting the sub-side CZ flag in step Sd2102, affirmative determination is made in step Sd2009 in the start-time effect setting process of the next game, and the start-time CZ effect setting process is performed.

If the determination in step Sd2101 is negative, it is determined in step Sd2104 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag has already been set. If it has already been set and the game to be ended this time is a game in the CZ mode, then in step Sd2105, a stop CZ effect setting process is executed. The stop-time CZ effect setting process is a process for correcting, at the end of the game, the effect in the CZ mode set in the above-described start-time CZ effect setting process at the start of the game. The stop CZ effect setting process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd2104, it is determined in step Sd2106 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step Sd2107 a process for setting sub-side AT flags in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in subsequent step Sd2108 an AT start process is executed. In the AT start process, for example, a process of inputting the number of games of the set to be started into a game number counter for grasping the number of games played in each set in the AT mode, or grasping the number of consecutive sets. Also, as a betting effect for the next game, a process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 306(a), the AT start effect is a display ("AT
A character display such as "start" is set. That is, when the AT start command is received as the stop time command, after the game ends, the AT start effect is executed based on the betting operation of the next game. In the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If the determination in step Sd2106 is negative, it is determined in step Sd2109 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step Sd2110, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step Sd2111. Execute. For example, as shown in FIG. 306(b), the AT end effect displays the end of the AT mode (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd2109, it is determined in step Sd2112 whether or not a set update command has been received. When a set update command has been received and one set in the AT mode is completed and the next set is to be performed, a set update process is executed in step Sd2113. In the set update process, the process of clearing the information regarding whether or not there are conditions for continuing the previous set at the start of the current set is executed, and the process of inputting the number of games in the current set into the above game number counter is executed. or

If a negative determination is made in step Sd2112, then in step Sd2114 an indication effect setting process at the time of stop is executed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are executed not only at the start of the game but also at the end of the game, and based on the result, the predictor command can be output. The stop-time portent effect setting process executes a process of setting various effects of the portent mode based on the portent command output when the game ends. Such a stop portent mode setting process will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step Sd2103, step Sd2105, step Sd2108, step Sd2111, step Sd2113 or step Sd2114, the number of games management processing is executed in step Sd2115. The number-of-games management process is a process of managing the number of games up to the ceiling from the transition to the advantageous section until winning the AT mode transition, and setting an effect when the ceiling is reached. Such game function processing will be described later in detail.

After the process of step Sd2115 is executed, another effect setting process at the time of all stop is executed at step Sd2116, and then the effect setting process at the time of all stop ends. In step Sd2116, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is executed. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

<Overview of CZ production>
Prior to the description of the CZ effect setting process at the start and the CZ effect setting process at the stop, an overview of the effects of each game in the CZ mode in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 309 and the like.

As already explained, in the CZ mode in this embodiment, it is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the normal mode. Then, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the fact that the AT mode shift is won in the game is notified, and the AT mode starts from the next game. I'm trying to be In other words, in the present embodiment, a complete notification type notification mode is adopted in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game during the CZ mode. By doing so, the flow of the game from the CZ mode to the AT mode can be made smoother, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of each game during the CZ mode.

As a specific effect of each game in the CZ mode, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable areas for numerical characters are provided in the auxiliary display section 65, and a predetermined combination of numerical characters that stop in the plurality of variable areas is displayed. As a result, the fact that the AT mode shift lottery is won is notified. In this embodiment, a predetermined combination is set when characters with the same number are stopped to form double eyes. For example, as shown in FIGS. 309(a1) to 309(c1), in the auxiliary display section 65, as the numerical character variation areas, a left variation area SP1, a middle variation area SP2, and a right variation area SP3 are set in order from the left. Numerical characters 1 to 9 are set as numerical characters to be displayed in these variable areas SP1 to SP3. Then, when each game is started, the numerical characters in these variable regions SP1 to SP3 are displayed, for example, vertically variably, and each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the numerical characters are displayed in order from the left. to stop FIG. 309(a1) shows how the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop the numeric character in the left variation area SP1, and FIG. 309(b1) shows the middle variation area by operating the middle stop switch 43 309(c1) shows how the right stop switch 44 is operated and the number characters stop in the right fluctuation area SP3. In this case, in FIG. 309, the same number "1" character is stopped in the left variation area SP1 and the middle variation area SP2, but the character "4" different from the left middle number is stopped in the right variation area SP3. characters are stopped, indicating that the predetermined combination has not been formed. In other words, the fact that the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery is notified.

Here, the stop switches 42 to 44 are provided so as to be displaceable from an initial position arranged on the front side of the slot machine 10 to an operation position arranged on the back side. The stop switches 42 to 44 are urged from the operating position to the initial position by a spring or the like as urging means, and are arranged at the initial position before being operated. By pressing the stop switches 42-44 arranged at the initial position toward the operating position and applying a force that exceeds the biasing force of the biasing means to the inner side, the stop switches 42-44 are directed toward the operating position. displacement. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are released, they return to the initial position by the biasing force of the biasing means.

The detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a to the main controller 101 change from the OFF state to the ON state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the initial positions to the operating positions, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are changed to the operating positions. to the initial position, the ON state changes to the OFF state. The main control device 101 grasps that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 rise from the OFF state to the ON state, thereby grasping that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been displaced from the initial positions toward the operating positions. By grasping that the detection signals from the stop switches 42 to 44 fall from the ON state to the OFF state, it is grasped that the stop switches 42 to 44 are displaced from the operating position toward the initial position. becomes possible.

In the following description, operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the initial position toward the operating position is also referred to as stop ON operation, and operating the stop switches 42 to 44 from the operating position toward the initial position (hand etc.) is also referred to as a stop OFF operation. The first stop ON operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop OFF operation is the first stop OFF operation, the second stop ON operation is the second stop ON operation, and the second stop ON operation is the second stop ON operation. The stop OFF operation is called a second stop OFF operation, the third stop ON operation is called a third stop ON operation, and the third stop OFF operation is called a third stop OFF operation.

In the effect during the CZ mode, the stop of the numerical character in each of the variable areas SP1-SP3 is executed based on the stop ON operation among the operations of the stop switches 42-44. That is, as shown in FIG. 309(a2), by stopping and turning on the left stop switch 42, the number character stops in the left fluctuation area SP1, and as shown in FIG. 309(b2), the middle stop switch 43 309(c2), the number character stops in the middle variation area SP2, and the number character stops in the right variation area SP3 by stopping and turning on the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 309(c2). stops.

When the first stop ON operation is performed, the number characters stop in the left fluctuation area SP1. When the second stop ON operation is performed, the number characters stop in the middle fluctuation area SP2. characters stop, and each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 where the numeric character stops is associated with the stop order of the stop switches 42 to 44 on a one-to-one basis. .about.SP3 may be associated with each of the stop switches 42-44 on a one-to-one basis. Specifically, for example, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated as the first stop ON operation, the number character stops in the middle fluctuation area SP2, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated as the second stop ON operation, the right fluctuation area The number characters may stop in SP3, and when the left stop switch 42 is operated as the third stop ON operation, the number characters may stop in the left fluctuation area SP1.

<CZ effect setting process at start>
The start time CZ effect setting process of step Sd2010 in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 303) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sd2201, it is determined whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set. If the sub-side CZ flag is not set, the main starting CZ effect setting process is terminated. When the sub-side CZ flag is set, in step Sd2202, update processing of the CZ game number display is executed. The number of games in the CZ mode is managed by the CZ effect setting process at stop, but the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining game number image GP, see FIG. 309) is , is configured to be updated at the start of the game. In step Sd2202, according to the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, the corresponding number-of-remaining-games image GP is read from the storage area of the ROM 182, and the auxiliary display section 65 is controlled so that the updated number-of-remaining-games image GP is displayed. .

After executing the CZ game count display updating process, it is determined in step Sd2203 whether or not a lottery result command indicating a specific combination has been received as a command at the start of the current game. If a lottery result command indicating a specific combination has been received, in step Sd2204, as an effect during the CZ mode of the current game, the number character to be stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed and the number character to be stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. A number character is set so that a tenpai effect (FIG. 310(a)) is performed in which the number character is the same number character. By performing the tenpai effect, it is possible to heighten expectations for forming a predetermined combination corresponding to the AT mode transition win as described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2203 that the lottery result command indicating the special combination has not been received, the process advances to step Sd2205 to determine whether or not the lottery result command indicating the special combination has been received. If the lottery result command indicating the special role has not been received, and the lottery result of the current game is neither the specific role nor the special role, then in step Sd2206, an omen command is received as a command at the start of the current game. determine whether or not there is As already explained, in the AT lottery process at the start, when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the portent command is set to be output, but the portent command is received during the CZ mode. If you do, it means that you have won the AT mode transition lottery for this game. Also, if the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, so the AT mode is started from the game following the current game.

When the portent command is received in step Sd2206, the process proceeds to step Sd2204, and the effect is set so that the above tenpai effect is performed by the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation. On the other hand, if the portent command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Sd2207, and normal tenpai effect lottery processing is executed. In the normal ten-pie effect lottery process, for example, regardless of the lottery result of the current game, a lottery is performed so that the ten-pie effect occurs with a probability of about 5%. Then, in step Sd2208, it is determined whether or not the player has won the lottery process for the ten-pie effect, and if the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step Sd2204 to perform the ten-pie effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2208 that the lottery process for the tenpai effect was not won, in step Sd2209 the number character to be stopped when the first stop ON operation is performed and the character to be stopped when the second stop ON operation is performed. A setting is made so that a separate effect (FIG. 310(b)) is performed to make the character different from the number character. By performing the separated effect, it is possible to reduce the expectation for the formation of the predetermined combination corresponding to the winning of the AT mode transition as described above.

After step Sd2204 sets the tenpai effect to be performed in the first stop ON operation and the second stop ON operation, it is determined in step Sd2210 whether or not the portent command has been received. If an omen command has been received and the result of the AT mode transition lottery of the current game is a winning result, whether to generate a bomb effect based on the third stop ON operation of the current game in step Sd2211. A lottery will determine whether or not

The bomb effect, as shown in FIG. 312(a), is a effect of stopping a numeric character in the right variation area SP3 and displaying a bomb character (bomb image BP) as a third stop ON effect. In the bomb effect, after that, after the third stop OFF operation is performed, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a), a non-explosion effect is executed in which the bomb image BP is not exploded and the non-exploded image NP is displayed. When the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect, as shown in FIG. 313(a), the state in which the predetermined combination is not formed in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 is switched to the state in which the predetermined combination is formed. Along with notification of winning the AT mode shift lottery, as shown in FIG. 313(b), an AT winning effect is performed. On the other hand, when the non-explosive bomb effect is executed, as shown in FIG. As a notification that the mode transition lottery was not won, a loss re-display effect is performed.

Here, the bomb image BP is set so as to be displayed in an area that does not overlap with the number characters in the right variation area SP3. Specifically, the bomb image BP is displayed in front of the number characters in the middle variation area SP2. While overlapping with the character of the number concerned, it is displayed at a position not overlapping with the character of the number in the right variation area SP3 and also not overlapping with the character of the number in the left variation area SP1. By doing so, by displaying the bomb image BP, it becomes difficult or impossible to comprehend the numeric character in the right fluctuation area SP3 that is stopped when the third stop ON operation is performed. can be preferably avoided.

On the other hand, the explosion image EP (FIG. 312(b)) is displayed in front of the numerical characters stopped in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 so as to overlap these numerical characters. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the explosion image EP is set to be displayed to such an extent that the number characters cannot be visually recognized. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity when a predetermined combination of numeric characters is formed after an explosion.

In the winning bomb effect lottery process in step Sd2211, it is determined whether or not to generate a bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. In the present embodiment, for example, it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, for example, the lottery triggered by the chance number A among the specific roles is more likely to generate a bomb effect than the lottery triggered by the chance number C. Explosive effects are made to occur more easily as a result. After executing the bomb effect lottery process, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery is won in step Sd2212. 311(a)) in which a character with the same number as the character with the same number as the character being stopped is stopped and a predetermined combination is formed. Then, in step Sd2214, setting is made so that the AT win effect (FIG. 311(b)) is performed based on the third stop OFF operation of the current game, and then the main starting CZ effect setting process is terminated. The AT winning effect is set so that, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a soldier's character roaring to congratulate the winning of the AT mode transition.

In step Sd2212, if the explosion effect lottery at the time of winning AT mode transition is not won, in step Sd2215, a character with a number different from the character with the number stopped in the tenpai effect at the time of the third stop ON operation. 310(a)) is set to be performed. Also, if it is determined in step Sd2210 that the portent command has not been received, then in step Sd2216 the character with a number different from the character with the number stopped by the tenpai effect is stopped at the time of the third stop ON operation. 310(a)) is set to be performed. Furthermore, in the case where the random number effect is performed instead of the tenpai effect, after the processing of step Sd2209 is executed, in step Sd2217, the character with the random number is stopped at the time of the third stop ON operation (Fig. 310). Set so that (b)) is performed.

After executing the process of step Sd2216 or step Sd2217, the process proceeds to step Sd2218. In step Sd2218, it is determined whether or not a special combination flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The special combination flag is a flag that is set in step Sd2222 when the special combination is won. Since a negative determination is made in step Sd2205 this time, it means that the special combination flag is not set.

In step Sd2219, it is determined by lottery whether or not to generate a bomb effect based on the third stop ON operation of the current game.

In step Sd2219, in the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition is not won, it is determined whether or not to generate the bomb effect according to the lottery result of the game. For example, a lottery triggered by a specific role is more likely to generate a bomb performance than a lottery triggered by a role other than a specific role. After the bomb effect lottery process is executed, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect lottery is won in step Sd2220, and if not, the starting CZ effect setting process is terminated. If the bomb effect lottery is won, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation in step Sd2221, and then the start time CZ effect setting processing is terminated.

In this way, in accordance with the lottery result of each game and the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the start of the game, double eyes effect is performed in the variable areas SP1 to SP3 to notify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. is performed, and the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won is notified by performing a tenpai misplacement performance or a loose performance.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the game is a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is performed, but the second operation mode is performed. Then the AT mode transition lottery is not performed. Then, as described above, when a special role is won, the AT mode shift lottery is not performed in the start AT lottery process, and the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the stop AT lottery process. Therefore, at the start of the CZ mode, it is possible to determine that the special role has been won, but it is not possible to determine whether the AT mode shift lottery is successful or not. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery executed at the time of stop based on the special role is started in advance as a variable display of each of the variable areas SP1 to SO3, and the effect at the time of stop After the AT mode transition lottery is executed, the pre-started performance is set to be corrected in accordance with the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

Specifically, when it is determined at step Sd2205 that a lottery result command indicating a special combination has been received, at step Sd2222 a process of setting a special combination flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. Then, in step Sd2223, a tenpai effect lottery process for a special combination is executed. This tenpai effect lottery process is set so that the winning probability is different from that of the tenpai effect lottery process in step Sd2207. More specifically, step Sd2223 is set so that the tenpai effect will occur at a probability of 30%.

After executing the ten-pie effect lottery process in step Sd2223, it is determined whether or not the ten-pie effect lottery is won in step Sd2208. I do. By the way, at the time of winning the special role, since the precursor command is not output in the AT lottery process at the start, even if the tenpai effect is performed, a negative determination is made in step Sd2210, and the process proceeds to step Sd2216. It is set so that a tenpai out production is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined at step Sd2208 that the ten-pie effect lottery is not won, a set effect is performed at steps Sd2209 and Sd2217.

After executing the process of step Sd2216 or step Sd2217, as described above, the process proceeds to step Sd2218 to determine whether or not the special combination flag is set. Since the special combination flag is set this time, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd2218, and the process proceeds to step Sd2221. In step Sd2221, as described above, the bomb image BP is set to be displayed based on the third stop ON operation.

That is, in the special role winning game, the tenpai performance is set to occur more easily than when the special role is not won, and the bomb performance of displaying the bomb image BP always occurs when the third stop ON operation is performed.

<CZ effect setting process at stop>
Next, the stop time CZ effect setting process of step Sd2105 in the stop time effect setting process (FIG. 304) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Sd2301, it is determined whether or not the bomb effect is being executed. If the bomb effect is being executed, it is determined in step Sd2302 whether or not a portent command has been received as the current start command or stop command. As described above, if the precursor command is received during the CZ mode, it is the case that the AT mode transition lottery is won, and if the precursor command is received as the start command, it is AT at the start AT lottery process. In the case where the mode transition lottery is won and the portent command is received as the stop command, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed. This is the case when the winner is elected. Also in this case, since the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the AT mode is started from the game next to the game that ends this time.

If the portent command has been received, in step Sd2303, an explosion effect (FIG. 312(b)) is performed in which the bomb image BP is switched to the explosion image EP in the current bomb effect. Then, in step Sd2304, when the explosion effect ends, a double eye effect (Fig. 313(a)) is set to be performed. )) is set to be performed, and then this stop time CZ effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the portent command is not received in step Sd2302, the flow advances to step Sd2306 so that the unexploded effect (FIG. 314(a)) in which the bomb image BP is switched to the unexploded image NP in the current bomb effect is performed. set to Then, in step Sd2307, when the misfire effect ends, the setting is made so that the loss re-display effect (FIG. 314(b)) in which the originally displayed tenpai misfires and loose dots are displayed is performed.

If it is determined in step Sd2308 that the bomb effect is not being executed, or if the processing of step Sd2307 is executed, it is determined in step Sd2308 whether the CZ game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is 0. judge. The CZ game number counter receives the number of CZ mode games (10) at the start of the CZ mode. If the CZ game number counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game number counter is executed in step Sd2309, and then the stop time CZ effect setting process is terminated. In this case, at step Sd2202 in the start time CZ effect setting process, the CZ game number display is updated so that the remaining game number image GP corresponding to the value of the CZ game number counter decremented at step Sd2309 is displayed. process.

If the CZ game number counter is 0 at step Sd2308, then at step Sd2310 the processing for setting the CZ mode end effect is performed, and then the stop CZ effect setting process is terminated. As shown in FIG. 305(b), the CZ mode end effect is set such that the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. When the misfire effect in step Sd2306 and the failure re-display effect in step Sd2307 are set, the CZ mode end effect is performed after the misfire effect and failure re-display effect are performed.

<Direction of special role winning game>
Next, the effect of the special role winning game during the CZ mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. FIG. 315(a1) shows a case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game and wins the AT mode transition lottery, and FIG. 315(b1) shows the special role winning game. This shows the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the game and the AT mode shift lottery is not won. As already explained, if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor role winning is established and one medal is paid out, while if the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode Eight medals are paid out when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are established.

At ta1, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start to rotate based on the operation of the start lever 41. FIG. Then, the lottery process is performed based on the start operation of the ta1, and if the special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery is not won in the start AT lottery process executed at the ta1. In addition, during the CZ mode, the variable display of numeric characters in each of the variable regions SP1 to SP3 is started based on the ta1 start operation.

When the first stop ON operation is performed at ta2, as shown in FIG. 315(a2), the numeric characters stop in the left fluctuation area SP1. Also, when the second stop ON operation is performed at ta3, as shown in FIG. The figure shows a case where the player wins the lottery in the tenpai effect lottery process for the special role (step Sd2220), and in FIG. 315(a3), the tenpai effect is performed. Then, when the third stop ON operation is performed at ta4, as shown in FIG. 315(a4), the number characters stop in the right variation area SP3 so as to produce a ten-pie-out performance, and the bomb performance is started. be. These, Figure 315 (a2) ~ Figure 315 (a4) effect is set in the start time CZ effect setting process, prior to set before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special role is performed equivalent to a performance.

As described above, the winning result handling process (FIG. 292) on the main controller 101 side is executed at step Sd415 in the reel control process (FIG. 277), and is executed after the payout determination process (step Sd413). That is, the winning result handling process is executed after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and the medal payout based on the stop is completed.

In this case, after the bomb effect is started based on the third stop ON operation at ta4, when the third stop OFF operation is performed at ta5, the medal payout based on the 33rd minor win is started. Then, after the medal payout is completed at ta6, the stop AT lottery process is executed, and as a result, the precursor command is received and the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect at ta6 (Fig. 315 (a5)). After that, at ta7, the explosion effect is switched to double eyes effect (FIG. 315(a6)), and AT winning effect is executed at ta8 (FIG. 315(a7)). In this way, the notification that the AT mode shift lottery has been won in the game started at ta1 (FIG. 315(a7)) is performed. In this case, the AT mode is started from the game following the current game.

When the operation is performed in the second operation mode in the special winning game, as shown in FIG. 315(b1), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate based on the start operation performed at tb1. Then, based on the first stop ON operation at tb2, the number characters stop in the left fluctuation area SP1 (FIG. 315(b2)), and based on the second stop ON operation at tb3, the number characters stop in the middle fluctuation area SP2. (FIG. 315(b3)), based on the third stop ON operation at tb4, the number characters stop in the right variation area SP3, and the bomb effect is started (FIG. 315(b4)). These effects of Figure 315 (b2) ~ Figure 315 (b4) are also set in the CZ effect setting process at the start, and are set before the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stop based on the special role is performed. equivalent to a performance.

As described above, if you operate in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning, which has more medals paid out than the 33rd minor role winning, will be established and 8 medals will be awarded. Payment is made.

Then, after performing the third stop OFF operation at tb5, at tb7, which is later than tb6 when the payout of one medal at the time of winning the 33rd minor winning combination is completed, the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are won. The payout of 8 medals based on is completed. That is, the AT lottery process for stopping in the winning result handling process is executed at tb7 after tb6, and the result of the AT mode transition lottery at the time of stopping can also be grasped at tb7.

In this case, the bomb effect started from tb4 is switched to a non-explosion effect at tb7, and after that, the failure re-display effect is performed at tb8, and the result of the AT mode shift lottery for this game was a failure result. is notified.

Although detailed explanation with a figure is omitted, in the case of operating in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, if AT mode transition winning is not won in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, CZ effect at the time of stop of ta6 In the setting process, it is determined that the portent command has not been received, and in this case, the bomb effect is switched to the non-explosion effect at ta6, and after that, the missed re-display effect is displayed at ta7.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the game is a special combination, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the first operation mode, one medal can be paid out, While the AT mode transition lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is executed, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game is the second operation mode, 8 cards, which is more than the first operation mode. , and the AT mode shift lottery, which is one of the processes related to the instruction function, is not executed. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode in the game of reducing the reduction of the medals held, and it is more advantageous to the player to operate in the first operation mode in the game of aiming to shift to the AT mode. . In this way, since the player can select which game to play, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the diverse needs of the player.

On top of that, in the special role winning game, after setting to perform a bomb effect corresponding to the special role from the start of the game, depending on the result of the AT mode transition lottery performed at the end of the special role winning game Since the bomb effect can be switched between an explosive effect and a non-explosive effect, even if the special role differs in whether or not the processing related to the instruction function is executed or in the execution mode depending on the operation mode, it is possible to win the special role. It is possible to notify the result of the processing related to the instruction function in the new game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification of the result of the processing related to the instruction function from being carried over to the next game and beyond, and as a so-called complete notification type notification mode, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the notification of the result in each game. It becomes possible.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the AT mode is started from the game following the game in which the transition lottery was won. Even if the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won, the AT mode can be started from the next game after notifying the winning of the AT mode shift. Therefore, there is no need to delay the start timing of the AT mode due to the game result or the circumstances of the notification side, and smooth game characteristics can be realized while simplifying the processing.

Since the stop AT lottery process is executed after the payout of medals is completed, the period from the third stop OFF operation to the stop AT lottery process is the second in the special winning game. The case of operating in the first operation mode and the case of operating in the second operation mode in the special role winning game are different. 312(a1) and 312(a2), when the bomb effect is started by the third stop ON operation, after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 312(b2), , as shown in FIG. 312(b1), the period until the explosion effect occurs is the period A (from ta5 to ta6 in FIG. 315) until one medal payout based on the 33rd minor win is completed. On the other hand, when the explosion effect is started by the third stop ON operation, after the third stop OFF operation is performed as shown in FIG. 314(b2), the misfire effect occurs as shown in FIG. 314(b1). The period until is the B period (tb5 to tb6 in Figure 315) until the payout of 8 medals based on the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is completed, and the B period is better than the A period. set to be long. In this case, the timing at which the bomb effect is switched to the explosion effect for the winning side of the AT mode transition arrives earlier than the timing for switching to the non-explosive effect for the non-winning side to the AT mode transition. In this way, when the AT mode shift winning side performance is performed, it is possible to ensure the time for performing the AT winning performance as well as the double eyes performance using each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the bomb effect is not limited to the special role winning game, but the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition wins (step Sd2211) and the bomb effect lottery process when the AT mode transition does not win (step Sd2219). ), the standby period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed to when the stop CZ effect setting process is performed in the situation where the bomb effect is being performed is The length is different according to the lottery result of the game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 316, the waiting period from when the third stop OFF operation is performed in the special role winning game to when the stop CZ effect setting process is performed is 1 in the first operation mode. The A period corresponds to the period during which one medal is paid out, and more specifically, it is about 0.5 sec. On the other hand, the waiting period in the special role winning game is a period corresponding to the period during which eight medals are paid out in the second operation mode, and is a period B that is longer than the period A, and is longer than the period A. Specifically, it is about 4.0 sec.

The waiting period in the watermelon winning game is a period corresponding to the period during which three medals are paid out, and is longer than the A period and shorter than the B period, and is more specifically about 1.5 seconds. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, out of the replay results, the period during which the same number of bets as the number of bets for the game in which the normal response A to C was won in the replay process based on the winning of the normal response A to C is set. , the period in which the same number of bets is set as the number of bets for games in which the chances A to C and cherries A to C are won in the replay processing based on the winning of chances A to C and cherries A to C are different. The period of betting in the normal replays A to C is set to be longer than the period of betting in the chances A to C and the betting periods in the cherries A to C. In addition, the bet period for the chance numbers A to C and the cherries A to C is set to have the same length as the period for paying out the same number of medals. In this way, it gives the impression that the special wins such as the chance numbers A to C and the cherry A to C constituted by the replay results are treated in the same way as the results of the small wins in which medals are paid out, such as the watermelon. It is possible to give the impression that the results are different from the replay results such as Lips A to C.

Then, the above-mentioned waiting period in the normal reply A to C winning game is a period corresponding to the period in which three bets are made, and the D period is longer than the above C period and shorter than the B period in the watermelon winning game. and more specifically about 3.0 sec.

In addition, the above-mentioned waiting period in the chance A to C or cherry A to C winning games is the same length of period as the period in which three medals are paid out, even if it is a period in which three bets are made. , which is the same length as the period C in the watermelon winning game, specifically about 1.5 sec.

These periods A to C are periods in which there is a possibility that the bomb effect will transition to an explosion effect, and thus the period required for payout of medals according to the game result and the period required for setting bets in replay processing. Since the period until the explosion effect occurs is diversified by utilizing the fact that the .

Then, the explosion effect is most likely to occur in the A period of the first operation mode in the special role winning game, and the C period of the watermelon winning game, the chances A to C, and the cherry A to C winning game is likely to occur. Next, it is set so that the explosion effect is likely to occur during the D period of the normal reply A to C winning game, and that the explosion effect does not occur during the B period of the second operation mode in the special role winning game. On top of that, since the A period is the shortest, and the C period, D period, and B period are set to be longer in that order, it is expected that the explosion effect will occur earlier, but at least until the D period. It is possible to make people look forward to the occurrence of , and it is possible to suitably increase the attention of the explosion effect.

Furthermore, in relation to the pressing order bell winning game, eight medals are paid out when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination. , the waiting period is the B period. In this case, since it is set so as not to win the AT mode shift lottery when the push order bell wins (Fig. 285), there is no need to switch to the AT win announcement side effect after the B period has passed, and it can be done in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity and an increase in processing load when trying to force a performance.

Further, when the bell is won in the pressing order, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an incorrect operation order that does not correspond to the winning of the 1st to the 6th minor winning combination, one medal is paid out or the medal is paid out. is not performed, the waiting period is 0 or A period. In other words, even during the period A when one medal is paid out, none of the small wins was established, or the 9th to 32nd minor wins were established instead of the 33rd minor win. If it is held, the stop switch 42 to 44 is operated in the first operation mode so that the attention to the stop result can be increased and the 33rd minor winning combination is established. It is possible to prompt the user to operate.

<Regarding the number of omen games>
Next, the effect in the portent mode set based on the portent command will be described. The portent mode is a mode in which, in the event that an AT mode transition lottery or a CZ mode transition lottery is won, a portent effect suggesting that the transition lottery has been won can be executed in each game. In a game in which the number of predictive games is 0, notification of winning the AT mode transition or winning of the CZ mode transition is set to be performed.

As already explained, the number of portent games is determined by the number of portent games lottery processing when the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery processing and the stop AT lottery processing on the main control unit 101 side. It is determined in (step Sd817, step Sd1320). As described above, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 games.

Here, the number of precursor games in the normal mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

As described above, the number of precursor games is set to be selected from 0 games to 40 games. In this embodiment, the number of premonitory games that are likely to be selected differs between the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. is set to In addition, the number of premonition games that are likely to be selected is set to be different between when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the start AT lottery process and when the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the stop AT lottery process. It is Furthermore, the number of premonitory games that are likely to be selected differs depending on whether the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start or the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start. The number of predictive games that are likely to be selected is set to be different between the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the time AT lottery process and the case of winning the CZ mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process. .

Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, either one of 1 game to 5 games or 15 games to 40 games is set as the number of predictive games, whereas the stop When the AT mode transition lottery is won in the time AT lottery process, any one of 1 game to 12 games is set as the number of predictive games. In addition, if the CZ mode transition lottery is won in the AT lottery process at the start, any one of 1 game to 32 games is set as the number of precursor games, whereas the CZ mode is set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop. If the transfer lottery is won, any one of 1 game to 7 games is set as the number of predictive games.

The case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery in the stop AT lottery process is only when the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, and the player has the opportunity to win the transition. There is a high possibility that you clearly understand the special role winning game that has become. On the other hand, in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start, although the winning of a specific role is often triggered, chances A to C and cherry A to C is based on the results of replays, so there is no chance of losing a game, and the success or failure of the transfer lottery is not affected by whether or not there is a loss. There is also sex. Furthermore, regarding the CZ mode transition lottery, since it is possible to win the transition with normal reps A to C instead of the specific role, it is difficult to determine in which game the CZ mode transition has been won. Therefore, by facilitating the selection of a relatively long number of precursor games in the process for AT lottery at the time of start when there is a possibility that the player may not realize that a transfer win has been made, AT mode or CZ mode can be easily selected from any situation. It is possible to give the impression that the transition win can be given, and it is possible to provide a surprise when the notification of the transition win is made, and by doing so, the attention of each game in the normal mode It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the degree. Conversely, the number of predictive games determined in the stop AT lottery process triggered by the special winning combination is made easier to select a number of games that is shorter than the number of predictive games determined in the start AT lottery process. Thus, it is possible to shorten the period from grasping that the transfer lottery that is likely to be won is executed to reporting the result of success or failure, thereby preventing sluggishness in the game.

Comparing the case where the AT mode transition lottery is won and the case where the CZ mode transition lottery is won, both the AT lottery process at the start and the AT lottery process at the time of stop are set predictive games. It is set so that the number of predictive games is likely to be longer when the AT mode transition lottery is won. By doing so, the player who grasps that it is in the precursor mode from the precursor effect of each game or the like desires that the precursor mode continues as long as possible, and the player is encouraged to switch to the AT mode. It is possible to increase the percentage of games that attract more attention by using expectations.

In particular, the number of predictive games set when the AT mode transition wins in the start AT lottery process and the predictive game number set when the CZ mode transition wins in the start AT lottery process are different when the CZ mode transition wins. The number of precursor games up to 32 is selected, whereas the number of precursor games of 33 or more can be selected when the AT mode transition wins. By doing so, the player who has grasped that it is the omen mode will pay attention to each production in the omen mode while expecting that it will continue for 33 games or more, and will pay attention to each production. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is not won, the same or similar omen effect as the omen mode effect is executed, and the AT mode transition lottery is finally won. A pseudo-prediction mode is set in which no notification of the fact that it has been won or that the CZ mode transition has been won is performed.

The number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is set to be selected from 1 game to 6 games and 10 games to 18 games. In this case, when the state in which the portent effect is performed continues for 19 games or more, the portent mode based on the AT mode transition winning or the CZ mode transition winning is determined. Therefore, the player who grasps that it is the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode from the omen production desires that the mode continues for 19 games or more, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game. be.

In the starting AT lottery process and the stopping AT lottery process in the main controller 101, the number of precursory games is determined based on the table of the number of precursory games set as described above, and the information of the number of precursory games is determined. to the display control device 81.

Hereinafter, the start-time precursor effect setting process, the stop-time precursor effect setting process, and the number-of-games management process, which are processes on the display control device 81 side, will be described.

<Omen effect setting process at start>
First, the starting portent effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 318 . The start-time sign effect setting process is a process executed at step Sd2008 in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 303).

In step Sd2401, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the normal mode. In the case of the CZ mode or the AT mode, or in the case of the normal section, the main start-time portent effect setting processing is terminated as it is. If it is normal mode, the process proceeds to step Sd2402.

In step Sd2402, it is determined whether or not the sub-side precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 183b are greater than zero. The sub-side omen counter is a counter to which a value corresponding to the number of omen games is input when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, and which is decremented by one each time the game is completed. That is, the process of step Sd2402 is the process of determining whether or not the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode is in progress.

If it is determined that the sub-side portent counter is 0 and the device is not in the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode, it is determined in step Sd2403 whether or not a portent command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If no portent command has been received, a pseudo portent lottery process is executed in step Sd2404. The pseudo portent lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to set the above-described pseudo portent mode. In the pseudo-prediction lottery process, a table for pseudo-prediction lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-prediction mode according to the lottery result of the current game. The pseudo sign lottery table in the present embodiment is set so that the less likely it is to appear as the lottery result of each game, the easier it is to win the pseudo sign lottery. is set to make it easier to win the pseudo omen lottery. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is likely to be won and the transition lottery is not won, the pseudo portent mode is likely to occur.

After the pseudo sign lottery processing is executed, it is determined whether or not the pseudo sign lottery is won in step Sd2405, and if not, the starting sign effect setting processing is terminated. If the pseudo-prediction lottery is won, in step Sd2406, a process of setting a pseudo-prediction flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed, and in step Sd2407, a pseudo-prediction game count lottery process is executed. In the pseudo portent game count lottery process, the number of games table for the pseudo portent mode (FIG. 317) is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the number of portent games in the current pseudo portent mode is determined by lottery.

On the other hand, in step Sd2403, if the portent command is received in a situation other than portent mode or pseudo portent mode, the process proceeds to step Sd2408. In step Sd2408, it is determined whether or not the received portent command is triggered by winning the AT mode shift lottery. If the precursor command is triggered by winning the CZ mode transition lottery instead of the precursor command output by winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in step Sd2409 various flag storage areas 183a are stored. A process for setting the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is executed. On the other hand, if it is triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery, in step Sd2410, a process of setting the sub-side AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. After executing the process of step Sd2409 or step Sd2410, in step Sd2411, the process of grasping information on the number of precursor games set in the received precursor command is executed.

After executing the pseudo precursor game number lottery process in step Sd2407 or after executing the process of grasping the number of precursor games for the precursor mode in step Sd2411, the above-mentioned sub-side precursor counter is set to the pseudo precursor in step Sd2412. A process of inputting a value corresponding to the number of portent games in mode or portent mode is executed. Through such processing, affirmative determination is made in step Sd2402 of the next game.

After executing the processing of step Sd2412, it is determined in step Sd2413 whether or not the number of games input in step Sd2412 is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (8 games). If the number of games is 8 or less, in step Sd2414, after executing the processing of setting the first portent mode effect as the portent effect in the current portent mode or the pseudo portent mode, the main start portent effect setting process is terminated. In the first omen mode effect in this embodiment, a continuous effect is set that continues over a maximum of predetermined games (eight games). . The destination of the main character is determined according to the number of remaining precursor games, and whether or not an enemy character will be encountered in each game is notified. In a game in which the number of omen games is 0, in the omen mode, it is displayed that an enemy character is encountered and a battle is started, and in the pseudo omen mode, it is displayed that the search is given up without encountering the enemy character. is displayed.

If it is determined in step Sd2413 that the number of precursor games is greater than the predetermined number of games, it is determined in step Sd2415 whether or not the sub-side AT mode win flag is set. If the sub-side AT mode winning flag is not set, and the CZ mode transition winning is the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode, in step Sd2416, the precursor effect in the current precursor mode or pseudo precursor mode. After executing the processing for setting the second portent mode effect, the main start portent effect setting processing is terminated. In the second omen mode effect in this embodiment, a continuous effect is set over at least the number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (eight games). A production for training is set. Then, the content of training for the main character is determined according to the remaining number of precursor games, and a state of performing the determined training is displayed, and whether or not a battle with an enemy character is started in each game is determined. is notified. In a game where the number of precursor games is 0, in the precursor mode, a battle with an enemy character is displayed, and in the pseudo precursor mode, the main character is injured during training and battles with the enemy character. A state of giving up is displayed.

If it is determined in step Sd2415 that the sub-side AT mode win flag has been set, and the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by the AT mode transition win, and the number of portent games is greater than the predetermined number of games, The process proceeds to step Sd2417. In step Sd2417, a third predictor lottery process is executed.

Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described first omen mode effect and second omen mode effect, a third omen mode effect that determines AT mode transition winning is determined when selected as the effect during the omen mode. Omen mode production is set. In the 3 omen mode effects in the present embodiment, a continuous effect is set over at least the number of games greater than the predetermined number of games (eight games). The production is set to display the state of devising a strategy in a narrow room. Then, depending on the number of remaining precursor games, the main character is displayed to have an idea of a strategy or to worry about it, and whether or not a battle with an enemy character will start in each game is announced. In a game in which the number of premonitory games is 0, a battle with an enemy character is started.

At step Sd2417, it is determined by lottery whether or not the above-mentioned third omen mode effect is to be set. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process is set differently according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process in the main process of the main controller 101, and setting 6 is the highest. The probability of winning is high, and setting 1 has the lowest probability of winning.

After executing the third predictor lottery process in step Sd2417, it is determined whether or not the third predictor lottery process is won in step Sd2418. After executing the process of setting the mode effect, the present indication effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the player wins in the third predictive lottery process, the process of setting the third predictive mode effect is executed in step Sd2719, and then the present start time predictive effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, each effect of the omen mode is set based on the reception of the omen command, and each effect of the pseudo omen mode is set by winning the pseudo omen lottery in a situation other than the omen mode. If it is determined in step Sd2402 that the sub-side omen counter is greater than 0, and the game is started in a situation where the omen mode or pseudo omen mode has already been set, the process proceeds to step Sd2420, where the pseudo omen flag is set. By determining whether or not it is set, it is possible to grasp whether the port mode is the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode.

If it is the pseudo portent mode, the process advances to step Sd2421 to determine whether or not a portent command has been received as a command at the start of the current game. If an omen command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is won during the pseudo omen mode, the pseudo omen flag is cleared in step Sd2422, and then the process proceeds to step Sd2408. In this case, a process (steps Sd2408 to Sd2419) is executed to change the content of the effect of the pseudo portent mode to the content of the effect of the portent mode.

If it is determined in step Sd2420 that the mode is the portent mode instead of the pseudo portent mode, or if the portent command is not received as the command at the start of the current game even in the pseudo portent mode in step Sd2421, step Sd2423 , and executes processing for subtracting 1 from the sub-side precursor counter. Then, in step Sd2424, the process of setting the precursor effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side precursor counter to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed, and then the main start effect precursor setting process is terminated. do.

<Prediction effect setting processing at stop time>
Next, the stop-time portent effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 319 . The stop sign effect setting process is a process executed in step Sd2114 in the all stop effect setting process (FIG. 304).

In step Sd2501, similarly to step Sd2401, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal mode, and if it is in the CZ mode or the AT mode or in the normal section, the stop-time precursor effect setting process is terminated. If it is in the normal mode, it is determined in step Sd2502 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than 0, and whether or not it is already in the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is grasped. If the sub-side portent counter is 0, it is determined in step Sd2503 whether or not a portent command has been received as the current game stop command. If it has not been received, the present stop-time portent effect setting process is terminated as it is. That is, in the stop-time portent effect setting processing, processing for setting the pseudo portent mode is not provided. In this way, by entrusting the setting of the pseudo portent mode to the starting portent effect setting processing, it is possible to eliminate duplication of processing and simplify the processing configuration.

If the portent command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sd2504. As already explained, the case where the portent command is output as the stop command is the case where the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won after being operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game. is. In this case, in step Sd2504, it is determined whether or not it is an omen command based on the AT mode transition winning, that is, when the special combination is won, the AT mode transition lottery among the processes related to the instruction function is won by operating in the first operation mode. It is determined whether or not it is the case. If the AT mode transition lottery is not won even though the operation is performed in the first operation mode, but the CZ mode transition lottery among the processing related to the instruction function is won, the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set in step Sd2505. Execute. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, a process of setting the sub-side AT mode winning flag is executed in step Sd2506. After executing the process of step Sd2505 or step Sd2506, the process of grasping the number of precursor games is executed in step Sd2507.

After grasping the number of precursor games, in steps Sd2508 to Sd2515, similarly to the processing of steps Sd2512 to Sd2519, the number of precursor games is input to the sub side precursor counter. When is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, the first omen mode effect is performed, and when the number of games is greater than the predetermined number of games, the second omen mode effect or the third omen mode effect is performed, and then at the time of the main stop. The portent effect setting process is ended. In this embodiment, the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process in step Sd2513 and the winning probability of the third predictor lottery process in step Sd2417 are set to be different. , the lower the setting, the easier it is to win the third omen lottery, and step Sd2417 is set so that the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the third omen lottery. By doing so, in predicting the set value, it is grasped whether the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the start or the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process at the stop is won. As the need arises, it becomes possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the lottery results of each game. In addition, by doing so, it is possible to average the occurrence rate of the third precursor mode effect according to the set value when the start time and the stop time are combined.

If it is determined in step Sd2502 that the sub-side portent counter is greater than 0, it is determined in step Sd2516 whether or not the pseudo portent flag is set. If it is set, it is determined in step Sd2517 whether or not an omen command has been received as the current game stop command, and if it has been received, the pseudo omen flag is cleared in step Sd2518. After that, in steps Sd2504 to Sd2515, the process of rewriting from the pseudo precursor mode to the precursor mode is executed. If the pseudo precursor mode is not set at step Sd2516, or if the precursor command is not received at step Sd2517, the stop-time precursor effect setting process is terminated.

<Number of games management process>
Next, the number-of-games management process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The number-of-games management process is a process executed in step Sd2115 in the all-stop effect setting process (FIG. 304). Execute processing to set the effect when reaching

In step Sd2601, it is determined whether or not it is the normal mode or the CZ mode, and if it is the AT mode or during the normal section, the stop-time precursor effect setting process is terminated. If it is the normal mode or the CZ mode, in step Sd2602, a process of adding 1 to the sub-side game number counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The sub-side game number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games from the transition to the advantageous section to the start of the AT mode. A counter that is cleared to 0 when In the subsequent step Sd2603, update processing of the display of the number of games is executed. Specifically, the display of the number of games after transition to the advantageous interval displayed in a predetermined area of the auxiliary display section 65 (advantageous interval game number image AP, see FIG. 321) is changed to the value of the sub-side game counter in step Sd2602. Execute processing to update the display accordingly.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games is set, and when the number of games played by a specific prescribed number reaches the ceiling game number, the AT mode transition lottery is performed. The AT mode winning flag is set without the AT mode winning flag (see FIG. 286, process for AT lottery at the start). In this embodiment, the maximum number of games is set to 700, and by playing at least 700 games, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed (FIG. 321(a)).

In addition, in this embodiment, when performing the process of subtracting the ceiling counter according to the completion of each game, after executing the subtraction value lottery process (step Sd1304), a number greater than 1 may be subtracted. I'm trying In this subtraction value lottery process, particularly, a large subtraction value is likely to be selected with a special role as a trigger (Fig. 294). However, even in the special winning game, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is executed, but if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the subtraction value lottery process is not executed. However, the ceiling counter is not decremented in the game.

That is, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. is selected and subtracted from the ceiling counter, the ceiling counter may become 0 in fewer games than 700 games at t4 (t3). On the other hand, when the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. In the game, the ceiling counter is not decremented, so even if the actual number of games played reaches 700 at t4, the ceiling counter does not become 0. At t5, which is later than that, the ceiling counter does not become 0. become.

That is, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, even if the display of the number of games after transition to the advantageous section (advantageous section game number image AP) reaches 700, which is the maximum ceiling number of games, the AT mode winning flag is not set. There will be cases.

In the number-of-games management process, after executing the process of step Sd2603, it is determined in step Sd2604 whether or not a subtraction value command has been received as the current game stop command. If the subtraction value command has been received, in step Sd2605 the current subtraction value is grasped from the subtraction value command, and the absolute value of the subtraction value is added to the sub-side ceiling counter in the various counter areas 183b. do. Incidentally, as described above, the case where the subtraction value command is output from the main controller 101 in the special role winning game is the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode, and in the second operation mode. When operated by , the subtraction value command is not output.

If it is determined in step Sd2604 that the subtraction value command has not been received, or p after the processing of step Sd2605 has been executed, then in step Sd2606 the sub-side game number counter reaches a value corresponding to the ceiling game number. determine whether or not there is Specifically, when the ceiling game number is set to 700, when the sub-side game number counter updated in step Sd2602 reaches 700, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd2606. If the sub-side game number counter is different from the ceiling game number, the game number management process is terminated.

As described above, the sub-side game number counter is cleared to 0 when a shift to AT mode occurs or when the advantageous section ends. The case of reaching means that although the game has been executed over the ceiling number of games, the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, in step Sd2607, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT mode winning flag or the sub-side CZ mode winning flag is set. The case where any winning flag is set means that the ceiling counter on the side of the main control unit 101 is set to 0 and the portent mode is set, or after winning the CZ mode shift lottery. means. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd2607, and the number-of-games management process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step Sd2607, and it is determined that the sub-side AT mode win flag or sub-side CZ mode win flag is not set even though the number of ceiling games has been consumed, step Sd2607 Proceeding to Sd2608, the process of calculating the difference between the number of ceiling games (700) and the sub-side ceiling counter is executed. In other words, for example, the number of games for which the number of ceiling games has not been subtracted is grasped by performing an operation in the second operation mode when the special combination is won (see FIG. 321(c)). As a result, it is possible to ascertain how many more games will be needed to reach the ceiling.

After executing the process of step Sd2608, the process of setting the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step Sd2609. Then, in step Sd2610, a process of inputting the actual number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling grasped in step Sd2608 to the sub-side precursor counter is executed. That is, in this case, the setting of the pseudo precursor mode is performed over the actual number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached.

Then, in step Sd2611, it is determined whether or not the number of actual remaining games until reaching the ceiling is equal to or less than a predetermined number of games (8 games). If the number of games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of games, then in step Sd2612 a process of setting the precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode as the first precursor mode effect is executed, and then the game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of actual remaining games until the ceiling is reached is greater than the predetermined number of games, the process of setting the current precursor effect in the pseudo precursor mode as the third precursor mode effect is executed, and then the actual number of games is executed. End management processing.

In this case, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 on the main controller 101 side, the AT mode winning flag is set and the portent command is output. Then, processing for rewriting the precursory mode from the pseudo precursory mode to the precursory mode (steps Sd2420 to Sd2422, steps Sd2408 to Sd2419) is executed in the start-time precursor effect setting process, and the number of precursor games based on reaching the ceiling is exhausted. , a transition to the AT mode occurs.

Here, the number of ceiling games in this embodiment is set to 700 games, the probability of winning the special role is about 1/20, and the number of special role winning games is about 35 on average until the ceiling number of games is reached. will arrive. Then, when the special role winning game is always operated in the second operation mode, 35 subtractions are not performed on average until 700 games are completed, and the actual number of times until reaching the ceiling game when 700 games are completed The average number of remaining games is 35.

As shown in FIG. 317, the number of premonitory games when reaching the ceiling is set so that a relatively short number of games from 1 game to 5 games can be easily selected. On the other hand, the number of premonitory games at the time of winning the AT mode shift set in the start AT lottery process is set so that up to 40 games can be selected.

That is, even if the second operation mode is operated every time in the special role winning game up to the ceiling number of games, the actual ceiling is reached after the 700th game is reached and the pseudo omen mode is started. , when the number of precursor games based on reaching the ceiling is set, the number of precursor games is likely to be within 40 games. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily carry out an omen effect including a pseudo omen mode until the actual ceiling is reached within the range of the omen effect based on the normal AT mode transition winning, giving the player a sense of incongruity. In addition, since the necessity of storing dedicated effect data is not so high, it is possible to reduce the amount of stored data.

In addition, in the pseudo omen mode when the number of ceiling games is reached, the third omen mode production that confirms that it is the omen mode that normally wins the AT mode transition lottery is set. It is also possible to relieve the player's disappointment that the AT mode is not started even though the ceiling number of games has been reached, by the effect that normally the AT mode is fixed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the first privilege is granted and the processing related to the instruction function is executed as the first processing, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the first privilege is given rather than the first privilege. An advantageous second privilege is provided, and a special role is provided in which a process related to the instruction function is executed as a second process that is more disadvantageous than the first process, and a process related to the instruction function is executed in a game in which the special combination is won. The notification corresponding to the result of is executed during the game. More specifically, if a special role is won during the CZ mode, a notification corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is executed at the end of the game in which the special role is won. bottom. By doing so, if the AT mode transition is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0, and the AT mode is started from the game next to the game in which the transition is won. Even if it is an announcement type game, it is possible to apply the special role, and even if you win the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role, when starting the AT mode from the next game, It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the AT mode transition win is not notified before the AT mode starts.

In addition, by doing so, even in the case where the AT mode transition is won with the special role as a trigger, the AT mode can be started speedily (with the precursor game as the shortest 0 game) like other results. is possible, and it is possible to suitably apply to existing games a special role in which the processing related to the instruction function can only be performed at the end of the game.

When the player is operated in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the AT lottery process at the time of stop makes it possible to win the AT mode transition with a high probability, while when it is operated in the second operation mode is set so as not to win AT mode transition. In this way, by making the processing related to the instruction function executed according to the operation mode at the time of winning the special role to be extreme, the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game is made more careful. becomes possible.

If a special role is won during CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery in the case of being operated in the first operation mode in the game is set so that the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 50%. It is set so that about half of the chances of winning the AT mode transition during the CZ mode are special roles. In other words, in the case of AT mode transition winning triggered by a special role, if the configuration is such that AT mode transition winning is notified or AT mode is started after several games even in CZ mode, AT About half of the transitions to the mode may result in a configuration that has undergone such an extended production. In this respect, by adopting the above configuration, it becomes possible to speedily perform from the AT mode transition lottery to the AT mode transition with respect to the AT mode transition triggered by a special role that is relatively likely to occur, and the game can be further improved. It is possible to proceed favorably.

In the AT mode, when the push-order bell is won, the push-order notification effect is generated, which makes it possible to win the 1st to 6th small wins. It is executed based on the operation of the lever 41 . That is, when winning the push order bell in the first game of the AT mode, the push order notification effect is generated as the effect at the start of the first game. Because of such a configuration, even if it is a special role winning game, by notifying the AT mode transition winning in the game, in the configuration in which the AT mode is started from the next game, the pressing order notification effect can be achieved. It is possible to have a configuration in which AT mode transition winning is notified in advance before execution of .

During the CZ mode, the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery is notified by means of an effect such as whether or not the numbered character is doubled in each game. The tenpai effect is set as a highly expected effect, and the tenpai effect is before the end timing of the game, and the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when the special role is won. occurs after the first stop operation. By doing so, at the end of each game in the CZ mode, in notifying the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery, while having the effect of boosting it in advance, the first operation is performed depending on whether or not the tenpai effect occurs. It is possible to make it difficult to perform the act of deciding whether to operate in the mode or to operate in the second operation mode.

The AT mode transition lottery at the time of winning a special role is executed in the process for AT lottery at stop, but the process for AT lottery at stop is executed after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. . In other words, if the result of the AT mode shift lottery based on the special role is to be notified in the game, after the operation of all the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed and before the betting operation for the next game is performed. It is necessary to perform the notification, and the execution timing of the notification is extremely limited. Therefore, it is possible to increase the attention to the presentation of each game by using the Tenpai presentation or the like as described above to arouse the possibility of the double eye presentation in advance.

Although the above tenpai effect is likely to occur when the AT mode transition is won, it can also occur when the AT mode transition is not won. By doing so, even if the tenpai performance is executed in a situation where the AT mode shift lottery has not yet been executed in the special role winning game, there will be no contradiction when the subsequent AT mode shift lottery is not won. While doing so, it is possible to arouse a sense of anticipation for winning the AT mode transition when the tenpai effect occurs.

In this embodiment, the tenpai effect is set to occur not only in the special role winning game, but also in the AT mode transition winning process in the AT lottery process at the start of the game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the ratio of the Tenpai effect leading to winning the AT mode transition, and even when the AT mode transition lottery is not yet executed in the special role winning game, when the Tenpai effect occurs. It is possible to arouse the expectations of

<Modification 1>
As described above, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is executed as the first process, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the process related to the instruction function is performed as the second process. In the special combination executed as a process, in the present embodiment, the first process is set to execute the AT mode transition lottery, and the second process is set not to execute the AT mode transition lottery. Due to such a difference in processing, it is possible to start an effect corresponding to the execution of the first processing out of the first processing and the second processing without waiting for the result of the first processing. Therefore, in this modification, at the timing when it becomes possible to determine that the player has operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, an effect corresponding to the processing related to the instruction function when the operation is performed in the first operation mode is performed. to start.

Specifically, in the special role winning game as described above, the left reel 32L is first stopped, and the 9th "BAR" symbol is displayed from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle row. The first operation mode is the case where the stop operation is performed at the timing when reaches the middle stage. If a stop operation is performed at a timing outside the above range, the second operation mode is set (FIG. 279). In this case, it can be said that it is possible to determine whether or not the first operation mode is performed when the first stop ON operation is performed in the special winning game. Therefore, in the modified example, when the first stop ON operation is performed, notification for the AT mode transition lottery executed based on the first operation mode is started.

FIG. 322(a) is a flow chart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example. The first stop ON effect setting process is a process executed as one process of each stop operation effect setting process (step Sd1708) in the effect setting process (FIG. 302) of the display control device 81. This is a process executed when a command corresponding to the execution of is received from the main controller 101 .

At step Sd2701, it is determined whether or not the game being executed is a special winning game. If it is a special role winning game, it is determined whether or not it is the first operation mode in step Sd2702. That is, the first stop ON operation executed this time causes the left reel 32L to stop first, and from the timing when the 5th "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, the 9th "BAR" symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the stop operation was performed at the timing of reaching the middle stage.

If it is the first operation mode, it is checked in step Sd2703 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag is set, thereby confirming whether or not the current game is a game in the CZ mode. If the game is in the CZ mode, it is determined in step Sd2704 whether or not the effect set for the current game is the loose eye effect. In the ten-pie effect lottery process (step Sd2223) executed at the start of the special role winning game, if the player is not won and the loose pattern effect is set instead of the ten-pie effect, the process proceeds to step Sd2705, and the set loose pattern is set. After executing the processing of changing the performance to the tenpai misplay performance, the present first stop ON time performance setting processing is terminated.

In this case, if the number character to be stopped in the middle variation area SP2 is made to be the same as the number character in the left variation area SP1 that is stopped this time, the loose eye effect is corrected to the tenpai off eye effect. good. Then, in the already set loose eye effect, when the left variation area SP1 and the right variation area SP3 are set to be characters with the same number, the number character to be stopped in the middle variation area SP2 is left variation. The number characters stopped in the area SP1 are corrected to be the same, and the number characters that were to be stopped in the right movement area SP3 are corrected to be different from the number characters stopped in the left movement area SP1. You should try to If a negative determination is made in steps Sd2701 to Sd2704, the present first stop ON effect setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 322(b), even when the loose eye effect is set in the special role winning game in the CZ mode, if the first stop ON operation corresponds to the first operation mode, As shown in FIG. 322(c1), the number character stopped in the middle fluctuation area SP2 based on the next second stop ON operation becomes the same as the number character in the already stopped left fluctuation area SP. At the time of the second stop ON operation, the ten-pie effect is performed. As a result, it is possible to arouse anticipation that the double eyes effect will be executed in the current game and that notification of winning the AT mode transition will be made, and the degree of attention of the player can be favorably increased. However, even in this case, at the time of the third stop ON operation, the ten-pie losing effect is executed instead of the double effect, and then the result of the AT mode shift lottery is notified through the bomb effect.

On the other hand, if the first stop ON operation does not correspond to the first operation mode but corresponds to the second operation mode, as shown in FIG. Since the number characters are not corrected, the loose stitches are executed as they are.

By doing so, even if the contents of the process related to the instruction function are different depending on the operation mode, the effect corresponding to the process related to the instruction function can be started before the stop operation is completed. It becomes possible.

In particular, even if it is done as described above, it is only necessary to correct the loose eye effect to the tempered misaligned eye effect. Even if there is, even though the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, double eyes effect will not occur. Therefore, it is possible to start the performance corresponding to the AT mode shift lottery in the stop AT lottery process before the transition lottery is executed within the range where no contradiction occurs in the performance.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, when the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, there is a case where notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the game is not performed. FIG. 323 is a flow chart showing the AT lottery process at the start in this modification.

In this modification, the process when it is determined in step Sd2809 that the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode is different from the process in the above embodiment, and other processes (steps Sd2801 to Sd2820). is the same as the corresponding processing (steps Sd801 to Sd820).

That is, if it is determined in step Sd2809 that the AT mode transition lottery has been won during the CZ mode (step Sd2808: YES, step Sd2809: YES), the CZ game counter is greater than the predetermined number (3) in step Sd2821. , determines whether or not the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is greater than a predetermined number. If more than the predetermined number remain, a delayed lottery process is executed in step Sd2822. The delayed lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery in the game should be suppressed when the AT mode transition lottery is won. For example, the winning probability of the delayed lottery may be changed according to the lottery result as a trigger for winning the AT mode shift, and it is easier to win the delayed lottery with the chance A than with the chance C. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to win the delayed lottery when AT mode transition wins triggered by the lottery result with a high appearance rate of each game than when the lottery result with a low appearance rate is used as a trigger. Further, the delay lottery may be more likely to be won as the number of remaining games in the CZ mode increases.

After executing the delayed lottery process in step Sd2822, it is determined whether or not the delayed lottery is won in step Sd2823. If it is elected, after executing the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in step Sd2824, after executing the process of setting the delay flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step Sd2825, AT at the time of this start Lottery processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the CZ mode is less than or equal to the predetermined number in step Sd2821, or if it is determined that the delayed lottery was not won in step Sd2823, the process proceeds to step Sd2810 to terminate the CZ mode. , the processing for setting the omen mode of the 0 game, etc. are executed, and then the AT lottery processing at the start is terminated.

In other words, by winning the above-mentioned delayed lottery, although the AT mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode is not ended, the 0 game precursor mode is not set, and the corresponding precursor command is not output. On the side of the display control device 81, AT winning notification is not executed in the current game, and the effects in the CZ mode are continued to be executed.

However, as described above, even if the CZ mode is not terminated, since the AT mode winning flag is set, the next game lottery result handling process (FIG. 283) makes an affirmative determination in step Sd606. , the continuation determination process and the AT addition process are executed instead of the AT lottery process at the start. However, since the AT mode has not been started, only a negative determination is made in step Sd901 in the continuation determination process (FIG. 287).

FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing in this modified example.

Steps Sd2901 to Sd2910 are the same as the above steps Sd1001 to Sd1010. That is, even before the AT mode is started, since the AT mode shift lottery has already been won, an additional lottery for the AT mode set is performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by winning the delayed lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd2905, or after the processing of step Sd2908 or step Sd2910 is executed, it is determined in step Sd2911 whether or not the delay flag is set. If the delay flag is not set, the AT addition process is terminated.

If the delay flag is set and the AT mode transition lottery is won in the CZ mode, but the precursor command is not yet output, then in step Sd2912, the lottery result of this game is a special role winning. Determine whether or not If the special combination is won, the process for setting the portent mode is executed in steps Sd2913 to Sd2916. That is, in step Sd2913, 0 is input to the portent counter, and in step Sd2913, the portent flag is set. Then, in step Sd2915, the AT mode transition lottery is won, and the portent command including the information that the number of portent games is 0 is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After that, the process for clearing the delay flag is executed in step Sd2916, and then this AT addition process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd2912 that the special combination is not won, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter is 1 in step Sd2917. A case where the CZ game counter is 1 is a case where the CZ game counter is set to 0 by the CZ game number processing when the game to be started this time ends, and the CZ mode ends. In this case, the process advances to step Sd2913 to execute a process of setting the precursor mode in which the number of precursor games is 0 games. If the CZ game counter is not 0 at step Sd2917, this AT addition processing is terminated.

In other words, if you win the AT mode transition in the AT lottery process at the start of the CZ mode, by winning the delayed lottery, you will not be notified that you won the AT mode transition in this game. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 325(a1), for example, when the AT mode shift lottery is won with the watermelon winning as a trigger, if the delayed lottery is won, no portent command is output in the current game. As shown in (a2), as an effect during the CZ mode of the current game, a ten-pie miss effect is executed instead of a parallel effect.

After that, if a special role is won before the end of this CZ mode (Fig. 325 (b1)), the double eyes effect is executed in the game and the AT mode transition lottery is announced ( FIG. 325(b2)). In this case, the double eyes effect is set in the CZ effect setting process at the start based on the portent command output at the start of the current game. Therefore, there are cases where double eyes effect is executed without bomb effect (steps Sd2213 and Sd2214), and double eyes effect is executed via bomb effect (steps Sd2215, step Sd2221, step Sd2303 to step Sd2305). By doing so, in the special role winning game, not only when the notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery is performed after the final stop, but also when the notification of the winning is performed before that. As a result, it becomes possible to draw the player's attention to the performance before the final stop in the special role winning game.

In addition, when the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is won is notified in the special role winning game via the fact that the delayed lottery has been won, in the special role winning game, as shown in FIG. Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the notification of the winning will be performed. By doing so, even if the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the first operation mode, but the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the second operation mode, it is as if the AT mode transition lottery is in the second operation mode. It is also possible to give an impression as if a mode transition lottery is being performed, and for example, even a player who has mistakenly operated in the second operation mode can be made to watch the notification with hope. Therefore, even a player who does not understand that the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the second operation mode can fully enjoy the special role winning game.

Furthermore, as in the above configuration, in the special role winning game, the fact that the AT mode transition lottery has been won can be notified even in the second operation mode, so that the first minor role winning is possible in the second operation mode. ~If the 6th minor role is won, it will be possible to give the impression that you have won the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the pushing order bell, and it will also increase the attention when winning the pushing order bell. It is possible. In this case, although the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning occurs in the special role winning game, the 9th minor role winning to the 32nd minor role winning does not occur. It is possible to give the impression that if the order of operations matches the 1st small winning combination to the 6th small winning combination, the AT mode shift lottery will be won. By doing so, even before shifting to the AT mode, it is possible to make the player more interested in the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the bell is won in the order of pressing the bell. is possible.

In order to enhance this effect, when the delay flag is set at the time of winning the special role, along with the CZ mode effect this time, as shown in FIG. The auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to perform an effect that the player expects. Specifically, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays three question mark characters corresponding to the three stop switches 42 to 44 . Each time the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a question mark corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 to 44 is replaced with a mark indicating the correct answer (for example, a circular character). In this case, the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 of the three question marks should be operated first in order to establish the 1st minor winning prize to the 6th minor winning prize when the special role is won. It is recommended that a notification to that effect be made at the same time. By doing so, it is precisely because the 1st to 6th minor role wins have been successfully established that the AT mode transition lottery is won and the parallel eyes effect (Fig. 325(b2)) is executed. It is possible to give a stronger impression.

Further, in the pressing order bell winning game, a pressing order prediction effect may be executed to make the player predict the above operation order. However, in the pressing order bell winning game, in the present embodiment, even in the CZ mode, the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won (Fig. 285), so the order of operations is the first to sixth minor winning prizes. Even if they match, the double eyes production will not occur.

In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 325(d), in the pressing order bell winning game, the above-described expected pressing order effect is generated, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is the first minor winning combination to the sixth minor winning combination. When the operation order corresponds to winning, a correct answer effect is performed in the pressing order prediction effect to the effect that the pressing order was correct, and the operation order does not correspond to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination. In this case, an incorrect answer rendering is performed to the effect that the pushing order was incorrect in the pressing order prediction rendering. Then, even if the correct answer effect occurs in the pressing order bell winning game, the AT mode winning is not achieved. It is possible to give the impression that the AT mode transition lottery is won by a part of correct operation sequences of winning the 1st to 6th minor winnings when the bell is won.

In the special role winning game, the middle and right Hatena characters corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 may be displayed as "1" or the like in the pushing order prediction effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the user from being operated in the first operation mode and encourage the user to operate in the second operation mode.

It should be noted that the CZ mode transition lottery may also be won in the pressing order bell winning game. By doing so, in combination with the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning at the time of the special role, when the pushing order bell is won, the AT mode transition lottery can be won, but the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning It is possible to give the impression that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery if you correctly answer the operation order of the small winning prize than if you do not answer correctly. It is also possible to give the impression that it is a kind of Therefore, it is possible to make a great use in improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the delay flag is set, the pressing order prediction effect is performed, and when the operation order of the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is correct, the correct answer effect is performed. At the same time, a configuration may be adopted in which double eyes effect is generated to inform AT mode transition winning. In this case, it is preferable to have a configuration in which the correct answer effect and double eyes effect are generated as described above when the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the delay flag is set (when the predetermined lottery is won). .

<Modification 3>
In this modification, by utilizing the fact that the stop roll when operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game is partly common to the stop roll in other lottery results, the AT mode transition lottery is won. The notification to the effect that the operation has been completed is executed before the operation is completed.

FIG. 326(a) is a flow chart showing the first stop ON effect setting process in this modified example.

In step Sd3001, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is Cherry A-C. In the following step Sd3002, it is determined whether or not the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L by grasping the stop number stopped based on the first stop ON operation this time. As described above, when cherries A to C are won, the 10th re-game winning flag and the 12th re-game winning flag are set (see FIG. 275 etc.), and the 10th re-game symbol and 12th re-game symbol on the left reel 32L are set. The game pattern is a "BAR" pattern (see FIG. 265). On the other hand, in a game in which cherries A to C are won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "BAR" symbol cannot be stopped on the left reel 32L, the second stop switch 42 is placed in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. 11. Any one of the "red 7" symbol, the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol, which are the replay symbols, stops.

In step Sd3002, the first stop ON operation corresponds to the left reel 32L, and the stop result corresponds to the 10th regame win or the 12th regame win, and the 11th replay. It is determined that it does not correspond to winning a prize. If the determination in step Sd3002 is affirmative, it is determined in step Sd3003 whether or not the sub-side CZ flag has been set and the game being started this time is in the CZ mode. If it is in the CZ mode, it is determined in step Sd3004 whether or not a precursor command has been received as a command at the start of the current game. The case where the premonition command is received means that the lottery for shifting to AT mode has been won with this cherry A to C as a trigger.

When the portent command is received, in step Sd3005, based on the first stop ON operation, control is performed so that the confirmation effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, and then when the main stop ON End the effect setting process. The fixed effect is a effect to notify that you have won the AT mode transition lottery, and in this modification, as shown in FIG. The character is stopped, and an image corresponding to the fixed effect is displayed in the medium variation area SP2 and the right variation area SP3 which are in the process of being changed. In addition, in the background of the image (middle variation area SP2 and right variation area SP3) corresponding to the fixed effect, characters with the same numbers as the characters stopped in the left variation area SP1 are displayed in these middle variation area SP2 and right variation area SP3. A stop notice image (an image that faintly displays numerical characters) is displayed to give notice of stopping in the variable area SP3. By doing so, when the first reel is stopped, the AT mode transition lottery is won before the second and third reels are stopped (AT winning effect is performed in this game ) can be grasped by the player.

If a negative determination is made in any of steps Sd3001 to Sd3004, the present first stop ON time effect setting process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 326(c1), the case where the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L means the case where the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are stopped and the 10th replay winning is established (see FIG. 326 (c2)), the 12th replay win is established (Fig. 326(c3)), and the 33rd minor winning combination may be established (Fig. 326(c4)).

In other words, the case where the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L includes the stop result when the player is operated in the first operation mode when the special combination is won. Therefore, in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery based on Cherry A to C, by generating a fixed effect when the "BAR" pattern stops in the middle stage, the AT after stopping is executed based on the winning of the special role. It is also possible to give the player the impression that the result of the mode transition lottery is notified in advance. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the effect at the time of the stop operation.

By applying the above modification 3 to modification 2, the special role is won under the condition that the delay flag is set, and the "BAR" symbol is stopped in the middle row of the left reel 32L based on the first stop ON operation. It is also possible to generate the above-mentioned fixed effect at the time of the execution. By doing so, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the fixed effect when the "BAR" stops in the middle stage of the left reel 32L. Then, even if it becomes possible to distinguish whether it is a special role or Cherry A to C by the subsequent stop operation, the fixed effect is not only triggered by Cherry A to C but also by a special role. Since it is possible to give an impression that a special combination will also occur, it is possible to easily remind the player of winning a special role at the time when the fixed effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention when a special role is won.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process for stoppage is specified prior to the execution timing of the AT lottery process for stoppage, and the effect of the game is determined based on the specified result.

FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery process at the start in this modified example. As already explained, the AT lottery process at the start is a process executed based on the operation of the start lever 41, and although it is possible to determine whether or not a special role is won, in the game in the first operation mode It cannot be determined whether it is operated or operated in the second operation mode.

After determining that the ceiling counter is not 0 in step Sd801 in the AT lottery process at the start, the process of acquiring the AT lottery random number is executed in step Sd3101. Then, in step Sd3102, a process of grasping the lottery result of the game is executed. The processes of steps Sd3101 and Sd3102 are the same as the processes of steps Sd802 and Sd803.

In the subsequent step Sd3103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a winning of a special combination, based on the processing result of step Sd3102. If the special role is won, the pre-determination process is executed in step Sd3104. If it is determined that the special combination is not won in step Sd3103, or after executing the preliminary determination processing in step Sd3104, the process proceeds to step Sd804, and AT mode shift lottery etc. at the start are executed.

FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing the preliminary determination process in step Sd3104. The advance determination process is a process for specifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process for stoppage prior to the execution timing of the AT lottery process for stoppage.

That is, in step Sd3201, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, then in step Sd3202 processing is executed to obtain a normal AT mode transition lottery table for when stopped. Execute the process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table. These lottery tables are as shown in FIG.

After acquiring one of the lottery tables, in step Sd3204, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time is selected from the above lottery table. , and the AT lottery random number obtained in step Sd3101. In other words, even in the stop AT lottery process (FIG. 293), the AT mode transition lottery is executed using the same lottery table and the AT lottery random number obtained based on the start operation. The AT mode transition lottery executed in Sd3204 and the AT mode transition lottery (step Sd1310) executed in the process for AT lottery at stop have the same result, and in the normal mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 10%. If it is CZ mode, AT mode transition wins with a probability of 50%.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in step Sd3205, the AT mode transition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game this time is set to the lottery table and step Sd3101. It is executed from the AT lottery random number obtained by In the stopping AT lottery process (FIG. 293) in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed when operated in the second operation mode. If the configuration is such that an AT mode transition lottery is also executed in this case, in the stop AT lottery process, a similar lottery table and an AT lottery random number obtained based on the start operation are used to perform the AT mode transition. Since a lottery is executed, the AT mode transition lottery executed in step Sd3205 and the AT mode transition lottery executed in the stop AT lottery process (step Sd1310) have the same result. In the present embodiment, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 0% in the normal mode, and the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 0% in the CZ mode. Do not win the migration lottery.

After executing the processing of steps Sd3204 and Sd3205, it is determined in step Sd3206 whether or not the result of the processing of step Sd3204 is AT mode transition winning. , a process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first operation winning notice command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the player is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time.

If a negative determination is made in step Sd3206 or after the processing of step Sd3207 is executed, it is determined in step Sd3208 whether or not the processing result of step Sd3205 was AT mode transition winning. 4, in step Sd3209, a process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second operation winning notice command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the AT mode shift lottery will be won if the player is operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game this time. If a negative determination is made in step Sd3208, or if the process of step Sd3209 is executed, this preliminary determination process ends.

FIG. 329 is a flow chart showing the start time CZ effect setting process in this modified example.

In the starting CZ effect setting process in this modified example, the process when winning a special combination (step Sd3305: YES) is different, and the other processes (steps Sd3301 to Sd3321) are the same as those of steps Sd2201 to Sd2221. is.

Specifically, in a game in which a special role is won during the CZ mode, an affirmative determination is made in step Sd3305, and the process proceeds to step Sd3322. In step Sd3322, processing for setting a special combination flag is executed. Then, in step Sd3323, it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command has been received. If any of these winning notice commands have been received, the process proceeds to step Sd3304, and the effect is set so that the tenpai effect is executed.

In other words, when it is specified in advance that the AT mode transition lottery will be won by operating in any of the operation modes by the advance determination process, in the start CZ effect setting process, notification to the effect that the AT mode transition lottery is won is performed. A tenpai effect with a high expectation of being beaten will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to start an effect corresponding to the result of the stop AT lottery process without waiting for the result of the stop AT lottery process.

However, as described above, when the special combination is won, the precursor command is not output for the AT lottery at the start, so a negative determination is made in step Sd3310, and the setting is made so that the tenpai losing effect is performed. be. In addition, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is not received, even if the lottery is won through the special role tenpai effect lottery process of step Sd3324, the tenpai It is set so that an effect is performed, and thereafter, it is set so that a tenpai misplacement effect is performed.

That is, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, the tenpai effect is executed without going through the tenpay effect lottery process, and as a result, these winning notice commands are executed. When the tenpai performance is executed, including the case of not receiving the tenpai performance, the ratio leading to the notification of winning the AT mode shift is increased, and the expectation for the tenpai performance can be suitably increased.

In particular, in this modification, whether or not the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received can be predicted from the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ten pie effect, and the presence or absence of the occurrence of the ten pie effect It is determined by the second stop ON operation. That is, the case where the ten-pie effect occurs is the timing after it has already been determined which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode will be performed. By adopting such a configuration, the act of changing the operation mode by the effect that occurs when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received is suppressed, and the game that knows the occurring effect. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of events in which only one person has an advantage. Therefore, the fairness of the game is ensured.

That is, for example, when the first operation winning notice command is received, a special effect (for example, the effect sound when operating the lever is different from the normal time) at the timing before the first stop ON operation When a special effect sound effect) is generated, it is possible to know in advance that the AT mode transition will be won by operating in the first operation mode, so that the interest of the game is improved. It is preferable to increase However, with such a configuration, in a game in which the above-mentioned special effect does not occur, even if the player is operated in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition win will not be won. It is preferable for the player to receive more medals paid out. Therefore, the occurrence of a special effect corresponding to the result of the pre-determination process before the operation is preferable in terms of improving the interest of the game, but it is not preferable in terms of ensuring the fairness of the game. In this modified example, as described above, after the branch between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the notification corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process is performed. It is possible to expect the above effect by

Incidentally, in the case of performing a special effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process before the operation as described above, it is not a structure that the special effect is always generated when the first operation winning notice command is received. Even if a special effect may not occur when the first operation winning notice command is received, it may be better to operate in the second operation mode even if the special effect does not occur. It is no longer definitive. That is, in performing the effect corresponding to the result of the preliminary determination process, even if it is operated in the first operation mode from the effect, it is not confirmed that the AT mode transition lottery is not won. It is possible to motivate the player to operate in the first operation mode irrespective of the result of the determination process, and it is possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Incidentally, when the first operation winning notice command or the second operation winning notice command is received, a special effect different from the tenpai effect may be executed. As the special effect, for example, the fixed effect shown in FIG. 326(b) may be applied. In addition, it is preferable to use a special sound effect that does not or is unlikely to occur during the tenpai presentation, or to make a character that does not or is unlikely to appear normally appear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation mode when winning a special combination, and in particular, it is set so that the AT mode transition win is not won in the second operation mode as in the above embodiment. In the configuration, it is assumed that it is operated in the first operation mode, and by executing the above special effect, it is possible to grasp in advance that the AT mode transition will be won. It is possible to realize such novel game characteristics.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, game characteristics using the above pre-determination process will be described. Specifically, in this modification, when it is specified that the AT mode shift lottery is won by operating in the first operation mode when the special role is won in the preliminary determination process, the first operation wins as described above. In addition to outputting a notice command, if the first operation winning notice command is not received at the time of winning the special role, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and the first to sixth minor wins are performed. A specific notification performance is executed to establish a winning combination. Note that the mode in which the specific notification effect is executed will be referred to as navigation mode in the following description.

FIG. 330 is a flow chart showing navigation mode processing in this modified example. The navigation mode process is a process executed as one of the other processes (step Sd2012) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 303) on the display control device 81 side.

In step Sd3401, it is determined whether or not a transition to an advantageous section has occurred in the game to be started this time. If a transition to an advantageous section occurs, in step Sd3402, a navigation mode lottery is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the navigation mode. In this modification, the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery is set differently according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process. It is set to make it easier to win the mode lottery.

After executing the navigation mode lottery in step Sd3402, it is determined whether or not the navigation mode lottery is won in step Sd3403. If the navigation mode lottery is won, in step Sd3404 a process of setting a navigation mode flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed.

If a negative determination is made at step Sd3401 or step Sd3403, or after executing the process at step Sd3404, it is determined at step Sd3405 whether or not the game to be started this time will cause a transition to the AT mode. If the game to be started this time is the AT mode shift game, the process for clearing the navigation mode flag is executed in step Sd3406, and then the navigation mode process is terminated. If it is determined in step Sd3405 that the current game is not the AT mode transition game, the navigation mode processing is terminated.

That is, in this modification, if the navigation mode lottery executed at the time of transition to the advantageous section is won, the navigation mode is set, and the navigation mode is terminated by shifting to the AT mode. In addition, in this modification, since the navigation mode is not terminated at the end of the advantageous section, even if the advantageous section ends without shifting to the AT mode, the navigation mode remains It is possible to continue to enjoy the benefits of the navigation mode until the shift to the AT mode occurs.

FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing specific notification processing in this modified example. The specific notification process is also a process executed as one process of the other process (step Sd2012) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 303) on the display control device 81 side.

In step Sd3501, it is determined whether or not a lottery result command indicating a special role has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step Sd3501 and the lottery result of this game is a special combination, the process proceeds to step Sd3502. In step Sd3502, it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command has been received.

When the first operation winning notice command is received, as described above, it is a special role winning game, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won. It is specified in advance that If the first operation winning notice command is not received, that is, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the above in step Sd3503 determines whether or not the navigation mode flag of is set. If the navigation mode flag is set, in step Sd3504, after executing the processing for setting the specific notification effect to be executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 as the effect at the start of the current game, This specific notification process ends. That is, the specific notification effect is executed as a starting effect, and is a effect executed before the stop switches 42-44 are operated.

If the first operation winning notice command is received at step Sd3502 or if the navigation mode flag is not set at step Sd3503, the specific notification process is terminated without setting the specific notification effect. do.

If it is determined in step Sd3501 that it is not a special role winning game, proceed to step Sd3505, receive a lottery result command indicating a special role, and determine whether or not the lottery result of this game is a special role winning. do.

Here, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 332(c), a 13th replay is added as a winning mode, and the left reel 32L has a "replay" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "replay" symbol, and the right reel 32M has a "replay" symbol. It is set so that the 13th replay winning prize is established when the "Bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line. The above special role is a role that enables the 13th replay prize, and has a lower probability than other AT winning opportunities such as special roles in 3-bet games (specifically, about 1/5000) probability) to win. In addition, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table at the start and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ at the start in the AT lottery process at the start in this modification, the AT mode transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% in the above special combination. is set to

In step Sd3505, when it is determined that the lottery result of the current game is the winning of the special role, in step Sd3506, it is determined whether or not the portent command has been received as the command at the start of this time. The case where the precursor command is received means that the AT mode shift lottery based on the special role is won, and means that the special role is won during the normal mode or CZ mode instead of the AT mode. If the portent command has been received, the process proceeds to step Sd3504, and after executing the process for performing the above specific notification effect, the process for specific notification ends. If a negative determination is made in step Sd3505 or step Sd3506, the specific notification process is terminated.

In the specific notification effect in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 332(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays three characters of "Red 7" in a row and displays the characters "Aim". , a sound such as "Aim" is output from the speaker 64, and an effect is set to notify that the situation is to aim for the "Red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

Here, when the 13th regame win is established, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated aiming at the "red 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol appears on the lower line L3 as shown in FIG. can stop together. On the other hand, the operation mode aiming at the "red 7" symbol in the special role winning game is not included in the range of the first operation mode (Fig. 279), and it is the case where the stop operation is performed from the left reel 32L. However, the 33rd minor winning combination is not established, and the 1st minor winning combination is established.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 332(b2), the stop numbers of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M when aiming at the "red 7" symbol and establishing the first small win are the same as when the 13th regame wins. When the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, it is possible to determine whether the 1st small win is established or the 13th replay win is established. Can not.

In other words, in the case where the specific notification effect is executed to notify that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol, the player does not win the AT mode shift lottery in the special role winning game, so the second operation mode. It is not possible to determine whether the operation is prompted or whether the 13th re-game winning, which is the AT mode transition lottery, is won. By doing so, in the game property aiming at winning the AT mode transition, when the specific notification performance is executed, the AT mode transition non-winning at the time of winning the special role is not decided, and the specific notification performance is performed. and based on it, the enjoyment of operating the stop switches 42-44 can be improved.

Benefits of the navigation mode will be explained using FIG. 332(d).

In the situation where the navigation mode is not set, the specific notification effect does not occur in the special role winning game, so the stop switches 42 to 44 should be operated in the first operation mode in order to receive the AT mode transition lottery. Yes, in this case, as described above, the 33rd minor winning combination is established. In this way, when the game is always played in the first operation mode, a decrease of about 1.37 medals per game can be expected, and about 36.40 games can be completed per 50 medals. On the other hand, if the special role winning game is always operated in the second operation mode, a reduction of about 1.02 medals per game can be expected, and about 48.84 games can be completed per 50 medals. The number of games that can be completed with the same number of games is greater when the operation is performed in the second operation mode than when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. However, as described above, by using the second operation mode, it becomes impossible to receive the AT mode transition lottery, and the ceiling counter is not decremented. , it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode than to operate in the second operation mode.

Approximately half of the cases where the game is operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game will win the AT mode transition, and in the navigation mode, when the AT mode transition wins, the specific notification effect will always occur. Half of them are operated in the first operation mode, and half are operated in the second operation mode. In this case, a reduction of about 1.20 medals per game can be expected, and about 41.71 games can be played per 50 medals. Therefore, although the number of games that can be completed with the same number of sheets is smaller than when the operation is always performed in the second operation mode, the number of games that can be completed with the same number of sheets is greater than when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. , it becomes possible to efficiently receive the AT mode transition lottery. That is, in terms of game characteristics aiming at the AT mode shift lottery, the game in the navigation mode is more advantageous than the case where the game is always operated in the first operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the game in the configuration using the special combination.

Here, as described above, in the at-stop AT mode transition lottery, at least when a special role is won, the AT mode transition lottery is set to be performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. On the other hand, the winning probability of the navigation mode lottery is set to be higher, the easier it is to win. By doing so, it is possible to vary the number of games (base) per unit number of medals according to the set value without providing a setting difference for the transition rate to the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a special role winning game in the AT mode will be described.

In the above-described embodiment, among the processes related to the instruction function triggered by the special combination, the additional lottery in the AT mode is the same when operated in the first operation mode and in the second operation mode. More specifically, even in the case of a special role winning game, an additional lottery is executed in the AT addition process executed at the start in the same manner as other lottery results. In this modified example, this is changed, and the details of the process for the additional lottery in the AT mode are also made different between when the operation is performed in the first operation mode and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode.

FIG. 333(a) is a flowchart showing part of the AT game number processing in this modification. As described above, the process for the number of AT games is a process executed in step Sd1211 of the winning result correspondence process (step Sd415) executed after the payout determination process in the reel control process (FIG. 277).

In this modification, first, in step Sd3601, a stop AT addition process is executed. After that, in step Sd1601, the AT game number counter is subtracted, and the number of games in the AT mode is managed.

FIG. 333(b) is a flow chart showing the stop AT addition processing in step Sd3601.

The stop time AT add-on process is basically the same process as the AT add-on process (FIG. 288) executed at the time of start. is not performed, the process of grasping the operation mode of the current game is performed, and the additional lottery table used in the additional lottery is different. That is, in this modification, the operation mode of the current game is grasped in step Sd3611, and the subsequent processing of steps Sd3612 to Sd3620 is the same as the processing of steps Sd1002 to Sd1010 described above, and is obtained in step Sd3613. The additional lottery table obtained in step Sd1003 is different from the additional lottery table obtained in step Sd1003.

Regarding the additional lottery table, specifically, the AT additional lottery process executed at the start in this modification (hereinafter referred to as the AT additional lottery process at the start to distinguish it from the one at the time of stop) is shown in FIG. , it is set so that the extra lottery based on the special role is not won. On the other hand, in the add-on lottery table acquired in step Sd3613 in the above-described stop AT add-on process, if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, the add-on lottery is won with a probability of 30%. However, it is set so that the additional lottery is not won when the operation is performed in the second operation mode.

FIG. 335 is a flow chart showing part of the process for adding AT at the start in this modified example. This process is a modified example of the AT addition scrivener in step Sd609 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 283).

The processing of steps Sd3701 and Sd3702 is the same as the processing of steps Sd1001 and Sd1002 described above, and acquires an additional lottery random number to grasp the lottery result of the current game. In the subsequent step Sd3703, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is a special combination winning, and if the special combination is winning, a pre-addition determination process is executed in step Sd3704. If it is determined in step Sd3703 that the special combination is not won, or after executing the process of step Sd3704, the process proceeds to step Sd1004, and the extra lottery process at the start is executed. As described above, in the special role winning game, it is set so as not to win in the extra lottery process at the start. In addition, in the special role winning game, the additional lottery at the start may not be performed.

FIG. 336 is a flow chart showing the addition preliminary determination process in step Sd3704.

In step Sd3801, a process of obtaining a stop AT additional lottery table is executed. The lottery table acquired in step Sd3801 is the same lottery table as the lottery table acquired in step Sd3613. In the following step Sd3802, the AT addition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time is determined from the lottery table and the addition lottery random number obtained in step Sd3701. Execute. In other words, even in the processing for the stop AT additional lottery (FIG. 333(b)), the AT additional lottery is executed using the same lottery table and the additional lottery random number acquired based on the start operation. Therefore, the AT add-on lottery executed in step Sd3802 and the AT add-on lottery (step Sd3614) executed in the process for the stop-time AT add-on lottery have the same result, and the add-on lottery is won with a probability of 30%.

After executing the process of step Sd3802, in step Sd3803, the AT addition lottery when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game of this time, the lottery table and the step It is executed from the additional lottery random number acquired in Sd3701. In this case as well, the result is the same as the result of the AT addition lottery in the stop AT addition lottery process (FIG. 333(b)), and the AT addition lottery executed in step Sd3803 does not result in an addition win. In the case of a configuration in which an additional lottery is not performed when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the configuration in which an additional lottery is not performed in the case of the operation in the second operation mode also in the addition preliminary determination process. may be

After executing the process of specifying in advance the result of the additional lottery at the time of stop at step Sd3802 or step Sd3803 at the time of start, at step Sd3804, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode It is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won, and if the additional lottery is won, a process of setting the first operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sd3805. Further, if a negative determination is made in step Sd3804, or after the processing of step Sd3805 is executed, in step Sd3806, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the second operation mode, whether or not to win the additional lottery If the player wins the additional lottery, a process of setting the second operation winning notice command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step Sd3807. If a negative determination is made in step Sd3806, or if the process of step Sd3807 has been executed, the addition prior determination process ends.

FIG. 337(a) is a flow chart showing a part of the effect setting process at the start in this modified example. As described above, the start effect setting process is a process executed when the display control device 81 receives a start command at the start of the game.

Steps Sd3901 to Sd3903 are the same as the processing of steps Sd2001 to Sd2003 above, and when the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is received, the first to sixth minor winning prizes When any one of the pressing order notification commands is received, the setting is made so that the pressing order notification effect of the corresponding operation order is performed.

If it is determined in step Sd3901 that the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group has not been received, it is determined in step Sd3904 whether or not the lottery result command for the special role has been received. If the lottery result command for the special combination has been received, it is determined in step Sd3905 whether or not the pressing order notification command has been received. As described above, when the pressing order notification command is output in the special role winning game, it means that the AT mode is in progress. In addition, as described above, the pressing order notification command at the time of winning the special combination is the pressing order notification command indicating the operation order for winning the sixth minor combination.

In the case of winning a special role in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step Sd3906, and it is determined whether or not the first operation winning notice command has been received. If the first operation winning notice command is not received, that is, if the addition lottery is not won even if it is operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the process proceeds to step Sd3903, and the sixth minor role It is set so that the pressing order notification performance of the operation order corresponding to the prize winning is performed. In this case, based on the winning of the special role, instead of the 33rd minor winning combination in which one medal is paid out, it is possible to establish the 6th minor winning combination in which eight medals are paid out. In other words, in the extra lottery based on the special role this time, if the first operation mode does not result in a win, the second operation mode with a large number of medals to be paid out is used. It is possible to improve the medal increase speed (the number of net increases).

On the other hand, even if the special role winning in the AT mode, in step Sd3906, it is determined that the first operation winning notice command has been received, and the special role winning game of this time is the first operation mode. If an additional win is obtained by operating , in step Sd3907, it is determined whether or not the number of AT mode games and the number of increased medals have reached the upper limit of the advantageous section. As already explained, in the remaining game number management process (step Sd1804) in the section display second process (FIG. 301) on the main controller 101 side, the total number of games completed in the advantageous section and the number of remaining AT mode games is , If the situation is such that the number of games is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and it is already confirmed that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached by digesting the remaining AT mode, the first excess command is output. do. In addition, in the remaining number management processing (step Sd1805) in the section display second processing, based on the number of remaining AT mode games, etc., the number of remaining games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number (2400). If the remaining AT mode will reach the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, a second exceeding command is output. In step Sd3907 described above, by grasping whether or not the first excess command and the second excess command are received, it is possible to determine whether or not the situation is likely to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section. be.

When it is determined in step Sd3907 that the situation does not reach the upper limit, in step Sd3908, setting is made so that the specific notification effect during AT is executed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. FIG. On the other hand, in step Sd3907, when it is determined that the situation reaches the upper limit, that is, in the special role winning game this time, if it is operated in the first operation mode, it is a situation in which an additional win is won. However, if the situation is such that even if AT mode add-on processing is performed based on the add-on win, it would be meaningless in terms of the number of games and the number of medals to be increased, the process proceeds to step Sd3903 to deal with the 6th minor winning combination. It is set so that the pressing order notification effect of the operation order to be performed is performed. In this case, in the special role winning game, it is possible to establish the 6th minor role winning with a large number of medals to be paid out.

That is, in this modification, in the special role winning game in the AT mode, even if it is possible to win additional winnings by operating in the first operation mode, the relationship between the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section and the upper limit increase number If the situation is such that the number of games in the remaining AT mode that has already been determined reaches the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section or the upper limit increase in the number of games, no more AT mode Assuming that there is no need to perform the additional processing, the operation is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode, thereby establishing the sixth minor winning combination with a large number of medals to be paid out. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the emptiness of further winning in a situation where it is certain that the upper limit will be reached, and that the upper limit will not be reached. is determined, the upper limit increase number can be reached early, or the total number of medals to be paid out when the upper limit number of games is reached can be increased.

As the specific notification effect during AT in step Sd3908, in this modification, as shown in FIG. An effect is set such that three symbols are displayed in the portion 65, and an effect similar to the above-described special role notification effect is set.

In this embodiment, when Cherry A to C are won among the specific combinations, the 10th re-game winning to the 12th re-game winning can be established, and among these, the 12th re-game winning is established. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing when the 12th re-game winning is established, it is confirmed that the cherry B or cherry C was won, and the 12th re-game winning is confirmed. If the 10th re-game win is established in spite of operating the stop switches 42 to 44 at a timing that can be established, it is determined that the cherry A was awarded. On the other hand, if the 11th regame win is established, it cannot be determined which of the cherries A to C was won.

Then, if the type of cherries A to C is to be discriminated in the event of occurrence of the specific role notification effect, at least the 10th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning is established instead of the 11th re-game winning. It can be said that it is necessary to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 with timing. The 10th and 12th replay symbols on the left reel 32L are "BAR" symbols, and the 11th replay symbols are "Red 7", "Ark shell" and "White shell" symbols. The timing at which the 10th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize can be established on the reel 32L is the timing corresponding to the first operation mode when the special role is won.

In other words, when the special role notification effect is performed, even if it is not triggered by a special role, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the first operation mode if the player wants to determine the type of the winning role. It is considered to be operated by Therefore, by setting the notification mode of the specific notification effect during AT to the same notification mode as the notification mode of the specific role notification effect, it is possible to expect that the same operation will be performed even when the special role is won, and during AT. Since there is no need to store performance data dedicated to the specific notification performance, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity. Conversely, from the player's point of view, when the special combination notification effect or the specific notification effect during AT is performed, it can be understood that there is a possibility that the special combination has been won. It is thought that the 32L "BAR" pattern is first aimed at and operated. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between cherries A to C, and it is possible to fully understand the game characteristics such as the additional winning probability that differs depending on the winning result. It is possible to make you feel

It should be noted that if it is determined in step Sd3904 that the special combination is not won, it is determined in step Sd3909 whether or not the specific combination has been won. Execute the processing for performing the production. Steps Sd3909 and Sd3910 are the same as steps Sd2006 and Sd2007. If a negative determination is made in step Sd3902, step Sd3905 or step Sd3909, or after executing the processing of step Sd3903, step Sd3908 or step Sd3910, the process proceeds to step Sd2008 to execute a precursor effect setting process at the time of start.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 337(c), the operation mode at the time of winning the special role is changed according to the relationship between winning and reaching the upper limit. can be varied according to the That is, in the AT mode, when the first operation winning notice command is received, if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the additional lottery will be won, and if it is meaningful to perform the additional lottery due to the additional winning. By operating in the first operation mode, the net increase in the number of cards in the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.74 cards per game. On the other hand, in the AT mode, if the first operation winning notice command is received and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, even if the additional lottery is won, even if the addition due to the additional winning is performed. If the situation is meaningless, by operating in the second operation mode, the net increase in the number of cards in the AT mode can be expected to increase by about 2.98 cards per game. The number of net increases is greater than when operating in this mode. In this way, if it is meaningless to win an additional lottery, the user is made to operate in an operation mode in which the additional lottery is not performed, and the medal increase speed is improved, so that the upper limit increase number of medals can be increased earlier. or increase the number of increments when the maximum number of games is reached.

Furthermore, in a situation where it is not confirmed that the upper limit is reached before the first excess command or the second excess command is received, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received, a specific notification effect during AT (Special combination notification effect) may be executed in some cases. If this is done, it becomes impossible or difficult to determine whether or not the player wins the additional lottery, so that it may be necessary to always operate in the first operation mode when the special role is won. Then, the net increase in the number of cards in the game progressing in this manner can be expected to increase by about 2.63 per game, and only when the first operation winning notice command is received, the specific notification effect during AT (specific role) It is less than the net increase number in the mode of executing the notification performance).

In this case, for example, in the early stages after shifting to the AT mode, the game is played in a mode in which a specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed during AT regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won. If a predetermined opportunity occurs (for example, if a transition condition such as winning a transition lottery or consuming a predetermined number of sets is satisfied), only when the first operation winning notice command is received, specify during AT When switching to a game in a mode of executing a notification performance (specific combination notification performance) and furthermore, when receiving a first excess command or a second excess command, an additional lottery is won by operating in a first operation mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the mode of notification is switched according to the situation, such as switching to a game in which the player is operated in the second operation mode. It should be noted that, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received at the time of winning the special role, if the first operation winning notice command is received from the game in which the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed during AT After switching to a game in which the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) is executed only during AT, furthermore, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won, the specific notification effect (specific There may be a case where the game is switched to a mode in which a win notification effect is executed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the first operation winning notice command is received when the special role is won when shifting to AT mode, the game in the mode of executing the specific notification effect (specific role notification effect) during AT and the first operation winning notice command A lottery or the like may be used to determine whether the game is to be played in a mode in which the specific notification effect during AT (specific role notification effect) is executed only when it is received.

<Modification 7>
In this modification, the mode of notification of the pressing order in the case of winning a special combination during the AT mode is different from that in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, in the above-described embodiment, when a special role is won in the AT mode, the operation order corresponding to the predetermined 6th minor role winning among the 1st minor role winning to the 6th minor role winning is selected. It is configured to perform push-order notification and push-order notification effect. On the other hand, in the present modification, it is determined by lottery which of the first to sixth minor winning combinations should be notified of the operation sequence.

FIG. 338(a) is a flowchart showing part of the lottery result handling process in this modification.

After executing the AT lottery process at the start in step Sd607 or after executing the AT addition process in step Sd609, it is determined in step Sd4001 whether or not the pressing order bell is won. In the event that the bell is won in the order of pressing, in steps Sd4002 to Sd4005, similarly to the processing of steps Sd611 to Sd614, if in the AT mode, the 1st to 6th minor winning prizes are supported. If the AT mode is not in effect, the push order notification is not executed and the push order bell group notification is performed.

If it is not the winning of the pressing order bell at step Sd4001, it is determined whether or not the winning of the special combination is at step Sd4006. If the special combination is won, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in step Sd4007, and if not set, the special combination is notified in step Sd4008. The processing of step Sd4008 is the same as the processing of step Sd617.

At step Sd4007, the AT mode flag is set, and in the case of winning a special role in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step Sd4009. In step Sd4009, a notification minor winning lottery process is executed. In the informing minor winning combination lottery processing, it is determined by lottery which of the first through sixth minor winning combinations should be notified of the pressing order of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the special winning combination this time. In this case, the notification minor combination lottery table stored in the various table storage area 105a is acquired, and which minor combination is to be notified of the pressing order is selected.

After executing the informing minor combination lottery process in step Sd4009, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled to inform the pressing order of the operation order corresponding to the processing result of step Sd4009 in step Sd4010. Then, in step Sd4010, a process of setting the pressing order notification command corresponding to the process result of step Sd4009 as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this lottery result handling process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Sd4006, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

The information small combination lottery table used in the information small combination lottery process in step Sd4009, as shown in FIG. are set differently. Of these, the 2nd to 6th small wins, especially in settings 1, 3, and 5, the ratio of the 3rd and 5th small wins to be selected is the 2nd, 4th and 4th small wins. It is set to be higher than the ratio of selecting the 6th minor winning combination, and in settings 2 and 4, the ratio of selecting the 2nd minor winning combination, the 4th minor winning combination and the 6th minor winning combination is higher. It is possible to predict the set value from the reported selection rate of the minor winning combination, such as the fact that the third minor winning combination and the fifth minor winning combination are set to be higher than the selected rate. there is

In addition, the ratio of selecting the first minor combination differs particularly depending on the set value, and the setting value is such that the rate of selecting the first minor combination increases as the set value increases the payout rate (higher setting). there is Therefore, it is possible to predict the set value also from the selectivity of the first minor combination. Here, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination is the operation order of left→middle→right. , depending on the timing of the stop operation, the 33rd minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning winning combination.

That is, the stop switches 42 to 44 are in the AT mode when the press order of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination is notified and at the timing when the 33rd minor combination winning can be established. is operated, if the 33rd minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning combination, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination is triggered by the special winning combination. If the 1st minor winning combination is established instead of the 33rd minor winning combination, the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination is triggered by the pressing order bell. It can be understood that it was By doing so, in predicting the setting value from the ratio of the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination, the pressing order bell is triggered by devising the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It is possible to make a prediction while excluding the notification of the pressing order, thereby improving the prediction accuracy.

However, if an attempt is made to improve the prediction accuracy of such set values, one medal will be paid out instead of eight medals. As a result, it is possible to realize novel gameplay such as allowing the player to select whether to improve the prediction accuracy of the set value or to increase the number of medals to be paid out.

Moreover, when a special role is won in the AT mode as described above, the pressing order notification corresponding to any of the first to sixth minor role winnings is performed, so each operation order is performed. It is possible to average the occurrence rate of the press order notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the pressing order notification corresponding to the predetermined operation order is likely to occur when the pressing order notification is performed. It can be made not to cause inconvenience. For example, in the AT mode, even when the pressing order bell is won or when the special combination is won, the pressing order bell is configured to generate the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect for the cherry A to C and the chances A to C, and then the pressing order bell. and the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect of the special combination and the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect of the cherry A to C and the chance numbers A to C are visually difficult to distinguish or cannot be identified. In the event that an effect, etc., occurs, the player must ensure that the pushing order notification effect, etc. is Cherry A to C or Chance A to C, which are likely to be won in the AT addition lottery, or that the special role is triggered. It can be assumed that there is something to be expected. However, if the rate of occurrence of the push-order notification effect, etc., is biased according to the operation order as described above, the result of the lottery cannot or cannot be predicted from the aspect of the push-order notification effect, etc. , the result of the lottery triggered by the operation order may be predicted. In this respect, as described above, it is possible to preferably avoid such a problem by adopting a mode in which bias in the operation order is less likely to occur.

In this modification, the variation (standard deviation) in the rate of occurrence of push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins is 7% for setting 1, 5% for setting 2, 6% for setting 3, and 6% for setting 4. 7% at setting 5, 15% at setting 6, and the average variation of each setting value is 8%. On the other hand, the variation for each set value in the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor combination is 13%, which is higher than the average value of variation in the pressing order notification for the first to sixth minor combinations. expensive. In other words, it is more efficient to predict the set value only from the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification for the first minor combination than to predict the set value from the occurrence rate of the pressing order notification for each minor combination. It is possible to

However, even if the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor winning combination is performed when the special winning combination is won, if the second operating mode is operated instead of the first operating mode, the first minor winning combination will not be won. Although it is established, it cannot be determined whether or not it is triggered by winning the 1st and 2nd pushes of the bells. In other words, if the 1st minor role winning is established when the special role is won, it will be mixed with the 1st minor role winning triggered by the pressing order bell, making it impossible to efficiently predict the set value. . By doing so, if you want to predict the set value, you can realize the game property of aiming for the 33rd minor win on the side with the smaller number of payouts. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 8>
In this modification, a small notification winning combination at the time of winning a special combination is drawn at a predetermined opportunity, and the small notification winning combination is determined using the result of the lottery at the time of winning a special combination after that. FIG. 339(a) is a flow chart showing the advantageous section transition processing in this modified example. The advantageous section transition process is a process executed in step Sd1706 in the first section display process (FIG. 300).

At step Sd4021, the lottery result of the current game is grasped, and at the following step Sd4022, a process of obtaining a ceiling game number table is executed, and at step Sd4023, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step Sd4024, the processing result of step Sd4023 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step Sd4025, a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. As described above, for the ceiling counter, a subtraction value lottery is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the transition to the AT mode occurs without going through the AT mode transition lottery. .

In step Sd4026, a notification minor winning lottery process is executed. The notification small winning combination lottery table used in the notification small winning combination lottery process in this modification, as shown in FIG. set in different proportions. Of the six operational orders, five operational orders are set to have the same selectivity. configured differently. The operation order different from the selection rate of the other operation order is set differently depending on the set value.

In this case, the variation in the selection rate of the pressing order notification for the 1st to 6th minor wins and the variation for each setting value in each pressing order notification are the same value. , the occurrence rates of the 1st to 6th small wins must be counted. That is, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

After executing the notification small combination lottery process in step Sd4026, after executing the process of storing the small combination of the lottery result in the notification small combination counter of the various counter areas 106e in step Sd4027, this advantageous section transition process exit. In this case, if the first minor combination is selected as the processing result of step Sd4026, 1 is input to the notification minor combination counter, and if the second minor combination is selected, 2 is entered to the notification minor combination counter. Any value from 1 to 6 is input to the notification minor combination counter. Then, in step Sd618 in the lottery result handling process in this modified example, the pressing order notification to be executed is determined by referring to the value of the notification minor combination counter. That is, if 1 is input to the small winning combination counter, the notification of the pressing order of the first small combination is executed, and a pressing order notification command corresponding to the first small combination is set (step Sd619), and the small winning combination counter is set. If 2 is input in the , the pressing order notification of the second minor combination is executed, and the pressing order notification command corresponding to the second minor combination is set.

By doing so, while generating randomness in the notification of the pressing order, there is no need to execute the notification small winning combination lottery process when the special winning combination is won, so it is possible to reduce the processing load of each game. .

As described above, since the notification small winning lottery process is executed in the advantageous section transition process, each time the advantageous section is transitioned (each time the advantageous section ends), the notification small when winning the special role Roles will change. By doing so, the notification of the pushing order becomes more random, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as the fact that the winning of the special role is discovered due to the unevenness of the notification of the pushing order. It is also possible to improve the difficulty of the set value prediction game, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 9>
In this modified example, a modified example of the notification minor combination lottery table will be described.

FIG. 340(a) shows an example in which the pressing order notification corresponding to the first minor winning combination or the second minor winning combination is not selected. In other words, the order of operations corresponding to the first minor winning combination and the second minor winning combination, in which there is a possibility of the first operation mode when the special winning combination is won, is not selected. By doing so, it is possible to minimize the possibility that the 33rd minor winning combination with a small number of medals to be paid out will be established during the AT mode, and to achieve a smoother increase in medals.

In FIG. 340(b), in the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order of the first and second minor winnings does not occur when the special winning combination is won as described above, the winning probability of the pressing order bell side is adjusted, and each pressing order is notified. It shows an example of equalization.

That is, as shown in FIG. 340(b1), since the special role is won with a probability of about 5% (about 1/20) in each game, the special role is triggered in each game during the AT mode. The notification of the pressing order corresponding to the minor win to the sixth minor win occurs with a probability of about 1.25%. On the other hand, the pressing order information corresponding to the first to second minor wins triggered by the special win does not occur. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 340(b2), the order bells to be pushed in each game with a probability of approximately 64% (approximately 1/1.56) are selected as the order bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first minor combination. and the pinching bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the 2nd minor winning combination are set so as to be easier to win than the winning combinations corresponding to the other 3rd to 6th minor winning combinations. In this modification, 18% of the total pressing order bells are allocated to the forward pressing bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the first small winning combination and the sandwiched pressing bells 1 and 2 corresponding to the second small winning combination, and other 16% is allocated to the role of As a result, in each game, with the push order bell as a trigger, the push order notification corresponding to the 1st and 2nd small wins occurs with a probability of about 11.54%, and the 3rd to 6th small wins The corresponding press order announcements each occur with a probability of approximately 10.25%.

When the pressing order notification triggered by these special roles and the pressing order notification triggered by the pressing order bell are totaled, as shown in FIG. The pressing order information corresponding to the 3rd to 6th minor wins respectively occurs with a probability of about 11.54%. As a result, it is possible to make the difference (approximately 0.04%) smaller than the difference (approximately 1.25%) in the occurrence rate of each notification in the special role. In this way, by compensating for the bias in the notification of the pushing order triggered by the special combination with the notification of the pushing order of other results, it is possible to preferably equalize the notification of the pushing order, and the notification of the pushing order can be achieved. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the game result is predicted from the

<Modification 10>
In this modified example, even in the advantageous section transition lottery process triggered by a special role, the contents of the lottery process are varied depending on the operation modes of the stop switches 42-44. In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed at the start of the game, but in this modified example, the configuration is changed so that it is executed at the end of the game. Although a detailed description of this point with reference to the drawings is omitted, in the lottery result handling process in this modified example, when it is determined that the advantageous section flag is not set in step Sd604, the advantageous section transition lottery in step Sd605 is performed. The lottery result handling process is terminated as it is without executing the process. The advantageous section shift lottery process in this modification is configured to be executed in the second section display process of step Sd416 in the reel control process (FIG. 277).

FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing second section display processing in this modification.

In this modification, if it is determined in step Sd4101 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Sd4111, and then the second section display process is terminated. Otherwise, the processing of steps Sd4101 to Sd4110 is the same as the processing of steps Sd1801 to Sd1810.

FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift lottery process in this modification.

In this modification, after grasping the game lottery result in step Sd4201, a process of grasping the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the current game is executed in step Sd4202. Then, in step Sd4203, a process for acquiring an advantageous zone transition lottery table is executed, in step Sd4204 a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is acquired, and in step Sd4205 an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 344(a), the advantageous section transition lottery table in this modification has a different probability of winning a transition lottery triggered by a special role compared to the above-described embodiment, and other results. The odds of winning the transition lottery triggered by are the same. Specifically, in this modification, the probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery is higher when the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the special role winning game is the first operation mode than when the operation mode is the second operation mode. is set so as to be high, winning the advantageous section transition lottery with 100% probability in the first operation mode, and winning the advantageous area transition lottery with 0% probability in the second operation mode. That is, it is set so as not to shift to the advantageous section in the second operation mode.

After executing the advantageous zone transition lottery in step Sd4205, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won in step Sd4206. Execute the processing to be performed. Through such processing, the advantageous section flag is set in the section display first processing of the next game.

After executing the process of step Sd4207, the process at the time of transition to an advantageous section is executed in step Sd4208. That is, in this modification, the advantageous section transition processing is not executed in step Sd1706 of the first section display processing (FIG. 300), but is executed in step Sd4208. When a negative determination is made in step Sd4206, or after the processing of step Sd4208 is executed, the advantageous section shift lottery processing ends.

In other words, in this modification, when a special role is won in a normal section and the first operation mode is operated, the game transitions to an advantageous section, while when a special role is won and the game is operated in the second operation mode, the game enters an advantageous section. will not migrate. As described above, when operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, and when operated in the second operating mode, the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are awarded. It is established and 8 medals are paid out. In the internal state, an advantageous zone transition lottery is held in a 3-bet game, and all lottery results excluding the result of losing and a special role win the advantageous zone transition lottery, so when a special role is won, the first minor role is won. Even if the 6th minor winning combination is established and the game is not shifted to the advantageous section in the current game, if the next game is shifted to the advantageous section, the number of medals will increase by two, which is advantageous for the player. Become. In other words, it is advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode in the normal section.

In the advantageous interval transition process in step Sd4208, the ceiling game number is set according to the lottery result of each game. Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 343, in step Sd4301, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step Sd4302, a process of obtaining a ceiling game number table is executed, and in step Sd4303, a ceiling game number lottery process is executed. Then, in step Sd4304, the processing result of step Sd4303 is input to the ceiling counter, and in step Sd4305, the ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , terminates this advantageous section transition processing.

As shown in FIG. 344(a), the ceiling game number table in this modified example has a maximum ceiling of 700 games except for the ceiling game number lottery triggered by a special role, and the maximum ceiling game number is set according to the lottery result. is set so that a smaller number of ceiling games can be selected. Specifically, the game lottery results are set so that the lower the appearance rate of the game, the easier it is to select a smaller ceiling game number. is set to be easily selected.

The number of ceiling games to be selected with the winning of a special role as a trigger is set so that the number of ceiling games to be selected varies depending on the operation mode of the winning special role game, and 700 games are selected in the first operation mode. In the case of the second operation mode, 1000 games, which is more than the 700 games, is selected as the ceiling number of games. However, in this modification, as described above, if the game is operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game, it is set so as not to win the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, the number of ceiling games is substantially 700 games.

In other words, if the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section in the special role winning game, the situation is more disadvantageous for the player than the case of shifting to the advantageous section in other lottery results, even in terms of the number of ceiling games to be selected. can occur, and if the special role winning game is shifted to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games is 700 games, but if it is shifted to the advantageous section by other lottery results, the number of games is less than the 700 games. A number can be selected as the ceiling game number. In this case, in the normal section, when the special role is won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode to avoid the transition to the advantageous section in the game, and to move to the advantageous section in the next and subsequent games according to other lottery results. It is more advantageous for the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 344(b), depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44, the number of medals to be paid out differs, and the contents of the processing related to the instruction function differ in the special role, whichever is the normal section or the advantageous section. It will be different whether it is more advantageous to operate in the operation mode of . That is, in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery in the processing related to the instruction function are executed in the first operation mode, but the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery are executed in the second operation mode. is not executed, in the game property aiming to increase the medals by shifting to the AT mode, if it is in the advantageous section, the special role winning game is operated in the second operation mode by the person who operates in the first operation mode. It is more advantageous for the player than On the other hand, in the normal section, if the first operation mode is selected, the advantageous section transition lottery in the processing related to the instruction function is executed, but if the second operation mode is selected, the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed. At a first glance, it seems that operating in the first operation mode is more advantageous than operating in the second operation mode in terms of game characteristics aiming at shifting to the advantageous section and shifting to the AT mode. However, as described above, it is set so that the number of ceiling games can be smaller when transitioning to an advantageous section triggered by another result than when transitioning to an advantageous section triggered by a special role. Therefore, substantially, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the second operation mode than to operate in the first operation mode when a special combination is won in the normal section. Therefore, the operation modes that are advantageous at the time of winning the special combination are different between the normal section and the advantageous section, and by using such a configuration, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, an example in which a plurality of types of special roles are provided will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345(a), in this modification, the first privilege is provided by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the first operation mode on the lottery table for the normal game state in the 3-bet game. In addition, a first process is executed as a process relating to the instruction function, and a second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is granted by operating in the second operation mode, and a game is played more than the first process as a process relating to the instruction function. A special combination A, a special combination B, and a special combination C are set as special combinations for which the second process disadvantageous to the player is executed. All of the special roles A to C are set to be won with a probability of about 1/60, and the probability of winning any of the special roles A to C is about 1/20. Similar to morphology.

As shown in FIG. 345(b), in this modification, the first operation mode and the second operation mode set for each of the special roles A to C are different, and the winning results are different from those in the above embodiment. ing.

Specifically, the special combination A is set as the first operation mode to operate the left stop switch 42 first as a specific number, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is first operated as a specific number. is set as the second operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, winning of any one of the 9th to 33rd small wins is established instead of the 33rd minor win, and 1 8 medals are paid out, and when operated in the second operation mode, winning of any of the 3rd to 6th minor wins is established and 8 medals are paid out.

Also, in the special role B, the first operation mode is set to operate the middle stop switch 43 as a specific number, and the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 can be operated as a specific number first. It is set as the second operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, it is not the 33rd minor win, but one of the 9th to 33rd minor wins is established and one medal is awarded. Payout occurs, and when operated in the second operation mode, winning of any of the first, second, fifth, and sixth minor wins is established, and eight medals are paid out. .

For the special combination C, the first operation mode is set to operate the right stop switch 44 as a specific number, and the second operation mode is to operate the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 as a specific number first. It is set as an operation mode, and when it is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of any of the 9th to 33rd small wins is established instead of the 33rd minor win, and one medal is paid out. When operated in the second operation mode, winning of any one of the first to fourth minor wins is established and eight medals are paid out.

The first processing and second processing as processing related to the instruction function of each special role A to C are the same as in the above embodiment, and when operated in the first operation mode, the probability is 10% in the normal mode. The AT mode transition is won, and in the CZ mode, the AT mode transition is won with a probability of 50%, but when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the AT mode transition is not won. Also, during the AT mode, there is a 10% chance that the winning will be added regardless of the mode of operation.

That is, in this modification, in each special role A to C, the first operation mode is set as the second operation mode in another special role, and the second operation mode is the first operation mode in another special role. is set as Specifically, the first operation mode of the special role A is the second operation mode of the special roles B and C, and the second operation mode of the special role A is the first operation mode of the special role B. Also, the first operation mode of the special role B is the second operation mode of the special role A and the special role C, and the second operation mode of the special role B is the first operation mode of the special role C. The first operation mode of the special role C is the second operation mode of the special roles A and B, and the second operation mode of the special role C is the first operation mode of the special role A.

In addition, in the special roles A to C in this modification, although the first operation mode and the second operation mode are associated with the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not mapped. In other words, by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order associated with the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the operation is performed in the first operation mode and the second operation mode regardless of the operation timing. As a result, the winning of the corresponding result is established, and the processing related to the instruction function is executed.

By doing so, for example, even if the same stop switch is operated first in each game, the operation mode at the time of winning the special combination is not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode. It can also be an operation mode. That is, in the above embodiment, when the game is played in the operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the operation mode may be the first operation mode or the second operation mode. When the game is played in the game mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the first operation mode is not changed and the second operation mode is always selected. On the other hand, in this modified example, even if the game is played in the operation mode in which any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated first, not only the first operation mode but also the second operation mode can be used. . Therefore, it becomes easier to secure the fairness of the game.

However, when a special role is won, either the first operation mode is operated to advance the processing related to the instruction function advantageously, or the second operation mode is operated so that many medals can be obtained. It is up to the player to select a game, and the player can select it in this modified example as well. A configuration for that purpose will be described below.

FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing a part of lottery result handling processing in this modified example.

If it is determined in step Sd610 that the lottery result of the current game does not indicate that the pressing order bell has been won, the process proceeds to step Sd4401. In step Sd4401, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any special combination winning, and if the special combination is not winning, the lottery result corresponding processing is terminated as it is. If any special combination is won, the process proceeds to step Sd4402.

At step Sd4402, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress. If the AT mode is not in progress, it is determined in step Sd4403 whether or not the special combination won this time is the special combination A. If it is the special win A, in step Sd4404, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to notify that it is the special win A among the operation mode wins.

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. , "9" are set to indicate the type of the operation mode combination, with "7" corresponding to the special combination A, "8" corresponding to the special combination B, and "9" corresponding to the special combination C. It is That is, in the case of the special combination A in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1, the sixth display segment N6, and the seventh display segment N7-- are lit and displayed to display "7". Further, in the case of the special win B in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 to are illuminated and "8" is displayed. Then, in the case of the special win C in the operation mode combination, the first display segment N1 to the third display segment N3 and the fifth display segment N5 to the seventh display segment N7 are lit and displayed to indicate "9". is displayed. Any of these "7" to "9" displays are identifiable by the player, and the player is informed of which of the special roles A to C has been won by the type of operation mode combination. It is possible to grasp from

In step Sd4404, the command monitor 68 is controlled to display "7" as a notification of the special combination A among the operation mode combinations. As a result, the lottery result of the game this time is a special role A winning, and the first operation mode is obtained by operating the left stop switch 42 first, and the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first. The player can grasp that the second operation mode is set.

Furthermore, in this modified example, it is possible for the display control device 81 side to generate the pressing order notification effect even in a mode other than the AT mode.

That is, after executing the process of step Sd4404, it is determined in step Sd4405 whether or not the switching flag for A is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The switching flag for A is a flag for adjusting the occurrence frequency of each pressing order notification effect when performing the pressing order notification effect when the special combination A is won. That is, if it is determined that the switch flag for A is not set, in step Sd4406, the process of setting the switch flag for A is executed. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order corresponding to (left→middle→right) as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4405 that the switch flag for A has been set, processing for clearing the switch flag for A is executed in step Sd4408. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command in the operation order (left→right→middle) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sd4403 that it is not the special combination A, the process advances to step Sd4410 to determine whether the special combination won this time is the special combination B or not. If it is the special winning combination B, in step Sd4411, the command monitor 68 is controlled so that "8" is displayed as a notification that it is the special winning combination B among the operation mode hands. Then, in step Sd4412, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for B is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the switching flag for B is not set, a process for setting the switching flag for B is executed in step Sd4413, and if the pressing order is bell in step Sd4414, the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination (middle → left →Right) is executed to set the pressing order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4412 that the switching flag for B has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for B is executed in step Sd4415. After executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order (middle→right→left) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

Further, if it is determined in step Sd4410 that it is not the special winning combination B, it means that the current special winning combination is the special winning combination C. The instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that "9" is displayed as a notification to that effect. Then, in step Sd4418, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for C is set in the various flag storage area 183a. If the switching flag for C is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for C is executed in step Sd4419, and if the pressing order is bell in step Sd4420, the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination (right → left → middle) is executed as an output target for the display control device 81, and then this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4418 that the switching flag for C has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for C is executed in step Sd4421. After executing the process of setting the push order notification command of the operation order (right→middle→left) corresponding to the combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 345(c), when special winnings A to C are won in the normal mode or CZ mode, the instruction monitor 68 notifies the special winnings A to C as the type of operation mode winnings. are performed respectively. As a result, for example, the lottery result of the current game is that the special role A is won, and the left stop switch 42 is operated first to enter the first operation mode, and the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44 are operated first. By doing so, the player can grasp that the second operation mode is set, and the lottery result of the game this time is the winning of the special role B, and the first operation mode is set by operating the middle stop switch 43 first, By operating the left stop switch 42 or the right stop switch 44 first, the player can grasp that the second operation mode will be entered, and the lottery result of the game this time is a special role C winning, and the right stop switch. The player can understand that the first operation mode is entered by operating 44 first, and the second operation mode is entered by first operating the left stop switch 42 or the middle stop switch 43 .

Here, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 346, the notification mode of the pressing order notification effect when the special combination or the pressing order bell is won in the AT mode, and the pressing order notification when the special combination is won in the normal mode or CZ mode It is different from the notification mode of production. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(a), in the special hand in the AT mode and the pressing order notification effect when winning the pressing order bell, for example, numbers are attached to the yellow characters corresponding to the "bell" pattern. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 346(b), in normal mode or CZ mode, in the pressing order notification effect when winning a special combination, numbers The color of the character marked with is different from that in the AT mode. there). By doing so, when the pressing order notification effect is generated before shifting to the AT mode, the player can be informed that the pressing order notification effect does not correspond to the pressing order bell but to a special combination. It is possible to clearly notify the player to the player, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that none of the 1st to 6th minor wins is established despite the operation in accordance with the pushing order notification effect. can. In this modification, as described above, during the AT mode, the notification mode is common between the pressing order notification effect when the special combination is won and the pressing order notification effect when the pressing order bell is won. By doing so, it is possible to expect the effect of pushing the special role winning and confusing it with the order bell winning.

Furthermore, as the pressing order notification effect on the display control device 81 side, in the case of the special win A, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first minor win and the operation order corresponding to the second minor win. The corresponding pressing order notification effect is alternately executed, and in the case of the special win B, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third minor win and the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor win are executed. The corresponding pressing order notification effects are alternately executed, and in the case of the special win C, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination and the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination are executed. The corresponding pressing order notification effect is alternately executed. By doing so, in the normal mode and the CZ mode, it is possible to receive the AT mode shift lottery on the advantageous side more surely when the special roles A to C are won by the pressing order notification performance, and to generate it. It is possible to suppress bias in the pressing order notification effect.

If it is determined in step Sd4402 that the special combination is won in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step Sd4423. In step Sd4423, it is determined whether or not the special combination won this time is the special combination A. If it is the special role A, it is determined in step Sd4424 whether or not the switch flag for A is set. If the switching flag for A is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for A is executed in step Sd4425, and if the pressing order is Bell in step Sd4426, the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination (middle → left →Right) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step Sd4427, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4424 that the switch flag for A has been set, the process of clearing the switch flag for A is executed in step Sd4428. Control is performed so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (middle→right→left) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step Sd4430, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sd4423 that it is not the special combination A, it is determined in step Sd4431 whether or not the special combination currently won is the special combination B. If it is the special role B, it is determined in step Sd4432 whether or not the switching flag for B is set. If the switching flag for B is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for B is executed in step Sd4433, and if the pressing order is bell in step Sd4434, the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination (right → left →Middle) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step Sd4435, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4432 that the switching flag for B has been set, processing for clearing the switching flag for B is executed in step Sd4436. Control is performed so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (right→middle→left) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step Sd4438, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Sd4431 that it is not the special role B, it means that the special role won this time is the special role C. In this case, in step Sd4439, it is determined whether or not the switching flag for C is set. If the switching flag for C is not set, the process of setting the switching flag for C is executed in step Sd4440, and if the pressing order is bell in step Sd4441, the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination (left → middle →Right) is controlled so that the instruction monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order. Then, in step Sd4442, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, this lottery result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd4439 that the switch flag for C is set, then in step Sd4443 processing for clearing the switch flag for C is executed. Control is performed so that the command monitor 68 is notified of the pressing order of the operation order (left→right→middle) corresponding to the combination. Then, in step Sd4444, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command of the operation order corresponding to the second minor combination as an output target to the display control device 81, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

That is, as shown in FIG. 345(c), in the case of the special win A, the push order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the third minor win is displayed as the push order notification effect on the display control device 81 side during the AT mode. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fourth minor win are alternately executed, and in the case of the special win B, the pressing order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor win. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the sixth minor combination are alternately executed, and in the case of the special combination C, the pressing order corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the first minor combination. The notification effect and the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order corresponding to the second minor combination are alternately executed. By doing so, in the AT mode, it is possible to establish a small winning combination with a large number of medals paid out when the special roles A to C are won by the pressing order notification effect, and the generated pressing order notification effect is biased. can be suppressed.

As described above, in this modification, a plurality of types of special roles are provided, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are alternately set for each special role. When the operation is continued in one operation mode, the other special combination is operated in the second operation mode, and the game in the first operation mode and the game in the second operation mode are equally performed in each special combination. A game can be played, and the fairness of the game can be easily secured.

In addition, when each special combination is won, in the normal mode and CZ mode, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode is generated, and in the AT mode, the pressing order notification corresponding to the second operation mode is generated. Any special role can be operated in the first operation mode until the shift to the AT mode, and can be operated in the second operation mode after the shift to the AT mode. It is also possible to play the game in the above embodiment.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode correspond to the operation order in which a plurality of small wins are won if the bell is pressed in order, the operation order to be notified to the winning special role is switched. . That is, for example, in the special role A, before shifting to the AT mode, if the pressing order is a bell, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the operation order of the first and second minor wins is alternately switched, and after shifting to the AT mode. If it is the pressing order bell, the operation order corresponding to the third minor combination and the fourth minor combination is alternately switched. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate bias in the pressing order notification effect with a relatively simple configuration.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, in a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided as in modified example 11, an example will be described in which the mode of processing relating to the instruction function is changed for each special role. Specifically, in this modified example, the processing relating to the instruction function in the AT is made different between the special combination A, the special combination B, and the special combination C.

As shown in FIG. 348(a), the first operation mode and the second operation mode for the special roles A to C are the same as in the eleventh modification, and the first operation mode for the special role A is the special role B, C, the first operation mode of the special role B is the second operation mode of the special roles C, A, and the first operation mode of the special role C is the second operation mode of the special roles A, B is set as In addition, before the AT mode transition, it is possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery by operating any of the special roles A to C in the first operation mode, and by operating in the second operation mode AT mode It is set so that you cannot receive the transfer lottery.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 349, during the AT mode, the same AT additional lottery is executed regardless of the operation mode, as in the eleventh modification, for the special hands A and B. That is, the probability of winning the additional lottery is the same regardless of whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. On the other hand, in the special role C, even in the AT mode, the advantage of the additional lottery differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode. Although it is possible to win an additional prize when operated in the first operation mode, it is set so as not to win an additional prize when operated in the second operation mode. The specific processing in this case will not be described with reference to the drawings, but for example, in the special roles A and B, an additional lottery is performed so that an additional winning can be obtained by the AT addition processing in FIG. 288 etc., If it is a special role C, it is preferable to perform an additional lottery so that an additional winning can be obtained according to the operation mode in the stop AT additional processing in FIG. 333 and the like.

As for the pressing order notification effect in the AT mode, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the second operation mode is performed for the special winnings A and B. On the other hand, as for the special combination C, based on the addition prior determination processing such as FIG. On the other hand, if an additional winning is not achieved even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the pressing order notification performance corresponding to the second operation mode is performed.

In this way, by making the contents of the processing related to the instruction function different depending on the special role, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to which special role will be won, and to increase the expectation when the pressing order notification effect occurs. It can be changed according to the operation order indicated by the pressing order notification effect.

That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 349, the special bonuses A and B are won with a probability of 30% in the process for adding AT at the start, and the special role C is the first operation mode in the process for adding AT at the time of stop. 348(b), in the special role A and the special role B, in the pressing order notification effect of each operation order corresponding to the second operation mode, each The degree of additional winning expectation is the same, and it can be expected that about 30% of the pushing order notification effects that can occur with the special roles A and B as a trigger will result in an additional winning. On the other hand, with respect to the special combination C, if the pressing order notification effect of the operation order corresponding to the first operation mode is generated, there is a 100% probability that the winning will be additionally won. When the forward notification performance is generated, the winning is additionally won with a probability of 0%. By doing so, the degree of expectation for additional winning will differ greatly depending on the content indicated by the pressing order notification effect, and the degree of attention to the pressing order notification effect can be preferably increased.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) The privilege when operated in the first operation mode and the privilege when operated in the second operation mode in the special role winning game are not limited to those described above. That is, when operated in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination or the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established and one medal is paid out, and the operation is performed in the second operating mode. In this case, the 1st to 6th small wins are established and 8 medals are paid out. It may be a configuration, a configuration in which one medal is paid out, and a configuration in which more than one medal is paid out, or a configuration in which winning is not established as a result of either of these medals may be lost. , at least, the privilege (the number of medals) may be set to be smaller than when operated in the second operation mode. Further, when operated in the second operation mode, a configuration may be adopted in which more than eight medals are paid out, or less than eight medals are paid out.

Furthermore, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the game state does not shift or shifts to the first state, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the state is higher than the previous state or the first state. It may be configured to shift to a second state that is advantageous for the player. For example, the first state and the second state are RT states in which the probability of winning a replay is improved, and the probability of winning a replay is higher in the second state than in the first state, or the RT state A configuration may be adopted in which the number of continuous games is increased or the continuation rate is increased. Also, a bonus state in which the odds of winning a minor combination may be different may be set as the second state, and a bonus state in which the bonus state is less advantageous than the bonus state as the second state may be set as the first state.

In any case, if the configuration is such that the privilege provided when the operation is performed in the second operation mode is more advantageous to the player than the privilege provided when the operation is performed in the first operation mode. Just do it.

(2) In the special role winning game, the processing regarding the instruction function when operated in the first operation mode and the processing regarding the instruction function when operated in the second operation mode are not limited to the above. For example, although the AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is higher in the first operation mode and in the second operation mode. If the AT mode transition wins, the AT mode in which the first operation mode is more advantageous than the second operation mode (large number of games, large number of sets, set continuation rate It is also possible to adopt a configuration that makes it easy to shift to a high value, easy to win extra, etc.). Further, the first operation mode may be configured to be more likely to win an additional win than the second operation mode, and the case of winning an additional win in the first operation mode is more likely than the case of winning an extra win in the second operation mode. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of additional games and the number of additional sets at the time of additional winning are large. Further, when operated in the first operation mode, the AT mode transition lottery and the CZ mode transition lottery are performed, while when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, only the CZ mode transition lottery is performed. When operated in the first operation mode, an AT mode transition lottery is performed, and when operated in the second operation mode, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed. Instead, a configuration may be adopted in which the types of processing are also different.

When operated in the first operation mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the case of operation in the second operation mode, and the AT mode is shifted to with the first operation mode as a trigger. A configuration may be adopted in which the player is more advantageous to the AT mode, in which the transition is triggered by the second operation mode, rather than the AT mode. In addition, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, it is easier to win an additional win than when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the addition of the AT mode triggered by the second operation mode is more advantageous for the player, such as a larger number of games to be added or a larger number of sets. In these cases, considering the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery and the advantage of the AT mode to be switched to, and the winning probability of the additional lottery and the additional advantage at the time of winning, the first operation mode is better than the second operation mode. It is preferable that the configuration is also advantageous for the player.

(3) When operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the first privilege is granted and the first process is executed as the processing related to the instruction function, while the operation is performed in the second operation mode. In a configuration in which a second privilege is granted and a second process is executed as a process related to the instruction function when the The relationship with the difference in the degree of advantage with is not limited to the above. That is, in the above, one medal is paid out as the first privilege, eight medals are paid out as the second privilege, and the AT mode transition is won with a high probability as the first process, and as the second process By using such a configuration as not winning the AT mode transition, it is set so that the player is more advantageous to operate in the first operation mode in order to aim at the AT mode transition. By changing this, for example, the difference in advantage between the first privilege and the second privilege is made larger than the above, and the difference in the advantage between the first process and the second process is made smaller than the above. For example, in order to aim at shifting to the AT mode, it may be more advantageous to aim at the ceiling by operating in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode.

(4) When operated in the first operation mode in the special role winning game, the number of games up to the ceiling (ceiling counter) is subtracted, and when operated in the second operation mode, the number of games up to the ceiling is reduced. Although the number of games is not subtracted, the number of games up to the ceiling may be added when operated in the second operation mode. In this case, the number of games to be added is a uniform number of games. Alternatively, the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery or the like. Further, when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the subtraction of the number of games up to the ceiling may not be performed not only for the current game but also for a specific number of games (for example, 5) thereafter. It is also possible to use a configuration in which a specific number for which the operation is not performed is determined by lottery. In the case of a configuration in which the number of games to be added and the number of games not to be subtracted are determined by lottery, the number of games to be added and the number of games to stop subtraction that are likely to be selected may differ according to the set value. A configuration may be adopted in which a small number of games to be added or a number of games to stop subtraction are easily selected.

(5) Examples in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished depending on the type and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first stop operation, and the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the first operation mode. An example in which the first operation mode and the second operation mode are distinguished depending on the type is shown, and the first stop operation is set to be the branch timing of both operation modes, but the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed. Both operation modes may be distinguished according to the type and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, or both operation modes may be distinguished according to the type of the stop switches 42 to 44 that perform the second stop operation and the third stop operation. In these cases, the distinguished second stop operation and third stop operation may be applied to each of the above inventions as branch timings of both operation modes.

(6) The ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by a special role is about half of the ratio of winning the AT mode transition triggered by other results, but this is just an example, and the AT mode triggered by a special role The transition winning percentage may be lower or higher than this. In addition, in the normal mode, the ratio of winning the AT mode transition with the special role as a trigger is set lower than the other, and in the CZ mode, the ratio of winning the AT mode transition with the special role as the trigger is set higher than the other. It may be reversed.

(7) The degree of advantage of the AT mode to be shifted may be different between the case where the AT mode transition is won due to the special role and the case where the AT mode transition is won due to another result. When AT mode transition wins with a role as a trigger, the player is configured to transition to AT mode more advantageous than when AT mode transition wins with other results as a trigger, or vice versa. Also good.

(8) The AT mode when reaching the ceiling and the AT mode transition before reaching the ceiling may have different advantages, and the AT mode when reaching the ceiling may be changed to the AT mode before reaching the ceiling by winning the lottery. By adopting a configuration that is more advantageous than the AT mode based on the lottery, in a game in which a special role is won near the ceiling, the AT mode shift is performed in the second operation mode rather than receiving the AT mode shift lottery in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize a game feature in which both operation modes when winning a special role are selected in relation to the number of ceiling games, such that it is advantageous for the player not to receive the lottery.

(9) The effects of each game during the CZ mode are not limited to those described above. At least, by adopting a complete notification type production mode in which the result of the AT mode transition lottery is notified in each game, the result of the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the special role is notified in the game in which the special role is won. The significance of doing so is enhanced. For example, in the bomb effect, switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP may be performed based on the player's operation of the predetermined operation unit. A production switch 66 for production may be used as the predetermined operation unit. It should be noted that, in the case of a configuration in which switching from the bomb image BP to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP is performed based on the player's operation as described above, the start lever 41 is displayed at least in the game subsequent to the game in which the bomb effect is started. It is preferable that the switching is performed before the operation is performed, and the switching is based on the betting operation of the next game, such as inserting medals from the first credit insertion switch 56 or the medal insertion slot 45. may be configured to perform Incidentally, even in the above-described embodiment, betting operations for the next game such as inserting medals from the first credit insertion switch 56 or the medal insertion slot 45 are performed after the bomb effect is started and before switching to the explosion image EP or the unexploded image NP. In the event that a bet is made, it is preferable to switch to a planned image, notify AT winners, etc., based on the above-described bet operation.

(10) In a game in which a special role is won during the CZ mode, if the AT mode is not won, the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery for that game may be carried over to the next game or later. In this case, since the AT mode is not won, the AT mode is not started from the game following the game in which the special role is won.

(11) A configuration may be adopted in which the AT mode win notification during the CZ mode is executed before the double eyes effect after the third stop operation. In this case, the notification of the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special combination can be executed after the start lever 41 is operated. It is possible to notify the results of the AT mode transition lottery before the third stop operation. Then, it is preferable that the timing of notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the special role may be the same timing as the timing of notifying the result of the AT mode transition lottery based on the result other than the special role.

(12) In the double eyes effect executed when winning the AT mode transition in the CZ mode, the type of number character to be displayed, the lottery result of this game, and the lottery result that triggered the AT mode transition winning may be associated. For example, if AT mode transition is won with a specific role as a trigger, odd-numbered characters are likely to be displayed as double eyes effects, and AT mode transition is won with normal roles such as normal reps A to C. In such a case, a character with an even number is likely to be displayed as a double eye effect, and a character with a predetermined number (for example, 0) is likely to be displayed as a double eye effect when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger. may be In this case, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the current game from the character that stops in the left fluctuation area SP1 at the first stop. It is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for the AT mode shift lottery in relation to the operation mode performed, and it is possible to expect a significant improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the preliminary determination process at the time of winning the special combination, there are cases where AT mode transition winning is won if it is the first operation mode, and AT mode transition winning is not won even if it is the first operation mode, and at the time of the first stop It is good also as composition which changes the character of the number to stop. That is, as described above, when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger, the odd-numbered character is likely to be displayed as a parallel effect, and when the AT mode transition is won with a special role as a trigger. , a character with a predetermined number is easily displayed as double eyes effect, and if the AT mode transition is won in the first operation mode, the character with the predetermined number is stopped in the left fluctuation area SP1. On the other hand, if the AT mode transition is not won even in the first operation mode, the configuration may be such that odd-numbered characters are stopped in the left variation area SP1. As described above, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop roll when the special roll is won and the stop roll of Cherry A to C among the special rolls are common. Even if AT mode transition winning is not achieved even if the player is operated in the first operation mode at the time of winning, and even if a character with an odd number stops in the left variation area SP1, cherry A to C is used as a trigger. It is possible to make the player expect that the AT mode shift lottery is won, and to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the AT mode shift win.

(13) With regard to the special role and the pushing order bell, which can have the same stop result, the special role is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than the pushing order bell. A configuration may be adopted in which the order bell is more likely to win the AT mode shift lottery, or even in the second operation mode when the special combination is won, the pushing order bell is more likely to win the AT mode shift lottery.

(14) The preliminary determination process may be performed only during the CZ mode without being performed in the normal mode. In addition, it may be set so that there are cases where preliminary determination processing is performed and cases where it is not performed in the CZ mode, and a configuration in which the CZ mode in which the preliminary determination processing is performed and the CZ mode in which the preliminary determination processing is not performed are determined by lottery or the like when shifting to the CZ mode. may be For example, when the CZ mode is shifted to the CZ mode based on Cherry A, the pre-determination process is performed in the CZ mode, but when the CZ mode is shifted to the CZ mode based on the Cherry B, the pre-determination process is performed in the CZ mode. According to the lottery result that triggered the transition to the CZ mode (the lottery result in the game that won the CZ mode transition), it is determined whether to perform the preliminary determination process during the CZ mode. may be configured. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that the player can select in advance whether or not to perform the preliminary determination process.

(15) If it is specified in the preliminary determination process that the AT mode transition wins by operating in the first operation mode when the special combination is won, before the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode For example, as the effect at the start, it is possible to notify that AT mode transition wins or that there is a high possibility of winning. By doing so, when the notification occurs, it is thought that the player will operate more carefully in the first operation mode, and the joy of confirming the AT mode transition winning by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 by himself. It is possible to make you feel In this case, the AT mode transition win is won in the AT lottery process at the start in the same or similar manner as the notification that the AT mode transition will be won or the notification that the possibility is high. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which notification of the case can be performed.

(16) If it is specified in the preliminary determination process that the AT mode transition wins when the special role is won, a notification (for example, FIG. 325(c)) for selecting the first operation mode and the second operation mode is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player wins the AT mode transition winning by his or her own operation in the first operation mode, which can be used to improve the interest in the game. In this case, the first operation mode can be won by making it possible to win the AT mode transition in both the case of operating in the first operation mode and the case of operating in the second operation mode when the special combination is won. To give an impression that winning an AT mode transition is won not only by a selection but also by a selection of a second operation mode, by making it possible to win the AT mode transition winning not only by one's own operation but also by selection. can be done. It should be noted that, in the above configuration, it is preferable that the AT mode transition win is more likely to occur when the operation is performed in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Furthermore, in this case, the AT mode, which is shifted when operated in the second operation mode, is more advantageous to the player than the AT mode, which is shifted when the operation is performed in the first mode. , the significance of selecting the second operation mode can also be generated, and the interest in the game in which the selection is made can be improved.

(17) Although the navigation mode is configured to be managed on the display control device 81 side, it may be configured to be managed on the main control device 101 side. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the main controller 101 manages the game property of operating in the second operation mode. A configuration may be adopted in which main controller 101 executes the navigation mode processing of 330 and the specific notification processing of FIG. In this case, as the specific notification effect, for example, if it is a pressing order bell, it may be configured to execute the pressing order notification of the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first to sixth minor wins. may also be executed.

(18) The trigger for starting and ending the navigation mode is not limited to the above. As a start opportunity, instead of or in addition to the transition to the advantageous section, the case where the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery that is performed at a predetermined opportunity (for example, triggered by a special role) is not won. Okay, start when the number of times the AT mode transition lottery or CZ mode transition lottery is not won reaches a predetermined number, or when the number of games reaches a predetermined number (preferably the number of games before the ceiling) It may be a trigger, and it may be configured to shift to the navigation mode (through a lottery or the like) at some of these start triggers. In addition, instead of or in addition to the AT mode transition, the end trigger may be the end of the advantageous section, or the number of games or the number of occurrences of the specific notification effect after the transition to the navigation mode (special role triggered The number of times the AT mode shift lottery is not won (number of times of non-winning of the AT mode shift lottery) reaches a predetermined number.

(19) Although it is configured so that a specific notification effect can occur by shifting to the navigation mode, if the AT mode is not won even if the special role winning game is operated in the first operation mode, It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the specific notification effect. In this case, for example, even if it is operated in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game, the AT mode is not won, and even if it is operated in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, the AT mode When it is not won, that is, when AT mode is not won twice in a row triggered by a special role, a specific notification effect is generated. By referring to the result, it may be configured to determine whether or not to generate the specific notification effect at the time of winning the special role of this time. Furthermore, it may be configured to determine whether or not the specific notification effect is generated when the special role is won this time depending on the operation mode when the previous special role was won, for example, in the first operation mode in the previous special role winning game. If the AT mode is not won after the operation, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in the special role winning game this time, a specific notification effect is generated, while the special role winning last time is generated. If the AT mode is not won after operating in the second operation mode in the game, and if the AT mode is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode in this special role winning game, a specific notification effect will be performed. It may be configured not to generate it.

(20) Switching to Navi Mode Although there is a set difference in the odds of winning the lottery, it is also possible to switch to navi mode with a uniform probability regardless of the set value. Also, the probability of winning the transition may be different depending on the lottery result of the game in which the navigation mode transition lottery is performed. The navigation mode transition lottery may be more likely to win the navigation mode transition lottery, or vice versa.

(21) In the navigation mode, if a special role is won and the AT mode transition lottery is not won even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, a specific notification effect is performed, but the specific notification is not notified. In place of or in addition to the production, a production to the effect that the operation is performed in the second operation mode (for example, in the case of a push order bell, a push order notification production for the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes) is performed. may be configured. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification effect is performed and the effect of performing the operation in the second operation mode is mixed. For example, these effects may be alternately executed. , may be configured to determine by lottery which production is to be executed.

(22) Execute processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as AT lottery processing at stop time and additional lottery processing at stop time, after the medal payout of the game is completed. However, it may be after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, it may be before the start of medal payout, or after the start of medal payout but before completion. good.

(23) In the special role winning game, after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, a freeze effect may be generated. In this case, before the start of the freeze effect or during the freeze effect, processing related to the instruction function according to the operation mode in the special role winning game, such as AT lottery processing at stop time and extra lottery processing at stop time, is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Then, during the freeze effect or in the freeze effect, the results of the AT lottery process at the time of stop and the additional lottery process at the time of stop may be notified.

(24) When the push order bell is won outside of the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 is configured to execute the push order bell group notification. may not be executed. Also, when the pressing order bell is won, the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is output. It is good also as the structure which does not carry out. At least, it is sufficient that the display control device 81 cannot specify the advantageous operation sequence (operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations) when the bell is won by pushing the bell, except in the AT mode.

(25) In the case where the pressing order bell group is won, the lottery result command for the pressing order bell group is output. good too. That is, the lottery results are grouped into specific roles, special roles, and other normal roles (normal bells A to C, pushing order bells), and these special role lottery result commands and special role lottery result commands are issued. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery result command for a normal winning combination is output to the display control device 81 .

(26) In the special role winning game before shifting to the AT mode, the instruction monitor 68 was configured to notify the player of the special role. It is good also as a structure which carries out. Specifically, for example, in place of or in addition to the configuration for executing "9" as the notification of the special role as in the above-described embodiment, the pressing order bell is used as the operation order for first operating the left stop switch 42. If there is, it may be configured to display "1" or "2" indicating the operation order corresponding to the first minor winning prize or the second minor winning prize. The same applies to special role A notification, special role B notification, and special role C notification. ' or '2' may be displayed, and '3' or '4' indicating the operation order corresponding to the third or fourth minor winning combination may be displayed when the special winning combination B is notified. It may be configured to display "5" or "6" indicating the operation order corresponding to the fifth minor winning prize or the sixth minor winning prize when the special prize C is notified. However, in the case of these special roles A to C, it is preferable to control the instruction monitor 68 so that the pressing order notification corresponding to the same operation order as the pressing order notification effect displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 is performed.

(27) When the special combination is won before shifting to the AT mode, when the display control device 81 executes the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first operation mode, the pressing order notification effect is made distinguishable from the case of the pressing order bell. However, the pressing order notification effect may be performed in the same notification mode as the pressing order bell, or the pressing order notification effect may be performed in the same reporting mode as the pressing order bell and in a different reporting mode from the pressing order bell. There may be cases where a performance is performed.

(28) When the pressing order bell is won in the AT mode, the main control unit 101 sends the display control unit 81 a pressing order notification command indicating the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning combinations as the pressing order notification command. However, the configuration may be such that the commands corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins are output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81. FIG. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which a command indicating which of the pressing order bells is the lottery result is output from the main control device 101 to the display control device 81 . In these cases, in order to operate in the second operation mode when winning a special role and to establish the 1st to 6th minor wins, the corresponding command (1st to 6th minor wins It is preferable that the main control device 101 outputs to the display control device 81 the corresponding command and the command indicating the result of the pressing order bell corresponding to the first to sixth minor wins to be won. 278 may be stored in the display control device 81 so that the operation order to be notified can be specified based on the received command.

(29) When the number of ceiling games on the display is reached, the precursor effect is determined according to the difference until the ceiling counter reaches 0, but the precursor effect is determined after the ceiling counter reaches 0. may be configured.

(30) In a configuration in which an omen effect is determined according to the deviation until the ceiling counter reaches 0 when the ceiling game number on the display is reached, the deviation reaches the number of games of the omen effect provided in advance. A configuration may be adopted in which an omen effect is set in the case. That is, in the above-described embodiment, the maximum number of games that can be played in the omen mode during normal operation is 40 games. When the number of games on the display reaches the ceiling, an omen effect is set, and if the deviation is more than 40 games, the omen effect is set when the games are completed until the deviation is within 40 games. good too. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the number of precursor effect patterns to be stored.

(31) The ceiling number of games on the display is configured to be updated regardless of the operation mode when the special role is won, but it may be configured so that it may or may not be updated depending on the operation mode. update is performed in some cases where the ceiling counter is not decremented by the second operation mode, and updating is performed even when the ceiling counter is not decremented by the second operation mode. You can let it be. Even in these cases, considering the case where a value greater than 1 is subtracted from the ceiling counter by the subtraction value lottery process, the ceiling counter becomes 0 in games where the number of displayed ceiling games reaches the ceiling. A gap may occur with the game.

(32) Even in games other than special combinations, the ceiling counter may not be decremented depending on the operation mode or by lottery.

(33) Although the number of ceiling games is determined by lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous section, the number of ceiling games may be set as a uniform number of games (for example, 700 games).

(34) The advantageous zone transition lottery is configured to be performed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed, and the winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is changed according to the operation mode in the special role winning game. , The winning probability of the advantageous zone transition lottery is set to be the same (same processing) regardless of the operation mode in the special role winning game, simply by performing the advantageous zone transition lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. may be In this case, when a special role is won in the normal section, the supplementary display section 65 or the like may notify the effect so that the player can grasp that the special role has been won. By doing so, even in a scene where common processing is actually performed regardless of the operation mode of winning a special role, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to the operation mode, which complicates the processing configuration. It is possible to improve interest while preventing the occurrence of Even with such a configuration, if the advantageous section transition lottery is performed regardless of the operation mode when the special role is won, it is more advantageous to operate in the second operation mode when the special role is won in the normal section. Intervals and advantageous modes of operation are reversed. By the way, as described above, the effect of notifying the special role in the scene where the common processing is performed regardless of the operation mode of winning the special role can be expected even in the AT mode. A special role winning game may be configured to notify that the special role has been won.

(35) When a plurality of special roles are provided, the number of types of special roles is not limited to three, and may be two, four or more. In this case, the first operation mode in one special role becomes the second operation mode in another special role, and the first operation mode in the other special role becomes the second operation mode in one special role. When a game in which one special role is continuously operated in the first operation mode is performed, the other special role is operated in the second operation mode, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are performed. You can expect the effect of making it operate evenly.

(36) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, a first privilege is provided when one special role is operated in the first operation mode, and a first benefit is provided when the second operation mode is operated. The second privilege is different from the first privilege that is granted when the other special role is operated in the first operation mode and the second privilege that is granted when the other special role is operated in the second operation mode. may In this case, while the first benefits are different, the second benefits are the same, while the first benefits are the same, the second benefits are different, the first benefits are different, and the second benefits are different. may have different configurations. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only are the first and second benefits different, but the first benefits for the first special role and the second special role are the same. On the other hand, while the benefits of some special roles are the same, such as that the first privilege for the third special role is different from that of the first special role and the second special role, other special roles The relationship may be different from the privilege of the role. In these cases, while the first privilege and the second privilege are different from other special roles, the difference in the degree of advantage (for example, the number of medals paid out) between the first privilege and the second privilege may be common.

(37) In a configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, a first process relating to an instruction function is executed when one special role is operated in the first operation mode, and when the special role is operated in the second operation mode, The second processing related to the instruction function to be executed includes the first processing related to the instruction function to be executed when the other special role is operated in the first operation mode, and when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. It may be different from the second processing regarding the instruction function to be performed. In this case, while the first processes are different, the second processes are the same, while the first processes are the same, the second processes are different, or the first processes and the second processes are different. may have different configurations. In addition, in a configuration in which three or more types of special roles are provided, not only are the respective first processing and second processing different, but also the first processing for the first special role and the second special role are the same. On the other hand, the first processing for the third special role is different from that for the first special role and the second special role. The relationship may be different from the process of winning. In these cases, while the first process and the second process are different from other special roles, the difference between the first process and the second process (for example, the probability of winning in AT mode) is common. good.

(38) As a special role, when operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is given and the first process related to the instruction function is executed, and in the second operation mode different from the first operation mode. When operated, the second privilege, which is more advantageous than the first privilege, is given, and the second processing, which is processing related to the instruction function and which is more disadvantageous than the first processing, is executed. In addition to the mode and the second operation mode, when the operation is performed in the third operation mode different from the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the third privilege is granted and the third process related to the instruction function is performed. A special role may be provided. In this case, the third privilege may have a configuration different from both the first privilege and the second privilege, a configuration that is different from the first privilege but the same as the second privilege, or a configuration that is the same as the first privilege. On the other hand, it may be configured differently from the second privilege, the third process may be configured differently from the first process and the second process, and the third process may be different from the first process but the same as the second process. or a configuration that is the same as the first process but different from the second process. In any case, it is sufficient that the set of the third privilege and the third process does not have the same contents as the set of the first privilege and the first process and the set of the second privilege and the second process. Some contents may be the same. In addition, the third benefit is different from the first and second benefits, and the third processing is different from the first and second processing, thereby giving different advantages to the player. The benefit obtained from the set of the third privilege and the third process is different from the benefit obtained from the set of the first privilege and the first process, and the set of the second privilege and the second process It is better to have a configuration different from the benefit obtained in

More specifically, for example, when the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the 33rd minor winning combination is established and one medal is paid out, and as the first process, the AT mode transition winning is achieved with a probability of 50%. The AT mode transition lottery is executed, and when it is operated in the second operation mode, the 1st small combination to the 6th small combination win is established and 8 medals are paid out, 0% as the second process In a configuration in which an AT mode transition lottery is executed in which AT mode transition is won with a probability of , when operated in the third operation mode, a seventh minor winning combination or an eighth minor winning combination is established and three medals are awarded. A payout may occur, and as the third process, an AT mode transition lottery may be executed with a 25% probability of winning the AT mode transition.

(39) When the special combination is won, the first operation mode and the second operation mode make it possible to win different small wins. When operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined replay winning prize is established, and when operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined minor winning prize is established, or when operated in the first operation mode In this case, a predetermined minor winning prize is established, while a predetermined replay winning prize is established when operated in the second operation mode, or a predetermined replay prize is established when operated in the first operation mode. While a minor win is established, a predetermined bonus prize is established when operated in the second operation mode, and no winning is established as a result when operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when operated in the second operation mode, a predetermined small winning combination, replay, or bonus winning may be established.

(40) When the special role is won, the processing related to the instruction function is executed after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed. The configuration may be such that the processing related to the instruction function is executed after completion.

For example, in the AT lottery process at the start of winning a special role, if the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed and the first lottery is won, and the operation is performed in the first operation mode, While confirming the transition to the AT mode by setting the AT mode winning flag in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, if the first lottery at the start is not won, operate in the first operation mode. Even if the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, and if the first lottery at the start is won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Even if the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, and if the first lottery at the start is not won, the operation is performed in the second operation mode. However, the configuration may be such that the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop.

Furthermore, in the AT lottery process at the start of winning a special role, the first lottery of the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the result of the first lottery is the first result, and in the first operation mode When it is operated, the AT mode winning flag is set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop, while the transition to the AT mode is confirmed. If it is the result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at stop even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the result of the first lottery at the start is the first lottery. If the result is 2, if the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed by setting the AT mode winning flag in the AT lottery process at the time of stop. When the result of the first lottery is the second result, the AT mode winning flag is not set in the AT lottery process at the time of stop even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode. may be

(41) In the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the winning probability of each special role in each game is the same, but the winning probability may be different. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which special roles A to C are provided, the odds of winning special roles A and B are the same, but the odds of winning special role C are different. may be different, or the winning probabilities of any of the special roles A to C may be different from each other.

(42) The odds of winning a special role may differ according to the game state. For example, when shifting to the RT state in which the probability of winning a replay increases, the probability of winning a special role changes (increases or decreases) compared to the normal state before transition. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of special roles are provided, the probability of winning the special role A is higher than that of the special role B in the first state, while the probability of winning the special role B is lower than that of the special role A. In the second state, the probability of winning the special role B is lower than that of the special role A. The winning probability of B is higher than that of the special role A, while the winning probability of the special role A is lower than that of the special role B, and so on.

(43) Even in the configuration in which a plurality of special combinations are provided, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be distinguished not only by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 but also by the operation timing.

(44) Execute the AT lottery based on the special combination after operating the stop switches 42 to 44 (AT lottery process at stop time, etc.), and perform the AT lottery based on other results by operating the stop switches 42 to 44. Although it is configured to be executed before (at the time of operating the start lever 41, AT lottery process at the start, etc.), even if the result is other than a special role, after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (at the time of stop AT lottery process ), or even in the case of a special role, the AT lottery may be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (process for AT lottery at start). Even in these cases, for example, the effect control as notification of the result of the AT lottery in the CZ mode is based on the AT lottery after the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 (CZ effect setting process at the time of stop) and before the operation. A configuration different from that based on the AT lottery (starting CZ effect setting process) may be used.

(45) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state do not increase or decrease. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(46) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine side is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(47) The ball payout rate is changed according to each set value. Setting 1 has the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 has the highest ball payout rate. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(48) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(49) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine due to separate handling of medals and balls.

(50) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Embodiment of 5e>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 in the 5e embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagrams of FIGS. 350 and 351. FIG. In the following description, configurations different from the above embodiments will be described, and descriptions of configurations common to the above embodiments will be omitted. Further, in the following description, components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment are described using the same reference numerals, and components having the same reference characters but different functions are denoted by specific reference numerals in this embodiment. shall be treated as

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the set value, the set value information storage area 106c for storing the set value, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when power is cut off by power failure processing (see FIG. 352), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 351, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display are connected to the output side. 65 is connected. Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the stop lamps 42b to 44b, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Further, all or part of the components 42b to 44b and 63 to 65 connected to the display control device 81 are configured to be directly connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 controls these components 42b to 44b. , 63 to 65 may be directly controlled.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 352 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by main controller 101. CPU 102 of main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step Se101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. At step Se102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step Se103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step Se102, various processes after step Se104 are performed.

That is, in step Se104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. At step Se105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. At step Se106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. At step Se107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 350) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. At step Se108, a timer update process is performed for subtracting/adding the value of each counter or timer. In step Se109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out.

In step Se110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step Se111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62 and the instruction monitor 68 respectively is performed. In step Se112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting processing to the respective display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. At step Se113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. FIG. In step Se114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step Se101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. Thereafter, in step Se115, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to games will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step Se201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step Se202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 etc. is completed, the game management processing shown in steps Se203 to Se212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step Se203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. Thereafter, in step Se204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings have been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing (step Se107) of the timer interrupt processing. When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 were operated during the period from the previous start waiting process to the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step Se205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step Se205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". Affirmative determination is made in step Se205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step Se205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Se204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step Se205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step Se206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step Se110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step Se206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step Se207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step Se204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step Se208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step Se209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step Se210, the reel control process of step Se211, and the medal payout process of step Se212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step Se203.

Next, the lottery process of step Se210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Se301, a random number is obtained which is used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step Se302, a lottery table is selected for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly classified into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, since the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above, the lottery table for the normal game state includes the lottery table for the 3-bet game, A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step Se302, a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the game state is selected. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set, the current game state is determined to be the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is selected. . If the current game is a 3-bet game, the lottery table for the normal game state for the 3-bet game (Fig. 355) is selected, and if the current game is a 2-bet game, a 2-bet game Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 356). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step Se302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step Se302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 355 is a lottery table for normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 356 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step Se303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in step Se304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step Se301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step Se305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step Se306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step Se305 to the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set at step Se306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step Se306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, step Se306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see Se203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step Se306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set and a combination other than 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. Further, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=11 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in the state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed in the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step Se305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step Se307, and in subsequent step Se308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step Se304 to continue determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step Se304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step Se305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, if the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value Regardless, it is about 1/18.4 respectively, and the probability of winning the pushing order bell is about 1/1.53. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in the 3-bet game, excluding the increase in the first BB state, a decrease of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is about 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step Se306, or when it is determined in step Se308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step Se309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent Step Se310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process of determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery result of steps Se301 to step Se308, a process of notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step Se310, a lottery result command is set in step Se311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to allow the player to grasp the result of the win/loss determination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step Se110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step Se312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, the stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step Se306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started as a 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step Se312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even if the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started as a 3-bet game, in the stop information setting processing of step Se312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step Se313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step Se312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After the process of step Se313 is executed, the section display first process is executed in step Se314, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step Se211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step Se401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step Se309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step Se310, and the like. processing. In the following step Se402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step Se106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 outputs a progress (command) to that effect to the display control device 81, and the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 side causes each stop switch 42 . . . 44 are illuminated to notify the player or the like that the stop command can be generated.

Following the rotation start process, at step Se403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step Se404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step Se403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set at step Se405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps Se406 to Se412 is performed to stop the rotating reel. The display control device 81 that has received the stop command command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 to perform the effect of stopping the corresponding reel, and also corresponds to the stop switches 42 to 44 operated this time. Control is performed so that the stop lamps 42b to 44b are extinguished.

In step Se406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step Se407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step Se407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step Se408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. At step Se409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed at step Se410. conduct. After that, in step Se411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step Se412, and the process returns to step Se403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won on the push order bell (see FIGS. 355 and 356), the stop switch 42 which generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 358 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when the operation is performed in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established in the case of winning. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, there are cases where the corresponding prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Therefore, in the case where the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle row regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" pattern or the "ark clam" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. If a 2nd minor win, 3rd minor win, 4th minor win, 5th minor win, or 6th minor win win is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step Se411 that all reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step Se413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step Se414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After the bonus state process is executed, the winning result handling process is executed in step Se415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step Se416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step Se417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step Se212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step Se204) described above, the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step Se414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step Se501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step Se501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step Se502.

At step Se502, it is determined whether or not the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step Se503.

At step Se503, a process of inputting 3 to the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. Playing 2-bet games is allowed. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step Se503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step Se504, it is determined whether or not the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Se505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, at step Se506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step Se506. At step Se507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step Se508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step Se501. In subsequent step Se509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to is performed. Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the 1st BB start command in step Se509, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step Se510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step Se505 that the 1st BB winning has not been established means that the 2nd BB winning has been established. In this case, the process advances to step Se511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step Se512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step Se513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step Se514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the second BB state is started. The display control device 81 that has received the second BB start command controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. It should be noted that the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different in appearance and content to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step Se514, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step Se510, and then this bonus state process ends. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Se501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step Se515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 360 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 360, in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate 1-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, at step Se515, it is determined whether or not any small combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, the process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Se516. Then, in step Se517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step Se516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step Se516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step Se517 that it is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step Se518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step Se519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step Se520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that receives the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display unit 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed.

After that, in step Se521, after setting the specified bet numbers to 2 and 3, this bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter at step Se519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the setting is such that the game is easily played in the 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are completed, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. In order to play a bet game, it is necessary to insert three medals from the medal insertion slot 45. - 特許庁

Here, in the present slot machine 10, the playability using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a state called a non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, the winning of the second BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is carried over is entered. Even in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit input switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for medal increase. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins will be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the small combination to be won differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 . In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have a greater fluctuation range of medal increase and decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won by pushing order. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 358) of the first to sixth minor winning prizes when the winning order of the bell is won. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navi mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the second BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) is a game that uses notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, the lottery result handling process performed in step Se310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps Se601 to Se603, a process of grasping the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step Se601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Se602. If the player is in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Se603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of step Se602 and step Se603 is the processing of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) after step Se604.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step Se604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, the internal state can be played in the 3-bet game, and the normal game in which the second BB is carried over can be facilitated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step Se602 or step Se603, it is determined in step Se604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step Se605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 363, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step Se701. Then, in step Se702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 364(a), in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 364(a), as a trigger for the lottery to move to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step Se702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step Se703. Dedicated counters in various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals, and step Se703 acquires the latest updated value of the counters. Then, in step Se704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step Se705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step Se701 is the trigger for the shift lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps Se702 to Se705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step Se705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step Se706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. When a negative determination is made in step Se705, or after the processing of step Se706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step Se604 that the advantageous section flag has been set, the process proceeds to step Se606. At step Se606, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is in the AT mode, and is set when it is possible to shift to the AT mode. The AT mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode shift lottery has been won, the shift to the AT mode has been confirmed, and the state has not yet shifted to the AT mode. is. If neither flag is set in step Se606, the AT lottery process is executed in step Se607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step Se606, continuation determination processing is executed in step Se608, and AT addition processing is executed in step Se609.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery processing in step Se607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Se801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2-bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step Se801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter reaches 0 in step Se802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps Se803 to Se808.

That is, in step Se803, the process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step Se804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

When the CZ mode flag is not set at step Se804, at step Se805, a process of acquiring the normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, when the CZ mode flag is set at step Se804, at step Se806, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 364(a), the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table have respective winning probabilities for the AT mode transition lottery set according to the lottery result of the game. For example, if it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by chance A, the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 1% for normal use, and the AT mode transition will be won with a probability of 3% for CZ. In addition, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the normal AT mode transition lottery table. Further, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired at Step Se805 or Step Se806, AT mode transition lottery processing is performed at Step Se807 using the acquired transition lottery table and the game lottery result grasped at Step Se803. to run. Then, in step Se808, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition win has been made.

If it is determined at step Se808 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step Se802, the AT mode winning process of steps Se809 to Se812 is executed. Further, when it is determined at step Se808 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, at steps Se813 to Se816, a process for AT mode non-win is executed.

In the processing for winning the AT mode, in step Se809, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and it is confirmed whether or not the AT mode transition winning during the CZ mode is made. In the case of winning during the CZ mode, processing for terminating the CZ mode is performed in steps Se810 and Se811. That is, in step Se810, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed. Then, in step Se811, a process of clearing the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e to 0 is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the CZ mode. It is a counter that is decremented by 1 each time a is consumed.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Se809, or after the process of step Se811 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed in step Se812. By such processing, the determination in step Se606 is affirmative from the next game.

In the AT mode non-winning process, it is determined in step Se813 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step Se814, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is decided by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step Se803. . As shown in FIG. 364(a), the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the game, and more specifically, the AT mode transition lottery. The lottery result of the game that is more likely to win the CZ mode is set to be more likely to win the CZ mode shift lottery. In other words, in the event that the AT mode transition lottery is not won in spite of the lottery result of a game in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, it is set so that the transition to the CZ mode is facilitated.

After the CZ mode transition lottery process is executed in step Se814, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery is won in step Se815. If it is CZ mode transition winning, in step Se816, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed.

After one of the winning flags is set in step Se812 or step Se816, the precursor mode setting process is performed in steps Se817 to Se820. The portent mode is a mode in which a portent effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. After passing through the omen mode, the notification of the transition lottery that has been won is performed.

At step Se817, a lottery process for the precursor game is executed. In the lottery process for the number of precursory games, the number of precursory games is drawn by lottery according to the type of transition lottery that has been won, the lottery result of the game that triggered the winning, and the like. For example, if you win the AT mode transition lottery, it is easier to select a longer predictive game number than if you win the CZ mode transition lottery, or if you win the transition lottery with Cherry A. In this case, a longer predictive game number is more likely to be selected than in the case of winning the transfer lottery in Cherry C.

In this embodiment, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set to 0 in step Se817. As described above, if you win the AT mode transition lottery during CZ mode, the CZ mode will end regardless of the number of remaining games in CZ mode. can be comprehended by the player. Therefore, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the sign mode is set to 0 games, so that the AT mode transition lottery is won even though the player knows that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. It is possible to reduce discomfort due to the suggestive notification of what has been done in the precursor mode.

In subsequent Step Se818, a process of inputting the result of the lottery in Step Se817 to the portent counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The portent counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to ascertain the number of remaining portent games, and is decremented by one each time a game is completed during the portent mode.

Then, in step Se819, a process of setting the portent flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step Se820, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the main AT lottery is performed. end the processing. The omen flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the omen mode is on, and the omen command indicates that the omen mode has been set, the number of games in the omen mode, and which transition lottery has been won. This is a command for the control device 81 to grasp. The display control device 81, which has received the portent command, grasps the number of games in the portent mode and the type of transition lottery that has been won, and performs processing for executing an effect during the portent mode on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64. conduct.

<Continuation determination process>
Next, the continuation determination process executed in step Se608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the continuation determination process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag are set.

Here, in the AT mode of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 18) of games are set as one set (number of unit continuations, unit state), and for example, when updating one set of AT mode (set is When starting or ending a set), a continuation lottery for the next set will be held, and if you win the continuation lottery, after the end of the set, you will move to the next set and will not win the continuation lottery. , the AT mode ends without moving to the next set. Then, the continuation determination process in step Se608 is a process for performing the above continuation lottery when updating the set.

At step Se901, it is determined whether the AT game counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is 18 or not. The AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games in one set, and is a counter to which 18 is input when updating the set. That is, in step Se901, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is the first set of AT mode games. If the current game is not the start game, the continuation determination process is terminated. If it is the starting game, the process proceeds to step Se902.

At step Se902, it is determined whether or not the AT set counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is zero. The AT set counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of sets that can be continued to the next set without performing the continuation lottery even if the continuation lottery is not won, and the continuation condition is This is a counter which is incremented by 1 when winning an additional lottery in the established situation, and is subtracted by 1 when the continuation lottery is not won or when the next set is continued without performing the continuation lottery. If the AT set counter is 0, the winning probability of the continuation lottery selected in the current AT mode is grasped in step Se903.

Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of continuation rates are set as the probability of winning the continuation lottery (hereinafter also referred to as "continuation rate"). Specifically, as shown in FIG. A high rate of 90% and lower continuation rates of 60% and 10% are set. The continuation rate is set when shifting to the AT mode (continuation rate setting processing in step Se1211 to be described later). In step Se903, the information set in the continuation rate setting process is read out to grasp the current continuation rate of the AT mode.

After grasping the continuation rate in step Se903, a continuation lottery process is executed in step Se904. That is, if a continuation rate of 90% is selected, the winning will continue with a probability of 90% in the process of step Se904, and if a continuation rate of 10% is selected, 10% will be won in the process of step Se904. Percentage chance of winning continuously.

At step Se905, it is determined whether or not the result of processing at step Se904 is continuous winning.If continuous winning is determined, processing for setting a continuous flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed at step Se906. The continuation flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the continuation condition of the current set (condition for shifting to the next set) is satisfied. Then, in step Se907, after executing the processing of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the continuation determination processing ends.

Also, if it is determined in step Se902 that the AT set counter is not 0, the process of subtracting 1 from the AT set counter is executed in step Se908, and the process advances to step Se906 to set the continuation flag and issue the continuation command. After setting, the continuation determination process ends. That is, in the present embodiment, when the AT set counter is not 0, the continuation condition of the set is satisfied without passing through the continuation lottery. It should be noted that the continuation lottery may be executed regardless of the value of the AT set counter, and the continuation condition may be satisfied if the AT set counter is 1 or more in the case of continuation non-winning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when one set of the AT mode is started (when the start lever 41 is operated), whether or not the continuation condition of whether or not the AT mode continues to the next set of the set to be started this time is satisfied or not. A determination is made, and when it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, a continuation flag is set, and the information is output to the display control device 81 . In this case, the display control device 81 performs a process for performing an effect assuming that the continuation condition is satisfied as the effect of the current set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se905 that it is not the continuation winning, the continuation determination processing is terminated as it is. In this case, the continuation condition is not satisfied at the start of one set in the AT mode, and no continuation command is output at the start of the set. The display control device 81 grasps that the continuation condition is not established by not receiving the continuation command at the start of the set, and performs the production on the premise that the continuation condition is not established as the production of the current set. Take action to ensure that

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step Se609 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the AT add-on process, separate from the above continuation lottery, an add-on lottery to add the number of sets in AT mode is performed. Try to continue until the next set.

First, at step Se1001, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step Se1002, a process of acquiring an additional lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed.

As shown in FIG. 364(a), the additional lottery table has an additional winning rate set according to the lottery result of the game. , Push order bells, while pushing order bells do not win additional prizes, specific roles such as chance A to chance C, cherry A to cherry C, common bell, and watermelon that are difficult to win in the lottery process of each game It is set so that you can win more. In the lottery process of each game, among the specific roles, for example, chance C is more likely to be won than chance A, and cherry C is more likely to be won than cherry A. It is set such that the harder the lottery results are, the easier it is to win the additional lottery. In addition, the additional winning rates of the normal reps A to C of the normal hands are set lower than the additional winning rates of the special hands. In addition, if the lottery result of each game is the push order bell of the normal role, the configuration is such that additional winning is not performed, and if the lottery result of each game is the push order bell of the normal role, an extra lottery is performed. It may be configured without In addition, even if the lottery result of each game is the pushing order bell of the normal role, it is configured to be able to win an additional win, and the probability of additional winning of the pushing order bell of the normal role is increased in the case of a specific role. It may be made lower than the probability of winning. In this case, it may be set so that the additional winning rate of the pressing order bell is higher than the additional winning rate of the normal reps A to C of the normal hands, or the normal reps A to C of the normal hands. It may be set so that the additional winning rate of the pressing order bell is lower than the additional winning rate of the normal reply C. In addition, the winning rate of normal lip A to normal lip C may be different. The winning rate may be increased, or vice versa. In addition, the winning rate of normal reply A to normal reply C may be different depending on the set value. , or even setting (setting 2, 4, 6) and odd setting (setting 1, 3, 5), the probability of winning additional winning when winning normal reply A to normal reply C is different, It may be set so that the odd number setting has a higher probability of winning an additional winning when the normal reply A to normal reply C is won than the even setting.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step Se1002, an additional lottery is executed in step Se1003, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step Se1004. If the additional lottery is won, it is determined in step Se1005 whether or not the lottery result of the current additional lottery is a loop target result (loop target role).

A result to be looped is a result to be subjected to loop processing in which the number of sets to be added when winning the additional lottery is added by a predetermined number (1) until the loop lottery is not won. In the present embodiment, among the results of winning the additional lottery, the normal reply A to normal reply C are set as loop target results.

In step Se1005, if it is determined that the lottery result that triggered the additional winning this time is not the normal reply A to normal reply C as the loop target result, in step Se1006, whether or not the continuation flag is set judge.

If the continuation flag is not set in step Se1006, a process of setting the continuation flag is executed in step Se1007. Then, in step Se1008, after executing the process of setting the continuation command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT addition process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the continuation command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

On the other hand, if the continuation flag is set in step Se1006, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step Se1009. By adding 1 to the AT set counter in step Se1009, it is determined that the AT mode will continue at least until the set following the current set. In the present embodiment, the configuration is such that 1 is uniformly added to the AT set counter when winning the additional lottery. The number to be added to the AT set counter may be determined by lottery according to the lottery result of the game in which the number is 0.

In the following step Se1010, the processing for setting the set addition command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this processing for addition is finished. The set add-on command is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp the fact that the add-on lottery has been won and the value of the AT set counter. In addition to the loop lottery, in a configuration in which a plurality of sets may be added in one additional winning, it is preferable to set information on the number of sets to be added to the set addition command. In this case, when adding multiple sets in a situation where the continuation flag is not set, set the output setting of the continuation command and the set addition command containing information on the number of sets excluding the number of sets for the continuation command do it. The display control device 81 that has received the set addition command executes processing for performing an effect corresponding to the addition of the set by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

If it is determined in step Se1005 that the lottery result that has triggered this additional winning is the normal reply A to normal reply C as the loop target results, then in step Se1011 an additional loop lottery process is executed. In this embodiment, when the lottery result that triggered the additional winning is the loop target result, the loop lottery as described above is executed at a predetermined rate, and the additional loop lottery process in step Se1011 is performed at this time. This is a process for determining whether or not to execute a loop lottery when the result is a loop target result. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 364(b), a loop winning rate is set according to each loop target result. Decide whether to execute or not. In this embodiment, the loop winning rate is different for each of the normal reply A to normal reply C, and the loop winning rate is higher for normal reply B than for normal reply A, and for normal reply C than for normal reply B. It is designed to increase the odds of winning.

In step Se1012, based on the processing result of the additional loop lottery process in step Se1011, it is determined whether or not to execute the loop lottery. If it is determined not to execute the loop lottery, the process advances to step Se1006, and each process is executed to set the number of sets to be added in this additional lottery to 1. In addition, as described above, in the case where a plurality of sets may be added in one additional winning in addition to the loop lottery, if the configuration is such that the information on the number of sets to be added is set in the set addition command. good.

If it is determined in step Se1012 that the loop lottery is to be executed, then in step Se1013 an additional loop process is executed.

The add loop processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step Se1101, a loop rate lottery process is executed. As shown in FIG. 364(b), in this embodiment, a plurality of loop rates are set as winning probabilities of the loop lottery when the loop lottery is performed. An 80% loop is set. The loop rate to be selected is set to be different depending on the trigger of the additional winning, and if it is a normal reply A, any loop rate can be selected, while if it is a normal reply B or a normal reply C, A loop rate other than 80% loop is selected. In other words, the 80% loop can be selected only when an additional win is made with the normal reply A as a trigger.

After executing the loop rate lottery process in step Se1101, the process of storing the result of step Se1101 in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step Se1102. Specifically, a 10% flag is stored for a 10% loop, a 50% flag is stored for a 50% loop, a 70% flag is stored for a 70% loop, and a 70% flag is stored for an 80% loop. Store the 80% flag. In subsequent step Se1103, a process of setting a loop rate command including loop rate information corresponding to the result of step Se1101 as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. Upon receiving the loop rate command, the display control device 81 performs control so that an effect corresponding to the loop rate is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like.

After that, in step Se1104, after executing the processing of setting the rotation effect flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the processing for this additional loop is terminated. In this embodiment, on the basis of the loop rate set as described above, the loop lottery for the set addition of the AT mode is executed during the rotation performance of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, although the loop lottery itself has been decided as described above, the number of loops, that is, the number of additional sets has not yet been decided. The rotation effect and the loop lottery will be described in detail later, but the rotation effect flag set in step Se1104 indicates that the rotation effect should be executed based on the additional winning as described above, and that the loop lottery should be executed. is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp.

In the AT add-on process, after the add-on loop process is executed at step Se1013, the operation instruction effect setting process is executed at step Se1014, and then the process proceeds to step Se1006 to output and set the continuation command and the set add-on command. After executing the processing, this AT addition processing ends. Also, if it is determined in step Se1004 that the addition has not been won, the process advances to step Se1015 to determine whether or not it was the above loop target result (normal reply A to normal reply C). If the result is not a loop target result, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is.

In the case of the loop target result, in step Se1016, a pseudo effect lottery process is executed. The pseudo-performance lottery process is a pseudo-performance that makes people expect that the lottery result that triggered the AT-addition process this time is a loop target result, and that even if they are not winning, they are winning. It is a process of determining by lottery or the like what is to be done in the above. In the present embodiment, for example, about 1% of the cases where the additional lottery triggered by the normal Lip A to the normal Lip C are not won are set so that the pseudo effect lottery is won. Then, in step Se1017, it is determined whether or not the player wins the pseudo effect lottery. When the pseudo performance lottery is not won, this AT addition processing is terminated as it is.

If the pseudo effect lottery is won, in step Se1018, after executing the pseudo operation instruction effect setting process, this AT addition process is terminated.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the description of the operation instruction effect setting process in step Se1014 and the pseudo operation effect setting process in step Se1018, the pressing order notification performed on the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 are described. An overview will be given. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 372(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 372(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 372(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to achieve a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition that the transition to the advantageous section can occur and the pushing order informing can occur is established. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing the operation instruction effect setting process of step Se1014 in the AT addition process.

As described above, the operation instruction effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the addition lottery is won in the AT addition process and the loop lottery is performed, and the loop lottery is a loop target result. It is executed when it is a certain normal reply A to normal reply C. All of the normal replays A to C are the result of multiple wins in multiple replays, and are set so that the replays in which winnings are established can vary depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 371, in normal replay A to normal replay C, the operation order in which the first replay winning is established (the operation order in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first), and the second replay The operation order in which the game win or the 4th replay win or the 5th replay win is established (normal replay A → left → right, normal replay B → right → left, normal replay C right → left → middle) And the operation order in which the 4th replay winning prize or the 5th replay winning prize is established (normal replay A → right → left and right → middle → left, normal replay B → left → right and right → left → middle , Middle → Right → Left and Right → Middle → Left), and the operation order in which the 3rd re-game winning, 4th re-game winning or 5th re-game winning is established (normal Rip A right → left → Middle, right → middle → left of normal Lip B, middle → left → right of normal Lip C) are set.

In these cases, when a plurality of replay wins are associated with the same operation order, such as an operation order in which a second replay win, a fourth replay win, or a fifth replay win is established, stop Winning replays differ depending on the operation timing of the switches 42-44. Specifically, the second replay winning prize is obtained when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. Where established, the corresponding symbols corresponding to these second replay winning prizes are arranged so that the intervals between the corresponding symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are five symbols or more, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated. Depending on the timing, the corresponding symbols corresponding to the second replay winning prize cannot be stopped on the activated line ML. In this case, the symbols corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning are stopped on the activated line ML, and the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning are established.

Also, when the normal reply A~normal reply C is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order associated only with the 4th re-game win or the 5th re-game win, the 2nd re-game win Even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated at the timing at which the corresponding symbols corresponding to the or third re-game winning can be stopped on the activated line ML, the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning can be achieved. The fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning are established by stopping the corresponding symbols corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning instead of the corresponding symbols on the effective line ML.

However, in these normal replays A, normal replays B, and normal replays C, even if any of the replay wins among the replays that are duplicately won are established, the benefits granted are replays, and the replays that are established Only the type of game is different. In other words, the normal replay A, normal replay B, and normal replay C are game results in which replay winnings are established regardless of the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, but the stop numbers differ depending on the operating order.

In the operation instruction effect setting process, in step Se1201, after ascertaining which of the normal replays A to C the current lottery result is, the operation order in which the second re-game winning can be established is grasped. Specifically, if it is normal Lip A, it will grasp the operation order of middle → left → right. → Understand the order of operations inside.

Then, in step Se1202, after executing the process of setting the pressing order notification command including the information of the operation order in which the second re-game winning can be established as an output object to the display control device 81, this operation instruction effect setting is performed. End the process. In the display control device 81 that has received the pressing order notification command, the auxiliary display unit 65 executes a pressing order notification effect that enables the establishment of the second re-game winning. Winning mode by the "white 7" pattern on the reel 32L, the "white shell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" pattern on the right reel 32R, that is, the "white 7" patterns stop aligned on the middle line L2 and win. In order to achieve a winning mode, control is performed to display a character imitating the "White 7" pattern and to execute an operation instruction effect such as "Aim!!" (Fig. 406(a)). In the following description, the stop result in which the "white 7" symbols stop aligned on the middle line L2 is also referred to as a specific mode.

FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing the pseudo operation instruction effect setting process of step Se1018 in the AT addition process.

As described above, the pseudo operation instruction effect setting process is a process that is executed when the addition lottery is not won in the AT add-on process and the pseudo effect lottery is won. The lottery is executed when the loop target result is normal reply A to normal reply C.

In step Se1301, after grasping which of the normal replays A to C the current lottery result is, only the 4th replay win and the 5th replay win can be established, and the 2nd replay win is possible. Understand the order of operations that cannot be established. Specifically, for normal Lip A, the operation order is Middle → Right → Left or Right → Middle → Left, and for normal Lip B, the operation order is Middle → Left → Right or Right → Left → Middle. If it is normal Lip C, it grasps the operation order of middle → right → left or right → middle → left.

Then, at step Se1302, a push order notification command including information on the operation order in which only the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning grasped at step Se1301 can be established is output to the display control device 81. Execute the process to set as In the display control device 81 that has received the pressing order notification command, the auxiliary display section 65 allows the above-described fourth re-game winning and fifth re-game winning to be established, while allowing the second re-game winning to be established. In addition to executing the push order notification effect that cannot be performed, in the same way as the operation instruction effect based on the push order notification command in step Se1202, "white" is executed so that the winning in the above specific mode is established among the second regame winning prizes. 7" Control to display a character imitating a pattern and to execute an operation instruction effect such as "Aim!!". However, as described above, the pressing order notification effect is not the second re-game winning, but the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning. A 4th replay win or a 5th replay win is established. Note that, in the following description, such an effect is also referred to as a pseudo operation instruction effect.

After that, in step Se1303, the pseudo operation instruction effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the pseudo operation instruction effect setting process is terminated. The pseudo operation instruction effect flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that a pseudo effect has been executed in the current game.

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 362), after the process of step Se607 or step Se609 is executed, the process for notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42-44 is executed in steps Se610-Se613.

That is, at Step Se610, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the current game is that the pressing order of the bell has been won. If the pressing order bell is not won, the lottery result handling process is terminated as it is. If the pressing order bell wins, it is determined in step Se611 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, at step Se612, the instruction monitor 68 is turned on so as to notify the pressing order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Control. Then, in step Se613, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed. If the AT mode flag is not set at step Se611, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed at step Se415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, at step Se1401, it is determined whether or not either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step Se1402. If the player is in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step Se1403. That is, the processing of step Se1401 to step Se1403 is processing corresponding to the processing of step Se601 to step Se603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step Se1404.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Se1402 or step Se1403 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step Se1404. In step Se1404, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the precursor flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery, the winning of these transition lotteries has not yet been notified. In this case, in step Se1405, after executing the precursor mode process, the winning result handling process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the precursor flag is not set in step Se1404, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step Se1406. If the CZ mode flag is set and the CZ mode is in progress, the CZ mode process is executed in step Se1407, and then the winning result handling process is terminated.

If the CZ mode flag is not set in step Se1406, it is determined in step Se1408 whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set and the AT mode is in progress, the AT mode process is executed in step Se1409, and then the winning result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step Se1408, the winning result handling process is terminated.

The precursor mode process, the CZ mode process, and the AT mode process will be described below.

<Processing for precursor mode>
In the portent mode processing, as shown in FIG. 375, processing for subtracting 1 from the portent counter is executed in step Se1501. Then, in step Se1502, it is determined whether or not the precursor counter has become 0, and if it has not become 0, the precursor mode processing is terminated. If the precursor counter is 0, the process of clearing the precursor flag is executed in step Se1503.

In the following step Se1504, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set, thereby grasping whether or not the current portent mode has been shifted based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If the AT mode winning flag is not set and the current portent mode is based on winning the CZ mode transition lottery, the process proceeds to step Se1505. At step Se1505, processing for clearing the CZ mode winning flag is executed. Then, in step Se1506, a CZ mode flag is set, and in step Se1507, a process of inputting 10 as a predetermined number to the CZ game counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The CZ game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode, and is decremented by one each time one game is played in the CZ mode. After that, in step Se1508, after executing the process of setting the CZ start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this precursor mode process ends. Upon receiving the CZ start command, the display control device 81 notifies the winning of the CZ mode transition lottery and controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to notify the start of the CZ mode.

If the AT mode winning flag is set in step Se1504 and the current portent mode is a portent mode based on winning the AT mode transition lottery, then in step Se1509 the AT mode winning flag is cleared. Execute. Then, in step Se1510, a process of setting an AT mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. In subsequent step Se1511, a continuation rate setting process is executed. As described above, the AT mode in the present embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of a predetermined number of games is set, and in a situation where there is no remaining number of sets (a situation in which the AT set counter is 0), a set is played. The AT mode continues until the continuous lottery is not won, and the continuation rate setting process in step Se1511 is a process of setting the winning probability (continuation rate) of the continuous lottery.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 376, the selection rate of a plurality of continuation rates (90%, 60%, 10%) is different depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. , and in step Se1511, it is determined by lottery which continuation rate is to be selected based on the set value. Specifically, basically, the higher the set value (the higher the set value for the payout rate), the higher the continuation rate is set to be more likely to be selected. is selected with a probability of 30% at setting 6, it is selected with a probability of 70% at setting 6. However, the continuation rate of 90% is more likely to be selected with the odd number setting than with the even number setting, and the setting value of 5 is the most likely to be selected. When a continuation rate of 90% is selected, a 90% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and when a continuation rate of 60% is selected, a 60% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. However, if the continuation rate of 10% is selected, a 10% flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) indicating each of these continuation rates is a flag that is cleared when the AT mode to be shifted this time ends. That is, once the continuation rate of the AT mode is set, the continuation lottery for each set is performed at that continuation rate until the AT mode ends.

After executing the continuation rate setting process in step Se1511, the process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed in step Se1512. As described above, the AT game counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games until one set of AT mode is completed, and is decremented by one each time one game is completed. Then, if the continuation condition is satisfied when the AT game counter becomes 0, the predetermined number of 18 is input to the AT game counter again, and when the AT game counter becomes 0, the continuation condition is satisfied. If not, the AT mode will end.

Thereafter, in step Se1512, a process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and the precursor mode process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT start command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 to perform an effect corresponding to the start of the AT mode.

<CZ mode processing>
In the CZ mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 377, the process of subtracting 1 from the CZ game counter is executed in step Se1601. In subsequent step Se1602, it is determined whether or not the CZ game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Se1601. If the CZ game counter is not 0, the CZ mode processing is terminated.

When the CZ game counter is 0, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step Se1603. After that, in step Se1604, a process of setting a CZ end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this CZ mode process is ended. Upon receiving the CZ end command, the display control device 81 controls so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 are notified that the CZ mode has ended. As already explained, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the CZ mode, the CZ mode ends at that point and shifts to the portent mode. Therefore, when the CZ mode is terminated by clearing the CZ mode flag in step Se1603, it means that the AT mode transition lottery was not won during the CZ mode.

<AT mode processing>
In the AT mode process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 378, after executing the process for rotation effect based on the processing result of the AT addition process in steps Se1701 to Se1705, the AT mode is performed in steps Se1706 to Se1715. Executes processing such as counting the number of games in the middle. The rotation effect processing will be described in detail later, and the processing of steps Se1706 to Se1715 will be described here.

That is, in step Se1706, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT game counter is executed. In subsequent step Se1707, it is determined whether or not the AT game counter has become 0 based on the processing result of step Se1706. If the AT game counter is not 0, the AT mode processing is terminated.

If the AT game counter is 0, it is determined in step Se1708 whether or not the continuation flag is set. If the continuation flag is set and the continuation condition is satisfied, the processing for shifting to the next set (steps Se1709 to Se1711) is executed. On the other hand, if the continuation flag is not set at step Se1708, the processing for ending the AT mode (steps Se1712 to Se1715) is executed.

If the continuation condition is satisfied in step Se1708, a process of clearing the continuation flag is executed in step Se1709. Then, in step Se1710, a process of inputting 18 to the AT game counter is executed, and in step Se1711, a process of setting a set update command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this AT mode process is executed. exit. The display control device 81 that has received the set update command executes processing for updating the effects of the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 in response to the shift to the set of the AT mode.

On the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied in step Se1708, the AT mode flag is cleared in step Se1712, and the continuation rate information (90% flag, 60% flag, 10% flag) is cleared in step Se1713. Execute the process. Then, in step Se1714, the process of setting the AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. After that, in step Se1715, after executing a process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT mode process is ended. The AT mode end flag is a flag for ending the advantageous section when the AT mode ends. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode termination command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to perform an effect corresponding to the termination of the AT mode.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed at step Se314 in the lottery process (FIG. 354). This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step Se1801, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step Se1801 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step Se1802.

At step Se1802, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section winning game flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, the process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step Se1803. Then, in step Se1804, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step Se1805, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. The number of games in the advantageous section AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous section. Then, in step Se1806, the advantageous section transition processing is executed. The advantageous section transition processing is processing for setting the state and the degree of advantage of the advantageous section to be transitioned to this time. Specifically, in the advantageous section transition process, the ceiling counter is set by lottery or the like, and the number of ceiling games that allows the transition to the AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery after the advantageous section transition is set. I do. The lottery for the ceiling counter may be performed, for example, by using the set value or the lottery result of the game. The higher the setting, the more likely the number of ceiling games to be selected. It is preferable to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games, or to make it easier to select a short number of ceiling games as the result of the lottery result of the current game is less likely to win. Then, a value corresponding to the number of ceiling games determined by lottery may be input to the ceiling counter. For example, by outputting a ceiling command including information corresponding to the ceiling counter to the display control device 81, the number of ceiling games is suggested. A production may be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition processing is executed in step Se1806, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step Se1807.

If it is determined in step Se1801 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step Se1808 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step Se1808, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step Se1802 that the advantageous section winning game flag is not set, after the display start processing is executed in step Se1807 or after the display continuation processing is executed in step Se1808, the AT mode is executed in step Se1809. Determine whether the flag is set. If it is determined in step Se1809 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, then in step Se1810 a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se1809 that any of the AT mode flags is set, in step Se1811, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Execute. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step Se1810 or step Se1811, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step Se1812. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step Se1813, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step Se1812 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step Se1813, the result of the arithmetic processing in step Se1812 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step Se1813, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step Se1812. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step Se416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step Se1901, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous interval flag is set, in step Se1902, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. In the following step Se1903, update processing of the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process of step Se1903, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay winning prize, the number of insertions (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing the MY update process in step Se1903, the remaining game number management process is executed in step Se1904, and the remaining number management process is executed in subsequent step Se1905. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the remaining game number management process, for example, if the total number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT game counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. grasp whether or not In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is the increase/decrease number in the advantageous zone. Know if there are more situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

After executing the number-of-remaining-games management process and the number-of-remaining-numbers management process, in step Se1906, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY is increased to the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the number is 2400 or more. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step Se1907. In the following step Se1908, processing for ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step Se1909, after executing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated.

Regarding the initialization processing of the advantageous section information in step Se1909, specifically, the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section are initialized. Execute the process to return to For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the AT preparation counter, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step Se1906 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value and the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step Se1910, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step Se1907 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the advantageous section end processing is executed as it is.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, at step Se2001, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, the received command is stored in the RAM 183 at step Se2002. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2001, or after the processing of step Se2002 is executed, it is determined in step Se2003 whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set at step Se206 of the normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step Se2004, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2003, or if the processing of step Se2004 has been executed, it is determined in step Se2005 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step Se311 of the lottery process, the lottery result corresponding There are an omen command, a continuation command, a set addition command, a loop rate command, a push order notification command, etc., which are set in processing (FIG. 362). In the case of these start time commands, a start effect setting process is executed in step Se2006.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2005, or after the process of step Se2006 is executed, it is determined in step Se2007 whether or not the newly received command is a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step Se2008, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed for setting the effect based on the current stop operation.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2007, or after the processing of step Se2008 is executed, it is determined in step Se2009 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a winning result set at step Se419 of the reel control process (Fig. 357). In addition to commands, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the CZ start command, which are set in the bonus state processing (Fig. 359), the winning result corresponding processing (Fig. 374), etc. There are an AT start command, a CZ end command, a set update command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step Se2010.

When a negative determination is made in step Se2009, or after the processing of step Se2010 is executed, other processing is executed in step Se2011, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. At step Se2011, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step Se2011, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) can be set without going through the main controller 101. Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step Se2006 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step Se2101, a rotation effect process is executed. The rotation effect processing is processing for a rotation effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the rotation effect processing will be described later in detail.

In the following step Se2102, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win) based on the received lottery result command. If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step Se2103 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step Se2104, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step Se2102 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning a second hand, it is determined in step Se2105 whether or not the lottery result of this game is winning a specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 364(a), in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results. In addition, in the AT mode extra lottery, when the special role is won, the extra lottery can be won, but when the normal role such as the normal reply A is won, the extra lottery cannot be won. If the lottery result of the current game is that the special combination is won, a process of setting the special combination notification effect is executed in step Se2106. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . As the special combination notification, for example, an effect is set such that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2105, it is determined in step Se2107 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is any of the normal replies A to C. If normal reply A to normal reply C are won, it is determined in step Se2108 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. If the pressing order notification command has been received, it is determined in step Se2109 whether or not the pressing order notification command received is the pressing order notification command for the second regame winning. If you have won the normal reply A to normal reply C and have received the push order notification command for the second re-game winning prize, the loop target result will be the trigger to win more, and the loop lottery will be executed. In this case, in step Se2110, along with the pressing order notification effect that enables the second regame winning, a special mode is set in which the middle line L2 is stopped with the "white 7" symbols aligned. Then, a process of setting an operation instruction effect for instructing establishment of the second regame winning is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2109 that the pressing order notification command is not for the second re-game winning, but the pressing order notification command for the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, then in step Se2111, Along with the pressing order notification effect that enables the 4th re-game winning and the 5th re-game winning, an instruction is given to establish the 2nd re-game winning in a specific mode in which the middle line L2 is stopped with the "white 7" symbols aligned. Execute processing for setting a pseudo operation instruction effect to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2103, step Se2107 or step Se2108, or after execution of step Se2104, step Se2106, step Se2110 or step Se2111, the process proceeds to step Se2112. In step Se2112, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If an omen command has been received, the AT mode transition lottery or the CZ mode transition lottery is won, and the omen mode is set, the sub-side omen counter provided in the various counter areas 183b in step Se2113 indicates the number of omen games. Execute the process to enter the corresponding value. The sub-side omen counter corresponds to the omen counter in the main control device 101, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of remaining games in the omen mode. mode.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2112 or after the processing of step Se2113 is executed, it is determined in step Se2114 whether or not the sub-side precursor counter is greater than zero. If the sub-side predictor counter is greater than 0 and the predictor mode is on, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side predictor counter is executed in step Se2115. Then, in step Se2116, a process of setting an effect for the portent mode according to the value of the sub-side portent counter is executed. For example, the smaller the value of the sub-side omen counter, the more strongly suggesting that one of the transition lotteries has been won may be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 .

If a negative determination is made in step Se2114, or after executing the process of step Se2116, AT effect setting processing is executed in step Se2117, and other start effect setting processing is executed in step Se2118, and this Terminate the effect setting process at the start. At step Se2118, for example, a process for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do. The AT effect setting process will be described later in detail.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step Se2010 in the effect setting process (FIG. 381) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, in the all-stop effect setting process, the newly received commands are the winning result command, the 1st BB start command, the 2nd BB start command, the 1st BB end command, the 2nd BB end command, the CZ start command, and the AT start command. This is a process for setting effects in the case of all stop commands such as commands, CZ end commands, set update commands, and AT end commands.

At Step Se2201, it is determined whether or not a CZ start command has been received. If the CZ start command has been received, in step Se2202 the sub-side CZ flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and in step Se2203 the CZ start effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. For example, as shown in FIG. 384(a), the CZ start effect displays that the CZ mode is started and the number of remaining games in the CZ mode (10) on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2201, it is determined in step Se2204 whether or not a CZ end command has been received. If the CZ end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side CZ flag is executed at step Se2205, and the effect setting for performing the CZ end effect at the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 at step Se2206. Execute the process. As for the CZ end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 384(b), an effect is set in which the number of remaining games in the CZ mode becomes 0 and the end of the CZ mode is notified. It should be noted that the CPU 181 sets so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 perform effects for the CZ mode in each game in which the sub-side CZ flag is set. The effect for the CZ mode is such that the background color, appearing characters, etc. are made different from those of the normal mode so that the player can recognize that the CZ mode is in progress. Further, when performing the effect for the CZ mode, the CPU 181 controls the display of the number of remaining games in the CZ mode to update (decrease) the display according to the progress of the game.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2204, it is determined in step Se2207 whether or not an AT start command has been received. If the AT start command has been received, in step Se2208 the sub-side AT flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. A process of inputting 18 is executed. The sub-side AT counter corresponds to the AT game counter on the main control device 101 side. After executing the process of step Se2209, the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed in step Se2210. The sub-side set counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of AT mode sets.

At subsequent step Se2211, an effect setting process for performing an AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 385(a), an effect is set in which a display (character display such as "AT start") indicating that the AT mode is started is performed. In addition, in the AT start effect, for example, the background or sound effect may be set differently according to the continuation rate of the AT mode to be started so as to suggest the continuation rate.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2207, it is determined in step Se2212 whether or not an AT end command has been received. If the AT end command is received, the process of clearing the sub-side AT flag is executed in step Se2213, and the effect setting process for performing the AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed in step Se2214. Execute. For example, as shown in FIG. 385(b), the AT end effect displays the end of the AT mode (character display such as "See you later"), and notifies the number of consecutive sets in the current AT mode and the number of medals won. is set.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2212, it is determined in step Se2215 whether or not a set update command has been received. If a set update command has been received, one set in the AT mode is completed, and the next set is to be performed, processing for clearing the sub-side continuation flag set in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step Se2216. do. The sub-side continuation flag corresponds to the continuation flag on the main controller 101 side. In the following step Se2217, it is checked whether or not an occurrence completion flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and if it is set, a process of clearing the occurrence completion flag is executed. The occurrence completion flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that a predetermined specific effect has occurred in the set to end this time. The specific effect will be described in detail later, but in step Se2217, when updating the set, a process of erasing information indicating that the specific effect has occurred in the set before updating is performed.

After executing the process of Step Se2217, the process of inputting 18 to the sub-side AT counter is executed in Step Se2218, and the process of adding 1 to the sub-side set counter is executed in Step Se2219.

After executing the processing of step Se2203, step Se2206, step Se2211, step Se2214 or step Se2219, or after making a negative determination in step Se2215, a rotation production preparation process is executed in step Se2220, and other operations are performed in step Se2221. After executing the all-stop effect setting process, the present all-stop effect setting process is terminated. In Step Se2221, processing is performed to perform effects corresponding to various commands output at the start and end of the BB, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, and the winning combination is executed. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts, or the speaker 64 is controlled to emit sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay. The rotation effect preparation process will be described later in detail.

<AT effect setting processing>
Next, the AT effect setting process executed in step Se2117 in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 382) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The AT effect setting process is a process for performing an effect during the AT mode. Therefore, prior to the description of the AT effect setting process, the outline of the effect during the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 392. FIG.

<Overview of AT production>
As already explained, the AT mode in this embodiment is a set management type AT mode in which a set of 18 games is set as a predetermined number, and if the continuation condition is satisfied when one set of games is completed, While moving to the next set, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the AT mode ends in the set. In this embodiment, as a production in one set, an allied character and an enemy character face each other, and if the continuation condition is satisfied, the allied character wins, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the allied character is defeated. and the enemy character wins. In this embodiment, the first 10 games and the last 8 games of one set of games have different productions, and the above-mentioned battle production in which friendly characters and enemy characters confront each other is shown in the latter 8 games. In the latter part, which is the first half of the 10 games, a confrontation effect is set in which the ally character performing the battle effect confronts the enemy character.

As shown in FIG. 388, in the first game, a VS display effect (FIG. 391(a1)) is set as the confrontation effect in the first half, in which a friendly character and an enemy character are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. It is In the 2nd to 4th games of the confrontation production, the ally character up production (FIG. 391(b1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays the appearance of the ally character being enthusiastic with an aura behind them. It is In the 5th to 7th games of the confrontation effect, an enemy character up effect (FIG. 391(c1)) is set in which the enemy character illuminated by the moonlit night is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In the 8th to 10th games of the confrontation effect, a staring effect (FIG. 391 (d1)) is set in which the auxiliary display section 65 displays a scene in which a friendly character and an enemy character are glaring at each other while scattering sparks. ing.

As for the battle effects in the second half, as shown in FIG. 389, in the 11th to 16th games, there is a friendly attack effect (FIG. 392(a)) in which the friendly character attacks and an enemy attack effect in which the enemy character attacks. One of the attack effects (FIG. 392(b)) is repeated three times in total, and in the 17th game, a two-sided attack effect in which both players attack each other is performed. Then, when the continuation condition is satisfied, a teammate victory effect (FIG. 392(c)) is performed in which the teammate character wins in the 18th game, which is the final game of the set, and the next set is started. If the continuation condition is not met, an ally defeat effect (FIG. 392(d)) is performed in which the ally character is defeated in the 18th game, and the AT mode ends.

Thus, in the present embodiment, a set of effects is set such that the battle effect is performed after the confrontation effect, and the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified in the battle effect. and results are favorably enhanced.

As already explained, in the set management type AT mode of the present embodiment, a continuation lottery is performed at the start of one set to determine whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied. In the middle of , when winning an extra lottery based mainly on winning a special role, the continuation condition is established and the next set is shifted to.

Here, by adopting a configuration in which the continuation condition can be established based on the winning of a specific role as described above, although the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game is preferably increased, the probability of winning the specific role and the set game Depending on the number, it becomes difficult for the event that the continuation condition is established by winning the extra lottery as described above to occur, and the player may not have expectations for such an event. In that case, even if an attempt is made to increase the degree of attention to the lottery result of the game by using the additional lottery, there is a possibility that the effect cannot be expected.

In particular, when trying to optimize the game playability and game progress of the AT mode by increasing the number of medals to be added (net increase) per game in the AT mode, the number of games per set in the AT mode should be small. As described above, it becomes difficult for the continuation condition to be satisfied with the special role as a trigger. Moreover, since the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, you can expect to increase the number of games in normal mode and CZ mode other than AT mode, and increase the number of medals by the upper limit increase number (2400) in AT mode. By doing so, the number of games in the AT mode is naturally reduced and the above-mentioned net increase in the number of games is likely to be increased.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the continuation lottery for the set is won, the lottery result of the game is determined in the game before the announcement of the continuation lottery winning (the above-mentioned teammate victory effect). Even if it is not a specific role, it is configured to notify as if you have won the extra lottery.

By adopting a configuration in which the result of the continuation lottery is notified based on the lottery result of each game as described above, the success or failure of the continuation condition is not determined by the continuation lottery at the time of renewal of each set. It is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition of each set is determined based on the lottery result of each game.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for effecting each set during the AT mode as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 386, in the AT effect setting process, a process of subtracting 1 from the sub-side AT counter is executed in step Se2301. Then, in step Se2302, it is determined whether or not a continuation command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the continuation command is output at the start of one set (at the start of the first game of the set) if the continuation lottery has been won (Fig. 366), and if the continuation lottery has not been won. This is a command that is output when the additional lottery is won in the set that is set (Fig. 367).

If the continuation command has been received in step Se2302, the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Se2303. Through such processing, the CPU 181 can grasp that the continuation condition of the current set is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2302, or if the process of step Se2303 is executed, the process proceeds to step Se2304. In step Se2304, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is greater than 7, thereby determining whether or not it is the 1st to 10th games of the set. If it is the 1st game to the 10th game of the set, the processing for performing the confrontation effect which is the first half part is executed in steps Se2305 to Se2308, and if it is the 11th game to the 18th game, In steps Se2309 to Se2313, the process for performing the battle effect, which is the second half part, is executed.

As the process for performing the confrontation effect, the process of acquiring the confrontation effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed in step Se2305. As shown in FIG. 388, the confrontation effect table contains detailed effect contents of the confrontation effect to be executed in each game (VS display effect, ally character up effect, enemy character up effect) according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. production, staring production) are memorized.

Here, as the confrontation performance, normal performance and specific performance are set, and when the continuation condition of the current set is established, the confrontation performance as the specific performance can occur. The specific effect is set as a effect in which a part of the effect content in the auxiliary display section 65 is different from the normal effect.

For example, in the VS display effect, the character "VS" displayed between the friendly character and the enemy character is displayed in white characters in the normal effect, whereas the character "VS" is displayed in the specific effect. Text is set to be displayed in red. In the ally character-up effect, the aura worn by the ally character is white in the normal effect, but is set to be displayed in rainbow color in the specific effect. In the enemy character-up effect, a crescent moon is displayed in the normal effect, while a full moon is displayed in the specific effect. In the face-to-face production, a girl character cheering for an ally character is displayed in the specific production, while the girl character does not appear in the normal production.

After acquiring the facing effect table in step Se2305, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Se2306, and if it is set, specific effect setting processing is executed in step Se2307. do. The specific effect setting process is a process for setting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the confrontation effect in which the normal effect and the specific effect are set as described above.

<Specific effect setting process>
In the specific effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 387, it is determined at step Se2401 whether or not the generated flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The generated flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to grasp that the specific effect has already been generated in this set, and is a flag that is set when the specific effect is generated. If the generated flag is set, the specific effect setting process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the specific effect is set to occur only once in one set.

If the occurrence completion flag is not set, in step Se2402, the process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed, and in step Se2403, the process of grasping the continuation rate of the AT mode of this time is executed. Then, in step Se2404, the process of acquiring the specific effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step Se2405, the specific effect lottery process is executed.

In the specific effect table, as shown in FIG. 390, occurrence rates of specific effects are set according to the lottery result of each game and the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of 3.1% in the game that is the chance A, while the game that is the chance B is specified with a probability of 20.0%. An effect is generated, and it is set so that the specific effect is more likely to occur as the result of the lottery result of the game is less likely to be won. Moreover, in the present embodiment, not only specific roles as so-called rare roles such as Chance A and Chance B, but also normal roles such as normal role A, normal role B, normal role C, and pushing order bell. It is set so that a specific effect can occur even if In addition, it is set so that the specific effect can occur even if the result is a losing result in which none of the results are won.

In this case, for example, as a lottery result of each game, the winning order bell is won with a probability of about 65%. Since the effect is generated, the probability of the specific effect being generated triggered by the pressing order bell in each game is about 2.5%. On the other hand, for example, Cherry C, which always causes a specific effect when it appears, has a probability of about 0.008% as a lottery result of each game. is also about 0.008%, which is lower than the occurrence rate triggered by the pushing order bell.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the probability that the specific effect will occur triggered by the normal role including the normal role A to the normal role C, the pushing order bell and the result of being out of order is higher than the probability of the chance A to the chance C and the cherry A. ∼ It is set to be higher than the probability of occurrence of specific effects triggered by specific roles such as Cherry C, Common Bell and Watermelon. In the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the specific effect occurs with a probability of about 5.5% (about 1/18.2) triggered by the normal role, whereas the specific effect is triggered by the specific role. In AT mode with a probability of 0.8% (about 1/122) that a specific effect occurs, and the continuation rate is 90%, about 13.3% (about 1/7.52) with the normal role as a trigger While the specific effect occurs with probability, the specific effect occurs with a probability of approximately 1.0% (approximately 1/105) triggered by the specific role.

In other words, the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the specific role is set higher than the probability of winning the specific effect lottery triggered by the normal role, but the normal role is about 96.0% in each game. There is a probability of 4% (about 1/1.04) to appear (win), and the special role has a probability of about 3.56% (about 1/28.1) to appear (win) in each game. ), the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a normal role is higher than the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role, and the lottery result of the game is a normal role. Even if there is, it is set so that the occurrence of a specific effect can be expected.

In relation to the number of continuous games (10) in which the specific effect can occur, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator (about 18.2) of the probability of occurrence of the specific effect triggered by the normal role is Although it is larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect, in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%, the denominator (about 7.52) of the occurrence probability of the specific role triggered by the normal role is smaller than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. is set to be On the other hand, in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, the denominator of the probability of occurrence of a specific effect triggered by a specific role (about 122) is greater than the number of continuous games of confrontation effects, and in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90% Also, the denominator (approximately 105) of the occurrence probability of the specific effect triggered by the specific role is set to be larger than the number of continuous games of the confrontation effect. Therefore, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, if the continuation rate is 90% AT mode (even if it is 60%, if it is not 10%), the specific effect triggered by the normal role, The probability is such that it can occur at least once on average, and on the other hand, the specific effect triggered by the specific role is higher if it does not occur even once regardless of the continuation rate of the AT mode.

By doing so, it is possible to expect an additional winning even if it is a normal role, while hoping for an additional winning triggered by a specific role, and even in the AT mode with a small number of games, in each game It is possible to realize the playability expected from the additional winning.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the occurrence probability of the specific effect differs depending on the continuation rate of the AT mode. Basically, even if the lottery result of the game is the same, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific effect will occur. is set to be For example, a specific effect triggered by the push order bell occurs with a probability of about 3.8% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, but with a probability of about 12.5% in AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%. It is set to occur with a probability, and the specific effect triggered by the failure result occurs with a probability of about 13.8% in the AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%, whereas the continuation rate is 90%. AT mode is set to occur with a probability of about 23.5%. Therefore, the occurrence rate of the specific effect per game is about 6.3% if the continuation rate is 10%, and about 14.2% if the continuation rate is 90%, which is a high continuation rate. In the AT mode, it is easier for the specific effect to occur earlier. Then, in the confrontational effects between 10 games, the probability of occurrence of the specific effects is about 48.0% in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 10%, and about 78.5 in the AT mode with the continuation rate of 90%. %, and it is possible to predict the continuation rate of the AT mode through the occurrence probability of a specific effect.

After the specific effect lottery process is executed in step Se2405, it is determined whether or not the lottery process is won in step Se2406, and if it is determined that the lottery process is not won, the specific effect setting process is terminated as it is. . In this case, the normal effect is executed in the current confrontation effect (step Se2308 described later). When it is determined at step Se2406 that the specific effect lottery has been won, at step Se2407 the process of grasping the specific effect corresponding to the value of the sub-side AT counter is executed. Specifically, for example, if the sub-side AT counter is 1, as the current specific effect, the character display of "VS" is displayed in red characters, and the sub-side AT counter is 2 to 4. If there is, the specific effect of displaying the color of the aura of the ally character in rainbow colors is grasped as the specific effect of this time. Then, in step Se2408, after executing the process of setting the generated flag, the specific effect setting process is terminated.

In the AT effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step Se2306, or after the specific effect setting process is executed in step Se2307, the confrontation performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in this game in step Se2308 After executing the process for setting the effect, the AT effect setting process is terminated. In this case, if the specific effect is grasped in step Se2407, it is set so that the confrontation effect in which the specific effect occurs is performed, and if the processing of step Se2407 is not performed (step Se2306 or step If a negative determination is made in Se2406), setting is made so that a confrontation effect in which a normal effect occurs is performed.

By doing so, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied and the continuation flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a specific effect occurs in the confrontation effect in the first half of each set in the AT mode. You will get Then, the occurrence of the specific effect is higher in the ratio triggered by the normal role than in the case of the specific role, and moreover, the higher the continuation rate of the AT mode, the earlier the specific effect is likely to occur. As a result, the player proceeds with the game while hoping that the specific effect will occur in the first half of the set, and it is possible to significantly improve the game playability of the first half.

In the AT effect setting process, if the sub-side AT counter is 7 or less in step Se2304 and it is the second half part, the process for performing the battle effect is executed. That is, in step Se2309, it is determined whether or not the sub-side AT counter is 7, and it is the 11th game of one set and the first game of the battle effect. If the sub-side AT counter is 7, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set in step Se2310. A performance table is acquired, and a process of selecting a battle performance to be performed in this set from the acquired performance table by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 389, the continuation battle effect table notifies that the ally victory effect occurs in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is satisfied. A plurality of effect tables (PA1 to PA8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set in the 16th game. Which effect table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. For example, for the effect table (PA1) in which the friendly attack effect occurs three times in a row, the 10% continuous AT mode is the most. It is set so that it is easy to select and the 90% continuous AT mode is the least likely to be selected. It is set so that the continuous AT mode is most likely to be selected and the 10% continuous AT mode is least likely to be selected. For example, the effect table (PA7) performed in the order of ally attack effect→enemy attack effect→enemy attack effect can be selected in the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode, while the 60% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PA8), which is not selected in the AT mode and causes the enemy attack effect to occur three times in a row, is not selected in the AT mode with 10% continuation and the AT mode with 60% continuation, but is selected in the AT mode with 90% continuation. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of the AT mode by the selected effect table (combination and order of each attack effect). In step Se2311, one effect table is selected from the continuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

If it is determined in step Se2310 that the sub-side continuation flag is not set, in step Se2312 a discontinuation battle effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and the current set is performed from the acquired effect table. A process of selecting a battle presentation by lottery or the like is executed.

As shown in FIG. 389, the non-continuing battle effect table notifies that the ally defeat effect occurs in the final game of the set and the continuation condition is not satisfied. A plurality of effect tables (PB1 to PB8) with different combinations of ally attack effects and enemy attack effects are set for the 1st to 16th games. Which production table is selected depends on the continuation rate of the AT mode. The % continuation AT mode is set to be easier to select than the 10% continuation AT mode, and the production table (PB4 ) is set so that the 10% continuous AT mode is more likely to be selected than the 60% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode. For example, the effect table (PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect can be selected in the AT mode of 90% continuation, while the AT mode of 10% continuation and the AT mode of 60% continuation can be selected. The effect table (PB7), which is not selected in the AT mode and is performed in the order of enemy attack effect → ally attack effect → ally attack effect, can be selected in the 60% continuous AT mode, while the 10% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode can be selected. The effect table (PB8), which is not selected in the % continuous AT mode and generates three consecutive ally attack effects, can be selected in the 10% continuous AT mode, while the 60% continuous AT mode and the 90% continuous AT mode can be selected. It is possible to predict or grasp the continuation rate of AT mode by the effect table (combination and order of each attack effect) to be selected, such as not being selected in AT mode. In step Se2312, one effect table is selected from the discontinuation battle effect tables, and the address information of the selected effect table is stored in the address information storage area 183c.

Comparing the continuous battle effect table and the non-continuous battle effect table, for example, in the effect tables (PA3, PB6) performed in the order of ally attack effect → enemy attack effect → ally attack effect, the battle effect is performed with the ally victory effect. When it ends, it is suggested that it is a 90% continuous AT mode, while when the battle production ends with an ally defeat production, it is confirmed that it was a 90% continuous AT mode, and an ally attack In the production table (PA1, PB8) where the production occurs three times in a row, when the battle production occurs with the victory production of the ally, the AT mode of 10% continuation is suggested, while when the battle production ends with the production of the ally defeat. The continuation rate is predicted and grasped not only by the combination and order of each attack production, but also by the combination of the subsequent ally victory production and ally defeat production. It is possible.

In the eleventh game of the set, the effect table for the current battle effect is selected in the processing of steps Se2311 and Se2312, and after the address information of the selected effect table is stored, in step Se2313, After executing the processing for setting the battle effect of the game to be performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64, this AT effect setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the sub-side AT counter is not 7 in Step Se2309, but the 12th game or later of the set, the process proceeds to Step Se2314. At step Se2314, it is determined whether or not the sub-side continuation flag is set and the set address information of the battle presentation is the address field information (PB1 to PB8) corresponding to the ally defeat presentation. An affirmative determination in step Se2314 means that although the continuation condition was not established until the battle presentation was set in the 11th game, the continuation condition was established thereafter. In this case, in step Se2315, the battle effect to be performed in the current set is reselected from the continuation battle effect table, and the address information of the reselected effect table is stored (overwritten) in the address information storage area 183c. Execute.

In this case, a battle presentation table for overwriting is selected from the battle presentation table for continuation according to the continuation rate of the AT mode regardless of the ally attack presentation or the enemy attack presentation executed in the previous game. By doing so, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle, the relationship between the combination of the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect in the battle effect and the continuation rate is different from the case where the continuation condition is satisfied from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to diversify the effects and improve the interest in the game by improving the difficulty of the game in which the continuation rate is predicted. In the present embodiment, the ally attack effect and the enemy attack effect are set as a set of two games. Therefore, in the overwrite battle effect table, in this game (second game), if it is set to perform an enemy attack effect (ally attack effect) that is different from the attack effect before overwriting, in this game, before overwriting Alternatively, in this game, the performance is performed according to the overwritten production table, and even though the ally (enemy) has launched an attack, the enemy attack production You may set so that the counter production switched to (ally attack production) may be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step Se2314, or after the processing of step Se2315 is executed, the process proceeds to step Se2313, and the battle effect of the current game is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 according to the value of the sub-side AT counter. After executing the processing for setting to be performed, this AT effect setting processing is terminated.

As described above, the higher the continuation rate in AT mode, the more likely it is that a specific effect will occur. Therefore, in a game in which a specific effect occurs in AT mode with 10% continuation, the specific effect will occur in AT mode with 90% continuation. It tends to be a later game than the game. By doing this, a game that predicts the continuation rate of the AT mode from the number of games until the specific effect occurs is added, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the way to enjoy the AT mode. Become.

Here, as described above, in each set of the AT mode, it is considered that the player advances the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the specific effect at an earlier stage. , it is considered that the longer the player can enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific effect will occur, the more the player can fully enjoy the game. In that respect, the length of the period per set in which the user can enjoy whether or not the specific effect occurs is longer in the AT mode with 10% continuation than in the AT mode with 90% continuation. By doing so, even in the AT mode with a low continuation rate, it is possible to keep the player entertained for a longer period of time as to whether or not the specific effect will occur, and thus the amusement of the game can be favorably improved.

<Regarding rotation>
As described above, the addition in AT mode is mainly triggered by a specific role, but it can also partially occur in the case of normal roles, normal reps A to normal reps C. In the present embodiment, when the addition of the AT mode occurs with the normal lips A to C as a trigger, a rotation effect is generated as the effect using the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, first, a basic configuration for driving and controlling the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

As described above, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are connected to the stepping motors, respectively, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are driven to rotate by driving the stepping motors. The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying 500 excitation pulses, and this excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, ie, the rotational position of the reel. A stepping motor has a rotor to which magnets are attached, and a plurality of poles around the rotor and around which excitation coils are wound. The rotor is configured to rotate at

<Stepping motor control processing>
Control of the stepping motor is executed in the stepping motor control process of step Se106 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 352). Therefore, the stepping motor control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step Se2501, initialization processing related to stepping motor control is executed. In the following step Se2502, a process of generating excitation signal data for controlling the rotation of the stepping motor is executed as a motor control process. The excitation data generated here are temporarily stored in the RAM 106 . In the motor control process, in addition to the excitation data generation process, the design offset process, the design number update process, and the like are executed. The motor control processing will be described later in detail.

A process of generating excitation data for rotation control (a process of acquiring excitation data from the RAM 106) and the like are sequentially executed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Generation processing of excitation data for one reel, for example, the left reel 32L is performed using rotation control data for the left reel 32L provided in the work area of the RAM 106. The process transitions to the excitation data generation process for the reel, for example, the middle reel 32M. Therefore, in step Se2503, transition processing (address change processing) to the next work area is performed, and in subsequent step Se2504, it is confirmed whether or not excitation data generation processing and the like for all reels have been completed. If the excitation data generation processing and the like for all reels have not been completed, the process returns to step Se2502 to execute the excitation data generation processing and the like for the remaining reels.

When the rotation control processing for all the three reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, the excitation data generation processing, etc., is completed, the process advances to step Se2505, and out of the data stored in the RAM 106, for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. After executing the process of outputting the excitation data to the input/output port 104, the stepping motor control process ends. By outputting the excitation data to the input/output port 104 in step Se2505, the excitation data is supplied to the stepping motor, and the stepping motor immediately performs energization processing to the excitation coil specified by the excitation data, thereby exciting the rotor. It will be processed.

<Motor control processing>
Motor control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

At step Se2601, it is determined whether or not the step counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is zero. The step counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the update timing of the excitation data for the stepping motor. If the step counter is not 0, it means that it is not yet time to update the step counter, so in step Se2602 the step counter is decremented by 1, after which the motor control process ends.

If the step counter is 0, the process advances to step Se2603 to determine whether or not the acceleration counter provided in the various counter area 106e is "0". The acceleration counter is for defining the update order (acceleration order) of the excitation data, and is set in the rotary table of the various table storage area 105a. For example, in the normal rotation table (Fig. 396) used during normal rotation, acceleration counter values from "24" to "0" are associated with the acceleration order from 1 to 25, and the excitation data to be output in each acceleration order. A period for maintaining (acceleration period) is defined respectively. When the start lever 41 is operated, the value of the acceleration counter is set to "25" in the rotation start process of step Se402 in the reel control process (FIG. 357) described later. Therefore, if the acceleration counter is "0" in step Se2603, it means that the acceleration counter has not been set based on the operation of the start lever 41. FIG. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step Se2603, the output excitation data is set to "0" in step Se2604, and this process ends. The processing of step Se2604 means that the drive control of the stepping motor is not performed. In other words, the stepping motor remains stopped until the start lever 41 is operated.

If the acceleration counter is not "0" at step Se2603, the process of subtracting 1 from the acceleration counter is executed at step Se2605. At subsequent Step Se2606, it is determined whether or not the acceleration counter has become "0". If a negative determination is made in step Se2606 or after the processing of step Se2607 is executed, the step counter is set in step Se2608, the excitation order pointer is updated in step Se2609, and the excitation order pointer is updated in step Se2610. The excitation data corresponding to the updated value of the excitation order pointer is acquired, and the excitation data is stored in the RAM 106 as reel output excitation data for the current process. The stored excitation data is output to the input/output port 104 as shown in FIG. 393 after obtaining the excitation data for the stepping motor for another reel.

The processing of steps Se2608 to Se2610 is processing for setting the acceleration period and excitation data according to the acceleration counter. For example, in step Se2608, if the acceleration counter is "10" in the normal rotary table of FIG. set to 396, the acceleration counter becomes "0"), the acceleration counter becomes "1" in Step Se2607, and Step Se2605. . . . At step Se2607, the acceleration counter is maintained at "1". Then, the drive control in the acceleration order 25 is maintained, and in such a state, the rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R become constant speed rotation.

In the following step Se2611, the value of the design offset provided in the various counter areas 106e is updated. The symbol offset is a value obtained by equally dividing one symbol into 25 in the rotation direction of the reel, and is any value from "0" to "24". As described above, 20 symbols are drawn on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at equal intervals. pattern) is set to require the output of the excitation pulse. In other words, the symbol offset corresponds to the number of pulses for switching one symbol to the next symbol, and is incremented by 1 each time the acceleration counter is updated. It is incremented by 1 in interrupt processing. Further, at the time of initial acceleration, since the excitation pulse is output 25 times in the order of acceleration from 1 to 25, constant speed rotation is reached by controlling the rotation for one symbol.

In the following step Se2612, it is determined whether or not it has been detected that the reel has made one rotation. In the processing of step Se2612, one rotation can be detected by determining whether or not the reel index sensors installed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have passed the sensor cut vans provided on the reel unit 31. be. When one rotation is detected, the value of the symbol number provided in the various counter areas 106e is set to "0" and the symbol offset is updated to "0". The symbol numbers indicate the symbol numbers in sequence, and since 20 symbols are prepared for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the symbol numbers take values from "0" to "19" (Fig. 6).

If the reel has not made one rotation in Step Se2612 or if the process of Step Se2613 has been executed, it is determined in Step Se2614 whether or not the symbol offset is "25". As described above, the symbol offset is set to a value from "0" to "24", and when the symbol offset is "25", it means that it is time to update the symbol number. Therefore, when the symbol offset is "25", at step Se2615, 1 is added to the value of the symbol number and the symbol offset is cleared to "0", after which the motor control process is terminated.

Incidentally, the process of stopping the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R as described above is executed in steps Se403 to Se412 in the reel control process (FIG. 357).

If the design offset is not "25" at step Se2614, the process proceeds to step Se2616 to determine whether or not the design number is less than "20".

Here, when the stepping motor is normally accelerated by the operation of the start lever 41 and rotates at a constant speed, the situation described above is reproduced. However, if the reel is not accelerated normally, or if the rotation is stopped by intentionally holding down the reel, the following abnormal rotation processing will occur.

First, as described above, the reel is rotated once by an excitation signal of 500 pulses. Therefore, if the motor rotates normally, the passage of the sensor cut-bang is detected again when the excitation signal of 500 pulses is output after the passage of the sensor cut-bang is detected. However, if the reel does not start rotating due to improper acceleration, or if the reel is intentionally held down to stop the rotation, even if the excitation signal of 500 pulses is output, the sensor cut bang will not pass. Not detected. As a result, the symbol number is not reset in step Se2612, so the symbol number exceeds the maximum value "19" and is updated to "20" in step Se2615. Even if the value of the symbol number becomes "20", the value of the symbol offset is updated as before because the counter addition/subtraction process is performed in the next process.

In this case, the value of the pattern number is checked in step Se2616 via step Se2614. Since the symbol number ranges from "0" to "19", it can be regarded as an abnormal rotation state when the value becomes "20". However, since there is a possibility that the cause of the abnormal rotation state is due to variations in the operation of the stepping motor, it is determined in step Se2617 whether the value of the pattern offset has been updated by 4 offsets or more. Judging that it is in a rotating state, the abnormality processing of step Se2618 is performed. In the error processing, the acceleration counter is set to its initial value of "25", and the acceleration processing is performed again from the next timer interrupt period. Incidentally, stepping motors have variations in operation, and ideally, one rotation equals 500 pulses, but depending on the situation, one rotation may be performed with 499 pulses or 501 pulses. Therefore, in step Se2617, four offsets are set as the abnormality detection value with a margin.

When the number of abnormal processes in step Se2618 exceeds a specified number (for example, 3 times), the process of notifying the abnormal state (blinking process for the abnormal lamp provided in the hall, buzzer notification to the hall manager, etc.) processing, etc.) can also be taken.

<Rotation start processing>
The rotation start processing of step Se402 in the reel control processing (FIG. 357) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

At Step Se2701, it is determined whether or not a wait period has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. If the wait period has not elapsed, the rotation start processing is terminated. If the wait period has passed, in step Se2702 the normal rotary table is set for controlling the stepping motors of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in FIG. As a result, the setting of the step counter and the setting of the excitation data, which are normally defined in the rotary table, are performed in steps Se2608 to Se2610 in the motor control process.

In the subsequent step Se2703, it is determined whether or not the random rotation flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The random rotation flag is a flag for intentionally shifting the rotation start timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Here, processing when the random rotation flag is not set will be described.

That is, when a negative determination is made in step Se2703, a process of setting "25" to the acceleration counter of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed in steps Se2704 to Se2706. Through such processing, a negative determination is made in step Se2603 of the motor control processing, and rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. After executing the processing of steps Se2704 to Se2706, the rotation start processing ends.

As described above, by setting the acceleration counter based on the operation of the start lever 41, the drive control of the stepping motor is started, and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate. Incidentally, in this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate in such a manner that the symbols flow downward, and in the following description, such a rotation direction is assumed to be the forward direction. Note that such normal rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is also referred to as normal rotation control.

A spinning performance using the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed when an additional win is made during the AT mode. Therefore, first, the processing of steps Se1701 to Se1705 of the AT mode processing in the winning result handling processing will be described. As described above, the winning result handling process is a process executed when the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is completed.

In step Se1701, it is determined whether or not the rotation effect flag is set. The rotation effect flag is a flag that is set in part when winning an additional lottery in AT mode based on the operation of the start lever 41 . Specifically, in the AT add-on process (Fig. 367), it was decided that the trigger result that resulted in the add-on win was the loop target result (normal reply A to normal reply C), and that a loop lottery was performed. (step Se1012: YES), this flag is set in the addition loop processing. If the rotation effect flag is set, a rotation effect command setting process is executed in step Se1702.

<Rotation effect command setting process>
The rotation effect command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step Se2801, the rotation effect flag is cleared. Then, in step Se2802, it is determined by the presence or absence of the second re-game winning flag that the second re-game winning has been established as the winning result of the current game. As already explained, in the case of winning additional winnings triggered by normal Lip A to Normal Lip C, when performing a loop lottery, along with the pushing order notification effect that enables the second re-game winning, "White 7" An operation instruction effect is performed so that the second regame winning is established in a specific mode in which the symbols are aligned and stopped (Fig. 369, Fig. 406(a)). The process of step Se2802 is a process of determining whether an operation has been performed according to the operation instruction rendering. That is, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the operation order enabling the second regame winning, without following the operation order indicated by the operation instruction effect, the second regame and Winning of a different replay is established (FIG. 371), and a negative determination is made in step Se2802.

If the second re-game winning flag is set in step Se2802, it is determined in steps Se2803 and Se2804 whether or not the second re-game winning has been established in the above specific mode. Specifically, in step Se2803, it is determined whether or not the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. Further, in step Se2804, it is determined whether or not the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R. Incidentally, these determinations can be grasped from the symbol numbers grasped in the motor control processing (Fig. 394) and the reel control processing (Fig. 357). is "3", and in step Se2804, it is determined whether or not the middle pattern number of the right reel 32R is "4". As described above, in the second replay, a prize is won when the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. The left reel 32L has one "white 7" symbol, while the middle reel 32M has two "white shell" symbols and the right reel 32R has two and three "cherry" symbols. Then, when the second replay prize is established by the number 4 "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the number 5 "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "white 7" symbol on the middle line L2. are stopped together, and when the second replay prize is established by the 19th "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the 0th and 10th "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, the middle The "white 7" symbols do not align and stop on the line L2 and do not constitute a specific mode (also referred to as a non-specific mode in the following description). By the way, when the second replay win is established, the "white 7" symbol is always stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L.

When both of Step Se2803 and Step Se2804 make an affirmative determination, and the second regame winning prize is established in a specific mode, the process proceeds to Step Se2805 to set the first rotation effect flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Execute. Then, in step Se2806, after executing the process of setting the first rotation effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the rotation effect command setting process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se2802 that the second re-game winning has not been established, or if the second re-game winning has been established, the winning is not in the specific mode but in the non-specific mode. In the case (when negative determination is made in step Se2803 or step Se2804), the process proceeds to step Se2807, and the process of setting the second rotation effect flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step Se2808, after executing the process of setting the second rotation effect command as an output target to the display control device 81, this rotation effect command setting process is terminated.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to execute the rotation effect, the execution mode differs depending on the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The mode of the production for the rotation production by is different. The first rotation effect flag and the second rotation effect flag are flags for changing the execution mode of the rotation effect depending on the stop mode. It is a command for changing the aspect of the rotation production by such as.

In the AT mode process, when the rotation effect flag is not set in step Se1701, or after executing the rotation effect command setting process in step Se1702, the process proceeds to step Se1703. In step Se1703, it is determined whether or not the pseudo operation instruction flag is set. As already explained, the pseudo operation instruction flag is a part of the case where the addition lottery triggered by the loop target result (normal reply A to normal reply C) is not won in the AT addition process (Fig. 367). Flags to be set. When the pseudo-operation instruction flag is set, a pseudo-operation instruction effect for instructing establishment of a second re-game winning in a specific manner along with notification of the pressing order corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning. is executed in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

If the pseudo operation instruction flag is set, the process of clearing the pseudo operation instruction flag is executed in step Se1704, and the second rotation effect command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step Se1705. Execute the processing to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step Se1703 or after the processing of step Se1705 has been executed, the process advances to step Se1706 to execute processing for counting the number of AT mode games.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, the rotation effect processing of step Se401 in the reel control processing (FIG. 357) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the reel control process is a process that is executed at the start of the game based on the operation of the start lever 41 .

In step Se2901, it is determined whether or not the first rotation effect flag is set. When the first rotation effect flag is set, in step Se2902, after executing the first rotation control process, this rotation effect process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first rotation effect flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second rotation effect flag is set in step Se2903. When the second rotation effect flag is set, in step Se2904, after executing the second rotation control process, this rotation effect process is terminated. If it is determined in step Se2903 that the second rotation effect flag is not set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is.

<First Rotation Control Processing>
The first rotation control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step Se3001, a process of setting a special rotary table as a rotary table for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed. The special rotary table corresponds to the normal rotary table (FIG. 396), and as shown in FIG. 400, the order of acceleration and acceleration time are set in the same manner as the normal rotary table. Incidentally, in the special rotary table in this embodiment, excitation data is set so that the rotation direction of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reverse rotation, which is the reverse direction of forward rotation.

In the subsequent step Se3002, a process of setting "25" to the acceleration counters of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in the opposite directions in the motor control process (FIG. 394). In the following step Se3003, addition start processing of the total step counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The total step counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the switching timing of each effect in the rotation control process, and corresponds to the total number of step counters used in the motor control process. That is, the step counter is a counter that is incremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing is started, and a new value is input when the acceleration order (acceleration counter) is updated (step Se2608). The counter continues to be added even if the acceleration order (acceleration counter) is updated.

In subsequent step Se3004, it is determined whether or not the total step counter has reached "4528". Here, as shown in FIG. 400, the special rotary table in this embodiment is set so that timer interrupt processing is executed 628 times until the acceleration counter reaches from "24" to "0". At the timing when the total step counter reaches "628", the excitation data for one symbol is output and the rotation becomes constant speed. In the case of constant speed rotation, since the acceleration time of the acceleration order 25 is updated to the step counter, rotation starts at the timing when the total step counter is updated to "2528" (628 + 4 x 25 x 19 symbols). will be exactly one rotation from . Furthermore, after reaching the constant speed rotation, the total step counter is updated by "2000" (4×25×20 symbols) in one rotation. It means the timing of rotating by two rounds.

In step Se3004, the process waits until the total step counter reaches "4528". At step Se3005, a stop command process is executed for all reels 32L, 32M and 32R. In this case, like steps Se405 to step Se410 in the reel control process (FIG. 357), without waiting for the stop control until the symbol set in the stop information setting process (step Se312) is reached, the process of step Se3005 All the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped at the timing (timing after two rotations). More specifically, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped by performing brake control for energizing all the exciting coils of the stepping motor. In addition, in order to distinguish the mode of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the rotation control process from the mode of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the above-described normal rotation control, the mode of stopping in the rotation control process may also be referred to as "temporary stop". .

As already explained, when the first rotation control process is executed, the second replay winning has been established in a specific mode, and the middle line L2 is stopped with the "white 7" symbols aligned. By starting the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the same time as described above and stopping all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the timing of exactly two rotations, when the reels are stopped, , as in the case before the start of the rotation, the special form of the "white 7" symbol is aligned on the center line L2.

After executing the process of step Se3005, the process of outputting the first loop command to the display control device 81 is executed in step Se3006. In this case, as described above, the first loop effect corresponding to the fact that the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2 again is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 and the like (Fig. 407(b3)). For the first loop effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a character with a “white 7” pattern and a girl character happily saying “You did it!”.

In subsequent step Se3007, a process of outputting an operation command to the display control device 81 is executed. Upon receiving the operation command, the display control device 81 displays a character simulating the start lever 41 on the auxiliary display section 65 along with a character display such as "Knock the lever!" Execute the start operation effect to start (Fig. 407 (b1)).

After executing the process of step Se3007, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step Se3008. If not, it is determined in step Se3009 whether or not the total step counter has reached "8000". As already explained, the total step counter counts regardless of the update of the order of acceleration, and continues counting even while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Therefore, when the affirmative determination is made in step Se309, after the affirmative determination is made in step Se3004 and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops (after the operation command is output and the start operation effect is executed), It means that it is the timing after about 5 seconds have passed.

If a negative determination is made in step Se3009, the process returns to step Se3008, and an affirmative determination is made in step Se3008 or Se3009, thereby proceeding to step Se3010. At step Se3010, a loop lottery process is executed. In the loop lottery process, a lottery is executed with a probability corresponding to the loop rate (loop rate flag) set in the add-on loop process in the AT add-on process. Then, in step Se3011, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery is won.

If the loop lottery is won, the process proceeds to step Se3012, and the process of setting the first start effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. In the display control device 81 that has received the first start effect command, for example, a girl character happily utters "Let's go" so as to correspond to the start of the rotating effect by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the first start effect indicating the situation is performed (FIG. 407(b2)). Then, at step Se3013, 1 is added to the AT set counter, and after clearing the total step counter to 0 at step Se3014, the process returns to step Se3001.

In this case, since the special rotation table is set and "25" is input to the acceleration counter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in the reverse direction again, and the timing is exactly two rotations. , and the "white 7" symbols are aligned on the middle line L2 and stopped.

Here, in this embodiment, in order to align and stop the "white 7" symbols on the middle line L2 as described above, a process for grasping the symbol positions of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. not In other words, the symbols that were stopped before the start of the rotating effect are simply stopped. By grasping the number of processes, it is possible to grasp the number of moving symbols from the special rotary table, and the rotation is stopped at the timing when the number of moving symbols becomes an integral multiple of the number of symbols corresponding to the rotation (20 symbols). and By doing so, it is possible to drastically reduce the processing load in performing the rotating effect, compared to a structure such as stopping after grasping the position etc. of the symbol during rotation, for example. Become.

If it is determined in step Se3011 that the loop lottery was not won, the process advances to step Se3015 to execute processing for outputting an end command to the display control device 81 . In the display control device 81 having received the end command, the auxiliary display section 65 executes the end effect (FIG. 408(b2)) indicating the number of winning times in the current loop lottery, that is, the number of additional sets in the AT mode. to control. Then, in step Se3016, after executing the process of setting the random rotation flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the first rotation control process is terminated. In addition, when ending the first rotation control process, it is preferable to clear (reset) various flags and counters used for executing the rotation effect such as the first rotation effect flag.

By setting the random rotation flag, in the rotation start processing (step Se402, FIG. 395) executed subsequent to the rotation effect processing (step Se401) in the reel control processing (FIG. 357), the affirmative determination is made in step Se2703. will come to

In this case, after executing the process of clearing the random rotation flag in step Se2707, the process of inputting "1000" as a predetermined value to the delay counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step Se2708. The delay counter is a counter used to delay the rotation start timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and is decremented by one each time timer interrupt processing is started.

In subsequent step Se2709, order lottery processing is executed. In the order lottery process, the rotation start order (six patterns) of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, the rotation start order is randomly (evenly) determined. Then, in Step Se2710, a process of inputting "25" to the acceleration counter of the reel determined to start spinning first by the process of Step Se2709 is executed. As a result, the reel that has been determined to start rotating first is started to rotate by the motor control process.

In subsequent step Se2711, it is determined whether or not the delay counter has reached "500". By reaching "500", an affirmative determination is made in step Se2711, and the process proceeds to step Se2712. At Step Se2712, a process of inputting "25" to the acceleration counter of the reel determined to start spinning second by the process of Step Se2709 is executed. As a result, the reel that is determined to start rotating second is started to rotate by the motor control process.

In the following step Se2713, it is determined whether or not the delay counter has reached "0". By reaching "0", an affirmative determination is made in step Se2713, and the process proceeds to step Se2714. At Step Se2714, processing of inputting "25" to the acceleration counter of the reel determined to start spinning third by the processing of Step Se2709 is executed, and then this rotation start processing ends. As a result, the reel that is determined to start rotating third is started to rotate by the motor control process.

Here, the period from the start of rotation of the first reel to the start of rotation of the second reel (delay counter 500 minutes), the period from the start of rotation of the second reel to the start of rotation of the third reel ( A delay counter of 500 minutes) is set so as to be different from the period required for the reel to rotate once. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating with the "white 7" symbols aligned in the horizontal direction. It is possible to make it difficult for events such as improved visibility of the symbols inside to occur, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Incidentally, as described above, the operation of the start lever 41 can be executed as a trigger for executing the loop lottery in the first rotation control process. is performed based on the operation of More specifically, the lottery for each game in the lottery process is executed based on the operation of the start lever 41 that triggers the start of the first rotation operation. This point also applies to execution of the second rotation control process described below.

<Second Rotation Control Processing>
Next, the second rotation control processing in step Se2904 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As already explained, the case where the second rotation control process is executed is the case where the AT mode additional lottery is won, and although it is decided to execute the loop lottery, the second rotation control process in the specific mode is executed. This is when a replay win is not established, and a second replay win is established in a non-specific manner, or other replays such as the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win. This is the case when winning a prize is established.

At Step Se3101, the process of setting the special rotary table in FIG. 400 is executed in the same manner as at Step Se3001. In other words, setting is made so that the rotation effect is executed on the same turntable whether the second replay winning in the specific mode is established and the rotation effect is performed by the first rotation control process or not. It is

In the following step Se3102, a process of inputting "25" to the acceleration counters of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is executed. As a result, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the opposite directions, as in the case of the first rotation control process. At step Se3103, the total step counter addition start process is executed.

In subsequent step Se3104, it is determined whether or not the total step counter has reached "4528". The process of step Se3104 corresponds to the process of step Se3004 described above, and it is determined whether or not the timing of exactly two rotations from the start of rotation has arrived. If the total step counter has not reached "4528", the process waits as it is, and if it reaches "4528", an affirmative determination is made in step Se3104 and the process proceeds to step Se3105.

At step Se3105, a process of outputting a second loop command to the display control device 81 is executed. In this case, unlike the first loop effect in the case of the first rotation control process, for example, a soldier character yells "I did it" so as to congratulate the occurrence of the AT mode set addition as described above. 410(b3)).

That is, when the second replay winning prize is not established in the specific mode and the second spin control process is executed, in the first spin control process, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated in the opposite direction and then specified Execution of the control to stop again in the mode is restricted. Here, if the second replay winning prize has not been established in the specific mode as described above, after rotating in the opposite direction, when restarting the game, the stop result in the specific mode should be made. is also possible. However, when trying to perform such control, it is necessary to grasp the deviation between the symbols and shift the rotation start timing or to vary the acceleration, which may lead to an extreme increase in the processing load. In particular, in the first rotation control process, even if the second replay win is established in a specific mode, the symbols are rotated twice and then stopped without grasping the positional relationship of the symbols. In spite of trying to execute the rotation effect with an extremely simple processing configuration such as re-stopping the same stop roll, if it is not in the specific mode as described above, the processing load will increase. If quenching occurs, the desired effect cannot be suitably expected. Therefore, when it is not in the specific mode as described above, by restricting the control itself to stop again in the rotation effect, the effect in the case of being in the specific mode is not eliminated. It is possible to expect the effect of reducing the processing load even in the case of

Furthermore, as described above, the second replay winning prize has not been established in the specific mode, and although it was a stop roll in a non-specific mode, etc., the same non-specific mode Since the stop roll is not allowed to appear, it is not recommended for players who may have a sense of regret or inferiority about not being able to establish the second replay winning prize in a specific mode. , it is also possible to prevent the feeling of regret and inferiority from being given again. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in motivation to play.

In the following description, the operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that is temporarily stopped after being reversely rotated in the first rotation control process is also referred to as the first rotation operation, and is reversely rotated in the second rotation control process. The operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that is not temporarily stopped from the reels is also referred to as a limited operation in which the first rotation operation is limited. Moreover, the limited operation may also be referred to as a second rotation operation.

In subsequent step Se3106, a process of outputting the operation command to the display control device 81 is executed. In the display control device 81 that received the operation command, as in the case of the first rotation control process, the start lever 41 is displayed along with a character display such as "Tap the lever!" so as to prompt the operation of the start lever 41. A start operation effect is executed to display the imitated character on the auxiliary display section 65 (FIG. 410(b1)).

After executing the processing of step Se3106, it is determined whether or not the operation of the start lever 41 has been executed in step Se3107. If not, it is determined in step Se3108 whether or not the total step counter has reached "8000". The processing of steps Se3107 and Se3108 corresponds to the processing of steps Se3008 and Se3009, and whether the start lever 41 is operated after the operation command is output and the start operation effect is executed, This is a process of determining whether or not about 5 seconds have passed without any operation being performed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Se3107 or step Se3108, the process proceeds to step Se3109. In step Se3109, loop lottery processing is executed in the same manner as in step Se3010. Also in the loop lottery process, a lottery is executed with a probability corresponding to the loop rate set in the process for adding loop in the process for adding AT. Then, in step Se3110, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery is won.

When the loop lottery is won, the process proceeds to step Se3111, and the process of setting the second start effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. In the display control device 81 that has received the second start effect command, the effect corresponding to the start of the rotating effect by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and different from the first start effect, such as a soldier 410 (b2) so as to perform a second start effect showing that the character is clad in an aura and yelling "Woooooooo" (Fig. 410(b2)). Then, the AT set counter is incremented by 1 in step Se3112, the total step counter is cleared to 0 in step Se3113, and the process returns to step Se3104.

In this case, as described above, in the second rotation control process, since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped at the timing when they are rotated by two turns, "25" is not input to the acceleration counter. Constant speed rotation in the opposite direction is maintained. Then, in the case of the first rotation control process, the second rotation effect is performed again at the timing of exactly two rotations.

If it is determined in step Se3110 that the loop lottery is not won, the process advances to step Se3114 to execute processing for outputting an end command to the display control device 81 . In the display control device 81 having received the end command, the auxiliary display section 65 executes the end effect (Fig. 411 (b2)) indicating the number of winning times in the current loop lottery, that is, the number of additional sets in the AT mode. to control. Then, in step Se3115, it waits until the total step counter reaches "9000". When the total step counter reaches "9000", an affirmative determination is made in step Se3115, the process proceeds to step Se3116, and after executing stop command processing for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, this second Terminate the rotation control process. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop at the timing when the total step counter reaches "9000", and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate in the forward direction in the subsequent rotation start processing. controlled to In addition, when ending the second rotation control process, it is preferable to clear (reset) various flags and counters used for executing the rotation effect such as the second rotation effect flag.

Here, in the present embodiment, random rotation is not executed when the rotation effect is executed in the second rotation control process. This is because the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped halfway through the restricting operation by the second rotation control process, and this is different from the specific mode in which the "white 7" symbols are horizontally aligned and stopped. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in step Se3116, the stop mode is a non-specific mode or the like different from the specific mode. Become.

More specifically, for example, in the second rotation control process, when the rotation is started in the reverse direction and the first loop lottery is not won, the timing at which the total step counter becomes "9000" is It is the timing (9000=2528 (1 round)+2000 (1 round)×3+472 (4 to 5 symbols)) when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates 4 rounds and 4 to 5 symbols. In this case, as a non-specific mode, the ``White 7'' symbol on the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the ``Youth'' symbol on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the ``Youth'' symbol on the middle stage of the right reel 32R stop, and the second replay win is achieved. Assuming that the above limiting operation is performed from the established state, when the total step counter reaches "9000" and stops, the number 7 "watermelon" symbol is displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 32L, and the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle stage. The 2nd "watermelon" symbol and the 3rd "replay" symbol stop in the middle stage of the right reel 32R, and the symbols are stopped in a stop mode in which they are aligned in a straight line and do not stop.

In other words, even if the rotation is started as it is, it is unlikely to help improve the visibility of the pattern, and the possibility of impairing fairness is low. Therefore, by not executing random rotation in the second rotation control process as described above, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration.

However, in the second rotation control process in the present embodiment, after it is determined that the loop lottery is not won, each reel 32L is set for the period required for the random rotation when random rotation is performed by the first rotation control process. , 32M and 32R continue to rotate, and then the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. By doing so, it is possible to match the progress degree and speed of the game between when the first rotation control process is executed and when the second rotation control process is executed.

Incidentally, in the second rotation control process, at step Se3115, the rotation is continued until the total step counter reaches "9000". The timing of the game progression when the control process is performed is the same as the timing until the total step counter reaches 8000 without operating the start lever 41 even if the start operation effect is performed in the first rotation control process. This is the case of waiting. In other words, the timing of the progress of the game when the second rotation control process is performed as described above and the progress of the game when the first rotation control process is performed is because the first rotation control process is performed. This is the latest timing if the By doing so, it is possible to prompt the player who desires smoother game progress to achieve the second re-game winning in a specific manner as much as possible when the operation instruction effect is executed. It is possible to increase the willingness to play.

<Rotating production preparation processing>
Next, the rotation effect preparation process executed at step Se2220 in the effect setting process at the time of all stop of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step Se3201, it is determined whether or not the first rotation effect command has been received. As already explained, the first rotation effect command is output when the "white 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the middle line L2 in the rotation effect command setting process in the AT mode process on the main control device 101 side. command.

When the first rotation effect command is received, in step Se3202, a process for setting the first stop effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like is executed. For the first stopping effect, for example, a effect is set in which a girl character happily saying "I'm still going" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 together with a character with a "White 7" design (Fig. 406). (c1)), it is set to suggest that an additional lottery will be won and that an additional lottery will be made.

After setting the first stop effect, in step Se3203, the start operation effect is executed following the above-described first stop effect (more specifically, when the current game ends and the bet processing for the next game (later) perform the action that you set to take place. The start operation effect is a effect that prompts the player to operate the start lever 41 as described above (FIG. 407(b1)). Then, in step Se3204, after executing the process of setting the first rotation effect flag in the various flag storage area 183c, this rotation effect preparation process is terminated. As described above, the first rotation action is executed at the start of the game following the game in the specific mode. It is a flag for executing an effect corresponding to one rotation operation.

When it determines with not having received the 1st rotation production|presentation command in step Se3201, it progresses to step Se3205 and determines whether the 2nd rotation production|presentation command is received. As already explained, the second rotation effect command is not stopped with the "white 7" symbols aligned on the middle line L2 in the rotation effect command setting process in the AT mode process on the main control device 101 side, This is a command output when the machine is stopped in a specific mode, or when the AT mode additional lottery is not won in the first place and the pseudo operation instruction presentation is executed. When the second rotation effect command has not been received, the rotation effect preparation processing is terminated as it is.

When the second rotation effect command is received, in step Se3206, a process for setting the second stop effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like is executed. For the second stopping effect, for example, a feeling of a soldier character being depressed is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (Fig. 406(c2)), and it is possible that the additional lottery was not won. It is set to suggest that there is a possibility that there is a possibility of winning, and that even if you win the addition lottery, no further addition will be made.

After setting the second stop effect, in step Se3207, as in step Se3203, the start operation effect is executed following the second stop effect (more specifically, when the current game is After the betting process for the next game is completed, the process set to be performed is executed. Then, in step Se3208, it is determined whether or not a pseudo operation instruction presentation has been executed in the current game. The case where the pseudo operation instruction effect is being executed is the case where the addition is not won even though the result is the loop trigger result as described above, and in this case, the rotation effect preparation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the pseudo operation instruction effect is not being executed and the operation instruction effect is being executed, the process of setting the second rotation effect flag in the various flag storage area 183c is executed in step Se3209. This rotation production preparation process is terminated. As described above, the restricted action is executed at the start of the next game after the game in the non-specific mode. is a flag for executing the corresponding production.

<Rotation effect processing>
Next, the rotation effect processing of step Se2101 in the start effect setting process (FIG. 382) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

At step Se3301, it is determined whether or not a loop rate command has been received from the main controller 101 . As already explained, the loop rate command is a command that is output when the additional lottery is won in the loop target result and it is decided to execute the loop lottery, and the loop lottery is won. Contains information about probabilities (loop rates). If the loop rate command has been received, in step Se3302, after executing the processing of storing the loop rate information included in the loop rate command in the various flag storage area 183c of the RAM 183, the rotation effect processing is executed. finish. It should be noted that the case of receiving the loop rate command is the case of winning in the current game, and the first spinning action and the limiting action are executed at the start of the game next to the current game. In the game in which the loop rate command is received immediately, the effect setting process for the first rotation motion and the limit motion is not executed.

When it determines with not having received the loop rate command in step Se3301, it is determined whether the 1st rotation production|presentation flag is set in step Se3303. When the first rotation effect flag is set, loop rate effect setting processing is executed in step Se3304. In the loop rate effect setting process, based on the loop rate information (flag) stored in step Se3302, a loop rate effect corresponding to the current loop lottery loop rate is set to be performed, and the loop rate is set. Execute the process to clear the information of As the loop rate effect, for example, the effect of lighting or blinking the upper lamp 63 in a color corresponding to the loop rate can be considered. In addition, when the loop rate effect is set, the upper lamp 63 may be lit based on the operation of the effect switch 66, and the loop rate may be grasped from the lighting color. It is possible to meet the needs of a player who wants to enjoy the success or failure of the loop lottery without knowing the rate and the needs of a player who wants to enjoy the loop rate by knowing the loop rate.

After executing the process of step Se3304, after executing the first rotation effect process in step Se3305, the present rotation effect process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se3303 that the first rotation effect flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the second rotation effect flag is set in step Se3306. When the second rotation effect flag is not set, the process for rotation effect is terminated as it is. When the second rotation effect flag is set, the process for the second rotation effect is executed in step Se3307, and then the process for this rotation effect ends. In this embodiment, when the second rotation effect flag is set, the setting of the loop rate effect is not performed. It is a device to avoid being recognized as being there.

<Processing for first rotation effect>
The first rotation effect processing in step Se3305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When explaining the first rotation effect processing, the first rotation operation by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation instruction effect leading up to that will also be explained.

First, the case where the first rotation effect processing is executed means that an additional winning is won based on the normal reply A to normal reply C, which are the loop trigger results in the previous game, and the loop lottery is executed as described above. This is the case when a decision is made. In this case, the main control device 101 outputs the push order notification command for the second replay winning in the game in which the additional winning is won, and the display control device 81 side performs the operation instruction effect in the start effect setting process. is executed (FIG. 406(a)). Then, when the player establishes the second re-game winning in a specific mode by operating in the operation order of the operation instruction effect and aiming at the "white 7" symbol (Fig. 406(b1), Fig. 407(a1) ), the first stop effect is executed on the auxiliary display portion 65 (FIG. 406(c1)), and it becomes possible to grasp that the additional win is made and the additional win is performed. In this case, the first rotation effect flag is set, and the first rotation effect processing is executed. In addition, following the above-described first stop effect, the start operation effect is executed (FIG. 407(b1)), and the operation of the start lever 41 is prompted.

In the first rotation effect processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the first start effect is performed in step Se3501. As described above, the first start effect is set such that the girl character is happily uttering "Let's go" (Fig. 407(b2)). In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in reverse rotation from the state in which the second replay winning has been established in the specific mode (Fig. 407(a1)) (Fig. 407(a2)).

After executing the process of step Se3501, it waits until the first loop command is received in step Se3502, and by receiving the first loop command, it makes an affirmative determination in step Se3502, and enters the first loop in step Se3503. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect (FIG. 407(b3)) is performed. As already explained, the first loop command is when the first rotation operation is being performed according to the special rotary table, and when the rotation is exactly two revolutions from the start of rotation, the second loop command is specified again after rotating the two revolutions. This command is output when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the mode (Fig. 407(a3), Fig. 408(a1)).

In the following step Se3504, it waits until an operation command is received, and when the operation command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step Se3504, and in step Se3505 an auxiliary display is made so that the start operation effect (FIG. 408(b1)) is performed. 65 and the like. After that, in step Se3506 it is determined whether or not the first start effect command has been received, and if the first start effect command has been received, the process returns to step Se3501 and the first start effect (FIG. 407 (b2) ) is performed.

On the other hand, if the first start effect command has not been received in step Se3506, it is determined whether or not the end command has been received in step Se3507. If the end command has not been received, the process returns to step Se3506 and waits until the first start effect command or the end command is received. If the end command has been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled in step Se3508 so that the end effect (FIG. 408(b2)) is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 408(b2), the total number of sets added in the current addition lottery is notified. Also, by setting the random rotation flag, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in the order determined by lottery, as shown in FIG. 408(a2). Subsequently, in step Se3509, a process of inputting "1000" to the timer counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The timer counter is a counter that is decremented by one at a predetermined cycle (1.4 msec cycle). Then, in step Se3510, it waits until the timer counter becomes "0", and when the timer counter becomes "0", the first rotation effect processing ends. The period until the timer counter reaches 0 corresponds to the period until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in random rotation. That is, when the first rotation effect processing is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, after the first rotation operation, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate (Fig. 408 (a3 )), the processes after step Se2102 in the start effect setting process are executed, and for example, the pressing order notification effect (FIG. 408(b3)) is started as the start effect.

<Second rotation effect processing>
The second rotation effect processing in step Se3307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. When explaining the second rotation effect processing, the limiting operation (second rotation operation) by each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation instruction effect leading up to that will also be explained.

First, the case where the second rotation effect processing is executed means that an additional winning is made based on the normal reply A to normal reply C, which are the loop trigger results in the previous game, and the loop lottery is executed as described above. This is the case when a decision is made. In the game in which the additional winning is won, the main control device 101 outputs the push order notification command for the second replay winning as described above, and the display control device 81 side gives an operation instruction in the effect setting process at the start. A process for effecting is executed (Fig. 406(a)). Then, if the player does not operate in the operation order of the operation instruction effect or fails to aim at the "white 7" symbol, the second re-game winning is established in a non-specific mode (Fig. 406). (b2), FIG. 410(a1)), 1st re-game win is established (FIG. 406(b3), 409(a1)), 4th re-game win or 5th re-game win is established . By the way, even if it is a loop opportunity, if the additional win is not won, the pseudo operation instruction effect is executed, and the pressing order notification effect of the operation order in which the second re-game winning is not established is performed. As shown in b3), the first re-game winning is established, the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established. In these cases, the second stopping effect is executed in the auxiliary display portion 65 (Fig. 406(c2)), and it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the player has not won an additional winning or that no further additional winning can be expected. Become. Then, in the rotation effect preparation process, in any case, the start operation effect is executed following the second stop effect (Fig. 409(b1), Fig. 410(b1)), The operation of the start lever 41 is prompted. However, in the rotation performance preparation process, the second rotation performance flag is set when the operation instruction performance is being executed, while the second rotation performance flag is not set when the pseudo operation instruction performance is being executed. Therefore, the case where the second rotation effect processing is executed means the case where the operation instruction effect is being executed, and the second re-game winning is established in a non-specific mode, or another re-game winning is established. is established.

In the second rotation effect processing, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the second start effect is performed in step Se3601. As described above, the second start effect is set such that the soldier character is clad in an aura and yells "Woooooo" with all his might (Fig. 410 (b2). In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in reverse rotation from the state in which the second replay winning has been established in a non-specific mode (Fig. 410(a1)), etc. (Fig. 410(a2)). .

After executing the process of step Se3601, it waits until the second loop command is received in step Se3602, and when the second loop command is received, it makes an affirmative determination in step Se3602, and enters the second loop in step Se3603. The auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect (FIG. 410(b3)) is performed. As already explained, the second loop command is a command that is output when the first rotation operation according to the special rotary table is restricted and the restriction operation is performed, and the rotation has been performed exactly two times from the start of rotation. is. In this case, since the first rotation operation is restricted, although the second loop command is output, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continue to rotate (Fig. 410 (a3), Fig. 411 (a1 )).

In the following step Se3604, it waits until an operation command is received, and when the operation command is received, an affirmative determination is made in step Se3604, and in step Se3605 an auxiliary display is made so that a start operation effect (FIG. 413(b1)) is performed. 65 and the like. After that, it is determined whether or not the second start effect command is received in step Se3606, and if the second start effect command is received, the process returns to step Se3601, and the second start effect (FIG. 410 (b2) ) is performed.

On the other hand, if the second start effect command has not been received in step Se3606, it is determined whether or not the end command has been received in step Se3607. If the end command has not been received, the process returns to step Se3606 and waits until the second start effect command or end command is received. If the end command has been received, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the end effect (FIG. 411(b2)) is performed in step Se3608. In this case, as shown in FIG. 411(b2), the total number of sets added in the current addition lottery is reported. Further, when the total step counter reaches "9000", the reels 32L, 32M and 32R stop rotating (Fig. 411(a2)). In this case, the random rotation flag is not set, and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R immediately start rotating after the reverse rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends (Fig. 411(a3)). For example, the pressing order notification effect (FIG. 411(b3)) is started as the start time effect.

After the pseudo operation instruction effect, when the start operation effect is executed in a situation where the first re-game winning or the like is established (Fig. 409(a1), Fig. 409(b1)), the second rotation is performed in the rotation effect preparation process. No production flag is set. Then, when the start lever 41 is operated, all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the forward direction (FIG. 409(a2)). For example, the pressing order notification effect (FIG. 411(b3)) is started as the start time effect.

Here, the first display effect such as the first start effect and the first loop effect and the second display effect such as the second start effect and the second loop effect are different to such an extent that the player can clearly distinguish between them. It is possible to grasp that the first rotation motion is being performed and that the limiting motion is being performed in the rotation performance from the difference in the display performance. By doing so, even if the second replay winning prize is not established in the specific mode, even if the rotating motion in that case is not to be matched with the first rotating motion, the rotating motion is originally different. It is possible for the player to clearly grasp this fact, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable due to the difference in rotation motion.

In the second display effect, the luminance and illuminance of the auxiliary display section 65 are increased, the output volume of the sound effect is increased, and the sound effect in the high range is set in the second display effect more than the first display effect. Therefore, by making the second display effect more flashy than the first display effect, the limited operation in which the control of a part of the first rotation operation is restricted is performed. , it is also possible to compensate for the effect of the restricted action with the second display effect.

<Rotational movement and the flow of each production>
The relationship with various effects when the first rotating motion and the limiting motion are performed will be described with reference to FIG. 412 .

When the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the second replay winning prize is established in the specific mode and the first stop effect is being performed, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are operated as the first rotation motion. starts rotating in the opposite direction. In this case, the first stop effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is switched to the first start effect, and at the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated exactly two times, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. The rotation is stopped and the specific mode of the stop result is displayed again, and the first loop effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65.例文帳に追加Thereafter, a start operation effect is executed, and when the start lever 41 is operated, a loop lottery is executed, and when the loop lottery is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in the opposite directions again. 1 start effect is also executed. At the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are further rotated by two rounds, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, and the specific type of stop number is displayed again, and the first loop effect is executed.

After that, the start operation effect is executed, and when the start lever 41 is operated, the loop lottery is executed, and if the loop lottery is not won, the end effect is started and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are randomly rotated. Rotation is started at .

When the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where the second replay winning prize has been established in a non-specific mode and the second stop effect is being performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated as a limiting operation. It starts rotating in the opposite direction. In this case, the second stop effect on the auxiliary display portion 65 is switched to the second start effect, and the second loop effect is displayed on the auxiliary display portion 65 at the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated exactly two times. is executed in However, at this timing, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R do not stop rotating, and the re-display of the non-specific stop numbers is restricted. After that, a start operation effect is executed, and when the start lever 41 is operated, a loop lottery is executed, and when the loop lottery is won, a second start effect is also executed. A second loop effect is executed at the timing of the second rotation.

After that, a start operation effect is executed, and when the start lever 41 is operated, a loop lottery is executed, and if the loop lottery is not won, an end effect is started. In this case, the end effect is executed over a period corresponding to the period until the random rotation at the time of execution of the first rotation operation ends, and the end effect ends with the end of the period, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops and immediately starts rotating in the forward direction. Rotation is started with random rotation.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the second replay prize is established in the specific mode, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are started to rotate as the first rotation operation, rotated exactly two times and then stopped, and the rotation effect is started. The pattern stopped in the middle row before is stopped as it is and the specific mode appears again, and when the second replay winning prize is not established in the specific mode, it is rotated twice as a limiting operation. In this case, the rotation is continued without stopping, so that the processing load can be reduced without using complicated control such as grasping the position of the symbol and adjusting the acceleration etc. in order to make a specific mode appear in the rotation effect. reduction can be achieved. In addition, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped and the specific mode appears again, the first start effect and the first loop effect are performed as the first display effect, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are made to perform. is not stopped, the second start effect and the second loop effect are performed as the second display effect. Even so, it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to follow up with the display effect that the effect is lowered due to the restriction. Therefore, while reducing the processing load, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the rotation effect.

Regarding the first rotation operation and the limit operation, in more detail, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 as normal rotation control in each game, the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R The stop processing of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed based on the symbol number and the stop information set in the stop information setting processing (steps Se312, step Se412) (steps Se404 to step Se410). On the other hand, in the spinning effect, regardless of the symbol numbers of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the period (total step counter) required to make one rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is used. , the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped when the period has passed (Step Se3004, Step Se3005). By doing so, it is possible to anticipate an overwhelming effect of reducing the processing load in the rotation effect, and then, when the second replay winning prize is not established in the specific mode, the acceleration and the like are adjusted. It is possible to suitably realize the rotation performance by the first rotation motion and the limit motion without destroying the merit of simplifying the processing configuration in the rotation performance. becomes.

Here, when the first rotation operation is performed, the loop lottery is executed mainly based on the operation of the start lever 41. If the rotation effect itself is not executed, the player loses the opportunity to receive the loop lottery by his/her own operation, which is not preferable for improving the interest of the game. In addition, if the rotation performance itself is not executed, the player may be misled into thinking that even the addition of the AT mode has disappeared, which may lead to a significant drop in motivation for playing the game. In that regard, by adopting a configuration in which the rotation effect is performed with the restricted action as in the above configuration, it is possible to give the player the opportunity to receive the loop lottery by his or her own operation, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the desire to play. becomes.

Moreover, in the first rotation operation, as long as the loop lottery continues to be won, re-stopping in the specific mode is repeated. Even if an increase in the processing load is avoided by doing so, the player will be confronted with the fact that the game could not be stopped in a specific mode many times, and there is concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease significantly. . In that respect, not performing the stop control in the limit operation as described above not only eliminates the increase in the processing load, but also eliminates the decrease in the desire to play. It is possible to suitably obtain a dramatic effect.

Even when the limiting action is performed, the rotating performance is stopped once when ending the rotation effect. That is, in the second rotation control process, the loop lottery is not won (Step Se3110: NO), and after the end effect is executed, the total step counter becomes "9000", so that the stop command process is executed. (Step Se3116). The timing at which the total step counter reaches "9000" is not the timing at which the total step counter reaches "9000", even when the second re-game winning is established in a non-specific mode, and it is not the timing at which it reaches an integral multiple of one round. Reappearance of the stop roll that was stopped at the time is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player's operation error is reproduced at the end of the restricted operation even though the operation error of the player is prevented from being reproduced in the restricted operation. can.

When the first rotation operation is performed, random rotation control is performed to randomly shift the rotation start timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R after the first rotation operation is completed. , random rotation control is not performed after the end of the restricted action, and the rotation start mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R after the end of the rotation action is changed depending on the mode of the rotation action of the rotation effect. It was configured to allow In the first rotation operation, as described above, the stop rolls of the specific mode appear, but if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R were to start rotating at the same time, there is a possibility that they would rotate with the specific modes aligned. The degree of difficulty of the stop operation differs between a player who can see it and a player who cannot see it, and there is a possibility that the fairness of the game cannot be ensured. On the other hand, in the limiting operation, the stop rolls of the specific mode are not stopped in the first place, and the control to stop the stop rolls of the specific mode is not performed in the middle. , 32R are started to rotate at the same time, it is unlikely that the above fairness will be lost. Therefore, as described above, while random rotation control is performed after the first rotation operation, random rotation control is not performed after the limit operation, thereby eliminating unnecessary control and reducing the control load. becomes possible.

When random rotation control is performed after the first rotation operation, the delay counter changes from "1000" to "0" from the time the first reel starts rotating to the time the third reel finally starts rotating. However, when the limit operation is not performed, the end of the limit operation is delayed until the total step counter reaches from "8000" to "9000". By doing so, it is possible to match the progress of the game between when the first rotating motion is performed and when the restricting motion is performed, and the second re-game winning is established intentionally in a specific manner. By allowing or not establishing, it is possible to make it impossible to advance or slow down the game progress. Therefore, it is possible to establish the second re-game winning in a more purely specific manner, and to enjoy the rotation performance by the first rotation motion.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the mode of the restricting action when the second replay winning is established in the non-specified mode varies depending on the type of the non-specified mode. FIG. 413 is a flow chart showing rotation effect command setting processing in this modified example.

In step Se3701, processing for clearing the rotation effect flag is executed. In the subsequent step Se3702, it is determined whether or not the second regame winning flag is set. When the second regame winning flag is set, in step Se3703, a process of setting a counterclockwise rotation flag in the various flags storage area 106d is executed. The left spin flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the stop result of the current game, and is a flag corresponding to the "white 7" symbol being stopped in the middle row of the left reel 32L.

When a negative determination is made in step Se3702, or after the processing of step Se3703 is executed, in step Se3704, the symbol number in the middle of the middle reel 32M is "3", and "White 7" is in the middle of the middle reel 32M. It is determined whether or not the pattern is stopped. When the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, in step Se3705, a process of setting a middle rotation flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The middle spin flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the stop result of the current game, and is a flag corresponding to the fact that the "White 7" symbol is stopped in the middle row of the middle reel 32M.

When a negative determination is made in step Se3704, or after the processing of step Se3705 is executed, in step Se3706, the symbol number on the middle stage of the right reel 32R is "4" and the middle stage of the right reel 32R is "White 7". It is determined whether or not the pattern is stopped. When the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R, in step Se3707, a process of setting a right rotation flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed. The right spin flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the stop result of the current game, and is a flag corresponding to the "White 7" symbol being stopped in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

If a negative determination is made in step Se3706 or after the processing of step Se3707 is executed, it is checked in step Se3708 whether or not all the rotation flags of the left rotation flag, the middle rotation flag, and the right rotation flag are set. judge. In other words, if the second replay winning has been established in the specific mode, affirmative determination is made in step Se3708. When an affirmative determination is made in step Se3708, the first rotation effect flag is set in step Se3709, and the first rotation effect command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step Se3710. This rotation effect command setting process is terminated. That is, when the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle row of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the second replay winning is established in a specific mode, the first rotation is performed as in the above embodiment. perform an action.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step Se3708 and the "white 7" symbol is not stopped in the middle stage of any of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, processing for performing the second rotation operation is executed. do. That is, in step Se3711, the second rotation effect flag is set, and in step Se3712, the second rotation effect command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81, and then this rotation effect command setting process is executed. finish. The second rotation effect command includes information of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle row.

FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the second rotation control process in this modified example.

At Step Se3801, it is determined whether or not the counterclockwise rotation flag has been set. If the counterclockwise rotation flag is set, "25" is input to the acceleration counter of the left reel 32L in step Se3802, and the above special rotation table is set as the rotation table of the left reel 32L. On the other hand, if the left rotation flag is not set, in step Se3803 a process of setting a stop table as the rotation table for the left reel 32L is executed. As shown in FIG. 415, the stop table is a table in which the acceleration period is set to 0 in all acceleration orders and the excitation data is set so that the excitation data for stop is updated. That is, when the symbol "WHITE 7" is not stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the left reel 32L does not rotate in the reverse direction and remains stopped.

After executing the process of step Se3802 or step Se3803, it is determined in step Se3804 whether or not the medium rotation flag is set. When the middle rotation flag is set, in step Se3805, "25" is input to the acceleration counter of the middle reel 32M, and the process of setting the above special rotation table as the rotation table of the middle reel 32M is executed. On the other hand, if the middle rotation flag is not set, in step Se3806, a process of setting the stop table as the rotation table of the middle reel 32M is executed. That is, when the "white 7" symbol is not stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the middle reel 32M is kept stopped without rotating in the reverse direction.

After executing the process of step Se3805 or step Se3806, it is determined in step Se3807 whether or not the right rotation flag is set. When the right rotation flag is set, in step Se3808, "25" is input to the acceleration counter of the right reel 32R, and the special rotation table is set as the rotation table of the right reel 32R. On the other hand, if the right rotation flag is not set, in step Se3809, a process of setting the stop table as the rotation table for the right reel 32R is executed. In other words, when the "white 7" symbol is not stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 32R, the right reel 32R does not rotate in the reverse direction and remains stopped.

After executing the processing of step Se3808 or step Se3809, processing for starting addition of the total step counter is executed in step Se3810. Then, in step Se3811, if the total step counter becomes "4528" and the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are rotating, it is determined whether or not they have rotated exactly two rounds. An affirmative determination is made in step Se3811 at the timing of exactly two revolutions, and the process proceeds to step Se3812. At Step Se3812, a stop command process for stopping the rotating reel is executed. That is, for example, if the left reel 32L is rotating, the left reel 32L is stopped so that the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of the left reel 32L, while the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are rotating. If not, keep it that way. Then, in step Se3813, a process of outputting to the display control device 81 a first loop command including information on the reel stopped this time is executed.

In the subsequent step Se3814, an operation command is output to the display control device 81, and if it is determined that the start lever 41 has been operated in step Se3815, or if it is determined that the total step counter has reached "8000" in step Se3816, the system waits. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step Se3815 or step Se3816, loop lottery processing is executed in step Se3817, and it is determined in step Se3818 whether or not a loop lottery has been won.

In the case of loop winning, the process proceeds to step Se3819, and the process of outputting the first start effect command to the display control device 81 is executed. Then, in Step Se3820, the AT set counter is incremented by 1, and in Step Se3821, the total step counter is cleared to "0", after which the process returns to Step Se3801. In this case, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate in the reverse direction again based on the information of each rotation flag.

If a negative determination is made in step Se3818, an end command is output to the display control device 81 in step Se3822. Then, at Step Se3823, the CPU waits until the total step counter reaches "9000", and when it reaches "9000", at Step Se3824, a process of stopping the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, that state is maintained. After that, the random rotation flag is set in step Se3825, and the second rotation control process is ended.

The second rotation effect processing on the display control device 81 side in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 416 .

In step Se3901, based on the received second rotation effect command (processed in the rotation effect preparation process), reels with "white 7" symbols stopped in the middle row of the auxiliary display section 65 (rotating in the opposite direction). A process for performing the first start effect is executed in the area corresponding to the starting reel). Specifically, in this modified example, the display area of the auxiliary display section 65 is divided into a left reel corresponding area, a middle reel corresponding area, and a right reel corresponding area. Then, in step Se3901, when the first start effect is displayed in the entire area of the auxiliary display section 65, the image displayed in each corresponding area is divided and rotated in the opposite direction as described above. 417(b2)).

In addition, FIG. 417(a1) shows the case where the "WHITE 7" symbol stops at the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, but the "WHITE 7" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated based on the start operation effect (FIG. 417(b1)), the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, on which the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage, rotate in opposite directions. However, the right reel 32R is maintained in a stopped state. In this case, in FIG. 417(b2), divided images of the first start effect are displayed in the left reel corresponding area corresponding to the left reel 32L and the middle reel corresponding area corresponding to the middle reel 32M.

In the following step Se3902, based on the received second rotation effect command, of the auxiliary display section 65, the "white 7" symbol in the middle stage corresponds to the reel that did not stop (the reel that is maintained in the stopped state). A process for performing a second start effect in the area is executed. Specifically, when the second start effect is displayed in the entire area of the auxiliary display section 65, the image displayed in each corresponding area is divided, and then the stopped state is maintained as described above. 417(b2)). In addition, in FIG. 417(b2), the divided image of the second start effect is displayed in the right reel corresponding area corresponding to the right reel 32R.

In the following step Se3903, the process waits until the first loop command is received, and when the first loop command is received, an affirmative determination is made in the step Se3903, and the process proceeds to step Se3904. The case where the first loop command is received is the case where the rotating reel as described above rotates exactly two times and stops at the stop roll before the start of rotation (Fig. 417 (a3)). . In this case, in step Se3904, a process for performing the first loop effect in the corresponding area of the reel stopped this time is executed. In this process, as in the first start effect and the second start effect, the first loop effect is divided into three, and the divided image of the first loop effect is displayed in the corresponding area corresponding to this time. to

In addition, step Se3905, the processing for performing the second loop effect in the corresponding area of the reel that maintains the stop state is executed. Similarly, in this process, after dividing the second loop effect into three, the divided image of the second loop effect is displayed in the corresponding area corresponding to this time (Fig. 417 (b3)).

In step Se3906, the process waits until an operation command is received, and when the operation command is received, an affirmative determination is made, and the process proceeds to step Se3907. In Step Se3907, control is performed so that the start operation presentation is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 (FIG. 417(b1)). After that, when the first start effect command is received, the process returns to step Se3901, and when the first start effect command is not received, whether or not the end command is received is determined in step Se3909. If no command has been received, the process returns to step Se3908 and waits until any command is received. When the end command is received, in step Se3910 control is performed so that the end effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65, and then the process for the second rotation effect is terminated.

As described above, among the specific modes, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage are rotated in the first rotation operation and the first display effect, and the "white 7" symbol is displayed in the middle stage. 7. As for the reels 32L, 32M, 32R whose symbols are not stopped, the spinning effect is performed in the limited operation and the second display effect, so that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not successfully hit. If the player succeeds, even partially, it will be reflected in the rotating performance, and the degree of difficulty of the game will be lowered, thereby making it possible to improve the willingness to play.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, after changing the execution timing of the loop lottery, the mode of the limiting operation when the game is not stopped in the specific mode is made different from that of the above-described embodiment.

FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing processing for an additional loop in this modified example.

A loop rate lottery process is executed in step Se4001, and a corresponding loop rate flag is set in step Se4002. After that, in this modified example, a loop lottery process is executed according to the loop rate. In this process, the loop lottery process of step Se3010 and step Se3110 is repeatedly executed until the loop is not won. Then, in step Se4004, a process of inputting the number of executions of the loop lottery (the number of wins of the loop lottery) in step Se4003 to the loop counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

After executing the process of step Se4004, the process of adding the value of the loop counter to the AT set counter is executed in step Se4005, and the process of setting the loop rate command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step Se4006. to run. After that, after setting the rotation effect flag in step Se4007, the processing for this additional loop is ended.

That is, in this modified example, the loop lottery is executed based on the player's operation in the first rotation motion and the limit motion, and the loop lottery is executed when the additional lottery is won in advance.

FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the first rotation control process in this modified example.

In step Se4101, a process of subtracting 1 from the loop counter is executed. Subsequent steps Se4102 to Se4110 are the same as the processing of steps Se3001 to Se3009, and are processing for performing the first rotation operation. At step Se4111, it is determined whether or not the above loop counter is zero. If the loop counter is not 0, the process advances to step Se4112 to execute the process of outputting the first start effect command, the process to clear the total step counter to 0 is executed in step Se4113, and then the process advances to step Se4101. return.

If it is determined in step Se4111 that the loop counter is 0, a process of outputting an end command is executed in step Se4114, and a process of setting a random rotation flag is executed in step Se4115. End the control process.

FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing the second rotation control process in this modified example.

The changes in the second rotation control process are basically the same as the changes in the first rotation control process. Then, the processing of steps Se4202 to Se4209 is executed, and whether or not the loop counter is 0 is determined in step Se4210. When the loop counter is not 0, the process advances to step Se4211 to execute the process of outputting the second start effect command, and the process of clearing the total step counter to 0 is executed in step Se4212. Then, in step Se4213, the process of subtracting 1 from the loop counter is executed, and then the process returns to step Se4205.

If it is determined at Step Se4210 that the loop counter is 0, at Step Se4214 a process of outputting an end command is executed, and at Step Se4215 the process waits until the total step counter reaches "9000". When the total step counter reaches "9000", the stop command process is executed in step Se4216, and then the second rotation control process is terminated.

That is, in this modified example, the first rotation operation and the limiting operation are repeated until the loop counter reaches zero. In this way, by not performing a lottery (loop lottery) through the operation of the player during the rotation motion, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom when changing the rotation motion according to the stop result. is.

In other words, for example, if the stop roll is in a specific mode, the first rotating action is executed, while in a non-specific mode, etc., the execution of the first rotating action is restricted, so that the rotating action itself is not executed. is also possible.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 421, in the rotation effect command setting process, the process for the first rotation operation is executed in steps Se4301 to Se4306, and a negative determination is made in any of steps Se4302 to Se4304. In other words, when the second re-game winning has not been established or the second re-game winning has been established in a non-specific manner, the second re-game winning is performed in step Se4307 without setting the second rotation effect flag. To end this rotation performance command setting processing only by executing the processing for setting the output of a rotation performance command. In this case, in the rotation effect processing, since the second rotation effect flag is not set, even if the loop lottery is performed after winning extra with the normal reps A to C as a trigger, the specific If the second replay winning prize is not established in the mode, the execution of the rotating motion itself is restricted.

The effect processing and effect mode when no rotation motion is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 422 and 423. FIG.

FIG. 422 is a flow chart showing the rotation effect processing.

In steps Se4401 and Se4402, processing for setting loop rate information is executed. Then, when the first rotation effect flag is set in step Se4403, the loop rate effect is set in step Se4404, and after executing the first rotation effect processing in step Se4405, the main rotation Terminate the production process. When the first rotation effect flag is not set and the second rotation effect flag is set in step Se4406, the end effect is executed instead of the second rotation effect processing in step Se4407.

In other words, when a non-specific mode or other stop result is obtained, the second stop effect is executed as the stop effect of the game (Fig. 423(a)). After that, the start operation effect is executed (FIG. 423(b)), and when the next game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, although the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotated, the auxiliary display section At 65, the ending effect is executed (Fig. 423(c)), and the added number of sets is notified. In this way, when the stop result is different from the specific mode, if the auxiliary display section 65 notifies the addition number of the AT mode, which is notified together with the rotation operation in the specific mode, all together, In addition to suitably ensuring an opportunity to notify the number of additions, if the stop result is different from the specific mode, the rotation effect that causes the specific mode to appear is not executed. , the processing load can be drastically reduced by not executing the rotation effect itself.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, when the display effect corresponding to the first rotation motion is performed, specific information that may be beneficial to the player is presented, while when the display effect corresponding to the restricted motion is performed, the specific information is displayed. It is configured so that no information is presented. In the following description, specific information that can be beneficial to the player will be described as an example of information suggesting a setting value. or rare images.

FIG. 424 is a flow chart showing part of the first rotation effect processing in this modified example.

That is, when it is determined in step Se3502 that the first loop command has been received, in this modification, a special effect lottery process is executed in step Se4501. In the special effect lottery process, the special effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, the information of the set value set in the winning probability setting process is acquired, and the above-mentioned specific information is presented. Execute a lottery as to whether to execute or not. As shown in FIG. 425(a), the special effect table in this modified example is set such that the higher the set value of the payout rate, the easier it is to win the special effect lottery.

In step Se4502, it is determined whether or not the result of the special effect lottery in step Se4501 corresponds to execution of the special effect. If the result corresponds to executing the special effect, in step Se4503, after executing the processing of setting so that the special effect is performed in the first loop effect to be executed this time, in step Se3503 A process for performing one loop effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 425(b), it is set so that a star mark is displayed as a special effect in the speech balloon portion displaying the speech of the girl character, and when setting the first loop effect in step Se3503, the A special performance is set to be executed together with the first loop performance. And when it determines with not performing special production|presentation in step Se4502, it sets so that the 1st loop production|presentation which does not include special production|presentation may be performed in step Se3503.

In this way, by utilizing the player's psychology of wanting to obtain useful information from the special effect, not only is the degree of attention paid to the display effect associated with the first rotation motion increased, but also a specific mode according to the operation instruction effect is obtained. , it is possible to generate the merit of establishing the second re-game winning, and it is possible to anticipate active participation in the game.

In addition, in the second loop effect in the process for the second rotation effect, the description has been made on the premise that the special effect is not executed, but the special effect may be executed, and in this case, the first loop effect Information is presented that makes it easier to execute the special effect than the second loop effect, or that the special effect in the first loop effect makes it easier to narrow down the set values than the special effect in the second loop effect. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which information that is more beneficial to the player is presented or easily presented.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, a plurality of types of stop rolls are provided to stop when the AT mode extra win is made in the loop target result, and the stop rolls to be stopped are changed according to the loop rate. Specifically, in addition to the first regame winning, second replay winning, fourth replay winning, and fifth replay winning, the third replay Winning can also be established (FIG. 371), and in the case of a predetermined loop rate, the operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the third re-game winning instead of the second re-game winning.

FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing operation instruction effect setting processing in this modified example.

In step Se4601, a process of grasping the loop rate is executed. In subsequent Step Se4602, it is determined whether or not the loop rate is 80% loop. If it is not an 80% loop, in step Se4603 the process of grasping the operation order of the second re-game winning is executed, and in step Se4604 the process of outputting and setting the push order notification command for the second re-game winning is executed. After execution, this operation instruction effect setting process is terminated. The processing of steps Se4603 and Se4604 is the same as the processing of steps Se1201 and Se1202.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se4602 that it is an 80% loop, the process advances to step Se4605 to execute processing for grasping the operation order of the third regame winning. Then, in step Se4606, after executing the process of outputting and setting the pressing order notification command for the third re-game winning, this operation instruction effect setting process is terminated.

In the display control device 81, in step Se2107 and step Se2108 in the effect setting process at the start, when it is determined that the push order notification command is received when the normal reply A to normal reply C is won, and in step Se2110 In executing the operation instruction effect, at step Se2109, affirmative if the received push order notification command is the second re-game winning push order notification command or the third re-game winning push order notification command let me judge. Then, at step Se2110, if the affirmative determination is made at step Se2109 triggered by the reception of the pressing order notification command for the second replay winning, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the second replay as described above. Along with notification of the pressing order for the 2nd re-game winning, an operation instruction presentation to the effect that the 2nd re-game winning is established in a specific mode of aligning the "white 7" symbols in the middle row and stopping is executed (Fig. 406). (a)).

On the other hand, if the received pressing order notification command is the pressing order notification command for the third re-game winning, and if the affirmative determination is made in step Se2109, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the third re-game winning. In addition to the notification of the pressing order for the third reel, the 3rd reel 32L stops the ``white 7'' symbol on the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the ``red 7'' symbol on the middle stage of the right reel 32R. An operation instruction presentation to the effect that a replay winning prize is established is executed (Fig. 429(a)). In the following description, the mode in which the "white 7" symbol, the "white 7" symbol, and the "red 7" symbol stop in the middle stage of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is also referred to as a second specific mode. 7” The specific mode in which the symbols stop together is also referred to as the first specific mode. Further, the operation instruction effect to the effect that the second re-game win is established in the first specific mode is also called the first operation instruction effect, and the operation instruction effect to the effect that the third re-game win is established in the second specific mode is also referred to as the first operation instruction effect. It is also called a second operation instruction presentation.

By doing so, it is possible to grasp the loop rate depending on the type of the operation instruction effect to be executed, and in particular, it is possible to increase the expectation for the occurrence of the second operation instruction effect, and to stop it. Since the number of stop outcomes is diversified, it is also possible to arouse the player's desire to play. However, just as there are players who cannot stop the first specific mode as described above, it is conceivable that there are players who cannot stop the second specific mode. In addition, it is conceivable that an event may occur in which the game is erroneously stopped in the first stop mode instead of the second stop mode due to insufficient confirmation of the operation instruction rendering. On the other hand, as described above, there is a concern that the control load will increase if the rotation operation is performed after correcting the stop state by the rotation operation according to the stop state. Therefore, the control load required for the correction increases cumulatively.

FIG. 427 is a flow chart showing rotation effect command setting processing in this modified example.

In step Se4701, processing for clearing the rotation effect flag is executed. At subsequent Step Se4702, the second re-game winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the second re-game winning has been established in the current game. When winning, in steps Se4703 and Se4704, confirmation processing is executed to confirm that the second replay winning has been established in the first specific mode. If affirmative determinations are made in steps Se4703 and Se4704 and the second replay winning prize is established in the first specific mode, then in step Se4705 the loop rate of the current loop lottery is 80% based on the loop rate flag. Determine whether it is a loop or not. As described above, in the present modified example, in the case of the 80% loop, the operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the third re-game winning instead of the second re-game winning.

If it is determined in step Se4705 that it is not an 80% loop, in steps Se4706 and Se4707, after executing the processing for executing the first rotation operation and the accompanying production, this rotation production command setting process ends. do.

If it is determined in step Se4702 that the second re-game winning has not been established, the third re-game winning flag is set in step Se4708, and whether or not the third re-game winning has been established in the current game judge. The third re-game winning is not established, for example, the second re-game winning cannot be established without following the push order notification effect in the first operation instruction effect, and the first re-game winning etc. is established. If so, the process proceeds to step Se4709, and in steps Se4709 and Se4710, in the same manner as in steps Se2807 and Se2808, the process for executing the restricting motion for restricting the first rotation motion and the effect associated therewith is executed. , ends the rotation effect command setting process. It should be noted that even if it is determined in Step Se4704 and Step Se4705 that the second replay winning has been established but the winning in the first specific mode has not been achieved, after executing the processing of Steps Se4709 and Se4710, This rotation effect command setting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step Se4708 that the third replay winning has been established, the process proceeds to step Se4711. At Step Se4711, it is determined whether or not the loop rate of the current loop lottery is an 80% loop based on the loop rate flag. As described above, in the present modified example, in the case of the 80% loop, the operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the third re-game winning instead of the second re-game winning. If it is not an 80% loop, that is, if the third re-game winning instead of the second re-game winning is established in spite of the execution of the first operation instruction effect, step Se4709 and step Se4710. After executing the process of , the rotation effect command setting process is terminated.

In other words, in this modification, although the first operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the second re-game winning in the first specific mode, the third re-game winning is erroneously established. In such a case, a limiting action is performed instead of the first rotating action without performing a rotating action to correct the stop result in the second specific mode to the first specific mode during rotation. there is In addition, by performing the effect for the limiting action instead of the effect associated with the first rotation action, it is possible to clearly teach the player that the stop result is different from the instructed stop result. It becomes possible.

If it is determined in step Se4711 that it is an 80% loop, the process advances to step Se4712. At Step Se4712, it is determined whether or not the middle pattern number of the middle reel 32M is 3. Here, as symbols for the third replay winning prize, the left reel 32L has one "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the right reel 32R has one "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. On the other hand, there are two "white shell" symbols on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, whether or not the third replay prize has been established in the second specific mode can be determined by the stop result of the middle reel 32M. When the third replay winning has been established in the second specific mode and the symbol number in the middle stage of the middle reel 32M is 18, the third replay winning has not been established in the second specific mode. Become.

When the determination in step Se4712 is affirmative and the third replay winning prize is established in the second specific mode, the process advances to step Se4713 to execute the process of setting the first rotation effect flag, and in step Se4714 the third A process of setting a rotation effect command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. By setting the first rotation effect flag, as described above, the first rotation operation in which the reverse rotation and the stop in the second specific mode are repeated is executed until the loop lottery is not won at the start of the next game. It will be done.

In other words, as described above, in the first rotation operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated exactly two times and then stopped, regardless of whether the reels are stopped or the symbols being rotated. , If the first rotation action is executed from the stop roll of the first specific mode, the stop roll of the first specific mode appears after the reverse rotation, and the first rotation action is executed from the stop roll of the second specific mode. Then, the stop roll in the second specific mode will appear after the reverse rotation. In addition, the above-mentioned third rotation effect command causes the auxiliary display section 65 to display a stop effect suggesting that the stop roll in the second specific mode is stopped and the loop lottery is performed at a loop rate of 80%. This command is for After executing the process of step Se4714, this rotation effect command setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step Se4712 and the third regame winning is established in a mode different from the second specific mode, the process of steps Se4709 and Se4710 is executed, and then the main rotation is performed. Terminate the production command setting process.

That is, in this modification, although the second operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the third replay winning in the second specific mode, the second operation instruction effect is executed in a mode different from the second specific mode. 3 When a replay win is established, the stop roll in a mode different from the second specific mode is not controlled to correct it to the second specific mode by a rotating operation. A limited motion is performed instead of a one-rotation motion. In addition, by performing the effect for the limiting action instead of the effect associated with the first rotation action, it is possible to clearly teach the player that the stop result is different from the instructed stop result. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, in the above step Se4705, if the second replay winning prize is established in the first specific mode in spite of the 80% loop, the process proceeds to step Se4715, and the second rotation effect flag is set. process. Thereafter, in step Se4716, a process of setting the fourth rotation effect command to the display control device 81 as an output target is executed. That is, in the present modification, the second re-game winning in the first specific mode despite the fact that the second operation instruction effect is executed so as to establish the third re-game winning in the second specific mode. is established, the limit action is performed instead of the first rotation action without performing control to correct the stop result in the first specific mode to the second specific mode with the rotation action. I am trying to make it happen. In addition, the above-mentioned fourth rotation effect command is an auxiliary display of a stop effect that suggests that the loop lottery is performed at a loop rate of 80%, but the result is a stop result that is not. This is a command to be performed by the unit 65 or the like. After executing the process of step Se4716, this rotation effect command setting process is terminated.

FIG. 428(a) is a flow chart showing rotation effect preparation processing on the display control device 81 side in this modified example.

The processing of Step Se4801 to Step Se4809 is the same as the processing of Step Se3201 to Step Se3209, and based on the reception of the first rotation effect command and the second rotation effect command, the first stop effect and the second stop effect are generated. In addition to performing processing such as execution of hour performance and start operation performance, a first rotation performance flag is set for performance when the first rotation motion is performed, and for performance when the limit motion is performed. to set the second rotation effect flag.

If a negative determination is made in step Se4805 and the second rotation effect command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the third rotation effect command has been received in step Se4810. As described above, the third rotation effect command is a command output when the third replay winning in the second specific mode is established based on the second operation instruction effect. In this case, in step Se4811, a process for setting the third stop effect to be performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like is executed. In the third stopping effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays a girl character happy saying "You're super lucky" together with the characters with the "White 7" pattern and the "Red 7" pattern. It is set (FIG. 429(c1)), and is set so as to suggest that an additional lottery will be won as well as an additional lottery. In this case, the third stop-time effect and the first stop-time effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them, and when the third stop-time effect is performed, in addition, It is suggested that the winning probability of this loop lottery is high (80% loop).

After that, in step Se4812, a process for setting the start operation effect to be performed following the third stop effect is executed. Then, in step Se4813, after executing the process of setting the first rotation effect flag, the rotation effect preparation process is terminated. In this case, the first display effects such as the first start effect and the first loop effect are executed in accordance with the first rotation motion at the start of the next game.

When it determines with not having received the 3rd rotation production|presentation command in step Se4810, it is determined whether the 4th rotation production|presentation command is received in step Se4814. As described above, the fourth rotation effect command is executed in the first specific mode in spite of the fact that the second operation instruction effect is being executed in order to establish the third replay winning in the second specific mode. 2 This is a command that is output when a replay win is established. When the fourth rotation effect command is not received, the present rotation effect preparation processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth rotation effect command is received, in step Se4815, a process for setting so that the fourth stop effect is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is executed. For the fourth stopping effect, for example, a effect is set in which a confused girl character is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 together with a character with a "white 7" pattern (Fig. 429 (c3)). , is set to suggest that the content of the operation instruction presentation based on the lottery result of the additional lottery and the stop result are different.

After that, in step Se4816, a process for setting the start operation effect to be performed following the third stop effect is executed. Then, in step Se4817, after executing the process of setting the second rotation effect flag, the rotation effect preparation process is terminated. In this case, a second display effect such as a second start effect or a second loop effect is executed in accordance with the restricted action at the start of the next game.

An overview of the actions and effects of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the second operation instruction effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 429 to 431. FIG.

Based on the normal reply A to normal reply C, when the additional winning is made and the loop rate is set to 80%, as shown in FIG. A second operation instruction effect is executed. When the player operates in accordance with the second operation instruction effect, the third replay win is established in the second specific mode as shown in FIG. 429(b1). In this case, the third stopping effect is executed on the auxiliary display portion 65, the loop rate is 80%, and many additions can be expected. can be clearly grasped from the display contents of . Thereafter, at the start of the next game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R perform the first rotation operation, and the reverse rotation and the stop at the stop roll of the second specific mode are performed until the loop lottery is not won. Then, the first start effect and the first loop effect are executed according to the action.

Although the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the third re-game winning cannot be established in the second specific mode, the third re-game winning is established in a mode different from the second specific mode. Or, as shown in FIG. 429(b2), the fourth re-game winning is established instead of the third re-game winning, and as shown in FIG. A game prize may be established. In this case, when the second re-game winning has been established in the first specific mode, as shown in FIG. 429(c2), the second stopping effect is executed. Since the second stopping effect is also executed when the above-described pseudo operation instruction effect is executed, in this case, not only the loop rate is 80%, but also the fact that the additional lottery wins is confirmed by each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R and the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 cannot be grasped. However, at the start of the next game, the restriction action is executed by each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the second start effect and the second loop effect are executed according to the reverse rotation until the loop lottery is not won. .

On the other hand, when the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode and the fourth stop-time effect is executed, the operation is performed with a content different from the content of the operation instruction effect. It becomes possible to grasp (that the first specific mode has been stopped instead of the second specific mode). In this case, at the start of the next game, the restricted actions are executed by the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. That is, as shown in FIG. 430(a1), in a situation where the second replay winning prize is established in the first specific mode, the start operation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 430(b1), and the start lever is activated. 41, as shown in FIGS. 430(a2) and 430(b2), each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate in the opposite direction, and a second start effect is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65. is executed. Then, at the timing when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotates exactly two rounds (Fig. 430(a3)), the second loop effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 (Fig. 430(b3)).

After that, in a situation where the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continue to rotate in the opposite direction (Fig. 431(a1)), the start operation effect is executed (Fig. 431(b1)), and the loop lottery is won. 430(a2) and 430(b2) and the effect for it will be repeated as long as it is. When the loop lottery is not won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in the opposite directions as shown in FIG. 431(a2), and an end effect is produced as shown in FIG. executed. After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in the forward direction (Fig. 431(a3)), and as an effect at the time of start, for example, a pressing order notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 (Fig. 431). (b3)).

FIG. 428(b) shows the relationship between each operation instruction effect, the stop mode, the rotating motion, and the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

When the first operation instruction effect is executed, the "white 7" pattern on the left reel 32L, the 4th "white shell" pattern on the middle reel 32M, and the 5th "cherry" pattern on the right reel 32R are on the activated line ML. 2nd re-game prize-winning in the 1st specific mode is materialized by stopping at . In this case, as the stop effect, the first stop effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the first loop effect and the first start effect are executed in accordance with the first rotation motion of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. 1 display effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the other hand, even if the first operation instruction effect is executed, unlike the above-described first specific mode, for example, the symbol "white 7" on the left reel 32L and the number "4" on the middle reel 32M The second re-game winning is established in a non-specific manner such as the white shell" symbol and the 0 or 10 "cherry" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, or in the second re-game winning When the first replay winning prize, the third replay winning prize, the fourth replay winning prize, and the fifth replay winning prize are established, the auxiliary display section 65 executes the second stop effect as the stop effect, and A second display effect such as a second loop effect or a second start effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 in accordance with the limiting actions of 32L, 32M, and 32R.

When the second operation instruction effect is executed, the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the 4th ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML. As a result, the third replay win in the second specific mode is established. In this case, as the stop effect, a third stop effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the first loop effect and the first start effect are executed in accordance with the first rotation motion of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. 1 display effect is executed in the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the other hand, even if the second operation instruction effect is executed, unlike the above-described second specific mode, for example, the symbol "White 7" on the left reel 32L and the number "8" on the middle reel 32M The 3rd re-game winning is established in a non-specific manner such as the white shell" symbol and the 'BAR' symbol on the right reel 32R stopping on the activated line ML, or the 1st re-game winning instead of the 3rd re-game winning , 4th re-game winning, and 5th re-game winning are established, and when the second re-game winning in a non-specific mode is established, the auxiliary display section 65 executes the second stop-time production as the stop-time production. , second display effects such as a second loop effect and a second start effect are executed on the auxiliary display section 65 in accordance with the limiting operations of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

However, when the second operation instruction effect is executed and the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 as the stop effect. After that, a second display effect such as a second loop effect or a second start effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 in accordance with the restricted actions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

Although the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is different from the case where the second replay prize is established in the first specific mode when the second operation instruction effect is executed, the first specific mode is aimed at. It is the case that it succeeds in stopping by In other words, this is the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are successfully stopped in the first specific mode, which has a higher degree of difficulty than executing at least the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 as instructed. By executing the fourth stop-time presentation different from the second stop-time presentation, it is possible to display appreciation for the successful stop in the first specific mode even if there is a misunderstanding. It is possible to preferably avoid a decrease in the desire to play, and at least since the performance is different from the second stop performance, it is possible to win an additional win at the time of stopping in the first specific mode. itself can be comprehended.

It should be noted that when the second operation instruction effect is executed and the second replay winning prize is established in the first specific mode, the restricted operation by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the second loop effect, and the Although the second display effect such as the second start effect is executed by the auxiliary display part 65, the first rotation operation by the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the first display effect are executed by the auxiliary display part 65. may be configured.

Further, when the first operation instruction effect is executed and the third re-game winning is established in the second specific mode, after executing the second stop effect, each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the second display effects such as the second loop effect and the second start effect are executed in the auxiliary display section 65, but after executing the fourth stop effect and the third stop effect, Then, the auxiliary display section 65 may be configured to execute the first rotation operation by the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the first display effect.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the aspect of the limiting operation is different from that of the above embodiment. FIG. 432 is a flow chart showing the second rotation control process in this modified example, and the difference from the process of FIG.

Specifically, in step Se4901, a process of acquiring the first special rotary table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. The first special rotary table is the same rotary table as the rotary table obtained in step Se3101 (FIG. 400). Then, in steps Se4902 to Se4910, similarly to steps Se3102 to Se3110, processing for limiting operation based on the first special rotary table is executed, and a loop lottery based on the operation of the start lever 41 is executed. When it is determined at step Se4910 that the loop lottery is won, at step Se4911 a process of outputting a second start effect command is executed. Then, a process of adding 1 to the AT set counter is executed in step Se4912, and a process of clearing the total step counter to 0 is executed in step Se4913.

In subsequent Step Se4914, it is determined whether or not the second special rotary table in the various table storage area 105a has already been set. A loop lottery based on the operation of the start lever 41 is executed as well as the processing for the restricted operation. If not already set, in step Se4915, the second special rotary table is acquired in the various table storage area 105a, and the process of setting the second special rotary table as the rotary table for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Execute. As shown in FIG. 433, the second special rotary table has a shorter acceleration time for each acceleration order than the first special rotary table. The rotation speed of the second special rotary table is set to be faster than the rotation speed of the second special rotary table. After executing the processing of step Se4915, the process returns to step Se4902, 25 is input to the acceleration counter, and processing for limiting operation based on the second special rotary table is executed, and a loop lottery based on the operation of the start lever 41 is executed. to run.

Further, when the loop lottery is not won in step Se4910, in steps Se4915 to step Se4917, in the same manner as in steps Se3114 to Se3116, the process for ending the limiting operation is executed, and then the second rotation is performed. End the control process.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 434, first, the second regame winning is established in a non-specific mode (FIG. 434(a1)), and when the start operation effect is executed (FIG. 434(b1)), the start Based on the operation of the lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate in the reverse direction on the basis of the first special rotary table (Fig. 434(a2)). In the auxiliary display section 65, the second start effect is executed (Fig. 434 (b2)), and at the timing of exactly two rotations (Fig. 434 (a3)), the second loop effect is executed (Fig. 434 (b3)).

While each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating (Fig. 434(a4)), the operation instruction effect is executed (Fig. 434(b4)), and when the start lever 41 is operated, each The rotational speeds of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are accelerated (Fig. 434(a5)). In the auxiliary display section 65, the second start effect is executed (Fig. 434(b5)), and the second loop effect is executed while rotating at the rotational speed of the second special turntable (Fig. 434(a6)). (Fig. 434 (b6)). After that, as long as the loop lottery continues to be won, the rotation control based on the second special turntable is executed, and the setting of the AT mode is repeated by the second start performance and the second loop performance.

In this way, instead of reappearing the stop roll in the specific mode in the limiting action, by increasing the rotation speed and rotating it, the action mode of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the limiting action can be flashy and branched. The mode and the like are almost the same as those of the first rotation motion, and it is possible to combine the presentation effect of the first rotation motion and the presentation effect of the limit motion. Therefore, it is possible to expect a dramatic effect while reducing the processing load due to the restricted operation.

Although the rotation speed is increased halfway through the limiting operation based on the second special rotary table, the rotation based on the second special rotary table may be performed from the beginning. In addition, a special rotary table is provided separately, and each time a loop lottery is won, the operation is restricted by the first special rotary table, the restricted operation by the second special rotary table, and the restricted operation by the third special rotary table, and so on. , the selected special rotary table may be different, and the mode of the rotary motion may be different. Further, although the difference in the manner of rotating operation has been explained by the difference in rotational speed, it is sufficient that the manner of rotating operation differs between the special rotary tables, for example, different accelerations may be used.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, when it is determined that the AT mode additional lottery is won and a loop lottery involving a rotating operation is performed, a specific event that can cause positional deviation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occurs. In this case, the mode of the rotation motion at the start of the next game is made different. FIG. 435(a) is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing in this modified example.

In step Se5001, it is determined whether or not the first rotation effect flag is set. As already explained, the first rotation effect flag is a flag that is set when the second re-game winning can be established in a specific manner based on the operation instruction effect, and is a trigger for executing the rotation effect process. It is a flag for executing the first rotation operation based on the operation of the start lever 41 that becomes .

When the first rotation effect flag is set, in this modification, it is checked whether or not a specific event has occurred in steps Se5002 and Se5003. Specifically, in step Se5002, it is determined whether or not the door open flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d.

Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, the front door 12 is provided with a door sensor capable of detecting that the front door 12 is opened (closed). ) in the sensor monitoring process (step Se107), when the door sensor detects that the front door 12 is opened (when it detects that the front door 12 is no longer closed), various A process of setting a door open flag in the flag storage area 106d is executed. The door open flag is cleared by, for example, payout determination processing in the reel control processing (FIG. 357) when one game has been completed after the door sensor detects that the front door 12 is closed. be.

That is, when it is determined that the door open flag is set in step Se5002 of the rotation effect processing executed at the start of the game, it means that the game is started with the front door 12 open, or the front door 12 is opened. After being opened, it means that it is the beginning of the first game after being closed.

Also, in step Se5003, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is set.

Although detailed explanation with drawings is omitted, the power failure flag is set in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 352) (step Se102: YES), and when the power failure process is executed, the backup area of the RAM 106 is set. This flag is set to , and is cleared, for example, in payout determination processing in the reel control processing (FIG. 357) when one game is played after recovery from a power failure state.

If a negative determination is made in both Steps Se5002 and Se5003, neither the door open flag nor the power failure flag is set, and no specific event has occurred, the process advances to Step Se5004 to execute the first rotation control process. , ends the rotation effect processing. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step Se5002 or step Se5003, the door open flag or power interruption flag is set, and a specific event has occurred, the process advances to step Se5005 to issue a switching command to the display control device 81. After executing the output process, in step Se5006, the second rotation control process is executed, and then the rotation effect process is terminated. It should be noted that the second rotation control process of step Se5006 is a process that is also executed when a negative determination is made in step Se5001 and the second rotation effect flag is set in step Se5007.

The switching command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the limited operation is to be performed although the first rotation operation was scheduled to be performed. In the display control device 81, as shown in FIG. 435(b), after determining that the first rotation effect flag is set in step Se3303 in the process for rotation effect, the switching command is issued in step Se5011. Determine whether or not it is received. When the switching command has not been received, the process proceeds to step Se3304, the process of setting the loop effect is executed, and the process for the first rotation effect is executed in step Se3305. On the other hand, when the switching command is received, it progresses to step Se3307 and performs the process for 2nd rotation effects.

That is, even if the second re-game winning can be established in a specific manner based on the operation instruction effect, if a specific event occurs before the start of the first rotation motion, the first Instead of rotating motion, rotating motion is executed with limit motion. Also, the display effects on the auxiliary display section 65 are switched from the first display effects such as the first start effect and the first loop effect to the second display effects such as the second start effect and the second loop effect. become.

As described above, the game in which the first rotation is performed is the game following the game in which the AT mode additional lottery was won in the loop target result, but the execution of the first rotation is canceled due to the occurrence of a specific event. The case where the rotating motion with the restricted motion is executed after being restricted is after the end of the game in which the extra win is made in the loop target result and before the rotating motion with the restricted motion is executed. That is, when a specific event occurs after the first stop effect is executed, the rotating motion is executed in the restricted motion, and the display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is switched from the first display effect to the second display effect. will be executed.

Although detailed explanation with drawings is omitted, when the door open flag and the power failure flag are set in the game in which the AT mode extra lottery is won in the loop target result, the door open flag and the power failure flag are set as described above. The disconnect flag is cleared at the end of the game. Therefore, when the additional lottery is won, for example, the second replay winning prize is successfully established in a specific mode, and the game in which the first stop effect is executed ends, the door open flag and the power failure flag are set. It is cleared, and in the next game, the rotation effect by the first rotation motion and the first display effect is executed.

Here, when a specific event occurs, it is possible not to execute the rotation effect itself, but as the first stop effect is executed as described above, the rotation effect is executed in the next game. It is considered that the player understands that. In that respect, if the rotation effect itself is not executed based on the occurrence of the specific event, the benefit of further performing the AT mode shown in the first stop effect will be the benefit of the specific event. The player may mistakenly think that the object has disappeared due to its occurrence. In that respect, as described above, even if a specific event occurs, the rotation performance itself is not executed. Also, the display performance of the rotation performance is switched from the first display performance (first start performance or first loop performance) to the second display performance (second start performance or second loop performance). By adopting a configuration in which the first stopping effect is executed, an increase in the processing load for adjusting the rotation motion due to the occurrence of the specific event is avoided, and at the same time, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the benefit shown in the first stopping effect has disappeared. It becomes possible to do so.

It should be noted that, if the door open flag or power failure flag is set before the first stop effect is executed and a specific event occurs, the AT mode additional lottery will be won and the first rotation operation and the limit operation will be performed. Even if the decision to execute is made, only the loop lottery and the accompanying addition may be performed, and these rotation effects may not be executed. In this case, based on the occurrence of the specific event, it is preferable that the second stop effect is performed instead of the first stop effect. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that the rotation effect is not executed.

In this modified example, when applying the special effect shown in the above modified example 3, the following should be done. As already explained, the special effect is a effect in which information suggesting a set value is presented. While it is executed in the process, it is not executed when the second regame winning is failed in the specific mode. As described above, due to the occurrence of a specific event, the second rotation effect processing is executed instead of the first rotation effect processing, so the above special effect is executed in the second rotation effect processing. A process for doing so may be provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 435(c), if it is determined in step Se3602 that the second loop command has been received, in step Se5021 the switching command is received at the start of the current game. determine whether or not there is If it is received, a special effect lottery process is executed in step Se5022, and it is determined whether or not the lottery process is won in step Se5023. If the game is won, the special effect is set to be executed together with the second loop effect in step Se5024. When a negative determination is made in step Se5021 or step Se5023, or after the processing of step Se5024 is executed, the second loop effect is executed in step Se3603.

By doing so, even if the second replay winning prize is successfully established in a specific mode and the right to generate a special effect is obtained, the right to generate the special effect is obtained by the occurrence of a specific event. can be eliminated.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, how to deal with a specific event occurring while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating will be described. Specific events during execution of the rotating operation include, for example, step-out of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and sensor abnormality. That is, in the motor control process, if acceleration is not performed normally and the reel does not start rotating, if the reel is intentionally held down to stop the rotation, or if the reel is out of step, 1 Even if an excitation signal of 500 pulses for rotation is output, passage of the sensor cut van is not detected. As a result, since the symbol number reset process of step Se2612 in the motor control process is not performed, the symbol number exceeds the maximum value "19" and is updated to "20" in step Se2615. Even if the value of the symbol number becomes "20", the value of the symbol offset is updated as before because the counter addition/subtraction process is performed in the next process. In this case, a negative determination is made in Step Se2616, and after confirming that the abnormality is not a variation in the operation of the stepping motor in Step Se2617, the abnormality is treated as a specific event and abnormality processing is executed in Step Se2618. be done. As described above, in the abnormality processing of step Se2618, the acceleration counter is set to the initial value "25", and the acceleration processing is performed again from the next timer interrupt period. Further, in the abnormality processing, processing for setting an error flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The error flag is cleared by, for example, the payout determination process in the reel control process (FIG. 357) at the end of the current game.

FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the first rotation control process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the configuration of the waiting process (step Se5104: NO) is different from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate in the opposite direction until they are stopped (until they rotate for two rounds). 399, and other processes are the same as those in FIG.

That is, when it is determined in Step Se5104 that the total step counter has not reached "4528", the process proceeds to Step Se5117 in this modification. At step Se5117, it is determined whether or not the above error flag is set. If the error flag is not set, the process returns to step Se5104. On the other hand, if the error flag is set in Step Se5117 and it is determined that the specific event has occurred during the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the process proceeds to the second rotation control process in FIG.

Specifically, the process advances to Step Se5205 in FIG. 437 to set a switching flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then to the process of waiting until the total step counter reaches "4528" in Step Se5204. In this case, similarly to the processing in FIG. 401, when the total step counter reaches "4528", the affirmative determination is made in step Se5204, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped and the auxiliary display section 65 is displayed. There will be performances. The switching flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that a specific event has occurred during the execution of the first rotating motion and the switching to the restricted motion has occurred.

If an affirmative determination is made in step Se5204, it is determined in step Se5206 whether or not the switching flag is set, and if not set, a second loop command is output to the display control device 81 in step Se5207. Execute the process. In this case, as shown in FIG. 438(a1), the reels 32L, 32M, 32R continue to rotate in opposite directions, and the second loop effect is assisted as shown in FIG. 438(b1). It is executed by the display unit 65 . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se5206 that the switching flag is set, processing for outputting the third loop command to the display control device 81 is executed in step Se5208. The display control device 81 performs control so that a loop effect different from the second loop effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like based on the reception of the third loop command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 438(a2), while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continue to rotate in the opposite directions, as shown in FIG. In the loop performance, the auxiliary display part 65 executes the third loop performance in which the color of the aura worn by the soldier's character is different.

After executing the process of step Se5207 or step Se5208, in steps Se5209 to Se5212, the process for executing the start operation effect and the loop lottery are executed. Then, in step Se5213, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery is won.

If the loop lottery is won, the process advances to step Se5214 to determine whether or not the switch flag is set. If the switching flag is not set, a process of outputting a second start effect command to the display control device 81 is executed in step Se5215. In this case, as shown in FIG. 438(b2), the second start effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se5214 that the switching flag is set, a process of outputting the third start effect command to the display control device 81 is executed in step Se5216. The display control device 81 performs control so that a start effect different from the second start effect is executed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like based on the reception of the third start effect command. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 438(b4), for example, a character with an aura is added to the soldier character displayed in the second start effect, as if wearing an aura. The third start effect is executed on the auxiliary display part 65. - 特許庁

After executing the process of Step Se5215 or Se5216, the AT set counter is incremented by 1 in Step Se5217, the total step counter is cleared to 0 in Step Se5218, and then the process returns to Step Se5204. In FIG. 437, the processes of steps Se5201 to Se5203 and steps Se5219 to Se5221 are the same as the processes of steps Se3101 to Se3103 and steps Se3114 to Se3116, and thus description thereof is omitted.

That is, when a specific event such as a reel step-out occurs while each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotating, "25" is reset to the rotation counter of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel control processing as described above. It is input and re-acceleration processing is executed. When such a specific event occurs during the execution of the first rotation operation, a process of switching from the first rotation operation to the limited operation is executed, the total step counter reaches "4528", and the rotation has been performed exactly two times from the start of rotation. Even if the timing comes, the stop command process is not executed. As a result, along with the re-acceleration process, the stop timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the first rotation can be reset, the positional relationship of the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be re-obtained, and the acceleration can be adjusted. It is possible to reduce the processing load without the need for separate adjustment.

In addition, when switching from the first rotational motion to the restricted motion midway as described above, the display effect corresponding to the restricted motion is made different from the display effect when the restricted motion is executed from the beginning. Specifically, instead of the second loop effect and the second start effect, the third loop effect and the third start effect are executed. By doing so, it becomes possible for the player to clearly grasp that the mode of the rotating motion has been switched in the middle, so as not to make the player misunderstand that the chance to add the extra bonus or the extra bonus itself has been lost. can be done.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, the location where the second display effect is executed is made different. FIG. 439(a) is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in this modification. In this modified example, in addition to the auxiliary display portion 65 arranged above each reel 32L, 32M, 32R as described above, the game panel 25 arranged in front of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R serves as a second auxiliary display portion. It is configured as a display unit 650 . The second auxiliary display portion 650 is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal device. The display control device 81 controls the display control device 81 to switch to a second state in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are more difficult or invisible to the viewer than in the first state. Note that the auxiliary display portion 65 is also referred to as the first auxiliary display portion 65 due to its relationship with the second auxiliary display portion 650 .

Although detailed description of the process is omitted, the operation instruction effect is executed on the first auxiliary display section 65. For example, when the second regame winning is established in a specific mode, the reels 32L, 32M, At the timing when the stop operation of 32R is performed (specifically, the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released in the final stop operation), the first stop effect is performed on the first auxiliary display portion 65. In this way, when the second replay winning is established in a non-specific manner, the second auxiliary display section 650 displays the second To perform a performance at the time of stop.

Then, as shown in FIG. 439(b1), for example, when the first rotation motion is executed in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the first display is displayed on the first auxiliary display portion 65 as described above. perform the performance. On the other hand, when the limiting operation is executed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the display control device 81 causes the second auxiliary display section 650 to display the second Control so that the display effect is executed. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which the restricted operation is being performed become invisible or difficult to be visually recognized from the front by the second display effect being performed on the second auxiliary display section 650, It is possible to make it difficult for the user to feel a sense of incongruity that the limiting operation is being performed at 32M and 32R instead of the first rotating operation.

When the second display effect is executed in the second auxiliary display portion 650, it is preferable that the first auxiliary display portion 65 performs an effect different from the first display effect and the second display effect.

By executing the second display effect in the second auxiliary display section 650, the visibility of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is reduced and the degree of attention to the second display effect is improved. In addition to executing the second display effect in the first auxiliary display portion 65, another effect is executed in the second auxiliary display portion 650, thereby reducing the visibility of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. may be In this case, as another effect to be executed on the second auxiliary display section 650, a character imitating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed, and the character displays a specific type of stop result as a display effect, The first rotation motion may be displayed as a display effect.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the timing of two rotations in the first rotation operation, the stopping numbers of the first specific mode and the second specific mode can be reproduced with a simple process. Although it is configured to appear, the timing to stop is not limited to the above, and may be timing that is an integral multiple of the rotation period (rotation period) for one round. Further, for example, the symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged so that when the reels are stopped at the timing of rotating the reels by a half circle or the like from the stopping pattern of the specific pattern, a specific pattern of stopping pattern with a different pattern number appears. When it does, it is good also as a structure which stops at the timing which only half rotation etc. rotated. In this case, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the stopping dots of a specific mode with the same symbol with different symbol numbers appear halfway around, for example, if a mode in which the "White 7" symbols are aligned in the horizontal direction is taken as a particular mode, " Different patterns with different pattern numbers, such as a pattern in which the red 7” patterns are aligned in the horizontal direction appears as a specific pattern in a half circle, etc., or a second specific pattern appears in a half circle, etc. from the above first specific pattern. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a specific type of stop result appears in a half circle or the like. Further, when the first rotation operation is started from a state in which the first specific mode and the second specific mode are stopped in the middle stage, the first specific mode and the second specific mode are stopped in the middle stage. Or it may be configured to stop at the timing of reaching the lower stage (timing shifted forward or backward by one symbol from the timing of the lap), and the symbol that was stopped in the upper stage is stopped again in the middle or lower stage. It may be configured such that there is a deviation between the previous stop position and the stop position at the time of re-stop. If the stop roll before the first rotation operation and the stop roll to appear after the first rotation operation are different, an operation instruction presentation is provided to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 so as to obtain the stop roll before the first rotation operation. It is preferable that the configuration is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, when the stop number before the first rotation operation and the stop number to appear after the first rotation operation are different, the number of symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R ( 20) may be stopped at the timing of additionally rotating the period of the integral multiple of the number divided by 20). For example, if the stop roll before the first rotation and the stop roll that appears after the first rotation are deviated by one symbol, then the rotation cycle is stopped at the timing of the additional rotation of one symbol. It is good to have a configuration that allows Note that the rotation cycle includes 0 rounds, and for example, the first rotation operation includes a mode of rotating by one symbol.

(2) On the premise that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped at the timing when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have rotated two times in the first rotation operation, and the first loop effect is executed, the timing when the reels have rotated two times in the limited operation. However, the timing of executing the first loop effect in the first rotating motion and the timing of executing the second loop effect in the limiting motion may be different. In one rotation operation, the first loop effect is executed at the timing of two revolutions, while the second loop effect in the limit operation may be executed at the timing of one revolution. The timing at which the second loop effect is executed in the action may be a timing different from an integral multiple of the rotation period for one round.

(3) In the first rotation operation and the limit operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated in the opposite direction, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be rotated in the forward direction. A configuration may be adopted in which a mode of rotating and a mode of rotating in the forward direction are included. For example, from the first specific mode or the second specific mode, rotate in the opposite direction in the first rotation operation to make the first specific mode or the second specific mode appear again, and then based on the operation of the start lever 41 or the like. , it may be rotated in the forward direction to cause the first specific mode or the second specific mode to appear again, and then, based on the operation of the start lever 41 or the like, it may be rotated in the reverse direction and again rotated in the second mode. A configuration in which one specific mode or a second specific mode appears may be employed. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which rotation to a forward direction and rotation to a reverse direction are performed randomly. Also, the number of AT mode sets added to each loop lottery is different. In addition, it may be configured to change whether to rotate in the forward direction or in the reverse direction according to the advantage of the privilege to be notified. For example, a first number (for example, 2) is added. is performed, while rotating in the opposite direction when an advantageous privilege is given, a second number less than the first number (for example, 1) is added to the set, etc., which is more disadvantageous than in the opposite direction When a special privilege is given, it may be configured to rotate in the forward direction.

In this case, since the execution of the stop control is restricted in the limited operation, switching between the reverse direction and the forward direction is performed in the first rotation operation, while switching between the reverse direction and the forward direction is performed in the limited operation. A configuration may be adopted in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are temporarily stopped even in the restricted operation, and then switching between the reverse direction and the normal direction may be performed. Incidentally, the timing for switching between the reverse direction and the normal direction in the limited operation is the operation timing of the start lever 41 and the timing when the total step counter reaches "8000". It is preferable that the previous stop result does not reappear. It is better to adjust the timing so that the rolled number does not reappear.

Further, when switching between the forward direction and the reverse direction is performed as described above, the first display effect and the second display effect may also be configured to change the effect mode in accordance with the switching of the rotation direction.

(4) In the first rotation operation and the limit operation, after the acceleration counter becomes "0" and the constant speed rotation is reached, the constant speed state is maintained, but the speed may be changed. In this case, for example, in the limiting operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped but decelerated (for example, decelerated to 1/2) at the timing when the stop control is performed in the case of the first rotation operation. ) configuration.

(5) In the first rotation operation and the limit operation, the total step counter is used to control the timing of stop control, and the timing of switching the display effect is grasped by outputting a loop command, etc., but the symbol number in the reel during rotation is used. It is also possible to comprehend the timing of performing stop control and the timing of switching the display effect based on. Even in this case, at least the execution of a part of the control (stop control) in the first rotation operation is restricted in the limit operation, thereby reducing the control load of the rotation operation in the limit operation. In addition, it is possible to expect the effect of reducing the sense of incongruity due to the difference in the rotation motion and the effect of compensating for the presentation effect of the rotation motion by the display presentation.

(6) Acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, etc., based on the symbol number, etc., when the stop roll before the spinning action is not in the first specific mode or the second specific mode, but in a non-specific mode, etc. may be configured to perform the rotation operation to stop again in the first specific mode or the second specific mode after adjusting the . In this case, in the case of the first specific mode or the second specific mode, control for adjustment of acceleration or the like is not performed, and stop control is performed just at the timing when the specific number of laps is performed, thereby performing the first specific mode. While performing the above-described first rotating motion for reappearing the mode and the second specific mode, if the first specific mode and the second specific mode are not achieved, the control for adjusting the acceleration and the like is executed, In the case of the first rotating motion, it is preferable to perform stop control at the timing when stop control is performed, and to perform the rotating motion to reappear the first specific mode and the second specific mode. In contrast to the rotation operation that executes control for adjustment of acceleration, etc., the rotation operation that does not execute control for adjustment such as acceleration (first rotation operation) is a rotation operation in which execution of control for adjustment such as acceleration is limited. It is also possible to understand By setting the display effects corresponding to at least these rotational motions to be different from each other, it is expected that the discomfort due to the difference in the rotational motions will be reduced, or that the effects of the rotational motions will be compensated for by the display effects. It is possible.

(7) It is configured to execute the spinning motion at the start of the next game according to the stop result of the game in which the additional winning is made, but the configuration may be such that the spinning motion is executed at the start of the game in which the additional winning is made. good. In this case, for example, at the start of the game in which the additional prize is won, an operation instruction effect or the like is executed, and a game of stopping the stop rolls of the first specific mode or the second specific mode is executed as a pseudo game. Then, according to the stop result in the pseudo game, it is configured to determine whether the mode of the rotation operation is the first rotation operation or the limit operation, etc., and the rotation effect by these first rotation operation and the limit operation A configuration may be adopted in which the game in which the above-mentioned additional win is won is started later. It should be noted that the pseudo-game is a game in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and since it is a pseudo-stop, the stop This is different from the normal game in that the winning determination such as payout determination processing is not executed based on.

Also, the description has been made on the premise that the normal game starts after the first rotating motion and the limiting motion are finished, but after the first rotating motion and the limiting motion are finished, a pseudo-game or another rotating motion is performed continuously. It is good also as a structure which is started. In this case, random rotation control is performed after the first rotation operation, while random rotation control is not performed after the limit operation, thereby making the mode of rotation start control after both rotation operations different. It is good also as a structure which changes the aspect of the rotation start control in the pseudo-game which is performed continuously after these rotation operations, or another rotation operation.

(8) When the rotating motion is performed, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like may be configured to notify that a pseudo-game is in progress. That is, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which winning determination is not performed in the spinning operation are stopped, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which winning determination is normally performed are stopped by the player or the manager of the game hall. It is preferable to configure the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify the operator that the information can be grasped.

(9) When the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed, together with the limit action. Although the second start effect and the second loop effect are executed, the fourth stop effect may be executed, and the first start effect and the first loop effect may be executed together with the first rotation motion. Further, when the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed and the second limit action is performed. 2 It may be configured to execute the second start effect or the second loop effect together with the rotating motion based on the second special turntable, or to execute the first start effect or the first loop effect together with the rotating motion based on the second special turntable. good too.

(10) When the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed and the restriction action is performed. Although it is configured to execute the second start performance and the second loop performance, when the first operation instruction performance is executed, the third replay prize is established in the second specific mode instead of the first specific mode. In this case, the fourth stopping effect may be executed, and the second start effect or the second loop effect may be executed together with the limiting action. It may be configured to execute the first loop effect, or may be configured to execute the second start effect or the second loop effect together with the rotation operation based on the second special rotary table as the limiting operation, or the rotation based on the second special rotary table. The configuration may be such that the first start effect or the first loop effect is executed along with the action.

(11) When the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed, together with the limit action. Although it is configured to execute the second start effect and the second loop effect, when the third replay winning prize is established in a non-specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed, and the second start effect and the second start effect are executed along with the limit operation. The configuration may be such that the second loop effect is executed, the fourth stop effect is executed, and the first start effect and the first loop effect are executed along with the first rotation motion, and the fourth stop effect is executed. Alternatively, as the limiting action, the second start effect or the second loop effect may be executed together with the rotation motion based on the second special rotary table. It is good also as composition which performs production.

(12) When the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second replay prize is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed, together with the limit action. Although the second start performance and the second loop performance are executed, when the first operation instruction performance is executed, the second re-game winning is established not in the first specific mode but in the non-specific mode. Alternatively, the fourth stop effect may be executed, and the second start effect or the second loop effect may be executed together with the limiting action. It may be configured to execute a first loop effect, or a fourth stop effect may be executed, and a second start effect or a second loop effect may be executed along with a rotation motion based on a second special rotary table as a limiting motion. , the first start effect or the first loop effect may be executed together with the rotating motion based on the second special turntable.

(13) When the second operation instruction effect is executed, if the second replay win is established in the first specific mode instead of the second specific mode, the fourth stop effect is executed. , the configuration may be such that the first stop effect is executed, or the second stop effect or the third stop effect is executed.

(14) In the first rotation operation, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are simultaneously stopped at the timing of exactly two rotations, thereby reappearing the first specific mode and the second specific mode. The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may have different stop timings. Specifically, for example, the first reel is stopped when it has rotated two times, the second reel is stopped when it has rotated three times, and the third reel is stopped when it has rotated four times. You may do so.

In this case, it is determined whether or not it is a stop dot that constitutes the first specific mode or the second specific mode (in the case of the first or not) is determined for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and while the constituent reels with the stop numbers are stopped, the constituent reels with the non-stop numbers are not stopped. That is, as the first specific mode as described above, when the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle stage of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the first reel is stopped at the timing after it has rotated two times. , The second reel is stopped when it rotates three times, and the third reel is stopped when it rotates four times. While it is stopped, when the third reel is in a non-specific mode in which the "white 7" symbol does not stop, the first reel is stopped at the timing of two rotations, and the second reel is stopped three times. A configuration may be adopted in which the third reel is stopped at the timing when it rotates by 10 minutes, and the third reel is not stopped even when it comes to the timing when it rotates by 4 turns. As for the display effect, it is preferable to execute the first display effect until the stop control of the first and second reels, and switch to the second display effect when the third reel is not stopped.

(15) Restricted actions based on the second re-game winning, fourth re-game winning, and fifth re-game winning in non-specific mode and display effects associated therewith, and restricted actions based on the first re-game winning and display effects associated therewith may be configured to be different from each other. In the former, there is a high possibility that the stop switches 42 to 44 were operated in the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning in order to establish the second re-game winning in at least a specific mode, while in the latter In the first place, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation order different from the operation order corresponding to the second re-game winning, and there is a high possibility that the second re-game winning is not established in a specific mode. Therefore, in the former case, for example, the restricting action of continuing the rotation in the opposite direction and the second display effect are executed, while in the latter case, the rotation action and the accompanying display effect itself are executed. may be configured to limit the

(16) In the case of a stop roll different from the stop rolls of the first specific mode and the second specific mode, the rotation in the opposite direction is continued as a restricted action and the second display effect is executed. However, in the case of a stop roll different from the stop rolls of the first specific mode and the second specific mode, as the limiting action, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the execution of the accompanying display effect itself are performed. In this case, if the rotation operation is executed, a freeze effect may be performed to limit the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R only during the execution period required for the rotation operation, and the freeze effect may also be performed. Instead of executing the process, the rotation start process for the current game may be executed based on the operation of the start lever 41 as in the normal case.

(17) As an example of the opportunity to perform the rotating effect, the case of winning the AT mode additional lottery has been described as an example, but the opportunity to perform the rotating effect is not limited to this. For example, winning the AT mode transition lottery It may be the case, the presence or absence of the AT mode set continuation may be notified, or the rotation effect may be performed regardless of the game lottery result, such as when the setting suggestion lottery is won. good.

(18) The aspects of the first display effect and the second display effect are examples, and are not limited to the above. For example, a plurality of performance patterns of the first display performance and the second display performance are provided, and one performance pattern is selected from the plurality of performance patterns by lottery or the like and executed when the first rotating motion or the limiting motion is performed. Alternatively, the lottery for the production pattern may be configured such that the higher the loop rate, the easier the predetermined production pattern is executed, and the lower the loop rate, the more likely the specific production pattern is executed, depending on the number of loops. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect patterns selected accordingly are different. In this case, a plurality of effect patterns in the first display effect and a plurality of effect patterns in the second display effect may include a common effect pattern. Furthermore, the plurality of performance patterns in the first display performance and the plurality of performance patterns in the second display performance are all common performance patterns, and the performance patterns that are likely to be selected are different between the first display performance and the second display performance. may be configured.

(19) In random rotation, the period from the start of rotation of the first reel to the start of rotation of the second reel and the period from the start of rotation of the second reel to the start of rotation of the third reel are set to be the same. However, these periods may be different, and the total period of both periods (the period until the standby counter becomes "0" from "1000") waits until the stop command process is performed in the limited operation ( It is preferable that the configuration waits until the total step counter changes from "8000" to "9000").

(20) In random rotation, the rotation start timing of some reels may be shifted. Further, instead of the configuration in which the rotation start order is determined by lottery, a configuration in which rotation is started in a predetermined rotation start order may be employed.

(21) After executing the first rotation operation, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate under random rotation control, while after the limiting operation, the reels 32L, 32L, 32L, 32L, 32M, 32R are started to rotate without executing the random rotation control. Although the configuration is such that the rotation of 32M and 32R is started, the configuration may be such that random rotation control may be performed even after execution of the limiting operation. For example, if the non-specific mode or other stop roll that triggered the restricted action is a stop roll including a reel in which the "white 7" symbol is stopped in the middle row (second replay win in non-specific mode, , 4th replay winning prize, 5th replay winning prize), while random rotation control is performed, the reel with the “white 7” symbol stopped in the middle stage, such as a non-specific mode that triggered the restriction action. Random rotation control may not be performed when the stop result does not include (first replay win).

(22) Although random rotation control is performed in both the first rotation operation and the limit operation, random rotation control after the first rotation operation and random rotation control after the limit operation may be different. For example, in the random rotation control after the first rotation operation, the period for shifting the rotation start timings of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first period, whereas in the random rotation control after the limit operation, each reel 32L , 32M, and 32R may be set to a second period different from the first period (for example, shorter than the first period).

(23) The random rotation control is configured to avoid rotation in a specific mode by shifting the rotation start timing of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, but the acceleration of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is varied. It is good also as a structure which avoids rotating in a specific aspect by this. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be configured to start rotating at the same time. Also, after performing the first rotation operation, the period from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and after performing the limiting operation The end timing of the limiting operation is set so that the period from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the same or substantially the same. do it.

(24) In the first rotation operation and the limit operation, basically all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are configured to rotate in the same rotation manner. Or it is good also as a structure with which a part differs. For example, in the first rotation motion and the limit motion, the rotation speed of the left reel 32L may differ from the rotation speed of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In this case, it may be configured such that specific information is suggested to the player by reels that rotate in different manners. The specific information may be the loop rate or the number of remaining AT mode sets.

(25) When the sum of the number of games in the current advantageous section AG and the number of games for the remaining number of sets in AT mode exceeds or will exceed the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (1500); If the total of the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY and the planned increase number calculated from the number of AT mode remaining games exceeds or will exceed the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous zone, Even when the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode according to the operation instruction presentation, the rotation presentation may be performed by the limit operation instead of the rotation presentation by the first rotation operation.

(26) Even if the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode or the third re-game winning is established in the second specific mode, not the first rotating motion but the limiting motion is performed. With a configuration in which the second display effect may be executed, when the stop roll of the first specific mode or the second specific mode is stopped, the number of remaining games in the AT mode and the executed AT mode The ratio of execution of the limiting action and the second display effect instead of the first rotating action and the first display effect may be different depending on the current game situation such as the number of games.

(27) Although both the first rotation operation and the limiting operation are configured to be controlled using the same special rotary table, they may be configured to be controlled using different rotary tables. In this case, the acceleration period and the excitation data referred to in at least part of the control period should be common to both rotary tables.

(28) The first rotating motion and the limiting motion may be switched each time the loop lottery is won. That is, the first rotating motion is performed by the first rotating motion, and when it is determined that the loop lottery has been won, the rotating motion by the restricted motion is performed, and when it is determined that the loop lottery has been won, A configuration in which the rotation operation is switched such that the rotation operation is performed by the first rotation operation may be employed. In this case, for example, a lottery may be used to determine which rotation operation is to be performed each time a loop lottery is held. The rotation operation may end at .

(29) When a decision is made to perform a rotation effect by the first rotation operation, and the front door 12 is opened or the power is cut off, the occurrence of a specific event is considered to be the target of the above decision after recovery. However, for example, switching from the power-on state to the power-off state may be set as a specific event, or the occurrence of an error in the hopper device 51 may be set as a specific event. The specific event may be the specific event, or the clearing of the RAM 106 due to the change of the set value or the like may be the specific event. Further, the specific event may be that the player performs a specific operation such as the operation of the settlement switch 59 or the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 . Furthermore, in the case where the slot machine 10 is provided with a movable accessory for effect, the specific event may be the action of the movable accessory, or the occurrence of some effect may be the specific event. In these cases, a determination is made to perform the rotation effect by the first rotation motion, and as one of the specific events occurs, after returning, the rotation effect that is the target of the determination is not the first rotation motion, but the restricted motion. It should be configured to be executed in

(30) After the decision to perform the rotation effect by the first rotation operation is made, if a specific event such as when the front door 12 is opened or when the power is cut off, after returning, the above-mentioned Although the rotation effect to be determined is executed not by the first rotation motion but by the limiting motion, after the recovery, the symbol positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are shifted even though the specific event occurs. If not, the first rotation operation may be performed. Specifically, after starting rotation as the first rotation operation, when there is no deviation between the symbol number and offset counter updated during rotation and the symbol number and offset counter grasped before rotation start. , the first rotation operation is continued assuming that there is no deviation in the symbol positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the symbol numbers and the offset counter updated during rotation and the symbol numbers grasped before the start of rotation are displayed. and the offset counter, it is preferable to switch to the limit operation (stop command processing is not performed) assuming that the symbol positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have deviated. .

(31) In the case where the re-acceleration process is executed due to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R being stepped out during the first rotation operation and the error flag is set, the operation is switched to the limited operation. It is only necessary to switch to the restricted operation when a specific event occurs to execute the re-acceleration process. The specific event may be an event in which the vehicle returns and the re-acceleration process is performed. Further, even when the front door 12 is opened, it may be configured to switch to the restricted operation.

(32) In the configuration where the second auxiliary display section 650 is provided, the second display effect is executed in the second auxiliary display section 650 when performing the restricted operation. Any configuration may be used as long as the visibility of 32L, 32M, and 32R is lowered, and after the configuration is such that the first auxiliary display portion 65 executes the second display effect, the second auxiliary display portion 650 performs another display effect. , or both the first auxiliary display portion 65 and the second auxiliary display portion 650 may execute the second display effect.

(33) Although the second display effect is performed on the second auxiliary display section 650 when the restricted operation is performed, the visibility of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reduced. The mode of reducing the visibility of is not limited to the above. For example, in the case of the first rotation operation, the backlight that illuminates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from the inside and the front light that illuminates the reels 32R from the outside are turned ON, but in the case of the limited operation, they are turned OFF. The visibility of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be lowered by

(34) The position of the second auxiliary display portion 650 is not limited to the above. At least, if the display area is larger than that of the first auxiliary display section 65, or the like, so as to easily attract the player's attention, the second display effect can compensate for the effect of the limiting action.

(34) In the rotation effect, the effects associated with the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed in the first display effect (first loop effect, first start effect) or second display effect (second loop effect) on the auxiliary display section 65. However, the effect associated with the rotating motion is not limited to the display effect by the auxiliary display unit 65, and may be a sound effect output from the speaker 64, or other effects. An effect may be provided by a movable accessory or the like, or an effect may be provided by a backlight that illuminates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from the inside or a front light that illuminates the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from the outside.

(35) Although the operation instruction rendering is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 on the display control device 81 side, it may be configured to be performed by the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side, or may be performed by both. .

(36) When the first operation instruction effect is executed, the case where the second re-game winning is established in the first specific mode, and the case where it is not (the second re-game winning case, etc.), and when the second operation instruction effect is executed, the case where the third re-game winning is established in the second specific mode, and the case where it is not (the third re-game winning in the non-specific mode is established, etc.), the benefits (replay) to be given are the same, but different benefits may be given.

(37) Although the 1st BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(38) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(39) Although the same lottery table is used in the first BB state and the second BB state to form the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to achieve different net increase numbers.

(40) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(41) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, such that the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is restricted while the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is permitted in the game in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(42) The 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB to win, and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB to win. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(43) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(44) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(45) Although the upper limit of the number of games in the CZ mode is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like. Also, although the upper limit of the number of games in the preparation mode is uniformly set to 40 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(46) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state neither increase nor decrease. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(47) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(48) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(49) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(50) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a game machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(51) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The following features aA group to feature aE group are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly the first embodiment α to the first embodiment δ, modifications thereof, or are extracted from a combination of

<Characteristics aA group>
Features aA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the revolving bodies so as to perform a specific action that is a rendition action control using the revolving bodies;
Based on a predetermined decision opportunity, transition determination means (executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) that executes transition determination that enables transition to an advantageous state (AT mode) that is advantageous to the player function) and
The result of transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result (AT mode transition winning) that can be shifted to the advantageous state, and the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition correspondence result (normal reply A 1st advantageous transition means for shifting to the advantageous state in the case of ~C) (function for executing processing for starting AT mode based on second and third replay winnings by main controller 101);
The specific drive control means for performing the specific operation when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result and the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the transition correspondence result. (a function of executing a process for performing a first rotation effect and a second rotation effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101) for controlling the
a second advantageous transition means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode with a rotation effect by the main controller 101) for transitioning to the advantageous state when the specific action is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal operation is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of, when the result of determination of transition to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is a transition result, the lottery result of the game is If it is a transition correspondence result, the state is shifted to an advantageous state, so that the result of the transition determination becomes the transition result and the game lottery result is a set of the transition correspondence result, thereby shifting to the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a transition to an advantageous state without the result of the transition determination being a transition result, and it is possible to prevent the transition to an advantageous state just by obtaining a transition result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player look forward to transitioning to an advantageous state while avoiding a decrease in interest in the result of the lottery for each game.

On the other hand, as described above, even if the transition result is obtained, if the transition to the advantageous state does not occur until the game lottery result becomes the transition response result, depending on the winning probability of the transition response result, etc., the transition result After that, there is a possibility that the transition to an advantageous state will be waited endlessly, which can be a factor of sluggishness in the game. On the other hand, if the state is automatically shifted to the advantageous state, the significance of making the transition to the advantageous state occur together with the result of the lottery will be lost.

Therefore, if the result of the game lottery is not the result of the transition corresponding to the result of the transition, the specific operation, which is the performance operation control using the revolving body, is executed to shift to the advantageous state. Thus, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state in a mode imitating a slot machine game in which a privilege is awarded depending on the number of stops of each rotating body, etc., and the result of the lottery of the game is affected. While avoiding a decrease in interest, it is possible to preferably solve the inconvenience of not being able to shift to an advantageous state as described above.

Note that the above configuration does not deny that the specific action is executed when the result of the lottery means is the transition correspondence result. In order to clarify the point, for example, the above "specifying means" may be defined as "the result of the transition determination by the transition determining means is the transition result, and regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means, the specific action Specific means for controlling the specific drive control means so that is performed (function for executing the process for performing the first rotation effect and the second rotation effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101)" good.

In addition, the ``specific action that is the production action control using the revolving body'' may be expressed as ``the specific action in which the start or progress of the normal action is limited'', and such a change in expression may be performed by other features or The same is true for other feature groups.

Feature aA2. The specifying means, after the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, when the lottery result by the lottery means in a predetermined specific number of games is not the transition correspondence result. , the game machine according to feature aA1, wherein the drive control of the specific drive control means can be executed so that the specific action is performed.

According to the above configuration, priority is given to shifting to an advantageous state based on the result of the game being the transition correspondence result, and the specific action is performed when the transition correspondence result is not obtained even after playing a specific number of games. It becomes the structure which is made to move to an advantageous state by breaking. In this way, if priority is given to shifting to an advantageous state based on the transition response result, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience when the transition response result is not obtained without reducing the interest in the result of the game lottery. It becomes possible.

Feature aA3. The lottery means executes the lottery so that the transition corresponding result is obtained with a probability of 1/predetermined number in each game,
The gaming machine according to feature aA2, wherein the specific number is set as a number larger than the predetermined number.

According to the above configuration, if the transition correspondence result is not obtained over the number of games larger than the denominator of the probability of the transition correspondence result, the specific action is performed and the state is shifted to the advantageous state. By doing so, basically, it is a game premised on shifting to an advantageous state by winning as a result of transition correspondence, and transitioning to an advantageous state through a specific action is only an auxiliary role. is clarified. Therefore, it is possible not to reduce the expectation that the lottery result of each game will be the result corresponding to the transition.

Feature aA4. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. The game according to any one of the features aA1 to aA3, characterized in that the transition to the advantageous state is made when the pattern combination for transition (the second and third replay result wins) stops. machine.

According to the above configuration, in the case of shifting to an advantageous state as a transition correspondence result, when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition correspondence result stops at an effective position in the game with the transition correspondence result, the A transition to an advantageous state will occur. In other words, even if the transition correspondence result is obtained, the transition to the advantageous state does not occur unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped. By doing so, in order to shift to an advantageous state, it is not enough for the game result to be the transition corresponding result, and the operation of the stop operation means is used to establish the winning of the transition corresponding result. In addition, the transition to an advantageous state requires the intervention of the player, and through the need for the intervention of the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature aA5. The specifying means controls the specific driving control means so as to cause, as the specific action, a specific situation in which the pattern combination for transition exists at a specific position set to be visible through the display section. The game machine according to feature aA4, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the stop result that can be visually recognized through the display unit is the same in the case of transitioning to the advantageous state as a result of the transition response and the case of the transition to the advantageous state due to the specific action being performed. becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of simulating the transition to both advantageous states.

Feature aA6. The gaming machine according to feature aA5, wherein the specifying means can control the specific drive control means so that the pattern combination for transition stops or temporarily stops at the specific position in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, not only does the pattern combination for transition exist at the specific position, but also the pattern combination for transition temporarily stops at the specific position. , the stop roll becomes the same, and the effect of making both transitions similar is enhanced.

In addition, the above-mentioned "stop" means a state in which the orbiting of the orbiting body is completed and the orbiting body does not operate. It means a state that is different from a completely non-moving state, including the state of vibrating, swaying, and moving in a fixed position. This point also applies to other features expressed using the "stop" or "temporary stop".

Feature aA7. The specifying means controls the specific drive so as to create a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position set to a position visible through the display unit for at least a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA6, characterized in that means can be controlled.

According to the above configuration, a special situation occurs in which a specific combination of symbols is stopped at a specific position for a predetermined period of time, and the game shifts to an advantageous state. You can enhance the effect of resembling.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to the feature aA5, it is preferable to limit the "specific pattern combination" to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature aA8. After the normal operation is started, if a predetermined specific period has not elapsed before the next normal operation is started, means for waiting for the start of the next normal operation (by the main controller 101 function to set the weight in the rotation start process),
The specifying means executes the specified action before the normal action,
The gaming machine according to feature aA7, characterized in that, by setting the predetermined period, the period from when the specific action is started until when the normal action is started is longer than or equal to the specific period. .

According to the above configuration, when the specific action is performed and the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the specific pattern combination is stopped, and the state is maintained for a predetermined period, so that after the specific action is started The period until the start of the next normal action is longer than the period until the rotation of the next game in the case where a win as a result of transition correspondence occurs and the transition to the advantageous state occurs. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of making the specific action similar to the normal action, and the effect that is executed when a prize is won as a result of transition correspondence can be performed even when the specific pattern combination is stopped in the specific action. It becomes possible to divert it easily.

Feature aA9. The specifying means stops or temporarily stops the revolving body corresponding to the operation of the stop operation means in the specified action, thereby setting a specific position that is visible through the display unit. A first stop means (a first stop means capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped occurs during the rotation performance by the main control device 101 is handled based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the looping body is stopped or temporarily stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means also in the specific action, as in the normal action. By doing this, the effect of mimicking the case of transitioning to an advantageous state by winning a transition response result is dramatically enhanced, and even if the transition response result is not won, the satisfaction of winning an advantageous state through one's own operation is enhanced. can be provided.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to the feature aA5, it is preferable to limit the "specific pattern combination" to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature aA10. The specifying means stops the revolving body even if the stop operation means is not operated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the specified action, thereby causing the rotating body to reach the specified position. A second stopping means capable of controlling the specific drive control means so as to cause a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped. A gaming machine according to feature aA9, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of controlling the stop of the corresponding reel regardless of the reel.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific pattern combination is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means even in the specific action, if the stop operation means is not operated, it is stopped with the passage of time. A game machine capable of preventing an event such as never-stopping from occurring, and respecting the will of a player without forcing a player who does not want to operate a stop operation means in a specific action to do so. can be

Note that the above configuration may be limited as follows.

"When a predetermined period of time elapses after the specific action is started, the specifying means stops all the circulating bodies that are not stopped even if the stop operation means is not operated, A second stop means (a stop switch 42 with the lapse of time during rotation performance by the main controller 101) capable of controlling the specific drive control means so as to cause a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position. The gaming machine according to feature aA9, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of controlling the stop of the corresponding reel regardless of the operation of 1 to 44".

By doing so, all the revolving bodies will stop with the lapse of time, and it is possible to smoothly realize the transition to the advantageous state by the specific action.

Feature aA11. In the specific action, when a predetermined operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) different from the stop operation means is operated, the specifying means makes the corresponding rotation even if the stop operation means is not operated. By stopping the body, a third stopping means capable of controlling the specific drive control means (during rotation performance by the main controller 101) so as to create a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination stops or temporarily stops at the specific position The gaming machine according to feature aA9 or feature aA10, further comprising a function of executing a process for controlling the stop of the reels based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific pattern combination is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means even in the specific action, when the predetermined operation means different from the stop operation means is operated, the stop operation means is activated. Since the revolving body is made to stop even if it is not operated, an event that it does not stop forever does not occur, and a player who does not want to operate the stop operation means in a specific action is forced to do so. Therefore, the game machine can respect the intention of the player.

Note that the above configuration may be limited as follows.

"The specifying means, when a predetermined operation means different from the stop operation means is operated in the specified action, stops all of the rotating bodies that are not stopped, thereby causing the specified pattern combination to be placed at the specified position." A third stop means (reel stop control based on the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56 during the rotation effect by the main control device 101) that can control the specific drive control means so that the specific drive control means is stopped or temporarily stopped The gaming machine according to feature aA9 or feature aA10, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for

By doing so, the number of times of operation can be reduced by operating a predetermined operation means rather than by operating each of the stop operation means corresponding to a plurality of winding bodies, and the number of times of operation can be reduced in a specific operation. Even a player who finds operation troublesome can easily stop a specific combination of patterns.

Feature aA12. In spite of the fact that the specifying means has stopped or temporarily stopped the revolving body in the specific action, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position set at a position where the specific pattern combination can be visually recognized through the display unit. If not stopped, specific processing execution means capable of executing specific processing corresponding to this stop or temporary stop (step Sa3214 to step Sa3228 by the main controller 101, step Sa3301 to step Sa3306 by the display control device 81 A gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA11, characterized by comprising a function of executing the process of

According to the above configuration, in the specific action of stopping or temporarily stopping the specific pattern combination, if the specific pattern combination is not stopped or temporarily stopped even though the orbiting body is stopped or temporarily stopped , the specific process corresponding to it as an error or the like is performed, so that it is possible to appropriately deal with the fact that the specific combination of symbols is not stopped or temporarily stopped.

Incidentally, if the above configuration is applied to the feature aA5, it is preferable to limit the "specific pattern combination" to the "transition pattern combination".

Feature aA13. A specific game is a game to be executed by the specific action by the specific means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the transition corresponding result, the limit means (normal reply A such as step Sa2302 in the rotation effect process by the main controller 101) that can limit the execution of the specific action ˜A function of executing a process of restricting execution of a rotation effect when winning C)).

According to the above configuration, when a game that can be shifted to an advantageous state by the first advantageous transition means and a game that can be shifted to an advantageous state by the second advantageous transition means overlap, the first The configuration is such that priority is given to the transition by the advantageous transition means. In this way, on the assumption that the lottery result of the game becomes the transition target result and the game is expected to shift to an advantageous state, and by making the transition to an advantageous state through a specific action an auxiliary role, the game can be improved. It is possible to avoid losing interest in the lottery result and losing the real pleasure of the slot machine.

Feature aA14. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
A game to be executed by the specific action by the specific means is a specific game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the transition corresponding result, the limit means (normal reply A such as step Sa2302 in the rotation effect process by the main controller 101) that can limit the execution of the specific action ∼ a function of executing a process of restricting execution of a rotation effect when winning C)).

According to the above configuration, in the case of shifting to an advantageous state as a transition correspondence result, when the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition correspondence result stops at an effective position in the game with the transition correspondence result, the A transition to an advantageous state will occur. In other words, even if the transition correspondence result is obtained, the transition to the advantageous state does not occur unless the symbol combination for transition is stopped. By doing so, in order to shift to an advantageous state, it is not enough for the game result to be the transition corresponding result, and the operation of the stop operation means is used to establish the winning of the transition corresponding result. In addition, the player's intervention is required for the transition to the advantageous state.

Moreover, when the game that can be shifted to the advantageous state by the first advantageous transition means and the game that can be shifted to the advantageous state by the second advantageous transition means overlap, the first advantageous transition means is used. Since the transition is given priority, it is assumed that the lottery result of the game becomes the transition correspondence result, and the game is expected to transition to an advantageous state by establishing the winning of the transition correspondence result, and the advantageous state is obtained through a specific action. Even in a game that can cause a shift to a state, the player's operation will not deprive the player of the opportunity to shift to the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to favorably secure the enjoyment of shifting to an advantageous state by the player's operation.

Feature aA15. In the specific game, when execution of the specific action is restricted by the restriction means and the pattern combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, third advantageous transition means capable of shifting to the advantageous state. (The function of limiting the execution of the spinning effect in the case of the normal reply A to C winning in step Sa2302 etc. in the rotating effect processing by the main control device 101, while keeping the AT mode winning flag cleared in the previous game). The gaming machine according to feature aA14, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first advantageous transition means is prioritized over the second advantageous transition means in the specific game, the transition to the advantageous state occurs even if the pattern combination for transition cannot be stopped. It will be. By doing so, for example, in the case where transition response result wins occur continuously, even though the player is unable to achieve transition response result winning, the transition response result winning prize is kept forever. It is possible not to force the target to be aimed, and to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the advantageous state is not started endlessly.

Feature aA16. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
In a situation where the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and when the symbol combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, Setting means for setting the next game of the game as a specific game to be executed the specific action by the specific means (AT mode start in the game won as a result of the AT mode start The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to feature aA15, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for executing a spinning effect in the next game when winning is not established as a result of .

According to the above configuration, even if the transition response result is won, if the transition response result win cannot be established, the transition to the advantageous state will occur with the specific action in the next game. Become. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience such as being unable to establish a win as a result of the transition and thus being unable to transition to an advantageous state indefinitely.

Feature aA17. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
The specifying means is
After the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the next game in the case where the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the transition correspondence result in a predetermined specific number of games is selected. 1 specific game (game after preparation mode), and the first specific means (AT A function of executing a process to perform a rotation effect when the preparation counter becomes 0);
In a situation where the result of transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and when the symbol combination for transition does not stop at the effective position, The game next to the game is a second specific game (game after winning the result for starting AT mode) in which the specific action is to be executed by the specifying means, and the specific action is performed in the second specific game. A second specifying means capable of executing the drive control of the specified drive control means as shown in FIG. function) and
with
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the first specific game is the transition correspondence result, while restricting the execution of the specific action, the lottery result by the lottery means in the second specific game is the transition correspondence result. In this case, the means for permitting the execution of the specific action (restricts the execution of the rotation effect when the final game in the preparation mode in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101 is a normal reply A to C winning, while in the preparation mode the normal In the case where the reply A~C is won and the second replay or the third replay winning is not established in the relevant game, if the next game is the normal reply A~C win, a process to perform the rotation effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA16, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, after the state becomes possible to shift to the advantageous state as a result of the transition, and before the specific number of games are completed, if the winning as a result of the transition is established, the state is shifted to the advantageous state, It is premised that if a transition response result is not won by the time a specific number of games are completed, a transition to an advantageous state occurs with a specific action, and even if the transition response result is won, the transition response result wins If it is not established, the next game is configured to move to an advantageous state with a specific action, and as a result of these transition correspondences, the game following the game in which the prize was not established and the specific number of games are completed. If the result of the lottery for the game that is subject to the execution of a specific action is a transition compatible result, such as a game after a certain number of games have been played, the execution of the specific action is restricted and transition compatible. While an opportunity to establish a win as a result is given, the execution of the specific action is not restricted in the game following the game in which the win was not established as a result of the transition. This is because in the game next to the game in which the transition-response winning result could not be established, the opportunity to establish the transition-response result winning was already given, but the specific number of games was completed. This is due to the fact that in later games, the opportunity to win a prize as a result of transition is not given. In other words, by doing so, it is possible to prevent excessive granting of the opportunity by the specific action while granting the opportunity to establish the win as a result of transition.

Feature aA18. Any of feature aA1 to feature aA17 characterized in that the greater the number of games played from the result of the transition determination to the start of the advantageous state, the more likely the player is to be advantageous. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, after the transition results and the situation becomes possible to cause the transition to the advantageous state, the transition response result is obtained and the transition to the advantageous state is made to look forward to, but the transition to the advantageous state is made. Since the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more advantageous it becomes, so the player wants to avoid the transition-response result. On top of that, since it is possible to transition to an advantageous state with a specific action, it is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of games until winning as a result of transition correspondence, It is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively advantageous.

Feature aA19. The first advantageous transition means, in a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the valid position corresponds to the transition correspondence result. When the pattern combination for transition (the numbers corresponding to the second and third replay wins) stops, the state is shifted to the advantageous state,
In a situation where the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition response result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. stops the pattern combination for transition at the effective position so that the transition to the advantageous state occurs, while the stop operation means is in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. Means for preventing the transition to the advantageous state by not stopping the pattern combination for transition at the effective position when operated (function for executing the process of step Sa4113 by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features aA1 to aA18, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to delay the transition to the advantageous state by operating in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode even if the transition response result is obtained after the transition result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to start the advantageous state at the timing of the player's preference, and as in the feature aA18, the greater the number of games played before the transition to the advantageous state, the more advantageous the player is. By applying it to such a configuration, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as delaying the transition to an advantageous state to obtain an advantage.

Feature aA20. In a situation where the transition determination result by the transition determination means is the transition result, the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the stop operation means is a predetermined operation mode among the second operation modes. When operated by (operation resulting in two frames or more slipping), the specific action is performed by the specific means in the game next to the game in which the transition corresponding result is obtained, thereby shifting to the advantageous state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in a specific operation mode (an operation that results in one slide or less) among the second operation modes, the game following the game in which the transition response result has occurred Characteristic feature aA19 characterized by comprising means (function of executing the process of step Sa4112 by main controller 101) for preventing the specific action from being performed by the specifying means and preventing the transition to the advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, even if the transition to the advantageous state is avoided by not stopping the pattern combination for transition in the second operation mode, in the predetermined operation mode of the second operation mode, In the next game, a specific action occurs and a transition to an advantageous state occurs, and in a specific operation mode, a specific action occurs and a transition to an advantageous state does not occur. By doing so, the player who wants to delay the transition to the advantageous state can complete the next game after performing the second operation mode, hoping that the specific action will not be performed. , it becomes possible to improve the fun of the game.

Feature aA21. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition correspondence result, and the stop operation means is operated in the predetermined operation mode, the predetermined pattern combination is stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means is operated in the above manner. The gaming machine according to feature aA20, wherein the predetermined pattern combination stops at the effective position when operated in a specific operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the stop result for stopping at the effective position is common between the operation in the predetermined operation mode and the operation in the specific operation mode among the second operation modes. Then, depending on whether or not the specific action is performed in the next game, it becomes possible to check the answer as to which operation mode the operation was performed in, and whether or not the specific action is performed in the next game. It is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to

Feature aA22. Any of features aA1 to feature aA21, wherein the specifying means is capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed before the normal action is performed in one game. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed at the start of one game, and the starting operation means can be operated while expecting the specific action to be performed or not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize an amusing game property in which the operation of the starting operation means requires effort.

Feature aA23. Any one of features aA1 to feature aA22, wherein the specifying means is capable of controlling the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed after the normal action is performed in one game. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed at the end of one game, and the user can operate the stop operation means while expecting the specific action to be performed or not to be performed. As a result, it is possible to realize an interesting game property in which force is applied to the operation of the stop operation means.

Feature aA24. The specifying means can control the specific drive control means so that the specific action is performed between the normal actions in one game. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the specific action is executed in the middle of one game, the timing at which the specific action is performed is arbitrary, the boundary between the specific action and the normal action is difficult to understand, and one game is played. It is possible to greatly improve the playability of the game.

Feature aA25. In the game in which the specific action is performed, after the first revolving body stops as the normal action, the specifying means uses the stop result of the first revolving body to determine what the first revolving body is. The gaming machine according to feature aA24, characterized in that it is possible to perform the specific action by a second rotating body that is different and has not yet stopped.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific action is performed in the middle of the game, the stop result actually stopped in the normal action is used for the specific action, so that the specific action gives an impression of the action in the production. It is possible to make it difficult to give, and it is possible to increase the satisfaction given by making a transition to an advantageous state in a specific action.

The inventions described in the features aA1 to aA25 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features aA1 to aA25, any one configuration of the features aA1 to aA25, the features aB1 to aB22, the features aC1 to aC12, the features aD1 to aD8, and the features aE1 to aE9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature aB group>
Features aB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, first specific information output means (AT by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the game machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
When the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result, a specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect operation control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that controls each of the winding bodies so that a specific action that causes a specific situation to occur is performed;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different therefrom to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific situation function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Even when a specific action is performed to create a specific situation in which the combination of symbols is present at a specific position, the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when a specific action is performed to resemble a normal action, it is possible not only to imitate the action of the revolving body, but also to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. . In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

By setting the "specific position" to the "effective position", it is possible to increase the behavior of making the specific action similar to the normal action. This point is the same for other features in which the expressions of "specific position" and "valid position" coexist.

Feature aB2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position, the privilege providing means can provide a privilege corresponding to the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature aB1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specified result wins when the specified combination of symbols stops at the specified position, a specific situation occurs in which the specified combination of symbols is present at the specified position. Since the specific action is performed in this manner, it is possible to give the impression that the specific action is a normal action based on the result of the specific action. The first specific information is output when the specific result is won, and the first specific information and the second specific information are also output when the specific action is performed. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether a specific combination of patterns is stopped as a winning prize or whether a specific combination of patterns is present at a specific position as a specific action. By doing so, it is possible to more preferably improve the playability using the specific action.

Feature aB3. The first specific information output means outputs the first specific information when the specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result,
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position occurs. The gaming machine according to feature aB2.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the first specific information is output when the specific combination of symbols stops at the valid position and the specific result wins, the specific combination of symbols is displayed at the specific position even in the specific action. When a specific situation existing in the state occurs, output of the first specific information or the like is performed. By doing so, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the normal action in which the first specific information is output in accordance with the progress of the game, and the specific action, which is the performance action control using the revolving body, and the specific action is used. It is possible to more preferably improve the effect of the feature aB1.

Feature aB4. The first specific information output means outputs the first specific information in the game next to the game when the specific pattern combination stops at the valid position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result. to output
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific pattern combination does not exist at the specific position after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to feature aB2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is assumed that the first specific information is output in the game next to the game when the specific combination of symbols stops at the valid position and the specific result winning is established. After the occurrence of the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position, the first specific information or the like is output when the specific pattern combination does not exist at the specific position. By doing so, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the normal action in which the first specific information is output in accordance with the progress of the game, and the specific action, which is the performance action control using the revolving body, and the specific action is used. It is possible to more preferably improve the effect of the feature aB1.

Feature aB5. The specific drive control means is capable of causing the specific situation by stopping or temporarily stopping the specific pattern combination at the specific position in the specific action, and after causing the specific situation , each said orbiting body is controllable to orbit,
The first specific information output means, when the specific pattern combination stops at the effective position in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, Outputting the first specific information when a lap is started,
The second specific information output means is characterized by outputting the first specific information or the second specific information when the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to feature aB4.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature aB4, and after the specific pattern combination is stopped in the normal operation and the specific operation, the first specific information or the like is output at the timing when the circulating body starts to circulate. is performed, it is possible to further improve the effect of making it difficult to distinguish between the two motions.

Feature aB6. a first specific information output means capable of executing setting processing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means before the specific operation is performed by the specific drive control means; The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB5, further comprising setting means (a function of executing the first external output setting process by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, there is no need to perform the setting process for outputting the first specific information or the like while the specific drive control means is performing the specific operation. An increase in processing load can be suitably avoided.

Feature aB7. The first setting means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means before the revolving body is started in the specific operation by the specific drive control means. The gaming machine according to feature aB6, which is capable of executing a setting process to output .

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific action is an action including the revolving of the revolving body, the first specific information, etc. is transmitted before the revolving body is started in the specific action. Setting processing for output is executed. By doing so, the processing for drive control of the circulator and the processing for outputting the specific information do not overlap, and the processing can be decentralized.

Feature aB8. Setting processing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game before the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB7, further comprising second setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the reserved state by the main control device 101) capable of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, there is no need to perform the setting process for outputting the first specific information or the like while the specific drive control means is performing the specific operation. An increase in processing load can be suitably avoided.

In particular, in this configuration, since it is configured to output the first specific information or the like in a game prior to the game in which the specific action is performed, no duplication with the process for the specific action will occur. , and the effect of avoiding the increase in the processing load can be enhanced.

Feature aB9. Setting an output state for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game prior to the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means A second setting means capable of executing processing (a function of executing processing for setting a reserved state by main controller 101);
In the target game in the situation set to the output state, before the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means, the first specific information or the second a first setting means capable of executing the setting process of the timing for outputting the specific information (the function of executing the external output setting first process by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB5, comprising:

According to the above configuration, the output state is set in the specific game before the target game, and the timing for outputting the first specific information or the like is set before the specific action is performed in the target game in the output state. be done. In this way, after setting the output of the first specific information and the like to be shared by a plurality of processes, all of the processes are completed at a timing before the output of the first specific information and the like. By doing so, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the processing load.

Feature aB10. Said first setting means, in said target game in a situation in which said output state is set, prior to the start of rotation of said revolving body in said specific action by said specific drive control means, said second The gaming machine according to feature aB9, wherein the specific information output means is capable of executing a timing setting process for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information.

According to the above configuration, on the premise that the specific action is an action including the revolving of the revolving body, the first specific information and the like are transmitted before the revolving body starts in the specific action. Output timing setting processing is executed. By doing so, the processing for drive control of the circulator and the processing for outputting the specific information do not overlap, and the processing can be decentralized.

Feature aB11. The first setting means is capable of executing processing for setting a specific period (reservation output counter) until the second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information. can be,
The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information when the specific period elapses after the specific period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine according to feature aB9 or feature aB10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first setting means sets the specific period until the output as the process of setting the timing of outputting the first specific information and the like, and when the specific period elapses, the first specific information and the like are output. It becomes the configuration to be output. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration for presetting the output of the first specific information and the like with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature aB12. It can be set to output the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means in a specific game before the target game in which the specific action is performed by the specific drive control means. A second specific setting means (a function for executing processing to set the reserved state by the main controller 101),
The specific drive control means is configured to execute the specific action in a game that is after the specific game and before the target game,
The second specific information output means is configured to output the first specific information or the second specific information even when the specific action is performed in the previous game. The gaming machine according to any one of aB11.

As in the above configuration, it is a game after the specific game that sets the output of the first specific information, etc., and is specified in the previous game before the target game that was originally supposed to perform the specific action. Even in a configuration in which an action may be performed, the first specific information or the like is output in correspondence with the specific action. In a configuration in which there is a possibility that the situation in which the first specific information or the like should be output is earlier than planned, it is necessary to complete the setting for the output of the first specific information or the like in the game in advance. is high, and by applying the configuration of feature aB1 to such a configuration, it is possible to expect the excellent effects of feature aB1 to be more favorable.

Feature aB13. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
A setting means (a function of executing an external output setting first process by the main control device 101) capable of setting the timing for outputting the first specific information or the second specific information by the second specific information output means,
Any one of feature aB1 to feature aB12, wherein the setting means sets to output the first specific information or the second specific information at a timing after a predetermined period of time from the timing at which the specific situation occurs. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

The specific action is a game action different from the normal action, and may require special control such as making the drive control of the revolving body different from the normal drive control. Therefore, if the specific information is set to be output at the exact timing when the specific situation occurs, there is a possibility that the timing of the occurrence of the specific situation and the output timing of the first specific information may not match. 1 If the output of the specific information, etc. occurs before the specific situation occurs, the output of the first specific information, etc. (by updating the data display) ), it may be known in advance that the particular situation will occur. Therefore, in the above configuration, by setting the first specific information to be output at a timing later than the timing at which the specific situation occurs, the first specific information and the like are output before the specific situation occurs. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being output.

Feature aB14. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB13, wherein the specific situation occurs when the specific combination of symbols stops or temporarily stops at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, the specific pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position by the specific action, and in this case, the first specific information or the like is output. By doing so, in the game in which the specific result is won, the specific pattern combination is stopped and the specific result winning is established. is output, and through the output of the first specific information and the like, it is possible to strengthen the impression that the specific action is a necessary action for the progress of the game.

Feature aB15. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
The specific drive control means is configured to execute the specific action before the normal action,
The second specific information output means is configured to output the first specific information or the second specific information when the normal operation is started after the specific situation occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB14.

According to the above configuration, after the occurrence of the specific situation, the output of the first specific information and the like is performed when shifting to the normal operation. By doing so, the player can confirm that the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position, confirm that the first specific information or the like is output (that the data display is updated), can be performed at different timings, and an event occurs in which the existence of a specific pattern combination at a specific position is overlooked due to excessive attempts to confirm that the first specific information etc. is output. become difficult.

Feature aB16. The privilege granting means can grant a privilege corresponding to the specified result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specified result and a predetermined specific pattern combination stops at the effective position. and
Determination means (corresponding to the second replay or the third replay in the rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that determines that the particular pattern combination is stopped or temporarily stopped at the particular position in the specific action Equipped with a function that executes processing to determine that the stop roll is temporarily stopped,
Any one of features aB1 to feature aB15, wherein the second specifying information output means is capable of outputting the first specifying information or the second specifying information based on a determination result by the determining means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, when the specific picture combination is actually stopped or temporarily stopped, the first specific information or the like is output, so the specific picture combination is not stopped or temporarily stopped. It is possible to avoid a contradiction such that the first specific information or the like is output in spite of the above.

Feature aB17. The specific drive control means is characterized in that, as the specific action, when the stop operation means is operated, a pseudo game capable of stopping the corresponding revolving body can be executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB16.

According to the above configuration, the external output of the first specific information and the like is performed in the pseudo game in which the revolving body can be stopped by operating the stop operation means. By doing so, it is possible to favorably enhance the effect of simulating a normal game since the operation of the stop operation means is involved, compared to a configuration in which the rotation of the revolving body is simply controlled as an effect. .

In addition, the "pseudo-game" may be limited as follows, and the same applies to other features limited by the expression of the "pseudo-game".

"When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means is controlled so that the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result can be granted. The game is usually a game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at the valid position, the privilege corresponding to the predetermined result is not given by the privilege giving means. or a pseudo-game whose provision is restricted.”

Or, "when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the privilege giving means A game that is controlled so that a privilege corresponding to the result can be given is a normal game,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result, and the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at the effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the predetermined result by the privilege granting means is obtained. Pseudo-games in which the granting of corresponding benefits is not performed or the granting of such benefits is restricted.

Feature aB18. The second specific information output means outputs the first specific information or the second specific information during the specific action so as to output the first specific information or the second specific information after execution of the specific action. The gaming machine according to any one of features aB1 to aB17, characterized in that setting is performed.

According to the above configuration, the output setting of the first specific information or the like is performed during the specific action, and the first specific information or the like is output after the specific action is executed according to the output setting. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the game is progressing based on the specific action. can be increased.

Feature aB19. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Each of the circulating bodies performs a specific action to create a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as a performance operation control using the circulating bodies. A specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) that controls the
Specific information output means (function for executing timer management processing by the main controller 101) for setting output of specific information to a device outside the game machine in response to the specific situation;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine whose normal action is to give a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action, which is an effect action control using a revolving body, is performed and a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position. Since a specific situation may occur, the effect using the action of the revolving body can be used to improve the playability.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned specific actions tend to give the impression that they are performance actions that are different from normal actions, and there is a possibility that the specific actions may make the player who desires a quick progress of the game feel troublesome. . In addition, the manager of the game hall has to distinguish whether a specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position is generated as a lottery result by a lottery means in a normal operation or in a specific operation. It becomes difficult to stick to the game, and there may be a problem that it is difficult to identify a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a profit without going through the lottery of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to output specific information to the outside of the gaming machine in response to a specific situation in which a specific combination of symbols is present in a specific position in a specific action. It is possible for the connected data display to update the display of the data based on the specific information. It is possible to give the player an impression that is an action necessary for the progress of the game. Furthermore, the hall computer of the game hall connected to the game machine can grasp that a specific situation has occurred in a specific action, making it easier to identify the fraudulent act. As a result of the above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game using the specific action without causing the above inconvenience.

In addition, each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied to the feature aB19, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied. It may be applied, and all or part of each configuration limited by any one of these features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied in combination.

Feature aB20. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, first specific information output means ( A function for executing processing to turn ON the AT output terminal 121d based on the winning result for starting the AT mode by the main control device 101),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
When the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result, a specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect operation control using the revolving body. a specific drive control means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that controls each of the winding bodies so that a specific action that causes a specific situation to occur is performed;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different therefrom to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific situation function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Even when a specific action is performed to create a specific situation in which the combination of symbols is present at a specific position, the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, when a specific action is performed to resemble a normal action, it is possible not only to imitate the action of the revolving body, but also to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. . In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

Note that each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied to the feature aB20, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied. It may be applied, and all or part of each configuration limited by any one of these features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied in combination.

Feature aB21. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, first specific information output means (AT by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the game machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
By the drive control means, when the starting operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and the privilege provision means is provided. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (main controller 101) for controlling each revolving body so as to perform a specific action, which is performance control using the revolving body, when the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the specific result. function to execute rotation effect processing by) and
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different therefrom to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific action function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is a specific result, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the gaming machine. Since the first specific information and the second specific information may be output to a device outside the game machine even when the action is performed, for example, when the specific action is performed to resemble a normal action In addition to simulating the action of the revolving body, it is possible to obtain the effect of simulating from the aspect of information output to a device outside the game machine. In this case, for example, in a configuration where the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

In addition, each configuration limited by any one of the features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied to the feature aB21. It may be applied, and all or part of each configuration limited by any one of these features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied in combination.

Feature aB22. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. A benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit corresponding to (a function of executing payout determination processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, first specific information output means (AT by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information to a device outside the game machine A function for executing processing to turn ON the output terminal 121d for AT based on the winning result for mode start),
The drive control means causes each of the orbiting bodies to start rotating when the starting operation means is operated, stops the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated, and the privilege providing means. The normal operation is that the privilege is controlled to be granted by
Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main control device 101) for controlling each of the revolving bodies so as to perform a specific action that is a rendition action control using the revolving bodies;
Second specific information output means (timer management by main controller 101) capable of outputting the first specific information or second specific information different from the first specific information to a device outside the gaming machine in correspondence with the specific action function to perform processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine whose normal action is to provide a privilege corresponding to the result of (1), a specific action that is an effect operation control using a revolving body may be performed. It is possible to make use of the production using the action of to improve the game performance.

Moreover, when the result of the lottery is that the specific result is won, the first specific information may be output to a device outside the game machine. Since there are cases where the first specific information and the second specific information are output to the device, for example, when performing a specific action similar to a normal action, it is not enough just to imitate the action of the looping body. In addition, it is possible to obtain the similar effect from the aspect of information output to a device outside the gaming machine. In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the data display connected to the gaming machine updates the display of the data based on the first specific information, etc., the player can can grasp that the information output was performed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of improving the interest in the game using the specific action.

In addition, each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied to the feature aB22, and a part of each configuration limited by any one of features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied. It may be applied, and all or part of each configuration limited by any one of these features aB1 to feature aB18 may be applied in combination.

The inventions described in the features aB1 to aB22 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features aB1 to aB22, any one configuration of features aA1 to features aA25, features aB1 to features aB22, features aC1 to features aC12, features aD1 to features aD8, features aE1 to features aE9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic aC group>
Features aC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Stopping a specific pattern combination (a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize) at an effective position set at a position where the lottery result by the lottery means can be visually recognized through the display unit. is a possible specific result (for example, normal replies A to C), a specific privilege means capable of giving a specific privilege (AT mode) (AT mode by the main controller 101) Executes processing to start function) and
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at a specific position set at a position visible through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. Specific drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing rotation effect processing by main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game that is the execution target of the specific action, the specific drive control means can limit the specific action to be performed (main controller 101 A function that executes a process not to perform a rotation effect when it is a normal reply A to C winning in the rotation effect process by),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result, a specific pattern combination is stopped and a corresponding specific privilege is provided. Furthermore, since the specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position can also occur in a specific action as performance action control using a revolving body, even if the result of the game does not result in winning the specific result. , it is possible to freely display a specific pattern combination, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in the timing of granting a specific privilege. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific privilege cannot be granted.

On top of that, if the game in which the specific pattern combination can be stopped based on the specific result winning overlaps with the game in which the specific action is to be executed, the specific action will be performed in the normal action instead of the specific action. Since the specific means for restricting the execution of the specific action is provided so as to give priority to stopping the pattern combination, the real pleasure of the slot machine is that the player stops the revolving body by his/her own operation and obtains a privilege. It is possible to expect an excellent effect that it is possible to grant a specific privilege at a free timing by the above-mentioned specific action while not erasing the above.

Feature aC2. In the game before the specific game, prior setting means for setting the execution of the specific action in the specific game (by the main control device 101 Various start freeze flags and AT preparation counters Execute processing to set The gaming machine according to feature aC1, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the above configuration, after the setting of performing the specific action in the specific game by the previous setting means, if the lottery result of the specific game is not the specific result, the specific action is executed and the lottery result of the specific game is performed. is a specific result, execution of the specific action is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that a specific combination of symbols stops many times in the game while the game for executing the specific action is set in advance and the processing is decentralized. It becomes possible.

Feature aC3. Advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination for shifting to a predetermined advantageous state;
Pre-transition state setting means for setting a pre-transition state (preparation mode, CZ mode) enabling transition to the advantageous state when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result that allows the transition to the advantageous state. (a function of executing processing to set the preparation mode or CZ mode by the main controller 101);
with
The specific privilege means shifts to the advantageous state as the specific privilege when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result in the pre-transition state and the specific pattern combination stops at the valid position. is the configuration,
A second specific privilege means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode when performing a rotation effect by the main control device 101) that shifts to the advantageous state when the specific situation by the specific drive control means occurs. prepared,
When the pre-transition state is set by the pre-transition state setting means, the pre-setting means performs the specific action in the specific game which is a game after the game in which the setting is performed. The gaming machine according to feature aC2, which is characterized by setting.

By adopting the above configuration, a pre-transition state in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous state occurs, and when a specific result is obtained in the pre-transition state, a specific combination of symbols can be stopped and a transition to an advantageous state occurs. Also, even if the specific action is performed in the specific game in the pre-transition state, the transition to the advantageous state will occur. In this way, on the premise that the transition to an advantageous state occurs in either the event that becomes the specific game or the event that becomes the specific result, and if both events overlap, the specific result side is prioritized. If so, it is possible not only to avoid an event in which a specific combination of symbols is displayed many times due to both events, but also to avoid the inconvenience of redundantly performing processing for transitioning to an advantageous state. .

Feature aC4. The specifying means is capable of permitting the execution of the specified action in the specified game when a predetermined specified condition is established even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to feature aC3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result in the specific game is the specific result, the execution of the specific action is not uniformly limited, and when the specific condition is satisfied, even if the specific result is won Execution of specific actions is permitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in executing the specific action.

Feature aC5. The specific condition when the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped at the valid position in a predetermined game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, which is a game before the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature aC4, characterized in that:

In the game before the specific game, the player who could not stop the specific pattern combination even though it was a specific result can It is thought that the player would feel better if the specific pattern combination was stopped. Therefore, as described above, under the condition that the specific combination of symbols could not be stopped at the time of winning the specific result, the execution of the specific action is permitted even if the specific result is obtained in the specific game. Therefore, it is possible to provide a flexible game according to the skill level of the player without forcing the player to perform further operations.

Feature aC6. In the game before the specific game, prior setting means for performing the setting of executing the specific action in the specific game (function to execute processing to set various start freeze flags by the main control device 101) with
Characteristic feature aC5, characterized in that the previous setting means performs setting to execute the specific action in the specific game when the specific combination of symbols does not stop at the effective position in the predetermined game. The gaming machine described in .

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature aC5, and by using the above configuration, it is determined that the player is unable to stop a specific combination of symbols, and then a specific action is executed. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to accurately follow a player who is inexperienced in the operation by a specific operation while making full use of the real thrill of a slot machine that gives a privilege by stopping the revolving body by the operation of the player.

Feature aC7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a special notification means for executing a special notification that the specific pattern combination can be stopped by a predetermined notification means (At start processing by the display control device 81 functions to execute),
The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC6, wherein the special notification is performed by the special notification means when execution of the specific action is restricted by the specification means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific action and the specific result overlap in the specific game and the execution of the specific action is restricted, the special notification that makes it possible to stop the specific pattern combination based on the winning of the specific result. is executed. In this way, even though the priority is given to stopping the specific picture combination on the normal operation side, the player does not notice it and the specific picture combination does not stop. can be prevented from occurring.

Note that the above-mentioned "special notification means" may be limited as follows, and by doing so, the significance of executing the special notification is enhanced.

"When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position,
special notification means for executing a special notification corresponding to the first operation mode by a predetermined notification means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result.

Moreover, the above configuration does not deny that the special notification means executes the special notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result and the execution of the specific operation is not restricted by the specific means.

Feature aC8. The specifying means is capable of permitting the execution of the specified action in the specified game when a predetermined specified condition is satisfied even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
The gaming machine according to feature aC7, wherein when the specific condition is satisfied, execution of the special notification by the special notification means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a special notification is executed and a specific pattern combination is displayed repeatedly even though the specific action is being executed.

Feature aC9. It is characterized by having a means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode when executing the rotation effect process by the main control device 101) that can give the specific privilege based on the occurrence of the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC7.

According to the above configuration, since the specific privilege is given by performing the specific action, when the specific result is obtained in the specific game in which the specific action is performed, the specific privilege is duplicated. A possibility arises. In this regard, as in the feature aC1, the execution of the specific action is restricted in such a case, so the significance of the restriction is increased.

The above configuration corresponds to the "second specific privilege means" in feature aC3.

Features aC10. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC9, wherein the specific pattern combination stops or temporarily stops at the specific position in the specific situation.

According to the above configuration, not only does the specific combination of symbols exist at the specific position, but the specific combination of symbols is stopped or temporarily stopped. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the impression that the specific combination of symbols is stopped and the provision of the specific privilege are a set, and the performance effect of the specific action is enhanced.

Features aC11. The specific drive control means is capable of executing a pseudo-game capable of stopping the corresponding revolving body when the stop operation means is operated as the specific action. The gaming machine according to any one of features aC1 to aC10.

According to the above configuration, in a specific game, a situation can occur in which a specific pattern combination exists in an effective position during a pseudo game in which the revolving body can be stopped by operating the stop operation means. If the pseudo-game and the game of stopping the specific pattern combination based on the actual winning of the specific result overlap, the execution of the pseudo-game is restricted. By doing so, restricting the execution of the specific action also avoids forcing the player to perform duplicate operations, making it possible to increase the significance of the restriction. .

Feature aC12. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Stopping a specific pattern combination (a second re-game winning prize or a third re-game winning prize) at an effective position set at a position where the lottery result by the lottery means can be visually recognized through the display unit. is a possible specific result (for example, normal replies A to C), a specific privilege means capable of giving a specific privilege (AT mode) (AT mode by the main controller 101) Executes processing to start function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, a special notification means for executing a special notification that the specific pattern combination can be stopped by a predetermined notification means (At start processing by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
By the drive control means, when the start operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulation of each of the circulation bodies is stopped, and by the privilege provision means The normal operation is to be controlled so that the privilege can be granted,
Each of the revolving bodies is performed so as to perform a specific action that causes a specific situation in which the specific pattern combination is present at a specific position set to a position that can be visually recognized through the display unit as effect control using the revolving body. Specific drive control means for controlling the body (function for executing rotation effect processing by main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the specific game targeted for execution of the specific action, execution of the specific action by the specific drive control means and execution of the special notification by the special notification means A specifying means capable of limiting any of them (a function of executing a process not to perform a rotation effect when normal reps A to C are won in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result, a specific pattern combination is stopped and a corresponding specific privilege is provided. Furthermore, since the specific situation in which a specific pattern combination exists at a specific position can also occur in a specific action as performance action control using a revolving body, even if the result of the game does not result in winning the specific result. , it is possible to freely stop a specific pattern combination, and the degree of freedom in the timing of granting a specific privilege can be greatly improved. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the specific privilege cannot be granted.

In addition, when the game in which the specific combination of symbols can be stopped based on the winning of the specific result overlaps with the game in which the specific action is to be executed, the specific pattern is used in the execution of the specific action and the normal action. Since the execution of the special notification to stop the combination is restricted, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that a specific pattern combination is displayed many times.

It should be noted that the configurations defined by the features aC1 to aC11 may be individually applied to the feature aC12, or may be applied in combination with each other. Further, a part of the structures limited by the features aC1 to aC11 may be applied, or a part of the structures may be applied in combination with each other.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the features aC1 to aC12 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features aC1 to aC12, any one configuration of features aA1 to features aA25, features aB1 to features aB22, features aC1 to features aC12, features aD1 to features aD8, and features aE1 to features aE9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic aD group>
Features aD1. One game is started based on a predetermined start operation by a player and ends based on satisfaction of a predetermined end condition,
In a gaming machine in which the result of the game is notified by a predetermined notification means,
Output means for outputting specific information corresponding to the result of the game to a device external to the gaming machine (function for executing timer update processing by the main control device 101);
A game in which the specific information is output by the output means is defined as a specific game, and a first setting means (main control a function of performing processing for setting a reservation state by setting an AT preparation counter by the device 101;
A second setting means for performing a second setting for outputting the specific information after the setting by the first setting means is performed and before the specific information is output by the output means. (a function of executing processing for setting a reservation output counter by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the output of the specific information corresponding to the game result to the device outside the gaming machine is performed via the first setting and the second setting. In this way, by configuring the specific information to be output through a plurality of setting processes, the accuracy of the output specific information is improved. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally operate the update of the data display connected to the gaming machine by making the user not to do so. Moreover, in the above configuration, the output setting of the specific information is first set in the game before the game in which the specific information is output, and after the first setting is performed, Since the second setting, which is set before the specific information is output, and the second setting, the execution timing of any setting process does not overlap with the output timing of the specific information, and processing overlaps. It is possible to eliminate the increase in processing load due to

Feature aD2. The gaming machine according to feature aD1, wherein the second setting means sets an output timing of the specific information in the specific game as the second setting.

According to the above configuration, after the first setting of the specific information output is performed in the previous game, the process of setting the output timing of the specific information in the specific game is performed in the second setting. By adopting such a configuration, the output means for outputting the specific information only has to determine the timing set by the second setting means, and the process at the time of outputting the specific information can be dramatically simplified. It becomes possible to Therefore, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load due to the decentralization of processing, and furthermore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of an error occurring when outputting the specific information, and improve the accuracy of the specific information. It is possible to

Feature aD3. The gaming machine according to feature aD2, wherein the second setting means sets a timing before the end of the specific game after the specific game is started as the output timing of the specific information.

According to the above configuration, the output timing of the specific information is midway between the start of the specific game and the end of the specific game. In this way, in a configuration in which an external output is performed in the middle of a single game, the process for progressing the game and the process for the external output overlap, and there is concern about an increase in the processing load. Since the process for external output is simplified, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature aD4. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a start operation means (start lever 41) for performing the start operation;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a termination operation for establishing the termination condition;
Drive control means (reel control by main controller 101) for starting circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
with
The second setting means may set, as the output timing of the specific information, a timing before each of the orbiting bodies stops based on the operation of the stop operation means after the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started. The gaming machine according to feature aD3, characterized by:

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature aD3. In a so-called slot machine in which a plurality of revolving bodies are started to revolve based on the operation of the starting operation means and the revolving bodies are stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, the game progresses according to the player's operation. It is a configuration, and the process for progressing the game tends to be complicated. Therefore, even in a configuration in which the timing at which the processing for progressing the game is performed and the timing at which the specific information is output overlap, as in the above configuration, the processing for outputting the specific information is simplified. , it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature aD5. After the orbiting of the orbiting body is started, the invalidation means for invalidating the stop of the orbiting body based on the operation or operation of the stop operation means for a predetermined period (in the rotation start processing by the main controller 101 function to execute processing to set the invalid period),
The gaming machine according to feature aD4, wherein the second setting means sets the timing during the predetermined period of time invalidated by the invalidating means as the output timing of the specific information.

According to the above configuration, the specific information is output during the predetermined period as the invalid period of the stop operation means. With such a configuration, the specific information is output in a situation where it is not necessary to perform drive control based on the player's operation, that is, in a situation where it is not necessary to monitor the player's operation, resulting in duplication of processing. can be preferably avoided.

When this configuration is applied to a gaming machine that performs a "pseudo game", the "predetermined period" as the invalid period corresponds to the period during which the pseudo game is performed. In this case, ``lottery means for performing a lottery for awarding a privilege to a player''; and limiting the ``predetermined period'' by the ``ineffective means'' as ``a period during which the suspension of the orbiting body is not subject to the granting of benefits by the privilege granting means or is restricted.'' good.

Feature aD6. After the revolving of each revolving body is started, at a timing before each revolving body can be stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, a predetermined specific pattern combination is performed by the player. Specific drive control means (function for executing rotation effect processing by the main controller 101) for driving and controlling each of the rotating bodies so as to generate a specific situation existing at a specific position set at a position visible from the The gaming machine according to feature aD4 or feature aD5, wherein

According to the above configuration, in the slot machine in which the game progresses according to the player's operation, the slot machine circulates so that the specific situation in which the specific pattern combination exists at the specific position occurs before the game can be ended. In some cases, body drive control is performed, and the output timing of the specific information is set so that the specific information is output under such circumstances. With such a configuration in which the specific information is output at the timing when the so-called revolving body rotation effect is performed, the data display connected to the game machine is updated by performing the rotation effect. It is also possible to make it so that it is possible to preferably associate the rotation effect with the result of the game. Moreover, since the output setting of the specific information is performed in advance, even in a situation where such a special rotation control is performed, the processing load does not increase due to the output processing. It is possible to preferably enjoy the effect of associating the output of the specific information with the rotation effect.

Feature aD7. When a predetermined setting opportunity (preparation mode transition) occurs, the first setting means specifies a predetermined game among games subsequent to the game in which the setting opportunity occurs as the first setting. The game machine according to any one of the features aD1 to aD6, characterized by being set as a game.

According to the above configuration, the first setting means is configured to set a game for outputting the specific information as the first setting for outputting the specific information. In this way, if the first setting means first sets which game the specific information is to be output, the second setting means determines whether or not it is the set specific game when performing the second setting. This eliminates the need for the process of determining whether or not there is an output trigger for the specific information.

Feature aD8. After setting the specific game, the first setting means causes a predetermined specific event (when AT mode start results in winning and non-winning) in a game before the specific game. The gaming machine according to feature aD7, characterized in that, in a case where the game has been set, the game prior to the specific game that has already been set can be reset to the specific game.

According to the above configuration, after setting the specific game by the first setting means, when the specific event occurs, the specific game is brought forward, and the game before the set specific game is the specific game. reset. By doing so, in the configuration in which the game for which the specific information is to be output is set in advance, the degree of freedom of the game for which the specific information is to be output is improved. Moreover, even in such a game, since the first setting means resets the specific game, the second setting means only needs to determine whether or not it is the specific game when performing the second setting. It is possible to prevent an increase in the processing load in the specific game while improving the degree of freedom of the specific game.

The inventions described in the features aD1 to aD8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each of the features aD1 to aD8, any one of the features aA1 to aA25, the features aB1 to aB22, the features aC1 to aC12, the features aD1 to aD8, and the features aE1 to aE9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown above individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic aE group>
Features aE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined result when the pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. a game value imparting means capable of imparting a game value corresponding to
A gaming machine comprising
When the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery means stops at the valid position based on the operation by the stop operation means, the game value giving means controls to give the game value corresponding to the predetermined result. Let the game be a normal game,
When the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means stops at the effective position based on the operation by the stop operation means, the game value giving means does not give the game value corresponding to the predetermined result, or Provided with a pseudo-game means capable of executing a pseudo-game that is a game whose grant is limited (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101),
The pseudo-game means, after the first revolving body of the revolving bodies has stopped in the normal game, by stopping the second revolving body of the revolving bodies as the pseudo-game, at least the A specific pseudo-game is executed to stop at a specific position where a specific pattern combination including the patterns attached to the first and second winding bodies is set to be visible through the display unit. A gaming machine characterized by being able to

According to the above configuration, the rotation of the revolving body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a game value corresponding to the result of the lottery is given, a pseudo-game is set in which no game value is given even if the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Therefore, not only the normal game that is associated with the lottery of each game on a one-to-one basis, but also the pseudo-game that does not correspond to the lottery is interwoven with the normal game. can.

Moreover, in this gaming machine, the pseudo-game is configured to be able to stop a specific combination of symbols by using the stop result in the normal game, and the boundary between the normal game and the pseudo-game in one game. Even if a result that does not correspond to the lottery result is notified by the stop result of the pseudo game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to have the impression of being informed by pseudo performance. In addition, compared to the configuration in which all the revolving bodies are stopped in the pseudo-game, the number of stop operations required in one game to stop the specific pattern combination is reduced by the amount of the normal game, and the specific pattern is reduced. It is also possible to smoothly play a game in which combinations are stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suitably enhance the presentation effect of the pseudo-game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature aE2. After the pseudo game of stopping the specific pattern combination is performed by the pseudo game means, the normal game of the second revolving body is performed while the first revolving body is stopped. The gaming machine according to feature aE1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in one game, after the first revolving body stops as a normal game, the second revolving body stops as a pseudo game, and then the normal game of the second revolving body is performed. . In this case, since the first circulating body remains stopped, the stop operation of the first circulating body is not forced again, and the significance of playing a pseudo-game using the stop result of the first circulating body is enhanced. can be done.

Feature aE3. After the pseudo game of stopping the specific pattern combination is performed by the pseudo game means, the normal game of the second revolving body is performed while the first revolving body is stopped, and the second revolving body is played. When the pattern combination including the patterns attached to the first loop and the second loop is a pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means in the game, the game value corresponding to the lottery result is The game machine according to feature aE2, wherein the game value is given by the game value giving means.

According to the above configuration, after the normal game is performed in one game, the pseudo game is performed, and then the normal game is performed. And, without using the pattern of the second circular body stopped in the pseudo-game, the game value is given using the pattern stopped in the normal game performed before and after the pseudo-game. becomes. By doing so, in the game property in which the pseudo-game is incorporated in the middle of one game, without increasing the operation as a normal game for obtaining the game value corresponding to the lottery result of the one game, It is possible to suitably impart a game value.

Feature aE4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the game value imparting means provides a game value corresponding to the specific result by stopping the specific pattern combination at the valid position. The gaming machine according to any one of features aE1 to aE3, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is the specific result, the game value corresponding to the specific result is awarded by stopping the specific pattern combination at the valid position as the normal game. On the premise of such a configuration, by stopping a specific pattern combination in a pseudo-game, the effect of making the pseudo-game resemble a normal game can be enhanced, and the effect of the pseudo-game can be improved. It becomes possible.

Feature aE5. Advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs an advantage determination (AT mode shift lottery) that causes an advantageous event for the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity;
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result that causes the advantageous event, the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, and the specified combination of symbols is stopped at the effective position. a first advantageous means for generating the advantageous event (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode in the winning result handling process by the main controller 101);
Second advantageous means (main controller 101 A function that executes processing to start AT mode when performing rotation by) and
The gaming machine according to feature aE4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when a specific pattern combination stops in a normal game, not only is the game value corresponding to the specific result given, but also an advantageous event is provided on the condition that the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result. occurs, and an advantageous event also occurs when a specific pattern combination stops in a pseudo-game. By doing so, the stopping of a specific pattern combination and the occurrence of an advantageous event are set, and the stopping of a specific pattern combination in a pseudo-game and the occurrence of a specific pattern combination in a normal game. The effect of simulating stopping is enhanced. Moreover, even if it is a pseudo-game that does not correspond to the lottery result of one game, a privilege based on a result different from the lottery result of the game is given for stopping the revolving body in the pseudo-game. is possible, and the significance of the existence of pseudo-games can be enhanced.

Feature aE6. Said pseudo-game means is characterized by executing said specific pseudo-game when the lottery result by said lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from said specific result. Described in feature aE4 or feature aE5 game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a special result different from the specific result, and the specific pattern combination cannot be stopped at the effective position in the normal game, the specific pattern combination is selected as the specific pseudo-game. can be stopped. In other words, if it is a specific result and a game that can stop a specific pattern combination in a normal game, the normal game is prioritized without relying on the execution of the specific pseudo-game. By doing so, the player can expect the production effect using the specific pseudo-game while respecting the gameplay of the normal game such as obtaining a privilege by stopping the stop number according to the lottery result. It becomes possible.

Feature aE7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, the specific pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means When operated in a second stop order different from the first stop order, a pattern combination different from the specific pattern combination can be stopped,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first stop order, the special pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means A configuration in which a pattern combination different from the special pattern combination can be stopped when operated in the second stop order,
Said pseudo game means, when the lottery result by said lottery means is said special result, said specific pseudo game using said first and said second circulating bodies so as to be in said first stop order The gaming machine according to feature aE6, characterized by executing

According to the above configuration, the specific result that the specific pattern combination can be stopped and the special result that triggers the execution of the specific pseudo-game are results in which the stop numbers differ depending on the operation order of the stop operation means. A specific pattern combination can be stopped by operating in the first stop order when winning a specific result, and a special pattern combination can be stopped by operating in the first stop order when winning a special result. When the specific pseudo-game is executed when the special result is won, the first and second loops are operated in the first stop order, and as a result, the result of the game is , the special symbol combination will stop. By doing so, even if a special result is won, the player is expected to operate in the operation order when the specific result is won, and the specific pattern combination is stopped, and the stop output corresponding to the lottery result of the game is expected. It is possible to stop the eyes.

Feature aE8. Order notification means capable of executing order notification including the first stop order and the second stop order by a predetermined notification means (function for executing processing for performing push order notification by main controller 101) with
The order notification means executes the order notification corresponding to the first stop order when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the specific pseudo game is executed by the pseudo game means. It is characterized by having a specific order notification means (a function of executing processing for notifying the pressing order when the pressing order bell is won in a game in which the rotation effect is executed by the main control device 101). The gaming machine described in aE7.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize a game in which the players are operated in the first operation order when the special result is won, as in the feature aE7.

Feature aE9. The case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the special pattern combination stops at the effective position is better than the case where the pattern combination different from the special pattern combination stops at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature aE7 or feature aE8, which is advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect the production effect of the specific pseudo game while preventing the loss of the player by playing the specific pseudo game when the special result is won.

The inventions described in the features aE1 to aE9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features aE1 to aE9, any one configuration of the features aA1 to aA25, the features aB1 to aB22, the features aC1 to aC12, the features aD1 to aD8, and the features aE1 to aE9 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature aA group to feature aE group to each configuration of the feature aA group to feature aE group described in detail above, It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The following feature bA group to feature bE group are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly the 2b embodiment α to the 2b embodiment γ, modifications thereof, or are extracted from a combination of

<Characteristic bA group>
Feature bA1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantageous determination means (continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantageous determination to cause an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity. functions to perform) and
If the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT processing for starting a new set in the mode processing, for example, a function of executing the processing of steps Sb1404 to Sb1406;
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result and in the specific game executed in the situation before the specific timing, the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, Execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining whether to execute the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result,
When the determination result by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification, a specific notification means for executing the specific notification (a function of executing a specific effect setting process by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous judgment is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and if the result of the advantageous judgment is an advantageous result, the advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. As a result, the game is diversified by adding a game that causes an advantageous event to the game, such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such a game, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game or the awarding of benefits based on the lottery result. There is an undeniable possibility that the playability of the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and the granting of benefits, will be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest is likely to decrease.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a game as a specific game in a situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs, according to the lottery result of the game Since the determination of execution of the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed, the player's psychology, which wants to know that the advantageous result has been obtained before the advantageous event occurs, is used. The degree of attention to the lottery result is favorably increased.

Moreover, by adopting the above configuration, the lottery of each game can be performed in a game in which there is a time lag until an advantageous event occurs after the result of the advantageous judgment executed based on the predetermined judgment opportunity becomes an advantageous result. Since the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event is performed according to the result, the specific notification is not performed as a result of the advantageous determination based on the predetermined determination result, but as if it were based on the lottery result of each game. As a result, it is possible to give an impression that a specific notification is being made. By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the specific game until an advantageous event occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Feature bA2. A first state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second state (for example, an AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) with different probabilities of the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means being the advantageous result are set. and
The probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state is the corresponding result, and the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state The gaming machine according to feature bA1, wherein the determination result of the execution determination is different from the probability that the corresponding result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, in the first state and the second state in which the probability that the result of the advantageous judgment becomes an advantageous result is different, even if the lottery result by the same lottery means, the probability that the specific information will be executed in the specific game. is different. By doing so, not only the game property of grasping the result of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification, but also the game property of grasping the judgment state (first state or second state) of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification is added. By increasing the degree of attention to the notification, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the lottery result in the specific game.

Feature bA3. The second state has a higher probability that the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means will be the advantageous result than the first state,
The specific when the advantageous result is obtained in the second state than the probability that the determination result of the execution determination in the specific game when the advantageous result is obtained in the first state is the corresponding result The gaming machine according to feature bA2, characterized in that, in a game, the determination result of the execution determination has a higher probability of becoming the corresponding result.

According to the above configuration, the determination state (second state) that is likely to result in an advantageous result makes it easier to execute the specific notification in the specific game. That is, in a judgment state in which an advantageous result is likely to occur, the specific notification is more likely to be executed after the advantageous result is obtained and before the advantageous event occurs. In other words, in a judgment state in which it is difficult to obtain an advantageous result, many games in which the specific notification is not performed from the time when an advantageous result is obtained to the time when an advantageous event occurs may be completed. By doing so, in the configuration for improving the attention level of each game by using the player's psychology expecting execution of the specific notification, the game that can be expected to have the effect of increasing the attention level will have an advantageous event. The harder it is, the more frequent it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention of each game while avoiding an increase in the payout rate due to an excessive increase in the rate of occurrence of advantageous events.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which even after an advantageous event occurs, an advantageous determination is made by taking over the determination state of the previous advantageous determination, or in a configuration in which the previous determination state affects the subsequent determination state. , even after an advantageous result is obtained, it is thought that players will be highly interested in grasping the judgment state of the advantageous judgment by the specific notification, and the judgment of the advantageous judgment can be determined from the timing of the occurrence of the specific notification. A game of predicting the state is added to improve the interest of the game.

Feature bA4. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means executed in the first state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event is generated by the advantageous execution means, the advantageous determination means is advantageous in the first state. A judgment is made, or the advantageous judgment is more likely to be made by the advantageous judgment means in the first state than in the second state, and the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means executed in the second state is the advantageous result, and after the advantageous event has occurred by the advantageous execution means, an advantageous judgment is made by the advantageous judgment means in the second state, or the second state is higher than the first state The gaming machine according to feature bA3, characterized in that the advantageous judgment is easily made by the advantageous judgment means.

According to the above configuration, after an advantageous result is obtained in the advantageous judgment and an advantageous event occurs, the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment is inherited and the advantageous judgment is made, or the judgment state of the previous advantageous judgment is inherited and the advantageous judgment is made. is easily performed, and a game for predicting the judgment state of the advantageous judgment is added from the timing when the specific notification is generated, and the interest in the game is improved.

Feature bA5. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the correspondence result is obtained with a third probability when the first identification result is obtained, and is higher than the third probability when the second identification result is obtained. The execution determination is performed so that the corresponding result is obtained with a fourth probability that is a probability,
The product of the first probability and the third probability (5.5% if the continuation rate is 10%, 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90%) is the product of the second probability and the fourth probability ( 0.8% if the continuation rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuation rate is 90%, and set to be larger than FIG. 131). game machine.

According to the above configuration, there is a first identification result and a second identification result that is less likely to be won, and identification is triggered by the second identification result rather than execution determination of specific notification triggered by the first identification result. In a configuration where it is easier to win the notification execution determination, the product of the winning probability of the first specific result (first probability) and the winning probability of the specific notification execution determination triggered by the first specific result (third probability) is set to be greater than the product of the winning probability of the second specific result (second probability) and the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the second specific result (fourth probability). Therefore, the specific notification triggered by the first identification result is substantially more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second identification result. By doing so, although the second specific result as a so-called rare combination is likely to trigger the specific notification, the second specific result is not easily won, and the specific notification is actually performed. Inconvenience such as the fact that the Therefore, even if it is the first specific result that is relatively easy to win as a lottery result of the game, the specific notification can be expected to be performed, and the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification can be preferably achieved. becomes possible.

Feature bA6. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The gaming machine according to feature bA5, wherein the first specific number is set to be smaller than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set such that the specific game with the first specific result occurs at least once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is made). Therefore, it is possible to suitably secure an opportunity for execution of the specific notification.

Feature bA7. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
the second probability is a probability of 1/second specific number (28.4);
The gaming machine according to feature bA5 or feature bA6, wherein the second specific number is set to be larger than the special number.

According to the above configuration, each probability is set so as to increase the possibility that the specific game resulting in the second specific result will not occur even once during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed). Since it is set, it is more meaningful to set so that the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can be easily executed.

Feature bA8. The execution determination means is configured to perform execution determination of executing the specific notification at least in the specific game of the special number (10),
The first probability is a probability of 1/1 of the first specific number (1.04);
The product of the first probability and the third probability is 1/3 a specific number (approximately 1/18.2 if the continuation rate is 10%, and 1/7.52 if the continuation rate is 90%), The product of the second probability and the fourth probability is 1/4th specific number (about 1/122 if the continuation rate is 10%, about 1/105 if the continuation rate is 90%),
Any one of features bA5 to bA7, wherein the third specific number can be a value smaller than the special number, while the fourth specific number is set so as not to be a value smaller than the special number 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, during the special number of games in which the specific notification can be executed (execution determination is performed), the specific notification triggered by the first specific result can occur at least once, while the second specific result can occur. Since it is set so that there is a high possibility that the specific notification as a trigger will not occur even once, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the prepared specific notification is not executed, and to relatively win as a lottery result of the game. It is possible to increase expectations for the first identification result, which is easy to obtain.

Feature bA9. Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification until at least the advantageous event occurs after the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means (a function of executing a process of setting an occurrence completion flag by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA8, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, after the specific notification is executed, the re-execution of the specific notification is restricted until an advantageous event occurs. It is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the performance.

Feature bA10. As the specific notification, a first specific notification (for example, a specific effect in VS display) and a second specific notification in which the notification mode is different to the extent that the player can distinguish from the first specific notification (for example, specific in ally character up) Directing) is set,
The specific notification means executes the first specific notification when executing the specific notification in the first specific game (first game of the set) among the specific games, and the first specific game among the specific games. The gaming machine according to feature bA9, characterized in that when executing the specific notification in a second specific game (set 2 to 4 games) different from the specific game, the configuration is such that the second specific notification is executed. .

According to the above configuration, once the specific notification is executed, the subsequent execution of the specific notification is restricted. Therefore, if the user does not try to confirm the occurrence of the specific notification more carefully, there is a high possibility that the execution of the specific notification will be overlooked. By doing so, it is possible to further improve the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game presentation through the expectation of the specific notification.

Feature bA11. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is different from the advantageous result, and it is advantageous to cause the advantageous event based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game before the specific timing. Equipped with a second advantage determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101) for executing determination,
The advantageous execution means is configured to cause the advantageous event at the specific timing when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The execution determination means determines that the lottery result by the lottery means is determined in advance even in a specific game executed in a situation in which the result of the advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is the advantageous result and the specific game is executed before the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA10, wherein, if the result is a predetermined specific result, it is determined whether to execute the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is an advantageous result before the specific timing, the specific timing can be obtained. Advantageous events will occur in Then, even when the result of the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result, the specific notification can be executed when the specific result is obtained in the specific game before the specific timing. In this case, since the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means is made based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the fact that the result of the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means is an advantageous result is determined according to the lottery result of each game. In the configuration of notifying as the specific notification, the configuration is such that the specific notification that an advantageous event actually occurs according to the lottery result of each game is also performed. By doing so, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that, in a situation in which an advantageous result has been obtained in advance by the advantage determination means, it is as if an advantageous result has been obtained according to the lottery result of each game and the specific notification is being executed. becomes.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "second advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in the feature bA1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature bA12. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The second advantageous determination means performs an advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specified result, and does not perform the advantageous determination when the first specified result. Or, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the second specific result, the advantageous result is more likely to be the advantageous result than the first specific result.
The specific notification means is triggered by the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game is the first specific result, and the ratio of executing the specific notification is the second specific result. The gaming machine according to feature bA11, characterized in that it is set so as to be higher than the rate at which the specific notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, in the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means, the specific notification is based on the premise that the second specific result, which is less likely to be won than the first specific result, is more likely to be an advantageous result. The specific notification triggered by the first specific result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the second specific result. It is possible to strongly give the impression that an advantageous event may occur triggered by the first specified result, while preventing the occurrence of an advantageous event too easily. Therefore, in the specific game, even the first specific result, which is likely to be won as a lottery result, can attract more attention while avoiding an increase in the payout rate, and the specific game can be played until an advantageous event occurs. It is possible to improve the interest of

Feature bA13. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means, when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the advantageous result with the second specified result as a trigger, the corresponding result in the specific game that becomes the first specified result means (in the display control device 81, in a game in which an additional winning in a specific role is received and a continuation command is received, if the specific effect lottery is not won, the specific effect in the game is not executed, and a specific effect setting process that is set so that a specific effect can be performed based on winning a specific effect lottery in a game that is a normal role after that). The gaming machine according to feature bA11 or feature bA12, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means triggered by the second identification result that is relatively difficult to win is an advantageous result, the identification that has the second identification result The specific notification may be executed not in the game but in the specific game as the first specific result, and the probability that the result of the advantageous determination triggered by the first specific result will be the advantageous result does not become too high. While doing so, it is possible to pseudo-enhance the expectation that the result of the advantageous judgment will be an advantageous result even if it is the first specified result.

Feature bA14. A first specified result (normal combination) and a second specified result (specific combination) different from the first specified result are set as the specified result,
The lottery means performs the lottery so that the first specified result is obtained with a first probability, and the lottery is performed so that the second specified result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. and
The execution determination means, when the result of the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is the advantageous result with the second specified result as a trigger, the corresponding result in the specific game that has the second specified result means (in the display control device 81, in a game in which an additional winning in a specific role is received and a continuation command is received, if a specific effect lottery is won, it is specified in the game The gaming machine according to any one of features bA11 to bA13, further comprising a function of executing a specific effect setting process set so as to be able to perform effects.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means triggered by the second specific result that is relatively difficult to win is an advantageous result, the specific game that has the second specific result is specified. Notification may be executed. In this way, when the second specified result as a so-called rare combination is won in the specified game, the occurrence of an advantageous event triggered by the specified notification is notified by the specified notification, whereby the advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means is performed in the specified game. It is possible to strongly give the impression that is actually being executed, and as a result, it is not the result of the advantageous judgment performed based on the predetermined judgment opportunity, but the advantageous judgment by the second advantageous judgment means executed in the specific game As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of making it seem that an advantageous event is occurring.

Feature bA15. The result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and in the specific game before the specific timing, the advantageous determination of causing the advantageous event is executed based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Equipped with third advantage determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101),
If the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means performs after the advantageous event has occurred based on the determination result of the advantageous determination means. , a configuration capable of causing the advantageous event based on the determination result by the third advantageous determination means,
The execution determination means is means capable of performing the execution determination so that the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is the corresponding result in the specific game in which the result is different from the advantageous result ( The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA14, further comprising a function of executing a process of performing a specific effect based on a non-winning command by the display control device 81.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result, if the result of the advantageous judgment by the third advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result before the specific timing, Then, an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the advantageous determination means, and then an advantageous event occurs based on the determination result of the third advantageous determination means. become. Further, in the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is an advantageous result, and when the result of the advantageous determination by the third advantageous determination means is not an advantageous result, the specific notification is executed. In the specific game, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that an advantageous result is obtained according to the lottery result of the specific game and the specific notification is executed without excessively increasing the winning probability of the advantageous decision by the third advantageous decision means. Become.

In addition, in order to clarify the relationship with the "third advantageous determination means" in the above configuration, the "advantageous determination means" in the feature bA1 may be expressed as the "first advantageous determination means".

Feature bA16. The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA15, wherein the advantage determination means makes the advantage determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game in which the predetermined determination opportunity occurs.

According to the above configuration, in order to give the impression that an advantageous event occurs based on the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means as if the advantageous event occurred as a result of the subsequent specific game, the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means It is possible to give the impression that the advantageous event is strongly associated with the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific game after that, not the game in which the is played, and it is easy to give the impression that the advantageous event is occurring as a result of the specific game. can do.

Feature bA17. As the specific game, a first specific game (for example, a game in which a confrontation effect is performed) in which the specific notification can be executed, and a second specific game in which the specific notification is not executed or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than the first specific game 2 A specific game (for example, a game in which a battle effect is performed) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bA1 to bA16, characterized in that the second specified game is executed after the first specified game, and then the specified timing occurs.

According to the above configuration, after the advantageous determination is made, the second specific game is executed in which the specific notification is not performed or is difficult to be performed through the first specific game in which the specific notification can be performed, and then the advantageous event is performed. become possible. By doing so, the timing at which the specific notification is performed becomes limited, and the rarity of the specific notification is increased, thereby making it possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. Moreover, since it is configured that the second specific game in which the specific notification cannot occur is interposed between the first specific game in which the specific notification can occur and the advantageous event, for example, the specific notification in the second specific game In the case of notifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of an advantageous event by another performance, it is possible to preferably solve the problem that the attention is dispersed due to the mixture of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature bA18. In the second specific game, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, ally attack effect or enemy attack effect), advantageous content (ally victory effect ) and non-advantageous content (enemy victory presentation) corresponding to the fact that the result is different from the above-mentioned advantageous result. The gaming machine according to feature bA17, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for performing

According to the above configuration, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the corresponding notification in which either the content notification including the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content is performed in the second specific game, and the result of the advantageous determination is notified. , Since the specific notification is not performed in the second specific game, the occurrence of the specific notification distracts the player's attention from the enjoyment of the advantageous result presentation, and the corresponding notification is fully enjoyed. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of not being able to play, and if the specific notification is performed in the first specific game, only the player who understands the occurrence of the specific notification can play the second specific game. It is possible to enjoy the correspondence notification while immersed in a sense of superiority, such as knowing that the correspondence notification will be advantageous content, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The inventions described in the features bA1 to bA18 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bA1 to bA18, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bB group>
Feature bB1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for granting a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
Determining whether to execute a specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established and which precedes the game in which the unit state ends. Execution determination means (function for executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81),
When the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification means for executing the specific notification (the display control device 81 executes processing for performing a specific effect function) and
with
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state are set. has been
In a situation where the continuation condition is established, the second advantageous state is set so that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed than the first advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is

Then, in a unit state in which a continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification may be made as an advance notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition before the unit state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make use of the player's psychology of wanting to feel relieved by confirming that the continuation condition is established, to stir up expectations for the specific notification, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Moreover, as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, in which the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied, are set. It is set so that the advantageous state is more likely to occur. Therefore, the generation of the specific notification does not simply indicate the satisfaction of the continuation condition in the unit state, but indicates the continuation rate of the unit state depending on the timing of occurrence. In other words, when a specific notification occurs, it not only suggests that the unit state will continue, but it also suggests that the continuation rate of the unit state is high, and it is possible to raise expectations for the specific notification. Become.

In addition, as in the above configuration, the higher the continuation rate, the more likely the specific notification occurs, so the number of games from the start of the unit state to the occurrence of the specific notification is advantageous in that the continuation rate is high. The lower the state, the lower the number, and the lower the continuity rate, the higher the number.

Here, if it is assumed that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, in one unit state, the number of games to look forward to whether the specific notification will occur, that is, the occurrence of the specific notification It is considered that the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as the continuation rate is low as described above, the number of games until the specific notification occurs increases, so even if the continuation rate is in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, it is exciting whether the specific notification will occur It is a configuration that allows you to fully enjoy the feeling. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the fewer the number of games played until the specific notification in one unit state occurs. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the number of games played until the occurrence of is small. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

Feature bB2. The gaming machine according to feature bB1, wherein the execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the execution determination of the execution of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. can also be noticed. In particular, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game by making a specific notification according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Feature bB3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. is set to be higher than
The game according to feature bB2, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the specified result is set to the same probability or substantially the same probability in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result of the game is a specific result with the same winning probability regardless of the type of advantageous state, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination is the execution result is the second advantageous state than the first advantageous state. Since the state is set to be higher, as a result, the occurrence rate of the specific notification is higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. By doing so, even if the winning probability of the lottery result of each game is not changed according to each advantageous state, the excellent effect of the feature bB1 can be expected only by changing the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific information. becomes possible.

Feature bB4. updating means for updating the unit state (function for executing AT mode processing by the main controller 101);
satisfaction determination means (function for executing continuation determination processing by the main controller 101) for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied when the unit state is updated by the update means;
with
A probability that the establishment determination result by the establishment determination means is a result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. and
A first control device (main control device 101) comprising at least the update means and the establishment determination means, and a second control device different from the first control device, the second control device comprising the execution determination means and the specific notification means. a control device (display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB3, characterized by having:

According to the above configuration, when the unit state is updated, it is determined whether the continuation condition is met or not, and the level of the continuation rate depends on the probability that the continuation condition is determined to be met in the determination. . The first control device updates the unit state and determines whether the continuation condition is established, and the second control device determines whether to execute the specific notification or executes the specific notification. It is possible to prevent a local increase in processing load.

Note that the "updating means" is limited to "updating means for updating the unit state so as to shift to the next unit state when the unit state ends while the continuation condition is satisfied". good too.

In addition, regarding the ``satisfaction determining means'', ``when the updating means terminates the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, or when a new unit state is started after being updated by the updating means, Alternatively, it may be limited to "satisfaction determination means for determining whether the continuation condition is satisfied."

Feature bB5. The gaming machine according to feature bB4, wherein the success determination means is configured to perform the success determination regardless of the lottery result of the lottery means in the game for which the success determination is performed.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the lottery result of the game, the success or failure of the continuation condition is determined based on the continuation rate set according to the type of advantageous state. By doing so, the processing configuration for determining whether the continuation condition is successful or not can be made extremely simple, and the more the lottery result of the game exceeds the design value, the more the unit state will continue. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such an event.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The establishment determination means performs the establishment determination with a first probability in the first advantageous state, and the second probability in the second advantageous state, regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means in the game in which the establishment determination is performed. The gaming machine according to feature bB4, characterized in that the establishment determination is made with a probability of 2."

Feature bB6. Second feasibility determination means (main controller 101) for executing a second feasibility determination to satisfy the continuation condition in the unit state based on the lottery result of the lottery means in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established. function to execute AT addition processing by
Characteristic feature bB4 or feature bB5, wherein the second establishment determination means is configured to perform the second establishment determination with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the determination result of the continuation determination performed when the unit state is updated indicates that the continuation condition is not satisfied, the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of the game in the unit state after the update. Since the second establishment determination that establishes is performed, the degree of attention to the lottery result of each game can be preferably increased. Moreover, since the second establishment determination is made according to the lottery result of each game without depending on whether the continuation rate of the advantageous state is high or low, for example, even if the continuation rate of the advantageous state is low, Therefore, the decline in interest in the game can be favorably suppressed without making the player give up.

It should be noted that the description that "the second determination is made with a common probability in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state" means "when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result , if the first advantageous state, the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition with a first probability; if the second advantageous state, the If the second success determination is performed so that the success result is obtained with a first probability, and if the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result different from the first result, if the first advantageous state , the second establishment determination is performed so that the establishment result is obtained with a second probability different from the first probability, and if the second advantageous state is obtained, the establishment result is obtained with the second probability. The second establishment judgment is performed according to the lottery result of each game without depending on the type of advantageous state. It is not excluded that the probability of establishing the continuation condition differs depending on the result of the lottery.

Feature bB7. The execution determination means determines execution of the specific notification according to the lottery result of the lottery means, and when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined first specific result (loss result). a probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the corresponding result is set to be higher in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state; When the lottery result is a second specified result (watermelon) different from the first specified result, the probability that the determination result of the execution determination by the execution determining means is the corresponding result is higher than the second advantageous state. It is set so that the first advantageous state is higher,
Characteristic features bB1 to bB6, wherein the lottery means is set so that the probability that the result of the lottery will be the first specified result is higher than the probability that the result of the lottery will be the second specified result. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, the execution determination of the execution of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. can also be noticed. In particular, it is possible to give the impression that success or failure of the continuation condition is determined according to the lottery result of each game by making a specific notification according to the lottery result of each game. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention.

Moreover, if the lottery result of the game is the first specified result, the first advantageous state is more likely to execute the specified notification than the second advantageous state, and if the second specified result is the second advantageous state rather than the first advantageous state. is set so that the specific notification is more likely to be executed, and the first specific result is more likely to appear as the lottery result of the game than the second specific result. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the specific notification is more likely to be executed in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, even though the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs according to the lottery result of each game. . By doing so, the game property of predicting the high or low continuation rate from the occurrence rate of the specific notification, or the game property of varying the number of games that provide a thrilling feeling until the specific notification occurs according to the high or low continuation rate , the relationship between the lottery result of the game and the rate of occurrence of the specific notification can be varied, and the game playability can be favorably improved.

Feature bB8. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101);
special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to the setting value set by the setting means (for example, a function of executing a suggestive effect setting process or a lottery process for the number of ending games by the display control device 81);
with
The game according to any one of features bB1 to bB7, wherein the execution probability or execution mode of the special notification by the special notification means differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. machine.

According to the above configuration, since the execution probability and execution mode of the special notification as the suggestive effect of the set value differ according to the continuation rate of the advantageous state, the continuation rate is high simply so that one advantageous state can be continued for a long time. It is possible to add not only the game property that expects the above, but also the game property that the advantageous state is expected to be a continuation rate that makes it easy to distinguish and predict the set value by special notification, and the interest of the game is suitable. can be improved to

In this case, the high or low continuation rate can be predicted and determined based on the occurrence rate of specific notifications, but when a special notification occurs, the set value can be narrowed down based on the relationship with the continuation rate predicted and determined by the specific notification. Since it is configured to carry out, the degree of attention to the specific notification is further increased in the sense of obtaining judgment materials for predicting and judging the set value.

It should be noted that the "special notification means" can also be expressed as follows.

"Special notification means capable of executing special notification corresponding to special information (set value, AT set counter information) beneficial to the player (for example, suggestive effect setting processing by display control device 81, ending game number lottery processing, , a function of executing processing for performing a suggestive effect of the AT set counter).

Feature bB9. When the first setting values (settings 1 and 2) are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the first mode (long ending game number) in the first advantageous state. On the other hand, in the second advantageous state, the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the second mode (short ending game number),
When second setting values (settings 5 and 6) different from the first setting value are set by the setting means, the special notification by the special notification means is performed in the second mode in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to feature bB8, characterized in that the special notification by the special notification means is likely to be executed in the first mode in the second advantageous state while the special notification is likely to be executed.

The above configuration is one aspect of the specific configuration of feature bB8, and as in the above configuration, it is possible to narrow down the setting value by the special notification aspect and the continuation rate (type of advantageous state). , it becomes possible to synergistically improve the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature bB10. The gaming machine according to feature bB8 or feature bB9, wherein the special notification means is configured to be capable of executing the special notification when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means.

As in the above configuration, by executing a specific notification with a different probability of occurrence depending on the continuation rate, it is possible to execute a special notification as a setting suggestion. It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification as a preliminary stage by using it.

Feature bB11. The special notification means executes the special notification in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, or executes the special notification when the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features bB8 to bB10, characterized in that the gaming machine is a configuration.

According to the above configuration, the situation of confirming the specific notification in anticipation of the advantageous state continuing for a long time and the special notification as a setting suggestion performed when the advantageous state ends is clearly distinguished. Thus, it is possible to avoid an event in which both notifications are overlooked due to trying to confirm both notifications, and it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to trying to generate both notifications in the same situation. becomes possible. Then, for example, even if the advantageous state ends with a small number of updates of the unit state, is the termination due to the low continuation rate (first advantageous state) in the first place? By grasping whether it is caused by the fact that the continuation condition was not met by chance despite the continuation rate (second advantageous state), by the time the special notification is executed, setting The configuration enables narrowing down of values. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately increase the significance of predicting and ascertaining the continuation rate based on the specific notification. If so, the motivation to predict the set value can be enhanced, and it is possible to change the mind when the advantageous state ends.

Feature bB12. In one of the unit states, after the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, the means for limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (the display control device 81 executes a process of setting an occurrence completion flag The gaming machine according to any one of features bB1 to bB11, wherein the gaming machine has a function of

According to the above configuration, in one unit state, after the specific notification as the advance notification is executed, the execution of the specific notification again is restricted. That is, in a configuration in which the higher the continuation rate of the unit state is, the more likely the specific notification is to occur, the higher the continuation rate is, the more games are played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed. In other words, the lower the continuation rate, the smaller the number of games played until the update of the unit state after the specific notification is performed, and the relatively larger number of games played until the specific notification is performed.

Here, if it is assumed that the player is looking forward to the occurrence of the specific notification, in one unit state, the number of games to look forward to whether the specific notification will occur, that is, the occurrence of the specific notification It is considered that the greater the number of games played before the game is played, the more the excitement of the unit state can be fully enjoyed. In that respect, as described above, the lower the continuation rate, the more the number of games until the specific notification occurs, so even if the continuation rate is in an advantageous state with a low continuation rate, you can fully enjoy the excitement of whether or not the specific notification will occur. It will be a configuration that allows you to entertain yourself. Conversely, the higher the continuation rate, the fewer the number of games played until the specific notification in one unit state occurs. It is possible to compensate for the fact that the number of games played until the occurrence of is small. As a result, at each continuation rate, it is possible to fully enjoy the game in which the occurrence of the specific notification is expected.

In addition, the invention described in the features bB1 to bB12 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bB1 to bB12, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bC group>
Feature bC1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played. While transitioning to a state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In a situation where the continuation condition is not satisfied, if the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (for example, a specific win such as Cherry A), it is determined that the continuation condition is satisfied, and the lottery is performed. If the result of the lottery by the means is a second result different from the first result (for example, a normal combination such as a push order bell), the establishment determination is not performed, or the continuation is performed rather than the first result. Establishment determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by the main control unit 101) that executes the establishment determination so that the condition is less likely to be established;
In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, specific notification means (display control device 81 A function to execute processing for performing a specific effect by) and
with
The game machine is characterized in that the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be performed in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result than in the game in which the lottery result is the first result.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is Moreover, in a unit state in which the condition for continuation is not satisfied, if the lottery result of the game is the first result, then determination is made that the condition for continuation is more likely to be satisfied in the unit state than in the case of the second result. The lottery result of each game in the unit state is favorably paid attention to.

However, for example, given the specific number of games in the unit state and the winning probability of the first result, it may be rare for the first result to be won during one unit state. However, there is a possibility that the player will not have much expectation for the establishment determination that has been prepared with much effort. On the other hand, if you increase the number of specific numbers, raise the winning probability of the first result too high, or raise the winning probability of the success judgment too high, there is a possibility that the ball payout rate will skyrocket. can not deny.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in a unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, a specific notification corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition can be generated before the unit state ends. , Since the specific notification is set to occur more easily in the game with the second result than in the first result, whether the continuation condition in the current unit state is satisfied in the game with the second result It is possible to give an impression such as By doing so, it is possible to preferably increase the expectation for the establishment determination without increasing the specific number.

Feature bC2. In a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, the means for restricting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (the continuation command by the display control device 81 function of not performing the specific effect if the specific effect lottery is not won, even in the game that receives the special effect lottery).

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the establishment result corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition, the first result is more likely than the second result. It is possible to make it difficult for specific notification to be performed in the game, which is the first result, even though the result of the establishment determination is likely to be the establishment result. By doing so, it is possible to make the player look forward to the game, which is the second result.

In addition, the above configuration does not deny that the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in the game in which the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. Any configuration may be used as long as the specific notification may not be executed in the game that results in establishment. However, a configuration may be adopted in which the specific notification is not completely executed in the game that results in establishment, in which case the effects described above can be expected more clearly.

Feature bC3. In a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the second establishment determination means (executing the AT addition processing by the main controller 101) that determines whether the continuation condition of the unit state after the next time of the unit state is satisfied function),
The specific notification means is a non-establishment means for executing the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not result in establishment corresponding to establishment of the continuation condition. The gaming machine according to feature bC1 or feature bC2, further comprising (a function of executing a process of executing a specific effect based on reception of a non-winning command by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the result of the establishment determination as a so-called additional judgment such as establishing the continuation condition after the next time is not satisfied, and the additional judgment is not won, the specific notification is executed in the game. be able to be By doing so, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the specific notification while preventing the continuation rate of the unit state from becoming too high, and it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the specific notification is performed in each game. It becomes possible.

Feature bC4. The second success determination means performs the success determination when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result, and makes the success determination when the lottery result of the lottery means is the second result. not performed, or executing the establishment determination so that the continuation condition is less likely to be established than in the case of the first result,
The non-establishment means executes the specific notification in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means based on the first result does not become the establishment result, The specific notification is not executed in a game in which the result of the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means does not become the establishment result, or the specific notification is less likely to be executed than in the case based on the first result. The gaming machine according to feature bC3, which is set to .

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is likely to be executed when the second result determination based on the first result determines that the winning is not successful. By doing so, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of the specific notification without excessively increasing the winning probability of the success determination by the second success determination means. Moreover, the first result is more likely to win the establishment determination by the second establishment determination means than the second result, so the association between the first result and the specific notification It is easy to perform, and it is possible to increase the reliability of the specific notification at the time of the first result (reliability that the continuation condition is established based on the first result of this time).

Feature bC5. In the unit state, any one of including advantageous content corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition of the unit state is satisfied after execution of the predetermined notification and non-advantageous content corresponding to the fact that the continuation condition is not satisfied (a function of executing a process for performing a battle effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a corresponding notification for executing the content notification of
Even if the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means is a establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition, in the game corresponding to the execution of the correspondence notification by the correspondence notification means, the Means for limiting the execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (function for executing processing for not performing the specific effect during the battle effect by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a game in which the success or failure of the continuation condition is notified by the content notification of the advantageous content or the non-advantageous content after the predetermined notification, the success or failure of the continuation condition is reported. Even if the conditions are satisfied, the execution of the specific notification is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in interest in the prepared response notification.

Feature bC6. After the start of the correspondence notification, if the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination unit is the establishment result, the means for changing the content notification in the correspondence notification to the advantageous content ( The gaming machine according to feature bC5, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of steps Sb2014 and Sb2015 as the processing for rewriting the battle by the display control device 81, for example.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the continuation condition is satisfied during the corresponding notification, the content notification in the corresponding notification is rewritten, so whether the corresponding notification and the continuation condition are satisfied or not. so that there is no contradiction with

Feature bC7. Means for permitting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means (continuation command by display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC6, further comprising: a function of executing a process for performing a specific effect in the game that receives the .

According to the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification may be permitted in the game in which the result of establishment corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition is allowed, the first result is the first result. In a configuration in which the result of the establishment determination is more likely to be the establishment result than in the case of two results, and in which the specific notification is more likely to be performed in the case of the second result than in the case of the first result, the first result It is possible to make it so that the specific notification may be performed even in the game that is the result. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity in presentation that the specific notification is not executed even though the player has won the first result as a so-called rare combination.

In addition, the above configuration denies that the specific notification is not executed by the specific notification means (configuration of feature bC2) in the game in which the result of establishment determination by the establishment determination means is the establishment result corresponding to the establishment of the continuation condition. However, it is sufficient if there is a case where the specific notification is executed at least in the game that becomes the establishment result. However, it may be configured such that the specific notification is always executed in the game that results in establishment.

Feature bC8. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, execution determination means (executing the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result by the lottery means function),
The execution determination means performs the execution determination regardless of whether or not the result of the establishment determination by the establishment determination means corresponds to the establishment of the continuation condition in the current game. The gaming machine according to any one of features bC1 to bC7.

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied by the success determination by the success determination means, regardless of whether or not it is a game, execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of the lottery means in the current game. By doing so, it is possible to set the occurrence rate of the specific notification separately from the winning probability in the determination of success, even though the determination is made according to the lottery result of each game, and the occurrence rate can be adjusted. It is possible to expect the effect of the feature bC1 by doing so.

Feature bC9. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (executing the specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function),
The lottery means performs the lottery to obtain the first result with a first probability, and performs the lottery to obtain the second result with a second probability higher than the first probability. is a
The execution determination means performs the execution determination so as to result in execution of the specific notification with a third probability when the first result is obtained, and the third probability when the second result is obtained. The execution determination is performed so as to result in executing the specific notification at a fourth probability that is lower than
Rather than the product of the first probability and the third probability (0.8% if the continuity rate is 10%, 1.0% if the continuity rate is 90%), The game according to any one of features bC1 to bC8, characterized in that the rate is set to be 5.5% if the rate is 10%, and 13.3% if the continuation rate is 90% (Fig. 131). machine.

According to the above configuration, there is a first result and a second result that is more likely to be won, and the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the first result is the execution of the specific notification triggered by the second result. In a configuration that is easier to win than the determination, the second result is more likely than the product of the winning probability of the first result (first probability) and the winning probability (third probability) of the specific notification execution determination triggered by the first result is set so that the product of the winning probability (second probability) and the winning probability (fourth probability) of the execution determination of the specific notification triggered by the second result is set to be larger. The specific notification triggered by the second result is more likely to occur than the specific notification triggered by the first result. By doing so, although it is easy to execute the specific notification triggered by the first result as a so-called rare hand, it is difficult to win the first result, and in fact, there are not many opportunities for the specific notification to be executed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience such as "no". Therefore, it is possible to expect that the specific notification will be performed even in the case of the second result that is relatively easy to win as a lottery result of the game, and it is possible to have a configuration that preferably exhibits the effect of improving the degree of attention using the specific notification. It becomes possible.

The inventions described in the features bC1 to bC9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bC1 to bC9, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bD group>
Feature bD1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantageous determination means (continuation determination processing and AT addition processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantageous determination to cause an advantageous event (AT mode set continuation) that is advantageous to the player based on a predetermined determination opportunity. functions to perform) and
If the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous execution means (AT mode by main controller 101) that causes the advantageous event at a predetermined specific timing A function to start a new set in the processing for use, for example, the processing of steps Sb1404 to Sb1406);
Execution judging means for judging whether to execute the specific notification corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judging means is the advantageous result and in a specific situation before the specific timing. (function of executing a specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81);
Specific notification means for executing the specific notification (function for executing specific effect setting processing by the display control device 81) based on the determination result by the execution determination means;
In the specific situation, after execution of a predetermined notification (for example, an ally attack presentation or an enemy attack presentation), advantageous content (ally victory presentation) corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination being the advantageous result and not the advantageous result Corresponding notification means capable of executing any of content notifications including unadvantageous content (enemy victory effect) corresponding to this )and,
Limiting means for limiting execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means in a situation where the corresponding notification is performed by the corresponding notification means (specific effect setting processing according to the value of the sub-side AT counter by the display control device 81 A function that executes processing, etc. to prevent
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, an advantageous judgment is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and if the result of the advantageous judgment is an advantageous result, the advantageous event occurs at a predetermined specific timing. As a result, the game is diversified by adding a game that causes an advantageous event to the game, such as obtaining a privilege in each game.

In such a game, depending on the degree of advantage of the advantageous event, the player's interest is focused on the advantageous judgment that causes the advantageous event rather than the lottery result of each game or the awarding of benefits based on the lottery result. As a result, there is an undeniable possibility that the playability of the slot machine, in which the player's operation is involved in the start of the game and awarding of benefits, will be neglected. In particular, when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the game until an advantageous event occurs becomes a game waiting for an advantageous event, and the player's interest may be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, it is possible to execute a specific notification corresponding to an advantageous result in a specific situation after the result of the advantageous determination that causes the advantageous event becomes an advantageous result and before the advantageous event occurs. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while anticipating that the specific notification will be performed in each game before the occurrence of the advantageous event. Further, in a specific situation, after the execution of the predetermined notification, the content notification including the advantageous content corresponding to the advantageous result and the non-advantageous content corresponding to the non-advantageous result of the advantageous judgment is performed. is executed, so that when the predetermined notification is performed, attention is drawn to which content notification is performed, and the effect is produced in accordance with the progress of the game toward the specific timing when the advantageous event occurs can be greatly enhanced.

On the other hand, in the corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the final content notification as described above, the content is determined by the notification content (predetermined notification mode) in the game before the game in which the content notification is performed. In some cases, the notification may be predicted to some extent, and in particular, if the specific notification corresponding to the advantageous result is performed during the corresponding notification, the interest in the content notification fades and the attention to the game is extremely reduced. It may get lost.

On the other hand, there are also needs of players who expect specific notifications as advance notifications of advantageous events, and there is concern about loss of game opportunities due to a configuration in which specific notifications are not performed.

Therefore, in the above configuration, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted only during the correspondence notification, the specific notification can be performed in a specific situation after the advantageous determination is made until the advantageous event occurs. A game is clearly distinguished from a game in which the corresponding notification is performed without the specific notification, and the performance effect by both notifications is preferable while preventing inconvenience due to overlapping of the corresponding notification and the specific notification. can be expected.

Feature bD2. As the game executed in the specific situation, a first specific game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and a game after the first specific game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means is set by the restriction means, and a second specific game in which the correspondence notification is made by the correspondence notification means is set.

According to the above configuration, the correspondence notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification is performed in the second specific game in the specific situation, and in the first specific game before the second specific game Therefore, a specific notification corresponding to an advantageous result can be made. In other words, after an advantageous determination is made, after a game in which a specific notification that definitely notifies the result of the advantageous determination can be performed, there is a corresponding notification in which the result of the advantageous determination is notified by the content notification after the predetermined notification. The configuration is such that the game to be executed is set. By doing so, the specific notification is performed after the corresponding notification of the advantageous content is performed, or the specific notification is not performed even though the corresponding notification of the advantageous content is performed. It is possible to expect a dramatic effect from both notifications while avoiding duplication and contradiction.

Feature bD3. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the multiple set modes function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time),
The gaming machine according to feature bD1 or feature bD2, wherein the selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification regardless of whether or not the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of the predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, there is no need to grasp whether or not the specific notification is executed. Therefore, the processing configuration of the selection means becomes overwhelmingly simple, and since there is no need to store the predetermined notification of the pattern when the specific notification is executed, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the storage capacity.

Further, for example, in the case of a configuration premised on a specific notification, a definitive notification mode is selected in which when the specific notification occurs, it is notified that the continuation condition is satisfied at the time of the content notification in the corresponding notification. , If such a mode is prepared, even if such a mode is selected, for example, if the specific notification is overlooked, the specific notification is missed in the definitive notification mode. A player may be notified of this after a while, which may cause inconvenience. Then, from the viewpoint of preventing overlooking of the specific notification, circumstances may arise in which the specific notification must be set in a flashy presentation mode. On the other hand, as in the above-described configuration, by setting a presentation mode that does not use a corresponding notification on the premise of the specific notification, it is possible to set the mode of the notification in a manner that allows the overlooking of the specific notification. It becomes the structure which does not need to make specific alert|report itself into a very flashy presentation. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the generation of the specific notification cannot be grasped unless the player pays more attention to the performance, and the degree of attention to the game performance can be favorably increased by utilizing the player's psychology not to miss the specific notification. can be increased to

Feature bD4. A plurality of modes of the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification by the corresponding notification means are set, and selection means (from the battle effect table by the display control device 81) for selecting the mode of the current predetermined notification from the multiple set modes function to execute the process of selecting the production table this time),
The selection means is configured to select the mode of the predetermined notification, which is a predetermined specific mode when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means,
The selection means can select the mode of the predetermined notification to be the specific mode even when the specific notification by the specific notification means is not executed. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the selection means selects the mode of predetermined notification by the corresponding notification means, the predetermined notification mode, which is the specific mode, is selected if the specific notification is being executed. By doing so, the mode of the predetermined notification is set to one mode with the execution of the specific notification, so that the processing configuration can be simplified. Moreover, since the mode of the predetermined notification that becomes the specific mode can be selected even when the specific notification is not executed, the mode of the predetermined notification that becomes the specific mode is exclusively used when the specific notification is executed. It can also contribute to the reduction of storage capacity compared to the configuration prepared as , and there is no need to make the specific notification flashy to prevent the specific notification from being overlooked, and the degree of attention to the specific notification can also be increased.

Feature bD5. The game according to feature bD4, wherein specific information (AT mode continuation rate, setting value) that can be beneficial to the player is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means. machine.

According to the above configuration, if it is assumed that the specific information is suggested by the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means, the execution of the specific notification makes the predetermined notification mode selected by the selection means unique. In the configuration of feature bD4, which is a specific mode (specific mode), there is a possibility that the player will not be able to know the specific information due to the specific notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by making the player look forward to the specific information, but not knowing the specific information in exchange for it.

Feature bD6. The gaming machine according to feature bD5, wherein the specific information is suggested by the mode (occurrence rate) of the specific notification by the specific notification means.

With the above configuration, although the specific information is not suggested by the specific notification mode, the specific information is suggested from the specific notification mode, so that the specific information is not suggested. Players who want to know will pay more attention to the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the game.

Feature bD7. Even if the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, the specific notification may not be performed by the specific notification means. Any one of features bD1 to bD6 characterized in that when the result is the advantageous result, the content notification in the correspondence notification by the correspondence notification means is set so as not to be the non-advantageous content. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result, the corresponding information will always be advantageous, but the specific information may not be executed. By doing so, basically, it is assumed that the result of the advantageous judgment is clearly notified by the corresponding notification, but it may be possible to know the details of the notification by the specific notification. The specific notification can be interpreted as an auxiliary notification of the corresponding notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of advantage in knowing whether or not the specific notification will be made by the specific notification, and it is possible to make the user look forward to the specific notification.

Feature bD8. In the game executed in the specific situation, game notification means for performing game notification by predetermined notification means (function for executing processing for performing confrontation effect by display control device 81),
The specific notification means executes, as the specific notification, changing a part of the game notification by the game notification means from a normal mode (for example, white character VS display) to a specific mode (for example, red character VS display). is the configuration,
The game notification means can execute the game notification in the normal mode when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result. The gaming machine according to any one of features bD1 to bD7, wherein the game notification can be executed in the normal mode when the result is different from the result.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed by changing part of the game notification performed in each game from the normal mode to the specific mode. In this case, the game notification in the normal mode is executed both when the result of the advantageous determination is an advantageous result and when it is not an advantageous result. In other words, even if the specific notification is not performed, it does not indicate that it is not an advantageous result, and since the specific notification only changes part of the game notification to the specific mode, it is not overlooked. more likely to be By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the game performance by utilizing the player's psychology that he does not want to miss the specific notification.

Feature bD9. Features bD1 to bD8 characterized in that the execution determination means is configured to determine execution of the specific notification based on a lottery result of the lottery means in the game executed in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, execution of the specific notification is determined based on the lottery result of each game in the specific situation. By doing so, the specific notification and the lottery result of each game are closely associated, for example, an advantageous determination is made according to the lottery result in the game in which the specific notification occurs, and the advantageous result is obtained in the advantageous determination. It is also possible to give the impression that

Feature bD10. The predetermined notification is configured to be executed over a plurality of games,
Notification mode information storage means (various table storage area 182a by display control device 81) for storing a notification mode information group (battle effect table) in which a plurality of types of notification modes of the predetermined notification over the plurality of games are set;
Notification mode selection means (display a function of executing processing for selecting the current battle effect table by the control device 81;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features bD1 to bD9, wherein the corresponding notification means executes the predetermined notification based on the notification mode selected by the notification mode selection means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification in the correspondence notification is executed over a plurality of games, and the predetermined notification is in the notification mode selected from the notification mode information group based on the result of the advantageous determination. done. Here, in the configuration in which the predetermined notification is performed over a plurality of games, if the configuration is such that the specific notification may be performed in the game in which the predetermined notification is performed, it is necessary to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game. If it is not configured to determine the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, there is a possibility that the specific notification to be executed and the content notification after that cannot be matched. In that respect, since the execution of the specific notification is restricted in the game in which the corresponding notification is executed as described above, it is not necessary to set the notification mode of the predetermined notification in each game, and the configuration is relatively simple. It becomes possible to perform corresponding notification.

Feature bD11. A first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) having different probabilities that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result are set. cage,
Characteristic features bD1 to bD10, wherein the execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the probability of execution of the specific notification is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, the occurrence rate of the specific notification differs according to the winning probability of the advantageous judgment, and a game such as predicting the winning probability of the advantageous judgment through the occurrence rate of the specific notification is added. Become. By doing so, it is possible not only to grasp the result of the advantageous determination by performing the specific notification, but also to predict the winning probability of the advantageous determination, so that the degree of attention to the specific notification can be appropriately increased. can be increased.

In addition, the inventions described in the features bD1 to bD11 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bD1 to bD11, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bE group>
Feature bE1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, a special number (10 games) less than the specific number is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and if the notification continuation condition for the unit notification state is satisfied, the Notification control means for starting the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state, but not starting the next unit notification state after the end of the unit notification state if the notification continuation condition is not satisfied. (a function of executing processing for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81);
When the notification continuation condition in the unit notification state is satisfied, specific notification means (the third a function to execute processing for performing a specific effect or a fourth specific effect);
When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means in one of the unit notification states, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. (a function of executing a process of moving to the next pseudo set based on the third specific effect or the fourth specific effect in the pseudo set effect by the display control device 81). game machine.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is Moreover, in the advantageous state, a special number of games that is less than the specific number of continuous games in the unit state is set as one unit notification state, and if the notification continuation condition for the unit notification state is satisfied, the unit notification state is continued. After the end, the next unit notification state is started, and if the notification continuation condition of the unit notification state is not satisfied, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. The number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state in the state. By increasing the number of repetitions of the notification state, it is possible to make it appear as if the continuation condition is likely to be satisfied.

However, in such a configuration that repeats the unit notification state in which the number of games is less than the number of games in the unit state, it may be difficult to match the game in which the unit state ends with the game in which the unit notification state ends. There is More specifically, if it is not a common divisor of the specific number, which is the number of games in the unit state, and the special number, which is the number of games in the unit notification state, there are games in which the unit state ends and games in which the unit notification state ends. If they do not match, there is a possibility that the presentation effect by the unit notification state cannot be favorably expected.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the notification continuation condition is established in the unit notification state, the specific notification is executed, and the unit is triggered by the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state. Since the notification state is ended and the next unit notification state is started, the number of games in the unit notification state can be easily matched with the number of games in the unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by repeating the unit notification state with the number of games smaller than the unit state.

Feature bE2. Means (AT game counter by main controller 101) for limiting the termination of the unit state under the condition that the number of games remaining in the unit state exists when the continuation condition is satisfied in the unit state A gaming machine according to feature bE1, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for preventing the AT mode set from being updated before the AT mode becomes 0.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state side ends the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit notification state, with the specific notification as a trigger, while the unit state side , even if the continuation condition is satisfied, under the condition that the number of games remaining in the unit state remains, the termination of the unit state and the start of the next unit state are restricted. In this way, by adjusting only the number of games on the unit notification state side to match the number of games in both states, it is possible to match the number of games in both states with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature bE3. The specific notification means is a first means for executing the specific notification according to the number of games remaining in the unit state (for generating a specific effect when updating a set that has not received a continuation command from the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature bE1 or feature bE2, characterized by comprising a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state is updated by generating the specific notification according to the number of remaining games on the unit state side, so the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state (special number ) can be adjusted without discomfort.

Feature bE4. The gaming machine according to feature bE3, wherein the first means executes the specific notification in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is greater than the special number.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and even if the next unit notification state is started, before the remaining number of games in the unit state is consumed, the special number in the next unit notification state It is possible to digest the number of games of Therefore, for example, the event that the unit state ends in the middle of the unit notification state does not occur, and it is possible to adjust the number of remaining games in the unit state and the number of continuous games in the unit notification state without discomfort. .

Feature bE5. The gaming machine according to feature bE3 or feature bE4, wherein the first means executes the specific notification according to the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied. .

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games equal to or greater than the specified number in the next unit state. Therefore, in the above configuration, since the opportunity to perform the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is limited to the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the processing for performing the specific notification according to the remaining number of games is executed. The frequency can be lowered, and the simplification of processing can be achieved.

Feature bE6. The specific notification means is a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied (a third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81). and a function of executing processing for performing these specific effects based on a fourth specific effect lottery).

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and at any timing the specific notification is executed. A special number of games in the next unit notification state can be played. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, the specific notification is executed regardless of the number of remaining games, thereby generating randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification. is possible, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Feature bE7. The second means includes execution determination means (display control) for determining execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. A function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the device 81), and executing the specific notification based on the determination result by the execution determination means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the execution determination of the specific notification is performed according to the lottery result of each game. Such an impression can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

Feature bE8. The specific notification means executes the specific notification when the number of games in the unit notification state reaches the special number in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE7, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for performing a third specific effect or a fourth specific effect in the final game of (1).

According to the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, the specific notification is executed in the final game of the unit notification state, so that the unit notification state ends without the specific notification being performed. You can eliminate the inconvenience of doing. In this case, regardless of what game number in the unit state the last game in the unit notification state in which the specific notification is performed is, there is a number of games to complete the next unit notification state after the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state without difficulty.

Feature bE9. In the unit notification state, the special number of games is executed without performing the specific notification, and after the unit notification state ends, a predetermined end notification is executed in the game until the end game in which the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE8, further comprising end notification means (a function of executing processing for performing an ending effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the game in which the unit state ends does not completely match the game in which the unit notification state ends, the difference can be made up by the predetermined end notification. With such a configuration, it is possible to reasonably adjust the number of games between the unit state and the unit notification state.

Feature bE10. The end notification means can execute the predetermined end notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number. The gaming machine according to feature bE9, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the predetermined number of games for end notification can be either the first number or the second number. There is no need to have a uniform number of games. By doing so, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the number of games in the unit notification state matches the number of games in the unit state with a relatively simple configuration.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the number of games played from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a first number, the end notification means provides the predetermined end notification over the first number of games. If the number of games played from the end of the unit notification state to the end of the advantageous state is a second number different from the first number, the predetermined number of games is played over the second number of games The game machine according to feature bE9, characterized in that it notifies the end of ".

Feature bE11. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the specific notification means is configured such that, in the unit notification state, the special number of games is completed without the specific notification being performed, and the After the unit notification state ends, the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to be ended so that the number of finished games until the end game in which the advantageous state ends is likely to be the first number, When the setting value set by the setting means is a second setting value different from the first setting value, the ending game number is set so as to easily become a second number different from the first number. Fourth means capable of executing the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state (such that the third specific effect is performed based on the result of lottery processing for the number of ending games by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features bE1 to bE10, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process (Fig. 159).

According to the above configuration, the number of games (the number of finished games), which is the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state, tends to vary depending on the set value, and the set value is predicted from the number of games of the difference. It is possible to realize novel playability.

Feature bE12. As the advantageous states, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the continuation condition of the unit state is more likely to be satisfied than the first advantageous state ) and
The fourth means is
In the first advantageous state, when the set value set by the setting means is the first set value, the ending unit notification state is set so that the number of finished games is likely to become the first number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the set value set by the setting means is the second set value, the number of finished games is set to easily become the second number. Execute the specific notification in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to end,
In the second advantageous state, when the setting value set by the setting means is the first setting value, the ending unit notification state is adjusted so that the ending game number is likely to be the second number. When the specific notification is executed in the previous unit notification state and the setting value set by the setting means is the second setting value, the number of finished games is set to easily become the first number. The gaming machine according to feature bE11, wherein the specific notification can be executed in the unit notification state before the unit notification state to end.

According to the above configuration, in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different continuation conditions, the set value indicated by the number of games (the number of finished games) of the difference between the unit notification state and the end game of the unit state is different. ing. In other words, in order to narrow down the setting value, it is not enough to simply grasp the number of games of the difference, and it is necessary to grasp which advantageous state is before that. Become. By doing so, it is possible to preferably improve the playability in an advantageous state.

Feature bE13. The specific notification means is a second means for executing the specific notification regardless of the number of games remaining in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied (a third specific effect lottery by the display control device 81). and a function to execute processing for performing these specific effects based on the fourth specific effect lottery),
The second means includes execution determination means (display control) for determining execution of the specific notification according to a lottery result of the lottery means in each game in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied. a function of executing a third specific effect lottery process or a fourth specific effect lottery process by the device 81), and executes the specific notification based on the determination result by the execution determination means,
The feature bE12, characterized in that the execution determination means performs the execution determination of the specific notification so that the probability of execution of the specific notification differs between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. The game machine described.

In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, even after the remaining number of games in the unit state is completed, there are games of a specific number or more in the next unit state, and at any timing the specific notification is executed. A special number of games in the next unit notification state can be played. Therefore, in the above configuration, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is established, the specific notification is executed regardless of the number of remaining games, thereby generating randomness in the execution timing of the specific notification. is possible, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is updated, and it is possible to diversify the performance.

Moreover, in the unit state where the condition for continuation is satisfied, execution of the specific notification is determined according to the lottery result of each game, so it gives an impression as if the condition for continuation is satisfied by the lottery result of each game. It is possible to give it to the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to each game.

In addition, since the execution determination of the specific notification is performed so that the probability of winning is different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to stay in any advantageous state from the occurrence rate of the specific notification. It becomes possible for the player to predict whether there will be. By doing so, in the middle of the advantageous state, the type of the advantageous state is grasped from the occurrence rate of the specific notification in the unit notification state, and when the unit notification state ends, the game number of the difference until the advantageous state ends and the number of games. , the type of the predicted advantageous state, and the set value can be predicted, which makes it possible to realize interesting game characteristics.

The inventions described in the features bE1 to bE13 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bE1 to bE13, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bF group>
Feature bF1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo-set effect by the display control device 81);
First means for performing the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number (start of a set in which a continuation command by the display control device 81 has not been received) The ability to perform processing to update the pseudo set in the game) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

However, in the configuration in which the continuation of such an advantageous state is notified by repeating the unit notification state, if the advantageous state ends despite the existence of the remaining number of games in the unit notification state, the original premise is It will collapse, and the reliability of the notification by the unit notification state will be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number, the specific notification is performed. In this state, the special number of games can all be played, and the advantageous state can be ended in a situation where there is no remaining number of games in the unit notification state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably expect the production effect by the notification of the unit notification state, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature bF2. In a situation where the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is greater than the special number, execution determination means for determining the execution of performing the specific notification in the unit notification state (a third specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81, a function of executing a fourth specific effect lottery process), and when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification, the specific notification is performed. The gaming machine according to feature bF1, characterized by comprising second means (a functional function of executing a process for performing a specific effect based on the lottery result of each specific effect lottery by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number, the specific notification is uniformly generated and the unit notification state is updated. Specific notification occurs based on the execution determination of , and the unit notification state is updated. By doing this, it becomes difficult to know when the specific notification will occur in each game in the unit notification state, and it is possible to suitably realize the game property that makes it possible to grasp the continuation of the advantageous state by repeating the unit notification state. Become.

Feature bF3. When a predetermined opportunity (AT set update) occurs in the advantageous state, after executing a predetermined number of games larger than the special number, end determination means (main controller) for determining the end of the advantageous state 101 to execute continuation determination processing),
The first means, when the end determination result by the end determination means is an end result (discontinuation) corresponding to ending the advantageous state after executing the predetermined number of games, the unit notification state The gaming machine according to feature bF1 or feature bF2, characterized in that the specific notification is performed in.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means is configured to perform end determination to end the advantageous state after a predetermined number of games, and when the result of the end determination is the end result, the specific notification is performed and the unit Notification status is updated. With such a configuration, the first means in the specific notification means only has to make a specific notification based on the determination result of the end determination means, and the first means does not need to constantly grasp the number of remaining games in an advantageous state. simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature bF4. a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the end determination means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the notification control means and provided separately from the first control device;
The gaming machine according to feature bF3, characterized by comprising:

If the end determination means and the specific notification means (especially the first means) are provided in separate control devices as in the above configuration, the effect of the feature bF3 can be more favorably achieved by decentralizing the functions. be able to.

Feature bF5. The gaming machine according to feature bF3 or feature bF4, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs each time the predetermined number of games are executed.

According to the above configuration, the end determination means does not perform end determination for each game, but performs end determination for each predetermined number of games. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the frequency of end determination, and to suppress the processing load.

Feature bF6. The notification control means provides third means (display The gaming machine according to any one of features bF3 to bF5, further comprising a function of executing processing for performing a specific effect when the AT set is updated by the control device 81).

According to the above configuration, even if the result of the end determination is not the end result, the specific notification may be performed by the third means. It is possible to successfully camouflage the game, and the specific notification is less likely to be a sign that the game will end after a predetermined number of games remain. In this way, even if the specific notification is made, it is possible to expect that the advantageous state will continue.

Feature bF7. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
Special notification means capable of executing a predetermined special notification over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number (processing for performing ending effects and jackpot effects by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features bF1 to bF6, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed by the first means, the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number, and among them, the special number of games is the unit notification state after being updated by the specific notification. is performed, and the special notification is performed over the number of games that is the difference between the predetermined number and the special number. By doing so, even if the predetermined number and the special number do not completely match, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period in the performance.

Feature bF8. The special notification means executes the special notification after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means is completed. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed after the next unit notification state updated by the specific notification, and the advantageous state ends when the special notification ends. In other words, the special notification becomes an effect indicating the end of the advantageous state, and after the end of the effect by the unit notification state, the game is supplemented by a so-called ending effect until the end of the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the performance during the period in which the performance by the unit notification state is not performed without discomfort.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The special notification means executes the special notification indicating that the advantageous state ends after the unit notification state following the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means ends. The game machine according to feature bF7 characterized by:

Feature bF9. The special notification means executes the special notification in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state subsequent to the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature bF7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the special notification is performed in the game between the unit notification state updated by the specific notification and the next unit notification state, and when the next unit notification state ends, the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the advantageous state will end if the specific notification is not performed during the unit notification state, and it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. . In this case, the special notification corresponds to a jackpot performance indicating that the specific notification occurs in the unit notification state and the transition to the next unit notification state occurs, and the performance during the period in which the performance in the unit notification state is not performed is uncomfortable. can entertain without

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The special notification means updates the unit notification state in a game between the unit notification state terminated based on the specific notification by the first means and the unit notification state next to the unit notification state. The gaming machine according to feature bF7, characterized by executing the special notification indicating that the game will be played.

In addition, the above "special notification" is not limited to the game between the unit notification state terminated by the specific notification by the first means and the next unit notification state, but the unit terminated by the specific notification by other means By configuring the special notification to be performed even in the game between the notification state and the next unit notification state, the special notification is a notification indicating that the unit notification state can be updated. becomes possible.

Feature bF10. The first means is configured to perform the specific notification in the unit notification state when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is a predetermined number larger than the special number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bF1 to bF9, wherein the predetermined number is a number equal to or less than two times the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the specific notification is performed to end the unit notification state, and then when the unit notification state is started from the next game, the unit notification state is terminated. When the special number of games has been completed, the number of games remaining in an advantageous state is less than the special number. That is, at the time when the unit notification state over the special number of games cannot be digested for two times, but can be digested for at least one, the specific notification by the first means is performed. Therefore, it is sufficient to end the effect by the unit notification state after performing without updating the unit notification state for one time (without generating the specific notification), and the advantageous state ends during the unit notification state. It is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

Feature bF11. The gaming machine according to feature bF10, wherein the predetermined number is one more than the special number.

According to the above configuration, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number, the unit notification state is started from the next game after the specific notification is performed and the unit notification state is terminated. has been consumed for a special number of games, the number of games remaining in an advantageous state becomes 0. By doing so, it is possible to match the end game in the advantageous state with the end game in the effect due to the unit notification state.

In addition, the invention described in the features bF1 to bF11 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bF1 to bF11, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bG group>
Feature bG1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. A game machine characterized by being set to

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. It is set so that the average number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when the specific notification is performed in the notification state is increased.

In this case, since the number of staying games in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, even if the number of games in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is the same. If it continues, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. In this way, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in the advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature bG2. The notification control means is an execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state (executing the third specific effect lottery process or the fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function), and the specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification,
By setting the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means will be the corresponding result is higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, the specific Characteristic bG1 characterized in that when the notification is executed, the average number of the number of executed games executed in the unit notification state is larger in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature bG1 simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature bG3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result of the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state with the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature bG2, which is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck. Advantageously, the attention to the results is enhanced.

Feature bG4. The gaming machine according to feature bG3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the average number of executed games in the unit notification state can be made larger in the second advantageous state, and the excellent game performance of the feature bG1 is realized with a relatively simple configuration. becomes possible.

Feature bG5. Any one of the characteristics bG1 to bG4, wherein the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set so that the second advantageous state is larger than the first advantageous state The game machine described.

In the above configuration, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively small for the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is set so that the second advantageous state is larger, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state The difference will not be enough to reverse the number of iterations. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression of a so-called successful race due to an excessively large difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state.

Feature bG6. Any one of the characteristics bG1 to bG5, wherein the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state is set so that the second advantageous state is smaller than the first advantageous state The game machine described.

In the above configuration, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is likely to be smaller in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state is relatively small for the number of continuous games. In the configuration that can be increased, the average number of repetitions of the actual unit notification state is also set to be larger in the first advantageous state, and the difference in the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is such a difference that the number of iterations is reversed. By doing so, by providing a difference in the average number of the number of executed games in the unit notification state, even in the first advantageous state in which the number of continuous games is small, the presentation effect is maximized to make it appear more advantageous than the second advantageous state. A limit can be expected.

When the above configuration is applied to feature bG5, the types of advantageous states are increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature bG5 and the first and second advantageous states in feature bG6 It is preferable that the combination with

Specifically, for example, in descending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the average number of executed games in the unit notification state is most easily reduced in the first advantageous state and most easily increased in the third advantageous state. In addition, the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature bG5), and the unit in the second advantageous state By making the average number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the average number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature bG6), the configuration of feature bG5 and the configuration of feature bG6 are inconsistent. It is possible to prepare without

Feature bG7. The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined number of games (18 games) or more are played. While transitioning to a state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state,
Since the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, the number of games is more likely to be increased in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features bG1 to bG6.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is satisfied with the specific number of games as one unit state, the transition to the next unit state is performed, and if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the transition to the next unit state is not performed. Secondly, in the advantageous state of the set management type, the continuation condition is more likely to be satisfied in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state, and the number of games is increased. In such a set management type advantageous state, the difference in the degree of advantage due to the difference in the number of sets is, of course, greater than the difference in the number of games played. The impression of advantage/disadvantage with is also greatly different. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature bG1 to the set management type advantageous state such as the above configuration, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is made larger than the difference in the number of repetitions of the actual unit state (set number difference). It is possible to increase or decrease the size, and more suitable effects can be expected.

Feature bG8. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
When the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the average number of games executed in the unit notification state is set to be different between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, a game of a special number is set as one unit notification state, and when a specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. Then, the next unit notification state is started, and if a special number of games are executed without specific notification being performed in the unit notification state, the next unit notification state is not started after the unit notification state is finished. As a result, the player can understand that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect the specific notification to be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. It is set so that the average of the number of executed games as the number of staying games in the unit notification state when the specific notification is performed in the state is different.

In this case, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to increase in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, it is assumed that the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are different. When the same number of games are continued, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state, the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state. It is possible to make it look smaller than the difference. Further, for example, if the number of staying games in the unit notification state tends to be smaller in the second advantageous state in which the number of continuous games tends to be longer than in the first advantageous state, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are the same. When the number of games continues, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the difference in the number of repetitions of the unit notification state appear larger than the difference in the number of continuous games between the second advantageous state and the first advantageous state.

Thus, according to the above configuration, the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state can be made to appear larger or smaller depending on the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, making it possible to improve interest.

The inventions described in the features bG1 to bG8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bG1 to bG8, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bH group>
Feature bH1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
The advantageous state is defined as one unit state in which a predetermined specific number of games (18 games) are played. on the other hand, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the execution of the unit state,
In the advantageous state, a first notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first notification (pseudo set effect) over a plurality of games;
In the advantageous state, second notification means (display control device) capable of executing second notification (for example, opening effect, ending effect, or jackpot effect) over a plurality of games so as to be continuous before or after the first notification A function of executing processing for performing opening effects, ending effects, and jackpot effects by 81);
with
When the number of games for which the first notification is performed by the first notification means and the number of games for which the second notification is performed by the second notification means are equal to or greater than the specific number, or less than the specific number A game machine characterized in that it is set so that there is a case.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine, an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player is a so-called set management type state in which a unit state is defined as a specific number of games played or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is

In such a configuration, the first notification and the second notification are performed during the unit state. There are cases where the number is greater than or equal to the number and cases where the number is less than the specified number. By doing so, even if the number of games in the unit state is not changed from a specific number, it is possible to make it appear as if the number of games in the unit state is increasing or decreasing on the production side, It is possible to improve the interest of the game in the advantageous state of the set management type without using complicated processing.

Feature bH2. The first notification means executes the first notification with the number of games played less than the specific number,
The gaming machine according to feature bH1, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification when the number of games played is less than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of games will not exceed a specific number with only one notification, and it is possible to give the impression that the set of both notifications corresponds to one unit state. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of making the length of the unit state change by both notifications.

Feature bH3. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The second notification means can execute the second notification over a third number of games, and can execute the second notification over a fourth number of games different from the third number. The gaming machine according to feature bH1 or feature bH2.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for both the first notification and the second notification can be changed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which the second notification is performed following the first notification and one set of effects is performed, even if the first notification is shortened, the second notification is lengthened. It is possible to create a sense of expectation for continuation.

In addition, the above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "fourth number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to feature bH1 or feature bH2, wherein the second notification means can change the number of games for which the second notification is performed.

Feature bH4. The first notification means executes the first notification with the game of the special number (10) as the upper limit,
When a predetermined specific notification is executed during the execution of the first notification by the first notification means, the first notification ends regardless of the number of games remaining in the first notification, and the second notification If the second notification by means is set to start and the specific notification is not executed over the special number of games, the advantageous state ends after the first notification ends. The game machine according to feature bH3, which is set as follows.

According to the above configuration, the first notification is performed over the special number of games, and if the specific notification is performed during the first notification, the second notification is performed, but the specific notification is performed during the second notification. If not, the advantageous state ends. Therefore, the player desires to secure a large number of games for the first notification by performing the specific notification at the earliest possible timing, and the desire to confirm that the advantageous state does not end by performing the specific notification at the earliest possible timing. It is possible to realize thrilling playability by utilizing conflicting desires.

Feature bH5. The second notification by the second notification means is terminated in the game in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous state is the number obtained by adding 1 to the special number, and the second notification by the first notification means is terminated from the next game. The gaming machine according to feature bH4, characterized by comprising means for starting 1 notification (function for executing processing for ending the jackpot effect in the eighth game of the final AT set by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the gaming machine having the feature bH4, in which the advantageous state ends when the first notification is executed without the specific notification being performed over the special number of games.

Feature bH6. In the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. Until the number of games added, means for continuing the second notification that has been executed (function for executing the processing of steps Sb3905 to Sb3908 by the display control device 81) characterized by comprising The game machine according to bH4 or feature bH5.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is not satisfied and if the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state is reached, if the second notification is performed in the game before the unit state is updated, The second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state reaches the special number+1. By doing so, the second notification is made in the last unit state, and then the first notification is made over the special number of games, ending the advantageous state. Such a configuration can be realized because it is a configuration that can change the number of games of the second notification. The end of the unit state and the end of both notifications can be matched well while making it possible to give the impression that it is

Feature bH7. In the game before the unit state in which the continuation condition is not established, when the second notification is executed by the second notification means, the number of remaining games in the unit state is 1 in the special number. If the number of continuous games of the second notification when the second notification that has been executed is continued is greater than the upper limit of the number of continuous games of the second notification, the Characteristic bH4 characterized by comprising means for ending the second notification and starting the first notification by the first notification means (function for executing the processing of steps Sb3909 to Sb3917 by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features bH6.

According to the above configuration, if the continuation condition is not satisfied and if the continuation condition is not satisfied as it is, the last unit state will be reached, and if the second notification is performed in the game before the unit state is updated. If the second notification is continued until the number of remaining games in the unit state reaches the special number + 1, the upper limit number of games for the second notification is reached, the second notification is terminated and the first notification is performed. make it possible to By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fact that the last unit state is reached from being realized through the fact that the length of the second notification is longer than usual.

Feature bH8. The first notification by the first notification means and the The gaming machine according to feature bH7, characterized by comprising means for performing the second notification (function for executing steps Sb3617 to Sb3620, steps Sb3715 to Sb3718, etc. by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the second notification is terminated and the first notification is started when the last unit state is updated, the first notification is performed before the number of remaining games in the last unit state reaches the special number +1. and the second notification are performed. Then, the first notification is made again in the remaining special number of games, and the advantageous state ends. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the unit state is lengthened or shortened by both notifications as in the feature bH1, and at the same time, the end of the unit state and the end of both notifications can be matched well. becomes possible.

Feature bH9. The first notification means can execute the first notification over a first number of games, and can execute over a second number of games different from the first number,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bH1 to bH8, wherein the second notification means executes the second notification over a third number of games.

According to the above configuration, the number of games for the first notification can change, while the number of games for the second notification does not change. By doing so, the effect of the feature bH1 can be expected only by adjusting the number of games on the first notification side, and the configuration can be simplified.

In addition, the above configuration does not exclude that the "first number" and the "third number" are the same number, and the "second number" and the "third number" are the same number. It does not exclude that.

When the above configuration is applied to features bH3 to bH8, for example, "the second notification means includes a specific second notification means and a predetermined second notification means, and the specific second notification means includes the The second notification can be executed over a third number of games and can be executed over a second number of games different from the fourth number, and the predetermined second notification means can perform the second notification is executed over the third number of games".

Also, the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"The first notification means can change the number of games for executing the first notification,
The gaming machine according to any one of features bH1 to bH8, wherein the second notification means cannot change the number of games for which the second notification is performed.

In addition, the invention described in the features bH1 to bH9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bH1 to bH9, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bI group>
Features bI1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated. On the other hand, when the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the next unit notification state is not started after the end of the unit notification state. Equipped with a control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81),
The number of times (the number of pseudo sets) of the unit notification states executed in the unit state is set so that the second advantageous state tends to be smaller than the first advantageous state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state for a player, a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is said that

In such a configuration, the special number of games is set as one unit notification state during the advantageous state, and when the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, the unit notification state is terminated and the next unit notification state is started. In addition, when the special number of games are executed without performing the specific notification in the unit notification state, after the unit notification state ends, the next unit notification state is not started. can grasp that the advantageous state will continue as long as the unit notification state is repeated, and can expect that the specific notification will be performed in the unit notification state.

As advantageous states, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different numbers of continuous games are set. is set so that the number of times of the unit notification state executed in . is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

In this case, if the unit state is repeatedly executed the same number of times in the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state. . Then, even if the second advantageous state lasts substantially longer than the first advantageous state and the number of repetitions of the unit state increases, the difference between the number of repetitions of the unit notification state and the second advantageous state is the difference. It is possible to make the difference between the number of continuous games and the first advantageous state appear smaller.

By doing so, it is possible to make the difference in the number of games in each advantageous state appear larger by the number of repetitions of the unit notification state, thereby making it possible to improve interest.

Feature bI2. The notification control means is an execution determination means for determining execution of the specific notification in each game in the unit notification state (executing the third specific effect lottery process or the fourth specific effect lottery process by the display control device 81 function), and the specific notification is performed when the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is a response result corresponding to executing the specific notification,
By setting the probability that the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means will be the corresponding result is higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, execution is performed in the unit state. The gaming machine according to feature bI1, wherein the number of times of the unit notification state (the number of pseudo sets) is likely to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of the characteristic bI1 simply by changing the winning probability of the execution determination of the specific notification.

Feature bI3. The execution determination means is configured to perform the execution determination according to the lottery result of the lottery means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result, the probability that the result of the execution determination in the first advantageous state becomes the corresponding result is the result of the execution determination in the second advantageous state with the corresponding result. The gaming machine according to feature bI2, which is set to be higher than the probability of becoming.

According to the above configuration, execution determination is performed according to the lottery result of each game, and it is possible to give the impression that whether or not the specific notification is executed depends on one's own luck. Advantageously, the attention to the results is enhanced.

Feature bI4. The gaming machine according to feature bI3, wherein the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state have a common probability that the lottery result of the lottery means will be the specific result.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to make the occurrence rate of the specific notification higher in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state without differentiating the probability that the lottery result of each game becomes the specific result. Therefore, as a result, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the unit state can be increased in the first advantageous state, and the excellent playability of the feature bI1 can be realized with a relatively simple configuration. becomes possible.

Feature bI5. Any one of features bI1 to bI4, wherein the total number of times of the unit notification states in the advantageous state is set to be greater in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state, which is based on the specific number of games in the advantageous state, tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased relative to the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the entire actual advantageous state is set to be greater in the second advantageous state. Therefore, the difference in the number of unit notification states in the unit state is not so large as to reverse the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the impression that the difference in the number of times of the unit notification state is too large and that it is a so-called successful race.

Feature bI6. Any one of features bI1 to bI5, wherein the total number of times of the unit notification states in the advantageous state is set to be smaller in the second advantageous state than in the first advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

In the above configuration, the number of unit notification states in one unit state, which is based on the specific number of games in the advantageous state, tends to be greater in the first advantageous state than in the second advantageous state, and the unit notification in the first advantageous state In a configuration in which the number of states can be increased relative to the number of continuous games, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the entire actual advantageous state is also set to be greater in the first advantageous state. The difference in the number of unit notification states in the unit state is such a difference that the total number of unit notification states in the advantageous state is reversed. By doing so, even in the first advantageous state with a small number of continuous games, it is possible to maximize the production effect that makes it look more advantageous than the second advantageous state.

When the above configuration is applied to feature bI5, the types of advantageous states are increased, and the combination of the first and second advantageous states in feature bI5 and the first and second advantageous states in feature bI6 It is preferable that the combination with

Specifically, for example, in descending order of the average number of continuous games, the first advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%), the second advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 60%), and the third advantageous state (AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) is provided, and the number of unit notification states in a unit state is made most likely to be the first advantageous state and the least likely to be the third advantageous state. In addition, the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state is larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the first advantageous state (feature bI5), and the unit in the second advantageous state By making the total number of repetitions of the notification state larger than the total number of repetitions of the unit notification state in the third advantageous state (feature bI6), the configuration of feature bI5 and the configuration of feature bI6 are inconsistent. It is possible to prepare without

The inventions described in the features bI1 to bI6 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bI1 to bI6, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic bJ group>
Feature bJ1. A game progression means (executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that advances the game as one game that is started based on a predetermined start operation by the player and ends based on the satisfaction of a predetermined end condition. function) and
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player in the game progressed by the game progress means;
Benefit granting means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) that grants benefits to the player according to the result of the lottery by the lottery means and the result of the game progressed by the game progression means;
A gaming machine comprising
As game states, a normal state (normal mode) and an advantageous state (AT mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 10%) and a second advantageous state (for example, AT mode with a continuation rate of 90%) in which the number of games tends to increase more than the first advantageous state and are set,
The advantageous state is configured such that a specific number of games (18 games) or more can be executed as a unit state (AT set). While moving to the next unit state, if the continuation condition is not satisfied, the advantageous state ends after the unit state is executed,
In the advantageous state, the game of the special number (10 games) is set as one unit notification state (pseudo set), and when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied, the transition to the next unit notification state is performed. , If the continuation condition is not satisfied, a notification control means (function for executing processing for performing a pseudo set effect by the display control device 81) that does not move to the next unit notification state is provided,
The game machine is characterized in that the notification control means is capable of executing the unit notification state across the unit states.

According to the above configuration, a game is started based on a start operation by a player, a lottery for the game is performed, and when a predetermined end condition is met, the game is finished and a privilege according to the lottery result can be given. In a so-called slot machine game machine, in an advantageous state for a player, a unit state is defined as a specific number of games or more, and the unit state is repeated as long as a continuation condition is satisfied. It is said that

In such a configuration, a set management type notification is also performed in which a special number of games is set as one unit notification state during the advantageous state, and the unit state is straddled between the unit states in the advantageous state. It allows the notification state to be executed. By doing so, it is allowed that the repetition of the unit state and the repetition of the unit notification state are not synchronized. It is possible to set relatively freely. Therefore, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of repetitions of the unit notification state relative to the actual number of repetitions of the unit state, which can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature bJ2. The gaming machine according to feature bJ1, wherein the specific number is a number different from an integral multiple of the special number, and the special number is a number different from an integral multiple of the specific number.

As in the above configuration, the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit state, and the number of games, which is the repeating unit of the unit notification state, are not in the relationship of an integral multiple, so that the unit state and the unit notification state are different. Hard to sync. Therefore, it becomes easier to execute the unit notification state across the unit states, and the effect of the characteristic bJ1 can be exhibited more clearly.

Feature bJ3. The notification control means terminates the unit notification state and starts the next unit notification state when a predetermined specific notification is performed in the unit notification state as a continuation condition for the unit notification state is established. On the other hand, if the special number of games is executed without the specific notification being performed, the condition for continuing the unit notification state is not met, and after the unit notification state ends, the next unit notification state is started. The gaming machine according to feature bJ1 or feature bJ2, characterized in that it has a configuration that does not.

According to the above configuration, the unit notification state may be updated by the specific notification without executing the special number of games, and the number of games in the unit notification state may change with the special number as the maximum number. become. By doing so, in executing the unit notification state across the unit states, if there are cases where the update of the unit state and the update of the unit notification state are synchronized, the unit state and the unit notification state It is possible to relatively freely manage the fact that there is a case where there is no synchronism with and depending on whether or not the specific notification is executed in the unit notification state, and it is possible to achieve the effect of the feature bJ1 with a simple configuration.

Feature bJ4. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state, first execution determination means (third specific Equipped with a function to execute the production lottery process, etc.)
The game according to feature bJ3, wherein the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of execution determination by the first execution determination means corresponds to execution of the specific notification. machine.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, in the unit state in which the continuation condition is satisfied, execution determination of the specific notification is performed regardless of the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, the degree of freedom of the game in which the specific notification is executed is greatly improved, and the scene where the unit notification state is executed across the unit states increases. Therefore, it becomes possible to exhibit the effect of characteristic bJ1 more suitably.

Feature bJ5. In the unit state in which the continuation condition is not satisfied, the second execution determination means (sub-side continuation by the display control device 81) that determines execution of the specific notification according to the number of remaining games in the unit state Equipped with a function to execute the third specific effect etc. in the first game of the AT set where the flag is not set),
The feature bJ3 or feature bJ4 characterized in that the notification control means executes the specific notification when the result of the execution determination by the second execution determination means corresponds to executing the specific notification. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, in a unit state in which the condition for continuation is not satisfied in a configuration in which the unit notification state is updated by the specific notification, execution of the specific notification is determined according to the number of remaining games in the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the event that the unit notification state continues despite the end of the unit state and the termination of the advantageous state, and the reliability of the unit notification state. can be guaranteed.

Feature bJ6. The game according to feature bJ5, wherein the second execution determination means performs the execution determination so that the specific notification is performed in a game in which the number of remaining games in the unit state is equal to or greater than the special number. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably exhibit the effect of the feature bJ5.

Feature bJ7. When the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied, the notification control means terminates the unit notification state so that the special notification is executed over a predetermined second special number of games. , The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ1 to bJ6, characterized in that after execution of the special notification, the next unit notification state is started.

According to the above configuration, the game in which the special notification is performed is interposed between the unit notification state and the unit notification state. As the special notification, for example, a jackpot performance may be conceived that congratulates the satisfaction of the continuation condition of the unit notification state. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect when the condition for continuing the unit notification state is satisfied. Even if the special number is the same number or the update of the unit state and the unit notification state happen to be synchronized, the game with the special notification causes a gap in the update, and the unit state and the unit state are straddled. As described above, a scene in which the unit notification state is executed is likely to occur. Therefore, the effect of the characteristic bJ1 can be exhibited more preferably while increasing the performance effect when the continuation condition of the unit notification state is satisfied.

Feature bJ8. The gaming machine according to feature bJ7, wherein the special notification can be executed across the unit state and the unit state.

According to the above configuration, there is a case where the special notification as the jackpot effect is also executed across the unit states. By doing so, it is possible to update the unit notification state regardless of the game in which the unit state is updated, and it is possible to greatly improve the degree of freedom in performing the performance by the unit notification state. .

Feature bJ9. The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ1 to bJ8, wherein the special number is smaller than the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is likely to be greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state, and by utilizing the fact that the unit notification state is frequently updated, the actual number of continuous games in the advantageous state It is possible to give an impression that the advantageous state is continuing for a longer time than that. In addition, by doing so, one unit notification state does not straddle a plurality of unit states when the unit notification state straddles the unit states. Therefore, the update of the unit notification state is performed during at least one unit state, and even though the advantageous state ends without the continuation condition of the unit state being satisfied, the unit notification state is still a special number. It is possible to make it difficult for an event such as not finishing the game to occur.

Feature bJ10. The gaming machine according to any one of features bJ1 to bJ9, wherein in one of the advantageous states, the continuation condition of the unit notification state is more likely to be satisfied than the continuation condition of the unit state.

According to the above configuration, the number of repetitions of the unit notification state is greater than the number of repetitions of the unit state. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression that the game continues longer than the actual number of games in which the advantageous state continues.

The inventions described in the features bJ1 to bJ10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features bJ1 to bJ10, features bA1 to bA18, features bB1 to bB12, features bC1 to bC9, features bD1 to bD11, features bE1 to bE13, features bF1 to bF11 , Features bG1 to Features bG8, Features bH1 to Features bH9, Features bI1 to Features bI6, and Features bJ1 to Features bJ10. It is also possible to combine some or all of the respective technical ideas and apply them. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature bA group to feature bH group to each configuration of the feature bA group to feature bH group described in detail above, It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The following feature cA group to feature cH group are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the 3c embodiment, these modifications, or combinations thereof.

<Characteristic cA group>
Feature cA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
After performing specific notification (betting process presentation) when the bet number operation of the bet number operating means is performed, bet number correspondence announcement (bet correspondence presentation) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34) betting amount notification means (function of executing betting effect setting processing by display control device 81);
In a specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed, when the starting operation means is operated, specific processing means (specific a function of executing a process such as switching to a bet corresponding effect based on a start operation command in a replay bet effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a bet amount is set when a bet amount operation is performed by a bet amount operating means, and a bet corresponding to the set bet amount is issued through a specific notification. Number corresponding notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount corresponding notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet amount operation has been accepted by the specific notification, so that unnecessary bets can be made. It is possible to prevent number operations.

However, in this case, for example, the starting operation means may be operated during execution of the specific notification and before the notification corresponding to the number of bets is performed, and the rotating body may be started to rotate based on the operation. Assumed, in such a case, there is a high possibility that the effect and processing for starting rotation of the orbiting body overlap with the specific notification and the processing for specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase. There is a possibility of confusion for the player due to duplication of .

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means is provided for executing the specific processing that allows the specific notification being executed to be limited. The overlap between the rotation start effect and the specific notification, and the overlap between the rotation start process and the specific notification process are eliminated, and the occurrence of the various inconveniences described above can be favorably avoided. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

Feature cA2. The characteristic cA1, wherein the specific processing means is capable of executing a specific process for restricting execution of at least a part of the specific notification based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated under the specific situation in which the specific notification is being executed, the execution of at least a part of the specific notification is restricted, so the starting operation means It is possible to eliminate the overlap with the notification for start executed based on the operation of , and it is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the player is confused due to the overlap of both notifications.

Feature cA3. The specific notification includes a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) and a second specific notification (betting sound effect).
The specific processing means restricts execution of the first specific notification out of the specific notifications and execution of the second specific notification out of the specific notifications based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature cA2, wherein the specific processing can be executed so as to allow

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature cA2, and in particular, as a configuration for restricting at least a part of the notification, the specific processing is performed so as to restrict the execution of the first specific notification and allow the execution of the second specific notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in processing load due to restricting the execution of all specific notifications, and to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to stopping the specific notification that has been executed halfway. is also possible.

It should be noted that the above configuration is limited to configurations such as "the amount of data to be executed is greater for the first specific notification than for the second specific notification, or the processing load for processing for execution is greater". Therefore, the significance of restricting the execution of the first specific notification is enhanced. As a specific configuration of such a configuration, a configuration in which "the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect" can be considered.

Conversely, when limiting the configuration such as ``the second specific notification has a larger amount of data to be executed than the first specific notification or the processing load of the process to be executed is large'', already It is also possible to eliminate the waste of canceling the second specific notification that has already been set. or the processing load of the already-executed processing is large”.

Feature cA4. The number-of-bet notification means, even when the specific notification is restricted by the specific processing by the specific processing means, executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets in the same manner as when the restriction is not applied. (see, for example, FIG. 243(d)).

According to the above configuration, although the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the starting operation means, there is no need to change the aspect of the bet number-based notification regardless of whether there is a restriction. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in processing load due to duplication of processing with a relatively simple configuration.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "same mode" does not mean exactly the same mode, but may be a different mode that is difficult or impossible for the player to identify.

In addition, the above-mentioned "same mode" may be expressed as "same timing", and by doing so, it is not necessary to change even the execution start timing of the notification corresponding to the number of bets, further reducing the processing load. It becomes possible to plan

Feature cA5. The number-of-bets notification means can execute the number-of-bets-based notification based on the restriction of the specific notification by the specific processing performed by the specific processing means (for example, FIG. 243(b) ))), the gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA4.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is restricted based on the operation of the starting operation means, it is switched to the notification corresponding to the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period in which the number of bets is unknown even though the rotation of each orbiting body has been started based on the operation of the starting operation means.

Feature cA6. The specific notification includes a first specific notification (lighting effect by the bet display unit 34) by the first notification unit (BET display unit 34), and a second notification unit (speaker 64) different from the first notification unit. It is a configuration that is executed including a specific notification (sound effect when betting),
The number-of-bet notification means executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets by the first notification unit,
The specific processing means restricts execution of the first specific notification out of the specific notifications and execution of the second specific notification out of the specific notifications based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature cA5, wherein the specific processing is executed so as to permit.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in the processing load due to restricting the execution of all the specific notifications, and it is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity due to stopping the specific notification that has been executed halfway. is also possible. Assuming that the bet number corresponding notification is performed by the first notification unit, the first specific notification in the first notification unit is limited and switched to the bet number corresponding notification. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a blank period during which the notification unit does not notify the number of bets.

Feature cA7. When the start drive control is performed by the drive control means based on the operation of the start operation means, the start notification means (display A function of executing a start-time effect setting process by the control device 81),
The specific processing means executes the specific processing when a predetermined start notification (press order notification effect) is performed by the start notification means based on the operation of the starting operation means in the specific situation, When the predetermined start notification by the notification means is not performed, or when the predetermined start notification by the start notification means and the specific notification do not overlap, it is possible to prevent the specific process from being executed (for example , FIG. 247).

According to the above configuration, when the start notification as an effect at the start of rotation of the circulating body overlaps with the specific notification, the specific processing is performed so that the specific notification can be limited, but the start notification is not executed. Also, when the start notification and the specific notification do not overlap, the specific process is not executed. By adopting such a configuration, even if the specific process is for avoiding duplication of notifications, the specific process is not performed in a situation where there is no duplication of notifications in the first place. , it is possible to contribute to the reduction of the processing load.

Feature cA8. Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses A function that executes processing to wait for the start of rotation until
If the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period elapses, the permitting means capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification (specific re-game bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81 A function that executes processing to prevent switching to a bet-compatible effect in the start operation during the wait period in
The gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA7, characterized by comprising
According to the above configuration, since the starting drive control and the starting drive control are longer than the specific period, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the game is optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the number-of-bets corresponding notification is performed via the specific notification based on the operation of the number of bets before the specific period elapses, the starting operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of the starting drive control is restricted before the specific period elapses, so the rotation of the orbiting body is not started based on the operation of the starting operation means. Therefore, in such a case, the inconvenience shown in the feature cA1, such as the overlap of the rotation start notification and processing with the specific notification and the specific notification processing, does not occur, or the degree of inconvenience does not occur even if it occurs. There is a high possibility that this is low, and it is considered that there is little need to restrict specific notification. Therefore, in such a case, by providing a permitting means capable of permitting the execution of the specific notification, it is possible to avoid the restriction of the specific notification even in an unnecessary scene. , it is possible to optimize the game performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Feature cA9. Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses function to wait for the start of rotation until
When the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation before the specific period elapses and the start drive control based on the operation of the starting operation means is executed in the specific situation , the gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA8, characterized in that the specific process can be executed so that the specific notification can be restricted when the start drive control is performed.

According to the above configuration, since the starting drive control and the starting drive control are longer than the specific period, the number of games that can be executed per unit time is limited, and the game is optimized. In such a configuration in which a specific period is set and a so-called weight is defined, when the number-of-bets corresponding notification is performed via the specific notification based on the operation of the number of bets before the specific period elapses, the starting operation is performed during the specific notification. Even if the means is operated, the execution of start drive control is restricted before the elapse of the specific period, but the start drive control based on the operation of the start operation means may be executed after the elapse of the specific period. There is a possibility that the specific notification has not yet ended at the timing when the start drive control is performed. In this regard, in the above configuration, in such a situation, the specific processing is executed so that the specific notification is restricted when the start drive control is performed. is executed, the specific notification can be restricted, and the effectiveness of the specific processing can be enhanced.

Feature cA10. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means (re-game setting processing by main controller 101) for executing re-game processing in which the same number of bets is set as the re-game state, and the lottery by the lottery means can be received again function),
When the re-game processing is performed based on a specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the bet number notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet number operation of the bet number operation means. , a specific bet amount notification means (function for executing a specific regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process. The gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA9, wherein

According to the above configuration, when a specific re-game result is won and the re-game process is performed, the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the re-game process is sent by the bet amount operation means. It is performed based on the bet number operation. Moreover, in this case as well, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. becomes. By doing so, even if the result of the replay is to perform the replay process, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as the game after the result of another small winning combination or the result of losing the game. For example, a specific replay result can be treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results by using the fact that the player is given an impression that is not a replay result. It is also possible to enhance the effect of giving a certain impression, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Regarding the "result of replay", "as the result of the lottery by the lottery means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time. The replay result for which a replay is awarded", and this point is the same for the "replay result" in other features and other feature groups.

Further, in the above configuration, the above effect can be further clarified by limiting the following small win results and losing results. This point can also be applied when clarifying the relationship between another feature or another feature group and the "replay result".

"As a lottery result by the lottery means, a small combination result (for example, a small combination result) to which a predetermined number of game values are awarded is set as a privilege by the privilege granting means,
The number-of-bets informing means, in the next game after a predetermined number of game values are awarded by the awarding means based on the result of the small win, the specific number of bets based on the number-of-bets operation of the number-of-bets operating means. after executing the bet number corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation" configuration, and "the loss result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
The bet amount notification means executes the specific notification based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means in the next game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the lost result, and then performs the bet amount operation. execute the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set based on the above.

Feature cA11. When the re-game processing is performed based on a predetermined re-game result (normal re-game result) different from the specific re-game result, the bet amount notification means controls the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means. Predetermined bet amount notification means capable of executing the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process without intervening (a function of executing the normal regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to feature cA10, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the peculiarity of performing the bet-number corresponding notification through the bet-number operation in the case of a specific replay result is clarified. In other words, as in the case of a predetermined replay result, normally, the bet number corresponding notification is performed without going through the bet number operation, but in the case of a specific replay result, the bet number It is clarified that the response notification is performed. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the specific replay result is not a type of replay result such as a predetermined replay result, but is treated in the same way as other minor win results or losing results. , the diversification of the game using it can be achieved, and in order to diversify the game in this way, the possibility that the starting operation means will be operated under a specific situation as described in the feature cA1 will arise. Therefore, the significance of providing the specific processing means for executing the specific processing capable of limiting the specific notification is greatly enhanced.

Feature cA12. The predetermined number-of-bets informing means executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets without executing the specific notification, or executes the notification corresponding to the number of bets after executing a predetermined notification different from the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature cA11, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, not only the presence or absence of the bet number operation but also the notification mode until the bet number corresponding notification is performed differs between a predetermined regame result and a specific regame result. In this case, since the specific re-game result is common to other small winning combination results and loss results, the above configuration allows the specific re-game result to be similar to the predetermined re-game result. It is possible to help give the impression that the result is treated in the same way as other minor combination results or losing results, rather than replay results.

Feature cA13. When the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means is performed, the bet amount information corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is displayed by predetermined notification means (BET display a second bet number notification means (function for executing BET processing by the main controller 101) executed by the unit 75);
When the replay processing is performed by the replay setting unit, the second bet amount notification means performs the bet amount operation regardless of the type of replay result that triggered the replay processing. The gaming machine according to any one of features cA10 to cA12, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to notify the number of bets regardless of the number of bets.

According to the above configuration, when a replay process based on a specific replay result is performed, the notification of the bet amount corresponding to the bet amount is performed based on the bet amount operation. is performed without going through the bet operation regardless of the type of replay result. By doing so, the specific replay result is a kind of replay result, while giving the impression that the specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results through the bet number correspondence notification. For example, a fraudulent act that causes a replay process to be performed even though it is not a replay result, or a specific replay result is a result of another small combination or a loss result. A game hall manager or the like preferably discovers a fraudulent act of trying to enjoy the benefit of a specific replay result despite other small win results by using the impression treated the same as becomes possible.

In addition, since the number of bets is set when the replay process is carried out, for a specific regame result, an otherwise unnecessary bet number operation is performed for the purpose of effect, as in the above configuration. If the second bet number reporting means notifies the bet number without going through the bet number operation, the start operation can be performed without going through the bet number operation even after a specific replay result. It is possible to clarify that it is a composition.

Feature cA14. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit,
The specific notification means has the specific number of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c), and each notification unit is configured to be switchable between a notification state (lighting state) and a non-reporting state (extinguishing state). has been
The number-of-bet notification means sequentially switches the number of notification units corresponding to the number of bets set by the number-of-bet setting means to the notification state as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA13, wherein the state in which the notifying unit is switched to the notifying state is executed as the number-of-bet notification.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the specific notification. is set one by one, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet number operation has been accepted by switching the corresponding notification unit to the notification state.

Feature cA15. When performing the specific notification, the number-of-bet notification means switches a predetermined notification section to the notification state, and after a predetermined period of time (0.1 sec or 0.2 sec), switches the notification section next to the predetermined notification section to the The gaming machine according to feature cA14, characterized in that it is configured to switch to a notification state.

As in the above configuration, when the notification unit is sequentially switched to the notification state every predetermined period in the specific notification, the specific notification is performed over a relatively long period of time depending on the number of bets. As a result, an event in which the starting operation means is operated during the specific notification is more likely to occur, and the significance of providing the specific processing means of feature cA1 is enhanced.

Feature cA16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the privilege granting means provides the replay as a privilege corresponding to the replay result. In a replay state in which the same number of bets as the number of bets drawn by the lottery means that resulted in the game result is set by the bet number setting means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again. Replay setting means for executing replay processing (function for executing replay setting processing by main control device 101),
When the re-game processing is performed based on the special re-game results (normal replies A to C), the bet amount notification means is a special If it is a situation (for example, an AT start game), after executing the specific notification based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means, the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process on the other hand, if the situation that resulted in the special replay result (normal replies A to C) is different from the special situation (for example, normal game state), the bet of the bet amount operating means Special bet number notification means (normal When the 2nd re-game winning result or the 3rd re-game winning result is established in Lips A to C, specific re-game bet effect setting processing is performed, and when the 1st re-game winning result is established in normal Lips A-C The gaming machine according to any one of features cA1 to cA15, further comprising a function of performing a normal replay bet effect setting process.

According to the above configuration, when the special re-game result is won and the re-game process is performed, the bet number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-game process is the special re-game result. If the situation in which the resulting prize is established is a special situation, it is performed based on the bet number operation of the bet number operating means, while if it is not a special situation, it is performed without the bet number operation. In this case, in the case of a special situation, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. It becomes a notification mode. By doing so, even if the result of the replay is to perform the replay process, depending on the situation, it is possible to proceed with the game in the same flow as the game after other minor wins or the result of losing. , it is possible to optimize the progress of the game, and by using the fact that the player is given an impression that is not the replay result, for example, the effect of making the player think that the special replay result is another small combination or a losing result. Also, it is possible to expect the game to be diversified by using the effect of making the player think that the other small combination or the result of losing.

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature cA10, the feature cA11, and other features citing these, the "special replay result" may be either the "specific replay result" or the "predetermined replay result". The result may be the same, or may be different from the "specific re-game result" or the "predetermined re-game result".

In addition, the above-mentioned "special re-game result" is a result of winning the "specific re-game result" and "predetermined re-game result", and in a special situation, the winning of the specific re-game result is established. In this way, if there is no special situation, winning of a predetermined replay result may be established.

Feature cA17. As game states, a first game state (normal mode) and a second game state (AT mode) different from the first game state are set,
The gaming machine according to feature cA16, wherein the special situation is a situation in which a transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state occurs.

When a special replay result wins in a situation where the game state shifts as in the above configuration, if notification corresponding to the bet amount is performed based on the bet amount operation, the transition to the second game state can be changed to the bet amount. It is possible to start from the operation, and it is possible to start the second game state with a new feeling without taking over the result of the previous first game state.

Feature cA18. Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, an advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing the AT mode transition lottery process by the main controller 101) that produces an advantageous event for the player,
A first specific result (specific re-game result) and a second specific result (for example, normal re-game result) are set as the lottery result by the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means is more likely to cause the advantageous event when making the advantageous determination based on the first specified result than when making the advantageous determination based on the second specified result, or A configuration that is likely to result in the occurrence of the advantageous event,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specific result, in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed after the revolving body in the game with the first specific result is stopped, When the starting operation means is operated, the specified processing is executed, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specified result, the revolving body rotates in the game with the second specified result. After the is stopped, even if the start operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is performed, the specific process is not executed. Features cA1 to The gaming machine according to any one of features cA17.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first identification result tends to result in an advantageous result in the advantageous determination than the second identification result, after the first identification result, when the starting operation means is operated in the specific situation While the specific notification is limited, after the second identification result, the specific notification is not limited even if the starting operation means is operated in the same specific situation. By doing so, for example, the result of the advantageous judgment is notified based on the operation of the start operation means, and the more advantageous the result of the advantageous judgment, the more advantageous the game progresses. The notification is likely to be restricted in the middle, and it is possible to suitably avoid the start of rotation of the circulator during the specific notification.

Feature cA19. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation means is operated, after executing the specific notification (betting process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is given in a predetermined manner. a bet number notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means;
Specific processing means for executing a predetermined specific process (start of specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is being executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing such as switching to a bet-compatible presentation based on an operation command.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet amount operating means is operated, the bet amount of the game is set, and after specific notification, the bet amount corresponding to the game bet amount is handled. Notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the performance and processing overlap with the specific notification and the processing for the specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that the duplication of the performance etc. will cause confusion for the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing is provided. By setting it as a process for eliminating the overlap between the effect and the specific notification, and the overlap between the process for starting rotation and the process for the specific notification, the occurrence of the above various inconveniences can be preferably avoided. It becomes possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

The configurations defined by the features cA1 to cA18 may be applied individually to the feature cA19, or may be applied in combination. Also, some of the configurations limited by features cA1 to cA18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

Feature cA20. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation means is operated, after executing the specific notification (betting process effect), the bet number corresponding notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is given in a predetermined manner. a bet number notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by the notification means;
When the rotation of each of the rotating bodies is started by the drive control means, the start notification means (starting effect setting processing by the display control device 81) for executing the start notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means function) and
Specific processing means (display control device) for executing specific processing capable of limiting either the specific notification or the start notification when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is being performed A gaming machine characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of switching to a bet corresponding effect based on a start operation command in the specific re-game bet effect setting process by 81, a process of delaying the start of the pressing order notification effect, etc.). .

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet amount operating means is operated, the bet amount of the game is set, and after specific notification, the bet amount corresponding to the game bet amount is handled. Notification is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing overlap with the specific notification and processing for specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that players will be confused due to duplication of effects etc. .

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing that can limit the specific notification or the start notification is provided. It is possible to eliminate the overlap between the notification and the specific notification, and the overlap between the process for start notification and the process for specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

The configuration defined by the features cA1 to cA18 may be applied individually to the feature cA20, or may be applied in combination. Also, some of the configurations limited by features cA1 to cA18 may be applied, or they may be applied in combination.

The invention described in the features cA1 to cA20 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In a game machine, it is necessary to optimize the progress of the game, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cB group>
Feature cB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) for performing an operation for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process by the main controller 101);
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again in a replay state in which the same number of bets as the lottery number of the current lottery by the lottery means is set. The replay result is set,
Operation notification means (first credit lamp 56b) provided for the bet amount operation means and capable of switching between a first notification state (lighting state) and a second notification state (light-out state);
a first control means (a function of executing a process of turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81) for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state;
Second control means for switching the operation notification means to the second notification state when the operation notification means is in the first notification state and the bet number operation means is operated. a function to execute consecutive bet effect setting processing);
When the re-game result that triggered the setting of the re-game state is a predetermined re-game result, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in the re-game state. Third control for setting the operation notification means to the first notification state in the replay state when the replay result that triggered the setting is a specific replay result different from the predetermined replay result means (a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
The first notification state of the operation notification means set in the case of the specific replay result is maintained over a specific period, and when the specific period has passed, the operation notification means is set to the second notification state. A fourth control means (function for executing standby processing by the display control device 81) that switches to
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery according to the set bet amount is performed, and the game is stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is given when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the operation means, operation notification is given to the bet amount operation means. means is provided, and when the number of bets can be set by operating the bet number operating means, the first notification state is set, and when the operation is performed in the first notification state, the first notification state is changed to the first notification state. Since it is switched to the 2 notification state, the player is notified that it is necessary to operate the bet number operating means to start the game, and that the operation has been accepted when operating the bet number operating means. becomes easier to understand.

In this case, a replay result is set as the result of the lottery so that the player can receive another lottery with the same number of bets, and there is no need to set a new number of bets after the result of the replay. However, in the above configuration, the operation notification means is not set to the first notification state in order to clarify that setting a new bet number is not required for a predetermined regame result, but if a specific regame result , the operation notification means is set to the first notification state so as to prompt the operation of the bet number operation means. It is possible to give the player the impression of being treated the same.

However, these predetermined re-game results and specific re-game results are merely re-game results. Although it is possible to play the game at least once without doing it, it will be abandoned. In addition, when the gaming hall is closed, if it is possible to play the game the next day without having to set a new bet amount, the state in which the previous day's re-game result win has been taken over. The player will know that the set value has not been changed, and conversely, if a new bet amount needs to be set on the next day, there is a possibility that the set value has been changed. That is to be grasped by the player.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first notification state is set based on a specific re-game result, the first notification state is maintained for a specific period of time, and the specific re-game result is the result of another minor combination. While trying to give the impression that it is treated the same as the result of losing or losing, after the specific period has passed, the state is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, so other predetermined replay results , and it is possible to clearly grasp the situation in which a replay result win has been established.

Feature cB2. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a small combination result in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded by the privilege granting means is provided,
The lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the result of the small winning combination, and after the circulation of the rotating body corresponding to the result of the small winning combination is stopped, the operation notification means can be placed in the first notification state. Control means (function for executing processing for turning on the first credit lamp 56b by the display control device 81);
After the circulation of the revolving body corresponding to the small combination result is stopped and the operation notification means is placed in the first notification state, the first notification state can be maintained when the specific period elapses. A sixth control means (a function of executing a process that does not set the temporary standby state after a small win by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature cB1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, after the result of the small winning combination, the operation notification means can be brought into the first notification state as in the case of the specific replay result. On the other hand, after the specific period has elapsed, the second notification state is set in the case of a specific replay result, and the first notification state is maintained in the case of a minor combination result. By doing so, in the configuration of the characteristic cB1, not only is it possible to grasp the situation in which a specific re-game result win has been established, but also whether a specific re-game result win or not after the result of a minor combination It is possible to make it possible to determine whether or not there is any.

In other words, for example, when the small combination result is a stop result similar to a specific re-game result, the operation notification means can be in the first notification state regardless of the result, but the specific re-game result After that, it will be in the second notification state after the lapse of a specific period, and after the result of a similar stop roll, the second notification state will not occur even after the specific period has passed. It is possible to realize a new game feature such that the state change of the operation notification means after a specific period of time allows the user to grasp which result was obtained. By doing so, it is also possible to make use of it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature cB3. Re-game notification means (game state display by main controller 101) capable of executing re-game notification that the re-game state is set by predetermined notification means (re-game state display unit 76a) smaller than the operation notification means function to execute partial processing),
The feature cB1 or feature cB2, characterized in that the regame notification means is configured to execute the regame notification regardless of the type of the regame result that triggered the setting of the regame state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to grasp that a re-game winning has been established by the re-game notification by the re-game notification means. In this way, when the replay result is a specific replay result, the replay result can be clearly grasped by confirming the replay notification without confirming the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. becomes possible. In this case, since the re-game notification is performed by the predetermined notification means smaller than the operation notification means, it is possible to confirm the re-game result, but the re-game notification is performed. is less conspicuous than the operation notification means, and is less likely to be a barrier giving the impression that a specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the diversification of games using a specific replay result while making it possible to confirm that the result is a replay result.

Feature cB4. The gaming machine according to feature cB3, wherein the re-game notification means can execute the re-game notification even after the specific period has passed.

According to the above configuration, after the specific period has elapsed, it is possible to confirm that the re-game winning has been established by the re-game notification rather than the change in the notification state of the operation notification means. In other words, when the re-game notification is performed after the specific period has elapsed, it is not known whether it is after a predetermined re-game result win or after a specific re-game result win. Then, for example, in a configuration in which a predetermined replay result and a specific replay result have similar stop numbers and it is difficult to determine which replay result is the specific period of time. By confirming that the operation notification means is in the first notification state before the time elapses, it becomes possible to grasp that it is a specific replay result, and the degree of attention to the operation notification means is suitable. It is also possible to increase the

Feature cB5. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production according to the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period of time after one game is finished, standby means for setting the effect means to a standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute processing to
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB4, wherein the specific period is a period different in length from the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the first notification state of the operation notification means based on a specific replay result is switched to the second notification state at a timing different from the timing at which the effect means is switched to a standby state as a so-called demo state. . By doing so, in a game in which it is attempted to determine which replay result is the result from the change in the notification state of the operation notification means, confusion that the change in the notification state has occurred due to the standby state can be prevented. It is possible to avoid. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the operation notification means is in the first notification state after the result of the small winning combination or the result of the loss, the operation notification means is in the first notification state after the result of the small winning combination or the like at the timing of switching to the standby state. may also be set to the second notification state, and in such a configuration, depending on the timing at which the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, whether it was a specific re-game result or a minor combination result It is also possible to realize a game feature that allows the user to determine whether or not the player is in a similar state.

Feature cB6. The gaming machine according to feature cB5, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

A relatively long period is generally set as the predetermined period until switching to a standby state as a so-called demo state. , as described in feature cB2, it is possible to play a game in which it is determined whether it was a result of a specific replay or a result of a small winning combination.

Feature cB7. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production in accordance with the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period after the end of one game, standby means for setting the effect means to the standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute the processing to be performed) and
When the standby state is set by the standby means in the replay state set based on at least the specific regame result, and the standby is performed by the standby means after a result different from the specific regame result. It is characterized by having means (a function of executing processing for performing specific re-game winning notification by the display control device 81) that can change the state of the standby state depending on the state. The gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB6.

According to the above configuration, when the game enters the standby state, the player can clearly recognize from the state of the standby state that a specific replay result has been reached. In this case, if it is attempted to determine from the state of the standby state that the player has won a specific replay result, it is necessary to suspend the game for at least a predetermined period until the standby state. By doing so, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as making the player look forward to the period until the waiting state by utilizing the player's eagerness to know the result quickly. Become.

Feature cB8. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production in accordance with the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period after the end of one game, standby means for setting the effect means to the standby state (setting the auxiliary display unit 65 by the display control device 81 to the standby state) function to execute the processing to be performed) and
means for restricting the waiting means from entering the standby state in the replay state (function for executing processing to disallow counting of the standby counter in the replay state by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, even if the operation notification means is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state after the predetermined period has passed since the replay state was set, the replay state is set to the standby state. Therefore, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the standby state itself is restricted, or the mode of the standby state is restricted so that only a part of the production means is in the standby state, The period until the standby state is entered is limited, for example, the standby state is not entered even after a predetermined period of time elapses and then the standby state is entered. By doing so, it is possible to make the switching from the first notification state to the second notification state when the specific period has passed in the replay state more conspicuous. As a result, it is possible to clearly notify that the prize has been established.

Feature cB9. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a virtual game value with a predetermined number as an upper limit;
If a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operating means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the virtual game value of the specific number is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operation means is operated. is a configuration that does not
The third control means controls whether the replay result that triggered the setting of the replay state is the specific replay result regardless of the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB8, wherein if there is, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state in the replay state.

According to the above configuration, in a replay state after a specific replay result, the operation notification means is placed in the first notification state even if the virtual game value corresponding to the specific number of bets is not stored. By doing so, when the operation notification means is set to the first notification state after a specific replay result, there is no need to grasp the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. Simplification of the configuration is achieved. In addition, although the virtual game value is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the operation notification means is set to the first notification state to notify the player that the specific replay result has been won. It is also possible to inform

Feature cB10. Virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
If a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operating means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the virtual game value of the specific number is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operating means is operated. is a configuration that does not
Settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
When the settlement operation means is operated, the settlement means (the medals generated by the main controller 101) can execute the settlement of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means. function to execute return processing) and
with
When the operation notification means for settlement is operated in a state where the operation notification means is set to the first notification state based on the specific replay result, the operation notification means is in the first notification state. continuation means (in the medal return processing by the main controller 101, if the third transition period has not elapsed or the settlement operation counter has not reached a specific number, the processing for settlement is not performed Thus, the gaming machine according to any one of features cB1 to cB9 is provided with a function of not turning off the first credit lamp 56 on the display control device 81 side.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is cleared when the settlement operation means is operated, a specific re-game result is obtained. Even if the operation means for settlement is operated when the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on this, the first notification state is continued. Since the stored virtual game value is cleared as the game value when the settlement operation means is operated, basically the settable virtual game value is not stored even if the bet number operation means is operated. It is considered that the operation informing means is switched from the first informing state to the second informing state after the result of the small win or the result of losing. On the other hand, in a situation where the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on a specific replay result, it is possible to set the bet amount regardless of the number of stored virtual game values. , the first notification state is continued even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, it is possible to realize a new game property such that a specific re-game result can be grasped by operating the settlement operation means and checking whether or not there is a change in the notification state of the bet number notification means. Become.

In the above configuration, "when the settlement operation means is operated and the number of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means is settled, the first notification With the configuration provided with the "means for switching the operation notification means that is in the state to the second notification state", it is possible to obtain the above-described excellent effects more preferably.

In addition, the ``settlement means'' is ``capable of paying out a number of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the operation means for settlement is operated. Payout means (function for executing medal return processing by main controller 101)", and the change in expression of the "settlement means" can be achieved by other feature groups using similar expressions and other features. is also applicable.

Feature cB11. When the settlement operation means is operated, settlement restriction means (by the main controller 101) capable of limiting the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means In the medal return process, if the third transition period has not elapsed or the settlement operation counter has not reached a specific number, the function for not performing settlement processing) is provided. game machine.

According to the above configuration, settlement of the virtual game value may be restricted by the settlement restriction means even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, when the first notification state is maintained even if the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the bet amount notification means is in the first notification state, the first notification state is maintained based on the specific replay result. It becomes difficult to understand that the 1 notification state is set. Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve the amusement of the game by operating the settlement operation means to see that the result is a specific replay.

Feature cB12. The settlement restriction means can limit the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the settlement operation means. and
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature cB11, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, even though the effect of the feature cB11 is exhibited, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the virtual game value is desired to be settled. can.

Feature cB13. When the operation notification means is in the first notification state based on the specific replay result, the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means. means for setting the operation notification means to the second notification state (executing extinguishing processing of the first credit lamp 56b based on a specific settlement command from the display control device 81 when settlement of the game value corresponding to the number of game values is performed) The gaming machine according to feature cB11 or feature cB12, characterized by comprising a function of

According to the above configuration, the operation notification means placed in the first notification state based on the specific replay result is brought into the second notification state together with settlement of the virtual game value. By doing so, when an operation for settlement of the virtual game value is performed after a specific replay result, even though the settlement is restricted or the first notification state is continued, when the settlement is performed, , the state is switched from the first notification state to the second notification state, and becomes the same as the notification state of other game results and the operation notification means. As a result, it becomes easy for only the player who has performed the settlement operation to grasp that it is a specific re-game result, and the superiority of the game that grasps that it is a specific re-game result by the settlement operation is preferably secured. It becomes possible to

Feature cB14. The settlement means is capable of executing settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state. The gaming machine according to any one of features cB10 to cB13, characterized in that:

If it is possible to settle the virtual game value even in the replay state as in the above configuration, it becomes easier for the game to end in the replay state based on the specific replay result, resulting in the feature cB12. As described above, the continuation of the first notification state of the operation notification means by the settlement operation increases the significance of letting the player know that it is after a specific replay result.

Feature cB15. The settlement means stores the virtual game value in the memory means when the settlement operation means is operated after a special period shorter than the specific period has elapsed since the replay state was set. The gaming machine according to feature cB14, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute settlement of gaming values corresponding to the number of virtual gaming values that are present.

According to the above configuration, in the replay state, settlement of the virtual game value cannot be performed until the special period elapses. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the game is in the replay state.

The inventions described in the features cB1 to cB15 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cC group>
Features cC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for performing a bet amount operation for setting a game bet amount;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means is performed (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101); ,
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
bet number notification means for executing bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means (function for executing betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81);
The number-of-bets informing means, in a first specific situation in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (minor combination result) and after the circulation of the orbiting body corresponding to the first result has stopped, While the notification corresponding to the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets used in the lottery as the first result is terminated when a predetermined specific period elapses, the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the first result. A bet used in a lottery that results in a different second result (specific re-gaming result) in a second specific situation after the revolving body corresponding to the second result has stopped rotating. Specific bet number notification means (temporary standby processing of bet display unit 34 in replay state by display control device 81 A game machine characterized by having a function that does not perform

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and a lottery is held according to the set bet amount. , in a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the stop operation means, corresponding to the number of bets in each game. When the result of the game is the first result, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends when a specific period elapses after the current game ends due to the stopping of the revolving body or the granting of a privilege, If the result of the game is the second result, the game does not end even after the specific period has passed. By doing this, even though it is assumed that the result of the lottery is grasped by the stop number of the circulating body, the length of the period in which not only the circulating body's stop number but also the existing bet number corresponding notification is continued. It is possible to grasp the result of the game by making good use of It is also possible to play a game in which it is determined which result is the result. In particular, by making it possible to judge which result is obtained by the elapse of a specific period of time, it waits after the revolving body stops, which is the exact opposite of the game property of promoting smooth progress of the game and improving the interest of the game as in the past. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel game property such that the result can be determined, and such a game property can greatly contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Note that the "first specific situation" and "second specific situation" may be expressed as follows, and such changes in expression are also applicable to other features and feature groups that use corresponding expressions.

"The lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (minor combination result), and the lottery corresponding to the first result is conducted based on the operation of the starting operation means. A first specific situation after the rotation of the orbiting body has stopped or after the benefit based on the first result has been granted by the privilege granting means", "The lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (specific re-game result ), and after the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies started based on the operation of the starting operation means has stopped, or by the privilege granting means, the lottery corresponding to the second result will be held A second particular situation after a benefit based on a second result has been granted."

Feature cC2. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means during execution of the bet number corresponding notification by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to corresponding bet amount corresponding notification (In the bet time effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
The updating means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. is executable and
The specified number-of-bet notification means is capable of continuing the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period has passed when the update notification is performed by the updating means in the first specific situation. The gaming machine according to feature cC1.

According to the above configuration, when the bet number operation is performed after any result, the bet number corresponding information up to that point is once terminated, and then updated to the bet number corresponding information corresponding to the current bet operation. . In this case, after the bet amount operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet amount correspondence information is continued even after the specific period has passed. By doing so, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the betting operation if trying to determine which result was obtained by whether or not the notification corresponding to the betting number continued after a specific period. It is possible to realize a novel game property that becomes. Also, if a new game is to be played by manipulating the number of bets, the notification corresponding to the number of bets updated by the manipulating the number of bets has a function of notifying the number of bets regardless of the result of the previous game. It becomes possible to guarantee.

Feature cC3. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) that produces production in accordance with the progress of the game;
When a game is not played for a predetermined period longer than the specific period after the end of one game, standby means (a function of executing standby processing by the display control device 81) that puts the effect means in a standby state )and,
Means for allowing the waiting means to enter the standby state in the first specific situation, while restricting the waiting means from entering the standby state in the second specific situation (reproduction by the main controller 101) A function that executes processing that disallows counting of the standby counter in the game state),
The gaming machine according to feature cC1 or feature cC2, comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined period elapses after the first specific situation occurs after the game with the first result, the effect means enters a standby state, and when the specific period elapses, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends. , even if a predetermined period of time has passed since the second specific situation has occurred after the game with the second result, the production means is restricted from entering the standby state, and even if the specific period has passed, the number of bets will be increased. Correspondence notification does not end. By increasing the material for determining whether the result is the first result or the second result in this way, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game of determining both results.

Feature cC4. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means while the bet number corresponding notification is being executed by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to the corresponding bet amount notification (in the betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
The updating means is capable of executing the update notification when the bet number operation is performed in the first specific situation, and the update notification is performed when the bet number operation is performed in the second specific situation. is executable and
The specific number-of-bet notification means can continue the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period has passed when the update notification is performed by the updating means in the first specific situation. , The gaming machine according to feature cC3, wherein the bet-number correspondence notification is terminated by entering the standby state.

According to the above configuration, when the bet number operation is performed after any result, the bet number corresponding information up to that point is once terminated, and then updated to the bet number corresponding information corresponding to the current bet operation. . In this case, after the bet amount operation is performed after the first result, the updated bet amount correspondence information is continued even after the specific period has passed. By doing so, waiting is the key to the game, such as discouraging the betting operation if trying to determine which result was obtained by whether or not the notification corresponding to the betting number continued after a specific period. It is possible to realize a novel game property that becomes. Also, if a new game is to be played by manipulating the number of bets, the notification corresponding to the number of bets updated by the manipulating the number of bets has a function of notifying the number of bets regardless of the result of the previous game. It becomes possible to guarantee.

In addition, when the standby state is entered, the notification corresponding to the bet number is terminated in the first specific situation after the first result. It is sufficient to wait for a long period of time, and it is also possible to suitably relieve the player's erroneous operation.

Feature cC5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, as a privilege given by the privilege granting means, a result of a small combination in which a predetermined number of game values are given, and the same number of bets as this time, the lottery means again A replay result that is set in a replay state in which it is possible to receive a lottery by
The gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC4, wherein the first result is a predetermined small combination result, and the second result is a predetermined replay result.

According to the above configuration, in the case of a result of a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of game values are awarded, the notification corresponding to the number of bets is made during the specific period in the first specific situation after the game resulting in the small winning combination is finished. After that, the notification corresponding to the number of bets ends. On the other hand, in the case of the replay result set to the replay state, the notification corresponding to the number of bets continues even after the specific period in the second specific situation after the game in which the replay result is finished. be done. In the case of a replay result, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the game that resulted in the replay result, but the bet amount correspondence notification corresponding to the game that resulted in the replay result is , it can be used as it is as notification corresponding to the number of bets for the next game. Therefore, as in the above configuration, by continuing the bet number corresponding notification even after the specific period, it is possible to omit the state change of the bet number corresponding notification without causing contradiction with the progress of the game.

Feature cC6. When the bet number operation is performed by the bet number operation means while the bet number corresponding notification is being executed by the bet number notification means, the bet number corresponding to the current bet number is set after the bet number corresponding notification being executed is terminated. Updating means capable of executing update notification for updating to the corresponding bet amount notification (in the betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81, the bet display unit 34 is temporarily turned off based on various bet amount operations, and then bet Equipped with a function to execute processing that allows corresponding production to be performed),
In the replay state set based on the replay result, the update means updates the bet amount corresponding to the lottery resulting in the replay result when the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means is performed. The gaming machine according to feature cC5, characterized in that it is possible to execute an update notification to update to the bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay state after the corresponding notification is finished.

According to the above configuration, when a replay result is obtained, the next game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets of the game resulting in the replay result. Even if there is, the update notification is performed based on the bet operation. By doing so, it is possible to make the flow of the game progress the same as the game that requires bet number manipulation to set a new bet amount, such as the first result as a small win result, and the first result. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the result and the second result. Therefore, it becomes more necessary to determine the result depending on whether or not there is a change in the state of the notification corresponding to the number of bets after the specific period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature cC7. A predetermined re-game result and a specific re-game result are set as the re-game result,
The updating means, when the re-game state is set based on the predetermined re-game result, executes the update notification without intervention of the bet number operation of the bet number operating means, while the re-game state is The gaming machine according to feature cC6, characterized in that, when set based on the specific replay result, the update notification is carried out through the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means.

According to the above configuration, the configuration in which the update notification is performed through the bet number operation in the replay state like the feature cC6 does not apply to all replay results, but to some (specific replay results). It is a configuration that applies only to In this way, if the replay state is set, the bet amount is set as it is. It is possible to give an impression as if the replay state is not set through the update notification through the operation, and it is difficult to discriminate the specific replay result from the first result as the minor combination result. can do. Therefore, it is possible to favorably improve the amusement of the game in which it is determined whether or not the state of the number-of-bets informing means changes as the specific period elapses.

Feature cC8. the number-of-bet notification means executes the notification corresponding to the number-of-bets by a specific notification means;
A second bet amount notification means (main control unit) for executing a bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means by a predetermined notification means (BET display section 75) different from the specific notification means. function of executing BET processing by the device 101),
The second bet amount notification means terminates the bet amount notification corresponding to the bet amount used in the lottery resulting in the first result in the first specific situation when a predetermined period elapses. On the other hand, in the second specific situation, a specific second bet number notification capable of continuing the bet number notification corresponding to the bet number used in the lottery resulting in the second result even after the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine according to any one of features cC1 to cC7, further comprising means (a function of executing standby processing of the BET display unit 75 by the main control device 101).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to distinguish between the first result and the second result based not only on whether or not the notification corresponding to the bet amount is continued by the bet amount notification means, but also whether or not the notification of the bet amount is continued by the second bet amount notification means. can be done. By doing so, it is possible to increase the branch of judgment in the game in which the outcome is determined based on whether or not the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the notification of the number of bets is continued, and the interest in the game can be preferably enhanced.

Feature cC9. The specific notification means is set to be more easily identifiable by the player than the predetermined notification means,
The gaming machine according to feature cC8, wherein the specific period is shorter than the predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which it is possible to determine the result will come earlier depending on whether or not the notification corresponding to the number of bets is continued by the specific notification means with higher identification. By doing so, it is possible to favorably play a game in which the result is determined based on the presence or absence of continuation of the notification.

The invention described in the features cC1 to cC9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

For each configuration of the features cC1 to cC9, features cA1 to features cA20, features cB1 to features cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cD group>
Feature cD1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
Virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing virtual game values up to a predetermined number as an upper limit;
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
with
When a specific number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet amount set when the bet amount operating means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the While the specific number of bets is set, if the specific number of virtual game values is not stored in the virtual game value storage means, the specific number of bets is set even if the bet number operating means is operated. is a configuration that does not
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
Settlement operation means (settlement switch 59) operable by the player;
When the settlement operation means is operated, a settlement means (a medal generated by the main controller 101) capable of executing settlement of game values corresponding to at least the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means function to execute return processing) and
Bet number notification means (betting effect setting by display control device 81) for executing bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means by predetermined bet number notification means (bet display unit 34) function to perform processing) and
When the settlement operation means is operated, the specific bet number notification means (the pseudo bet effect based on the reception of the specific settlement command by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification by the predetermined bet number notification means functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the bet amount of the game is set based on the operation of the bet amount operation means, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery according to the set bet amount is performed, and the game is stopped. In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of the lottery is awarded when the combination of symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped at an effective position based on the operation of the operating means, the number of bets in the game is determined by the bet number reporting means. Since it is possible to grasp the corresponding number of bets by the notification of the number of bets, the player can clearly grasp that the operation of the bet number operation means has been accepted and the number of bets this time. can proceed.

In the above configuration, when the settlement operation means is operated, the number of game values corresponding to the virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means are settled. Based on the operation of the operation means, there are cases where the bet amount corresponding notification is performed by the bet amount notification means. The settlement operation means is generally operated when the game is to be ended, but as in the above configuration, when the game is to be ended, a predetermined bet number informing means performs a specific notification. By doing so, it is possible to let the player know that the game should not be ended, such as when the number of bets for the game is set. Therefore, it is possible to favorably avoid events that may be disadvantageous to the player, and to facilitate the progress of the game.

Feature cD2. When the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means, the bet amount notification means terminates the bet amount corresponding notification that had been executed before the bet amount was set, and then the current bet amount is set. A configuration for executing the corresponding bet number corresponding notification,
When the operation means for settlement is operated, the specific bet number notification means terminates the notification corresponding to the bet number that had been executed before the operation means for settlement was operated, and then executes the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature cD1, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, a new bet amount is set based on the operation of the settlement operation means, and after the settlement, the next game can be executed without further setting a new bet amount. It is possible to make an impression. By doing so, it is possible to discourage a player who intends to end the game by making a payment.

Feature cD3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay state is set in which it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The replay result to be played is set,
The specific bet number notification means, when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-gaming state, sets the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set in the re-gaming state as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to feature cD1 or feature cD2, characterized in that it is configured to execute.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the game is a replay result, a re-game state is entered in which the lottery is again received with the same number of bets as the lottery bet resulting in the replay result. When the operation means for settlement is operated in the game state, the bet amount set in the replay state is reported as the bet amount corresponding notification. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent the occurrence of disadvantages for the player, such as ending the game despite being set to the replay state.

Feature cD4. The settlement means is capable of executing settlement of the game value corresponding to the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means when the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state. The gaming machine according to feature cD3.

As in the above configuration, in a configuration in which settlement can be made by operating the settlement operation means even in the replay state, the game is likely to be terminated without the replay state being played. In this respect, as in the above feature cD3, since the specific notification is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, it becomes easier for the player to notice that the game is being played again, and the possibility of the player suffering a disadvantage is reduced. be able to.

Feature cD5. The settlement means settles the game value including the game value corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the replay state is not set. The gaming machine according to feature cD3 or feature cD4, which is capable of executing

According to the above configuration, when the settlement operation means is operated in a situation where the replay state is not set, settlement including the set number of bets is performed. In this case, although notification corresponding to the bet amount is not performed by the specific bet amount notification means, if the game is to be played after settlement, it is a scene where a new bet amount needs to be set. A player is unlikely to be disadvantaged. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, the strangeness of the specific notification being performed when the settlement operation means is operated is emphasized, so that the player notices that the specific notification is performed at the time of settlement. becomes easier. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Feature cD6. When the settlement operation means is operated, settlement restriction means (by the main controller 101) capable of limiting the execution of settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means The gaming machine according to any one of features cD1 to cD5, further comprising a function of not performing settlement processing until the settlement operation counter reaches a specific number.

According to the above configuration, settlement of the virtual game value may be restricted by the settlement restriction means even if the settlement operation means is operated. By doing so, even in a configuration in which settlement including the game value corresponding to the already set bet amount is performed based on the operation of the settlement operation means, the set bet amount can be dealt with. Even if the notification corresponding to the number of bets is performed as a specific notification, there is no contradiction between the notification corresponding to the number of bets and the number of bets. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific notification to support decision-making to continue the game without lowering the reliability of the specific notification.

Feature cD7. The settlement restricting means can limit execution of payout of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on a predetermined specific number of operations of the settlement operation means. and
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means exceeding the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature cD6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is desired to be settled, while the effect of the feature cD6 is exhibited.

Feature cD8. The settlement restricting means keeps the virtual game stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means at least until a predetermined period (third transition period) elapses after the end of the previous game. It is possible to limit the execution of settlement of gaming values corresponding to the number of values,
The settlement means executes settlement of game values corresponding to the number of virtual game values stored in the virtual game value storage means based on the operation of the settlement operation means after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. The gaming machine according to feature cD6 or feature cD7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means cannot be settled even though the virtual game value stored in the virtual game value storage means is desired to be settled, while the effect of the feature cD6 is exhibited. In particular, by preventing settlement even if the settlement operation means is operated until a predetermined period elapses, settlement is not performed even for a player who always repeatedly hits the settlement operation means at the time of settlement. Through this, it is possible to let the player know that the game should not be ended.

Feature cD9. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a replay state is set in which it is possible to receive the lottery by the lottery means again with the same number of bets as the number of bets this time as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means. The replay result to be played is set,
The specific bet number notification means is set in the re-game state when the settlement operation means is operated in the re-game state set based on the specific re-game result as the re-game result. In the re-game state set based on a predetermined re-game result different from the specific re-game result as the re-game result while executing the bet-number corresponding notification corresponding to the current bet amount as the specific notification. Characteristic cD1 to characteristic cD8 characterized in that, when the settlement operation means is operated, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay state is not executed as the specific notification. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, when the result of a game is a replay result, a replay state is entered in which the lottery is retaken with the same number of bets as the lottery bet resulting in the replay result. When the settlement operation means is operated in the replay state triggered by the replay result of (1), the bet number set in the replay state is announced as the bet number corresponding notification. In this case, even if the settlement operating means is operated in a replay state triggered by a predetermined replay result different from the specific replay result, no bet number corresponding notification is performed. By doing so, the scene in which the notification corresponding to the bet amount is performed when the operation means for settlement is operated becomes more limited, thereby highlighting the strangeness of the notification corresponding to the bet amount, thereby enhancing the game play. easier for people to notice.

Feature cD10. When the virtual game value is settled by the settlement means, settlement notification means for executing settlement notification by a predetermined notification means (function for executing the effect processing at the time of return by the display control device 81);
When the specific notification is executed by the specific number-of-bets notification means, the restriction means (return effect after the pseudo-bet presentation by the display control device 81) capable of executing restriction processing for either the specific notification or the settlement notification A function of executing processing such as outputting a sound and executing a pseudo-bet effect after settlement (Fig. 261);
The gaming machine according to any one of features cD1 to cD9, comprising:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed when the virtual game value is settled by the settlement means, the inconvenience in processing and performance due to the overlap of the settlement notification at the time of settlement and the specific notification is eliminated. can be suitably resolved.

Feature cD11. The gaming machine according to feature cD10, wherein the settlement notification means can execute the settlement notification for a period longer than the period until the specific notification is completed.

According to the above configuration, even if the settlement notification is restricted in the configuration of the feature cD10, there remains room for the settlement notification after the specific notification is completed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the duplication of the settlement notification and the specific notification within a range that does not lose the significance of facilitating the identification of fraudulent behavior by performing the settlement notification.

The inventions described in the features cD1 to cD11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cE group>
Feature cE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the starting operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies. Drive control means (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101),
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
When the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means is performed, specific notification (betting process effect) is executed, and then the bet amount corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means (bet corresponding effect) by a specific notification means (a function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81);
When the starting operation means is operated, a start notification means (a function of executing a start-time effect setting process by the display control device 81) that executes start notification by the specific notification means or a different notification means;
Specific processing means for executing specific processing capable of limiting the start notification by the start notification means (press by display control device 81) when the start operation means is operated in a specific situation where the specific notification is performed A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing processing for delaying forward notification performance).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a gaming machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet number operation means is operated, the number of bets in the game is set, and after specific notification, the number of bets corresponding to the number of bets in the game is announced. is performed by a predetermined notification means. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. There is a high possibility that the start notification and processing will overlap with the specific notification and processing for specific notification, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase, and there is a possibility that players will be confused due to overlapping notifications and processing. be.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the starting operation means is operated during execution of the specific notification, the specific processing means for executing the specific processing that can limit the start notification is provided. The duplication between the start notification and the specific notification and the overlap between the process for the start notification and the process for the specific notification are eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the game to proceed favorably.

Feature cE2. Characteristic feature cE1 characterized in that when the specific processing by the specific processing means is performed, the specific notification by the number-of-bet notification means is performed in the same notification manner as when the specific processing is not performed. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the specific processing for limiting the start notification is performed, the notification mode of the specific notification side that has already started is not changed, so there is no need for complicated processing such as changing the notification being executed midway. , it is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load.

Feature cE3. The specific processing means performs the specific processing when a situation in which the start notification by the start notification means is executed based on the operation of the starting operation means is the specific situation, and the starting operation means Characteristic feature cE1 characterized in that the specific processing is not performed when the situation in which the start notification is executed by the start notification means based on the operation of is different from the specific situation. Or the gaming machine according to feature cE2.

According to the above configuration, if the situation in which the start notification is actually executed based on the operation of the starting operation means is the specific situation, the specific process is performed, while the situation in which the start notification is actually executed is the specific situation If not, no specific processing is performed. By doing so, for example, even if there is a difference between the timing at which the start operation means is operated and the timing at which the start notification is performed, the start notification and the specific notification substantially overlap. can be preferably avoided.

Feature cE4. Even if the operation of the starting operation means is executed in the specific situation, the specific processing means causes the start notification means to give a predetermined start notification (specific combination notification effect) based on the operation of the starting operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features cE1 to cE3, wherein the specific process is not executed when is executed in a situation different from the specific situation.

By using the above configuration, when there is a gap between the operation timing of the start operation means and the execution timing of the start notification, the specific processing is not performed even in a scene where the start notification does not overlap with the specific notification. It is possible to eliminate wasteful execution of processing.

Feature cE5. The start notification means is capable of executing a first start notification (push order notification effect) and a second start notification (specific combination notification effect) as the start notification,
Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses function to wait for the start of rotation until
When the start operation means is operated before the specific period elapses, the start notification means executes the first start notification when the start operation means is operated, and the second start operation is performed when the start operation means is operated. The game machine according to feature cE4, wherein the notification is executed when the start drive control is started.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature cE4, and by varying the execution timing of the start notification before and after the specific period as a so-called wait period, it is possible to fully exhibit the function of each start notification.

Feature cE6. As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of the first result can be established, and the stop operation means performs a second operation different from the first operation mode. An operation mode result (push order) is set in which a second result different from the first result can be established when operated in the mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the operation mode result, mode notification means (by display control device 81) capable of executing mode notification including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by predetermined notification means function to execute the process for performing the push order notification effect),
The gaming machine according to feature cE5, wherein the first start notification includes the mode notification by the mode notification means.

As in the above configuration, when winning an operation mode result in which the winning result differs depending on whether the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second operation mode, a more careful operation of the stop operation means is required. It is highly significant to execute mode notification before a specific period of time, a so-called wait period, has elapsed. However, even so, if there is an overlap between the number-of-bet notification and the specific notification, it should not be prioritized. It is possible to favorably avoid a sense of incongruity due to duplication of effects while prompting careful operation.

Feature cE7. As the result of the operation mode, a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the first result is established, and a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the second result is established. Specific operation mode results (push order bells) with different benefits for the player are set,
The specific processing means comprises means capable of not executing the specific processing when the first start notification is based on the result of the specific operation mode. The gaming machine described in cE6.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. With respect to mode notification in the case of a specific operation mode result in which the player's profit differs depending on the result of winning, the mode notification is not restricted even if it overlaps with the specific notification, so that the player's profit is favorably obtained. It becomes possible to secure

Feature cE8. As the result of the operation mode, a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the first result is established, and a privilege granted by the privilege granting means when the winning of the second result is established. Predetermined operation mode results (normal replies A to C) that have common benefits for the player are set,
The gaming machine according to feature cE6 or feature cE7, wherein the specific processing means executes the specific process when the first start notification is based on the result of the predetermined operation mode.

The significance of performing the first start operation as mode notification before the elapse of a specific period as a so-called wait period is mainly to encourage more careful operation of the stop operation means. Regarding mode notification in the case of a predetermined operation mode result in which the player's benefit is common regardless of the winning result, the mode notification in the case of overlapping with the specific notification is restricted so that the player is not disadvantaged. To the extent that it does not occur, it is possible to eliminate overlap between the specific notification and the start notification.

Feature cE9. When the starting operation means is operated, specific drive control means for executing specific drive control for performing game effects using each of the revolving bodies over a specific period (executing rotation effect processing by main controller 101) function) and
When the starting operation means is operated in a specific situation in which the specific notification is executed, and the specific drive control is executed by the specific drive control means based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific notification second specific processing means for executing a second specific processing capable of limiting the The gaming machine according to any one of features cE1 to cE8.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific drive control as the so-called freeze effect in which the game effect using the revolving body is performed is executed as the start notification based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific drive control is the specific notification. , the specific notification side is restricted instead of the specific drive control. In general, the specific drive control as the freezing effect is generally a effect in which the expectation of a relatively big win is heightened, and by doing so, the player will pay a lot of attention. It is possible to preferably avoid that the execution of the specific drive control that is supposed to be performed is restricted due to overlap with the specific notification.

The inventions described in the features cE1 to cE9 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cF group>
Features cF1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operating means (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
a specific notification means (a function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) for executing a specific notification (betting process effect) corresponding to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means;
Start limiting means for limiting the start of the next start drive control until a predetermined specific period elapses after the start drive control is started (wait time in rotation start processing by main controller 101 elapses A function that executes processing to wait for the start of rotation until
with
The specific notification means is configured such that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, and the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means after the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the specific result is stopped. When the specific situation to be performed is before the elapse of the specific period, the specific notification is set to the first notification mode, while when the specific situation is after the elapse of the specific period or the specific notification In the case of a situation where execution is performed over a specific period, the specific notification can be set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (specific re-game bet effect by the display control device 81). In the setting process, it is a function to switch to a bet-compatible effect when the wait period elapses, perform a replay bet effect before the wait period elapses, and execute a process to perform a continuous bet effect after the elapse of the wait period). Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, the start drive control and the start drive control are executed at an interval of a specific period or more, so that it is executed per unit time The number of games that can be played is limited to optimize the games.

In such a configuration in which a so-called wait such as a specific period is defined, it is possible to set the number of bets in preparation for starting rotation and accept operation of the start operation means before the specific period elapses. Even if preparations are made before the start of rotation, the start of rotation itself is performed after a specific period of time has elapsed, and effects and the like corresponding to the start of rotation are not performed until the start of rotation.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of bets is set before the specific period has passed, the specific notification corresponding to the number of bets is made in the first notification mode, and the number of bets is set after the specific period has passed. When the setting is made or the specific notification is performed over a specific period, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode. Since the notification mode of the corresponding specific notification is made different, for example, when the number of bets is set before the specific period elapses, a more flashy specific notification than usual is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by utilizing the waiting time of the wait.

Not only that, by changing the notification mode of the specific notification before and after the specific period elapses, while performing the specific notification relatively slowly before the specific period elapses, the rotation is started as the specific period elapses. In such a case, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from overlapping with the effect and processing at the start of rotation, such as by completing the specific notification relatively quickly. It is also possible to anticipate the effect of preventing player confusion by eliminating duplication of effects.

As a result of the above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably playing a game.

Feature cF2. The gaming machine according to feature cF1, wherein the second notification mode is a mode in which execution of at least part of the specific notification in the first notification mode is restricted.

As in the above configuration, the mode of the specific notification after the specific period has passed or when the specific period is crossed is the mode in which the execution of at least a part of the specific notification in the first notification mode is restricted. By doing so, it is clarified that the first notification mode is more colorful and flashy than the second notification mode, and the processing load is reduced when executing in the second notification mode. It is also clarified that the overlap with the presentation at the start of rotation can be eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to preferably exhibit the effect of the feature cE1.

Feature cF3. The specific notification means is
When the specific notification is performed, the specific notification is executed including the first specific notification (lighting effect) and the second specific notification (betting sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification,
The specific notification is executed with the aspect including the first specific notification and the second specific notification as the first notification aspect, and the aspect not including the second specific notification while including the first specific notification is the second The gaming machine according to feature cF2, wherein the specific notification is executed as the notification mode.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature cF2, and in particular, as a configuration for limiting at least a part of the notification, the execution of the second specific notification out of the first specific notification and the second specific notification is performed after the specific period has elapsed. By performing the specific notification in a restricted mode, it is possible to preferably avoid an increase in the processing load due to restricting the execution of all specific notifications.

Feature cF4. The gaming machine according to feature cF3, wherein the first specific notification is a predetermined display effect, and the second specific notification is a predetermined sound effect.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature cF3. In particular, the display effect is more complicated to execute than the sound effect, and the amount of data to be set tends to be large. By executing the display effect as the specific notification as it is and not executing the sound effect as the second specific notification, the effect of the feature cF1 can be exhibited within a range that does not make the processing complicated. As for the display effect, if the area where the display effect is executed is different, overlapping of the specific notification and the effect at the start of rotation can be allowed, but as for the sound effect, a plurality of sounds are mixed and output. It is considered that the sense of incongruity of this is great, and by doing as described above, it is possible to eliminate the overlap with the presentation at the start of rotation without discomfort.

Feature cF5. The specific notification means sets the bet amount by the bet amount setting means after the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the rotation of the rotating body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. Means (display A gaming machine according to any one of features cF1 to cF4, further comprising a function of executing a normal replay bet effect setting process by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode when the number of bets is set after the specific result and before the specific period elapses, after the specific period elapses or the specific period When crossing over, the first notification mode may be used. Thus, on the premise that the specific notification by the first notification mode may be executed regardless of the elapse of the specific period, the second notification mode differs from the second notification mode before the elapse of the specific period after the identification result. Even if the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the user accept it without any sense of incongruity.

Moreover, with the above configuration, the first notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is also executed for a predetermined result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to change the notification mode.

Feature cF6. The specific notification means sets the bet amount by the bet amount setting means after the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the rotation of the orbiting body corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped. A means for executing the specific notification in the second notification mode when the situation is before the specific period elapses (function for executing continuous bet effect setting processing by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features cF1 to cF5.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode when the number of bets is set after the specific period has passed after the specific result or when the specific period has passed, the specific Even before the period elapses, there are cases where the second notification mode is used. In this way, assuming that the specific notification in the second notification mode may be executed regardless of the elapse of the specific period of time, after the specific period has passed after the specific result, the Even if the specific notification is performed in the two notification modes, it is possible to make the user accept it without any sense of incongruity.

Moreover, with the above configuration, the second notification mode is not a notification mode dedicated to the specific result, but is also executed for a predetermined result. It is possible to reduce the amount of stored data in order to change the notification mode.

Feature cF7. The game according to any one of features cF1 to cF6, characterized in that the notification period required for the specific notification is set to be shorter in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode. machine.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed in the first notification mode, which is a relatively long notification period, before the specific period elapses and before the rotation of the orbiting body is started, and after the specific period elapses, etc. And when the rotation of the orbiting body is started, the specific notification is performed in the second notification mode, which is a relatively short notification period. By doing so, it is possible to provide specific information in line with the actual progress of the game.

Feature cF8. The bet amount setting means is configured to be able to set the bet amount with a predetermined specific number as an upper limit,
having a plurality of notification units (bet display units 34a to 34c),
The specific notification means is configured to perform the specific notification by switching the number of notification units corresponding to the number of bets among the plurality of notification units from a non-notification state to a notification state,
After switching a predetermined notification unit to the notification state, the waiting period until switching the next notification unit of the predetermined notification unit to the notification state is longer in the second notification mode than in the first notification mode. The gaming machine according to feature cF7, which is set to be short.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature cF7, and as described above, if the length of the notification period is realized by varying the intervals when the plurality of notification units are sequentially set to the notification state, the first notification The mode and the second notification mode can be realized with a relatively simple configuration, and the amount of stored data can be reduced.

The invention described in the features cF1 to cF8 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, features cF1 to features cF8, and features cF1 to features cF8. The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cG group>
Feature cG1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) for performing bet amount operation for setting the game bet amount;
Bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game based on the bet amount operation of the bet amount operation means (executing medal insertion corresponding processing, first operation corresponding processing, second operation corresponding processing, etc. by the main controller 101) function) and
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific notification (betting process presentation) is executed when the bet number operation of the bet amount operating means is performed, and a bet number correspondence announcement (bet correspondence presentation) corresponding to the bet number set based on the bet number operation is performed. A bet amount notification means (function of executing a betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) executed by a specific notification means (bet display unit 34);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the number of bets drawn by the lottery means for the replay result. re-game setting means (re-game setting processing by main controller 101) for executing re-game processing in which the same number of bets is set as the re-game state, and the lottery by the lottery means can be received again function) and
with
As the bet amount operation means, a first bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56) and a second bet amount operation means (medal insertion port 45, second credit insertion switch 57) are provided,
When the re-game process is performed based on a specific re-game result (specific re-game result), the specific notification can be executed in the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the first bet amount operating means. a first specific notification means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81);
When the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result (specified re-game result), a second notification different from the first notification mode based on the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operating means a second specific notification means (a function of executing a specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing the specific notification in a mode (single bet effect);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a bet amount is set when a bet amount operation is performed by a bet amount operating means, and a bet corresponding to the set bet amount is issued through a specific notification. Number corresponding notification is performed. Therefore, in addition to being able to grasp the bet amount set based on the bet amount operation by the bet amount corresponding notification, it is also possible to grasp that the bet amount operation has been accepted by the specific notification, so that unnecessary bets can be made. It is possible to prevent number operations.

Moreover, when a specific re-game result is won and the re-game process is performed, the bet-number correspondence notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the re-game process is performed according to the bet-number operation of the bet-number operating means. conducted based on In this case as well, since the specific notification is made before the notification corresponding to the bet amount, the notification mode is the same as when the bet amount is set by the bet amount setting means based on the normal bet amount operation. .

After that, after winning a specific replay result, a case where the bet amount is operated by the first bet amount operating means of the bet amount operating means, and a case where the bet amount is operated by the second bet amount operating means are performed. By making the notification mode of the specific notification different, it is possible to make the notification mode correspond to the normal bet number operation of each bet number operation means. Thus, even if the result of the replay is that the replay process is to be performed, the game can be progressed in the same flow as the game after the result of other minor wins or the result of losing. In addition, by using the fact that the impression given to the player is similar to that after other minor winning combinations or after losing results but different from that after replaying results, for example, a specific replay result can It is also possible to enhance the effect of giving the impression that it is treated in the same way as the result of being out, and this can greatly contribute to the diversification of games.

Feature cG2. The bet amount setting means sets a first bet amount when the bet amount is manipulated by the first bet amount manipulating means, and the bet amount is set by the second bet manipulating means. In this case, a second number of bets different from the first number is set,
The first notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification in which the notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed,
The gaming machine according to feature cG1, wherein the second notification mode is a notification mode of the specific notification in which the notification corresponding to the number of bets of the second number is performed.

According to the above configuration, as a replay state after a specific replay result, even after the bet amount has already been set, by operating the first bet amount operation means, the first bet amount is set. It is possible to give an impression to the player that it is possible to set the bet amount and operate the second bet amount operating means to set the second bet amount. By doing so, it is possible to help give the impression that a specific replay result is treated in the same way as other small combination results or losing results, and it is possible to make use of this to improve the interest of the game.

Feature cG3. When the specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, means for performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets (by the display control device 81 a function of executing a specific replay bet effect setting process);
When the specific notification of the second notification mode is executed by the second specific notification means, means for performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets (by the display control device 81 a function of executing a single bet effect setting process based on a specific insert command or a specific second operation command in a specific regame bet effect setting process;
The gaming machine according to feature cG2, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first bet amount operating means and the second bet amount operating means are operated in a replay state after a specific replay result, not only the notification mode of the specific notification but also the corresponding bet amount notification is normal. It will be reported as corresponding to the number of bets at the time. By doing so, the specific notification up to the bet number corresponding notification corresponds to each bet amount operating means, but the bet number corresponding notification itself is the bet number that has already been set in the specific replay state. It is possible to avoid a contradiction in the production such as that it corresponds to .

Feature cG4. The specific notification of the first notification mode is executed by the first specific notification means, and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the first number of bets is performed, or the second specific notification means When the start operation means is operated in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode is performed and the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the second number of bets is performed, Means for switching the number-of-bet notification to the number-of-bet notification corresponding to the number of bets set in the replay state (function of executing processing for performing a bet-corresponding effect in the pseudo-bet effect by the display control device 81, 254(c)), the gaming machine according to feature cG3.

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet amount has already been set as a replay state, it is possible to perform a pseudo-bet amount correspondence notification corresponding to the operation of each bet amount operating means, while at the same time the start operation is performed. When the means is operated, by switching to the notification corresponding to the bet number corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state, even though the revolving body has started to rotate, this time It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets provided by the lottery means.

Feature cG5. In a situation where the specific notification of the first notification mode is performed by the first specific notification means, or in a situation where the specific notification of the second notification mode is performed by the second specific notification means, When the starting operation means is operated, the means for switching the number-of-bet notification to the number-of-bet notification corresponding to the number of bets set in the replay state The gaming machine according to feature cG3 or feature cG4, characterized by having a function of executing a process of switching to bet corresponding presentation during process presentation (see FIG. 254(c)).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the bet amount has already been set as a replay state, it is possible to perform a pseudo-bet amount corresponding notification corresponding to the operation of each bet amount operation means, When the starting operation means is operated before reaching the actual bet number corresponding notification, switching to the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet number set as the replay state is performed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the player cannot grasp the number of bets provided by the current lottery means even though the rotation has started.

Feature cG6. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification including a first specific notification (lighting effect) and a second specific notification (betting sound effect effect) different from the first specific notification as the specific notification. can be,
The specific notification in the first notification mode by the first specific notification means includes the first specific notification and the second specific notification, while in the second notification mode by the second specific notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features cG1 to cG5, wherein the specific notification does not include the first specific notification but includes the second specific notification.

According to the above configuration, the difference between the first notification mode and the second notification mode is whether or not the first specific notification is included. It is possible to expect an excellent effect of the feature cG1 with a relatively simple configuration such as making them different.

Feature cG7. game value input means (medal input port 45) for inputting game value by a player;
game value input grasping means (inserted medal detection sensor 45a) for grasping that a game value has been inserted into the game value inserting means;
with
Any one of features cG1 to cG6, characterized in that said gaming value input grasping means grasps that a bet amount operation has been executed by said second betting amount manipulating means when it grasps that a game value has been inserted. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, in the replay state set based on the specific replay result, when the player inserts the game value, the second Specific notification in the notification mode is executed. In other words, even in a replay state based on a specific replay result, it is possible to insert a game value, and furthermore, by treating it as if it were possible to set the number of bets by inserting the game value, This can help give the player an impression that a specific replay result is equivalent to other minor win results.

Feature cG8. A virtual game value storage means (credit counter) for storing a virtual game value with a predetermined number as the upper limit,
When the first number of virtual game values corresponding to the bet number set when the first bet amount operation means is operated is stored in the virtual game value storage means, the first bet amount operation means is operated. A configuration in which the first number of bets is set based on the operation,
The second specific notification means, when the re-game processing is performed based on the specific re-game result, the virtual The gaming machine according to feature cG7, characterized in that it is possible to increase the number of game values stored and to execute the specific notification in the second notification mode.

According to the above configuration, in the replay state based on the specific replay result, when the game value is inserted from the game value input means, not only is the specific notification by the pseudo second notification mode performed, but also the virtual game value It is possible to increase the number of items stored in the storage means. By doing so, it is possible to set the number of bets by inserting a virtual game value in a specific re-gaming state. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged such as being forced to play.

Feature cG9. The bet amount set by the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operating means may be different from the bet amount set in the re-gaming state based on the specific re-gaming result,
The second specific notification means, when the re-game process is performed based on the specific re-game result, is configured to perform the specific game in the second notification mode based on the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means. In addition to executing the notification, the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the replay process is executed (the bet corresponding effect is executed based on the specific input command in the specific regame bet effect setting process by the display control device 81). (see FIG. 254(d)), and when the bet number operation is performed by the second bet amount operation means in a situation where the bet number corresponding information is being executed, The game according to any one of the characteristics cG1 to cG8, characterized in that it is possible to execute a predetermined notification (credit increase sound effect, FIG. 254(a)) without updating the notification corresponding to the number of bets. machine.

According to the above configuration, when a bet amount operation is performed by the second bet amount operating means in a replay state based on a specific replay result, the specific notification is made according to the second notification mode and the corresponding bet amount notification is performed. Further, when the bet amount is operated by the second bet amount operating means, only the predetermined notification is performed without updating the bet amount corresponding notification. In this way, in a replay state based on a specific replay result, along with the specific notification by the bet number manipulation of the second bet number manipulation means, the replay is made instead of the bet number by the bet number manipulation of the second bet number manipulation means. By performing the bet number corresponding notification corresponding to the bet amount set in the game state, it is possible to clearly grasp that the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means has been accepted, and the bet amount operation is accepted. It is also possible to grasp the number of bets. In addition, when the bet number operation is performed again by the second bet amount operation means, if the bet number corresponding notification is not updated, the impression that the bet number corresponding notification is legitimate is given. can be strengthened, and since a predetermined notification is also given at the time of the bet operation, it is possible to let the player know that the bet operation has been accepted even if the bet operation is not performed. Therefore, when the bet amount set by the bet amount operation of the second bet amount operation means is different from the bet amount in the replay state, contradiction and inconvenience of notification of the bet amount operation by the second bet amount operation means are preferably avoided. can be resolved.

The invention described in the features cG1 to cG9 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, and features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic cH group>
Feature cH1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the starting operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulating bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of each of the circulating bodies. Drive control means (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101),
A bet amount operation means (first credit insertion switch 56, second credit insertion switch 57) for setting the bet amount for a game;
bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game when the bet amount operation means is operated (function for executing the first operation corresponding process and the second operation corresponding process by the main control device 101);
Lottery means (function for executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) for providing a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, based on the operation of the starting operation means. and,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
A specific notification means (for executing a betting process effect, etc. in the betting effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification (betting time effect such as a betting process effect) when the betting number operation means is operated. function to perform processing) and
Bet number notification means for executing a bet number correspondence notification (bet corresponding effect) corresponding to the bet number set by the bet amount setting means by a predetermined notification means (betting effect setting processing by the display control device 81 is executed) function) and
In a specific situation where the specific notification is being executed, when the starting operation means is operated, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the start drive control based on the operation of the starting operation means (freeze by main controller 101 a function of setting a second freeze flag when a start operation is performed during a betting process effect in a replay state based on a specific replay result in a lottery process.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when a bet number operating means is operated, the game bet number is set, a specific notification is executed, and a game bet number corresponding to the game bet number is set. A predetermined notification means is used to notify the number of bets. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that the starting operation means is operated during the execution of the specific notification, and the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation. Execution of start drive control is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to preferably avoid an event in which the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body are overlapped, and it is possible to prevent inconvenience due to duplication of effects and processes.

Feature cH2. Specific drive control means capable of executing specific drive control so as to perform a specific action (second freeze effect) as a game effect using the revolving body (executing the second freeze effect in the rotation effect process by the main control device 101 function),
The gaming machine according to feature cH1, wherein the specific drive control means can execute the specific drive control when execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specific means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification and the start of rotation of the revolving body overlap, a specific action as a game effect using the revolving body, such as a so-called freeze effect, is executed. By using such a specific action, even if the specific notification and the start of rotation of the orbiting body overlap, it is possible to accept the situation without any sense of incongruity. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the movement of the body, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

In addition, to the above configuration, a configuration may be added such that "the drive control means can execute the start drive control after the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is completed."

Feature cH3. An execution lottery means (a function of executing a freeze lottery process by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery for executing the specific drive control by the specific drive control means based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The specifying means can cause the specific drive control to be performed even if the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means is different from the result corresponding to the execution of the specific drive control. The gaming machine according to feature cH2, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution lottery for the specific action is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery means, even if the execution lottery for the specific action is not won, the specific notification and the start of rotation of the rotating body overlap. When doing so, it is possible to cause a specific action to be performed. In this way, it is more clarified that the specific operation is not performed by chance when the specific notification and the start of rotation overlap.

Feature cH4. Advantage determination means (function for executing AT mode transition lottery by main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The advantageous determination means makes the advantageous determination when the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (specific combination) than when a second result (normal combination) different from the first result is obtained. The advantageous determination is performed so that the result of is likely to be a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
The execution lottery means corresponds to executing the specific drive control when the lottery result of the lottery means is the first result rather than when the lottery result is the second result. The gaming machine according to feature cH3, wherein the execution lottery is executed so as to easily result in winning.

According to the above configuration, the execution rate of the specific action and the occurrence rate of the advantageous event are clearly related. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific action by utilizing the player's psychology of expecting an advantageous event. When an action is performed, it can be made to accept it without a sense of incongruity, and it can be made to pay attention with a great sense of anticipation.

Feature cH5. The specific notification means is configured to end the specific notification before the specific drive control by the specific drive control means ends (see FIG. 252(d)). The gaming machine according to any one of cH2 to feature cH4.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification ends before the specific action ends, the start drive control and the specific notification overlap even though the specific action is performed by restricting the start drive control. It is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience of not being resolved.

Feature cH6. The specific drive control means stops the rotating body and delays the start of rotation of the rotating body by the start drive control when execution of the start drive control is restricted by the specifying means. The game machine according to any one of features cH2 to cH5, characterized in that the specific drive control is executed so as to perform an action.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the rotating body does not rotate in the specific operation. By doing so, the specific notification and the operation of the circulating body do not overlap, and it is possible to prevent inconveniences due to overlap of processing.

Feature cH7. A first specific drive control means capable of executing a first specific drive control so as to perform a first specific action (first freeze effect) as a game effect including the rotation of the rotating body (rotation effect processing by the main controller 101) function to execute the first freeze effect) and
Second specific drive control means (rotation effect processing by main controller 101) capable of executing second specific drive control so as to perform a second specific action (second freeze effect) as a game action that does not include the rotation of the revolving body function to execute the second freeze effect),
with
In the specific situation, when the starting operation means is operated and the first specific drive control is performed by the first specific drive control means based on the operation of the starting operation means, the specific notification can be restricted. specific restriction means for executing such restriction processing (function for executing processing for switching the betting process effect to bet corresponding effect based on the first freeze command in the specific re-game bet effect setting process by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to any one of features cH1 to cH6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific action including the rotation of the circulator and the specific notification overlap, the specific notification side is restricted. In this way, the configuration is such that priority is given to the first specific action by the rotation of the revolving body, instead of preventing the specific notification based on the operation of the betting operation means until the rotation of the revolving body is stopped. In addition, it is possible to suppress a high load on the drive unit due to sudden changes in drive control of the rotating body.

The invention described in the features cH1 to cH7 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal A configuration is known in which a lottery is performed and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the enjoyment of games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Features cA1 to cA20, features cB1 to cB15, features cC1 to features cC9, features cD1 to features cD11, features cE1 to features cE9, features cF1 to features cF8, and features The technical ideas shown in any one configuration of cG1 to cG9 and features cH1 to cH7 can be applied individually, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. It is also possible to When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature cA group to feature cH group to each configuration of the feature cA group to feature cH group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The following feature dA group to feature dN group are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the 4d embodiment, these modifications, or combinations thereof.

<Characteristic dA group>
Features dA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to run
In the special game, at a certain timing after the operation of the stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific process (CZ effect setting at the time of stop by the display control device 81 A game machine characterized by having a function of executing processing.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, and as a specific process related to the mode notification function While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specifying process is executed as the specifying process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, so the special result In this case, it is novel that the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize a great playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or specific process is won by such an operation mode, after the operation of the stop operation means is executed, the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed. can be executed, the result of the specific processing based on the special result is notified within the game in which the special result is won. Therefore, even in a so-called complete announcement type gaming machine that notifies the result of specific processing in each game, it is possible to set a special result, which can be greatly used to enhance the interest of the game.

Feature dA2. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
is set such that the specific event is more likely to occur when the first specific process is executed than when the second specific process is executed,
The specific notification means executes the specific notification as notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event,
If the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means is a response result (AT mode transition winning, CZ mode transition winning) corresponding to causing the specific event, a specific event control means (main A process for setting the precursor mode by the control device 101),
When the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is the corresponding result, the specific event control means causes the specific event to occur in the game subsequent to the special game in which the special result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature dA1, characterized in that it has a means (a function of executing a process of setting the number of precursor games by the main control device 101 to 0).

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the first specific processing is executed in which the specific event is more likely to occur if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, and the specific event is more likely to occur if the operation is performed in the second operation mode than in the first operation mode. In the configuration in which the second specific process, which is unlikely to occur, is executed, the specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game with the special result. In addition, since a specific event occurs in the game following the special game that resulted in the special result, a specific notification corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event is executed in the game that resulted in the occurrence of the specific event. The need to do so is heightened. By doing so, even if the specific process is executed after the operation of the stop operation means is performed and the specific event can occur in the next game, it is known that the specific event will occur. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a specific event without being notified, and it is possible to suppress the surprise of the specific event, and the period in which the specific notification can be executed is more limited, so that the player's awareness is increased during the period. It is possible to concentrate and raise the degree of attention to the game to the utmost.

Feature dA3. When the specific event has occurred by the specific event control means, the game (AT mode) after the game in which the specific event has occurred is faster than the game (CZ mode, normal mode) before the specific event has occurred. The gaming machine according to feature dA2, characterized in that the game is highly advantageous for the player.

According to the above configuration, since the special game in which the result of the specific processing triggered by the special result becomes the corresponding result, the advantage for the player increases, so the necessity of performing the specific notification in the special game is high. Become. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature dA1 in such a situation, it can be expected that the excellent effect of the feature dA1 will be exhibited more favorably.

In addition, regarding the expression ``high advantage for the player'', the expression ``the unit expected privilege (net increase in the number of sheets) that can be expected per game as a privilege granted by the privilege granting means is large''. Alternatively, it may be expressed as ``the result of the specific processing is likely to be an advantageous result for the player''.

Feature dA4. Based on the result of the specific processing by the specific processing means, the execution frequency of the mode notification by the mode notification means after the game next to the special game is higher than the execution frequency in the game up to the special game. The game according to any one of features dA1 to dA3, characterized by having means (function for executing processing for shifting to AT mode by main control device 101) capable of making it machine.

According to the above configuration, based on the result of the specific process triggered by the special result, the execution frequency of mode notification increases in the game subsequent to the special game resulting in the special result. Therefore, the player can establish a desired winning result by following the mode notification, and can efficiently obtain a privilege based on the desired winning result. Further, since the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is performed in the special game, the fact is informed by the specific notification at least before the execution frequency of the mode notification becomes high. It is possible to prevent the person from feeling discomfort.

Feature dA5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result can be established, while the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. When operated in a second operation mode different from , a mode in which a winning of a second result can be established in which a privilege given by the privilege granting means is different from that when winning of the first result is established. The result (push order bell) is set,
The mode notification means is configured to be capable of executing an operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode as the mode notification based on the operation of the starting operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA4.

According to the above configuration, when the game next to the special game that won the special result wins the mode result, and the mode notification is performed based on the mode result, at least the result of the specific process triggered by the special result is supported. If the specific notification to be executed is executed within the special game, the mode notification and the specific notification which are executed at the start of the game in which the mode result is won are less likely to overlap. By doing so, it is possible to avoid confusing the player due to duplicate notifications.

In particular, as in the feature dA4, in the configuration in which the execution frequency of the mode notification increases from the game following the special game, the mode notification is performed at the start of the game following the game in which the special result is won as described above. There is a high possibility of being caught, and the significance of executing the specific notification in the special game is high.

Feature dA6. In a game in which a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
In a game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the specified result, a second specific notification means capable of executing notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process at least by the specific timing (at the start of the display control device 81) function of executing a CZ effect setting process).

According to the above configuration, in a game that is a specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means. can be easily done. In other words, it can be said that the specific notification is set to be executed at a specific timing in accordance with the notification in the case of the specific result. It is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity due to the difference in notification timing of the result, and it is also possible to eliminate the possibility that the result of the specific process is seen through due to the difference in the notification timing.

In relation to the "second specific notification means", the "specific notification means" in the feature dA1 may be replaced with the "first specific notification means".

Feature dA7. The gaming machine according to feature dA6, wherein the second specific notification means can execute notification (tenpai effect) corresponding to the result of the third specific processing at a timing prior to the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, in the game as the specific result, the third specific process is performed before the operation of the stop operation means, and the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process is executed at the timing before the specific timing. be. That is, when the first specific process or the second specific process is executed as the specific process, it is assumed that the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the stop operation means is operated. When the specific result is won, the notification corresponding to the result of the third specific process as the specific process is executed before the specific timing. By doing so, the timing of executing the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is diversified, and the result of the specific processing is predicted based on the relationship between the lottery result and the timing of notification that triggers the specific processing. A game can also be realized, and it is possible to contribute to improving the interest of the game.

Feature dA8. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
The specific process in the case of the special result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined specific result (for example, Cherry A). The gaming machine according to feature dA6 or feature dA7.

According to the above configuration, the case where the specific process such as the first specific process or the second specific process is performed based on the special result is better than the case where the specific process such as the third specific process is performed based on the specific result. specific events are likely to occur. Therefore, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing is overwhelmingly easier to execute in the game in which the specific result is won, but the notification that it leads to the specific event desired by the player is special. As a result, the winning game is more likely to occur. Therefore, even if it is a special result, the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed within the game in which the specific process is performed, so that even the game that is the specific result can correspond to the result of the specific process. It is possible to make people have a sense of expectation for the notification to be made.

Feature dA9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the special result is higher than the probability that it will be the other specific result (normal reply A to C, chance A to C, cherry A to C, watermelon) The gaming machine according to any one of features dA6 to dA8, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of a special result is lower than that of other specific results. In the case of the result, inconvenience such as not being notified of the specific processing after it is executed is likely to occur. In that respect, by notifying the result of the specific process in accordance with the other specific results, it is possible to hide the fact that it is a special result in the other specific results, and it is possible to correspond to the result of the specific process from the notification timing. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification from being overlooked, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature dA10. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
Execution of the first specific process triggered by the special result is set to be more advantageous to the player than execution of the third specific process triggered by the predetermined specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA9, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first specified process is performed which is more advantageous than the third specified process which is executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won. will be With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player more cautiously perform the operation mode when the special result is won, and to make the player want to know the result of the first specific processing based on the operation more quickly. , the significance of performing the specific notification in the special game resulting in the special result like the feature dA1 is enhanced.

Feature dA11. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (for example, a specific combination) different from the special result, the specific processing means performs a third specific process before the stop operation means is operated. Equipped with means capable of executing specific processing (function for executing AT lottery processing at the time of start by main control device 101, etc.),
It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to execute the third specific process triggered by the predetermined specific result than to execute the second specific process triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, if an operation is performed in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second specified process is performed which is more disadvantageous than the third specified process which is executed regardless of the operation mode when the other specific result is won. done. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the operation mode more careful when winning a special result. Especially from the relationship with the feature dA10, it is possible to make the user want to know the result of the second specific processing based on the operation at an early stage, and as with the feature dA1, the specific notification can be made in the special game that resulted in the special result. The meaning of doing is enhanced.

Feature dA12. Preliminary notification means (tenpai effect, confirmation effect, specific notification effect) corresponding to the result of the specific process (Tenpai effect, specific effect, special role in the start time CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81) A function to execute processing for performing notification production and a function to execute processing for performing confirmation production when cherry winning is performed),
The preceding notification means is a means capable of executing the preceding notification at a timing prior to the specific timing in the special game (a tenpai effect triggered by a special role in the start CZ effect setting process by the display control device 81). dA1 to dA11, characterized in that the gaming machine according to any one of features dA1 to dA11 is provided.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the specific process differs depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, the destination corresponding to the specific process at a timing prior to the specific timing at which the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is performed. Since the notification may be performed, the player can perceive in advance that the specific notification will be performed, and even if the notification timing is limited, the period of the specific notification can be secured for a longer period of time, and the game performance can be optimized.

Feature dA13. According to the result of the specific processing, the specific notification means may provide content notification including advantageous content that is advantageous to the player or non-advantageous content that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the advantageous content is performed. can be executed as the specific notification,
The specific notification of the advantageous content may be performed after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means, and the non-advantageous content may be performed after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means. It is set so that a specific notification may be made,
Furthermore, after the prior notification is performed by the prior notification means, the specific notification of the advantageous content is easier to perform than the specific notification of the unadvantageous content. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, even in the case where advance notification is performed before execution of the specific processing, the subsequent specific notification may have advantageous contents or may have unfavorable contents. Even if it is done, it becomes difficult for a contradiction to occur in the subsequent specific notification. In addition, when the advance notification is performed, the contents are likely to be advantageous, so it is possible to preferably increase the degree of attention to the advance notification.

Feature dA14. After the branch timing (first stop ON operation) in which the operation mode of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine which operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the previous notification means The gaming machine according to feature dA12 or feature dA13, further comprising means for performing the advance notification (function for executing processing for performing a ten-pie effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible for the player to decide in which operation mode to operate according to the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, and if the detected content is not desirable for the player, the second operation is performed so as to obtain the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed. Although it is conceivable to operate in different modes, by causing the previous notification to occur after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge, as described above, the above actions are less likely to be performed.

Feature dA15. Prior to the branch timing (first stop ON operation) when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is to be performed. Any one of features dA12 to dA14 characterized by comprising means for performing the preceding notification by means (function for executing processing for performing specific notification effect by display control device 81) The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the player can decide which operation mode to operate in accordance with the advance notification by the advance notification means. That is, for example, if the content of the specific notification can be detected in advance, and if the detected content is not desirable for the player, the second operation is performed so as to obtain the second privilege although the second specific processing is performed. It is also conceivable that the player operates the stop operation means more carefully if the sensed content is favorable to the player. By generating it before the timing of branching to the second operation mode, it is possible to determine which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode should be operated by prior notification, and then efficiently acquire the privilege. It is possible to realize a novel game property such as this, and it is also possible to greatly enhance the performance toward the specific notification.

Feature dA16. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, a second advance notification means (display control device 81 The gaming machine according to any one of features dA12 to dA15, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of performing a tenpai effect or a specific notification effect when a special role is not won.

According to the above configuration, since the previous notification is generated even if it is another specific result, the previous notification is less likely to serve as a mark of the special result. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature dA17. The specific processing means is configured to execute the specific process using specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) acquired before executing the specific process,
The result of the specific process when the specific numerical information is used for the specific process can be specified before the specific process is performed. function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features dA12 to dA16, wherein said advance notification is executed based on a result of identification by said destination identification means.

According to the above configuration, even if a special result is processed differently depending on the operation mode, the result of the first specific process when the operation is performed in the first operation mode or the second specific process when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. Since the result of the specific process can be specified in advance and the advance notification is performed based on the result specified in advance, the reliability of the advance notification can be improved.

Feature dA18. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific symbol is placed at a specific position of a specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops. stops and the first pattern combination stops at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result (Cherry A to C) different from the special result, the specific pattern stops at a specific position of the specific circular body, and the first pattern is displayed at the valid position. By stopping the third pattern combination different from the combination and the second pattern combination, the privilege corresponding to the specified result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The preceding notification means is a specifying means (cherry winning A gaming machine according to any one of features dA12 to dA17, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process for performing a time determination effect.

When a specific pattern stops at a specific position of a specific loop, it is possible to determine from the stop result whether it is based on a specific result or by the first operation mode when winning a special role result. Can not. In such a configuration, when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, there is a case where the previous notification is performed. or whether it corresponds to the first specific processing or the second specific processing after that, and there are more choices in predicting the result when the previous notification is performed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the notification and the specific notification.

Feature dA19. The specific processing means is means (main control unit) capable of executing a third specific process as the specific process before the stop operation means is operated in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result. A function to execute AT lottery processing etc. at the start by the device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature dA18, wherein the identifying means executes notification corresponding to the result of the third identifying process based on the identification result as the previous notification.

According to the above configuration, the third specific process is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as the previous notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body. By doing so, if the scene in which the advance notification is performed is a special result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but there is no contradiction in the content of the advance notification. , it is possible to improve the reliability of the earlier notification.

Feature dA20. Characteristic dA18 characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the second pattern combination stops at the effective position without the specific pattern stopping at the specific position of the specific circular body. Or the gaming machine according to feature dA19.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiting body when operated in the first operation mode, but the specific pattern stops when operated in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the previous notification was executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the previous notification.

It should be noted that the above configuration is defined as "a branch timing (first stop ON operation) to determine which operation mode to be performed between the first operation mode and the second operation mode when each of the stop operation means is operated. is set, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position of the specific circular body at the branch timing by operating in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the special result, by operating in the second operation mode, the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position of the specific circular body at the branch timing. By limiting the configuration of "other symbols stop", it becomes clearer that whether or not the specific symbol stops at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode is different.

Feature dA21. A plurality of the stop operation means are provided corresponding to the number of each of the revolving bodies,
The specific processing means executes the first specific process or the second specific process after all the stop operation means are operated,
Any one of features dA1 to dA20, characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification after the first specific process or the second specific process is executed in the special game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, after all the operations of the plurality of stop operation means are completed, the first specifying process and the second specifying process are executed, and the specified notification is performed. By adopting such a configuration, a more careful operation of the stop operation means at the time of winning the special result is encouraged, and the timing of performing the specific notification within the special game in which the special result is won is more limited. It becomes a thing. As a result, the timing at which attention should be paid to the specific notification is aggregated, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification.

Feature dA22. Characteristic dA1 to Characteristic dA21 characterized in that the specific notification means executes the specific notification before the start of the game next to the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed in the special game in which the special result is won, and the specific notification is not carried over to the next game. With such a configuration, the specific timing at which the specific notification is performed is further limited, and it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the specific notification.

The inventions described in the features dA1 to dA22 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dA1 to dA22, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dB group>
Feature dB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by means of a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing a push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main controller 101); ,
Advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT lottery process at the time of start or an AT lottery process at the time of stop by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination that causes an advantageous event advantageous to the player;
Specific notification means (function for executing CZ effect setting processing at start and CZ effect setting processing at stop by display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination by predetermined notification means;
with
The advantageous determination means is
a first advantage judgment means (a function of executing AT lottery processing at the start by the main controller 101) for executing a first advantage judgment as the advantage judgment when the starting operation means is operated;
a second advantage judgment means (a function of executing a stop AT lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a second advantage judgment as the advantage judgment after the stop operation means is operated;
with
The specific notification means is
A first specific notification (tenpai effect based on a specific combination) corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination is executed as the specific notification at a specific timing before the predetermined stop operation means is operated. 1 specific notification means (function for executing start time CZ effect setting processing by display control device 81);
A second specific notification means (a CZ effect at the time of stop by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification (tenpai effect based on a special role) corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination at the specific timing as the specific notification function to execute setting processing) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is given when the operation is performed in , and there are cases where the mode notification of the operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode is performed. It is possible to realize a game property such that even if the result is the same, different benefits can be obtained depending on the presence or absence of the device.

In this way, even though it is premised on the game property that the privilege obtained by operating the stop operation means may differ, the advantage determination that causes an advantageous event for the player is the start operation means before the operation of the stop operation means. or after the operation of the stop operation means. Advantageous judgments before and after the operation can be included in the gameplay, and the game is diversified.

After that, while the first specific notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination before the operation of the stop operation means is performed at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means, after the operation of the stop operation means Since the second specific notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination is also performed at a specific timing, it does not matter whether the executed specific notification corresponds to either the first advantageous determination or the second advantageous determination. It becomes difficult to distinguish whether or not, even if it is the second specific notification before the execution of the advantageous determination, the first specific notification after the execution of the advantageous determination can increase the reliability of the second specific notification, and the Attention to the specific notification can be improved.

Feature dB2. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided,
The gaming machine according to feature dB1, wherein the second advantage determination means executes the second advantage determination after the specific number of stop operation means are operated.

According to the above configuration, the second advantage judgment is executed after all stop operation means are operated. By doing so, it is clarified that the specific timing, which is the timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means, is the timing before the operation of all the stop operation means is completed. Therefore, it is clarified that the second specific notification is prior notification before execution of the second advantageous determination, and the effect of the feature dB1 that enhances the reliability of such prior notification using the first specific notification is also highlighted. be able to.

Feature dB3. The second specific notification means, before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the third reel) and after the operation of the specific stop operation means (stop switch corresponding to the first reel) The game according to feature dB1 or feature dB2, characterized by comprising means capable of executing the second specific notification at a specific timing (a function of executing a process for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81). machine.

According to the above configuration, the second specific notification is executed after at least the operation of the specific stop operation means is performed. In a configuration in which the results are different, it is possible to perform the second specific notification after narrowing down to some extent. Therefore, the reliability of the second specific notification itself can be enhanced.

Feature dB4. The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification when the specific stop operation means is operated in a first mode (first stop and predetermined location), When the stop operation means is operated in a second mode (second or third stop, or first stop and other than the predetermined location) different from the first mode, the second specific notification is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature dB3, characterized in that it has a means (a function of executing the first stop ON effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of performing this.

According to the above configuration, the second advantage judgment executed after the operation of the stop operation means gives the player a different impression depending on whether the specific stop operation means is operated in the first mode or in the second mode. It is possible to operate the stop operation means more carefully and with expectation through the second specific notification.

Feature dB5. The second advantage determination means can execute the second advantage determination when the specific stop operation means is operated in the first mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result. , characterized in that it is set so that there is a case where the second advantageous determination cannot be executed when the specific stop operation means is operated in the second mode. game machine.

According to the above configuration, consistency is ensured that whether or not the second specific notification is executed differs depending on the operation mode, as in feature dB4. Therefore, the reliability of the specific notification is enhanced, and it becomes possible to draw attention to the specific notification.

Feature dB6. In each game, when the advantageous determination is performed or when the advantageous determination is performed, the predetermined notification means is caused to start predetermined notification, and the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is made. a predetermined notification means for ending the predetermined notification (function for executing variable display by numerical characters in each of the variable areas SP1 to SP3 by the display control device 81),
The first specific notification means executes the first specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification, and then the result notification corresponding to the result of the first advantageous determination is performed by the predetermined notification means. Execute the predetermined notification,
The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification at the specific timing in the predetermined notification, and then performs the result notification corresponding to the result of the second advantageous determination by the predetermined notification means. The game machine according to any one of features dB1 to feature dB5, wherein the predetermined notification is executed.

According to the above configuration, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are effects in the middle of the predetermined notification, and after each specific notification is performed, the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is performed. become. By doing so, even if the second specific notification is performed before the second advantageous determination is performed, the notification content of the second specific notification is compensated by performing the result notification after that. It is also possible to make In other words, the second specific notification can be treated as advance notification, and the degree of freedom in the content of the second specific notification is greatly improved.

Feature dB7. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, termination means for terminating the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to execute termination processing) and
Specifying means (display A function of executing a process for performing a pressing order notification effect for the 1st to 6th small roles instead of a specific notification effect during AT when a special role is won by the control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features dB1 to feature dB6, comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to signal that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached by performing the second specific notification in advance corresponding to the second advantageous determination performed after the operation of the stop operation means. By doing so, it is possible to make the second specific notification not only a function of notifying the second advantageous determination in advance, but also a function of notifying that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached, It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second specific notification through the integration of functions.

Feature dB8. The second specific notification means can execute the second specific notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result,
The gaming machine according to feature dB7, wherein the second specific notification includes notification of content corresponding to the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific notification is performed in a situation where it is specified that the upper limit of the advantageous state is reached, the second operation mode is shown in which the second privilege is granted. By doing so, the player can obtain more benefits when the advantageous state ends, and the number of benefits that can be obtained in the advantageous state is limited. In the configuration, it is possible to reach the upper limit earlier.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dB1 to DB8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dB1 to dB8, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dC group>
Features dC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific determination means for executing a specific determination to cause a specific event that facilitates the execution of mode notification by the mode notification means (for example, AT lottery processing at start time by main controller 101, AT lottery process at stop time, etc. a function to execute processing related to the instruction function);
with
The specific determination means is
In the special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first specific determination is executed as the specific determination, while the stop operation is performed. When the means is operated in the second operation mode, the specific determination is set so as to execute a second specific judgment in which the specific event is less likely to occur than the first specific judgment, or not to execute the specific judgment. has been
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a corresponding result corresponding to causing the specific event, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result is given after the game in the special game. Executable specific notification means (processing for outputting a precursor command based on the delay flag by the main control device 101, and performing double eyes production based on the precursor command in the start CZ production setting processing by the display control device 81 function).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and the mode notification is likely to be executed. While the first specific determination of causing the event is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is granted and the second specific determination of causing the specific event is performed. A special result for execution of the judgment is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first specific judgment is more likely to cause a specific event than the second specific judgment. Therefore, when a special result is obtained, the advantageous side (second operation mode) of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means and the advantageous side (first operation mode) for causing the specific event It is possible to realize a novel playability such as entrusting the player to select the mode).

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the result of the specific determination is the corresponding result that causes the specific event, the specific notification of the corresponding result is not given to the game, but to the special game that wins the special result after that. It is designed so that it may be executed by In other words, in a special game in which a special result is won, there may be an inconvenience that a specific notification can be made only after a stop operation is performed. It is configured to follow by performing in the game. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically improve the degree of freedom of the specific notification in the special game in which the special result is won, while enjoying the benefit of improving the game performance by providing the special result.

Feature dC2. The specific determination means is set to be able to execute a third specific determination as the specific determination regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means in a specific game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result. has been
The specific notification means, when the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result, the special after the specific game The game machine according to feature dC1, which is executable in a game.

According to the above configuration, instead of performing the specific notification in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification is performed in the special game in which the first specific determination and the second specific determination are performed depending on the operation mode. is performed, and the relationship between the operation mode and the specific notification is strengthened. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player has won the match result by his or her own operation mode, and it is possible to suitably contribute to the enhancement of interest in the game.

Feature dC3. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the second specific notification means (display A gaming machine according to feature dC2, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of setting so that double eyes effect is performed in the start time CZ effect setting process by the control device 81 .

According to the above configuration, the specific notification may be performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to expect an excellent effect of improving the degree of freedom of the specific notification in the special game while preventing the degree of attention of the specific game from being too low.

Feature dC4. When the result of the third specific determination by the specific determination means is the corresponding result, the specific notification corresponding to the corresponding result is the game after the specific game and the special game is a third specific notification means that can be executed in a different game (a process of outputting a precursor command based on the delay flag and the end of the CZ mode by the main controller 101, and a precursor in the CZ effect setting process at the start by the display control device 81 A gaming machine according to feature dC2 or feature dC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of performing a double eye effect based on a command.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is not performed in the specific game in which the third specific determination is performed regardless of the operation mode, the specific notification can be executed even if the special result is not won. It is possible to suitably avoid the inconvenience of not being notified.

Feature dC5. The specific notification means can execute the specific notification when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the special game, and the stop operation means is in the second operation mode. The game machine according to any one of features dC1 to dC4, wherein the specific notification can be executed when the player is operated by

Even if there is a special result in which a first specific determination and a second specific determination are performed according to an operation mode, a specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific determination is executed in the special game winning the special result. Therefore, the specific notification can be executed regardless of the operation mode. Therefore, as in the configuration described above, by performing the specific notification regardless of the operation mode, the result of the first specific determination or the second specific determination (especially the second specific determination) becomes the corresponding result. It is possible to give the impression that the probability is higher than it actually is. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the occurrence of the specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature dC6. The second pattern combination is configured to be able to stop at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result. The gaming machine according to any one of features dC1 to dC5.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special result is won, when the specific notification corresponding to the result of the previous specific determination is performed, the special result is won from the stop roll in the special game. It becomes difficult to determine whether it was a special result or a special result. In other words, it is possible to not only give an impression that a specific event will occur with a special result as a trigger, but also give an impression that a specific event will occur with a special result as a trigger, by using a configuration for performing a specific notification in a special game. . As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Feature dC7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation can be performed. When the operating means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination is placed at the effective position. The gaming machine according to feature dC6, wherein the combination can be stopped.

According to the above configuration, in order to increase the degree of attention in the game in which the special result is won by the specific notification when the special result is won, the second pattern combination may be stopped depending on the operation mode when the special result is won. However, since there are cases where this is not the case, it is assumed that the second symbol combination is stopped and the specific notification is made when the special result is won, and the operation mode when the special result is won is the first operation mode. It can give the impression that it was carried out precisely because of this. Therefore, by making good use of the commonality between the existing special result, which is a so-called positive hand, and the special result, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention when the special result is won.

Feature dC8. When executing the specific determination based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the specific determination means executes the specific determination so that the corresponding result is less likely than the first specific determination. The gaming machine according to feature dC6 or feature dC7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the specific notification is performed based on the result of the previous specific processing, and when the special result is won, the stop result when operated in the second operation mode and the special result It is also possible to use the commonality of the stop rolls to give the impression that a specific process based on the special result will result in a corresponding result. In other words, simply giving a specific notification even when a special result is won not only gives the impression that even a special result will result in a corresponding result, but may also result in a corresponding result based on the special result. By using the commonality of the stop roll with the special result, it is possible to reduce falseness in giving the impression that even the special result is a corresponding result, and to make it easier to give the impression. It becomes possible.

Feature dC9. Based on the operation of the starting operation means, a predetermined notification (pressing order prediction effect) is executed, and the stop operation means is operated in the first specific order, so that the result of the specific determination is the corresponding one. By executing the first special notification (correct answer effect) suggesting that the result is the result, and by operating the stop operation means in a second specific order different from the first specific order, the result of the specific determination is the A special effect execution means (Fig. 325 (c)) for executing a second special notification (incorrect answer effect) that suggests that the result is different from the corresponding result,
The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification in the special game in which the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means, and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features dC1 to dC8, which is capable of executing the first special notification.

As in the above configuration, after executing the predetermined notification, according to the operation order of the stop operation means, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result, or the fact that the result is not the specific result is executed. In a configuration in which an effect that makes the operation order of the stop operation means to be expected is executed, such as executing the suggested second special notification, the specific notification is performed in the special game in which the special result is won. When it is executed, even if it is operated in the second operation mode on the disadvantageous side, such as executing the second specific determination as the specific determination, the first special notification suggesting that the specific result is obtained. By doing so, it is possible to expect the occurrence of a specific event even when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the second operation mode.

Feature dC10. The second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position even when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell) different from the special result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the stop operation means can be stopped. When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a third pattern different from the first pattern combination and the second pattern combination is placed at the effective position. It is a configuration that allows the combination to be stopped,
The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the first special effect when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature dC9, characterized in that it is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the second pattern combination is stopped by operating in the first operation mode when the special result is won, the first special notification suggesting that the result of the specific determination is the specific result is issued. may be done. By doing so, when the special result is won, the first special notification is executed and the specific notification is executed when the operation is performed in the second operation mode to stop the second symbol combination. , it is possible to give the impression as if the first special notification was executed (the specific result was won) by successfully stopping the second pattern combination when winning the special result. As a result, it is possible to improve not only the game winning the special result but also the game winning the special result, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature dC11. The special effect execution means executes the predetermined notification when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and the second special effect when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature dC10, characterized in that it is capable of executing notification.

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, the second symbol combination is stopped in relation to the execution of the first special notification when the second symbol combination is successfully stopped. Since the second special notification is executed when the operation fails, it is possible to further strengthen the impression that the first special notification is executed in relation to the operation order and the stop result.

Feature dC12. The specific notification means can prevent the specific notification from being executed in a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the first special notification is executed by the special effect execution means. (FIG. 325(d)).

According to the above configuration, even if the second symbol combination is successfully stopped when the special result is won, and the first special notification is executed, there is a case where the specific notification of the correspondence result is not executed. be. In other words, the specific notification is executed in part of the case where the second symbol combination is stopped and the first special notification is executed. By doing so, the contradiction that the specific notification is not executed (the specific event does not occur) even though the second pattern combination could be stopped when the special result is won is resolved. can do.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dC1 to dC12 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dC1 to dC12, the features dA1 to dA22, the features dB1 to dB8, the features dC1 to dC12, the features dD1 to dD10, the features dE1 to dE11, and the features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dD group>
Features dD1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. 2, a privilege granting means (a function of executing medal payout processing by the main controller 101) that grants a number of benefits corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
The privilege granting means requires a first period when the first symbol combination stops at the valid position to grant the first privilege, and the second symbol combination stops at the valid position. is a configuration that requires a second period longer than the first period when granting the second privilege,
Advantage determination means (for example, a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery or an AT addition lottery by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage judgment that causes an advantageous event for the player;
If the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the advantageous event means that causes the advantageous event (for example, a process of shifting to the AT mode by the main controller 101, or a function to execute processing to add), and
After starting the predetermined notification (bomb effect), the advantageous content (explosion effect) corresponding to the fact that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result, and the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is the advantageous result. Specific notification (effect of each game in CZ mode) in which any content including unadvantageous content (non-fire effect) corresponding to a result different from the result is notified is executed by a predetermined notification means. Means (a function of executing the CZ effect setting process at the start and the CZ effect setting process at the stop by the display control device 81);
with
After each circulating body stops, the first timing at which the first period elapses is more likely than the second timing at which the second period elapses after each circulating body stops. The game machine is characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification is set so as to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a number of game values corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, if the lottery result is a special result, a first privilege is provided when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege, which is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, is given, so that if a special result occurs, the privilege is on the advantageous side. It may be advantageous for the player to select the operation of (second operation mode).

Also, an advantageous determination is made to cause an advantageous event advantageous to the player, and the result of the advantageous determination is notified as a specific notification. The specific notification is set so that after the execution of the predetermined notification, either the advantageous content corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event or the non-advantageous content not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified. It is thought that the player who desires the generation of the special notification expects that the specific notification will be of advantageous content.

Then, the second period, during which the second privilege is granted, passes after the first period, during which the first privilege is granted, has elapsed after the rotation of each orbiting body has stopped. It is set so that the specific notification is more likely to have advantageous contents than after the notification.

By doing so, they were able to use the conflicting feelings of wanting to obtain a more advantageous privilege and wanting to confirm the occurrence of an advantageous event by making the specific notification an advantageous content, and winning a special result. It is possible to dramatically improve the playability of the game.

Feature dD2. The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is less likely to result in the advantageous result than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. The gaming machine according to feature dD1, which is set so as not to.

According to the above configuration, in the special game in which the special role is won, the content of the advantage determination and the presence or absence of execution differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and the first operation mode on the side to which the first privilege is granted However, advantageous events are more likely to occur than in the second operation mode on the side to which the second privilege is granted. As described above, the advantageous event occurs at the first timing when the first period during which the first privilege is granted passes, and at the second timing when the second period during which the second privilege is granted passes. Therefore, with such a configuration, the relationship between the content of the advantage judgment in the special game, whether or not it is executed, and the privilege to be given matches the specific notification. Therefore, contradiction between the advantageous determination and the specific notification can be made difficult to occur, and the reliability of the specific notification can be improved, which can be greatly used to improve the interest of the game.

Feature dD3. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third benefit is granted by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be performed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and The gaming machine according to feature dD1 or feature dD2, characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the second timing.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , is associated with the likelihood of advantageous content. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

Feature dD4. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, the second pattern combination can be stopped at the valid position, and the second privilege is granted by the privilege granting means,
At the second timing in which the second period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies stops, if the second period is a period triggered by the special result, it is a period triggered by the special result. Characteristic dD1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content, or is set so as not to be the advantageous content. The gaming machine according to any one of features dD3.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same as the second period, the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery result. In particular, the stop roll is common between the case where the second privilege is granted in the case of a special result and the case where the second privilege is granted in the case of a special result, and the stop roll is advantageous. The easiness of the content cannot be grasped. By doing so, it is possible to realize the game property of predicting the type of content notification based on the lottery result and the length of the period required for granting the privilege.

Feature dD5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, a third pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. and
If the first period is a period triggered by the special result at the first timing in which the first period elapses after each of the orbiting bodies stops, the period triggered by the special result Characteristic dD1 characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set so as to be less likely to be executed as the advantageous content, or is set so as not to be the advantageous content. The gaming machine according to any one of features dD4.

According to the above configuration, even if the period required for granting the privilege is the same as the first period, the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content will differ depending on the lottery results. In particular, since the stop roll differs between when the first benefit is granted in the case of a special result and when the first benefit is granted in the case of a special result, the stop roll and the privilege are different. It is possible to realize the playability of predicting the type of content notification from the required period and length.

Feature dD6. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a replay result and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay result stops at the valid position, the bonus is given by the bonus granting means to the same number as the game resulting in the replay result. is a configuration in which a replay process is executed in which the number of bets is set,
In the case of a predetermined re-gaming result (for example, Cherry A to C), a fourth period is required when a predetermined number of bets is set in the re-gaming process, and a specific re-gaming result (for example, normal In the case of replies A to C), it is set so that a fifth period longer than the fourth period is required when the predetermined number of bets is set in the replay process,
A fourth timing, in which the fourth period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, is more sensitive to the specific notification means than a fifth timing, in which the fifth period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops. The gaming machine according to any one of features dD1 to dD5, wherein the content notification of the specific notification is set to be easily executed as the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, the likelihood that the specific notification becomes advantageous content also differs depending on the length of the period in which the bet amount is set based on the replay result winning, and the bet amount is set in a shorter period. It is more likely that the content will be advantageous if it is used. By doing so, there is no need to greatly differ the effect content when the first benefit or the second benefit is granted, as in other special results, and the effect content in the case of a replay result. With a relatively simple configuration, it is possible to realize the novel game characteristics of the feature dD1 even in replay results.

Feature dD7. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third privilege is given by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and It is set so that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than the second timing,
The fourth period is set as a period of the same or substantially the same length as the third period,
The fourth timing after each revolving body stops based on the predetermined replay result, and the third timing after each revolving body stops based on the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature dD6, wherein the ease of execution of the advantageous content in the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be the same or to the same extent.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , the likelihood of becoming an advantageous content becomes associated. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In addition, the fourth period in which the predetermined number of bets is set based on the predetermined re-game result is set to have the same or substantially the same length as the third period, and the predetermined re-game result is also specified. Even in the case of the result, it is common that advantageous contents are likely to be obtained when the third period or the fourth period has passed since the orbiting body stopped. In this way, regardless of the type of the so-called small win result or replay result, the novel game characteristics of feature dD1 such that the likelihood of obtaining advantageous content differs according to the period after the revolving body stops. can be realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature dD8. When the privilege granting means grants a third privilege that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege and more disadvantageous to the player than the second privilege, the third privilege is longer than the first period. requires a third period shorter than the two periods,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specified result and the pattern combination corresponding to the specified result stops at the valid position, the third privilege is given by the privilege granting means as a privilege corresponding to the specified result. and
At a third timing when the third period elapses after each of the rotating bodies stops, the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be executed as the advantageous content than at the first timing, and It is set so that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is more likely to be executed as the advantageous content than the second timing,
The fifth period is set as a period longer than the third period,
After each revolving body stops based on the specific replay result, the third timing occurs after each revolving body stops based on the specified result rather than the fifth timing after the revolving body stops based on the specified result. The gaming machine according to feature dD6 or feature dD7, characterized in that the content notification of the specific notification by the specific notification means is set to be more likely to be the advantageous content in the case where the specific notification means is more likely to become the advantageous content.

According to the above configuration, not only the first privilege and the second privilege that can be granted when winning a special result, but also the third privilege that can be granted when winning another specific result depends on the length of the period required to grant the privilege. , is associated with the likelihood of advantageous content. By doing so, it is novel that it is possible to break away from the conventional game of trying to obtain a privilege with a higher degree of advantage, and by acquiring a privilege with a lower degree of advantage, another advantageous event is likely to occur. It is possible to realize a great playability.

In addition, the fifth period in which a predetermined number of bets is set based on a specific replay result is set as a period longer than the length of the third period. When the fifth period has passed since the stop, it is set to be less advantageous than when the third period has passed since the orbiting body stopped in the case of the specified result. In this way, regardless of the type of the so-called small win result or replay result, the novel game characteristics of the feature dD1 such that the likelihood of becoming advantageous content differs depending on the period after the revolving body stops. can be realized, and it is possible to greatly use it for improving the interest of the game.

Feature dD9. A specific number of the stop operation means is provided,
Any one of characteristics dD1 to dD8, wherein the specific notification means starts the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means among the plurality of stop operation means is operated. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the period from the start of the predetermined notification in the specific notification until the content notification becomes advantageous content is associated with the period from the stop of the all-rotating body to the completion of awarding of the privilege. Become. By doing so, even the period after the stop of the revolving body can be incorporated into the game.

Feature dD10. After executing the content notification of the non-advantageous content, the specific notification means executes result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means, and after executing the content notification of the advantageous content. The game according to any one of the characteristics dD1 to dD9, characterized in that it is possible to execute corresponding notification (AT win notification) corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event before or after the result notification. machine.

As in the above configuration, when performing content notification of advantageous content, correspondence notification and result notification are performed as a set, and when performing content notification of non-advantageous content, only result notification is performed. If, as in dD1, the shorter the period after the circulating body stops, the more advantageous the contents are likely to be, it becomes possible to properly secure the period for the corresponding notification, and the length of the period for presentation can be reduced. There is no need to change it according to the result of the advantageous determination, and it is possible to expect excellent effects of the feature dD1 while optimizing the progress of the game.

The inventions described in the features dD1 to dD10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dD1 to dD10, the features dA1 to dA22, the features dB1 to dB8, the features dC1 to dC12, the features dD1 to dD10, the features dE1 to dE11, and the features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dE group>
Feature dE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified by destination specifying means (preliminary judgment processing etc. by the main controller 101) that can be specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination identifying means is a first destination capable of identifying the result of the first advantageous determination when the specific numerical information is used for the first advantageous determination. provided with specific means,
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the specific result by the first destination identification means A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a first stop ON effect setting process according to 81 and a process for performing a specific notification effect.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different advantage or advantageous determination is awarded by such an operation mode, at least the first operation mode is operated before the advantageous determination is performed. When the result of the first advantageous judgment is specified when the first advantageous judgment is executed, and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous judgment There is

By doing so, the result of the first advantage determination on the side advantageous to the player can be identified first, and the effect corresponding to the result on the advantageous side can be performed in advance. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect that strongly encourages the result of the advantageous determination in advance. Therefore, the degree of freedom in performance design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dE2. After the branch timing (the first stop ON operation) in which the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed, the specific notification means determines whether the operation mode will be the first operation mode or the second operation mode. The game according to feature dE1 is provided with means (a function of executing a process for performing a tenpai effect by the display control device 81) for performing the specific notification with the timing of the specific timing as the specific timing. machine.

According to the above configuration, it becomes impossible for the player to decide which operation mode to operate in accordance with the specific notification. In other words, for example, if the contents of the specific notification can be completely detected before the operation, and if the detected contents are not favorable for the player, the second advantageous determination is made, but the second privilege is obtained. Although it is conceivable that the operation is performed in the second operation mode, if the specific notification is generated after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge as described above, which of the two operations is performed based on the specific notification? It is possible to start an effect corresponding to the result of the advantageous judgment before making the advantageous judgment while making it impossible to decide whether to use the operation mode.

Feature dE3. Among the plurality of stop operation means, operating a specific stop operation means (left stop switch 42) for a specific number (first) is the first operation mode, which is different from the specific stop operation means. The second operation mode is to operate predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) at the specific number, and the branch timing is the timing at which the specific number stop operation means is operated. The gaming machine according to feature dE2, characterized in that:

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature dE2, and by doing so, it is possible to determine which advantageous judgment is to be executed simply by grasping which stop operation means is operated for the specific number. , making it possible to determine the advantage when winning a special result with a relatively simple configuration, and to specify by the first specifying means when winning a special result.

Feature dE4. Operating the specific stop operation means at the specific number, and operating the specific stop operation means at the timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in the specific range. is the first operation mode, and a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated in the specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated It is set so that the second operation mode is to operate the specific stop operation means at a timing when the specific design on the specific circular body is not present in the specific range. The gaming machine of feature dE3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode and the second operation mode are the first operation mode including not only the operation of the specific stop operation means for the specific number, but also the operation timing of the specific stop operation means. or the second operation mode. By doing so, the degree of difficulty of performing the first operation mode is improved, the game playability including the operation for performing the first advantageous determination is improved, and the first operation mode and the second operation mode are improved. If the operation is performed regardless of the above, the probability of the second operation mode becomes high, and this makes it easier to obtain the second privilege on the advantageous side. Therefore, the game property that gives priority to performing an advantageous determination and the game property that does not give priority to performing an advantageous determination are greatly different, and the enjoyment of determining which one to select can be improved. .

Feature dE5. The gaming machine according to feature dE3 or feature dE4, wherein the specific notification means can execute the specific notification based on an operation of the stop operation means after the specific number.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is executed based on the operation after the specific-th operation, which is the branching timing of the operation modes. By doing so, it is possible to secure a time allowance for performing the specific notification without having a tight processing configuration such as specifying by the destination specifying means at the branch timing and executing the specific notification. It becomes possible. Further, since the specific operation is the branching timing of the operation mode, it is thought that the player is trying to perform the operation more cautiously. There is a possibility that the special notification may be overlooked. In this respect, by generating the specific notification after the branching timing as described above, it is possible to preferably prevent the specific notification from being overlooked.

Feature dE6. In a game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result different from the special result, a second specific notification means (when the special role is not won by the display control device 81) is performed at the specific timing A gaming machine according to any one of features dE1 to dE5, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing processing for performing a tenpai effect or a specific notification effect.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is generated even if it is another specific result, the specific notification is less likely to serve as a mark of the special result. Therefore, it becomes difficult to predict the game result from the content of the notification, and it is possible to enjoy the notification more purely.

Feature dE7. The advantageous determination means is capable of executing a third advantageous determination as the advantageous determination before the stop operation means is operated when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result,
The gaming machine according to feature dE6, wherein the second specific notification means executes the specific notification based on the result of the third advantage determination.

According to the above configuration, unlike special results in which the contents of advantageous judgments and whether or not they are executed differ depending on the operation mode, in the case of specific results, the third advantageous judgment is executed before the operation of the stop operation means. Further, since the specific notification based on the specific result is based on the result of the third advantage determination, it is not pre-notified even at the specific timing, and there is no need to go through special processing such as a destination specific means. That is, on the premise of such a configuration, the execution timing of the specific notification in the special game that won the special result is matched to the execution timing of the specific notification when the specific result is won, and only the special game Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of incongruity that the mode of notification is different.

Feature dE8. The advantageous judgment means uses the same specific numerical information when executing the first advantageous judgment, when executing the second advantageous judgment, and when executing the third advantageous judgment. The gaming machine according to feature dE7.

According to the above configuration, since the common specific numerical information is used in any advantageous judgment, the storage capacity can be reduced more than preparing the specific numerical information for each advantageous judgment. planned. Moreover, even if it is not possible to grasp which lottery result will be obtained at the time of acquisition, or even if it is not possible to grasp which operation mode will be, the common acquisition processing can be performed without making the processing for acquisition different. It is possible to make an advantageous judgment, and the overwhelming simplification of the processing configuration is achieved.

Feature dE9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the destination identification means is a second destination that can identify the result of the second advantage judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the second advantage judgment. The gaming machine according to any one of features dE1 to dE8, characterized by comprising specifying means.

According to the above configuration, not only the first advantageous judgment of the advantageous side but also the second advantageous judgment side is specified in advance, so that an advantageous event occurs by operating in the second operation mode. To cover such a scene and make it possible to perform a specific notification or to perform another notification, and to diversify the game characteristics based on the notification in the special game winning the special result and the notification. becomes possible.

Feature dE10. When the identification result by the destination identifying means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the first advantageous determination is performed. Means (display control any one of features dE1 to dE9 characterized by having a function of executing processing for generating a ten-pie effect even when the device 81 has not received a first operation winning notice command or the like. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, it is not determined from the specific notification that an advantageous event will not occur even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, that is, that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. Become. By doing so, the specific notification becomes less likely to serve as an index for making it easier to obtain the second privilege, and it becomes possible to ensure the fairness of the game.

Feature dE11. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified by destination specifying means (preliminary judgment processing etc. by the main controller 101) that can be specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function),
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device 81 of a function for executing a first stop ON effect setting process and a process for performing a specific notification effect).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or advantageous judgment is awarded by such an operation mode, the advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made. There is a case where the result of the advantageous determination is specified and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous determination.

By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect in advance in accordance with the result of the advantageous determination, so that it is possible to set an effect in advance that greatly enhances the result of the advantageous determination. Therefore, the degree of freedom in performance design is greatly improved, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features dE1 to dE10 individually to the feature dE11, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. can also be applied in combination.

The inventions described in the features dE1 to dE11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dE1 to dE11, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dF group>
Feature dF1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function) and
In the special game, at a specific timing before the operation of the predetermined stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means (display control device 81 of A function that executes a first stop ON effect setting process and a process for performing a specific notification effect),
When the identification result by the destination identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is performed, the first advantageous determination is performed. Limiting means (display a function of executing a process of generating a ten-pie effect even when the first operation winning notice command or the like by the control device 81 is not received;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in a game in which a special result with a different privilege or advantageous judgment is awarded by such an operation mode, the advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made. There is a case where the result of the advantageous determination is specified and the specific notification corresponding to the specified result is executed before the execution timing of the advantageous determination.

By doing so, it becomes possible to perform an effect in advance according to the result of the advantageous determination, so that it is possible to set an effect in advance that greatly enhances the result of the advantageous determination.

However, if the result of the advantageous determination can be detected in advance and it is possible to determine which operation mode should be operated, it becomes difficult to ensure the fairness of the game. In other words, if the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, then the second operation mode is better. The act of operating and acquiring a 2nd privilege can also be performed. In that regard, the above configuration includes a limiting means that prevents the determination of a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event even if the first advantageous determination is made when the specific notification is performed. This makes it difficult for the above actions to take place. Therefore, while ensuring the fairness of the game, it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the specific notification.

In the above configuration, "if the identification result by the destination identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, the When the first advantageous determination is made, the specific notification by the specific notification means is performed in a notification mode that can be executed even when the result of the first advantageous determination corresponds to the occurrence of the advantageous event. means for executing" means "the specific notification means executes the specific notification so as not to determine that the result of the first advantageous determination is a result corresponding to not causing the advantageous event" ``When the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is performed, the result of the first advantageous determination causes the advantageous event and when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means and the first advantageous determination is performed, the result of the first advantageous determination is the The notification mode of the specific notification is set so that there is a case where the result corresponds to not causing an advantageous event."

Feature dF2. When the identification result by the destination identifying means is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is performed, the first advantageous determination is performed. If the result of the first advantageous determination is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event, the specific notification is executed by the specific notification means in a notification mode (fixed effect) that is not executed. The gaming machine of feature dF1 is allowed.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification in the notification mode in which it is determined that the advantageous event will occur if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, it is determined that the advantageous event will not occur. By restricting the notification mode, it is possible not only to solve the problem that the reliability of the specific notification itself is lowered, but also to improve the reliability, and to increase the degree of attention to the specific notification. can be suitably increased.

Feature dF3. The specific notification means performs execution of a special notification (tenpai effect) by a predetermined notification means as the specific notification,
Even if the identification result by the destination identification means is a result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous judgment is made, the special notification The gaming machine according to feature dF1 or feature dF2, characterized in that it is set so that

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature dF1, and if, like the above configuration, the configuration is such that the special notification can be executed regardless of the result of identification by the destination identification means, the specific notification is determined by whether or not the special notification is executed. It is possible to obtain the excellent effect of the feature dF1 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature dF4. Execution lottery means for executing the lottery for executing the special notification in the special game (function for executing the tenpai effect lottery process by the display control device 81),
the execution by the execution lottery means when the identification result by the destination identification means is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made; The probability of obtaining an execution result corresponding to the execution of the special notification in the lottery is higher than the result of the first advantageous determination being a result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, or the execution lottery The gaming machine according to feature dF3, characterized in that it is set to execute the special notification without going through.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the specified result by the first specifying means only by adjusting the winning probability of the special notification execution lottery or changing the presence or absence of the execution lottery, and the result of the advantageous determination can be notified in advance. It is possible to achieve the effect of the feature dF1 with an extremely simple configuration while making the notification.

Feature dF5. When the result of the advantageous determination is a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event, and when the result corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is notified, the result of the advantageous determination does not cause the advantageous event First result notification means (display control device 81 executes a bomb effect at the time of AT winning by the display control device 81) for executing a predetermined notification after executing a non-correspondence result as the result notification, and executing the corresponding result as the result notification function) and
When the result of the advantageous determination is the non-corresponding result, when performing the result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination, after executing the non-corresponding result as the result notification, the predetermined notification is performed, and the non-corresponding result is performed. A second result notification means (function of executing a bomb effect when the AT is not won by the display control device 81) that executes the correspondence result as the result notification;
When the specified result by the destination specifying means is the result that the result of the advantageous determination is the corresponding result, and the specified report is performed by the specified reporting means, the result reporting by the first result reporting means is performed (function for executing processing for generating a bomb effect when receiving a first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81) Features dF1 to The gaming machine according to any one of features dF4.

According to the above configuration, when the result of the advantageous determination is the response result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event, the non-response result not corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event is notified as the result notification. After that, a so-called revival effect is provided in which the response result is notified as a result notification via a predetermined notification, or the predetermined notification is terminated with a non-response result. After the non-correspondence result is obtained, the corresponding result is obtained through a predetermined notification. In other words, even if a specific notification is performed and a non-response result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event is once notified as a result notification, there is a possibility that it will be revived and the corresponding result will be notified as a result notification. Therefore, even if it is possible to predict that the result of the advantageous determination will be a non-corresponding result from the mode of specific notification and whether or not it is executed, if that alone is set to the second operation mode, the possibility of the above-mentioned revival will be self-evident. will be lost by the operation of By doing so, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently acquiring the second privilege, while expecting the effect of the specific notification.

Feature dF6. When the specified result by the destination specifying means is the result that the result of the advantageous determination is the result of non-correspondence, and the specified report is performed by the specified reporting means, the result by the second result reporting means Characteristic dF5 characterized by comprising a means for making notification (a function of executing a process of generating a bomb effect even if the first operation winning notice command or the like by the display control device 81 is not received). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, as a result of specifying the result of the advantageous judgment in advance, even if the result of specifying that the advantageous judgment is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event, the non-corresponding result After that, the result notification is performed so that the non-correspondence result is further obtained through the predetermined notification. In this way, even if the result of the advantageous determination is a non-corresponding result, the so-called resurrection effect is performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the specific notification from becoming a mark for efficiently obtaining the second privilege.

Feature dF7. Having a specific number of the stop operation means,
The gaming machine according to feature dF5 or feature dF6, wherein the first result notification means and the second result notification means execute the predetermined notification when the specific number of the stop operation means are operated. .

According to the above configuration, the predetermined notification is generated by operating all the stop operation means. In other words, after the result notification is performed by the first result notification means and the second result notification means, the predetermined notification is switched to the correct result notification (remains as it is), and the predetermined notification is performed by all the stop operation means. is operated, and the correct result is notified after the operation of the stop operation means is completed. By doing so, in a configuration in which the content of the advantageous determination and whether or not to execute it differ depending on the operation mode, while notifying the result in advance as a specific notification, the user can enjoy the operation of the stop operation means and the development of the notification until the end. It becomes possible to let

Feature dF8. The gaming machine according to feature dF7, wherein the specific notification is executed before the specific number of the stop operation means are operated.

With the above configuration, it is clarified that the specific notification is executed before the advantageous determination, and it is possible to preferably expect the effect of the specific notification.

Incidentally, the inventions described in the features dF1 to dF8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dF1 to dF8, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dG group>
Feature dG1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Advantageous determination means (e.g., main control unit) for executing an advantageous determination to generate an advantageous event for the player by using the lottery result by the lottery means and specific numerical information (AT lottery random number or additional lottery random number) A function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at the time of start and AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the device 101),
The advantage determination means executes a first advantage determination as the advantage determination when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result of the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, as the advantageous judgment, a second advantageous judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous judgment is executed, or the advantageous judgment is executed. is set not to run
The result of the advantageous judgment when the specific numerical information is used for the advantageous judgment is specified by destination specifying means (preliminary judgment processing etc. by the main controller 101) that can be specified before the advantageous judgment is made. function) and
If the specified result by the destination specifying means is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event when the first advantageous determination is made, the predetermined result in the special game At a specific timing before the operation of the stop operation means is executed, a specific notification means capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the non-response result (a process for performing a specific notification effect by the display control device 81 functions to perform) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided and an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player. While the first advantageous determination is executed as the advantageous determination that causes the stop operation means to be operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given and the second advantageous determination is performed as the advantageous determination. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, the first advantageous judgment is more advantageous than the second advantageous judgment, so the special result In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the judgment (first operation mode). It is possible.

In addition, in the above configuration, it is assumed that the first advantageous judgment is executed before the advantageous judgment is made in the game in which the special result that is different from the privilege given by the operation mode or the advantageous judgment is won. However, if the result of the first advantageous determination is specified and the specified result is a non-corresponding result that does not cause an advantageous event, the specific notification corresponding to the non-corresponding result is an advantageous decision may be executed before the execution timing of By doing so, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation mode, the result of the first advantage determination on the advantageous side does not correspond to the occurrence of an advantageous event. , to obtain a second privilege by performing an operation in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature dG2. The gaming machine according to feature dG1, wherein the specific notification means can perform the specific notification when the starting operation means is operated as the specific timing.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed when the start operation means is operated before the stop operation means is operated. By doing so, it is meaningless that the specific notification is executed after the operation has already been performed in the first operation mode when the specific notification causes the second operation mode to be performed instead of the first operation mode. It is possible to avoid such a production.

Feature dG3. Execution determination means (function for executing a navigation mode lottery process by the display control device 81) for determining execution of the specific notification,
Described in feature dG1 or feature dG2, wherein the specific notification means executes the specific notification when a result of execution determination by the execution determination means is an execution result corresponding to execution of the specific notification. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the special result is won and the result of the first advantageous determination is the non-correspondence result, the specific notification is not executed unless the execution determination is won. In this way, in addition to the game in which the first advantageous judgment is won and an advantageous event is generated, the game in which the first advantageous judgment is not won and the advantageous event does not occur, but the second privilege is obtained in the second operation mode is added. Therefore, it becomes necessary to win the execution determination in the game for obtaining the second privilege. Therefore, a multi-level expectation game is realized, such as aiming to win the first advantageous judgment, and at least wanting to win the execution judgment if the first advantageous judgment is not won, It is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dG4. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value that is more advantageous to the player than the first set value is set, the result of the first advantage determination is the While the probability of obtaining a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event is common, the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value is set. , the gaming machine according to feature dG3, characterized in that the execution judgment result by the execution judging means has different probabilities of being the execution result.

According to the above configuration, even if the winning probability of the first advantageous judgment is not changed according to the setting value, the winning probability of the execution judgment is changed according to the setting value, thereby setting the acquisition rate of the second privilege when the special result is won. It is possible to make it different depending on the value. By doing so, it is possible to change the number of games that can be played with a unit game value (so-called base) according to the setting value without changing the occurrence rate of advantageous events when designing the ball payout rate. Become.

Feature dG5. As game states, a specific state (navigation mode) in which the specific notification by the specific notification means is performed, and a non-specific state in which the specific notification by the specific notification means is less likely to be performed than in the specific state or the specific notification is not performed state (normal mode) and are set,
Means for shifting from the non-specific state to the specific state when a transition condition (navi mode winning) is satisfied (function for executing processing for setting the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
Means for shifting from the specific state to the non-specific state when the termination condition (shift to AT mode) is satisfied (function for executing processing for clearing the navigation mode flag by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features dG1 to dG4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the specific state, it becomes easier for the specific notification to occur, so it is possible to receive an advantageous judgment that efficiently causes an advantageous event while acquiring the second privilege when the special role is won. Become. By setting such a specific state, it is possible to make a great use of it in order to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the "specific state" may be expressed as the "first state", and the "non-specific state" may be expressed as the "second state".

Feature dG6. The privilege granting means grants a game value to be provided in the game as the privilege,
The first privilege is a first number of game values,
the second privilege is a second number of gaming values greater than the first number;
The average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average increase in the game value that increases per unit game is higher than the first game mode in which the special game is operated in the first operation mode in the non-specified state. When the specific notification is performed in the special game in the specific state, the operation is performed in the second operation mode, and when the specific notification is not performed in the special game, the first operation mode. The number of second game modes operated by is increased,
Furthermore, the average number of games that can be executed per unit game value or the average number of increase in game value that increases per unit game value is the above-mentioned second The special game is operated in the non-specific state than the second game mode in which the operation is performed in the second operation mode and the specific notification is not performed in the special game, and the special game is operated in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature dG5, wherein the number of third game modes operated in the second operation mode is greater.

The above configuration specifically expresses the benefit of the specific notification in relation to the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and as a result of the above configuration, the specific notification causes an advantageous event. The second game mode is always operated in the first operation mode, in which the second game value is acquired without receiving the advantageous determination in the case of a non-corresponding result, while efficiently receiving the advantageous determination of The average number of games per unit game value and the average number of increases in the game value per unit game are greater than in the first game mode, and the per unit game value is greater than in the third game mode in which the operation is always performed in the second operation mode. The average number of games played and the average number of increases in game value per unit number of games are reduced. Therefore, in making the player select which game to play, the number of options increases, and it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dG7. As a lottery result by the lottery means, regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, the result of the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is a special result that is more likely to be a corresponding result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event than other results. is set and
In the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, special notification means (specific notification effect based on the special combination by the display control device 81) for executing special notification having a notification mode common to the specific notification by the specific notification means A gaming machine according to any one of features dG1 to dG6, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification and special notification have the same notification mode, it is easy to win the advantageous judgment whether it is notified to operate in the second operation mode when winning the special result. It is not possible to determine whether or not the special result is notified. In other words, while expecting that an advantageous event will occur based on the special result winning, it can be reported that the second privilege can be obtained even if the special result is not won, Even in the case of operating in the second operation mode because the first advantageous determination is not won, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of an advantageous event.

The 'other result' may be a 'special result' or may be a different result. In addition, the "special result" may not be the result of the favorable determination that is most likely to be the corresponding result, and there may be a result that is more likely to be the corresponding result than the "special result". It is sufficient if the result of the advantageous determination triggered by is the correspondence result.

Feature dG8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, and when the special pattern combination corresponding to the special result stops at the valid position, the privilege corresponding to the special result is given by the privilege giving means. is the configuration,
In the special notification, a notification mode is set so as to notify that an operation should be performed in a third operation mode capable of stopping the special pattern combination at the effective position,
The gaming machine according to feature dG7, wherein the third operation mode is included in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the notification that the special result prize should be established is made as a special notification, and the third operation mode that enables the special result prize to be established is included in the second operation mode. Then, when a specific notification is performed in a similar notification mode, it is possible to perform the second operation mode while aiming for a special result prize, and the player acquires the second privilege without being particularly conscious of it. be able to

Feature dG9. A normal state (normal section) and an advantageous state (advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state are set,
When a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state, termination means for terminating the advantageous state (advantageous section based on reaching the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number in the section display second process by the main controller 101) function to execute termination processing),
Execution of the specific notification by the specific notification means is allowed in a situation where termination of the advantageous state by the termination means is specified before the termination condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features dG1 to dG8.

According to the above configuration, by performing the specific notification, it is possible to satisfy the termination condition earlier, or increase the total acquired privilege acquired when the termination condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

The inventions described in the features dG1 to dG9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dG1 to dG9, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dH group>
Feature dH1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means is configured to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. on the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result in the advantageous state, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed if the result is the first order result. and if it is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the advantageous event is generated as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in a corresponding advantageous result is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established, and When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established,
The order notifying means, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, selects a predetermined one of order notifications of a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order. A specific order notification means (the special combination winning game by the main controller 101) capable of executing a specific order notification (push order notification for the sixth minor combination) corresponding to the other one operation order by the predetermined notification means A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing notification of pressing order for 6 small wins.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

In this case, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result wins in the case of the first order result, the first result wins in the case of the second order result. Even if the operation is performed in the second operation order, the second operation mode is set so that the fourth result winning is established.

Here, before transitioning to an advantageous state, it is considered advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate an advantageous event as much as possible when winning a special result. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to acquire many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won in an advantageous state, order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote establishment of the fourth result winning a prize. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide information for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result in realizing the game property of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode at the time of winning the special role, the specific order notification corresponding to one predetermined operation order out of the first operation order and the second operation order is used as the order notification. It is configured to notify. By doing so, although the fourth result prize is established in any order of operation, there is no need to determine which order of operation is to be reported at the time of winning the special role, and the processing configuration is extremely simple. can do. Therefore, with an extremely simple configuration, it is possible to achieve the fourth result winning when the special result is won in an advantageous state.

It should be noted that "said order notifying means, when the lottery result by said lottery means in said normal state is said order result, makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between said first order result and said second order result." On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if it is the first order result, the order corresponding to the first operation order and if the result is the second order result, the order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed." When the result of the lottery by the means is the result of the order, a special notification is made so as to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the result of the first order and the result of the second order, while in the advantageous state. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result, if the result is the first order result, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed, and if the result is the second order result, the second operation order is performed. It can also be expressed as "to perform the corresponding order notification," and such changes in expression are also applicable to features or feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature dH2. The gaming machine according to feature dH1, wherein the specific order notification is set as an order notification corresponding to an operation order that does not result in the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the event that the third result winning is established despite following the specific order notification at the time of winning the special result.

Feature dH3. A predetermined specific stop operation means is operated for a specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when a specific pattern on the specific orbiting body corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in a specific range. is the first operation mode, and a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated at the specific number, and the specific stop operation The second operation mode is set so that the means is operated at the specific number and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop does not exist in the specific range. has been
The gaming machine according to feature dH1 or feature dH2, wherein the specific order notification is set to be the order notification of the operation order in which the predetermined stop operation means is operated at the specific number.

According to the above configuration, since the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, if the operation timing is changed, the second operation mode can be used. It is also possible to In other words, when the specific order is notified, depending on the operation timing, it is possible to establish a third result winning or a fourth result winning. If the stopping operation means is operated in accordance with the operation order of the specific order notification, the fourth result winning is always established regardless of the operation timing, and more benefits are obtained when the special result is won in an advantageous state. It is possible to make a configuration that matches the intention.

Feature dH4. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the privilege giving means gives a privilege corresponding to the first result, and the privilege giving means gives the privilege corresponding to the fourth result at the valid position. When 4 pattern combinations are stopped, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features dH1 to dH3, wherein the first pattern combination is the same as or corresponding to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It is not possible to determine from the outcome or order announcement whether the result is a result of winning a special result. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

It should be noted that "corresponding pattern combination" means that although the pattern combinations that stop at the effective position are different from each other, a specific pattern combination stops at a position different from the effective position. In this case, the position at which the particular symbol combination stops may be different for both results. This point is also applicable to other features and other feature groups using similar expressions.

Feature dH5. When the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the valid position corresponds to the fourth result. When the fourth pattern combination stops, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features dH1 to dH4, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege.

According to the above configuration, the privilege given is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It becomes impossible to determine from the privilege given or the order notification whether it is a thing or is based on a special result winning. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature dH6. The gaming machine according to feature dH4 or feature dH5, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature dH4 and feature dH5, and by achieving the same results in this way, excellent effects of feature dH4 and feature dH5 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature dH7. Order notification corresponding to a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order based on a predetermined trigger (advantageous section transition) at least before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. Selecting means for selecting order notification corresponding to one operation order from (function for executing notification small winning lottery process by main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features dH1 to dH6, wherein the specific order notification means executes the order notification selected by the selection means by the predetermined notification means as the specific order notification. .

As in the above configuration, if the specific order notification as one predetermined order notification is determined based on a predetermined trigger, while reducing the processing load at the time of winning the special result, it is notified at the time of winning the special result. It becomes possible to secure the randomness of the order notification.

Feature dH8. The gaming machine according to feature dH7, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, there is no inconvenience that the special result is won and the selection is not completed in spite of the situation in which the order notification should be executed, and the factory shipment. The frequency of selection can be made higher than in a configuration in which time is used as a predetermined trigger. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dH1 to dH8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dH1 to dH8, the features dA1 to dA22, the features dB1 to dB8, the features dC1 to dC12, the features dD1 to dD10, the features dE1 to dE11, and the features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dI group>
Features dI1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. while controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if the result is the first order result, an order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed; If the result is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the advantageous event is generated as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in a corresponding advantageous result is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established, and When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order as the second operation mode, the winning of the fourth result can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the order notification means selects one operation from order notifications corresponding to a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order. A game machine characterized by comprising selection means for selecting order information corresponding to the order (a function of executing a notification minor winning lottery process by the main controller 101), and executing the order information selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

In this case, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the first operation order in which the first result wins in the case of the first order result, the first result wins in the case of the second order result. Even if the operation is performed in the second operation order, the second operation mode is set so that the fourth result winning is established.

Here, before transitioning to an advantageous state, it is considered advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode in order to generate an advantageous event as much as possible when winning a special result. It is considered that the operation should be performed in the second operation mode in order to acquire many benefits.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when a special result is won in an advantageous state, order notification such as the first operation order or the second operation order is performed to promote establishment of the fourth result winning a prize. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide information for the second operation mode dedicated to the special result in realizing the game property of acquiring more benefits when the special result is won, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the above configuration, as the second operation mode at the time of winning the special combination, the order notification corresponding to one operation order is selected from the first operation order and the second operation order, and the selected order notification is performed. is performed, it is possible to equalize the execution ratio of order notification. By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the special result winning being seen through the order notification.

Feature dI2. The gaming machine according to feature dI1, wherein the selection means selects the order information including the order information corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, not only the 4th minor winning combination but also the 3rd minor winning combination may be established by the notification of the order when the special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to include the achievement of the third minor winning combination and the establishment of the fourth minor winning combination in the game characteristics, and it is possible to more preferably equalize the order notification. becomes.

Feature dI3. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the selection means is in the first operation mode. The gaming machine according to feature dI2, characterized in that the ratio of selecting the order information corresponding to the operation order to become is different.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the third result instead of the fourth result may win despite the fact that the operation is performed according to the order notification, if the third result wins, there are few benefits, but the setting This is the case when it becomes possible to use it as a material for predicting the value, and rather it can be a favorable event for the player. In this way, the occurrence rate of each order notification is equalized by selecting the order notification including the order notification of the first operation mode, and the order notification of the first operation mode is selected. It is possible to follow up well the point at which the player may be disadvantaged.

Feature dI4. When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the selection means is in the first operation mode. The difference in the ratio of selecting the order notification corresponding to the operation order is the ratio of the selection means selecting the predetermined order notification when the first setting value is set and the other order notification The game machine according to feature dI3, wherein the difference is larger than the difference between the ratio selected by the selection means.

According to the above configuration, while the occurrence rate of each order notification is equalized, the difference in the selection rate of each order notification is larger than the setting difference of the selection rate of the order notification that is the first operation mode. It becomes easy to play a game in which the set value is predicted from the order notification which is the first operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to well follow up on the disappointment that the third minor combination win is established and the prize is small due to the order notification that is the first operation mode.

Feature dI5. the operation order has a certain number of types, which is plural;
The game according to any one of features dI1 to dI3, wherein the selection means selects at least the operation orders other than a predetermined operation order among the operation orders so that the selection rates of the other operation orders are uniform. machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the operation order is not divisible by 100%, the selection rate is equalized at least for other operation orders than the predetermined operation order. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform order notification more evenly.

Feature dI6. A plurality of setting values are set that are capable of causing changes in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. Means (a function of executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value different from the first set value is set by the setting means, the predetermined order notification is set. The gaming machine according to feature dI5, characterized in that order information is different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the setting value by using the remainder of the selection rate which is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature dI7. The specific number of set values are set that are capable of causing a change in the increase/decrease rate or increase/decrease mode of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means, and one set value among the specified number of set values is set. Setting means for setting (function for executing the winning probability setting process by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature dI5 or feature dI6, wherein the order information set as the predetermined order information differs according to the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to predict the setting value by using the remainder of the selection rate which is not divisible by 100%. As a result, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as predicting the set value by making good use of the part where the order notification cannot be completely equalized while trying to equalize the order notification. Become.

Feature dI8. The selection means selects the order notification without including the order notification corresponding to the operation order that is the first operation mode, or selects the operation that is the first operation mode rather than the order notification corresponding to another operation order. The gaming machine according to feature dI1, characterized in that it is difficult to select an order notification corresponding to the order.

According to the above configuration, if the order notification at the time of winning the special result is followed, the fourth minor winning combination will be established, and the third minor winning combination will not be established. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily acquire many privileges in an advantageous state.

Feature dI9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (push order bell), a result corresponding to the special result (first small Winning of a winning combination, second minor winning combination) can be established, and the stop operation means is operated in an operation order that does not correspond to the first operation mode, resulting in a result corresponding to the special result It is set so that the winning of 6 small roles) can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the frequency of execution of the order notification by the order notification means is higher than the order notification corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode. The game machine according to feature dI8, characterized in that it is set to be higher than the order notification corresponding to the operation order that does not constitute one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the order notification corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode is not performed when the special result is won, but the order notification when the special result is won can cover well. By doing so, it is possible to equalize the order notification throughout the game.

Feature dI10. A predetermined specific stop operation means is operated for a specific number, and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when a specific pattern on the specific orbiting body corresponding to the specific stop operation means exists in a specific range. is the first operation mode, and a predetermined stop operation means (middle stop switch 43, right stop switch 44) different from the specific stop operation means is operated at the specific number, and the specific stop operation The second operation mode is set so that the means is operated at the specific number and the specific stop operation means is operated at a timing when the specific pattern on the specific loop does not exist in the specific range. The gaming machine according to any one of features dI1 to dI9, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, since the first operation mode is defined by the operation order and the operation timing, even if the operation order is the first operation mode, if the operation timing is changed, the second operation mode can be used. It is also possible to In other words, in the configuration in which the operation order corresponding to the operation order of the first operation mode is included in the selection, when the order of the operation order of the first operation mode is notified, the third result wins depending on the operation timing. It is established or the 4th result prize is established. Therefore, if it is desired to acquire more benefits, it is necessary to make full use of the operation timing.

Feature dI11. The selection means selects a plurality of operation orders including the first operation order and the second operation order based on a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) at least before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the special result. select an order notification corresponding to one operation order from the order notifications corresponding to
The gaming machine according to any one of features dI1 to dI10, wherein the order notification means executes the order notification selected by the predetermined trigger when the special result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to significantly reduce the processing load compared to the configuration in which the operation order is selected each time a special result is won.

Feature dI12. The gaming machine according to feature dI11, wherein the predetermined opportunity occurs when the game transitions to the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, since the predetermined opportunity occurs at the time of transition to an advantageous state, there is no inconvenience that the special result is won and the selection is not completed in spite of the situation in which the order notification should be executed, and the special result. Although the frequency of selection is lower than that for each winning, for example, the frequency of selection can be increased for a configuration with a predetermined trigger at the time of shipment from the factory. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load while ensuring the randomness of the order notification.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dI1 to dI12 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dI1 to dI12, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dJ group>
Feature dJ1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop operation is performed. When means is operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order, a second result (9th minor combination to 32nd The order result (push order bell) that enables the winning of the small role) is set,
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
In the first order result of the order results, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, By operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established, and is different from the first order result of the order results. In the second order result, by operating the stop operation means in the second operation order, the winning of the first result or the result corresponding to the first result can be established, while the stop operation means can be operated in the second order result. It is set so that the winning of the second result or the result corresponding to the second result can be established by operating in the first operation order,
An order notification means (a function of executing a push order notification on the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101) for executing order notification of the operation order of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state is the order result, the order notification means makes it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. while controlling a predetermined notification means, when the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the order result, if the result is the first order result, an order notification corresponding to the first operation order is executed; If the result is the second order result, an order notification corresponding to the second operation order is executed;
As the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantageous determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result It is possible to establish the winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins, and to cause the advantageous event to occur as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous judgment is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
At least the operation of the stop operation means in the first operation order is included in the second operation mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, the specific order notification means (special A game machine characterized in that it has a function of executing notification of the pressing order when a winning combination is won.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation order, the first result winning can be established, while in the second operation order. There is provided a so-called push order combination in which, when operated, a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to an advantageous state, the push order combination of the push order combination is provided. Since the order notification is performed, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the order notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

As the order result, a first order result and a second order result are set, and the order of operations for winning the first result is different from each other. Then, even in the case of the order result, if it is before the transition to the advantageous state, the order is set to be notified in a manner in which it is impossible to distinguish between the first order result and the second order result. Therefore, it is difficult to discriminate the order of operations for winning the first result from the lottery results of each game. By doing so, when the transition to the advantageous state occurs, the degree of advantage is greatly changed by the order notification, and the inconvenience of enjoying the benefit even before the transition can be eliminated.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantage determination corresponds to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that tends to result in an advantageous result is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the fourth result winning, which has more benefits than the third result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which a second advantageous judgment, which is unlikely to result in an advantageous result, is executed as an advantageous judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with more benefits. You can add gameplay.

Moreover, the second operation mode when the special result is won is a mode including the first operation order, and by using the configuration, the order notification corresponding to the first operation order is performed when the special result is won during the advantageous state. I'm trying This eliminates the need to use the existing configuration such as the sequence notification in the sequence result to provide notification exclusively for the special result when operating in the second operation mode in order to acquire more benefits when the special result is won. Moreover, since it is possible to skillfully mix the special result winning with the first order result when the order result wins, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the order result. In the configuration, it is also possible to make the prediction difficult. As a result of the above, it is possible to easily improve the interest in the game.

Feature dJ2. When the first pattern combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the privilege giving means gives a privilege corresponding to the first result, and the privilege giving means gives the privilege corresponding to the fourth result at the valid position. When 4 pattern combinations are stopped, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to feature dJ1, wherein the first pattern combination is the same as or corresponding to the fourth pattern combination.

According to the above configuration, the stop roll is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It is not possible to determine from the outcome or order announcement whether the result is a result of winning a special result. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature dJ3. In the first order result, by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the winning of the first result associated with the first order result can be established, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order, the winning of the second result associated with the first order result can be established, and in the second order result, the stop operation means is operated in the second operation order While the winning of the first result associated with the second order result can be established by operating the stop operation means in the first operation order, the second order result is set so that the winning of the second result associated with can be established,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result stops at the effective position among the first symbol combinations corresponding to the first result, the privilege corresponding to the result is provided. When a fourth pattern combination corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means and stops at the effective position, the privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to feature dJ2, wherein the symbol combination corresponding to the first result associated with the first order result is the same as or corresponding to the fourth symbol combination.

The above configuration is a specific configuration in which a result corresponding to the first result is won according to each operation order when the order result is won in the feature dJ2, but strictly speaking, different results are won depending on the operation order. Configuration. In such a configuration as well, by making common the stop roll of the fourth result prize when the special result is won and the stop roll of the result prize corresponding to the first result when the order result is won, the special result can be displayed in order. It is possible to enhance the effect of being well confused with the result.

Feature dJ4. When the first symbol combination corresponding to the first result stops at the valid position, the first privilege corresponding to the first result is given by the privilege giving means, and the valid position corresponds to the fourth result. When the fourth pattern combination stops, the fourth privilege corresponding to the fourth result is granted by the privilege granting means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features dJ1 to dJ3, wherein the first privilege is the same privilege as the fourth privilege.

According to the above configuration, the privilege given is common between the case where the first result winning is established based on the order result winning and the case where the fourth result winning is established based on the special result winning. Since the specific order notification notified by the order notification means at the time of winning the special result can be executed also at the time of winning the order result, the winning of the first result and the winning of the fourth result are based on the winning of the order result. It becomes impossible to determine from the privilege given or the order notification whether it is a thing or is based on a special result winning. By doing so, for example, it is possible to predict the setting value from the winning probability of the special result or the winning probability of the sequence result. becomes possible.

Feature dJ5. The gaming machine according to any one of features dJ2 to dJ4, wherein the fourth result is the first result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of features dJ2 to dJ4, and by achieving the same results in this way, excellent effects of features dJ2 to dJ4 can be expected with an extremely simple configuration.

Feature dJ6. A notification mode of order notification corresponding to the first operation order executed by the order notification means triggered by the order result, and the first operation order executed by the specific order notification means triggered by the special result The gaming machine according to any one of features dJ1 to dJ5, wherein the notification mode of the corresponding order notification is a common notification mode.

According to the above configuration, the order notification of the first operation order in the order result and the order notification of the first operation order in the special result are executed in the same notification mode. Also from the notification mode, the effect of blending the special result with the order result can be expected.

Feature dJ7. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is the first order result, specific information, which is information about the first operation order or information indicating that it is the first order result, is sent to another control device (display a first output means capable of outputting to the control device 81) (a function of executing processing for outputting and setting a push order command for the sixth minor combination when the push order bell is won by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result in the advantageous state, a second output means capable of outputting the specific information to the other control device (push order bell winning by main control device 101 A function to output and set the push order command for the 6th minor role at times),
The gaming machine according to any one of features dJ1 to dJ6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the order notification of the first operation order is performed when the order result is won, the specific information, which is the information about the first operation order and the information that the result is the first order result, is sent to other control devices. In the configuration where the order is output, even if the order notification of the first operation order is performed when the special result is won, the specific information is output to the other control device, so not only the order notification but also the specific information Even if it is analyzed illegally, it cannot be determined whether it is a sequence result or a special result. By doing so, it becomes possible to make it difficult for an act or the like to obtain a profit by judging the result illegally.

Feature dJ8. The other control device includes a specific notification means (an auxiliary display unit 65 or a speaker 64) for executing a specific notification (push order notification) corresponding to the first operation order based on the specific information. a function of executing a press order notification effect by the display control device 81),
The specific notification means executes the specific notification in a common notification mode when the specific information is output triggered by the order result and when the specific information is output triggered by the special result. The gaming machine according to feature dJ7, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether the specific notification by the specific notification means is triggered by the sequence result or the special result, and the effect of the feature dJ1 is more suitable. It becomes possible to play in

Feature dJ9. The probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the degree of advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained, and the probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the special result, or The gaming machine according to any one of features dJ1 to dJ8, wherein the advantage degree of the advantageous event is different when the advantageous result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, since the winning probability and the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment based on the order result are different from the winning probability and the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment based on the special result winning, the order notification when the special result is won is changed in the order of the order result. By using the notification, the special result winning is confused with the order notification, so that the advantageous event occurs based on the order result is made to think that the advantageous event will occur based on the special result, or conversely, the special result It can be made to believe that an advantageous event will occur based on the order result.

Feature dJ10. The probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the special result is higher than the probability of obtaining the advantageous result in the advantageous determination based on the order result or the degree of advantage of the advantageous event when the advantageous result is obtained. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature dJ9, wherein the advantage of the advantageous event is higher when the advantageous result is obtained.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to give the impression that an advantageous event will occur based on the order result, as opposed to the advantageous event occurring based on the special result. In other words, it is possible to give the player the impression that the order result can be a powerful trigger for an advantageous event, not just a function that differentiates the privilege to be given depending on the presence or absence of the order notification. Interest can be greatly enhanced.

Feature dJ11. The gaming machine according to feature dJ10, wherein the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the order result is higher than the probability that the special result is the result.

As in the above configuration, the order result is easier to win than the special result, so normally, if such an order result is used as a trigger for an advantageous event, inconvenience such as a sharp increase in the ball payout rate may occur. . In that respect, like the above-mentioned features dJ1 and dJ10, by using special results to increase expectations for advantageous events in order results, it is easier to win while avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the order result.

The inventions described in the features dJ1 to dJ11 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dJ1 to dJ11, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dK group>
Feature dK1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
When the number of games played from a predetermined opportunity (advantage zone transition) reaches a specific number of games, it corresponds to the transition to the advantageous state without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means or the result of the transition determination. Even if the result is different from the transition result, specific transition means for executing the transition process for transitioning to the advantageous state (the AT mode winning flag is set based on the ceiling counter being 0 by the main controller 101) function to execute the processing to be performed) and
grasping means for grasping the number-of-games information corresponding to the number of games from a predetermined trigger (function for executing processing for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
Updating means for updating the number-of-games information according to the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (function for performing subtraction processing from the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
The number of games from the predetermined trigger is notified by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as game number notification, and game number notification means (display control device 81) for updating the game number notification according to the progress of the game A function to display an advantageous section game number image AP),
When a specific condition (operating in the second operation mode when winning a special role, limiting the special role) is established in the game from the predetermined opportunity, the updating of the number of games information by the updating means is restricted or the updating Specific processing means (special role winning game by main controller 101) for executing specific processing that makes it more difficult for the game number information to become specific information (ceiling counter = 0) corresponding to the specific game number than when updating is performed by the means a function of executing processing for not performing subtraction of the ceiling counter when operated in the second operation mode with );
with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the number-of-games information becomes the specific information,
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even in a game in which the specific processing is performed by the specific processing means,
When the number-of-games notification by the number-of-games notification means becomes notification corresponding to the specific number of games, and when the number of games until the number-of-games information becomes the specific information is equal to or less than a specific number, a first specific Notification (first precursor mode effect) is executed by the predetermined notification means or notification means different therefrom, and when the number of games played until the game number information becomes the specific information is greater than the specific number, the A second specific notification (third precursor mode effect) different from the first specific notification can be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means (stop-time precursor effect setting processing by the display control device 81 A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function to execute

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, a transition judgment is made to shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantage judgment according to the result of the lottery, and the number of games from a predetermined trigger may shift to an advantageous state by reaching a specific number of games. In other words, in addition to the lottery of each game, in addition to the game property aiming for an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided to move to an advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to encourage the continuation of the game.

In the above configuration, if a specific condition is satisfied in a game from a predetermined trigger, updating of the game number information corresponding to the number of games may be restricted, while notification of the number of games indicating the number of games from the predetermined trigger is specified. Since the update is performed even if the conditions are met, the game number information side does not reach the specific information corresponding to the ceiling even though the number of games notification side has reached the specific number of games corresponding to the ceiling. can occur.

When such an event occurs, the player expects that the process for transitioning to an advantageous state will be performed by reaching the specified number of games, but it is not performed. It is undeniable that the player may feel uneasy and end the game even though he or she has played the game so far.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games, the number of games played until the number of games information reaches the specific information is grasped, and if the number of games is less than or equal to the specific number, the first specific notification If the number is greater than the specific number, the second specific notification is executed, so that the user can understand that the previous game was not in vain, and how long it will take to reach the ceiling. It is possible to grasp from Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dK2. If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, means for transitioning to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a precursor game number setting process by the main controller 101) )and,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the special notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. means (a function of executing a start-time portent effect setting process by the display control device 81);
with
The special notification means executes the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is equal to or less than the specific number, and executes the first special notification as the special notification when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number. Execute a second special notification different from the 1 special notification,
The notification mode of the first specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the same as the notification mode of the first special notification executed by the special notification means, or the notification mode of the first special notification. It is set to be a notification mode that is difficult for the player to identify, and the notification mode of the second specific notification executed by the specific notification means is the second special notification executed by the special notification means. The gaming machine according to feature dK1, characterized in that it is set so as to have the same notification mode as the notification mode, or to have a notification mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish from the second special notification mode.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games and the specific notification is performed, it looks like a special notification in the case of winning in the transition determination before reaching the specific number of games and shifting to an advantageous state Specific notification is performed in the same notification mode. By doing so, there is no need to store the data of the notification mode separately as the specific notification for reaching the ceiling, so that the memory capacity can be reduced, and the player can see how long it will take to reach an advantage. It is possible to clearly grasp whether to migrate.

Feature dK3. A first advantageous state (AT mode) and a second advantageous state (CZ mode) more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are set as the advantageous state,
The specific transition means is configured to transition to the first advantageous state,
The special notification means is a result corresponding to the transition determination result by the transition determination means to shift to the first advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number, the special notification is made. , the second special notification is executed as above, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a result corresponding to the transition to the second advantageous state, and when the predetermined number of games is greater than the specific number , a gaming machine according to feature dK2, wherein a third special notification different from the second special notification is executed as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, after the game notification reaches the specific number of games, the notification mode of the second specific notification executed when the number of games up to the ceiling is greater than the specific number is usually advantageous. The notification mode is the same as the notification mode of the second special notification executed when the transition to the first advantageous state occurs. In this way, the player's impatience and frustration that the transition to the advantageous state does not take place despite reaching the ceiling on the display can be resolved by notifying the player that the transition to the first advantageous state is confirmed (the first 2 specific notification, 2nd special notification) can be well followed, and the player's feelings can be relieved until the transition to the first advantageous state occurs.

Feature dK4. As the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (the 33rd minor combination) can be established, and the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means While the first advantage determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the first result It is possible to establish the winning of the second result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins, and to cause the advantageous event to occur as the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means rather than the first advantageous judgment. A special result (special combination) is set in which the second advantageous judgment is executed or the advantageous judgment is not executed,
The specific processing means can execute the specific processing by determining that the specific condition is satisfied that the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features dK1 to dK3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the determination result of the advantageous determination becomes an advantageous result corresponding to the occurrence of an advantageous event. While the first advantageous determination that is easy is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second result winning, which has more benefits than the first result winning, can be established. A special result is set in which the second advantageous judgment that is unlikely to result in an advantageous result is executed, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the advantageous judgment or the one with the greater number of benefits. can be added.

Moreover, if the second operation mode is operated when the special result is won, the specific processing for restricting the update of the number-of-games information is executed. Instead, the current game does not contribute to the number of games up to the ceiling. In other words, even if the player wants to obtain the second privilege, operating in the second operation mode is disadvantageous for the player in terms of the game property of shifting to an advantageous state.

However, there may be players who do not understand the distinction between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and players who are unable to distinguish between these operation modes on purpose, and a game in which the second privilege is obtained. is a player's choice, and the provision of such a special result tends to cause discrepancies between the displayed number of games played up to the ceiling and the actual number of games played.

Therefore, if the specific notification is performed according to the actual number of games up to the ceiling when the number of games notification reaches the specific number of games as in the above feature dK1, a variety of games due to such special results can be achieved. It is possible to expect excellent effects such as letting the player understand that the game will soon reach the ceiling and grasping the number of games played up to the ceiling from the specific notification while obtaining the effect of speeding up.

Feature dK5. If the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, means for transitioning to the advantageous state after executing a predetermined number of games (a function of executing a precursor game number setting process by the main controller 101) )and,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, the special notification is performed by the predetermined notification means or a different notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. means (a function of executing a start-time portent effect setting process by the display control device 81);
with
When the specific process is performed based on the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played is the special result, and the specific process is not performed based on the special result Characteristic dK4, characterized in that the product of the average difference between the update number from the game number information updated by the updating means in the case of the case and the number of updates is set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the special result is won, even if the operation is performed in the second operation mode every time, the actual number of games up to the ceiling when the game number notification reaches the specific game number is The number of games to be played is likely to be within the predetermined number at which the special notification is made in the case of winning in the normal transition determination. By doing so, even if the configuration is such that the specific notification is started when the ceiling on the display is reached, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of slackness such as the specific notification being performed for too long. In a configuration such as dK2 in which the notification mode of the special notification is diverted to the specific notification, it is possible to perform the diversion very smoothly.

Feature dK6. The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process so as to transition to the advantageous state after playing a specific number of games from the game in which the game number information is the specific information,
When the specific process is performed based on the average number of times that the lottery result by the lottery means when the specific number of games is played is the special result, and the specific process is not performed based on the special result The number of games obtained by adding the specific number of games to the product of the number of updates from the number of games information updated by the updating means in the case and the average difference between them is set so that the number of games is equal to or less than the maximum number of the predetermined number of games. The gaming machine according to feature dK5, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, when the ceiling is reached, the state is shifted to an advantageous state after playing a specific number of games. Even if it is operated, when the game number notification reaches the specific number of games, the actual number of games up to the ceiling is a predetermined game in which special notification is performed when the winning is determined by the normal transition determination It becomes easy to become within a few. Therefore, after reaching the ceiling, after setting the grace period for performing effects etc. until the transition to the advantageous section as the specific number of games, even if the specific number of games exceeds the ceiling on the display as it is, the above effect is obtained can be expected. By doing so, it is possible to optimize the presentation up to the transition to the advantageous state without causing complicated processing or an increase in the amount of data.

Feature dK7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the update means determines that the lottery result by the lottery means is different from the special result. Characteristic dK4 to characteristic dK6 characterized in that it is possible to update the number-of-games information so that when the number-of-games information is updated, the difference is larger than the difference before and after the update. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, by operating in the first operation mode when winning the special result, it is possible to update the number-of-games information to a greater extent than in the case of other lottery results. Therefore, when the special result is won, the first operation mode is operated to hasten the ceiling arrival, while the second operation mode is operated to delay the ceiling arrival. results in two extremes. Therefore, it is possible to have the player perform the operation mode more carefully when the special result is won, and it is possible to greatly contribute to improving the interest in the game.

Feature dK8. The second operation mode is characterized in that the operation difficulty level is lower than that of the first operation mode (the first operation mode requires full use of the operation timing in addition to the operation order). The gaming machine according to feature dK7.

According to the above configuration, if the operation mode is not fully utilized, the second operation mode is likely to be used when winning a special result, and the specific processing tends to cause a discrepancy between reaching the ceiling on the display and reaching the actual ceiling. Therefore, it is considered highly significant to adopt a configuration like the feature dK1 for such a configuration.

Feature dK9. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Advantage determination means (for example, AT lottery processing at the time of start by the main controller 101, AT lottery processing at the time of stop, Equipped with a function to execute processing related to instruction functions such as AT addition lottery processing),
The advantageous determination means determines that the game state is shifted from the normal state to an advantageous state advantageous to the player as the advantageous event, and the transition determination means (at the time of start by the main controller 101) executes the transition determination to the advantageous state Equipped with a function to execute AT lottery processing and stop AT lottery processing),
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state, a special notification is made by a predetermined notification means in the game until the transition to the advantageous state. Special notification means for executing
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the first result A second result (first small combination to sixth small combination) can be established, and a second transition determination that is less likely to be the transition result than the first transition determination as the transition determination by the transition determination means. is executed or a special result (special role) is set in which the transition judgment is not executed,
When the number of games played from a predetermined opportunity (advantageous section transition) reaches the specific number of games, the result of the transition determination is different from the transition result without going through the transition determination by the transition determination means Also, specific transition means for executing transition processing for transitioning to the advantageous state (function for executing processing for setting the AT mode winning flag based on the ceiling counter being 0 by the main controller 101);
grasping means for grasping the number-of-games information corresponding to the number of games from a predetermined trigger (function for executing processing for grasping the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
updating means for updating the number-of-games information in accordance with the progress of the game from the predetermined trigger (function for executing subtraction processing of the ceiling counter by the main control device 101);
The number of games from the predetermined trigger is notified by predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) as game number notification, and game number notification means (display control device 81) for updating the game number notification according to the progress of the game A function to display an advantageous section game number image AP),
with
The specific transition means is configured to execute the transition process when the number-of-games information becomes specific information corresponding to the specific number of games,
The game number notification means updates the game number notification even if the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result and the game is a game in which the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode,
The special notification means can execute a first special notification (first precursor mode effect) and a second special notification (third precursor mode effect) as the special notification, and the advantage of the advantageous state to be shifted is high. As much as possible, it is a configuration that makes it easier to execute the second special notification than the first special notification,
By operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode in the game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the game number notification by the game number notification means corresponds to the specific game number. A gaming machine characterized in that when the notification is made, the second special notification is likely to be executed by the special notification means.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is given, a transition judgment is made to shift to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player as an advantage judgment according to the result of the lottery, and the number of games from a predetermined trigger may shift to an advantageous state by reaching a specific number of games. In other words, in addition to the lottery of each game, in addition to the game property aiming for an advantageous state, when the number of games reaches a specific number of games, a so-called ceiling is provided to move to an advantageous state without going through the transition determination. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game in the middle and to encourage the continuation of the game.

Furthermore, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and the determination result of the transition determination is likely to be a transition result that causes a transition to an advantageous state. is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, although the second result winning with more benefits than the first result winning can be established, the transition determination is less likely to result in the transition result. A special result is set for execution of 2 transition judgment, and the player can select the degree of advantage of the transition judgment or select the one with the greater number of benefits, thereby adding extremely special game characteristics. .

In this case, in order to cause a transition to an advantageous state, it is considered that the player should operate in the first operation mode when winning a special result. If a special result is provided in a game that aims to shift to an advantageous state, it is difficult to ensure the fairness of the game.

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the player is operated in the second operation mode when the special result is won, the second special notification corresponding to the transition to the advantageous state when reaching the ceiling is facilitated to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to successfully follow up a player who erroneously operates in the second operation mode. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that it is also possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configuration of any one of the features dK1 to dK8 individually to the feature dK9, and part or all of each technical idea can be applied. can also be applied in combination.

Note that the inventions described in the features dK1 to dK9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dK1 to dK9, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dL group>
Feature dL1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (press by main controller 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode function to execute forward notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
As game states, there are a specific state (advantageous section) in which mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed, and a normal state in which mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be performed or is less likely to be performed than in the specific state. State (normal section) and are set,
The specific processing means includes, as the specific processing, transition determination means (a function of executing an advantageous section transition lottery process by the main controller 101) for executing a transition determination for transition from the normal state to the specific state,
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means While the first transition determination is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result The fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) can be established, and the transition determination by the transition determination means is to shift to the specific state rather than the first transition determination. A special result (special role) is set in which the second transition determination that is unlikely to result in the corresponding transition result is executed or the transition determination is not executed,
The transition determination means determines that the specific state is more advantageous when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to shift to an advantageous section that reaches ).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode can be established. When operated by , a so-called push order role is provided in which a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to a specific state, the push order of the push order role Since the mode notification is performed as the notification, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

In addition, as a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the first transition determination is executed as a transition determination to the specific state. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, although it is possible to establish the fourth result winning that has more benefits than the third result winning, the transition determination is to a specific state rather than the first transition determination. A second transition determination that is unlikely to result in a transition result corresponding to the transition or a special result in which the transition determination is not executed is set. It is possible to add a very special game feature such as which one to choose.

The transition to the specific state in which mode notification can be executed is made when the transition determination by the transition determination means of the specific processing results in a transition result. It tends to result in a transition to a more advantageous specific state than when it is executed with the predetermined result winning as a trigger.

Then, as described above, by utilizing the fact that the contents of the transition determination and the benefits obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result, the user can obtain the second benefit by operating in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result. However, it is possible to prevent the transition to the specific state from occurring, and to prevent the transition to the specific state from occurring until the lottery result reaches the specific result. It can greatly contribute to diversification.

Feature dL2. The transition determining means makes it easier for the player to shift to the specific state when it shifts to the specific state based on the specific result than when it shifts to the specific state based on the special result. The gaming machine according to feature dL1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the significance of waiting for the winning of the specific result without shifting to the specific state when winning the special result is made clearer. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the special playability of the feature dL1.

Feature dL3. Setting means (function for setting the number of ceiling games by the main controller 101) for setting the advantage of the specific state to be transitioned when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result. ,
The feature dL1 or the feature characterized in that the setting means facilitates setting such that the specific state to which the transition is made based on the result of the identification is more advantageous than the specific state to which the transition is made based on the predetermined result. A gaming machine described in dL2.

As in the above configuration, by providing the setting means separately from the migration determination means, the functions can be distributed to each means, and the occurrence of errors due to an increase in processing load can be suppressed.

Feature dL4. A game value necessary for executing a game is set as a specific number (three cards),
Any one of features dL1 to dL3, characterized in that the benefit given when the fourth result is won is equivalent to a game value (8 cards) that is twice or more of the specific number. game machine.

According to the above configuration, even if the second operation mode is operated in the game in which the special result is won, and the result of the transition determination is the transition result, even if the stick is swung, the game required in the game Since the value and the game value more than the game value required in the next game can be acquired, the game is unlikely to be wasted, and rather, the game property of waiting for the specific result of the feature dL1 is realized without considering the decrease in the game value. can be made

Feature dL5. When the lottery result by the lottery means in the specific state is the special result, the first specific process is executed as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is not executed. is the configuration,
The third result and the fourth result are won so that the player operates the stop operation means in the first operation mode more advantageous than the player operates in the second operation mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features dL1 to dL4, wherein a privilege, the first specific process, and the second specific process are set.

According to the above configuration, after the transition to the specific state, it is more advantageous for the player to operate in the first operation mode than to operate in the second operation mode when the special result is won. By doing so, the special result winning before the transition to the specific state is operated in the second operation mode, and the special result winning after the transition to the specific state is operated in the first operation mode. It is possible to realize a very special game property that recommends the opposite operation. Therefore, by using such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the game.

Feature dL6. As the specific state, a first specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is likely to be performed, and a mode notification by the mode notification means is less likely to be performed or not performed than in the first specific state. A second specific state (normal mode) is set,
Specific transition determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main control unit 101) for executing transition determination for transition from the second specific state to the first specific state prepared,
The first specific process and the second specific process include transition determination by the specific transition determination means,
When the first specific process is executed as the transition judgment by the specific transition judging means, the specific transition result of shifting to the first specific state is more pronounced than when the second specific process is executed. The game machine according to feature dL5, which is characterized by a simple configuration.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature dL5.

Feature dL7. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, mode notification means (press by main controller 101) for executing mode notification of the operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode function to execute forward notification) and
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
As game states, there are a specific state (advantageous section) in which mode notification by the mode notification means can be performed, and a normal state in which mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be performed or is less likely to be performed than in the specific state. State (normal section) and are set,
Transition determination means (function for executing advantageous section transition lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing transition determination for transition from the normal state to the specific state;
As a lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, winning of a third result (33rd minor winning combination) can be established, and as the specific process by the specific processing means While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the privilege given by the privilege giving means rather than the third result Winning of the fourth result (first small combination to sixth small combination) with a large number of wins can be established, and the specific processing by the specific processing means is more disadvantageous for the player than the first specific processing. A special result (special role) is set in which the second specific process is executed or the specific process is not executed,
The transition determination means determines that the specific state is more advantageous when the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result different from the specific result (specific combination) than when the lottery result is a specific result (specific combination). Advantageous section to reach), and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the transition determination is performed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, while the second operation mode can be established. When operated by , a so-called push order role is provided in which a second result win with fewer benefits than the first result win can be established, and by shifting to a specific state, the push order of the push order role Since the mode notification is performed as the notification, it is possible to greatly vary the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of the mode notification, thereby realizing excellent game characteristics.

After that, as the lottery result by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the third result winning can be established, and the determination of transition to the specific state and the advantage of the specific state are set. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, it is possible to achieve the fourth result winning with more benefits than the third result winning. However, as the specific process, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed, or a special result in which the specific process is not executed is set, and the player can shift to the specific state. It is possible to add a very special game feature such as selecting the , or selecting the one with more benefits.

When the transition determination by the transition determination means results in a transition result, the transition to the specific state in which mode notification can be performed is performed. is likely to result in a transition to a particular state that is more advantageous than if it were executed as

Then, by utilizing the fact that the details of the specific process and the benefits that can be obtained differ depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the special result as described above, the user can obtain the second benefit by operating in the second operation mode at the time of winning the special result. However, it is also possible to play a game in which the transition to the specific state is not caused, and the transition to the specific state is not caused until the lottery result becomes the specific result.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the transition determination based on the special result, the transition determination is executed regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means, so that the transition to the specific state is performed while acquiring the second privilege as described above. It is possible to prevent people from performing actions such as avoiding Therefore, the fairness of the game can be favorably ensured.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dL1 to dL7 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is carried out at the time of the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dJ1 to dJ8, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dM group>
Feature dM1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in a special game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to run
As the special result, a first special result (special role A) and a second special result (special role B) different from the first special result are set,
The first operation mode (operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result, and the second A gaming machine characterized in that the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) for the special result is set to be the second operation mode for the first special result. .

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, and as a specific process related to the mode notification function While the first specifying process is executed, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specifying process is executed as the specifying process related to the mode notification function. A special result is set, and while the second privilege is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege, the first specific process is more advantageous to the player than the second specific process, so the special result In this case, it is novel that the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize a great playability.

Moreover, in the above configuration, a plurality of special results are provided, the first operation mode for the first special result is the second operation mode for the second special result, and the first operation mode for the second special result is the first special result. Since the result is set to be the second operation mode, even a player who continues to play the game in the first operation mode for the first special result can perform the first operation mode for the first special result. In addition to the benefit of the second special result, the player can enjoy the benefit of the second operation mode of the second special result. Also, it is possible for the player to enjoy not only the benefit of the second operation mode in the first special result, but also the benefit of the first operation mode in the second special result. Therefore, while ensuring fairness among players, it is possible to create novel gameplay using the above-mentioned special results.

Feature dM2. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the first specific notification corresponding to the first operation mode for the first special result (the order of pressing when winning a special role in normal mode or CZ mode notification effect) is executed by a predetermined notification means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, the first specific notification (normal 1st specific notification means (the AT mode flag is set in the process corresponding to the lottery result by the main controller 101) that executes the pressing order notification effect when winning a special role in the mode or CZ mode) by a predetermined notification means. A function to execute processing for outputting a push order notification command when winning a special combination A to C in a situation where there is no special combination, and a function to execute processing for performing a push order notification effect by the display control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature dM1.

According to the above configuration, even though the game is premised on a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and the operation is performed not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the player changes to the first operation mode. It is also possible to play a game in which the player is operated in the second special result and operated in the first operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features in one gaming machine, and since it is up to the player whether or not to follow the notification by the first specific notification means, when the special result is won, the first It is also possible for the player to select whether to play a game in which the operation is performed not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or whether to perform a game in which the operation is performed in the first operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dM3. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small combination) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
The mode notification means is capable of executing the mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result,
Characteristic dM2, characterized in that the notification mode of the first specific notification by the first specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are different so that the player can identify them. The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result winning is possible. There is a so-called pushing order role that allows the establishment of a second result award with fewer benefits than the above, and since the mode notification as the pushing order notification of the pushing order role is performed, it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode report. It is possible to realize excellent playability, such as being able to greatly vary the degree of play. In such a game, when a first specific notification for notifying a first operation mode of a special result is added to the gameplay, the first result winning of the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. Assuming that, similarly, from the relationship between the mode notification for notifying the operation mode of the stop operation means and the first specific notification, the second privilege on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed according to the first specific notification. Then, the player may misunderstand. In that regard, as in the above configuration, since the notification modes of the mode notification and the first specific notification are made different so that the player can identify them, when the operation is performed according to the first specific notification, the disadvantageous side Even when the first privilege is obtained, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable. By operating in the first operation mode as described above, it is possible to realize a game property in which the player is allowed to perform the first specific process on the advantageous side without any sense of discomfort.

Feature dM4. the first manipulation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
the first manipulation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
The first specific notification means includes means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the first special result; means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the result; and means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode; and means for executing the plurality of operation modes as the first operation mode for the second special result A gaming machine according to feature dM2 or feature dM3, further comprising means for executing a first specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the first operation mode for the first special result and the first operation mode for the second special result are each set to include a plurality of operation modes. As the first specific notification that sometimes notifies the first operation mode, each operation mode is set to be executed. Therefore, even if the first operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, It is possible to avoid an event in which the reported operation mode is biased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the first specific notification as compared with a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature dM5. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, the second specific notification corresponding to the second operation mode for the first special result (pressing order notification effect when winning a special role in AT mode) is executed by a predetermined notification means, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, a second specific notification (in AT mode) corresponding to the second operation mode for the second special result 2nd specific notification means for executing the pressing order notification effect at the time of winning a special role by a predetermined notification means (in the lottery result correspondence processing by the main control device 101, the special role A is set in a situation where the AT mode flag is set) ~C function of executing processing for outputting a push order notification command at the time of winning, function of executing processing for performing push order notification effect by the display control device 81) Feature dM1 to Feature dM4 The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the above configuration, even though the game is premised on a game in which a plurality of special results are provided and the operation is performed not only in the first operation mode but also in the second operation mode, when the first special result is won, the game is changed to the second operation mode. It is also possible to play a game in which the player is operated in the second special result, and the player is operated in the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a plurality of game features with one gaming machine, and since the player is free to decide whether or not to follow the notification by the second specific notification means, when the special result is won, the first It is also possible for the player to select whether to play a game in which the operation is performed not only in the operation mode but also in the second operation mode, or whether to perform a game in which the operation is performed in the second operation mode according to each special result. As a result, it is possible to preferably improve the interest in the game.

Feature dM6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the winning of the first result (first to sixth minor wins) can be established, while the stop When the operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second result (9th minor combination ~ 32nd small role) has been set as a result (push order bell) that can be established,
The mode notification means is capable of executing the mode notification for an operation mode including either the first operation mode or the second operation mode when a lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result,
Characteristic dM5 characterized in that the notification mode of the second specific notification by the second specific notification means and the notification mode of the mode notification by the mode notification means are set so as to be difficult for the player to distinguish. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first result winning can be established, and when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first result winning is possible. There is a so-called pushing order role that allows the establishment of a second result award with fewer benefits than the above, and since the mode notification as the pushing order notification of the pushing order role is performed, it is advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the mode report. It is possible to realize excellent playability, such as being able to greatly vary the degree of play. In such a game, when a second specific notification for notifying a second operation mode of a special result is added to the game aspect, the winning of the first result on the advantageous side can be established when the operation is performed according to the mode notification. On the premise of , the second benefit on the advantageous side can be obtained even when the operation is performed in accordance with the second specific notification. Since the notification modes of the mode notification and the second specific notification are set so as to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between them, it is advantageous for the player to follow the notification without being particularly conscious of which notification it is. It becomes possible to perform operations on the other side.

Feature dM7. the second manipulation mode for the first special result includes a plurality of manipulation modes;
the second operation mode for the second special result includes a plurality of operation modes;
The second specific notification means executes a second specific notification corresponding to one of the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the first special result; means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the result; and means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to one operation mode among the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode; and means for executing the plurality of operation modes as the second operation mode for the second special result. A gaming machine according to feature dM5 or feature dM6, further comprising means for executing a second specific notification corresponding to another operation mode different from the one operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the second operation mode for the first special result and the second operation mode for the second special result are each set to include a plurality of operation modes. As the second specific notification that sometimes notifies the second operation mode, each operation mode is set to be executed. Therefore, even if the second operation mode includes a plurality of operation modes, It is possible to avoid an event in which the reported operation mode is biased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of the second specific notification as compared with a configuration in which the same operation mode is always notified.

Feature dM8. The first specific process and the lottery means executed by the specific process means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. The first specific process executed by the specific processing means when the lottery result is the second special result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the lottery by the lottery means The result is the first special result, and the second specific process executed by the specific processing means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are the At least one of the second special result and the second specific processing executed by the specific processing means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is a different process. 348, 349).

According to the above configuration, the contents of the specific processing to be executed depending on the operation mode are set differently between the first special result and the second special result. Depending on the special result that is won even if the game is operated in a mode, the benefits of the specific processing relating to the mode notification function by the mode notification means differ. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) of the operation mode to be executed is, while increasing attention to which special result it is. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

Feature dM9. The lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, and the first privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode and the lottery means The lottery result is the second special result, and the first privilege given by the privilege granting means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the lottery result by the lottery means. The first special result, wherein the second privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode and the lottery result by the lottery means are the second special result. As a result, at least one of the second privilege given by the privilege giving means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode is set to be a different privilege. The gaming machine according to any one of features dM1 to dM8, wherein

According to the above configuration, the first special result and the second special result are set so that different benefits are provided depending on the operation modes. Even if the game is operated in this mode, the benefits obtained will differ depending on the special results that are won. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to which special result the first operation mode (second operation mode) of the operation mode to be executed is, while increasing attention to which special result it is. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to aim at the interest improvement of a game suitably.

Feature dM10. Means for making it difficult for the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when special roles A to C are won during the AT mode by the main controller 101 A gaming machine according to any one of features dM1 to dM9, characterized in that it has a function of notifying an operation sequence but not notifying a special combination.

According to the above configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between the first special result and the second special result. It becomes impossible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property such as playing a game while predicting which result one's own operation corresponds to.

In particular, in configurations such as feature dM8 and feature dM9, in which specific processing and benefits are different depending on the special result, the player's profit can greatly differ depending on which result the operation corresponds to. It is possible to improve the fun of predicting to which one the operation of one's own corresponds.

Feature dM11. Means for allowing the player to identify whether the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result or the second special result (when special roles A to C are won before shifting to the AT mode by the main controller 101 is a function of notifying a special combination), the gaming machine according to any one of features dM1 to dM10.

According to the above configuration, the player can distinguish between the first special result and the second special result, and whether the operation mode being operated is the first operation mode when the first special result is won, It becomes possible to distinguish whether it is the second operation mode when the second special result is won. By doing so, the player can play the game while grasping which result the player's own operation corresponds to, and it is possible to make the player perform the operation more carefully.

In particular, in configurations such as feature dM8 and feature dM9, in which specific processing and benefits are different depending on the special result, the player's profit can greatly differ depending on which result the operation corresponds to. It is becoming more important to grasp which one the user's own operation corresponds to, and the significance of applying the above configuration is high.

Feature dM12. A third special result (special combination C) different from the first special result and the second special result is set as the special result,
The first operation mode (operation mode in which the left stop switch 42 is operated first) for the first special result is set to be the second operation mode for the second special result and the third special result. and the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the middle stop switch 43 is operated first) for the second special result is the second operation mode for the first special result and the third special result. and the first operation mode (the operation mode in which the right stop switch 44 is operated first) for the third special result is the second operation mode for the first special result and the second special result. is set to be
The stop operation means comprises a first stop operation means, a second stop operation means, and a third stop operation means,
The first operation mode for the first special result is to operate the first stop operation means for a specific number, and the first operation mode for the second special result is to operate the second stop operation means. Any one of features dM1 to dM11, wherein the operation is a specific number of operations, and the first operation mode for the third special result is operating the third stop operation means for the specific number of operations. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, as many special results as the number of stop operation means are provided, and which stop operation means is operated at a specific number is set as the first operation mode for each special result. By doing so, it is possible to predict which special result is won, and furthermore, in terms of game characteristics such as which operation mode to operate, only which stop operation means should be operated for a specific number. , the difficulty level of the novel game can be lowered, and many players can enjoy the game.

Incidentally, the inventions described in the features dM1 to dM12 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dJ1 to dJ8, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC12, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic dN group>
Feature dN1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A mode result (push order bell, special combination) is set in which the second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is granted by the granting means,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
Specific notification means for executing specific notification corresponding to the specific processing by the specific processing means (function for executing CZ effect setting processing at start and CZ effect setting processing at stop by display control device 81);
with
The specific notification means is
First specific notification means (for performing double eye effect or loose eye effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on the first opportunity (third stop operation) function to perform processing) and
Second specific notification means (at the time of cherry winning by the display control device 81) capable of executing specific notification corresponding to the specific process executed based on a second trigger (operation of the start lever 41) different from the first trigger A function that executes processing for performing a fixed effect),
with
A game machine, wherein notification control of the specific notification by the first specific notification means and notification control of the specific notification by the second specific notification means are different.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided depending on the operation mode is different, the specific processing regarding the mode notification of the operation mode is executed based on the first trigger and the second trigger. Since the notification control of the specific notification corresponding to the specific process is different depending on whether it is executed based on the specific notification, when the player predicts the result of the specific process from the specific notification, which trigger is based on It is possible to attract attention including whether it is a specific process, and to apply it to game characteristics such as the result or content of the specific process being different depending on the trigger, etc. It is possible to help.

Feature dN2. The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), as the first opportunity, the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, by the main controller 101 A function to execute AT lottery processing at the start);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, second specific processing means for executing the specific process before the stop operation means is operated as the second opportunity. (For example, a function of executing AT lottery processing at the time of stop by the main controller 101);
with
The first specific notification means executes the first specific notification as the specific notification at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result,
The second specific notification means executes the second specific notification as the specific notification before the specific timing (at the time of the first stop ON operation) in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result. The gaming machine according to feature dN1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in a game feature in which a privilege to be provided may differ depending on the operation mode, the specific process related to the mode notification of the operation mode is performed by the operation of the stop operation means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. If it is the second result, it is executed after the operation of the stop operation means, and if it is the first result, it is executed at a specific timing after the operation. When the specific notification is executed and the result is the second result, the second specific notification corresponding to the specific process is executed before the specific timing, so that the lottery result and the execution timing of the specific process are associated and the lottery is performed. To realize an interesting game property in which the hand to operate a stop operation means is forcefully applied so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player after predicting and grasping the execution timing of the specific processing from the result. can be done.

Feature dN3. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
In the first game, after the branch timing (first stop ON operation) when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode characterized by having means (a function of executing a process for performing a ten-pie effect by the display control device 81) for making notification corresponding to the specific process performed before the specific timing. The gaming machine according to feature dN2.

According to the above configuration, when the lottery result is the first result, the first privilege is granted when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, and the first specific process is performed as the specific process related to the mode notification function. While being executed, if the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second privilege is given, and the second specific process is executed as the specific process related to the mode notification function, resulting in the first result. In this case, the player is allowed to select between the advantageous side of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means (second operation mode) and the advantageous side of the mode notification function (first operation mode). It is possible to realize

In addition, in the first game in which the first specific notification is executed at a specific timing after the operation, the specific process is performed after the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode and before the specific timing. Since the notification corresponding to the specific process can be executed as early as possible, it is possible to understand whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode should be performed by the notification. You can prevent it from being stolen. That is, for example, if the result of the specific processing can be detected in advance, and if the detected result is not favorable to the player, the second specific processing is performed, but the second operation is performed so as to acquire the second privilege. Although it is conceivable that the player may operate in the mode, by causing the notification corresponding to the specific process to occur after the timing at which the first operation mode and the second operation mode diverge, as described above, it becomes difficult for the above action to be performed. . Therefore, it is possible to start the notification corresponding to the specific process in the first game from an early stage while ensuring the fairness of the game.

Feature dN4. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
In the second game, a branch timing when the operation of each of the stop operation means is performed to determine whether the operation mode is the first operation mode or the second operation mode in the case of the first game. (at the time of the first stop ON operation), means capable of executing notification corresponding to the specific processing (function of executing processing for performing a confirmation effect when the cherry is won by the display control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine according to feature dN2 or feature dN3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, by generating the notification corresponding to the specific process based on the second result at the branch timing between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, it is possible to grasp the result from the notification. However, as long as the first result can also be predicted, the selection of the operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode is correct and the result of the specific process is preferable for the player when the notification is made. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that whether or not the game has occurred is grasped by notification at the branch timing, and it is also possible to greatly enhance the performance toward the notification at the specific timing.

Feature dN5. the first result is the aspect result;
The specific processing means executes a first specific process as the specific process when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode. On the other hand, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, a second specific process that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first specific process is executed as the specific process, or the specific process is executed. is set not to
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a specific looping body (left reel 32L) among the looping bodies is specified at a specific position. The design is stopped, and the first design combination is stopped at the effective position,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (Cherry A to C), the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body, and the first pattern combination and the first pattern combination are placed at the effective position. By stopping a third pattern combination different from the second pattern combination, a privilege corresponding to the second result is granted by the privilege granting means,
Special notification means capable of executing special notification in a situation where the specific pattern stops at a specific position of the specific rotating body and the other rotating body does not stop A gaming machine according to any one of features dN2 to dN4, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for

When the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, it is determined from the stop result whether it is based on the second result or the first operation mode at the time of winning the first result. can't In such a configuration, the special notification may be performed when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific loop, so that the special notification corresponds to the specific processing based on the second result. It is not possible to determine whether it corresponds to the first specific process or the second specific process after that, and there are more choices in predicting the result when the special notification is performed. It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention of the special notification.

Feature dN6. The gaming machine according to feature dN5, wherein the special notification means executes notification corresponding to the result of the specific processing based on the second result as the special notification.

According to the above configuration, the specific processing is performed before the stop operation, and the notification corresponding to the result is executed as the special notification when the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific rotating body. By doing so, if the scene in which the special notification is performed is the first result, the situation is still the same as the stop result before the execution of the specific process, but the content of the special notification does not have a contradiction. It becomes possible to improve the reliability of the special notification.

Feature dN7. It is characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the second pattern combination stops at the effective position without the specific pattern stopping at the specific position of the specific circular body. The gaming machine according to dN5 or feature dN6.

According to the above configuration, when the first result is won, the specific pattern stops at the specific position of the specific orbiting body when operated in the first operation mode, but when the second operation mode is operated, the specific pattern stops. Since it does not stop, it is possible to strongly give the impression that the special notification was executed as a result of the selection of the operation mode. By doing so, it is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature dN8. The specific processing means is
a means capable of executing, as the specific process, a process for causing a specific event (AT mode transition win, CZ mode shift, AT add-on win, ceiling counter subtraction) to facilitate execution of mode notification by the mode notification means; ,
The specific process in the case of the first result is set so that the specific event is more likely to occur than the specific process in the case of the predetermined second result (for example, Cherry A). The gaming machine according to any one of features dN2 to dN7 characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the specific process is performed after the operation based on the first result, the specific event is more likely to occur than when the specific process is performed before the operation based on the second result. Therefore, in the case of the game in which the second result is won, it is overwhelmingly easier to execute the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process in the game, but the specific process leading to the specific event desired by the player is the first. As a result, the winning game is more likely to be executed. Therefore, by executing notification corresponding to the result of the specific process at a special timing in the game in which the specific process is performed even if the result is the first result, even the game that is the second result can be specified. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the notification corresponding to the result of processing.

Feature dN9. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the second result (normal replies A to C, chance A to C, cherry A to C, watermelon) is higher than the probability that the lottery result will be the first result. The gaming machine according to any one of features dN2 to dN8, characterized in that it is set to .

According to the above configuration, the appearance rate of the first result is lower than that of the second result. In the case of the result, inconvenience such as not being notified of the specific processing after it is executed is likely to occur. In this regard, by executing notification corresponding to the result of the specific process at a special timing in the game regardless of the result, the fact that the result is the first result can be confused with the second result. It is possible to prevent the content of the notification corresponding to the result of the specific process from being seen through due to the timing, and to favorably increase the degree of attention to the notification.

Feature dN10. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main control device 101) and,
with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special role), the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the start AT lottery process by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, second specific processing means (for example, main controller) for executing the specific process before the operation of the stop operation means 101 function to execute AT lottery processing at stop time);
with
A first specific notification means capable of executing a first specific notification corresponding to the specific process at a specific timing after the operation of the stop operation means in the first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. (a function of executing a process for performing a double eye effect or a loose eye effect by the display control device 81);
Before the specific timing in the second game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (at the time of the first stop ON operation), a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process can be executed. A game machine characterized by comprising a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a confirmation effect when a cherry is won by a display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided by the operation mode may differ, the specific processing related to the mode notification of the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since the process is executed after the operating means is operated, and in the case of the second result, it is executed after the stop operation means is operated, the result of the lottery is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the result of the lottery is determined. After grasping the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific processing based on the prediction, it is interesting that the hand that operates the stop operation means is forced so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player. Playability can be realized.

Then, in the case of the first result, a second specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific process is executed at a specific timing after the operation, and in the case of the second result, the specific process is performed before the specific timing. Since the third specific notification corresponding to the result of is executed, it is possible to predict which result is the second specific notification or the third specific notification, and the degree of attention to each specific notification is preferably increased. At the same time, it is possible to suitably realize the game property of operating the stop operation means after predicting the result.

Each configuration defined by the features dN1 to dN9 may be applied individually to the feature dN10, or may be applied in combination.

Feature dN11. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result, and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. (2) a privilege providing means (a function of executing medal payout processing and replay setting processing by the main control device 101) that provides a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means,
When the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the first privilege (payout of one medal) is granted by the privilege granting means. on the other hand,
When the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the effective position, and the privilege A special result (special winning combination) is set in which the granting means grants a second privilege (payout of 8 medals) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege,
Mode notification means for executing mode notification of the operation mode of the stop operation means by a predetermined notification means (for example, a function of performing push order notification by the instruction monitor 68 by the main control device 101);
Specific processing means for executing specific processing related to the mode notification function by the mode notification means (for example, a function for executing processing related to the instruction function, such as AT lottery processing at start time and AT lottery processing at stop time by main controller 101) and,
with
The specific processing means is
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (special combination), the first specific processing means for executing the specific process after the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the start AT lottery process by the main controller 101 function) and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (specific combination) different from the first result, second specific processing means (for example, main control device) for executing the specific process before operating the stop operation means 101 function to execute AT lottery processing at stop time);
with
A first specific notification corresponding to the specific process can be executed at a special timing (second stop ON operation) in a first game in which the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, and the lottery means The first specific notification means (display control A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a process for generating a tenpai effect by a device 81).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine gaming machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first privilege is provided, while the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode. A special result is set in which the second privilege is granted when the operation is performed, and the second privilege is more advantageous for the player than the first privilege, so when the special result occurs, the stop operation It is possible to change the degree of advantage depending on whether or not the mode notification of the operation mode of the means is executed, which contributes to increasing the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-described configuration, in the game feature in which the privilege provided by the operation mode may differ, the specific processing related to the mode notification of the operation mode is stopped when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result. Since the process is executed after the operating means is operated, and in the case of the second result, it is executed after the stop operation means is operated, the result of the lottery is associated with the execution timing of the specific process, and the result of the lottery is determined. After grasping the game to be predicted and the execution timing of the specific processing based on the prediction, it is interesting that the hand that operates the stop operation means is forced so that the result of the specific processing is advantageous to the player. Playability can be realized.

In addition, in the case of the first result in which the specific process is executed after the operation and in the case of the second result in which the specific process is executed before the operation, the result of the specific process is performed at a special timing in any game result. Since the first specific notification corresponding to .

Each configuration defined by the features dN1 to dN10 may be applied individually to the feature dN11, or may be applied in combination.

In addition, the inventions described in the features dN1 to dN11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features dN1 to dN10, features dA1 to dA22, features dB1 to dB8, features dC1 to dC8, features dD1 to dD10, features dE1 to dE11, features dF1 to dF8 , features dG1 to dG9, features dH1 to dH8, features dI1 to dI12, features dJ1 to dJ8, features dK1 to dK9, features dL1 to dL7, features dM1 to dM12, features dN1 to dN11 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the configuration of 1 individually, or to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature dA group to feature dN group to each configuration of the feature dA group to feature dN group described in detail above, It is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The following group of features eA to group of features eE are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the 5e embodiment, modifications, or combinations thereof.

<Characteristic eA group>
Feature eA1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining execution of a specific effect as a game effect using at least the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the corresponding effect execution means (the effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of performing the corresponding effect with the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
with
The corresponding effect execution means is
When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position visible through the display unit is the specific pattern, the first corresponding effect means (the first corresponding effect by the display control device 81) is executed as the corresponding effect. a function to execute a one-rotation production process);
Second corresponding effect means (display A function of executing the second rotation effect processing by the control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is awarded, a specific effect, which is a game effect using the revolving body, may be performed. The interest in the game is improved by the performance matching the game property.

Moreover, when the specific effect is performed, if the pattern stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern, the first corresponding effect is executed by the predetermined effect means, and a pattern different from the specific pattern is displayed at the specific position. Since the second corresponding performance is executed by the predetermined performance means when it is stopped, etc., the interest in the stop result of the revolving body is drawn from the stage before the specific performance, and the attention of the specific performance is drawn. It is possible to improve the degree of performance, for example, without performing complicated control such as changing the aspect of the specific effect depending on the stop result, it is possible to associate the stop win and the specific effect, It is possible to improve the performance effect of the specific performance with a relatively simple processing configuration.

Feature eA2. As the specific effect, after rotating the orbiting body, a corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the rotation ) is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. A gaming machine according to feature eA1, characterized by comprising a function of executing a first rotation operation in processing.

In carrying out the specific effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the specific effect by changing the mode of the specific effect depending on the stop position of the pattern in the previous state before the specific effect. If an attempt is made to vary the mode of the specific performance depending on the stop position of the picture in the image, there may be a problem that the processing load is extremely increased, such as by varying the rotation speed, acceleration, etc. of the revolving body depending on the stop position of the picture.

In that respect, in the above configuration, the corresponding pattern corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the specific effect is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, etc., and the pattern in the previous state is stopped or temporarily stopped. Regardless of the stop position, simply rotating the revolving body from a stopped or temporarily stopped state and stopping the same pattern or a corresponding pattern as it is, reduces the processing load in performing a specific effect. It is possible to suitably suppress the increase.

Feature eA3. When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) function to execute).

According to the above configuration, if the specific pattern is not stopped at the specific position, even the specific drive control that stops the rotation after rotation is restricted, thereby further suppressing an increase in the processing load for performing the specific effect. becomes possible.

Note that the above configuration may be expressed as follows.

"When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific pattern, the specific drive control is executed after the rotating body is rotated. If the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the state is a pattern different from the specific pattern, after rotating the rotating body, a specific means capable of limiting execution of the specific drive control (main It has a function of executing a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the control device 101".

Feature eA4. The drive control means is configured to execute the stop drive control of the revolving body based on the pattern position of the revolving body during revolving when the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. can be,
A specific number of patterns are attached to one of the looping bodies,
The specific drive control means stops or temporarily stops the revolving body at a timing when the revolving body rotates by a pattern corresponding to a predetermined multiple of the specific number after the specific effect is started. characterized in that a specific situation is generated in which a corresponding picture corresponding to a picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the state is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. The gaming machine according to feature eA2 or feature eA3.

As in the above configuration, when the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, after grasping the pattern position of the rotating rotating body, the stopping drive control of the rotating body is performed based on the pattern position. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid the pattern not corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means from stopping at the valid position, and the stop operation when stopping the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at the valid position. Even if the operation timing of the means is slightly deviated, it is possible to perform control (so-called slip control) to stop at the effective position.

On the other hand, since the specific motion is a rotation motion for the purpose of presentation, it can be stopped regardless of the result of the lottery. By performing the stop control at the timing, it is possible to stop the corresponding pattern that was stopped in the previous state as it is at that position, and the control load is overwhelming in anticipation of the effect. reduction effect can be expected.

In addition, when the specific pattern is not stopped at the specific position, the specific pattern which has not been stopped at the specific position is simply stopped again without using a complicated process of stopping again at the specific position. is not performed, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing the specific operation.

By limiting the "predetermined number of times" to an "integer multiple", it is possible to drive and control a situation in which the same pattern that was stopped at a specific position is stopped at the same specific position. There is, by limiting the "predetermined number of times" to "non-integer multiple", the situation where the pattern corresponding to the pattern that was stopped at a specific position etc. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which drive control can be performed so as to cause a situation such as stopping the same pattern as the pattern that has been drawn at a position corresponding to the same specific position.

Moreover, the above configuration can also be expressed as follows.

"The driving control means, when stopping the rotating body based on the operation of the stop operation means, executes the stop drive control of the rotating body based on the pattern position of the rotating body during rotation. and
The specific drive control means, when stopping or temporarily stopping the corresponding pattern at the specific position, moves the corresponding pattern to the specific position based on a cycle period (total step counter) required for the rotating body to make one revolution. It is a configuration that stops or temporarily stops at any time.”

Feature eA5. When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific pattern, the specific drive control may be executed a plurality of times in the specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature eA3 or feature eA4.

According to the above configuration, in the specific effect, the specific drive control for re-stopping the pattern that was stopped at the specific position can be executed a plurality of times, and each time the specific pattern is stopped, the joy is felt. The production effect is enhanced by making it feel like. On the other hand, if such specific drive control is executed a plurality of times even though the specific picture is not stopped at the specific position, the specific picture may be stopped. It will be a composition that cumulatively tastes the humiliation and regret that could not be done. In that respect, if the specific pattern is not stopped as in the feature eA3, the execution of the specific drive control is restricted, so the configuration in anticipation of the production effect by the specific action is rather counterproductive. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that would otherwise occur.

Feature eA6. When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting a second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) functions to execute),
When the specific effect ends, the revolving body is stopped or temporarily stopped,
When execution of the specific drive control is restricted by the specifying means, and when the revolving body stops or temporarily stops at the end of the specific effect, the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state. The gaming machine according to any one of features eA3 to eA5, wherein the corresponding pattern corresponding to is set so as not to stop or temporarily stop at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, the revolving body is stopped at the end of the specific effect, even though the specific drive control for re-stopping the specific pattern is restricted because the specific pattern is not stopped at the specific position. It is possible to avoid the reproduction of a stop roll in which a specific pattern is not stopped at a specific position in the case of equalizing.

Feature eA7. The gaming machine according to feature eA6, wherein the specific effect includes an action of rotating each rotating body in a direction opposite to when the start drive control is performed.

As in the above configuration, in the specific effect, by rotating the revolving body in the opposite direction to the normal direction, it becomes necessary to temporarily stop each revolving body when the specific effect ends. The significance of having the configuration of eA6 is enhanced.

Feature eA8. When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, an instruction notification means (operation instruction by the display control device 81) for executing an instruction notification to the effect that the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position by a predetermined notification means The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA7, characterized in that it has a function of executing an effect.

According to the above configuration, when the specific pattern is successfully stopped at the specific position according to the instruction notification, the first corresponding effect is executed in the specific effect, while when the instruction notification is not followed or the specific position If the specific pattern is not stopped during the second step, the second corresponding effect is executed in the specific effect. Further, in the feature eA3, when the specific pattern is successfully stopped at a specific position according to the instruction notification, specific drive control is executed to stop the specific pattern again at the specific position, while the instruction notification is not followed. If the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position or if it fails to stop the specific pattern at the specific position, execution of the specific drive control for re-stopping the specific pattern at the specific position is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to increasing motivation to play, for example, learning game skills so as to be able to operate as instructed by the instruction information with the goal of re-stopping the specific pattern.

Feature eA9. As the specific effect, after rotating the orbiting body, a corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the rotation ) is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. a function to perform the first rotation operation in the process);
When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) function) and
with
The execution determination means is configured so that, when an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player (AT mode set addition) occurs, the result of the execution determination corresponds to the execution of the specific effect,
The gaming machine according to any one of features eA3 to eA6, wherein the advantageous event occurs even when the specific drive control by the specific drive control means is restricted.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific drive control in the specific effect is restricted, an advantageous event occurs. effect can be obtained.

Feature eA10. Advantageous notification means for executing advantageous notification corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event (function for executing the first loop effect and the second loop effect by the display control device 81),
The gaming machine according to feature eA9, wherein the advantageous notification means can execute the advantageous notification when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the specific effect was started.

According to the above configuration, the advantageous notification of the occurrence of the advantageous event is executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the specific action was started. If the action itself of the revolving body in the specific effect is stopped just because it is not displayed, there is a possibility that the opportunity to execute the advantageous notification will be lost. In this respect, as described above, by limiting the specific drive control in the specific effect rather than restricting the movement of the revolving body itself in the specific effect, it is possible to ensure the execution opportunity of the advantageous notification.

Feature eA11. The identifying means performs rotational drive control to rotate the rotating body as a step prior to the specific drive control when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is a pattern different from the specific pattern. It is a configuration that can also limit the execution of
The advantageous notification means can execute the advantageous notification at a timing before the predetermined period elapses when the specific effect is restricted by the specifying means and when the specific effect is started. The gaming machine according to feature eA10, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, even in a configuration in which the movement of the revolving body in the specific effect is restricted, it is possible to secure the opportunity to perform the advantageous notification.

Feature eA12. When it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed and the specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, specific information beneficial to the player is presented, and the execution determination means Even if it is determined to execute the specific effect, if the specific pattern does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position, the specific information is not presented or the specific pattern stops at the specific position Alternatively, specific information presenting means for presenting the specific information in a manner that is less beneficial to the player than the specific information in the case of a temporary stop (processing for performing a special effect as a suggestion of the set value by the display control device 81) The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA11, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, even if it is decided to execute the specific effect, if the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position, the specific information is not presented, or if it stops, etc. Since the specific information is presented in a manner that is unlikely to be beneficial, when the specific pattern cannot be stopped at the specific position, the corresponding effect in the specific effect is the first corresponding effect. Instead, not only is the second corresponding effect performed or the specific drive control is not executed, but there is a substantial difference in the degree of advantage, such as whether or not the specific information is presented. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to increase the willingness to play, such as aiming to improve the game technique that makes it possible to stop a specific pattern at a specific position.

Feature eA13. The corresponding effect executing means executes the first corresponding effect by the first corresponding effect means for the revolving body whose pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern. and the second corresponding effect is executed by the second corresponding effect means for the revolving body in which the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is different from the specific pattern. The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA12, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position for each revolving body. The corresponding effect of is the second corresponding effect. By doing so, the specific effect becomes a more staged effect, and the effect of the effect is enhanced, and when even a part of the specific picture is stopped at the specific position succeeds, the corresponding effect can be performed. Since it becomes possible, it also becomes possible to contribute to increase of desire to play.

Feature eA14. When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern, the specific effect is executed, while the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern In the case of different patterns, a specifying means (a function of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) that can limit the execution of the specific effect is provided,
The specifying means causes the specific effect to be executed with respect to the revolving body whose pattern that is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specified position is the specified pattern, while the design that stops or temporarily stops at the specified position is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA13, characterized in that it is possible to restrict the execution of the specific effect for the looping body whose pattern is different from the specific pattern.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position for each revolving body. Execution of a specific effect is restricted. By doing so, the specific effect becomes a more staged effect, and the effect of the effect is enhanced, and when even a part of the specific picture is stopped at the specific position succeeds, the corresponding effect can be performed. Since it becomes possible, it also becomes possible to contribute to increase of desire to play.

Feature eA15. As the specific effect, after rotating the orbiting body, a corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the rotation ) is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. a function to perform the first rotation operation in the process);
When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) function) and
with
Control for starting the orbiting of each of the revolving bodies after the specific effect subject to the specific drive control, depending on whether or not execution of the specific drive control is restricted by the specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA14, characterized by having special means (a function of executing processing for random rotation by the main controller 101) capable of changing the mode.

When the specific drive control for stopping the specific pattern at the specific position is performed, and the starting drive control of the revolving body is performed to start the game after the specific action, a player who can visually recognize the specific pattern and a player who is not, There is a possibility that the fairness of the game will be impaired, for example, the degree of difficulty in performing the stop operation of the revolving body will be different. Therefore, for example, it may be necessary to devise ways to prevent rotation while a specific pattern combination is aligned by, for example, varying the rotation start timing of the circulating body.

However, there are cases where the execution of the specific drive control is restricted, and even if the specific effect is executed, when the next rotation starts, the control such as changing the rotation start timing as described above will be uniformly executed. If such a configuration is adopted, the smooth progress of the game will be hindered, and there is concern that the processing load will increase.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the specific effect, the specific means is provided that can change the control mode at the start of the next rotation depending on the presence or absence of the specific drive control, so that the above inconvenience is not caused. While doing so, it is possible to suitably obtain the production effect of the specific production.

Feature eA16. Means (random rotation by main controller 101) capable of executing specific start control for different timings of starting rotation of the first and second winding bodies different from the first winding body among the winding bodies. function to execute processing to perform),
The special means, when the specific drive control is executed in the specific effect, performs the specific start control when starting the circulation of each of the revolving bodies after the specific effect, When the specific drive control is not executed in the specific effect, the specific start control is not performed when starting the rotation of each of the revolving bodies after the specific effect, so that the specific effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature eA15, characterized in that it is possible to vary the control mode when each of the revolving bodies starts revolving afterward.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature eA15, and when specific drive control is executed in a specific effect, after the specific effect, specific start control is executed so that the timing of starting the orbiting of each orbiting body is different. On the other hand, if the specific drive control is not executed in the specific effect, the specific start control is not executed after the specific effect, thereby avoiding wasteful processing within a range that does not impair the fairness of the game. It becomes possible to omit it, and it becomes possible to preferably obtain the production effect using the specific production.

Feature eA17. The specific effect is a configuration in which the specific effect is terminated when a specific opportunity (loop non-winning) occurs,
When the specific drive control is executed in the specific effect and the specific start control is performed after the specific effect ends, a specific period is required from the first start of the lap to the last start of the lap. is set to
If the specific drive control is not performed in the specific effect, means for waiting for the specific action to end until the specific period elapses after the specific trigger occurs (the second rotation by the main controller 101 The gaming machine according to feature eA16, characterized by comprising a function of executing a process of waiting until the total step counter reaches "9000" in the control process).

According to the above configuration, the game progresses when the specific drive control is executed in the specific effect and the specific start control is performed, and when the specific drive control is not executed and the specific start control is not performed in the specific effect. It is possible to match the speed. In other words, whether or not the specific drive control is executed has no effect on the progress speed of the game, and by doing so, the game progresses too fast, and the specific drive control, which is exciting in the specific performance, makes the user feel annoyed. It is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming an undesired one.

Feature eA18. As the specific effect, after rotating the orbiting body, a corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the rotation ) is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. a function to perform the first rotation operation in the process);
When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) function) and
Means (second auxiliary display section 650) for lowering the visibility of the revolving body than when the specific drive control is executed when the specific drive control is not executed in the specific effect by the specific means. and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA17, wherein:

According to the above configuration, when the execution of the specific drive control is restricted, it becomes difficult to see the rotating body on which the specific drive control is supposed to be performed. become difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the performance effect caused by restricting the execution of the specific drive control.

Feature eA19. A display means (second auxiliary display unit 650) capable of executing a display effect so as to include the display unit,
The gaming machine according to feature eA18, wherein the second corresponding effect is executed by the second corresponding effect means on the display means, thereby reducing the visibility of the revolving body.

According to the above configuration, by executing the second corresponding effect on the display means, it becomes difficult to see the action of the revolving body rotating behind it. By doing so, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the second corresponding effect while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the decrease in the visibility of the looping body.

Feature eA20. As the specific effect, after rotating the orbiting body, a corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the rotation ) is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position or at a position corresponding to the specific position. a function to perform the first rotation operation in the process);
When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. If the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern, a specific means capable of limiting the execution of the specific drive control (a process of setting the second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) function) and
with
The specifying means permits the execution of the specific drive control when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific pattern, so that the specific effect is in the first specific mode. and when the picture pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is a picture pattern different from the specific picture pattern, the specific effect is controlled by limiting the execution of the specific drive control. The gaming machine according to any one of features eA1 to eA19, wherein the game is executed in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution of the specific drive control is restricted by the specifying means, it is clarified that the operation itself as the effect using the revolving body is executed by changing the mode of the specific effect. be. By doing so, it is unfortunate that the specific effect itself is not executed simply because the specific pattern cannot be stopped at the specific position even though the decision to execute the specific effect has been made. It is possible to prevent the result from being unfavorable, and it is possible to optimize the performance balance.

Feature eA21. The gaming machine according to feature eA20, wherein the first specific mode and the second specific mode are modes in which the rotational speed of the revolving body is different.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect of the feature eA20 with a relatively simple configuration such as varying the rotation speed.

Feature eA22. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main control device 101) for determining execution of a specific effect as a game effect using at least the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the corresponding effect execution means (the effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of performing the corresponding effect with the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) functions to perform) and
with
The corresponding effect execution means is
When the corresponding pattern corresponding to the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit is a specific pattern, a first corresponding effect is executed as the corresponding effect. A first corresponding effect means (a function of executing a first rotation effect process by the display control device 81),
Second corresponding effect means (display A function of executing the second rotation effect processing by the control device 81);
with
When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern, the specific effect is executed in a first specific mode, while the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position. is a pattern different from the specific pattern, the specific means for executing the specific effect in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode (the first rotation effect flag by the main controller 101 is A game machine characterized by comprising a function of executing a process of setting a second rotation effect flag.

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is awarded, a specific effect, which is a game effect using the revolving body, may be performed. The interest in the game is improved by the performance matching the game property.

Moreover, when the specific effect is performed, if the pattern stopped at the specific position is the specific pattern, the specific effect is executed in the first specific mode, and further, the first corresponding effect is performed by the predetermined effect means. When a pattern different from the specific pattern is stopped at a specific position, the specific performance is executed in a second specific mode, and further, a second corresponding performance is executed by a predetermined performance means. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the stopping result of the revolving body from the stage before the specific effect, and to improve the degree of attention of the specific effect.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in the features eA1 to eA21 can be applied individually to the feature eA22, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. is also possible.

Feature eA23. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Execution determination means (function for executing an additional loop lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining execution of a specific effect including a specific action as a game effect using at least the revolving body, based on a predetermined trigger. and,
When it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed, as the specific action, after rotating the revolving body, in a previous state before the rotation, a specific position visible through the display unit The corresponding pattern (first specific mode, second specific mode) corresponding to the pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at the specified position or at a position corresponding to the specified position. specific drive control means capable of executing specific drive control of the rotating body (function for executing the first rotation operation in the first rotation control process by the main controller 101);
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the corresponding effect execution means (the effect setting process by the display control device 81) capable of performing the corresponding effect with the predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) function) and
with
The corresponding effect execution means is
When the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific pattern, the first corresponding effect means (for the first rotating effect by the display control device 81) for executing the first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect function to perform processing) and
A second correspondence for executing a second corresponding effect different from the first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is a pattern different from the specific pattern. production means (function for executing the second rotation production process by the display control device 81);
with
When the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture, the specific drive control is executed, while the picture stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the previous state is the specific picture. A specifying means (processing for setting a second rotation effect flag instead of the first rotation effect flag by the main control device 101) for preventing the specific drive control from being executed when the pattern displayed is different from the specific pattern. A game machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a specific action that is a game effect using a revolving body may be performed, and further, when the specific action is performed, a predetermined Since a specific effect such as a corresponding effect corresponding to a specific action is performed by the effect means, the game is played with a effect that matches the game characteristics of the slot machine aiming to obtain a privilege using the revolving body. The interest of people will be improved.

Here, in performing the specific action, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the specific action by changing the mode of the specific action depending on the stop position of the pattern in the previous state before the specific action. If it is attempted to vary the specific action according to the stop position of the picture in the previous state, the rotation speed, acceleration, etc. of the circulator may be changed according to the stop position of the picture, etc., which may cause inconvenience such as an extremely increased processing load. .

In that regard, in the above configuration, the corresponding pattern that was stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position in the previous state before the specific action is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, regardless of the stop position of the pattern in the previous state. , simply by rotating the revolving body from a stopped or temporarily stopped state to stop the same pattern or a corresponding pattern as it is, the correspondence effect is changed to the first correspondence depending on the stop position of the pattern in the previous state. A performance or a second corresponding performance is provided, and furthermore, if the specific pattern is not stopped at the above-mentioned specific position, even a specific drive control is restricted to stop as it is after rotation, thereby ensuring the performance effect of the specific performance, It is possible to preferably suppress an increase in the processing load for performing the specific operation.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in features eA1 to eA22 can be individually applied to the above feature eA23, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. is also possible.

In addition, the inventions described in the features eA1 to eA23 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, any one configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, the features eB1 to eB9, the features eC1 to eC8, the features eD1 to eD11, and the features eE1 to eE7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic eB group>
Feature eB1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
Based on a predetermined trigger, a first instruction notification ( a first instruction notifying means (a function of executing the first operation instruction effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the first operation instruction effect;
When the first instruction notification is executed and the first specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, a first specific effect including at least a specific action (first rotation action) by the rotating body is executed. 1 specific effect means (a function of executing a first rotation control process by the main control device 101, a function of executing a first stop effect, a first start effect, a first loop effect, etc. by the display control device 81);
First limiting means for limiting execution of the first specific effect by the first specific effect means when the first instruction notification is executed and the first specific pattern does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position. (The function of executing the second rotation control process by the main control device 101, the function of executing the second stop effect, the second start effect, the second loop effect, etc. by the display control device 81);
Second instruction notification (second operation instruction effect) to stop a second specific pattern (second specific mode) different from the first specific pattern at the specific position (middle line L2) based on a predetermined trigger (a function of executing the first operation instruction effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing
When the second instruction notification is executed and the second specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, a second specific effect including at least a specific action (first rotation action) by the rotating body is executed. 2 specific effect means (a function of executing a first rotation control process by the main control device 101, a function of executing a third stop effect, a first start effect, a first loop effect, etc. by the display control device 81);
Second limiting means for limiting execution of the second specific effect by the second specific effect means when the second instruction notification is executed and the second specific pattern does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position. (The function of executing the second rotation control process by the main control device 101, the function of executing the second stop effect, the second start effect, the second loop effect, etc. by the display control device 81);
When the second instruction notification is executed and the first specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, a third specific performance including at least a specific action (restricted action) by the revolving body is executed. Effect means (a function of executing the first rotation control process by the main control device 101, a function of executing the fourth stop effect, the first start effect, the first loop effect, etc. by the display control device 81);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery When a first instruction notification or a second instruction notification for stopping or temporarily stopping a first specific pattern or a second specific pattern at a specific position is executed in a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided. Therefore, in addition to the gameplay of stopping the pattern combination corresponding to the lottery result and obtaining a privilege, the gameplay of aiming for the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern is added, and the game is diversified. is planned.

Moreover, when the first specific pattern is stopped at the specific position according to the first instruction notification, the first specific effect including the specific action by the revolving body is performed, and when the second specific pattern is stopped at the specific position according to the second instruction notification. , while a second specific effect including a specific action is performed, execution of the corresponding specific effect is restricted if the corresponding specific pattern cannot be stopped even when these instruction notifications are executed. Therefore, the success or failure of the player's own stop operation is notified by a specific effect including a specific action by the revolving body. Satisfaction can be provided.

However, it is conceivable that, for example, some players may mistakenly stop the first specific pattern instead of the second specific pattern despite the execution of the second instruction notification. However, the stop operation for stopping the first specific pattern is successful. In this case, since the player aims at the first specific pattern and stops the first specific pattern, when the first specific pattern stops at the specific position, the player rejoices that his operation has succeeded. It is considered to be a thing. In other words, when the first specific pattern is aimed at, the second instruction notification is already misunderstood as the first instruction notification, and when the first specific pattern stops, it is difficult to notice the misunderstanding. In this case, if the execution of the second specific performance is uniformly restricted just because the second specific pattern is not stopped, the misunderstanding is noticed through the fact that the second specific performance is not executed. As a result, there is concern that the player's desire to play will decrease.

Therefore, in such a case, unlike the scene where the second specific pattern could not be stopped even though the second specific pattern was simply aimed at, the third specific effect including the specific action is performed. As a result, it is possible to notify at least that the first specific pattern has been stopped, and the player's desire to play can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature eB2. It is set so that it is more advantageous for the player when the second specific pattern stops at the specific position than when the first specific pattern stops at the specific position (second operation instruction effect is executed when the 80% loop is won).

According to the above configuration, when the first specific pattern is stopped by mistake even though it was a chance to stop the second specific pattern on the advantageous side, the second specific effect is executed. is restricted, and a third specific effect including a specific action by the revolving body is executed. Therefore, the significance of sustaining the player's willingness to play by performing the third specific effect is enhanced.

Feature eB3. The drive control means includes a rotation information setting means (a function of executing processing for setting the turntable by the main control unit 101) for setting rotation information (ordinary turntable), and the set rotation information A configuration for executing drive control of the circulating body based on
When the first specific effect is performed by the first specific effect means, the predetermined rotation information (special rotary table) set by the rotation information setting means for the specific action and the third specific effect means The gaming machine according to feature eB1 or feature eB2, wherein predetermined rotation information set by the rotation information setting means is common to the specific action when a third specific effect is performed.

According to the above configuration, the specific action for the first specific effect when the first specific pattern is stopped based on the first instruction notification, and the first specific pattern is erroneously stopped based on the second instruction notification. Since the information for rotation set in the specific action for the third specific effect in the case of the third specific effect is shared, compared to the configuration in which separate information for rotation is set for both specific actions, the storage capacity is reduced. A significant reduction can be achieved.

Regarding the "predetermined information for rotation", specifically, for example, "a plurality of driving units are provided to drive one of the revolving bodies, and the predetermined information for rotation is the driving unit to be driven. and drive timing are associated with each other."

Feature eB4. The mode of the specific action (first rotating action) executed in the first specific effect and the mode of the specific action (limiting action) executed in the third specific effect are set to be different. The gaming machine according to any one of features eB1 to eB3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, even when the first specific pattern is similarly stopped at the specific position, the first specific effect in the normal case where the first instruction notification is executed and stopped, and the second instruction In the third specific performance in the case of the irregular case where the notification is executed and stopped, although the specific action is executed in both cases, the mode of the specific action is different, so the first specific pattern is erroneously stopped. A difference can be provided between the stoppage of the regular first specific pattern and the stoppage of the irregular first specific pattern, as long as it does not reverse the fact that it has happened. Therefore, it is possible to secure the performance balance while suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Feature eB5. The drive control means includes rotation information setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the rotation table by the main controller 101) for setting predetermined rotation information (ordinary rotation table). A configuration for executing drive control of the circulator based on information,
When the first specific effect is performed by the first specific effect means, the predetermined rotation information (special rotary table) set by the rotation information setting means for the specific action and the third specific effect means When the third specific effect is performed, predetermined rotation information set by the rotation information setting means is common to the specific action,
In the specific action when the first specific effect is performed by the first specific effect means, specific control (a function of executing a stop command process by the main controller 101) that causes a change in the action of the revolving body at a predetermined timing ) is executed, while in the specific action in the case where the third specific effect is performed by the third specific effect means, the specific control is not executed at the predetermined timing, so that the specific control is not executed in the first specific effect Characteristic eB4 characterized in that the mode of the specific action (first rotation action) and the mode of the specific action (restricted action) executed in the third specific effect are set to be different The game machine described.

The above configuration is a specific configuration when the feature eB4 is applied to the feature eB3, and is a relatively simple configuration such as whether or not the specific control is executed during the specific operation while sharing the rotation information. , it is possible to set the difference between the two specific actions.

Feature eB6. Feature eB1 to feature characterized in that the mode of the specific action executed in the first specific effect and the mode of the specific action executed in the third specific effect are set in common. The gaming machine according to any one of eB3.

According to the above configuration, similarly, when the first specific pattern is stopped at the specific position, the first specific effect in the normal case where the first instruction notification is executed and stopped, and the second instruction notification are executed. The third specific effect in the case of the irregularity stopped by the third specific effect, both of which execute the specific action, and the mode of the specific action is common, and the difference between the two specific effects is a different effect from the specific action. This is the difference in display performance. Because of this, the difference between the stopping of the regular first specific pattern and the stopping of the irregular first specific pattern is set to the extent that the erroneous stopping of the first specific pattern is not reversed. can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to secure the performance balance while suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Feature eB7. Equipped with a production means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a predetermined production,
When executing the first specific effect, the first specific effect means can execute a first corresponding effect (first stop effect, first loop effect, first start effect) in the effect means,
The second specific effect means is capable of executing a second corresponding effect (third stop effect, first loop effect, first start effect) in the effect means when executing the second specific effect,
The third specific effect means is capable of executing a third corresponding effect (fourth stop effect, second loop effect, second start effect) in the effect means when executing the third specific effect,
At least part of the first corresponding effect is set to be different from the second corresponding effect, and at least part of the first corresponding effect is set to be different from the third corresponding effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features eB1 to eB6, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, at least the first corresponding effect when the first specific pattern stops based on the first instruction notification and the second corresponding effect when the second specific pattern stops based on the second instruction notification. Partly different, and a first corresponding effect when the first specific pattern stops based on the first instruction notification and a third corresponding effect when the first specific pattern stops based on the second instruction notification Since at least a part is set to be different, even if a specific action is performed by the revolving body, each corresponding effect will be different, and the corresponding specific pattern will be stopped as instructed. It is possible to provide a difference between the effect in the case where the corresponding pattern is erroneously stopped and the effect in the case where the non-corresponding corresponding pattern is stopped in a range that does not cause the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the performance balance.

Feature eB8. The drive control means is configured to execute the stop drive control of the revolving body based on the pattern position of the revolving body during revolving when the revolving body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. can be,
When the specific action is to be executed, the drive control means causes the orbiting body to circulate, and then the corresponding pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at a predetermined position in a previous state before the start of the specific action, Again, a specific control means capable of stopping or temporarily stopping at the predetermined position (a function of executing a process of stopping at the timing of two rotations in the first rotation control process by the main controller 101),
Characteristic features eB1 to eB7, characterized in that the specific control means is configured to execute stop control of the revolving body regardless of the picture position of the corresponding picture when the corresponding picture is stopped at the predetermined position. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

As in the above configuration, when the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, after grasping the pattern position of the rotating rotating body, the stopping drive control of the rotating body is performed based on the pattern position. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid the pattern not corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means from stopping at the valid position, and the stop operation when stopping the pattern corresponding to the lottery result of the lottery means at the valid position. Even if the operation timing of the means is slightly deviated, it is possible to perform control (so-called slip control) to stop at the effective position.

On the other hand, since the specific motion is a rotation motion for the purpose of presentation, it can be stopped regardless of the result of the lottery. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate an overwhelming effect of reducing the control load in anticipation of the performance effect.

Feature eB9. When executing the specific action, the drive control means causes the corresponding pattern that is stopped or temporarily stopped at a predetermined position in a previous state before the start of the specific action to Again, a specific control means capable of stopping or temporarily stopping at the predetermined position (a function of executing a process of stopping at the timing of two rotations in the first rotation control process by the main controller 101),
When stopping the corresponding pattern at the predetermined position, the specific control means stops the corresponding pattern at the predetermined position based on the cycle period (total step counter) required for the rotating body to make one revolution. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features eB1 to eB8, characterized in that the game machine is temporarily stopped.

According to the above configuration, even if the first specific pattern is stopped at the specific position, and even if the second specific pattern is stopped at the specific position, the specific action is performed after the revolving body is circulated. , when re-stopping the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern, it is not necessary to grasp that the first specific pattern and the second specific pattern have reached the specific position, and it is necessary only for the revolving body to revolve. Just by stopping based on the lapse of the cycle period, the original corresponding pattern (first specific pattern or second specific pattern) will stop at a specific position, overwhelmingly reducing the processing load for performing a specific action. It becomes possible to

The inventions described in the features eB1 to eB9 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features eB1 to eB9, any one configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, the features eB1 to eB9, the features eC1 to eC8, the features eD1 to eD11, and the features eE1 to eE7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic eC group>
Feature eC1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining execution of a specific effect including at least a specific action by the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, a specific drive control means capable of executing drive control of the revolving body so as to perform the specific action (executing rotation effect processing by the main controller 101 function) and
In the specific action, specific control means ( A function of executing a reel stop command process at the timing of two revolutions by the main controller 101;
A control mode in the case where the specific control is executed in the specific action and in the case where the specific control is not executed in the specific action, and the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies is started after the specific action. A game machine characterized by having a different specifying means (a function of executing a process for random rotation by the main controller 101).

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a game machine such as a so-called slot machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of (1) is provided, a specific effect is performed including a specific action using a revolving body, and in the specific action, a specific pattern is placed at a specific position. In some cases, a specific control that causes a specific situation in which the combination stops or temporarily stops is executed. It is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the action.

However, in the case where a specific combination of symbols is stopped at a specific position in this way, and when the start driving control of the circular body is performed to start the game after the specific action, each circular body will remain with the specific combination of symbols. There is a possibility that the rotating body will rotate, and the level of difficulty in stopping the revolving body will be different between players who can visually recognize such a rotating state and players who cannot. may be damaged. Therefore, for example, it may be necessary to devise ways to prevent rotation while a specific pattern combination is aligned by, for example, varying the rotation start timing of the circulating body.

However, in the specific action in the above configuration, there is a possibility that the specific pattern combination will not be stopped, and even if the specific action is executed, the rotation start timing will be different as described above when the next rotation starts. If the configuration is such that the control is uniformly executed, the smooth progress of the game will be hindered, and there is concern that the processing load will increase.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the specific operation, a specific means is provided that can change the control mode at the start of the next rotation depending on whether or not the specific control for stopping the specific pattern combination is executed. Therefore, it is possible to take measures to secure the fairness of the game by stopping a specific combination of symbols while avoiding the above-mentioned inconveniences, and it is possible to suitably obtain the effect of the specific action. become able to.

Feature eC2. The specific control means executes the specific control in the specific action when the specific pattern combination is stopped at the specific position in the previous state before the start of the specific action, and the The gaming machine according to feature eC1, wherein the specific control is not executed in the specific action when the specific combination of symbols is not stopped at the specific position.

According to the above-described configuration, the stop roll in the previous state before the start of the specific action is simply stopped by the specific control, and there is no need to correct the positional deviation of the pattern of each circular body. Therefore, it is possible to greatly reduce the control load of the specific control and the specific action itself. On top of that, depending on the presence or absence of the specific control during the specific operation, the control mode at the start of the next rotation is made different, so overall unnecessary processing is omitted, and the control load can be greatly reduced. It is possible to anticipate.

Feature eC3. The specific drive control means is capable of executing drive control of the revolving body so that the specific action is performed based on the operation of the starting operation means,
The game according to feature eC2, wherein the specifying means differentiates a control mode when starting the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies based on the operation of the starting operation means that triggers the start of the specific action. machine.

According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the configuration of feature eC2 is a configuration that reduces the processing load of one game based on the operation of the starting operation means. By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid an increase in processing load due to concentration of processing in a configuration in which a normal game can also be executed following a specific action.

Feature eC4. When the specific control is executed in the specific action, the specific action ends with the specific pattern combination stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position in the specific control,
When the specific control is not executed in the specific action, the specific action is terminated in a state in which each of the revolving bodies is stopped or temporarily stopped so that the specific pattern combination does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position. The gaming machine according to any one of features eC1 to eC3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the specific control is executed, the specific action ends in a state such as a stop of the specific pattern combination, and when the specific control is not executed, the specific pattern combination is different. The specific action ends when the pattern combination is stopped or the like. Precisely because of this kind of configuration, when it is attempted to start rotating each orbiting body after a specific action, it is likely that each orbiting body will rotate in a state in which a specific pattern combination is complete. When each orbiting body does not rotate when the combination is complete, and it is necessary to perform control such as differentiating the rotation start timing of each orbiting body after a specific operation can occur.

Feature eC5. The gaming machine according to any one of characteristics eC1 to eC4, wherein the specific action includes an action of rotating each orbiting body in a direction opposite to when the start drive control is performed.

As in the above configuration, by rotating the rotating body in the direction opposite to the normal direction in the specific operation, it becomes necessary to temporarily stop each rotating body at the end of the specific operation. The significance of having a configuration of eC1 is enhanced.

Feature eC6. Means (random rotation by main controller 101) capable of executing specific start control for differentiating timings for starting rotation of the first winding body and the second winding body different from the first winding body among the winding bodies. function to execute processing to perform),
When the specific control is executed in the specific action, the specifying means performs the specific start control when starting the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies after the specific action. If the specific control is not executed in the action, the specific start control is not performed when starting the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies after the specific action, so that after the specific action, The gaming machine according to any one of features eC1 to eC5, wherein a control mode for starting the rotation of each of the revolving bodies can be made different.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the characteristic eC1, and when a specific pattern combination is stopped in a specific action, after the specific action, the timing of starting the circulation of each orbiting body is different. Specific start While the control is executed so as not to circulate with the specific pattern combination complete, if the specific pattern combination is not stopped in the specific action, the specific start control is not executed after the specific action. By doing so, it is possible to omit useless processing within a range that does not impair the fairness of the game, and it is possible to preferably obtain the production effect using the specific action.

Feature eC7. The specific action is configured to end when a specific trigger occurs,
When the specific control is executed in the specific action and the specific start control is performed after the specific action ends, a specific period is required from the first start of the cycle to the last start of the cycle. is set and
If the specific control is not performed in the specific action, means for waiting for the specific action to end until the specific period elapses after the specific trigger occurs (the second rotation control by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature eC6, characterized in that it has a function of executing a process of waiting until the total step counter reaches "9000" in the process.

According to the above configuration, the progress speed of the game can be changed depending on whether the specific control is executed in the specific action and the specific start control is performed or when the specific control is not performed and the specific start control is not performed in the specific action. It is possible to match. In other words, the progress speed of the game is not affected by whether or not the specific control is executed, and by doing so, the game progresses too fast, and the specific control that is exciting in the performance of the specific action makes the user feel annoying. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Feature eC8. When the specific control is executed in the specific action, the player performs a specific game operation (operation of the start lever 41) in the specific action, thereby shortening the execution period of the specific action. When the specific control is not executed in the specific action, the execution period of the specific action is not shortened even if the specific game operation is performed by the player in the specific action, or when the specific control is executed A period shorter than the shortened period is shortened (in the first rotation operation, the first rotation operation ends before the total step counter reaches "8000" due to the operation of the start lever 41, while in the limit operation, the start The gaming machine according to any one of features eC1 to eC7, wherein even if the lever 41 is operated, the limited operation is not terminated until the total step counter reaches "9000").

As in the above configuration, by performing a specific game action on the premise that the specific control is performed, the execution period of the specific action can be shortened. By using psychology, it is possible to favorably increase the expectation that the specific control will be performed.

The inventions described in the features eC1 to eC8 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features eC1 to eC8, any one configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, the features eB1 to eB9, the features eC1 to eC8, the features eD1 to eD11, and the features eE1 to eE7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature eD group>
Feature eD1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
production means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a predetermined production;
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining execution of a specific effect including at least a specific action by the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, a specific drive control means capable of executing drive control of the revolving body so as to perform the specific action (executing rotation effect processing by the main controller 101 function) and
A specific grasping means for grasping the occurrence of a specific event as an abnormality of the game machine (a function of executing a process of setting a door open flag, a power failure flag, and an error flag by the main control device 101);
When the occurrence of the specific event is not grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means decides to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed in a first specific mode. 1 means (a function of executing a process of rotating in the first rotating motion when the door open flag, power failure flag, or error flag by the main controller 101 is not set);
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means decides to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode. A second means to be executed (a function of executing a process of performing a rotation operation in the second rotation operation when the door open flag, power failure flag, or error flag is set by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a specific action using a revolving body is included, but a specific effect is performed, so the slot machine aims to acquire a privilege using the revolving body. The amusement of the game is improved by the production matching the game property.

Moreover, in the above configuration, if a specific event such as an abnormal state of the gaming machine occurs after the decision to execute the specific effect occurs, the specific action is the case where the specific event does not occur. is set to be executed in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, for example, an inspection is performed by a manager of the game hall. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotating body may be displaced due to, for example, touching the rotating body during the inspection. Therefore, if the specific action in the specific performance is to be executed as it is after returning, the specific action is executed with the deviation occurring, and it is necessary to prepare complicated control to eliminate the deviation. On the other hand, if the execution of the specific effect itself is restricted despite the fact that the specific effect has been decided to be executed, even if it is a decision not to execute the effect, the player There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the profit obtained by the specific effect has disappeared, and there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease significantly.

Therefore, in the above-described configuration, when a specific event such as an abnormality of the gaming machine occurs after the execution of the specific effect is determined, the specific effect mode is changed, so that the execution of the specific effect itself is restricted. It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the fact that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game using the specific effect.

Feature eD2. When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution effect means capable of performing the execution effect corresponding to the execution of the specific effect (the display control device 81 performs the first stop effect function to execute processing for
The second means executes the specific effect in the second specific mode when the specific grasping means grasps the occurrence of the specific event after the execution effect is executed by the execution effect means. The gaming machine according to feature eD1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, the player knows that the specific effect will be executed by the execution effect, and when the specific event occurs after such a situation, the specific effect is not the first specific mode but the second specific mode. By executing the mode, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as misunderstanding that the profit from the specific performance has disappeared.

Feature eD3. When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, the execution effect means capable of performing the execution effect corresponding to the execution of the specific effect (the display control device 81 performs the first stop effect function to execute processing for
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means decides to execute the specific effect and before the execution effect is executed by the execution effect means, the specific effect Third means that can limit the execution of (If a specific event occurs before the first stop effect is executed, only a loop lottery and an accompanying addition are performed, and these rotating effects are not executed. a function that executes processing to
The gaming machine according to feature eD1 or feature eD2, comprising:

In the above configuration, when the specific event occurs before the player recognizes that the specific effect will be executed by the execution effect, the execution of the specific effect itself is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the chances that the specific effect is executed in the second specific mode and cause discomfort in the effect, and to optimize the effect balance.

Feature eD4. The execution effect means, when it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed, and when the specific pattern stops or temporarily stops at a specific position which is a position visible through the display unit, the execution While the performance is executed, even if it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific performance is to be executed, the execution performance is executed if the specific pattern does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position. The gaming machine according to feature eD2 or feature eD3, wherein the execution effect is executed in a mode different from the mode of the execution effect when the specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position.

According to the above configuration, even if it is decided to execute the specific effect, the execution effect is not executed unless the specific pattern is stopped at the specific position, or the mode is different from the case where it is stopped. The execution effect will be executed at . In other words, when the specific pattern is successfully stopped at the specific position, the normal execution effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player has won that the specific effect is performed by the player's own operation, and it is possible to arouse the desire to play the game. However, even though such an execution effect has been performed, if the specific effect itself is not executed due to the occurrence of a specific event, the execution effect is executed only by the decision of the game machine side. More than that, there is concern about a further decline in the desire to play. In this regard, by adopting a configuration that does not limit the specific effect itself, as in the feature eD1, it is possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play while improving the interest in the game.

Feature eD5. When it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed, a corresponding effect execution means for executing a corresponding effect corresponding to the specific action by a predetermined notification means (execution of rotation effect processing by the display control device 81, etc. function),
The corresponding effect executing means performs at least a first corresponding effect (for example, a first loop effect and a first start effect) and a second corresponding effect (for example, a second loop effect and a second start effect) different from the first corresponding effect. executable as the corresponding effect,
The first means performs the first corresponding effect by the corresponding effect executing means when the specific effect is executed in the first specific mode,
The second means causes the second corresponding effect to be performed by the corresponding effect executing means when the specific effect is executed in the second specific mode,
The corresponding effect executing means performs the second corresponding effect even if the occurrence of the specific event is not grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect. , the game according to any one of features eD1 to eD4, wherein the specific effect is executed in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific event occurs, the corresponding effect is not the first corresponding effect but the second corresponding effect is executed. It is possible to make it difficult to give a sense of incongruity that the performance has been switched.

Feature eD6. The specific drive control means controls the rotating body so as to perform, as the specific actions, a first action to rotate the rotating body and a second action to stop or temporarily stop the rotating rotating body. It is a configuration that executes the drive control of
The first means performs the specific action in the specific effect as the first specific mode in which the first action and the second action are performed,
The second means is characterized in that the specific action in the specific effect is performed as the second specific mode in which the first action is performed but the second action is not performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD5.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first action in which the orbiting body rotates and the second action in which the orbiting body stops are performed as the specific action, when the specific event occurs, the first action is executed but the second action is performed. Action will not be executed. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which making a predetermined pattern appear as the second action when the orbiting body is stopped, position information of the pattern can be obtained by a specific event when making the predetermined pattern appear. The limited range of the specific action is minimized while preventing inconvenience such as an increase in the processing load due to the unknown, etc., and the occurrence of the specific event causes the specific effect to be performed in the second specific mode. It is possible to preferably expect the production effect of the specific production even when the specific production is performed.

Feature eD7. The execution determination means is configured to be able to determine to execute the specific effect when an advantageous event (AT mode set addition) that is advantageous to the player occurs,
When the specific effect is executed in the first specific mode by the first means, the advantageous event occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD6, wherein the advantageous event occurs even when the second means causes the specific effect to be executed in the second specific mode. .

According to the above configuration, even if the mode of the specific effect changes from the first specific mode to the second specific mode due to the occurrence of the specific event, the advantageous event occurs. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience of the game performance caused by the occurrence.

Feature eD8. Specific information that is beneficial to the player when it is determined by the execution determination means that the specific effect is to be executed and when the specific pattern stops or temporarily stops at a specific position that is visible through the display unit. is presented, and the specific information is not presented if the specific pattern does not stop or temporarily stop at the specific position even if the execution determination means determines to execute the specific performance. Alternatively, specific information presenting means for presenting the specific information in a manner less beneficial to the player than the specific information when the specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position (suggestion of setting value by display control device 81 Equipped with a function to execute processing for performing special effects as
When the specific pattern is stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position, and the specific effect is performed in the second specific mode by the second means, the specific information is presented by the specific information presentation means. On the other hand, when the specific pattern is not stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position and the specific effect is performed in the second specific mode by the second means, the specific information presentation means performs the The gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD7, wherein specific information is not presented.

According to the above configuration, even if it is decided to execute the specific effect, if the specific pattern does not stop at the specific position, the specific information is not presented, or if it stops, etc. Receiving presentation of specific information by stopping a specific pattern at a specific position even when a specific event occurs in a configuration in which specific information is presented in a manner that is unlikely to be useful. The right is secured, and the specific information is presented even if the specific effect is executed as the second specific mode instead of the first specific mode, so the restriction mode of the specific effect is devised. In the configuration of feature eD1, it is possible to further enhance the effect of avoiding the player's desire to play.

Feature eD9. A front door (front door 12),
The gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD8, wherein the specific event includes an event that the front door is opened.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of a specific event.

Feature eD10. power grasping means for grasping a power-on state in which power is supplied to the game machine and a power-off state in which power is not supplied;
The gaming machine according to any one of features eD1 to eD9, wherein the specific event includes an event in which the power failure state is recognized by the power recognition means.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of a specific event.

Feature eD11. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
production means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a predetermined production;
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining execution of a specific effect including at least a specific action by the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, a specific drive control means capable of executing drive control of the revolving body so as to perform the specific action (executing rotation effect processing by the main controller 101 function) and
A specific grasping means for grasping the occurrence of a specific event (a function of executing a process of setting a door open flag, a power failure flag, and an error flag by the main controller 101);
When the occurrence of the specific event is not grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means decides to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is executed in a first specific mode. 1 means (a function of executing a process of rotating in the first rotating motion when the door open flag, power failure flag, or error flag by the main controller 101 is not set);
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific grasping means after the execution determination means decides to execute the specific effect, the specific effect is in a second specific mode different from the first specific mode. A second means to be executed (a function of executing a process of performing a rotation operation in the second rotation operation when the door open flag, power failure flag, or error flag is set by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a specific action using a revolving body is included, but a specific effect is performed, so the slot machine aims to acquire a privilege using the revolving body. The amusement of the game is improved by the production matching the game property.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when a specific event such as an abnormal state of the gaming machine occurs after the decision to execute the specific effect is made, the specific action is the first specific mode when the specific event does not occur. It is set to be executed in a second specific mode different from. When an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine, for example, an inspection is performed by a manager of the game hall. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotating body may be displaced due to, for example, touching the rotating body during the inspection. Therefore, if the specific action in the specific performance is to be executed as it is after returning, the specific action is executed with the deviation occurring, and it is necessary to prepare complicated control to eliminate the deviation. On the other hand, if the execution of the specific effect itself is restricted despite the fact that the specific effect has been decided to be executed, even if it is a decision not to execute the effect, the player There is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that the profit obtained by the specific effect has disappeared, and there is a concern that the player's motivation to play will decrease significantly.

Therefore, in the above-described configuration, when a specific event such as an abnormality of the gaming machine occurs after the execution of the specific effect is determined, the specific effect mode is changed, so that the execution of the specific effect itself is restricted. It is possible to prevent the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the fact that it is done. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game using the specific effect.

It should be noted that the technical ideas shown in features eD1 to eD10 can be applied individually to the feature eD11, or a part or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. is also possible.

The inventions described in the features eD1 to eD11 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

Note that for each configuration of the features eD1 to eD11, any one configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, the features eB1 to eB9, the features eC1 to eC8, the features eD1 to eD11, and the features eE1 to eE7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Feature eE group>
Feature eE1. a plurality of revolving bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
starting operation means (start lever 41) for performing a start operation for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. Drive control means to be executed (function for executing reel control processing by main controller 101);
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery for giving a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
A predetermined pattern corresponding to the predetermined result is displayed by the stop drive control at an effective position set at a position where the drawing result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. when the combination is stopped, privilege granting means (function for executing the medal payout process by the main controller 101) that grants a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means (a function of executing an additional loop lottery process by the main controller 101) for determining execution of a specific effect including at least a specific action by the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
When the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect, a first specific action (first rotating action) as the specific action and a second specific action in which specific control executed in the first specific action is restricted. a specific drive control means (a function of executing rotation effect processing by the main controller 101) capable of executing drive control of the rotating body so that one of a plurality of specific actions including (restricted action) is performed;
A specific grasping means for grasping the occurrence of a specific event (a function of executing a process of setting a door open flag, a power failure flag, and an error flag by the main controller 101);
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific grasping means while the first specific action is being performed by the specific drive control means, the first specific action being executed is regarded as the second specific action. A specifying means to be executed (a function of executing a process of switching from the first rotation operation to the second rotation operation based on the door open flag, the power failure flag, and the error flag by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the game is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the lottery for the game is performed, and when the pattern combination corresponding to the result of the lottery stops at the valid position based on the operation of the stop operation means, the lottery In a so-called slot machine game machine in which a privilege corresponding to the result of is provided, a specific action using a revolving body is included, but a specific effect is performed, so the slot machine aims to acquire a privilege using the revolving body. The amusement of the game is improved by the production matching the game property.

Moreover, in the above configuration, when the specific event occurs while the specific effect is being executed by the first specific action, the first specific action being executed is switched to the second specific action. The second specific action is an action in which the specific control executed in the first specific action is restricted. If so, the specific action itself is continued. By doing so, for example, compared to a configuration in which the specific action itself is stopped when a specific event such as stepping out of the revolving body occurs, the effect of the specific action can be maintained while the specific action can be performed. A configuration that does not require complicated control such as readjustment of a specific operation triggered by an event can be achieved. Therefore, it is possible to preferably obtain the effect of the specific action.

Feature eE2. The specific drive control means includes special grasping means (total step counter) capable of grasping special information corresponding to the number of processes executed or the elapsed period from the start of the first specific action or the second specific action, an operation mode of the first specific action or the second specific action can be set according to the special information grasped by the special grasping means;
When the occurrence of the specific event is grasped by the specific grasping means while the first specific action is being performed, and the first specific action being executed by the identifying means is executed as the second specific action, The gaming machine according to feature eE1, wherein the special information in the first specific action before the occurrence of the specific event is used to execute the second specific action after the occurrence of the specific event.

According to the above configuration, when switching from the first specific action to the second specific action, the second specific action is started from the beginning by using the special information corresponding to the number of processes and the period grasped by the special grasping means. Instead, it is executed from the middle of the second specific action. Therefore, it is possible to switch the specific action smoothly and comfortably.

Feature eE3. production means (auxiliary display unit 65) for executing a predetermined production;
When the result of the execution determination by the execution determination means is the result corresponding to executing the specific effect, the corresponding effect (first loop effect, first start effect, second loop effect, second loop effect, or second effect) corresponding to the specific action 2 start effect), a corresponding effect executing means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the display control device 81, etc.) capable of controlling the effect means so that the effect is performed;
with
When the first specific action being executed is executed as the second specific action by the specifying means, the corresponding effect being executed is executed as a corresponding effect corresponding to the second specific action. The gaming machine according to feature eE1 or feature eE2.

According to the above configuration, switching of the corresponding effect by the effect means is also performed in correspondence with the switching of the specific action. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being caused by switching only the specific motion of the looping body.

Feature eE4. The corresponding effect executing means executes a first corresponding effect (for example, a first loop effect or a first start effect) corresponding to the first specific action as the corresponding effect when the first specific action is performed. , when the second specific action is performed, at least a second corresponding effect (for example, a second loop effect or a second start effect) corresponding to the second specific action is executed as the corresponding effect,
When the first specific action being executed is executed as the second specific action by the specifying means, the first corresponding effect being executed is a third corresponding effect (third loop effect) different from the second corresponding effect , third start effect), the gaming machine according to feature eE3.

According to the above configuration, when switching from the first specific action to the second specific action, the corresponding effect is not switched from the first corresponding effect to the second corresponding effect, but from the first corresponding effect to the third corresponding effect. be able to switch. By doing so, it is possible to grasp the fact that the switching has occurred itself by the performance of the set of the second specific action and the third corresponding performance while avoiding giving a sense of incompatibility in the performance due to the switching. It becomes possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to easily identify when an event occurs.

Feature eE5. The gaming machine according to any one of features eE1 to eE4, wherein the specific control is control to stop a specific pattern at a specific position that is visible through the display unit.

In the above configuration, the specific control for stopping the specific picture at the specific position can be performed in the first specific action, while the specific control for stopping the specific picture at the specific position is not performed in the second specific action. there is With such a configuration, by switching from the first specific action to the second specific action when the specific event occurs, control for stopping the specific pattern at the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, even if the pattern position information of the circulating body cannot be grasped as a specific event, the second specific action is less likely to cause inconvenience, and the specific action can be switched with the specific event as a trigger. A more suitable effect can be expected.

Feature eE6. means for executing reacceleration processing of the orbiting body in orbit when the specific event occurs, or means for executing reacceleration processing of the orbiting body stopped due to the occurrence of the specific event; The gaming machine according to any one of features eE1 to eE5, wherein

In the above configuration, in which the orbiting body is re-accelerated when a specific event occurs, there is a high possibility that the specific operation being executed cannot be performed well, and at least the second specific control that does not include specific control is performed. By switching to the action, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to execute the specific action due to the specific event as much as possible.

Feature eE7. The second specific operation is characterized in that after starting the orbiting of the orbiting body and reaching the constant speed rotation, the constant speed rotation is maintained until the end of the second specific operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features eE1 to eE6.

As in the above configuration, if the second specific operation maintains the constant speed rotation until the end after reaching the constant speed rotation, for example, re-acceleration processing as in feature eE6 is performed. However, if the constant speed rotation is reached again, the constant speed is maintained, so that inconvenience is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enjoy the merit of switching to the second specific action when the specific event occurs in the middle of the specific action as in the feature eE1.

The inventions described in the features eE1 to eE7 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. An internal lottery is held at the slot machine, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated during rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. When the stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest in games, and in this respect there is still room for improvement."

In addition, for each configuration of the features eE1 to eE7, any one configuration of the features eA1 to eA23, the features eB1 to eB9, the features eC1 to eC8, the features eD1 to eD11, and the features eE1 to eE7 It is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in , and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

In addition, for each of the features aA group to aE group, feature bA group to feature bJ group, feature cA group to feature cH group, feature dA group to feature dN group, and feature eA group to feature eE group described in detail above, , Other features aA group to aE group, feature bA group to feature bJ group, feature cA group to feature cH group, feature dA group to feature dN group, and feature eA group to feature eE group It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
starting operation means for performing a start operation for starting orbiting each of the orbiting bodies;
a stop operation means for performing a stop operation for stopping the circulation of each of the orbiting bodies;
When the start operation means is operated, start drive control is executed to start the circulation of each of the circulation bodies, and when the stop operation means is operated, the stop drive control is executed to stop the circulation of the corresponding circulation body. drive control means for executing
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
execution determination means for determining execution of a specific effect as a game effect using at least the revolving body based on a predetermined trigger;
a corresponding effect execution means capable of performing a corresponding effect by a predetermined effect means when the execution determination means determines to execute the specific effect;
with
The corresponding effect execution means is
a first corresponding effect means for executing a first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at a specific position visible through the display unit is a specific pattern;
a second corresponding effect means for executing a second corresponding effect different from the first corresponding effect as the corresponding effect when the pattern stopped or temporarily stopped at the specific position is a pattern different from the specific pattern;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images